Benefits administration system and methods of use and doing business

ABSTRACT

An automated benefit administration system and methods of use and doing business. The full system includes a wide range of features including application of business rules to enrollment, eligibility, and maintenance data input, making of business decisions based on the specific data entered, and issuing of notices based on business rule discrepancies including notices to third parties when deemed appropriate. The full system also is secure while providing remote access, including through the Internet, limits access based on user hierarchy, allows user customization of various features including communications vehicles (e-mail, letter correspondence, or facsimile) and of the format of certain communications, provides automatic enrollment in Cobra without re-entry of beneficiary data, accomplishes various types of financial reconciliation, accommodates differing organizational structures and groupings of entities, provides business rule over-ride capability for certain users, and provides robust information about carriers and their services.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application claims priority through, and hereby incorporates by reference in its entirety, U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 60/526,961, filed Dec. 5, 2003, entitled Benefit Administration System and Methods of Use and Doing Business.

The following document is a copyrighted text. All copyrights are reserved as allowed by law.

BACKGROUND

The present invention relates to benefits administration systems and methods of use and doing business. The present invention also relates to automated systems for administering benefits.

In business and industry, benefits plans are common. They often include health care, savings or retirement plan, insurance, and other funding or services for employees. Administration of benefits has long presented a substantial challenge for business and industry.

One prior art automated system designed for administration of benefits has been known as the “Phoenix” system. The Phoenix system automated certain benefits administration tasks and included features such as:

-   -   a. enrollment of beneficiaries through a limited-access, private         computer network such as an business's internal computer         network;     -   b. automated but limited application of certain basic business         rules to inform the user, at the time of entry on-screen only,         of certain limited missing information such as a beneficiary's         address, birthdate dependents, or benefits plan choice;     -   c. automated reconciliation of payments provided they exactly         match the amount invoiced to the customer;     -   d. limited automation of physical letter generation such as         generation of a welcome letter to a new customer setting forth         little more than the effective date of initiation of plan         coverage for the customer;     -   e. automated maintenance of certain limited carrier data,         including certain carrier rates and rating areas;     -   f. limited automation of Cobra enrollment by re-keying data for         the Cobra enrollment into the system;     -   g. limited automation of open enrollment and re-qualification by         automated sending out of notices and issuance of failure to         re-qualify reports, allowing manual entry of termination if         desired by the administrator;     -   h. automated termination and issuance of termination notice to         the carrier upon first termination of a customer and thus well         prior to conclusion of the re-instatement option period; and     -   i. limited periodic reconciling of payments actually received         in-house by receipt at the system administrator's mailroom,         routing to the finance department for entry into the system; if         the payments matched exactly the amount of their respective         invoices, the finance department would initiate a program         through that would reconcile the cash received against the         invoice; non-matching payments would require substantial manual         involvement in the reconciliation process     -   j. The Phoenix system included numerous limitations and issues,         however, including:     -   k. limited carrier data such as not including data (only zip         codes and rates);     -   l. lack of automated creation of a Cobra record from information         already in the system for a given beneficiary;     -   m. with regard to issuance of notices for enrollment or         re-qualification, lacked ability select sub-groups (e.g., groups         under 5 employees) for issuance of notices only to them, and         also lacked automatic termination of groups that do not         re-qualify;     -   n. providing notice of termination of a group to a carrier prior         to expiration of a re-qualification period for the group         including Cobra members of the group;     -   o. lack of automatic changing of employee status upon change of         employee coverage (e.g., by changing from employee-only coverage         to employee and spouse coverage), along with lack of automated         corrected billing as a result of the change;     -   p. lack of automated reconciliation of cash upon closing of a         batch of inputted premium checks, and automatic reconciling of         premium notices with payments provided by multiple payments         (e.g., multiple checks providing payment for a particular         premium amount);     -   q. limited application of business rules to ensure correct data         entry and limiting of enrollment as allowed by the rules, and         relatedly, no ability to issue notices other than on-screen         notices of certain limited types of information that may be         missing;     -   r. limited ability to generate required notices, and limited or         no ability to send notices through differing media (e-mail,         mail, fax);     -   s. no ability to allow system access through remote or separate         networks, such as via the Internet;     -   t. no ability to reconcile payments that do not exactly match         invoice amounts, and no ability to issue notices based on         matching discrepancies; and     -   u. limited data handling capacity, requiring periodic purge data         to run the system.

BRIEF SUMMARY OF CERTAIN ASPECTS OF THE INVENTION

Certain embodiments of the benefits administration system may (i) apply rules to enrollment, eligibility, and/or group maintenance data input, preferably all such input, and (ii) make business rule decisions based on the specific data entered, preferably including automatic actions related to correct business rules as well as issuance of notices for business rule discrepancies. These capabilities can, in certain embodiments, include business rule over-rides based on user authority level.

For example, in the insurance industry, an enrollment application is required for enrollment into any insurance plan. Enrollment rules may pertain to the input of data from this application into the benefits administration system. An example of an enrollment rule may include inputting a Social Security number (SSN) that has been assigned to another member previously. In certain embodiments, the benefits administration system can produce a notification of a duplicate SSN and may not allow the completion of the member's enrollment utilizing the duplicate SSN.

Another example of an enrollment business rule is the entry of information for a new member who requests family health coverage but does not list any dependents on the new member's enrollment application in the system. In certain embodiments, the business rules within and automatically applied by benefits administration system can require the data entry of one spouse and at least one child in order to comply with family coverage. Without this dependent information, the system may refrain from allowing finalization of the enrollment. In certain embodiments, the system can then automatically designate the member's application as pending and generate one or more notices (such as letters) advising of the need for, or requesting, the missing information.

Eligibility rules may pertain to the specific business rules set up by the insurance companies. For example, to be eligible for a certain type of insurance, an employer group may require at least two employees; or in order for an employee to be eligible, the employee may have to work at least thirty hours per week. In certain embodiments, the benefits administration system may implement these types of specific rules.

For example, if a user seeks to enter an employer group with only one employee, in certain embodiments the system can thus refuse to finalize the enrollment unless another employee's information is entered. As another example, if user enters hours-work-per week for an employee less than the business rule of 30 hours, in certain embodiments, the system will not allow finalization of the enrollment. In certain embodiments, the system may accommodate exceptions such as when a user with a pre-determined authority level, such as a manager, desires to over-ride the eligibility business rule. In certain embodiments, the system can allow the exception based on pre-arranged authority levels within the system.

Group maintenance may pertain to enrollment/eligibility activities that occur after the finalization of a group's enrollment. One example may be the addition a newly hired employee to the employer group's plan. In certain embodiments, once the new employee application is received and data is entered, the system may apply one or more business rules for the waiting period for the new hire within the group within which the new hire is hired. Based on this comparison, the system may either assign a correct effective date or deny the enrollment because the employee has not properly satisfied the waiting period. In additional embodiments, if the employee is enrolled, the system may automatically issue an enrollment letter; or if denied, the system may automatically issue a denial letter.

Yet another group maintenance example may be the receipt of monthly insurance premium payments. In certain embodiments, the system may automatically issue an invoice outlining activity affecting the premium for a given period of time, such as the past month. Such activity may include adding a newly hired employee or dis-enrolling a terminated employee. In certain embodiments, the system may implement business rules to provide automatic reconciliation of the premium to the amount of an invoice.

In certain embodiments, the system may also be flexible enough to take into consideration activity that occurred after the creation of the invoice in reconciling the premium. For example, the monthly invoice to a given customer may total a particular amount. By the due date of the invoice, the employer may have sent notification of an employee disenrollment. The employer may have only sent a payment that deducts the premium for the disenrolled employee. In certain embodiments, the system can automatically reconcile the received payment against the invoice amount and the termination credit for the disenrolled employee.

In certain embodiments, the benefits administration system may implement varying authority levels for data entry and system operation. For example, the system may provide that (i) a data entry position may have authority to enter data but not to finalize enrollment even if all business rules are met; (ii) yet another position may have authority to finalize enrollment if all business rules have been satisfied; (iii) a supervisor may have authority to finalize enrollment with, as possible examples, minor premium shortages or non-eligibility-related missing enrollment information; (iv) managers may have authority to finalize enrollments with significant premium shortages or non-eligibility issues; and (v) a system administrator may have authority to over-ride any business rule.

Certain embodiments may also provide remote access through disparate networks, such as, for example, through the Internet, for enrollment, eligibility, or group maintenance data input. In certain embodiments, the system may then make business rule decisions based on the specific data entered. In certain embodiments, the system also may automatically perform actions related to the business rules. In certain embodiments, the system also may automatically issue notices, including on-line notice in certain embodiments, for business rule discrepancies. In certain embodiments, the system may include business rule over-rides based on the authority level of user.

In certain embodiments, the system can allow an external business customer to process enrollment, eligibility, or group maintenance via the Internet. For example, in the insurance industry, an enrollment application typically is required for enrollment into an insurance plan. In certain embodiments, the benefits administration system may allow this application to be entered remotely through a, preferably secure, Web site.

For example, an employer may request enrollment in a health insurance plan. In certain embodiments, the employer then may access the Web site provided by the system and enter the employer's current employees' demographic and health carrier information. The employer also may pay the first month's premium on-line through the Web site.

Preferably, the system prompts the on-line user for information. While the data is being entertained, in certain embodiments the system may compare the data to the business rules associated with each field. Once the input is completed properly, in certain embodiments the system may present an enrollment summary sheet summarizing enrollment information for the on-line user. For example, in certain embodiments implementing the a wage and tax form requirement for new group enrollments, the system may present the on-line user with the completed form and instructions to return the form to, for example, the insurance company for further processing. In certain embodiments, once the insurer approves enrollment, the system may automatically e-mail or otherwise forward an enrollment acceptance form to the user.

In certain embodiments, business rules remain identical whether for in-network or remote on-line transactions such as, for example, through the Internet.

Group maintenance may involve enrollment/eligibility activity occurring after the finalization of a group's enrollment. For example, if an employer or designated contact person is attempting to enroll a newly hired employee on-line, the employee is hired to work twenty hours per week, and the business rule set up for this particular group is that all employee's must work forty hours per week, in certain embodiments the system may dis-allow the finalization of the enrollment. In certain embodiments, the system may automatically issue a notice informing the group of the non-enrollment and, preferably, the reason(s) for the non-enrollment.

Another group maintenance activity can be employee or dependent disenrollments. In certain embodiments, the employer or designated person may access the appropriate group information on-line and enter the requested termination date. If the requested termination date complies with the business rule, in certain embodiments the system may immediately process the termination, preferably including the sending of a termination notice and COBRA information to the disenrolled employee, adjusting the applicable premium invoice, and notifying the appropriate insurance carrier. If the requested termination date is not within the pertinent business rules, in certain embodiments the system may calculate the termination date and display the date to the on-line user. If the user were to accept this date, in certain embodiments the system may complete the termination and, preferably, issue a notification to the user, such as by e-mail. If the user were to decline the system's proposed termination date, in certain embodiments the system may place the requested employee termination on hold and, preferably automatically, issue a notice of the situation to an appropriate representative.

In certain embodiments, the system may limit the capability to over-ride business rules to in-house personnel (e.g., the personnel of the entity that administers the system).

In certain embodiments, the system can provide a security application or process in order to control access to the system. In certain embodiments, the security framework includes a security information database as well as an administrator login capability. In certain embodiments, the system can allow the administrator to create users, modules, groups, applications, and assign user roles and access control lists (ACLs), etc. Preferably, the system significantly restricts access to the core administrative system.

In certain embodiments, the system generates an ACL for each user at the time the user logs into the system. Access to any resource in the core administrative system may be determined by the ACL, and the determination may be stored in, e.g., a user profile object, which may be stored into the session. A user can include a person working in any of the departments in a company, Internet users, or persons accessing an in-house system from an external location. In certain embodiments, individual user permissions take precedence over group permissions. In certain embodiments, even if the group permission is less restrictive than the user permission, the user permission overrides the group permission.

For example, the agent/broker of a large association group may want to allow the members of the association to enroll through the Internet but to also provide for agent/broker review of applications prior to actual enrollment. In certain embodiments, the system, through its security system, can allow such members to enroll through the Internet (with the application being processed through the enrollment/eligibility business rules), then route the completed application to the agent/broker (versus directly into the system after passing all the business rules), in order to allow the agent/broker to review the application. In certain embodiments, upon completion of such review and approval by the agent/broker, the system can automatically finalize the enrollment.

In certain embodiments, the benefits administration system may also provide the automatic generation of documents and other communications, customizable to the desires of the users. In this regard, the system may provide a flexible mail merge system for handling external business correspondence. In certain embodiments, the merge templates are basically RTF files with placeholders for dynamic data to be merged into them. In certain embodiments, the output is either a RTF file or a PostScript or a PDF document.

In certain embodiments, the system can also maintain a log of mail merge letters generated. The log information may include the template identification, a timestamp, the triggering application, and identification of the user generating the letter and to whom the letter is addressed (i.e., which group or member or agent). In certain embodiments, the templates are readily available, and the system may accommodate a virtually unlimited number of templates.

For example, when the agent/broker provides final approval for association member enrollment, in certain embodiments the system may issue enrollment approval and related correspondence. In certain embodiments, such correspondence or other documentation may be customized through the system to issue on the agent/broker's letterhead.

In certain embodiments, the system may provide for customizable work groups. Workgroups may define the broad categorization of a group of agents, internal working personnel, external working personnel, and mailing groups. In certain embodiments, the workgroup customization process includes creating a hierarchy of one or more parent entities and defining other workgroups under the parent(s).

In this event, a parent may be the highest in the hierarchy of a workgroup. Examples of parent work groups may include agent work groups or internal work groups. Examples of workgroups under the parent group may include groups of agents of differing authority levels within a given agent work group. In certain embodiments, further sub-groups or child groups may be established within the system. An example may include may include agents in a given geographical area or a customer group that has been enrolled in the system. In certain embodiments, the system includes the ability to exchange workgroup members or duplicate workgroup members in whole or in part.

In certain embodiments, the benefits administration system provides automatic but flexible account reconciliation. Cash reconciliation can provide a process of reconciling the cash receipts to individual invoices and reconciling the amount paid by the group. In certain embodiments, the system may provide a rule for reconciliation such as, for example:

-   -   a. determine if negative cash is available and reconcile it with         the positive cash (e.g., for NSF checks); and     -   b. identify the oldest unreconciled invoice and reconcile it         with the oldest cash.     -   c. The reconciliation process may include automatic review of         all invoices that have not been reconciled for a specific group         and reconciling the invoice that has the earliest date with the         cash received. It also may match the cash receipt with the         invoice amount.     -   d. In certain embodiments, the reconciliation process can be         started automatically when a cash receipt batch is closed to         reconcile cash received with invoices.     -   e. Other functions that may be automatically performed in cash         reconciliation may include one or more of the following:     -   f. Billed amounts and cash receipt: this reconciliation process         may reconcile an invoice that has not yet been reconciled for a         specific group, determine if the invoice is the earliest         unreconciled invoice for the specific group, and reconcile the         invoice with the cash received from the group/member;     -   g. Cash to negative cash: this process may reconcile negative         cash with the positive cash received from the group. This may         arise from receipt of a NSF (Non-Sufficient Funds) check after         the applicable group's invoice has been reconciled. Upon receipt         of notification of the NSF check, the NSF cash receipt entry may         be created in the system. Upon receipt of a replacement check         for the NSF check, the NSF check may be automatically reconciled         with the replacement check provided the amount of the         replacement check is the same as the amount of the NSF check.

Adjustments to cash: this process may include reconciling a cash receipt with the adjustment that may be available in the next invoice. For example, if the group has received the invoice for the next month and an employee has been terminated during the month but after the generation of invoice, the generated invoice may not identify this adjustment for the termed employees. The applicable group may deduct the adjustments for the terminated employee and forward the cash that does not match the original invoice. In certain embodiments, the system can automatically identify the discrepancy and adjust the cash receipt for the invoice with the termination adjustment taken in to account. In certain embodiments, the next invoice may identify the cash receipt and the adjustment for employee termination.

Adjustment to billed amounts: this process can identify previously billed invoices for the group provide adjustment as needed to the next invoice.

Billed amount to itself if no payment is due: this process can identify if the group has been terminated after the invoice for the group has been created. In certain embodiments, the system automatically creates an invoice for the terminated group and adjusts the amount due based on the previous invoice. In certain embodiments, the system issues a final invoice for the terminated group showing net amount due, if any, or refunded.

Adjustment to adjustment: this process may reconcile invoice adjustments against each other. For example, if a payment late fee accrues but is later waived, in certain embodiments the system may automatically adjust (eliminate) the late fee. Another may involve reinstatement of an employer group termination and associated charging of a reinstatement fee. If such a fee were to then be waived, in certain embodiments the system may automatically reconcile the waived fee.

Certain embodiments of the benefits administration system provide a substantially improved ability to handle much larger data sets and to handle data more efficiently. In addition, certain embodiments utilize an independent platform and portable programming language such as Java. Preferably, the system components are built using object oriented programming concepts. Preferably, these object-oriented components can be reused in other applications with similar requirements or extended further with additional features when and wherever required. Preferably, the system is developed using scalable J2EE standards.

In certain embodiments, the system may allow a given user to work with the system in differing roles or capacities. For example, a manager may seek to perform the role of data entry as well as that of a manager or authorizing entity. In certain embodiments, the system allows modification or addition of user roles as desired. In certain embodiments, the CAS (Core Administration System) system is, however, pre-configured for a basic set of predefined roles.

In certain embodiments, the benefits administration may further provide one or more of the following aspects:

-   -   a. selective issuance of notices to sub-groups meeting certain         criteria;     -   b. automated creation of a Cobra record from information in the         system for a given beneficiary;     -   c. automatic issuance of notice to a member prior to termination         of the re-qualification period;     -   d. automatic revision of employee status upon change of employee         coverage;     -   e. automatic issuance of notices when data is not entered         correctly or completely, including issuance of other than         on-screen notices to one or more system administrators or other         entity;     -   f. ability of a user to customize how the user may be provide         notices or correspondence, such as by e-mail, mail, or         facsimile; and     -   g. enhanced carrier data maintenance within the system.

The system may be utilized by a benefits provider as part of it business and operation. Alternatively, the system may be utilized by a service provider, such as for or in connection with remuneration provided to the service provider by customers. For example, user fees may be provided by the users of the system, such as benefits providers or employers.

The system may also be utilized by an employer or group of employers, and their employees, to provide automated benefits administration for the employer or group of employers.

In certain embodiments, all features identified above may be provided by the system. The system may thereby provide an automated benefits administration and method of use of the system and doing business in conjunction with it.

There are many other novel aspects and aspects of embodiments of the present invention. They will become apparent as the specification proceeds. In this regard, it is to be understood that the scope of the invention is not be determined by whether given subject matter addresses all or particular issues in the prior art noted above or provides all or particular features identified in this brief summary.

Benefit Partners Inc. BPI-Software Architecture Document Architectural Design Specification Document Document Id: BPI_CAS_ADS Version:<1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Sept 17^(th), 2001 Amit Ambardekar 1.0 Baseline Release Reviewers Date Name Position Sept 17^(th), 2001 Sakthivel K S PM Sept 17^(th), 2001 L Chandrasekar TL Sept 17^(th), 2001 Deivasigamani K TL Approver Date Name Position 17/Dec/2002 Sakthivel K S PM

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1 Purpose 4

2.1 Definitions, Acronyms and Abbreviations 4

1. Introduction

The Software Architecture Document will provide an overview of the entire “Software Architecture” that will be used to develop Web Interface Module for BPI.

1.1. Purpose

This document provides a comprehensive architectural overview of the system, using a number of different architectural views to depict different aspects of the system. It is intended to capture and convey the significant architectural decisions that have been made on the system.

1.2. Definitions, Acronyms and Abbreviations

Some of the common acronyms used in this document are as follows: Abbreviations Description EJB Enterprise Java Beans HTML Hypertext Markup Language J2EE Java 2 Enterprise Edition JMS Java Messaging Services JNDI Java Naming and Directory Interface JSP Java Server Pages MVC Model View Controller W3C World Wide Web Consortium XML Extensible Markup Language BPI Benefit Partners Inc

1.3. Overview

This Software Architecture Document, at high level, will contain:

-   -   a. Architectural representation of proposed system     -   b. Architectural goals     -   c. Software requirement     -   d. Software selection for the proposed system     -   e. Standards and methodologies that will be adopted for the         proposed system

2. Architectural Goals

These guidelines will lay a foundation for the design and implementation strategy, selection of development tools, application software, and testing tools. The basic goals of the architectural design are discussed below.

2.1. Portability

Java is a platform independent and portable language. Applications developed in Java are proven to be portable across popular platforms.

2.2. Distribution

The J2EE Standards will be adopted to develop the new application. J2EE standards demonstrate consistency of distributed applications that access various data sources.

2.3. Reusability

The components will be built using Object Oriented concepts. These object-oriented components can be reused in other applications with similar requirements or extended further with additional features when and wherever required.

2.4. Scalability

Applications developed using the J2EE Standards are proven to be scalable. Therefore, the system will be built in conformance with the J2EE Standards.

2.5. Performance

Identifying the latencies within the system and outside the system boundaries enables us to increase the performance of the application. Since most of the threading issues that lower the performance of an application are well handled within the Websphere application server, Websphere server's features and resources will be effectively utilized to achieve performance.

3. Architectural Representation of the Proposed System

The System will be developed based on the J2EE specification and follow the N-tier MVC architecture.

A tier is a logical partition of the separation of concerns in the system. Each tier is assigned its unique responsibility in the system.

J2EE specifications are multi tiered consisting of the Client Tier, Middle Tier (Presentation Layer, Business Layer, and Integration Layer), and the Data source. The J2EE architecture diagram is described below. (See Figure A-1)

3.1. Client Tier

This tier represents all devices or system clients accessing the system or the application. In this case, the client would be a web browser or other application.

3.2. Middle Tier

The middle tier can be classified into multiple logical layers depending upon the business requirements and programming model. Three basic classifications are discussed below.

3.2.1. Presentation Layer

This tier encapsulates all presentation logic required to service the clients that access the system. The presentation tier intercepts the client requests, provides single sign-on, session management and accesses business services, constructs the response, and delivers the response to the client. Servlets, JSP, HTML reside in this tier.

3.2.2. Business Layer

This tier provides the business services required by the application clients. The tier contains the business data and business logic. All business processing for the application is centralized into this tier. The enterprise bean components are the choice for implementing the business objects in the business tier.

3.2.3. Integration Layer

This tier is responsible for communicating with external resources and systems, such as data stores and legacy applications. The business tier is coupled with the integration tier whenever the business objects require data or services that reside in the resource tier. The components in this tier can use JDBC, J2EE connector technology, or some proprietary middleware to work with the resource tier.

3.3. Data Source

This is the tier that contains the database and external resources such as legacy systems, business-to-business (B2B) systems, and services, such as, credit card authorization and EFT.

3.4. Framework

The following figure depicts the interaction model of a typical Model View Controller or the JSP Model 2 Architecture that is adopted in the Framework. (See Figure A-2)

Here, the servlet acts as the controller and is in charge of processing the request and creating any objects of the beans used by the JSP. It also redirects, to the respective JSP, based on the Browser's request. There will be very minimal logic present in the JSP regarding the presentation. All the database access and program business logic will be processed within the bean.

There will be different beans for data source access (database, enterprise systems, queue, XML, etc.), error handling, access logging, and module wise application business logic processing. This clearly separates the presentation from the content and enables easy maintenance and scalability.

This model is the widely used and accepted model for application development in Java. This model is also adopted by Apache Struts framework for Java application development.

4. Software Selection for the Proposed System

This section provides an insight on the software selection for the various tiers depicted in this document.

4.1. Software Selection Component Software Name and Version Operating System Server/Client - Win NT/Win 2000 Browser IE 5.5 and above Client Side Scripting HTML 4.0, Java Script 1.2 Server Side Programming JSP 1.1, Java Servlets 2.2, JDK 1.3 Database Server DB2 UBD Version V 7.3 Web Server IBM HTTP Server V 1.3.19 Application Server Websphere Application Server Advanced Edition Version 4.0 Report Server Seagate Crystal Reports 8.5 Office Tools Microsoft Office 2000 (select Word 2000, Excel 2000 and Outlook 2000 and Access 2000), Post Script Printer, Adobe Acrobat 5.0 Servlet, Bean Visual Age 4.0 Development HTML, JSP, XML, etc. Dream Weaver 4.0 Testing JTest 4.5 Data Flow and Class UML Studio Design

4.2. API Versions API Name Version Remarks J2EE Specification 1.2 Supported by Websphere 4.0 EJB Specification 1.2 Supported by Websphere 4.0 JDK JDK 1.2.2 Supported by Websphere 4.0 Servlet Servlet 2.2 Supported by Websphere 4.0 JSP JSP 1.1 Supported by Websphere 4.0 HTTP HTTP/1.1 Stable W3C Specification

5. Standards and Methodologies

The standards and methodologies that will be followed for the application development are discussed below.

5.1. Design Document

Detailed design document will be prepared based on the scope of the application prior to the development. This document will contain the details on graphic user interface, navigation, class diagrams, data dictionary, field validation criteria, and program logic.

5.2. Bean Classification

The types of Java beans that will be used to perform different business logics will be decided during the design stage. The bean types will be classified based on the complexity of the business logic and the scalability.

5.3. Coding

A separate document will be prepared outlining the coding standards that will be adopted in the application development. The document will contain details on program naming conventions to be used while coding. All programs developed will follow this standard.

5.4. Testing

Test plan and test case documents will be prepared for unit and integration testing of the application. The test cases will be used to test the application modules and integration. JTest will be used for testing code construction (white-box testing), code functionality (black-box testing), and code integrity (regression testing).

5.5. Error Handling

All error messages and error codes for the application will be stored in the database. Run time errors will be logged to text files that will be generated periodically by the system. Input validations will occur in both the client tier and the middle tier. The input validation error messages captured in the client tier will be displayed using JavaScript alerts. The input validation error messages captured in the middle tier will be displayed in HTML format, on the same page on which the error has occurred, in a different color.

5.6. Page Design

A Page Design Guidelines document will be created by Mascon, and approved by BPI, prior to the development. All pages in the application will conform to the standards depicted in this document. This document will contain the specifications for fonts, layouts, images, and other relevant details.

5.7. Parameterization

Custom JSP tag libraries will be created for all initial values and parameters used in the application. JSP tag libraries define declarative, modular functionality that can be reused by any JSP page. Tag libraries reduce the necessity to embed large amounts of Java code in JSP pages by moving the functionality provided by the tags into tag implementation classes. In doing so, tag libraries make authoring JSP pages easier and modular.

6. System Architecture and Hardware Selection

This section provides the details of the system architecture with nodes, terminals and their placement within the respective zones.

6.1. Physical Architecture (See Figure A-3)

6.2. Hardware Selection # Server Base Current Configuration Software/Hardware 1 Database Intel Pentium Intel XEO 1. Windows 2000 Server Processor, 2 Processor    Advanced Server CPU, 1 CPU 2. IE 5.5 and above HD 104 GB, 2 GB HDD 34 GB 3. IBM DB2 UDB RAM, Raid 5 2 GB RAM    version 7.2.x CPU 2.4 Ghz. 2 Application Intel Pentium Intel XEO 1. Windows 2000 Server - Processor, CPU Processor    Advanced Server Intranet 1, HD 18 GB, 2 GB 1 CPU 2. IE 5.5 and above RAM HDD 200 GB 3. Websphere 2 GB RAM    Application Server CPU 2.4 Ghz.    Advanced Edition    Version 4.0 4. IBM DB2 UDB    version 7.2.x (For    WAS Repository) 5. IBM HTTP Server    1.3.19 6. Microsoft Office    2000 (select Word    2000, Excel 2000    and Outlook 2000    and Access 2000),    Post Script Printer,    Adobe Acrobat 5.0 3 Application Intel Pentium Not Available 1. Windows 2000 Server - Processor, CPU    Advanced Server Internet 1, HD 18 GB, 2 GB 2. IE 5.5 and RAM    Netscape 4.7 and    above 3. Websphere    Application Server    Advanced Edition    Version 4.0 4. IBM DB2 UDB    version 7.2.x (For    WAS Repository) 5. Microsoft Office    2000 (select Word    2000, Excel 2000    and Outlook 2000    and Access 2000),    Post Script Printer,    Adobe Acrobat 5.0 4 Report Server - Intel Pentium Intel Processor 1. Windows 2000 Crystal Reports Processor, CPU 1 CPU    Advanced Server 1, HD 18 GB, 2 GB HDD 17 GB 2. IE 5.5 and above RAM 2.3 GB RAM 3. Seagate Crystal CPU 1266 Mhz.    Reports 8.5 4. Microsoft Office    2000 (select Word    2000, Excel 2000    and Outlook 2000    and Access 2000),    Post Script Printer,    Adobe Acrobat 5.0 5. IIS for Crystal    reports 5 Web Server - Intel Pentium Not Available 1. Windows 2000 Internet Processor, CPU    Advanced Server 1, HD 18 GB, 2 GB 2. IE 5.5 and above RAM 3. IBM HTTP Server    1.3.19 4. Microsoft Office    2000 (select Word    2000, Excel 2000    and Outlook 2000    and Access 2000),    Post Script Printer,    Adobe Acrobat 5.0

7. Browser Client Application Limitations and Work Around Solutions

The limitations of the Web Browser (thin client) based application, when compared to thick clients, are as follows:

-   -   a. Input field masking, such as automatic date formatting and         phone number formatting, are not easily handled in this         environment. The thin client user interface is not as easy and         robust as the thick client user interface. A work around must be         designed to force the user to enter values in the required         format.     -   b. Due to the limitations of different browsers, a common         methodology will be adopted that will work for all indicated         browsers. This narrows down the user interface implementation         features in a browser.     -   c. Because of the lower level on interactivity, some actions         that are presented entirely on one screen in the thick client         may span multiple screens. Since each screen presentation         involves a round trip to the server, this will result in         slightly slower screen response when compared to the single         screen approach. This can be minimized with some re-design of         the user interface workflow, but overall, thin clients require         more “clicks” than thick clients.     -   d. Hot-keys validation scripts are cumbersome and take longer to         download. Thus, hot-key functionality will be limited.

PX2 User Manual Carrier Maintenance Version 1.0 July 31, 2002 Copyright ©2002 Benefit Partners, Inc

Contents Introduction 1-1 The Applications 1-1 Master Plan 2-1 Access 2-1 Pre-requisites 2-1 Application Functions 2-1 Line of Coverage 2-1 Plan Type 2-4 Benefit Level 2-7 Related Applications  2-10 Carrier Master 3-1 Access 3-1 Pre-requisites 3-1 Application Functions 3-1 Create Carrier Master 3-1 Search Carrier 3-5 Related Applications  3-11 Product Profile 4-1 Access 4-1 Pre-requisites 4-1 Application Functions 4-1 Create Product Profile 4-1 Search Product 4-7 Related Applications 4-9 Rate Administration 5-1 Access 5-1 Pre-requisites 5-1 Application Functions 5-2 Admin Fees 5-3 Admin Fees Search 5-6 Agent Fees 5-9 Agent Fees Search  5-12 Additional Fees  5-17 Additional Fees Search  5-19 Rate Differential  5-23 Rate Differential Search  5-25 Related Applications  5-30 Import Zip Codes 6-1 Access 6-1 Pre-requisites 6-1 Application Functions 6-1 Import Zip 6-1 Commit Import Zip Codes 6-5 Related Applications 6-8 Rate Files 7-1 Access 7-1 Pre-requisites 7-1 Application Functions 7-2 Import Rate Files 7-2 Export Rate Files 7-6 Related Applications 7-9 Plan Availability Files 8-1 Access 8-1 Pre-requisites 8-1 Application Functions 8-2 Import Plan Availability 8-2 Export Plan Availability 8-5 Related Applications 8-7

1 Introduction

Carrier Maintenance is the master module that encompasses the process of creating and maintaining all master information that is required for the PX2 System like Master Plan, Carrier Master, Product Profile, Rate Administration and Carrier Maintenance operations like import and export utilities.

The Applications

The above-mentioned processes are accomplished in several applications embedded into the Carrier Maintenance Module. These applications steer the tasks of creating, and maintaining master information for the PX2 entities, thereby helping achieve the goals of the Carrier Maintenance.

Master Plan—Master plan is to setup high-level information from a broad spectrum of coverages, plan and benefits offered by PacAdvantage. This includes line of coverage like Medical, Dental Vision and Chiropractic, plan type like HMO, PPO, POS, indemnity etc. and benefit level like Standard, Preferred Plus etc.

Carrier Master—Carrier Master is to setup information on the carriers. This provides demographic information about the carrier.

Product Profile—Product Profile is the product or the plan offered by each carrier based on the broad spectrum of master plan provided by PacAdvantage. The product includes wide range of benefits provide by the carriers. For example Blue Shield—HMO, American Specialty Health Plan etc. This also includes information about premium and enrollment data transmission profiles of each carrier for the specific plan.

Rate Administration—Rate administration is to administer various rate and fees to calculate the premium amount. These different fees structures are classified as admin fees, agent fees, additional fees and differential factor.

Carrier Maintenance Operations—Various utility operations are performed for the maintenance of the Carrier Master Module. These utilities include import and export of data into or from the PX2 System. Various Carrier Maintenance operations are.

Import Zip Codes—is to upload all zip codes in the state of California or USA. This information would be used for rates calculation based on employee's zip code of residence.

Import and Export Rates—is to upload raw rates for all the plans and export the rates in the given formats.

Import and Export Plan Availability—is to upload the Plans available for the specific carrier in the specific service area/county/zip and export the plans available for the specific carrier in the specific Service area/county/zip in a given format.

2 Master Plan

MPlan (Master Plan) is to setup basic information like Line of Coverage, Plan Type, Benefit Level offered through PACAdvantage. All Benefit Level, Plan type and the line of coverage offered by PACAdvantage is available in the Master Plan.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Carrier Maintenance->Master Plan->Line of Coverage.     -   Carrier Maintenance->Master Plan->Plan Type.     -   Carrier Maintenance->Master Plan->Benefit Level.

Pre-requisites.

There are no pre-requisites for using this application.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Line of Coverage—to create, edit and delete Line of Coverage.     -   Plan Type—to create, edit and delete Plan Type.     -   Benefit Level—to create, edit and delete Benefit Level.

Line of Coverage

The line of coverage screen is to enter the details of line of coverage (LOC). The screen provides functionality to add, modify, view, and delete line of coverage.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of a line of coverage are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Carrier         Maintenance. Select Master Plan and then Line of Coverage. (See         Figure B-1)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective field, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. (See Figure B-2)     -   Step-3: Click Add button to have a temporary storage.     -   Step-4: Also Edit button can be clicked for any modifications.     -   Step-5: Change the contents to be modified and click Update.         (See Figure B-3)     -   Step-6: Click Save button to save the contents.

Fields Explanation Element Description Line of The text for line of coverage. Accepts coverage alphabets and numeric values of length not exceeding 20 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory. Line of coverage does not accept duplicate values. Add Add the name of line of coverage. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent record only after saving Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Update Update the contents of line of coverage. It is only a temporary updation. Becomes permanent record only after saving Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Only the records that does not have reference elsewhere can be deleted. Becomes permanent record only after saving Print The Print will pops up a screen displaying the content of the table created and enables the user to have print out of the same. Check Box Check box will be disabled which has any reference to other fields. Otherwise the checkbox will be enabled to have the utility of check all/clear all. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the enabled records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the enabled records in the table that are checked. Save Saves the entered line of coverage in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are cleared. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields and restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

Button Functionality

Plan Type

The plan type screen is to enter the details of plan type. The screen provides functionality to add, modify, view, and delete plan type.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of a plan type are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Carrier         Maintenance. Select Master Plan and then Plan Type. (See Figure         B-4)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in fields' explanation section     -   Step-3: Click Add button to have a temporary storage. (See         Figure B-5)     -   Step-4: Also Edit button can be clicked for any modifications.     -   Step-5: Change the contents to be modified and click update.         (See Figure B-6)     -   Step-6: Click Save button to save the contents

Fields Explanation Element Description The text for plan type. Accepts alphabets and numeric values of length not exceeding 25 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory. Does not accept duplicate values

Button Functionality Element Description Add Add the name of plan. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent record only after saving Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Update Update the contents of Plan Type. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent record only after saving Check Box Check box will be disabled which has any reference to other fields. Otherwise the checkbox will be enabled to have the utility of check all/clear all. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Only the records that does not have reference elsewhere can be deleted. Becomes permanent record only after saving Print The Print will pops up a screen displaying the content of the table created and enables the user to have print out of the same. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the enabled records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the enabled records in the table that are checked. Save Saves the entered plan type in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are cleared. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields and restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

Benefit Level

The Benefit Level screen is to enter the details of benefit level. The screen provides functionality to add, modify, view, and delete benefit level.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of a benefit level are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Carrier         Maintenance. Select Master Plan and then Benefit Level. (See         Figure B-7)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in fields' explanation section. (See Figure B-8)     -   Step-3: Click Add button to have a temporary storage.     -   Step-4: Also Edit button can be clicked for any modifications.     -   Step-5: Change the contents to be modified and click Update.         (See Figure B-9)     -   Step-6: Click Save button to save the contents

Fields Explanation Element Description Benefit level The text for benefit level. Accepts alphabets and numeric values of length not exceeding 255 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory. Does not accept duplicate values

Button Functionality Element Description Add Add the name of benefit level. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent record only after saving Save Saves the entered benefit level in the database. The page gets refreshed. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Update Update the contents of Benefit Level. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent record only after saving Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Only the records that does not have reference elsewhere can be deleted. Becomes permanent record only after saving Print The Print will pops up a screen displaying the content of the table created and enables the user to have print out of the same. Check Box Check box will be disabled which has any reference to other fields. Otherwise the checkbox will be enabled to have the utility of check all/clear all. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the enabled records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the enabled records in the table that are checked. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields and restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

Related Applications

There are no related applications.

3 Carrier Master

Carrier Master is to setup basic information about carriers who provide coverage to plans offered through PACAdvantage. This holds master record for the carriers alternatively called “Health Insurance Service provider” and provides facility to create/edit or modify/inactivate the Carrier Master records.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Carrier Maintenance->Carrier Master->Create Carrier Master     -   Carrier Maintenance->Carrier Master->Search Carrier Master

Pre-Requisites

There are no pre-requisites for using this application.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Carrier Information—to input details of a carrier     -   Search Carrier—to search a specific carrier record

Create Carrier Master

The carrier information screen is to enter details of a carrier. The screen provides functionality to add, modify, view, and delete carrier details.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of a new module are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Carrier         Maintenance. Select Carrier Master and then Create Carrier         Master. (See Figure B-10)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective field, as per the         format briefed in fields explanation section Field Explanation,         and click Save button. (See Figure B-11)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description General Information Company Name The text for company name. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 50 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory. Company Name does not accept duplicate values Address The text for company address. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 35 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory. Suite The text for company suite. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 35 characters. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 30 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Entry to this field is mandatory. Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric of exactly 5 digits. Entry to this field is mandatory. Department Information Contact Choose the name of the contact department from the Department drop down list of contact departments available. Entry to this field is mandatory Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for contact first name. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 25 characters. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for contact last name. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 35 characters. Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Title The text for title. Accepts alphabets, numeric, and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 255 characters. Address The text for company address. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 35 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory. Suite The text for company suite. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 35 characters. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 30 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Entry to this field is mandatory. Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric of exactly 5 digits. Entry to this field is mandatory. Mode of Choose the mode of communication from the drop Communication down list of modes available. Based on the selection, the respective fields are mandatory. Phone The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. Fax The text for fax number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. E-mail The text for email of the contact person. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format with length not exceeding 100 characters.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Save Saves the carrier information, department information if any that has been added to the table, into the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the general Information fields are shown. Add Add the contents of department information. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent record only after saving Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent record only after saving Update Update the contents of department information. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent record only after saving Print The Print will pops up a screen displaying the content of the table created and enables the user to have print out of the same. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. New New button will create a new carrier general info page for entering the new set of data for the carrier. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields and restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

Search Carrier

The search carrier screen displays the available carrier names. The screen provides the option to view, edit and delete the contents of Carrier Information.

The sequential steps involved in searching an existing carrier are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Carrier         Maintenance. Select Carrier Master and then Search Carrier. (See         Figure B-12)     -   Step-2: Company name has to be selected from the drop down list         (See Figure B-13)     -   Step-3: Select either View/Delete or Edit to display the         contents of selected company name. If the selected option is         View/Delete, Displays the contents for viewing or deleting. (See         Figure B-14)     -   Step-4: To go back again to search screen, click Back.     -   Step-5: If the selected option is Edit, displays the contents         and allows to modify.     -   Step-6: Modifications can be made for both the general         information, as well as department information. Also choosing a         record by clicking Edit button can modify department         information. (See Figure B-15)     -   Step-7: Change the contents to be modified and click Update.     -   Step-8: Click Save button to save the contents.

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description General Information Company Name The text for company name. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 50 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory. Company Name does not accept duplicate values Address The text for company address. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 35 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory. Suite The text for company suite Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 35 characters. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 30 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America. Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric of exactly 5 digits. Entry to this field is mandatory. Department Information Contact Choose the name of the contact department from the Department drop down list of contact departments available. Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for contact first name. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 25 characters. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for contact last name. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 35 characters. Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Title The text for title. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 255 characters. Address The text for company address. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 35 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory. Suite The text for company suite. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 35 characters. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 30 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Entry to this field is mandatory. Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric of exactly 5 digits. Entry to this field is mandatory. Mode of Choose the mode of communication from the drop Communication down list of modes available. Phone The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. Fax The text for fax number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. E-mail The text for email of the contact person. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format with length not exceeding characters.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Save Saves the carrier information, department information if any that has been added to the table, into the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the general Information fields are shown. Add Add the contents of department information. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent record only after saving Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent record only after saving Update Update the contents of department information. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent record only after saving Print The Print will pops up a screen displaying the content of the table created and enables the user to have print out of the same. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. New New button will create a new carrier general info page for entering the new set of data for the carrier. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields and restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

Related Applications

There are no related applications.

4 Product Profile

Product Profile is to create information on Product and Plan pertaining to a carrier. This is also used to create transmission profiles for Enrollment and Premium. It facilities to create/Edit or modify carrier product information.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Carrier Maintenance->Product Profile->Create Product Profile     -   Carrier Maintenance->Product Profile->Search Product Profile

Pre-Requisites

Master Plan records must be available in the system.

Carrier Master records must be available in the system.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Create Product Profile—to enter the information pertaining to a         product and plan     -   Search Product—to search a product and plan

Create Product Profile

The carrier product info screen is to add the information pertaining to a product and plan.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of carrier product information are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click Carrier Maintenance.         Select Product Profile and then Create Product Profile. (See         Figure B-16)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. (See Figure B-17)     -   Step-3: The enrollment transmission is mainly meant for entering         information and schedule for a transmission for a plan. Also         Premium Transmission can be navigated from this screen. (See         Figure B-18)     -   Step-4: The premium transmission is mainly meant for entering         information and schedule for a transmission for a plan. Also         Enrollment Transmission can be navigated from this screen (See         Figure B-19)     -   Step-5: Click Save button to save the contents

Fields Explanation Element Description Trans Id Enter the value of trans id. Accepts numeric value of exactly 3 digits. Once clicking save button creates a trans id, it gets disabled not to modify the trans id. This is mandatory field Plan Name Enter the text for plan name. Plan name accepts alphanumeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 50 characters. This is mandatory field Carrier Name Choose the name of the carrier from the drop down list of carrier names available. This is mandatory field Plan ID System generated field with Plan ID. This is a read only field. Line of coverage Choose a name from the drop down list of line of coverage available. This is mandatory field Plan Type Choose a name from the drop down list of plan type available. This is mandatory field Product Required Click the check box to enter the details of information pertaining to a product. By default, it will be unchecked state. If this is unchecked then default Benefit will be added in to the Product Info table below. Benefit level Choose a name from the drop down list of benefit levels available. This is mandatory field if Product Required option is checked. Product Name Enter the text for product name. The field is alphabets, numeric and special character except double quotes with values not exceeding 60 characters. This is mandatory field if Product Required option is checked. Alternate Name Enter the text for product name. The field is alphabets, numeric and special character except double quotes with values not exceeding 255 characters. Enrollment Transmission Plan Id Read only field. System generated Plan ID. Plan Name Read only field. Displays the Plan Name. Carrier requires Choose an option from the check box to have Enrollment enrollment transmission. Upon selection of this, will transmission enable to enter details for transmission information and transmission schedule. The field is mandatory Data format Choose a format from the drop down list of data formats available. Mode of Choose a mode from the drop down list of modes transmission available. Upon selecting the mode, will enable the carrier profile id for entering data. Only when the selection is carrier's ftp, carrier URL, user id, password fields will be enabled for entry. Carrier profile id Enter the text for carrier profile id. Accepts alphanumeric of 10 digits only Carrier URL Enter the text for URL. Accepts a valid URL not exceeding 60 characters. Carrier User Id Enter the text for user id. Accepts alphanumeric value not exceeding 20 characters. Carrier Password Enter the text for password. Accepts alphanumeric character not exceeding 20 characters. Confirm file Choose an option from the check box to have required confirmation file Transmission Choose a type of transmission from the drop down list periodicity for transmission periodicity. Upon the selecting the value namely, hourly, daily, weekly, monthly corresponding field will only be enabled for entry others will get disabled. Start time Enter the time for start time in the format HH: MM. Accepts only numeric values of 5 digits. Days Choose the days from the available checkboxes for the days required for transmission. This field will be enabled only upon if the selection is daily in the transmission periodicity field. Week day Choose a weekday from the drop down list of weekdays available. This field will be enabled only upon if the selection is daily in the transmission periodicity field. Day of month Choose a day from the drop down list of days in a month available. This field will be enabled only upon if the selection is daily in the transmission periodicity field. Disable Choose an option from the check box to have transmission transmission disabled. Premium Transmission Plan Id Read only field. System generated Plan ID. Plan Name Read only field. Displays the Plan Name Carrier requires Choose an option from the check box to have Enrollment enrollment transmission. Upon selection of this, will transmission enable to enter details for transmission information and transmission schedule. The field is mandatory Mode of Choose a mode from the drop down list of modes transmission available. Upon selecting the mode, will enable the carrier profile id for entering data. Only when the selection is carrier's ftp, carrier URL, user id, password fields will be enabled for entry. Carrier profile id Enter the text for carrier profile id. Accepts alphanumeric of 10 digits only Carrier URL Enter the text for URL. Accepts a valid URL not exceeding 60 characters. Carrier User Id Enter the text for user id. Accepts alphanumeric value not exceeding 20 characters. Carrier Password Enter the text for password. Accepts alphanumeric character not exceeding 20 characters. Confirm file Choose an option from the check box to have required confirmation file Transmission Choose a type of transmission from the drop down list periodicity for transmission periodicity. Upon the selecting the value namely, hourly, daily, weekly, monthly corresponding field will only be enabled for entry others will get disabled. Start time Enter the time for start time in the format HH: MM. Accepts only numeric values of 5 digits. Days Choose the days from the available checkboxes for the days required for transmission. This field will be enabled only upon if the selection is daily in the transmission periodicity field. Week day Choose a weekday from the drop down list of weekdays available. This field will be enabled only upon if the selection is daily in the transmission periodicity field. Day of month Choose a day from the drop down list of days in a month available. This field will be enabled only upon if the selection is daily in the transmission periodicity field. Disable Choose an option from the check box to have transmission transmission disabled.

Button Functionality Element Description Save Click on save button to save contents of product information and plan information. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Update Update the contents of Product. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent record only after saving Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Only the records that does not have reference elsewhere can be deleted. Becomes permanent record only after saving Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. New Click on new button to add a new product and plan information. Cancel Click on the cancel button to clear the data entered on the screen and returns the same screen to proceed. Enrollment and Premium Transmissions Save Click on save button to save contents of transmission information. Back Click on back button will navigate back to carrier product info screen.

Search Product

The search product screen is to view and edit/modify the information in an existing plan name. Choosing a plan name from the drop down list of plan names available can carry out the search.

The sequential steps involved in searching an existing product are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Carrier         Maintenance. Select Product Profile and then Search Product.         (See Figure B-20)     -   Step-2: Plan name has to be selected from the drop down list         (See Figure B-21)     -   Step-3: Select either View/Delete or Edit to display the         contents of selected plan name.     -   If the selected option is View/Delete, displays the contents for         viewing and deleting. (See FIG. 22) (See Figure     -   Step-4: To go back again to search screen, click Back.     -   Step-5: If the selected option is Edit, displays the contents         and allows to have modifications. Click Save. (See Figure B-23)

Fields Explanation

Refer field explanations provided for Create Product Profile

Button Functionality

Refer Button Functionality explanations provided for Create Product Profile

Related Applications

Related applications are:

-   -   Carrier Master     -   Master Plan

5 Rate Administration

Rate Master is to setup basic information about various types of rates offered through PACAdvantage. Rates are the rates for the products offered by each carrier and their classification into various fee structures. The rates are classified as Admin Fees, Agent fees, Additional Fees and Rate Differential. These classifications are applied to the raw rate to arrive to the actual premium payable by group/member.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Carrier Maintenance->Rate Administration->Admin Fees     -   Carrier Maintenance->Rate Administration->Admin Fees Search     -   Carrier Maintenance->Rate Administration->Agent Fees     -   Carrier Maintenance->Rate Administration->Agent Fees Search     -   Carrier Maintenance->Rate Administration->Additional Fees     -   Carrier Maintenance->Rate Administration->Additional Fees Search     -   Carrier Maintenance->Rate Administration->Rate Differential     -   Carrier Maintenance->Rate Administration->Rate Differential         Search

Pre-Requisites

Pre requisites for Rate Administrations are following:

-   -   Association Master—Association master must be created and         available in the system for assigning the rate for association         groups.     -   Association Acronym—Association acronym is to display the         association name in an abbreviated form inside the table for         display. A mapping file has to be configured to ensure that each         Association ID/Association name is mapped with the Acronym name         in the mapping file as in PX2 system.

The mapping file can usually be located in the following path:

-   -   <config_root>/bpicas/assacyronym.xml

Sample mapping

-   -   <asst id=“0000000001”> Here goes the acronym name as defined by         user</asst>     -   asst id=Should have a valid association ID from the PX2 System.

Acronym name should be edited in area shown in bold not exceeding 25 characters.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Admin Fees—to create/edit details of Admin Fees     -   Admin Fees Search—to search the details of admin fee for view,         modification or deletion     -   Agent Fees—to create/edit details of Agent Fees     -   Agent Fees Search—to search the details of Agent Fees for view,         modification or deletion     -   Additional Fees—to create/edit details of Additional Fees     -   Additional Fees Search—to search the details of Additional Fees         for view, modification or deletion     -   Rate Differential—to create/edit details of Rate Differential     -   Rate Differential Search—to search the details of Rate         Differential for view, modification or deletion

Admin Fees

The admin fees screen is to enter the details of rate type, whether the rate classification is for enrollment or renewal, group type, association Ids for a chosen association only, Individual Member or Association Group for a guaranteed association, percentage premium, effective date, group level fees, and member level fees. The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new admin fees. Admin fees is broadly defined for two types of rates, namely consolidated [blended] and unconsolidated [non-blended].

The sequential steps involved in the creation of admin fees are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click menu Carrier Maintenance.         Select Rate Administration and then Admin Fees. (See Figure         B-24)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. (See Figure B-25)     -   Step-3: Click Save button to save the contents. (See Figure         B-26)

Fields Explanation Element Description Rate Type Choose the rate type from the option button. Rate type can be either blended or non-blended. Blended rates will allow for entering only percent premium based on effective date for a specific group type. Non-blended rates will allow for entering group level fees which includes flat $ amount and member level fees which includes flat $ amount for medical and dental, percent premium for vision and cam [lines of coverage]. Enroll/Renew Choose this option to create the admin fee for groups during enrollment or renewal. Group Type Choose the group type from the drop down list of group types available. Only group type of guaranteed association would allow choosing individual member or association groups. Association Choose the association name from the drop down list of Name ids for the association available. Association name would be enabled only if the group type has guaranteed, endorsed, PEO's and chambers. Member type Choose the member type from the option buttons. Only group type of guaranteed association would allow choosing individual member or association groups [member type]. Percentage Enter the value for percentage premium. Accepts Premium numeric value in the range of 0 to 100 with decimal points (example 99.99) Effective Date Enter the date or choose from the calendar icon. Date accepts the format in MM/DD/YYYY. Group Level Enter the value for group level fees. Accepts value in Fees the format of currency (example 999999999.99 or 99999999999) Member Enter the value for member level fees. Accepts value in Level Fees the format of currency (example 999999999.99 or 99999999999) for fees in $ and accepts numeric value in the range of 0 to 100 for fees in percentage.

Button Functionality Element Description Save Saves the entered admin fees in the database and navigates to the confirmation page. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields and restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes. New Admin Fee Navigates to admin fee screen for creating a new one

Admin Fees Search

The admin fees search screen displays the available admin fees. The screen provides the option to view, edit and delete the contents of Admin Fee

The sequential steps involved in the Searching for admin fees are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click menu Carrier Maintenance.         Select Rate Administration and then Admin Fees Search. (See         Figure B-27)     -   Step-2: Choose a rate type, Enrolled/Renew Status, group type,         association name and effective date to have a search option.         (See Figure B-28)     -   Step-3: This displays a screen with search result. (See Figure         B-29)     -   Step-4: Choose a Rate type either to Modify or View/Delete.     -   Step-5: If the option is Modify the following will be the screen         to have any modifications. (See Figure B-30)     -   Step-6: Update the contents and click Save. Navigates to         confirmation Screen (See Figure B-31)     -   Step-7: If the option is View/Delete the contents are displayed         to view and delete (See Figure B-32)     -   Step-8: Clicking Delete will have the confirmation screen as         follows. (See Figure B-33)

Fields Explanation

Refer field explanations provided for Admin Fees

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality provided for Admin Fees

Agent Fees

The agent fees screen is to enter the details of rate type, group type, percentage of premium, effective date, group size like lower limit and upper limit with Amount and member level fees. The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new admin fees. Agent fees is broadly defined for two types of rates, namely consolidated [blended] and unconsolidated [non-blended].

The sequential steps involved in the creation of agent fees are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click Carrier Maintenance.         Select Rate Administration and then Agent Fees. (See Figure         B-34)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. (See Figure B-35)     -   Step-3: Click Save button to save the contents. (See Figure         B-36)

Fields Explanation Element Description Rate Type Choose the rate type from the option button. Rate type can be either blended or non-blended. Blended rates will allow for entering only percent premium based on effective date for a specific group type. Non-blended rates will allow for entering group level fees which includes group size lower limit, group size upper limit flat $ amount and member level fees which includes flat $ amount for medical and dental, percent premium for vision and cam [lines of coverage]. Group size lower limit should not be greater than the group size upper limit. Enroll/Renew Choose this option to create the admin fee for groups during enrollment or renewal. Enrolled before Check this field if the agent fees is for the groups 1997 enrolled before 1997. Group Type Choose the group type from the drop down list of group types available. Only group type of guaranteed association would allow choosing individual member or association groups. Association Choose the association name from the drop down list of Name names for the association available. Association name would be enabled only if the group type has guaranteed, endorsed PEO's and chambers. Member type Choose the member type from the option buttons. Only group type of guaranteed association would allow choosing individual member or association groups [member type]. Percentage Enter the value for percentage premium. Accepts Premium numeric value in the range of 0 to 100 Effective Date Enter the date or choose from the calendar icon. Date accepts the format in MM/DD/YYYY. Group size Enter the value for group size lower limit. Accepts lower limit numeric values of maximum 3 digits. Lower limit value should be less than the value of upper limit. Group size Enter the value for group size upper limit. Accepts upper limit numeric values of maximum 3 digits. Upper limit value should not be less than lower limit value. Amount Enter the value for group level fees. Enter the value for group level fees. Accepts value in the format of currency (example 999999999.99 or 99999999999) Member Level Enter the value for member level fees. Accepts value in Fees the format of currency (example 999999999.99 or 99999999999) for fees in $ and accepts numeric value in the range of 0 to 100 for fees in percentage.

Button Functionality Element Description Save Saves the entered agent fees in the database and navigates to confirmation screen Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields and restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes. New Agent Fee Navigates to agent fee screen for creating a new one

Agent Fees Search

The agent fees search screen displays the available agent fees. The screen provides the option to view, edit and delete the contents of agent fee

The sequential steps involved in the searching admin fees are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click menu Carrier Maintenance.         Select Rate Administration and then Agent Fees Search. (See         Figure B-37)     -   Step-2: Choose a rate type, enroll/renew option, group type,         association name and effective date to have a search operation.         (See Figure B-38)     -   Step-3: This displays a screen with search result. (See Figure         B-39)     -   Step-4: Choose a Rate type either to Modify or View/Delete.     -   Step-5: If the option is Modify the following will be the screen         to have any modifications. (See Figure B-40)     -   Step-6: Update the contents and click Save. On saving displays         the confirmation screen. (See Figure B-41)     -   Step-7: If the option is View/Delete the contents are displayed         to view and delete (See Figure B-42)     -   Step-8: Clicking Delete will have the confirmation screen as         follows. (See Figure B-43)

Fields Explanation

Refer field explanations provided for Agent Fees

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality provided for Agent Fees

Additional Fees

The additional fees screen is to enter the details of COBRA type, percentage of additional fees, effective date. The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new additional fees. Additional fees is broadly defined for two types namely Cal COBRA and Federal COBRA.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of additional fees are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click Carrier Maintenance.         Select Rate Administration and then Additional Fees. (See Figure         B-44)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. (See Figure B-45)     -   Step-3: Click Save button to save the contents. (See Figure         B-46)

Fields Explanation Element Description Rate Type Choose the rate type from the option button. Rate type can be either Cal COBRA or Federal COBRA. Percentage of Enter the value for percentage premium. Accepts Additional Fees numeric value in the range 0 to 100. Effective Date Enter the date or choose from the calendar icon. Date accepts the format in MM/DD/YYYY.

Button Functionality Element Description Save Saves the entered additional fees in the database and navigates to confirmation screen. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields and restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes. New Additional Navigates to additional fee screen for creating a new Fee one

Additional Fees Search

The additional fees search screen displays the available additional fees. The screen provides the option to view, edit and delete the contents of additional fee

The sequential steps involved in the Searching additional fees are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click menu Carrier Maintenance.         Select Rate Administration and then Additional Fees Search. (See         Figure B-47)     -   Step-2: Choose Cal Cobra or Federal Cobra and enter Additional         Fee % and Effective Date to have a search operation. (See Figure         B-48)     -   Step-3: This displays a screen with search result. (See Figure         B-49)     -   Step-4: Choose a Rate type either to have Modify or View/Delete.     -   Step-5: If the option is Modify the following will be the screen         to have any modifications. (See Figure B-50)     -   Step-6: Update the contents and click Save. Displays the         confirmation screen (See Figure B-51)     -   Step-7: If the option is View/Delete the contents are displayed         to view and delete (See Figure B-52)     -   Step-8: Clicking Delete will have the confirmation screen as         follows. (See Figure B-53)

Fields Explanation

Refer field explanations provided for Additional Fees

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality provided for Additional Fees

Rate Differential

The Rate Differential screen is to enter the details of New Business Enrollment or New Business Enrollment & Renewal, Group Size criteria, group size lower limit, group size upper limit, differential factor, and effective date. The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new Rate Differential.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of Rate Differential are listed below

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click Carrier Maintenance.         Select Rate Administration and then Rate Differential. (See         Figure B-54)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. (See Figure B-55)     -   Step-3: Click Save button to save the contents. (See Figure         B-56)

Fields Explanation Element Description Line of The field is a read only and will always have the value coverage as Medical. Group size Enter the value for group size lower limit. Accepts lower limit numeric values of maximum 3 digits. Lower limit value should be less than the value of upper limit. Entry to this field is mandatory Group size Enter the value for group size upper limit. Accepts upper limit numeric values of maximum 3 digits. Upper limit value should not be less than lower limit value. Entry to this field is mandatory Differential Enter the value for differential factor. Accepts decimal factor values of positive integer with max of 6 digits, example 99.999. Differential factor cannot have zero or negative values. Entry to this field is mandatory Effective Date Enter the date or choose from the calendar icon. Date accepts the format in MM/DD/YYYY. Entry to this field is mandatory Applied For Choose the option as new business enrollment or new business enrollment and renewal Group Size Choose the option as enrolled employee or eligible Criteria employee

Button Functionality Element Description Save Saves the entered Rate Differential in the database and navigates to confirmation screen Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields and restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes. New Rate Navigates to rate differential fee screen for creating a Differential Fee new one

Rate Differential Search

The rate differential search screen displays the available Rate Differential. The screen provides the option to view, edit and delete the contents of Rate Differential

The sequential steps involved in the creation of Rate Differential are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click menu Carrier Maintenance.         Select Rate Administration and then Rate Differential Search.         (See Figure B-57)     -   Step-2: Choose the option for applicable for, group size         criteria, group size lower and upper limit, differential factor         and effective date to have a search operation. (See Figure B-58)     -   Step-3: This displays a screen with search result. (See Figure         B-59)     -   Step-4: Choose a Rate type either to have Modify or View/Delete.     -   Step-5: If the option is Modify the following will be the screen         to have any modifications. (See Figure B-60)     -   Step-6: Update the contents and click Save. Displays         confirmation screen (See Figure B-61)     -   Step-7: If the option is View/Delete the contents are displayed         only to have view and delete can be done. (See Figure B-62)     -   Step-8: Clicking Delete will have the confirmation screen as         follows. (See Figure B-63)

Fields Explanation

Refer field explanations provided for Rate Differential

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality provided for Rate Differential

Related Applications

Related applications are as follows.

-   -   Association Master—Refer User manual for Association Master.

6 Import Zip Codes

Import Zip Codes is the functionality to provide for import of zip code data and any updates of the same.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Carrier Maintenance->CM Operations->Import Zip

Pre-Requisites

The latest zip code and zip code with multiple counties database from TPS Products and Services, Inc should be available for import. The format of the database files has to be either Comma Delimited ASCII (CSV) or Fixed Column ASCII, the 2 formats currently supported by PX2.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Import Zip Codes     -   Commit Import of Zip Codes

Import Zip

Zip import will enable to bring the zip codes and zip counties in a specified format namely CSV ASCI [comma separated value] and Fixed position ASCII, which will transform the data in other format to these formats and will ease to read and store the data in database.

The sequential steps involved in importing a zip code are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Carrier         Maintenance. Select CM Operations and then Import Zip. (See         Figure B-64)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. (See Figure B-65)     -   Step-3: Click Import button. (See Figure B-66)     -   Step-4: Click Commit button. (See Figure B-67)

Fields Explanation Element Description Import Id Read only field to display import id value Status Read only field to display the status of import Imported By Read only field to display the user who imported the files Import Date Read only field to display the import date Committed By Read only field. Committed Read only field to display the commit date. Date Zip File Path Enter the file path of zip file or select the path by clicking browse button. The field is mandatory. Zip File Format Choose a format from drop down list for zip file format, which should match with selection of zip file. The field is mandatory. Zip Counties Enter the file path of zip county or select the path by File Path clicking browse button. The field is mandatory. Zip Counties Choose a format from drop down list for zip county File Format format, which should match with selection of zip county. The field is mandatory

Button Functionality Element Description New Click on new button enables to have a new import of files. Import Click on import button will perform the action of importing the selected valid files temporally. Once an import action is carried out, will enable the commit button. Search Click on search button navigates to a screen to have a search on entering Import id. Commit Initially commit button will be in disabled state. Once an import activity is carried out, commit button will be enabled to have a permanent storage in the selected file formats. View Import Log Click on view import log to have a pop up display showing the status of imported files Hide Import Log Click on hide import log to hide the pop up display message.

Commit Import Zip Codes

Commit zip codes can also be done by searching an import id.

The sequential steps involved in committing an import id are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: Click Search button to search an import id.     -   Step-2: This opens up a new screen to displaying import id to         search. (See Figure B-68)     -   Step-3: Import ids can be selected by either entering import id         and clicking search button or Click an import id, which are         imported and are not committed. Back button is to go back to         search screen without selecting an import id for commit.     -   Step-4: Screen navigates displaying the selected import id,         enabling commit button. (See Figure B-69)     -   Step-5: Click Commit button.     -   Step-6: Screen gets refreshed and displays the confirmation as         committed in the status field. (See Figure B-70)

Fields Explanation Element Description Import Id Read only field to display import id value Status Read only field to display the status of import Imported By Read only field to display the user who imported the files Import Date Read only field to display the import date Committed By Read only field. Committed Read only field to display the commit date. Date Zip File Path Enter the file path of zip file or select the path by clicking browse button. The field is mandatory. Zip File Format Choose a format from drop down list for zip file format, which should match with selection of zip file. The field is mandatory. Zip Counties Enter the file path of zip county or select the path by File Path clicking browse button. The field is mandatory. Zip Counties Choose a format from drop down list for zip county File Format format, which should match with selection of zip county. The field is mandatory

Button Functionality Element Description New Click on new button enables to have a new import of files. Import Click on import button will perform the action of importing the selected valid files temporally. Once an import action is carried out, will enable the commit button. Search Click on search button navigates to a screen to have a search on entering Import id. Commit Initially commit button will be in disabled state. Once an import activity is carried out, commit button will be enabled to have a permanent storage in the selected file formats. View Import Log Click on view import log to have a pop up display showing the status of imported files Hide Import Log Click on hide import log to hide the pop up display message. Back Click back button to go back to the search screen.

Related Applications

There is no related application.

7 Rate Files

Import Rates provides for import of rates information received from PacAdvantage and export of rates information to carriers for verification.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Carrier Maintenance->CM Operations->Import Rate Files     -   Carrier Maintenance->CM Operations->Export Rate Files

Pre-Requisites

Before importing rate files, a mapping file has to be configured to ensure that each plan/product listed in the rate file has an entry in the mapping file and is mapped to the corresponding plan id/product id as in PX2 system.

The mapping file can usually be located in the following path:

-   -   <config_root>/bpicas/ec/conf/DataMap.xml

Here <config_root> refers to the root directory where all configuration files required for PX2 system are placed. Ask for your System Administrator's assistance in locating the configuration root in the system in which PX2 is installed.

Open the mapping file using any standard text editors (e.g. Notepad). In the file you will be able to locate entries like

-   -   <productId keyName=“1,AETNA,HMO,PLUS”         keyValue=“PL001-02,PL001”/>

These are the entries that establish the mapping between plan/product listed in the rate file and the corresponding plan id/product id as in PX2 system.

The entries have a format like this

-   -   <productId keyName=     -   “<LOC_CODE>,<PLAN_NAME,<PLAN_TYPE>,<COPAY>” keyValue=     -   “<PX2_PRODUCT_ID>,PX2_PLAN_ID”/>     -   where

LOC CODE is a codification for the line of coverage; 1 stands for Medical, 2 for Dental, 3 for Vision and 4 for CAM

PLAN_NAME is the name of the plan as in the Excel file; this usually corresponds to the value of the 1 st column in the Excel sheet

PLAN_TYPE is the type of plan; whether HMO, PPO, POS etc; this usually corresponds to the value of the 2nd column in the Excel sheet; an exception is the worksheet for CAM which doesn't have a plan type

COPAY is the copay option of the plan; whether Standard, Plus or Preferred; this usually corresponds to the value of the 3rd column in the Excel sheet; an exception is the worksheet for CAM which has this information in the 2nd column

PX2_PRODUCT_ID is the product id that corresponds to the product id in the excel sheet

PX2_PLAN_ID is the plan id that corresponds to the plan id in the excel sheet

If required, suitably modify these entries to ensure that a correct mapping has been established between the plan/products in the Excel sheet to the plans/products in PX2 system. After modifying, save and close the mapping file.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Import Rates     -   Export Rates

Import Rate

Rate import will enable to import the files pertaining to medical, dental, vision, CAM with effective date. Rate export can also be navigated from this screen.

The sequential steps involved in importing a rate are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: Before start of importing, open the rates file (.xls) in         Microsoft Excel. Rates for all the 4 line of coverage, namely         Medical, Dental, Vision and CAM would be available in the Excel         as 4 separate worksheets. Switch to Medical worksheet. Save the         work sheet in “Comma-delimited” format using the File, Save As         menu. Repeat this procedure for Dental, Vision and CAM         worksheets. All these 4 CSV files will be used for rates import.     -   Step-2: After successful logon, click the menu Carrier         Maintenance. Select CM Operations and then Import Rate Files.         (See Figure B-71)     -   Step-3: Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. (See Figure B-72)     -   Step-4: Import ids can be either entered directly or can be         chosen by clicking search button. Respective file paths can be         selected by clicking browse button. Click import button.         Following is the screen shot showing the status after entering         all the fields (See Figure B-73)

Fields Explanation Element Description Import Id Read only field to display import id value Status Read only field to display the status of import Imported By Read only field to display the user who imported the files Import Date Read only field to display the import date Medical file path Enter the file path of medical file or select the path by clicking browse button. If the status is imported or not imported this fields would not be editable. At least one file path is required Dental file path Enter the file path of dental file or select the path by clicking browse button. If the status is imported or not imported this fields would not be editable. At least one file path is required CAM file path Enter the file path of CAM file or select the path by clicking browse button. If the status is imported or not imported this fields would not be editable At least one file path is required. Vision file path Enter the file path of vision file or select the path by clicking browse button. If the status is imported or not imported this fields would not be editable. At least one file path is required Effective Date Enter the date or choose from the calendar icon. Date accepts the format in MM/DD/YYYY. The field is mandatory

Button Functionality Element Description New Click on new button enables to have a new import of files. Import Click on import button will perform the action of importing the selected valid files to have a permanent storage in the selected file formats. Search Click on search button navigates to a screen to have a search on entering Import id. View Import Log Click on view import log to have a pop up display showing the status of imported files Hide Import Log Click on hide import log to hide the pop up display message. Back Click back button to go back to the import screen

Export Rate Files

Rate export will enable to export a product from selecting a product id by clicking product search icon. Rate import can also be navigated from this screen.

The sequential steps involved in rates export are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Carrier         Maintenance. Select CM Operations and then Export Rate Files         (See Figure B-74)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. (See Figure B-75)     -   Step-3: Export ids can be selected by either entering export id         and clicking search button or Click an export id. Back button is         to go back to export screen without selecting an export id for         commit (See Figure B-76)     -   Step-4: Click Export button. (See Figure B-77)     -   Step-5: Click Ok to download the file. (See Figure B-78)

Fields Explanation Element Description Export Id Read only field to display export id value Status Read only field to display the status of export Exported By Read only field to display the user who exported the files Export Date Read only field to display the export date Product Id Read only field. Choose a product id by clicking the product id search icon Product Name Read only field. Displays the corresponding value of the product id selected. Effective Date Enter the date for effective date or select a date by clicking calendar icon. The field is mandatory. Date accepts the format in MM/DD/YYYY

Button Functionality Element Description New Click on new button enables to have a new export of a product id. Export Click on export button will perform the action of exporting the selected product id. Once it is exported, export button will be in a disabled state. For any further export of files, click on new button View Export Log Click on view export log to have a pop up display showing the status of exported files Hide Export Log Click on hide export log to hide the pop up display message. Search Click on search button navigates to a screen to have a search on entering product id. Back Click back button to go back to the search screen

Export Loaded Rate Files

Export loaded rate files will enable to know the status of the selected files for export.

The sequential steps involved in export loaded rate files are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Carrier         Maintenance. Select CM Operations and then Export Rate Files         (See Figure B-79)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to Export Loaded Rates. (See Figure         B-80)     -   Step-3: Enter Effective date and other related fields as per the         format briefed in fields' explanation table     -   Step-4: Click Export button.     -   Step-5: Click Search to know the status of the export id         generated. (See Figure B-81)     -   Step-6: Click back to go back to Export Imported Rate File         screen.

Fields Explanation Element Description Export Id Read only field to display export id value Status Read only field to display the status of export Exported By Read only field to display the user who exported the files Export Date Read only field to display the export date Effective Date Enter the date for effective date or select a date by clicking calendar icon. The field is mandatory. Date accepts the format in MM/DD/YYYY Product Id Read only field. Choose a product id by clicking the product id search icon Line of Coverage Choose a line of coverage from the drop down list available Rate Type Choose a rate type either from the available option say Blended or Non-Blended RAF Based on the selected value, RAF will be enabled for entering. Accepts numeric value. Agent Fee Text for agent fee. Accepts numeric values ranging from the values of 0-100 Admin Fee Text for admin fee. Accepts numeric values ranging from the values of 0-100 CAL Cobra Fee Text for CAL Cobra fee. Accepts numeric values ranging from the values of 0-100 Product Name Read only field. Displays the corresponding value of the product id selected.

Button Functionality Element Description New Click on new button enables to have a new export of a product id. Export Click on export button will perform the action of exporting the selected product id. Once it is exported, export button will be in a disabled state. For any further export of files, click on new button View Export Log Click on view export log to have a pop up display showing the status of exported files Hide Export Log Click on hide export log to hide the pop up display message. Search Click on search button navigates to a screen to have a search on entering product id. Back Click back button to go back to the search screen

Related Applications

Related applications are:

-   -   Product Profile

8 Plan Availability Files

Plan Availability is to provide for export & import of existing plan availability data to carriers and import of plan availability data received from carriers.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Carrier Maintenance->CM Operations->Import Plan Availability     -   Carrier Maintenance->CM Operations->Export Plan Availability

Pre-Requisites

The plan for which data has to be imported/exported should have already been defined in the PX2 system.

The format for records in the import file is shown below:

-   -   <COUNTY_NAME><TAB><COUNTY_CODE><TAB><ZIP_C ODE><TAB>     -   <RATING_REGION><TAB><AVAILABLE_FLAG>     -   where     -   TAB denotes a single TAB character     -   COUNTY_NAME is county name     -   COUNTY_CODE is the 5-character county code comprising         2-character state+3-character county code (FIPS code)     -   ZIP_CODE is the 5-digit zip code     -   RATING_REGION is the 2-character rating region     -   AVAIL_FL indicates whether the plan is available at the specific         zip code (and county) or not; a value of X indicates         availability and a blank value indicates non-availability

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Import Plan Availability     -   Export Plan Availability

Import Plan Availability

Plan availability import will enable to import a file under a plan type. Also Plan availability export can be navigated from this screen.

The sequential steps involved in importing plan availability data are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Carrier         Maintenance. Select CM Operations and then Import Plan         Availability. (See Figure B-82)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. (See Figure B-83)     -   Step-3: Click Import button     -   Step-4: Also import id for plan availability can be selected by         clicking search button. This leads to a screen displaying import         ids. Click it to select an id (See Figure B-84)

Fields Explanation Element Description Import Id Read only field to display import id value Status Read only field to display the status of import Imported By Read only field to display the user who imported the files Import Date Read only field to display the import date Plan Choose a plan from the drop down list from the plan name available Import File Enter the file path or select the path by clicking browse button. The field is mandatory Effective Date Enter the date for effective date or select a date by clicking calendar icon. The field is mandatory. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY

Button Functionality Element Description New Click on new button enables to have a new import of plan availability. Import Click on import button will perform the action of importing the selected valid to have a permanent storage in the selected file formats. Search Click on search button navigates to a screen to have a search on entering Import id. View Import Log Click on view import log to have a pop up display showing the status of imported files Hide Import Log Click on hide import log to hide the pop up display message. Back Click back button to go back to the import screen

Export Plan Availability

Plan availability export will enable to import a file under a plan type. Also Plan availability import can be navigated from this screen.

The sequential steps involved in exporting plan availability are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Carrier         Maintenance. Select CM Operations and then Export Plan         Availability (See Figure B-85)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. (See Figure B-86)     -   Step-3 Also export id for plan availability can be selected by         clicking search button. This leads to a screen displaying export         ids. Click an id to select (See Figure B-87)     -   Step-4: Click Export button.     -   Step-5: Click Ok to download the file. (See Figure B-88)

Fields Explanation Element Description Export Id Read only field to display export id value Status Read only field to display the status of export Exported By Read only field to display the user who exported the files Export Date Read only field to display the export date Plan Choose a plan from the drop down list from the plan name available Effective Date Enter the date or choose from the calendar icon. Date accepts the format in MM/DD/YYYY. Field is mandatory

Button Functionality Element Description New Click on new button enables to have a new export of plan availability. Export Click on export button will perform the action of importing the selected valid plans. Once it is exported, export button will be in a disabled state. For any further export of plans, click on new button View Export Log Click on view export log to have a pop up display showing the status of exported plans Hide Export Log Click on hide export log to hide the pop up display message. Search Click on search button navigates to a screen to have a search on entering export id. Back Click back button to go back to the search screen

Related Applications

Related applications are:

-   -   Product Profile

PB2 User Manual Enrollment Version 1.0 August 2 2002 Copyright ©2002 Benefit Partners, Inc

Contents Introduction 1-1 The Applications 1-1 Association 2-1 Access 2-1 Pre-requisites 2-1 Application Functions 2-1 Create Association 2-1 Modify Association 2-7 Related Applications  2-11 New Business Enrollment Group Enrollment 3-1 Access 3-1 Pre-requisites 3-2 Application Functions 3-2 Create Group [Small Employer Group] 3-4 Create Group [Alternate Group - Individual  3-54 Members] Create Group [Alternate Group - Group]  3-82 Modify Group [Small Employer Group]  3-98 Inactivate Group  3-100 Create Employee  3-102 Modify Employee  3-104 Inactivate Employee  3-106 Create Dependent  3-109 Modify Dependent  3-111 Inactivate Dependent  3-113 Individual Member [Modify Individual  3-115 Member] Individual Member [Inactivate Individual  3-117 Member] Individual Member Dependent[Create  3-119 Dependent] Individual Member Dependent[Modify  3-121 Dependent] Individual Member Dependent[Inactivate  3-123 Dependent] New Business Enrollment [COBRA Enrollment] 4-1 Access 4-1 Pre-requisites 4-1 Pre-requisites 4-1 New COBRA [Create Cobra] 4-2 New COBRA [Modify Cobra]  4-26 New COBRA[Inactivate Dependent]  4-28 Existing COBRA [Create Cobra]  4-30 Modify COBRA[Modify COBRA]  4-45 Existing COBRA [Inactivate Cobra]  4-46 Termination] 5-1 Access 5-1 Pre-requisites 5-1 Application Functions 5-1 Termination [Group] 5-2 Termination [Employee] 5-6 Termination [Dependent]  5-10 Termination [Multiple Group]  5-14 Reinstatement] 6-1 Access 6-1 Pre-requisites 6-1 Application Functions 6-1 Reinstatement [Group] 6-2 Reinstatement [Employee] 6-6 Reinstatement [Dependent]  6-10 Appeals & Grievances] 7-1 Access 7-1 Pre-requisites 7-1 Application Functions 7-1 Appeals & Grievance [Create] 7-2 Appeals & Grievance [Modify] 7-5 Appeals & Grievance [Close] 7-8 Carrier Issues] 8-1 Access 8-1 Pre-requisites 8-1 Application Functions 8-1 Carrier Issues [Create] 8-2 Carrier Issues [Modify] 8-5 Appeals & Grievance [Close] 8-7 Add On 9-1 Access 9-1 Pre-requisites 9-1 Application Functions 9-1 Add On [Add Employee] 9-2 Add On [Modify Employee]  9-21 Add On [Modify Dependent]  9-23 Add On [Inactivate Dependent]  9-24 Add On [Add Dependent]  9-27 Add On [Modify Dependent]  9-32 En-Operations 10-1  Access 10-1  Pre-requisites 10-1  Application Functions 10-1  Export Membership Data] 10-2  Export PacAdvantage Data] 10-6  Export Transmission Data] 10-8  ROE Process] 10-11 ROE Packet Generation] 10-14 Change 11-1  Access 11-1  Pre-requisites 11-1  Application Functions 11-1  Group Change Create 11-2  Group Change Modify 11-23 COBRA Change Create 11-27 COBRA Change Modify 11-44 Individual Member Change Create] 11-48 Individual Member Change Modify 11-65 Employee Change Create 11-69 Employee Change Modify 11-83 Dependent Change Create 11-87 Dependent Change Modify 11-98 ROE/OE 105 Access 105 Pre-requisites 105 Application Functions 106 ROE [Group Enrollment] 107 ROE [Employee Enrollment] 128 ROE [Dependent Enrollment] 144 ROE [COBRA] 159 ROE [Manual ROE] 177 Individual Member Modify 179 Individual Dependent Modify 198 View] 211 Access 211 Pre-requisites 211 Application Functions 211 View [Group] 212 View [Employee] 215 View [Dependent] 218

1 Introduction

Enrollment is the transaction module that encompasses the process of creating and maintaining all information about the groups and Members who participate in the PacAdvantage program. The enrollment module within PX2 system is classified broadly into following transactions to accommodate the business rules. They are New Business Enrollment, COBRA enrollment, Add-On and Changes, ROE/OE, Termination and Reinstatement, Appeals and Grievance and Carrier Issues and Enrollment Operations.

The Applications

The above-mentioned processes are accomplished in several applications embedded into the Enrollment Module. These applications steer the tasks of creating, and maintaining operational information for the small employer groups, employee, dependent and members like individual association member, COBRA member etc in the PX2 entities, thereby helping achieve the goals of the Enrollment.

The basic process of enrollment can be sub divided into following applications.

Association—Association is to setup high-level information associations within the State of California who can participate in the PacAdvantage program. They are classified as Guaranteed, Endorsed, PEO's or Chambers with each association having a set of business rules to participate in the PacAdvantage program.

New Business Enrollment—New Business Enrollment is the process of Enrolling the Employer Group and members to the PacAdvantage program. The groups and members who can participate in the program are Small Employer Group with employees and dependent, Association Groups with employees and dependents and individual members with dependents. Each group and member must qualify the eligibility rules as applicable to participate in the PacAdvantage program.

COBRA Enrollment—COBRA enrollment is the process of enrolling the members for COBRA coverage. California State laws and federal laws govern COBRA Rules based on whether it is Cal COBRA or Federal COBRA. COBRA eligibility and the coverage are governed by set of California State laws and federal laws. COBRA enrollment can be further sub divided into two streams. Namely, Enrollment of New Business COBRA wherein the Group enrolling with the program bring in their COBRA members also to participate in the program. Existing COBRA Enrollment wherein the members terminated from the existing groups are enrolled as COBRA group/member.

Add-On—Add-On is the process of adding new members like employee and dependents to the existing groups and employees respectively. Add-On process has business rules attached based on which the Add-On process is either accepted or denied.

Changes—Changes are the process of accommodating the changes that the group and or member sought during their participation in the PacAdvantage program. Change process has business rules attached based on which the Change process is either accepted or denied.

ROE/OE—ROE (Re-qualification and open enrollment) is the process of Re-qualifying the Group and Members on their anniversary. Once a year, on the anniversary date of a group's enrollment in PacAdvantage, the group's participation, contribution and qualification is reviewed. This review is to ensure that the group meets the qualification requirement. The main objective of this process is to review these criteria and re qualify as needed, notify them of rate changes and provide an opportunity for employees of the group to make changes to their enrollment.

OE (Open Enrollment) is the process during the anniversary of the group wherein the group has the privilege to make the changes to the plan, waiting period etc that were earlier not open for changes.

Termination and Reinstatement—Termination is the process of terminating the Groups and or members from the PacAdvantage program due to various reasons governed by business rules. The reasons for termination can be non-payment of premium, group's request for termination etc. Reinstatement is the process of revoking the terminated groups and or members based on the reasons governed by business rules. The reasons for reinstatement can be Premium paid through, processing error etc.

Appeals and Grievances—Appeals and Grievance is the process of maintaining a status for all Appeals and Grievances received from the customer and follow up with the decision made either by PacAdvantage-Roseville or PacAdvantage-SF.

Carrier Issues—Carrier Issues is the process of maintaining a status for all Carrier Issues received from the customer and follow up with the carrier for resolution and inform the customer of resolution.

Enrollment Operation—Enrollment operation is the process of generating out data for transmission of enrollment date. This consists of Member Data Transmission, Enrollment Data Transmission, PacAdvantage Transmission, ROE/OE Transmission

2 Association

Association is the master module that encompasses the process of creating and maintaining all master information that is required for maintaining the Association information in the PX2 System.

Associations are basically a body of groups/members representing certain types of associations within the State of California. Association Groups and Association Members can participate in the PacAdvantage program similar to small employer groups or members. Associations are classified as Guaranteed, Endorsed, PEO's or Chambers. Each of the associations classified have specific business rules when participating in PacAdvantage program

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Enrollment->Association->Create Association     -   Enrollment->Association->Modify Association

Pre-Requisites

There are no pre-requisites for using this application.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Create Association—to input details of a association     -   Modify Association—to search a specific association record

Create Association

The create association screen is to enter details of an association. The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new association details.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of a new association are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment.         Select Association and select the option Create Association.         (See Figure C-1)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective field, as per the         format briefed in fields' explanation section Field Explanation,         and click Continue button. (See Figure C-2)     -   Step-3: Screen navigates to coverage information with auto         generated association id. Choose relevant information pertaining         to coverage and click Continue button. (See Figure C-3)     -   Step-4: Screen navigates to other information. (See Figure C-4)     -   Step-5: For internal work group click search icon. This pops up         a screen to select internal work group.     -   Step-6: Click on any internal work group for selection. (See         Figure C-5)     -   Step-7: After filling the relevant information for other         information and special handling as per the format briefed in         fields' explanation section, click Continue button     -   Step-8: Screen navigates to confirming successful creation of an         association. (See Figure C-6)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description General Info Tab Association Name The text for association name. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 60 characters.. Entry to this field is mandatory. Association Type Choose a type of association from the drop down list. Entry to this field is mandatory Street Address The text for association address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory Suite # The text for suite #. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America. Entry to this field is mandatory Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric of either 5 or 9 digits. Entry to this field is mandatory Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. Entry to this field is mandatory First Name The text for first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for Last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Phone The text for telephone number of the contact name. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. Entry to this field is mandatory Extension The text for telephone extension number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 5 digits. The format is 9999 Fax The text for fax number of the contact name. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. Entry to this field is mandatory E-mail The text for email of the contact name. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters. Coverage Info Tab Association ID Text for association id. This is a read only field Association Name Text for association name. This is a read only field Line of Coverage Choose the line of coverage offered by the association by checking the check box/boxes. Domestic Partner Choose yes or no to state if domestic partner coverage is offered. Coverage Rate Choose yes or no to state the rate type (Blended or Type Non Blended) Other Info Association ID Text for association id. This is a read only field Association Name Text for association name. This is a read only field Internal Work Choose a internal work group by clicking search icon Group Membership Select a value for membership status from the drop Status down list Values can be active, closed, frozen. Contract Date Choose a date of contract by clicking calendar icon. The date can be in the format MM/DD/YYYY Association Re- The text for re-qualification period. Accepts numeric qualification values not exceeding 2 digits. The value states number Period of months for Association Re-qualification Period Batch Billing Choose the option of batch billing if the association if preferred by association. Desired Choose the option to have name of association on the Association bill if preferred by association. Name on the Bill

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the entered information and navigates to next level. The flow screen is from general info to coverage info then to other info. Screen flow should start from general info. Switchover in between the screens is possible only if clicking the Continue button saves the first screen “General Info”. Cancel Cancel the contents entered in the fields and restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

Modify Association

The modify association enables to modify the contents of an existing association. Alternatively you can also modify the record for the association by clicking the “Search Icon” for selecting the Association name or ID for modification when in create mode.

The sequential steps involved in modifying an existing association are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment.         Select Association and select the option Modify Association.         (See Figure C-7)     -   Step-2: Association name has to be selected from the drop down         list or association id has to be entered for selecting an         association. (See Figure C-8)     -   Step-3: Modify the values in the respective field, as per the         format briefed in fields explanation section Field Explanation,         and click Continue button. (See Figure C-9)     -   Step-4: Screen navigates to coverage information for any         modifications. Modify relevant information pertaining to         coverage and click Continue button. (See Figure C-10)     -   Step-5: Screen navigates to other information. (See Figure C-11)     -   Step-6: For internal work group click search icon. This pops up         a screen to select internal work group. (See Figure C-12)     -   Step-7: Click on any internal work group for selection.     -   Step-8: After modifying the information of other information and         special handling as per the format briefed in field's         explanation section, click Continue button     -   Step-9: Screen navigates to confirming successful creation of an         association. (See Figure C-13)     -   Step-10: If the option is Inactivate and confirming the         inactivation, the following screen appears. (See Figure C-14)

Fields Explanation

Refer field explanation provided for create association. In case of modify association, either association id can be entered or association name can be selected from the drop down list. In case of association id, it accepts alphanumeric values. The difference in modify mode the data available is populated for making modifications, if required.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Modify Clicking the Modify Button navigates to the General Info screen populating the records for the association name selected or association ID entered. Inactivate Clicking the Inactivate button would inactivate the records for the association name selected or association ID entered. Continue Saves the entered information and navigates to next level. The flow from general info to coverage info then to other info. Screen flow should start from general info. Switchover in between the screens is possible only if the first screen “General Info” is saved by clicking the Continue button or if the mode is Modify. Cancel Cancel the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

Related Applications

There is no related application.

3 New Business Enrollment

New Business Enrollment is the transaction module that encompasses the process of enrolling and maintaining all information that is required for various entities that are eligible to participate in the PacAdvantage program in the PX2 System. This module captures all the relevant information required to enroll a group and members to the program. The group and member must satisfy certain eligibility criteria to enroll themselves.

Various groups and members are classified as “Small Employer Group with employees and their dependents, Association Group (Groups affiliated to an associations) with employees and their dependents, Individual Member (Members affiliated to an association) with or without dependents.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Enrollment->New Business Enrollment     -   ->Group Enrollment         -   ->Create New Group         -   ->Modify Group         -   ->Inactivate Group     -   ->Employee Enrollment         -   ->Create Employee         -   ->Modify Employee         -   ->Inactivate Employee     -   ->Dependent Enrollment         -   ->Create Dependent         -   ->Modify Dependent         -   ->Inactivate Dependent     -   ->Individual Member         -   ->Individual Member         -   ->Modify Individual Member         -   ->Inactivate Individual Member     -   Individual Member Dependent         -   ->Create Dependent         -   ->Modify Dependent         -   ->Inactivate Dependent

Pre-Requisites

All master records must be available in the system for a successful enrollment. Master Records are as follows:

-   -   Carrier Maintenance—Refer “User Manual for Carrier Maintenance”         for further information on the master records.     -   Agent/Agency—Refer “User Manual for Sales and Marketing” for         further information on the Agent/Agency records.     -   Work Group—Refer “User Manual for Sales and Marketing” for         further information on the Work Group records.     -   Internal Associates—Refer “User Manual for Sales and Marketing”         for further information on the Internal Associates records.     -   Association Master—Association Master must be available in the         system. Refer Section 2 of this document on “Association         Master”.     -   Eligibility Criteria—Business rules identifies the eligibility         criteria for the Groups and member for participating in the         PacAdvantage Program. For a successful enrollment the business         rules must be met with.     -   For entering Employee records the group must be available in the         system and the enrolled status must be “Enroll Pend”.     -   For entering Dependent records the Employee must be available in         the system and the enrolled status must be “Enroll Pend”.

Application Functions

This application can be sub divided into following major functions:

-   -   Group Enrollment—Group Enrollment consist of the following         operations:     -   Create Small Employer Group—to input details of a Small Employer         Group.     -   Create Alternate Group—to input details of an Alternate Group     -   Create Individual Association Member—to input details of an         Individual Association Member.     -   Modify Group—to search a specific group for modification prior         to enrollment. This search feature would allow searching for         Small Employer Group or Association Group.     -   Inactivate Group—to search a specific Small Employer Group or         Association Group and make inactive.

Employee Enrollment—Employee Enrollment consist of the following operations:

-   -   Create Employee—to input details of an Employee for a specific         group.     -   Modify Employee—to search a specific employee for modification         prior to enrollment. This search feature would allow searching         employees attached to Small Employer Group or Association Group.     -   Inactivate Employee—to search a specific Employee attached to         Small Employer Group or Association—Group and make inactive.

Dependent Enrollment—Dependent Enrollment consist of the following operations:

-   -   Create Dependent—to input details of a Dependent of a specific         employee.     -   Modify Dependent—to search a specific dependent for modification         prior to enrollment. This search feature would allow searching         for dependent attached to an employee of a Small Employer Group         or Association Group.     -   Inactivate Dependent—to search a specific Dependent attached to         an employee of Small Employer Group or Association Group and         make inactive.

Individual Member Enrollment—Individual Member Enrollment consist of the following operations:

-   -   Modify Individual member—to search a specific member for         modification prior to enrollment. This search feature would         allow searching only for individual member who are attached to a         guaranteed association.     -   Inactivate Individual Member—to search a specific member those         attached to a guaranteed association and make inactive.     -   Create Individual Member Dependent—to input details of a         Dependent of a specific individual member.     -   Modify Individual Member Dependent member—to search a dependent         of a specific individual member for modification prior to         enrollment. This search feature would allow searching only for         dependent of an individual member who is attached to a         guaranteed association.     -   Inactivate Dependent of Individual Member—to search a dependent         of a specific individual member who are attached to a guaranteed         association and make inactive.

Create Group (Small Employer Group)

The create group screen is to enter details of a group. The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new group details.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of a new group by selecting small employer group are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Then select the option Group         Enrollment and Create Group. (See Figure C-15)     -   Step-2: Screen displays with the option of selecting a group         hierarchy. (See Figure C-16)     -   Step-3: On choosing Small Employer Group and Clicking continue         button screen navigates to General Info. Enter the values in the         respective field, as per the format briefed in fields         explanation section Field Explanation, and click Continue. (See         Figure C-17)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Post Mark Date Text for post mark date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Accepts in the format MM/DD/YYYY Received Date Text for received date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Accepts in the format MM/DD/YYYY Company Information Legal Name The text for name of the group. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 60 characters. Field is mandatory Doing Business As The text for business nature. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 60 characters. Field is optional Type of Business Choose the type of business from the drop down list available Tax Identification The text for tax identification. Accepts numeric values of exactly 9 digits Address Information: Physical and Billing Address-Note: Enter Billing Address if different from the Physical Address. Street Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Suite The text for company suite/apt# Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, State and County are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America County Choose the name of the county from the drop down list of counties available for the ZIP Code entered. Contact Information Mode of Choose the mode of correspondence from the drop Correspondence down list available. Contact 1 and Contact 2 - Fill in the relevant for Contact 1 and 2. Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Phone Number The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values of exactly 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Extension The text for extension number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 5 digits. Fax The text for fax number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values of exactly 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Email The text for email of the contact person. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters Contact Comments The text for comments. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters. Field is optional

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and navigates to Billing Information screen and the system generates Group ID. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage Info and Add Employees are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between tabs is possible only if there is a valid group ID generated and assigned to the group. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-4: Screen navigates to billing information. Enter the         values in the respective fields, as per the format briefed in         field's explanation section and click Continue. (See Figure         C-18)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Mode of payment Choose a mode of payment from the drop down list available. Based on selection corresponding fields will enable to enter the values. For e.g. if the value selected is card payment, EFT will be disabled and allows only entering card details and vice versa. Credit Card Information Cardholder's The text for cardholder's name. Names Accepts alphabets and space between two words. Credit Card Type Choose the type of credit card from the drop down list available. Credit Card No The text for credit card number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 30 digits Expiration Date Choose a month of expiration from the drop down list available Expiration Year The text for expiration year. Accepts numeric values of exactly 4. Example 2002. Billing Address As it appears on the credit Card Street Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters. ZIP The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. State The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. City Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America EFT Information Bank Name The text for bank name. Accepts alphabets and space between two words. Routing Number The text for routing number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. Account Number The text for account number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. Account Type Choose the type of account from the drop down list available. Depositor's Name The text for depositor's name. Accepts alphabets and space between two words. Initial Payment Information Amount Received The text for amount received. Accepts only numeric values in the format 999999999.99 Date Receive The text for date received. Choose from the calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY. Check # The text for check number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. No Check Received Check the option of no checks received for any non- receipt of checks.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and Navigates to Agent Information screen. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary of information entered for group. Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information for the group. Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage Info and Add Employees are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between tabs is possible only if there is a valid group ID generated and assigned to the group. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-5: Screen navigates to Agent Info screen. Agent/Agency ID         is selected by clicking search icon. (See Figure C-19)     -   Step-6: This pops up a screen to select agent/agency id. Enter         value in any one of the fields, or simply click search button to         perform search operation. (See Figure C-20)     -   Step-7: Click on agent/agency id for selection. (See Figure         C-21)     -   Step-8: Add the Agent information to the table for temporary         storage. After filling other relevant information in agent info         screen, as per the format briefed in field's explanation section         and click Continue

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Agent ID Choose an agent id by clicking search icon Agent Type Choose an agent type from the drop down list available. Based on the selection of the agent type the percent commission split entry and the Receive ROE packets option would be available. Percent commission The text for percent commission. Accepts numeric split values in the range of 1-100 (Example 100.00). This will be enabled only if the Agent type selected is “Agent Of Record” Sum of the percentage for all the Agent of Record added should be equal to 100.00. Receive ROE/OE Click the check box to receive ROE/OE packets for packets agent. This option will not be available for Agent Type “General Agent”. Agent Commission The text for agent commission. Defaults the value defined in CM—rate Administration for Agent Commission. Accepts numeric values less than or equal to the defaulted value in the in the range of 1-100 (Example 4.45) Check the box if the Click the check box for a group with out an agent. group is without an This option will be available only for the Agent agent Type, “Agent of Record and Writing Agent”.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of agent information. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Update Update the contents of agent information. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only on saving the record Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving the record Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary of information entered for group creation Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Continue Saves the data and navigates to Coverage Information screen. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tab General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage Info and Add Employees are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between tabs is possible only if there is a valid group ID generated and assigned to the group. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-9: Screen navigates to coverage information. Enter the         values in the respective fields, as per the format briefed in         field's explanation section and click Continue. (See Figure         C-22)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Waiting Period Information Employee Type Choose an Employee Type from the drop down list available Waiting Period Choose a waiting period from the drop down list available RAF Discounting RAF List the RAF tier applicable for the group based on the RAF tier available on group's effective date. Contribution Line of Coverage Choose a line of coverage from the drop down list elected available Contribution For Choose a contribution for from the drop down list available. Contribution can be for an employee or dependent. Contribution Type Choose a contribution type from the drop down list available. List the contribution type “% Lowest Cost HMO”, “% Lowest Cost Plan”, “% Specified Plan”, “Flat $ Amount”. On Selecting % Specified Plan the page would get refreshed and the Plan Name for the Specified LOC would be populated in the Drop Down List “Plan Name” Contribution The text for contribution amount. Accepts numeric Amount values in the format 99999999.99 for flat $ amount and for the rest of the option it accepts as % value say 100.00 Plan Name Choose a plan name from the drop down list available if the Contribution Type selected is “% Specified Plan”. Current Group Choose a group insurer from the drop down list Insurer available Whether group Click the option yes or no legally required to provide workers compensation coverage Workers Choose a compensation carrier name from the drop compensation down list available carrier name Number of The text for total number of employees including Employees (Full full time and part time. Accepts numeric values time and part time) Number of full time The text for number of full time employees at the employees at the time of applying. Accepts numeric values time of application Number of eligible The text for number of eligible employees at the employees at the time of applying. Accepts numeric values time of application Number of The text for number of employees at the time of employee applying applying. Accepts numeric values Have you employed Click the option yes or no 20 or more employees for 20 or more weeks during the current or preceding year (TEFRA) Have you employed Click the option yes or no 20 or more employees during at least 50% of the preceding calendar year (COBRA) Are you offering Click the option yes or no coverage to employees working more 20-29 hours per week Are you offering Click the option yes or no coverage to domestic partners Are you offering Click the option yes or no coverage to 1099 Employer's Check this Check box if Employer's signature is Signature verified. Date Signed The text for Date Signed. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add (Waiting Add the contents of Waiting Period information. Period Information) It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Add (Contribution) Add the contents of Contribution and Coverage elected. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Update (Waiting Updates the contents of Waiting Period information. Period Information) It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Update Update the contents of Contribution and Coverage (Contribution) elected. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Cancel Cancels the operation that was currently performed prior to saving the record. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary [Link] display the summary information entered for group creation Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information [Link] displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Missing Info Saves the data and navigates to Missing Information Page Continue/Add EE Saves the data and navigates to Add Employee screen. Create New Group Saves the data entered and navigates to the screen Group Hierarchy for creating New Group. Cancel Clears or restores the content entered in the fields only prior to saving the records. Tab General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage info and Add Employees are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between tabs is possible only if there is a valid group ID generated and assigned to the group. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-10: Screen navigates to add employee general information.         Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the format         briefed in field's explanation section. (See Figure C-23)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Information Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. First name is mandatory. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for last name Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Last name is mandatory. Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Birth date cannot be later than the current date. Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. Address Information: Physical and Alternate Address-Note: Enter Alternate Address if different from the Physical Address. Street Address The text for address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Apt The text for suite/apt#. . . Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, State and County are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America County Choose the name of the county from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Mode of Choose the mode of correspondence from the drop Correspondence down list available Phone Number The text for telephone number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Extension The text for extension number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 5 digits Fax The text for fax number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Email The text for email of the employee. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and navigates to coverage information for employees. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary information entered for group creation Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen. Tab General Info, Coverage Info, Add Dependent are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between the tabs is possible only if there is a valid Employee ID generated and assigned to the employee. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-11: Screen navigates to coverage information. Enter the         values in the respective fields, as per the format briefed in         field's explanation section and click Continue. (See Figure         C-24)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Information Hours worked per The text for worked hours per week. Accepts week numeric values not exceeding 2 digits. Date of employment The text for date of employment. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Employee type Choose an employee type from the drop down list available Plan Information Line of coverage Choose a line of coverage from the drop down list available Medical waived Click the check box for medical waive if the employee is waiving medical. Carrier selection Choose a carrier selection from the drop down list (Benefit level) available Coverage choice Choose a coverage from the drop down list available PCP ID/Medical The text for PCP ID. Accepts alphabets and numeric group ID values not exceeding 10 characters. Are you an existing Click the check box if you are an existing patient patient PCP last name The text for PCP last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. PCP first name The text for PCP first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Prior plan type Choose a plan type from the drop down list available Prior plan name Choose a plan name from the drop down list available Prior insurance The text for insurance start date. Choose a date by start date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Prior insurance end The text for insurance end date. Choose a date by date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Other coverage kept The text for other coverage. Accepts alphabets with values not exceeding 50 characters. Employee signature Click the check box, to have employee signature Date signed The text for date signed. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Date cannot accept future date.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of employee coverage information. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Update Update the contents of Plan Information. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Cancel Cancels the operation that was currently performed prior to saving the record. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary [Link] display the summary of information entered for group creation Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information [Link] displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen. Continue Saves the data and navigates to Coverage information screen. Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary of information entered for group creation Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tab General Info, Coverage Info, Add Dependent are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between the tabs are possible only if there is a valid Employee ID generated and assigned to the employee Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-12: Screen navigates to add dependent information. Enter         the values in the respective fields, as per the format briefed         in field's explanation section and click anyone of the button         shown for subsequent operation. (See Figure C-25)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Dependent Information First Name The text for first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. First name is mandatory. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for last name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Last name is mandatory. Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon.. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Birth date cannot be later than the current date. Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. Relationship Choose the relationship from the drop down list available. Street Address The text for address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Suite The text for suite/apt#. . . Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, and State are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Line of Coverage Selected carrier The text for selected carrier. It is a read only field Coverage choice The text for coverage. It is a read only field Service area The text for service area. It is a read only field Prior plan type Choose a plan type from the drop down list available Prior plan The text for plan name. Accepts alphabets Waived Click the check box if Line of Coverage is waived. Start date The text for insurance start date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. End date The text for insurance end date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. PCP ID/ The text for PCP ID. Accepts alphabets and numeric values not exceeding 10 characters. PCP last name The text for PCP last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. PCP first name The text for PCP first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Disabled dependent Click the option of temporary or permanent. This is enable if the relationship opted is child Domestic partner Click the option for domestic partner. It depends on the value selected in relationship Legal guardian Click the option for legal guardian. It depends on the value selected in relationship Signature Click the check box if the signature is opted

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Employee Saves the data and navigates to the screen for adding employees. Add Dependent Saves the data and navigates to the screen for adding dependent Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary of information entered for group creation Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tab General Info, Coverage Info, Add Dependent are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between the tabs are possible only if there is a valid Employee ID generated and assigned to the employee Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-13: Clicking enrollment summary button screen navigates to         enrollment summary. This screen shows the overall information         that is entered. Enter the values in the respective fields, as         per the format briefed in field's explanation section and click         Pre Enrollment button for checking the eligibility criteria for         the Group and Members. (See Figure C-26)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each element in the screen. Element Description Group Contains header information of the Group Information Header Name of the Group Text for the Name of the Group Group ID Text and Link for the Group ID to navigate to the Group General Info screen Group Type Specifies the Type of the Group like Small Employer Group Proposed Effective The text for Proposed Effective Date. Choose a Date date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Default effective date is first of the following month. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the group. Work Group Text for Work Group. This specifies the internal work group attached to the Group. This is based on the writing agent's work group. Enrollment Enrollment Summary Information is broken down Summary into tree structure. The tree can by expanded or collapsed. Information The level of the tree is as per the example given below: −Employee   −Dependent   −Dependent −Employee   −Dependent −Employee +Employee −Employee   +Dependent +−Employee Where (−) signifies expanded view and (+) signifies collapsed view. Employee ID Text for Employee ID Employee SSN Text for Employee SSN Employee Name Text for employee Name (First Name and Last Name) Effective Date Text for Employee Effective date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Defaults effective date of the Group. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the employee. Dependent ID Text for Dependent ID Dependent SSN Text for Dependent SSN Dependent Name Text for Dependent Name (First Name and Last Name) Effective Date Text for Dependent Effective date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Defaults effective date of the Employee. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the Dependent. Enrollment There are two part of this information: Information   1) Entered based on verification   2) Based on the information provide on the      Coverage Info screen Entered based on verification Total Full Time Value is shown based on the actual full time Applied (A) employee applied (System Identified) Total part Time Value is shown based on the actual part time Applied (B) employee applied (System Identified) Employee Waived Text to enter Employee Waived. Contains only (C) whole number. Accepts numbers not exceeding 5 digits. Manually entered based on verification. Employee Declined Text to enter Employee Declined. Contains only (D) whole number. Accepts numbers not exceeding 5 digits. Manually entered based on verification. Total Eligible Text to display total eligible employee. Employee Employee (E)= Applying is sum total of A + B + D. Total Employee Text to display total employee applying. Employee Applying (F) Applying is sum total of A + B. % Participation Test to display % participation. Participation is % of E/F Based on Info Provided Total Full Time Text for Total Full Time Applied. Based on the Applied (A) information provide on the Coverage Info screen Total part Time Text for Total Part Time Applied. Based on the Applied (B) information provide on the Coverage Info screen Total Employees Text to display total employee applied. Employee Applied Applied is sum total of A + B

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes <<, <, >, >> The enrollment summary shows record for 5 employees on single screen. If the employee size increases more than 5. These buttons are used for navigating to the next and previous records for viewing. <<—Show first record (s) <—Show previous record (s) >—Show next record (s) >>—Show last record (s) Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen.

-   -   Step-14: Clicking pre enrollment navigates to missing info         screen. Missing information screen provide information on the         data that is required to complete an enrollment process. This         also checks for the eligibility of the group and member for         enrolling into PacAdvantage Program. For a successful creation         of a group the missing information should be empty. The user         role and authority can overrule certain missing information.

Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the format briefed in field's explanation section and click Enroll button for enrolling the Group and Members. (See Figure C-27)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each element in the screen. Element Description Group Contains header information of the Group Information Header Name of the Group Text for the Name of the Group Group ID Text and Link for the Group ID to navigate to the Group General Info screen Group Type Specifies the Type of the Group like Small Employer Group Proposed Effective The text for Proposed Effective Date. Choose a Date date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Default effective date is first of the following month. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the group. Work Group Text for Work Group. This specifies the internal work group attached to the Group. Internal is based on the writing agent's work group. Tree Enrollment Missing Information is broken down Structure into tree structure. The tree can by expanded or collapsed. The level of the tree is as per the example given below: −Employee   −Dependent   −Dependent −Employee   −Dependent −Employee +Employee −Employee   +Dependent +−Employee Where (−) signifies expanded view and (+) signifies collapsed view. Group Missing This identifies all the eligibility rules and the Info information that are incomplete on Group level for completeing the enrollment process Missing Entities List the missing entities for the group. Provides a link to go to the respective screen to fill in the relevant information to complete all the required entries. Message List the message against each missing entities. Employee This identifies all the eligibility rules and the Missing Info information that are incomplete on Employee level for completing the enrollment process. Missing Entities List the missing entities for the employee. Provides a link to go to the respective screen to fill in the relevant information to complete all the required entries. Message List the message against each missing entities. Dependent This identifies all the eligibility rules and the Missing Info information that are incomplete on dependent level for completing the enrollment process. Missing Entities List the missing entities for the dependent. Provides a link to go to the respective screen to fill in the relevant information to complete all the required entries. Message List the message against each missing entities. Enrollment Action Choose from the drop down list the action to be performed for enrollment. Enroll/Decline Remarks Text for remarks if any. Reasons for Decline Choose from the drop down list the reason for decline. Reasons for Other Text for other reason. If the reason for decline is other than the reasons available.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Send mail Click this link to send missing information to the Internal Work Group (GMS representatives) attached to this Group. Preview Invoice Click this Link to preview the Invoice details prior to generation of invoice. Enroll Saves the data if there are no missing information and navigates to enrollment confirmation page. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes <<, <, >, >> The enrollment missing information shows record for 5 employees on single screen. If the employee size increases more than 5. These buttons are used for navigating to the next and previous records for viewing. <<—Show first record (s) <—Show previous record (s) >—Show next record (s) >>—Show last record (s) Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen. Preview Invoice Click Preview Invoice to pop up a new browser window to preview the invoice for the group

Missing Information

The following table provides explanation for each missing information and what needs to be done to remove missing information from the screen Missing Entity Message Reasons/Remedy Group Level General These are missing information pertains to the Information Group Level information required in the Group General Information Screen Employer Employer Tax ID is not Fill in the Employer tax Tax ID specified ID in the Group General Info Screen Type of Type of Business is not Choose the Type of Business specified Business Listed from the list in Group General Info Screen Address Address information is Fill in the address not specified information in the Group General Info Screen ZIP ZIP Code is not specified Fill in the zip code in the Group General Info Screen City City name is not specified Fill in the City name in the Group General Info Screen County County is not specified Choose County for Group from the list in group general info screen State State name is not Choose the State from the specified list in group general info screen Mode of Mode of Correspondence Choose the Mode of Correspon- is not specified Correspondence for dence Contact 1 from the list in group general info screen Contact First Contact first name for Fill in the Contact first in Name Contact 1 is not specified the Group General Info Screen Contact Last Contact last name for Fill in the Contact last in name Contact 1 is not specified the Group General Info Screen Phone Phone for Contact 1 is not Fill in the Contact Phone specified in the Group General Info Screen Email Email for Contact 1 is not This is required if the specified mode of correspondence selected is Email. Fill in the Contact Email in the Group General Info Screen Billing These missing information pertains to the Group Information Level information required in the Billing Information Screen Mode of Mode of payment is not Choose the Mode of payment specified Payment for the group from the list in Group Billing Info Screen Check Number Check Number is not Fill in the Check number specified. in the Group Billing Info Screen Check Date Date Check received is Fill in the Date received not specified in the Group Billing Info Screen Check Number Check Number received is Fill in the Check Number not specified in the Group Billing Info Screen Initial Payment Initial payment not If initial payment check is received received then uncheck the box “No Check Received” in the Group Biliing Info Screen Initial Payment Initial Payment is not If initial payment check is sufficient to get enrolled received but there is a shortfall in the amount this message would be shown. Check the short fall by previewing the invoice with the amount received. The variation in amount received by more than (−) $2 will allow user with level II and above only to enroll. The variation in amount received by more than (−) $50 will allowing user with level III and above only to enroll The variation in amount received by more than (−) $100 will allow user with level IV and above only to enroll Cardholder's Cardholder's name is not This is required if the Name specified mode of payment opted by group is Credit Card. Fill in the Cardholder's name in the Group Billing Info Screen. Credit Card Credit Card Type is not This is required if the Type specified. mode of payment opted by group is Credit Card Choose the Credit Card Type for the group from the list in Group Billing Info Screen Credit Card Credit Card Number is This is required if the Number not specified mode of payment opted by group is Credit Card. Fill in the Credit Card Number in the Group Billing Info Screen. Expiration Date Credit Card Expiration This is required if the Date is not specified mode of payment opted by group is Credit Card. Fill in the Credit Card Expiration Date in the Group Billing Info Screen. Bank Name Bank name is not This is required if the specified mode of payment opted by group is EFT. Fill in the Bank Name in the Group Billing Info Screen. Routing Routing Number is not This is required if the Number specified mode of payment opted by group is EFT. Fill in the Routing Number in the Group Billing Info Screen. Account Type Account Type is not This is required if the specified mode of payment opted by group is EFT. Fill in the Account Type in the Group Billing Info Screen Depositor's Depositor's Name is not This is required if the Name specified mode of payment opted by group is EFT. Fill in the Depositor's Name in the Group Billing Info Screen Agent These missing information pertains to the Group Information Level information required in the Agent Information Screen Writing Agent Writing Agent is not Choose the Writing Agent specified for the Group in the Group Agent Info Screen Agent of Agent of Record is not This is required if Record specified commission for the agent exists. Choose the Agent of Record for the Group in the Group Agent Info Screen Agent License Agent License Number is Go to Agent/Agency Number not specified Master Screen, search for the agent/ agency attached with group and fill in the License information. License Expiry License Expiry Date is Go to Agent/Agency Date not specified Master Screen, search for the agent/agency attached with group and fill in the License information. License Expiry Agent License Number is Go to Agent/Agency Date expired Master Screen, search for the agent/agency attached with group and modify the license expiry date. Commission % Commission split is not Check if the commission specified split for the agent of record exists. If not edit the corresponding agent of record and enter % commission split for the Agent of Record in the Group Agent Info Screen Total % Split in commission is Check if the total of the Commission less than 100% commission split's for the Split agent of record is 100. If not edit the corresponding agent of record and make changes to make commission split total to 100% in the Group Agent Info Screen Coverage These missing information pertains to the Group Information Level information required in the Coverage Information Screen RAF Rate Differential factor is This is required to arrive not specified to the Premium Calculation for the Group. Select the RAF from the list in Group Coverage Info Screen Workers Is your Group legally Choose the Option Yes or compensation required to provide No in Group Coverage coverage workers compensation Info Screen coverage? Worker Worker Compensation This is required if the Compensation Carrier Name is not Workers compensation Carrier Name specified coverage opted is yes. Choose the Worker Compensation Carrier Name from the list in Group Coverage Info Screen Total How many employees (full Fill in the “How many Employee time and part time) employees (full time and available with the Group part time)” available with the Group in the Group Coverage Info Screen Full Time How many full time Fill in the “How many full Employee employees available with with time employees” the Group available with the Group in the Group Coverage Info Screen Eligible How many eligible Fill in the “How many Employee employees at the time of eligible employees at the application time of application” available with the Group in the Group Coverage Info Screen Employees How many employees Fill in the “How many Applying applying employees applying” in the Group Coverage Info Screen TEFRA Have you employed 20 or Choose the Option Yes or more employees for 20 or No in Group Coverage more weeks during the Info Screen current or preceding year (TEFRA) COBRA Have you employed 20 or Choose the Option Yes or more employees during at No in Group Coverage least 50% of the preceding Info Screen calendar year (COBRA) Part time Are you offering coverage Choose the Option Yes or Coverage to permanent employee No in Group Coverage working 20-29 hours per Info Screen week? Domestic Are you offering coverage Choose the Option Yes or Partner to domestic partners? No in Group Coverage Coverage Info Screen Waiting Period Waiting Period for the Add waiting period for the employees is not specified employee based on the employee type in Group Coverage Info Screen Waiting Period Managerial Employee Edit the waiting period Waiting period not information and update specified the waiting period for the employee type in Group Coverage Info Screen Waiting Period Non-Managerial Edit the waiting period Employee Waiting period information and update not specified the waiting period for the employee type in Group Coverage Info Screen Waiting Period Exempt Employee Edit the waiting period Waiting period not information and update specified the waiting period for the employee type in Group Coverage Info Screen Waiting Period Non-Exempt Employee Edit the waiting period Waiting period not information and update specified the waiting period for the employee type in Group Coverage Info Screen Waiting Period Union Employee Waiting Edit the waiting period period not specified information and update the waiting period for the employee type in Group Coverage Info Screen Waiting Period Non-Union Employee Edit the waiting period Waiting period not information and update specified the waiting period for the employee type in Group Coverage Info Screen Waiting Period Full-Time Employee Edit the waiting period Waiting period not information and update specified the waiting period for the employee type in Group Coverage Info Screen Waiting Period Part-Time Employee Edit the waiting period Waiting period not information and update specified the waiting period for the employee type in Group Coverage Info Screen Line of Line of coverage not Add Line of Coverage in Coverage specified Group Coverage Info Screen Contribution Employee Contribution Edit the Line of coverage Type type not specified wherein the Contribution Type is not specified and update the Contribution Type in Group Coverage Info Screen Contribution Employee Contribution Edit the Line of coverage Amount Amount not specified wherein the Contribution Amount is not specified and update the Contribution Amount in Group Coverage Info Screen Contribution Dependent Contribution Edit the Line of coverage Type type not specified wherein the Contribution Type is not specified and update the Contribution Type in Group Coverage Info Screen Contribution Dependent Contribution Edit the Line of coverage Amount Amount not specified wherein the Contribution Amount is not specified and update the Contribution Amount in Group Coverage Info Screen Contribution Contribution Type for Employee and Dependent Type Employee and Dependent must have same Variation differs. Contribution Type. Edit the Line of coverage wherein the Contribution Type varies and update the Contribution Type in Group Coverage Info Screen Plan Name Plan not selected for Edit the Line of coverage Contribution Type “% wherein the Plan Name is Specified Plan” not specified and update the Plan Name in Group Coverage Info Screen Employee These missing information pertains to the General Employee Level information required in the Information Employee General Information Screen Address Address information is Fill in the address not specified information in the Employee General Info Screen City City is not specified Fill in the City in the Employee General Info Screen State State is not specified Fill in the City in the Employee General Info Screen ZIP Code ZIP Code is not specified Fill in the ZIP Code in the Employee General Info Screen Date of Birth Date of Birth is not Fill in the Date of Birth in specified the Employee General Info Screen Gender Gender is not specified Choose the Gender in the Employee General Info Screen SSN SSN is not specified Fill in the SSN in the Employee General Info Screen. If the employee refuse to provide SSN then click auto generate SSN/Unique ID in the Employee General Info Screen. Auto generation of SSN/Unique ID will be available only for the user with role as level II and above Mode of Mode of Correspondence Choose the Mode of Correspon- is not specified Correspondence for dence Employee from the list in Employee general info screen Email Email for Employee is not This is required if the specified mode of correspondence selected is Email. Fill in the Email in the Employee general info screen Employee These missing information pertains to the Coverage Employee Level information required in the Information Employee Coverage Information Screen Hours Worked Hours worked per week Fill in the Hours worked not specified per week in the Employee Coverage Info Screen Date of Date of employment not Fill in the Date of Employment specified Employment in the Employee Coverage Info Screen Employee Employee signature is Verify employee's Signature missing signature and check Employee Signature checkbox in the Employee Coverage Info Screen Date Signed Date Signed is missing Verify Date signed and fill in the Date Signed in the Employee Coverage Info Screen Employee Type Employee Type not Choose the Employee specified Type for Employee Type from list in Employee Coverage info screen Employee Variation in Employee Check for the Employee Type- Type at Group and Type specified in the Waiting Period Employee Level Group Coverage Info and the Employee Coverage Info. Employee Type specified in The Group Level and the Employee Level can have variation. Either change the Employee Type in Employee Coverage Info screen or add the Employee Type in the Group Coverage Info. Employee Employee's Line of Choose the Line of Coverage Coverage not specified Coverage for the Employee in Employee Coverage info screen Medical Medical Line of Coverage Choose the Line of Coverage not specified Coverage for the Employee in Employee Coverage info screen. If the employee waives medical coverage check the checkbox Medical Waived. Dental Dental Line of Coverage This is required if the Coverage not specified Group offers optional benefits. Choose the Line of Coverage for the Employee in Employee Coverage info screen Vision Vision Line of Coverage This is required if the Coverage not specified Group offers optional benefits. Choose the Line of Coverage for the Employee in Employee Coverage info screen CAM Coverage CAM Line of Coverage not This is required if the specified Group offers optional benefits. Choose the Line of Coverage for the Employee in Employee Coverage info screen Coverage Coverage Choice between Choose the appropriate Choice the Line of Coverage coverage choices as per differs the illustration provided in the column below and edit the coverage choice for the specific Line of Coverage and update in Employee Coverage info screen. Or In dependent Info Screen waive the Optional coverage choice for dependent under 2 by checking the check box Waive. Coverage Coverage choice for the Medical should have highest Choice precedence. There are Four Coverage Choices Illustration 1-Employee Family 2-Employee Child 3-Employee Spouse 4-Employee Only Case 1: If coverage choice for medical is Employee Child, Optional benefit cannot have employee spouse. It should be Employee Child or Employee Only provided child is under 2 Case 2: If Coverage Choice for Medical is Employee Spouse optional benefits cannot have employee child. It should also be Employee Spouse Case 3: If Coverage Choice for Medical is Employee Child optional benefits cannot have employee only if at least one child is above 2 years of age. It should also be Employee child Dependent Number of Dependents is This would be the case Count not sufficient to satisfy when the dependent Coverage Choice. information is not entered into the system. Add Dependent. This can also occur if the number of dependent as specified in coverage choice does not match with the dependents available. Add or Inactivate dependent as applicable. Dependent Dependent information is This would occur if the not specified Coverage choice specified is other than employee only and depended record is not entered. Add Dependent Dependent These missing information pertains to the Information Dependent Level information required in the Dependent Information Screen Date of Birth Date of Birth is not Fill in the Date of Birth in specified the Dependent General Info Screen Gender Gender is not specified Choose the Gender in the Dependent General Info Screen SSN SSN is not specified Fill in the SSN in the Dependent General Info Screen. If the dependent refuse to provide SSN then click auto generate SSN/Unique ID in the Dependent General Info Screen. Auto generation of SSN/Unique ID will be available only for the user with role as level II and above Relationship Relationship of the Choose the dependent dependent with the relationship from the employee not specified Dependent Info Screen Relationship- Relationship, child is Verify if the child is Child specified for child above disabled and choose if 23 years of age Disabled Permanent or Temporary. Signature Dependent signature is This is required if the missing dependent age is above 18. Verify the signature for the dependent and check the checkbox Signature in the dependent info screen Relationship Number of spouse is more Check for the relationship than one in the dependent info screen. There can only be one of the following relationship for the dependent: Spouse or Ex-Spouse or domestic partner. Choose different relationship for the other dependent in the dependent info screen or inactivate the other dependent General This missing information pertains to the All Missing Level of information. This may be due to non Information on availability of sufficient master record to All Level process enrollment or may require business decisions or administrative changes in the system to overcome this missing information Employee Employee Record Does Probably the entries for Record not exist the employees are not made. Add employees to satisfy this eligibility rule. Group Size Group Size cannot be less Probably the entries for than 2 Employees the employees are not made or less that two employee records only exist in the system. Add at least 2 employees to satisfy this eligibility rule. Group Size Group Size cannot be Probably the entries for greater than 50 the employees are more Employees than 50 records. This does not satisfy eligibility criteria rule for Small Employer Group. Group cannot be enrolled. Participation Participation Rule is not Participation rule states Rule satisfied that 65% of the eligible employees need to enroll if the group size is >3 and 100% of the eligible employees need to enroll if the group size is <=3. Check if this is met with. If not then the group does not satisfy the eligibility rule. Group cannot be enrolled. Check this in Group Summary Screen. Contribution Contribution Rule for The employer Rule Medical is not satisfied contribution for the Medical Line of Coverage is not satisfied. Check the Contribution Amount. Edit the Line of coverage and change the contribution Amount and update in the Group Coverage Info Screen. Contribution Contribution Rule for The employer Rule Dental is not satisfied contribution for the Line of Coverage is not satisfied. Check the Contribution Amount. Edit the Line of coverage and change the contribution Amount and update in the Group Coverage Info Screen. Contribution Contribution Rule for The employer Rule Vision is not satisfied contribution for the Line of Coverage is not satisfied. Check the Contribution Amount. Edit the Line of coverage and change the contribution Amount and update in the Group Coverage Info Screen. Contribution Contribution Rule for The employer Rule CAM is not satisfied contribution for the Line of Coverage is not satisfied. Check the Contribution Amount. Edit the Line of coverage and change the contribution Amount and update in the Group Coverage Info Screen. Rate Rate is not available for This is possible if the Availability the Plan opted by the Rates are not loaded for Employee the Group's effective date of enrollment. Load the rates for the specific plan from the Carrier Maintenance-Rate Import utility. Admin Fees Admin Fees for the Small This is possible if the Employer Group is not Admin Fees is not specified specified for the Group's Effective date. Add Admin fees from the Carrier Maintenance-Rate Administration Agent Agent Commission for the This is possible if the Commission Small Employer Group is Agent Commission is not not specified specified for the Group's Effective date. Add Agent Commission from the Carrier Maintenance- Rate Administration Rate Rate Differential Factor This is possible if the Rate Differential for the Small Employer Differential Factor is not Factor Group is not specified specified for the Group's Effective date. Add Rate Differential Factor from the Carrier Maintenance- Rate Administration Plan Medical Plan selected by Normally the Plan for the availability the Employees not employee is listed based available in the service on the Plan available in area. the employees Service Area. Rare cases if the User Modifies the ZIP Code in the Employee General Info Screen and fails to update the Plan for the specific ZIP code, Service Area combination this message would be shown. Pick the plans that are available for the Employee in the Employee Coverage Info screen. Plan Dental Plan selected by Normally the Plan for the availability the Employees not employee is listed based available in the service on the Plan available in area. the employees Service Area. Rare cases if the User Modifies the ZIP Code in the Employee General Info Screen and fails to update the Plan for the specific ZIP code, Service Area combination this message would be shown. Pick the plans that are available for the Employee in the Employee Coverage Info screen. Plan Vision Plan selected by Normally the Plan for the availability the Employees not employee is listed based available in the service on the Plan available in area. the employees Service Area. Rare cases if the User Modifies the ZIP Code in the Employee General Info Screen and fails to update the Plan for the specific ZIP code, Service Area combination this message would be shown. Pick the plans that are available for the Employee in the Employee Coverage Info screen. Plan CAM Plan selected by the Normally the Plan for the availability Employees not available employee is listed based in the service area. on the Plan available in the employees Service Area. Rare cases if the User Modifies the ZIP Code in the Employee General Info Screen and fails to update the Plan for the specific ZIP code, Service Area combination this message would be shown. Pick the plans that are available for the Employee in the Employee Coverage Info screen.

-   -   Step-15: On completing all the relevant information that is         required for a successful enrollment of a group, the following         is the sample screen for a successful enrollment of a group.         (See Figure C-28)

Create Group (Alternate Group—Individual Member)

The create group screen is to enter details of a group. The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new group details.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of a new group by selecting group under alternate group are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Then select the option Group         Enrollment and Create Group. (See Figure C-29)     -   Step-2: Screen displays with the option of selecting a group         hierarchy. (See Figure C-30)     -   Step-3: Screen navigates select an alternate group. Enter a         10-digit number or choose an association name. (See Figure C-31)     -   Step-4: Choose the option of individual member and click         Continue. (See Figure C-32)     -   Step-5: Clicking continue button screen navigates to general         info. Enter the values in the respective field, as per the         format briefed in fields explanation section Field Explanation,         and click Continue. (See Figure C-33)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Post Mark Date Text for post mark date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Accepts in the format MM/DD/YYYY Received Date Text for received date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Accepts in the format MM/DD/YYYY Employee Information Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. First name is mandatory. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Last name is mandatory Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. Address Physical and Alternate Address- Note: Enter Information; Alternate Address if different from the Physical Address. Street Address The text for address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Suite The text for suite/apt # Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, State and County are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America County Choose the name of the county from the drop down list of counties available for the ZIP Code entered. Mode of Choose the mode of correspondence from the drop Correspondence down list available. Phone Number The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Extension The text for extension number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 5 digits. Fax The text for fax number of the contact person Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Email The text for email of the contact person. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Navigates to Billing Information screen.. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage Info and Add Employees are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between tabs is possible only if there is a valid group ID generated and assigned to the group. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-6: Screen navigates to billing information. Enter the         values in the respective fields, as per the format briefed in         field's explanation section and click Continue. (See Figure         C-34)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanation provided for Small Employer Group—Billing Info.

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality provided for Small Employer Group—Billing Info

-   -   Step-7: Screen navigates to Agent Info screen. Agent/Agency ID         is selected by clicking search icon. (See Figure C-35)     -   Step-8: This pops up a screen to select agency id Enter value in         any one of the field or simply click Search button to perform         search operation. (See Figure C-36)     -   Step-9: Click on agency id for selection. (See Figure C-37)     -   Step-10: After filling other relevant information in agent info         screen, as per the format briefed in field's explanation section         and click Continue

Field Explanation

Refer field explanation provided for Small Employer Group—Agent Info.

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality provided for Small Employer Group—Agent Info.

-   -   Step-11: Screen navigates to coverage information. Enter the         values in the respective fields, as per the format briefed in         field's explanation section and click Continue. (See Figure         C-38)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Hours worked per The text for worked hours per week. Accepts numeric week values. Date of hire The text for date of employment. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Employee type Choose an employee type from the drop down list available Pay Roll Check box for Pay Roll verification. Check this if pay roll is verified. RAF Text to display the RAF applicable for the Individual Association Member. Line of coverage Choose a line of coverage from the drop down list available Medical waived Click the check box for medical waive if the employee is waiving medical. Carrier selection Choose a carrier selection from the drop down list (Benefit level) available Coverage choice Choose a coverage from the drop down list available PCP ID/Medical The text for PCP ID. Accepts alphabets and numeric group ID values not exceeding 10 characters. Are you an Click the check box if you are an existing patient existing patient PCP last name The text for PCP last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. PCP first name The text for PCP first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Prior plan type Choose a plan type from the drop down list available Prior plan name Choose a plan name from the drop down list available Prior insurance The text for insurance start date. Choose a date by start date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Prior insurance The text for insurance end date. Choose a date by end date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Other coverage The text for other coverage. Accepts alphabets with kept values not exceeding 50 characters. Employee Click the check box, to have employee signature signature Additional The text for any additional coverage. Accepts coverage alphabets with values not exceeding 50 characters. Date signed The text for date signed. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Date cannot accept future date.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of employee coverage information. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Update Update the contents of Plan Information. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only on saving. Cancel Cancels the operation that was currently performed prior to saving the record. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary of information entered for group creation Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen. Continue Saves the data and navigates to Coverage Information screen. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tab General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage Info and Add Employees are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between tabs is possible only if there is a valid group ID generated and assigned to the group. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-12: Screen navigates to add dependent information. First         name and last name fields are mandatory and other fields are         optional. Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section and click         Continue. (See Figure C-39)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanation provided for Small Employer Group—Add Dependent.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Dependent Saves the data and navigates to the screen for adding dependent Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary of information entered for group creation Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tabs General Info, Coverage Info, Add Dependent are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between the tabs are possible only if there is a valid Employee ID generated and assigned to the employee Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-13: Clicking enrollment summary button screen navigates to         enrollment summary. This screen shows the overall information         that are entered will be shown. (See Figure C-40)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each element in the screen. Element Description Group Contains header information of the Group Information Header Name of the Text for the Name of the Group Group Group ID Text and Link for the Group ID to navigate to the Group General Info screen Group Type Specifies the Type of the Group like Small Employer Group Proposed The text for Proposed Effective Date. Choose a date by Effective Date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Default effective date is first of the following month. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the group. Work Group Text for Work Group. This specifies the internal work group attached to the Group. Internal is based on the writing agent's work group. Association ID Text to specify the Association ID Association Name Text to specify the Association Name Enrollment Enrollment Summary Information is broken down into Summary tree structure. The tree can by expanded or collapsed. Information The level of the tree is as per the example given below: −Employee −Dependent −Dependent +Dependent Where (−) signifies expanded view and (+) signifies collapsed view. Employee ID Text for Employee ID Employee SSN Text for Employee SSN Employee Name Text for employee Name (First Name and Last Name) Effective Date Text for Employee Effective date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Defaults effective date of the Group. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the employee. Dependent ID Text for Dependent ID Dependent SSN Text for Dependent SSN Dependent Name Text for Dependent Name (First Name and Last Name) Effective Date Text for Dependent Effective date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Defaults effective date of the Employee. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the Dependent.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen.

-   -   Step-14: Clicking pre enrollment navigates to missing info         screen. It gives the information that is left out while entering         input for creating a group. For a successful creation of a group         the missing information should be empty. (See Figure C-41)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each element in the screen. Element Description Group Contains header information of the Group Information Header Name of the Text for the Name of the Group Group Group ID Text and Link for the Group ID to navigate to the Group General Info screen Group Type Specifies the Type of the Group like Small Employer Group Proposed The text for Proposed Effective Date. Choose a date by Effective Date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Default effective date is first of the following month. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the group. Work Group Text for Work Group. This specifies the internal work group attached to the Group. Internal is based on the writing agent's work group. Association ID Text to specify the Association ID Association Name Text to specify the Association Name Tree Structure Enrollment Missing Information is broken down into tree structure. The tree can by expanded or collapsed. The level of the tree is as per the example given below: −Employee −Dependent −Dependent Where (−) signifies expanded view and (+) signifies collapsed view. Group Missing This identifies all the eligibility rules and the Info information that are incomplete on Group level for completing the enrollment process. Missing Entities List the missing entities for the group. Provides a link to go to the respective screen to fill in the relevant information to complete all the required entries. Message List the message against each missing entities. Employee This identifies all the eligibility rules and the Missing Info information that are incomplete on Employee level for completing the enrollment process. Missing Entities List the missing entities for the employee. Provides a link to go to the respective screen to fill in the relevant information to complete all the required entries. Message List the message against each missing entities. Dependent This identifies all the eligibility rules and the Missing Info information that are incomplete on dependent level for completing the enrollment process. Missing Entities List the missing entities for the dependent. Provides a link to go to the respective screen to fill in the relevant information to complete all the required entries. Message List the message against each missing entities. Enrollment Choose from the drop down list the action to be Action performed for enrollment. Enroll/Decline Remarks Text for remarks if any. Reasons for Choose from the drop down list the reasons for Decline decline. Reasons for Other Text for other reason. If the reason for decline is other enter the reasons here.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Enroll Saves the data if there are no missing information and navigates to enrollment confirmation page. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen.

Missing Information

The following table provides explanation for each missing information and what needs to be done to remove missing information from the screen Missing Entity Message Reasons/Remedy Member Level Employee These missing information pertains to the General Member Level information required in the Information General Information Screen Address Address information is Fill in the address not specified information in the Employee General Info Screen City City is not specified Fill in the City in the Employee General Info Screen State State is not specified Fill in the City in the Employee General Info Screen ZIP Code ZIP Code is not specified Fill in the ZIP Code in the Employee General Info Screen Date of Birth Date of Birth is not Fill in the Date of Birth in specified the Employee General Info Screen Gender Gender is not specified Choose the Gender in the Employee General Info Screen SSN SSN is not specified Fill in the SSN in the Employee General Info Screen. If the employee refuse to provide SSN then click auto generate SSN/Unique ID in the Employee General Info Screen. Auto generation of SSN/Unique ID will be available only for the user with role as level II and above Mode of Mode of Correspondence Choose the Mode of Correspondence is not specified Correspondence for Employee from the list in Employee general info screen Email Email for Employee is This is required if the not specified mode of correspondence selected is Email. Fill in the Email in the Employee general info screen Billing These missing information pertains to the Information Member Level information required in the Billing Information Screen Mode of payment Mode of payment is not Choose the Mode of specified Payment for the group from the list in Group Billing Info Screen Check Number Check Number is not Fill in the Check number specified. in the Group Billing Info Screen Check Date Date Check is received is Fill in the Date received not specified in the Group Billing Info Screen Check Number Check Number is Fill in the Check Number received is not specified in the Group Billing Info Screen Initial Payment Initial payment not If initial payment check is received received then uncheck the box “No Check Received” in the Group Billing Info Screen Initial Payment Initial Payment is not If initial payment check is sufficient to get enrolled received but there is a shortfall in the amount this message would be shown. Check the short fall by previewing the invoice with the amount received. The variation in amount received by more than (−) $2 will allow user with level II and above only to enroll. The variation in amount received by more than (−) $50 will allowing user with level III and above only to enroll The variation in amount received by more than (−) $100 will allow user with level IV and above only to enroll Cardholder's Cardholder's name is This is required if the Name not specified mode of payment opted by group is Credit Card. Fill in the Cardholder's name in the Group Billing Info Screen. Credit Card Type Credit Card Type is not This is required if the specified. mode of payment opted by group is Credit Card Choose the Credit Card Type for the group from the list in Group Billing Info Screen Credit Card Credit Card Number is This is required if the Number not specified mode of payment opted by group is Credit Card. Fill in the Credit Card Number in the Group Billing Info Screen. Expiration Date Credit Card Expiration This is required if the Date is not specified mode of payment opted by group is Credit Card. Fill in the Credit Card Expiration Date in the Group Billing Info Screen. Bank Name Bank name is not This is required if the specified mode of payment opted by group is EFT. Fill in the Bank Name in the Group Billing Info Screen. Routing Number Routing Number is not This is required if the specified mode of payment opted by group is EFT. Fill in the Routing Number in the Group Billing Info Screen. Account Type Account Type is not This is required if the specified mode of payment opted by group is EFT. Fill in the Account Type in the Group Billing Info Screen Depositor's Name Depositor's Name is not This is required if the specified mode of payment opted by group is EFT. Fill in the Depositor's Name in the Group Billing Info Screen Agent These missing information pertains to the Information Member Level information required in the Agent Information Screen Writing Agent Writing Agent is not Choose the Writing Agent specified for the Group in the Group Agent Info Screen Agent of Record Agent of Record is not This is required if specified commission for the agent exists. Choose the Agent of Record for the Group in the Group Agent Info Screen Agent License Agent License Number is Go to Agent/Agency Number not specified Master Screen, search for the agent/agency attached with group and fill in the License information. License Expiry License Expiry Date is Go to Agent/Agency Date not specified Master Screen, search for the agent/agency attached with group and fill in the License information. License Expiry Agent License Number is Go to Agent/Agency Date expired Master Screen, search for the agent/agency attached with group and modify the license expiry date. Commission % Commission is split is Check if the commission not specified split for the agent of record exists. If not edit the corresponding agent of record and enter % commission split for the Agent of Record in the Group Agent Info Screen Total % Split in commission is Check if the total of the Commission Split less than 100% commission split's for the agent of record is 100. If not edit the corresponding agent of record and make changes to make commission split total to 100% in the Group Agent Info Screen Coverage These missing information pertains to the Information Member Level information required in the Coverage Information Screen Hours Worked Hours worked per week Fill in the Hours worked not specified per week in the Employee Coverage Info Screen Date of Date of employment not Fill in the Date of Employment specified Employment in the Employee Coverage Info Screen Employee Employee signature is Verify employee's Signature missing signature and check Employee Signature checkbox in the Employee Coverage Info Screen Date Signed Date Signed is missing Verify Date signed and fill in the Date Signed in the Employee Coverage Info Screen Employee Type Employee Type not Choose the Employee specified Type for Employee Type from list in Employee Coverage info screen Employee Employee's Line of Choose the Line of Coverage Coverage not specified Coverage for the Employee in Employee Coverage info screen Medical Coverage Medical Line of Choose the Line of Coverage not specified Coverage for the Employee in Employee Coverage info screen. If the employee waives medical coverage check the checkbox Medical Waived. Dental Coverage Dental Line of Coverage This is required if the not specified Association offers optional benefits. Choose the Line of Coverage for the Employee in Employee Coverage info screen Vision Coverage Vision Line of Coverage This is required if the not specified Association offers optional benefits. Choose the Line of Coverage for the Employee in Employee Coverage info screen CAM Coverage CAM Line of Coverage This is required if the not specified Association offers optional benefits. Choose the Line of Coverage for the Employee in Employee Coverage info screen Coverage Choice Coverage Choice Choose the appropriate between the Line of coverage choices as per Coverage differs the illustration provided in the column below and edit the coverage choice for the specific Line of Coverage and update in Employee Coverage info screen. Or In dependent Info Screen waive the Optional coverage choice for dependent under 2 by checking the check box Waive. Coverage Choice Coverage choice for the Medical should have highest Illustration precedence. There are Four Coverage Choices 1 - Employee Family 2 - Employee Child 3 - Employee Spouse 4 - Employee Only Case 1: If coverage choice for medical is Employee Child, Optional benefit cannot have employee spouse. It should be Employee Child or Employee Only provided child is under 2 Case 2: If Coverage Choice for Medical is Employee Spouse optional benefits cannot have employee child. It should also be Employee Spouse Case 3: If Coverage Choice for Medical is Employee Child optional benefits cannot have employee only if at least one child his above 2. It should also be Employee child Dependent Count Number of Dependents is This would be the case not sufficient to satisfy when the dependent Coverage Choice. information is not entered into the system. Add Dependent. This can also occur if the number of dependent as specified in coverage choice does not match with the dependents available. Add Dependent. Dependent Dependent information is This would occur if the not specified Coverage choice specified is other than employee and depended record is not entered. Add Dependent 1099's 1099 not provided for Manually verify 1099 for verification the employee and check the 1099's Flag in the Enrollment summary for the specific employee. DE6 DE6 not provided for Manually verify DE6 for verification the employee and check the DE6 Flag in the Enrollment summary for the specific employee. Dependent These missing information pertains to the Information Dependent Level information required in the Dependent Information Screen Date of Birth Date of Birth is not Fill in the Date of Birth in specified the Dependent General Info Screen Gender Gender is not specified Choose the Gender in the Dependent General Info Screen SSN SSN is not specified Fill in the SSN in the Dependent General Info Screen. If the dependent refuse to provide SSN then click auto generate SSN/Unique ID in the Dependent General Info Screen. Auto generation of SSN/Unique ID will be available only for the user with role as level II and above Relationship Relationship of the Choose the dependent dependent with the relationship from the employee not specified Dependent Info Screen Relationship - Relationship, child is Verify if the child is Child specified for child above disabled and choose if 23 years of age Disabled Permanent or Temporary. Signature Dependent signature is This is required if the missing dependent age is above 18. Verify the signature for the dependent and check the checkbox Signature in the dependent info screen Relationship Number of spouse is Check for the relationship more than one in the dependent info screen. There can only be one of the following relationship for the dependent: Spouse or Ex - Spouse or domestic partner. Choose different relationship for the other dependent in the dependent info screen General Missing These are missing information pertains to the all Information on level of information. This may be due to non All Level availability of sufficient master record to process enrollment or may require business decisions or administrative changes in the system to overcome this missing information Employee Record Employee Record Does Probably the entries for not exist the employees are not made. Add employees to satisfy this eligibility rule. Rate Availability Rate is not available for This is possible if the the Plan opted by the Rates are not loaded for Employee the Individual Member's effective date of enrollment. Load the rates for the specific plan from the Carrier Maintenance - Rate Import utility. Admin Fees Admin Fees for the This is possible if the Small Employer Group is Admin Fees is not not specified specified for the Individual Member's Effective date. Add Admin fees from the Carrier Maintenance - Rate Administration Agent Agent Commission for This is possible if the Commission the Small Employer Agent Commission is not Group is not specified specified for the Individual Member's Effective date. Add Agent Commission from the Carrier Maintenance - Rate Administration Rate Differential Rate Differential Factor This is possible if the Rate Factor for the Small Employer Differential Factor is not Group is not specified specified for the Agent Commission Effective date. Add Rate Differential Factor from the Carrier Maintenance - Rate Administration Plan availability Medical Plan selected by Normally the Plan for the the Employees not employee is listed based available in the service on the Plan available in area. the employees Service Area. Rare cases if the User Modifies the ZIP Code in the Employee General Info Screen and fails to update the Plan for the specific ZIP code, Service Area combination this message would be shown. Pick the plans that are available for the Employee in the Employee Coverage Info screen. Plan availability Dental Plan selected by Normally the Plan for the the Employees not employee is listed based available in the service on the Plan available in area. the employees Service Area. Rare cases if the User Modifies the ZIP Code in the Employee General Info Screen and fails to update the Plan for the specific ZIP code, Service Area combination this message would be shown. Pick the plans that are available for the Employee in the Employee Coverage Info screen. Plan availability Vision Plan selected by Normally the Plan for the the Employees not employee is listed based available in the service on the Plan available in area. the employees Service Area. Rare cases if the User Modifies the ZIP Code in the Employee General Info Screen and fails to update the Plan for the specific ZIP code, Service Area combination this message would be shown. Pick the plans that are available for the Employee in the Employee Coverage Info screen. Plan availability CAM Plan selected by Normally the Plan for the the Employees not employee is listed based available in the service on the Plan available in area. the employees Service Area. Rare cases if the User Modifies the ZIP Code in the Employee General Info Screen and fails to update the Plan for the specific ZIP code, Service Area combination this message would be shown. Pick the plans that are available for the Employee in the Employee Coverage Info screen.

-   -   Step-15: On completing all the relevant information that is         required for a successful enrollment of a group, the following         is the sample screen for a successful enrollment of an         individual association member. (See Figure C-42)

Create Group (Alternate Group—Small Employer Group)

The create group screen is to enter details of a group The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new group details.

There are three different ways of creation, namely creating a group, through small employer group, alternate group that has again two methods namely individual member and group.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of a new group by selecting group under alternate group are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Then select the option Group         Enrollment and Create Group. (See Figure C-43)     -   Step-2: Screen displays with the option of selecting a group         hierarchy. (See Figure C-44)     -   Step-3: Screen navigates select an alternate group. Enter a         10digit number or choose an association. (See Figure C-45)     -   Step-4: Choose the option of group and click Continue. (See         Figure C-46)     -   Step-5: Clicking continue button screen navigates to general         info. Enter the values in the respective field, as per the         format briefed in fields explanation section Field Explanation,         and click Continue. (See Figure C-47)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanation provided for Small Employer Group—General Info.

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality provided for Small Employer Group—General Info.

-   -   Step-6: Screen navigates to billing information. Enter the         values in the respective fields, as per the format briefed in         field's explanation section and click Continue. (See Figure         C-48)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanation provided for Small Employer Group—Billing Info.

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality provided for Small Employer Group—Billing Info.

-   -   Step-7: Screen navigates to Agent Info screen. Agent/Agency ID         is selected by clicking search icon. (See Figure C-49)     -   Step-8: This pops up a screen to select agency id Enter the         first letter of agent name or first digit of agent id to perform         search operation. (See Figure C-50)     -   Step-9: Click on agency id for selection. (See Figure C-51)     -   Step-10: After filling other relevant information in agent info         screen, as per the format briefed in field's explanation section         and click Continue

Field Explanation

Refer field explanation provided for Small Employer Group—Agent Info.

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality provided for Small Employer Group—Agent Info.

-   -   Step-11: Screen navigates to coverage information. Even though         the fields are optional, enter the values in the respective         fields, as per the format briefed in field's explanation section         and click Continue. (See Figure C-52)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanation provided for Small Employer Group—Coverage Info.

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality provided for Small Employer Group—Coverage Info.

-   -   Step-12: Screen navigates to add employee general information.         First and Last name are mandatory other fields are optional.         Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the format         briefed in field's explanation section. (See Figure C-53)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanation provided for Small Employer Group—Add Employee General Info.

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality provided for Small Employer Group—Add Employee General Info.

-   -   Step-13: Screen navigates to coverage information. Even though         the fields are optional, enter the values in the respective         fields, as per the format briefed in field's explanation section         and click Continue. (See Figure C-54)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanation provided for Small Employer Group—Add Employee Coverage Info.

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality provided for Small Employer Group—Add Employee Coverage Info.

-   -   Step-14: Screen navigates to add dependent information. Enter         the values in the respective fields, as per the format briefed         in field's explanation section and click anyone of the button         shown for subsequent operation. (See Figure C-55)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanation provided for Small Employer Group—Add Dependent

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality provided for Small Employer Group—Add Employee Add Dependent.

-   -   Step-15: Clicking enrollment summary button screen navigates to         enrollment summary. This screen shows the overall information         that is entered. Enter the values in the respective fields, as         per the format briefed in field's explanation section and click         Pre Enrollment button for checking the eligibility criteria for         the Group and Members. (See Figure C-56)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanation provided for Small Employer Group—Enrollment Summary.

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality provided for Small Employer Group—Enrollment Summary.

-   -   Step-16: Clicking pre enrollment navigates to missing info         screen. Missing information screen provide information on the         data that is required to complete an enrollment process. This         also checks for the eligibility of the group and member for         enrolling into PacAdvantage Program. For a successful creation         of a group the missing information should be empty. The user         role and authority can overrule certain missing information.

Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the format briefed in field's explanation section and click Enroll button for enrolling the Group and Members. (See Figure C-57)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanation provided for Small Employer Group—Enrollment Missing Info

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality provided for Small Employer Group—Enrollment Missing Info

Missing Information

Refer missing information provided for Small Employer Group—Missing Information

-   -   Step-17: On completing all the relevant information that is         required for a successful enrollment of a group, the following         is the sample screen for a successful enrollment of a group.         (See Figure C-58)

Modify Group (Small Employer Group)

The modify group screen is to modify details of a group for the existing groups. The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new group details.

The sequential steps involved in the modify group are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Then select the option Group         Enrollment and Modify Group. (See Figure C-59)     -   Step-2: Navigates to search screen. Enter value in any one of         the field or simply click search button to perform search         operation. (See Figure C-60)     -   Step-3: This pop ups a screen with the search result. (See         Figure C-61)     -   Step-4: Click on any group id for selection This navigates to         general information of the group. The process of modification is         similar to the process of flow as explained in Creation of         Group. Refer Section Create Group (Small Employer Group)

Inactivate Group

The inactivate group screen is to make a group from activate state to inactivate.

The sequential steps involved in the inactivate group are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Then select the option Group         Enrollment and Inactivate Group. (See Figure C-62)     -   Step-2: Navigates to search screen. Enter value in any one of         the fields or simply click search button to perform search         operation. (See Figure C-63)     -   Step-3: This pop ups a screen with the search result. (See         Figure C-64)     -   Step-4: Click on any group id for selection. This navigates to a         screen confirming for the selected group to make inactivate.         Click Inactivate button. (See Figure C-65)     -   Step-5: Confirms the status Click Search to navigate back to         Group Search screen. (See Figure C-66)

Create Employee

The create employee screen is to enter details of a employee The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new employee details.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of an employee are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Then select the option Employee         Enrollment and Create Employee. (See Figure C-67)     -   Step-2: This navigates to group search screen, to create an         employee for an employer Enter value in any one of the fields,         or simply click search button to perform search operation. (See         Figure C-68)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with the search result. (See         Figure C-69)     -   Step-4: Click on any employer/group id for selection.     -   Step-5: This navigates to general information screen pertaining         to an employee. The process of creating an employee is similar         to the process explained for Small Employer Group

Modify Employee

The modify employee screen is to modify details of a employee The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new employee details.

The sequential steps involved for modifying an employee are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Then select the option Employee         Enrollment and Modify Employee. (See Figure C-70)     -   Step-2: This navigates to employee search screen. (See Figure         C-71)     -   Step-3: Enter value in any one of the fields or simply click         search button to perform search operation. Navigates to Search         result screen. (See Figure C-72)     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection     -   Step-5: This displays General Info screen of an employee with         contents ready for any modification. The procedure and flow of         modification are similar to the procedures explained for Small         Employer Group

Inactivate Employee

The inactivate employee screen is to make a employee from activate state to inactivate.

The sequential steps involved in the inactivate employee are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Then select the option Employee         Enrollment and Inactivate Employee. (See Figure C-73)     -   Step-2: Navigates to search screen for employees. Either enters         the id or first letter of employee name to perform search. Click         search button. (See Figure C-74)     -   Step-3: This pop ups a screen with the search result. (See         Figure C-75)     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection. This navigates         to a screen confirming for the selected employee to make         inactivate. Click Inactivate button. (See Figure C-75)     -   Step-5: Confirms the status Click Search to navigate back to         Employee search screen. (See Figure C-76)

Create Dependent

The create dependent screen is to enter details of a employee The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new dependent details.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of an dependent are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Then select the option Dependent         Enrollment and Create Dependent. (See Figure C-77)     -   Step-2: Navigates to search screen for employees. Either enters         the id or first letter of employee name to perform search         operation. Click search button. (See Figure C-78)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with the search result. (See         Figure C-79)     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection     -   Step-5: This navigates to add dependent screen pertaining to an         employee. The process of creating a dependent is similar to the         process explained for Small Employer Group

Modify Dependent

The modify dependent screen is to modify details of a dependent.

The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new dependent details.

The sequential steps involved in the modify dependent are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Then select the option Dependent         Enrollment and Modify Dependent. (See Figure C-80)     -   Step-2: This navigates to dependent search screen. (See Figure         C-81)     -   Step-3: Enter value in any one of the fields or simply click         search button to perform search operation. (See Figure C-82)     -   Step-4: Click on any dependent id for selection     -   Step-5: This displays a screen with contents ready for any         modification. The procedure and flow of modification are similar         to the procedures explained for Small Employer Group

Inactivate Dependent

The inactivate dependent screen is to make a employee from activate state to inactivate.

The sequential steps involved in the inactivate dependent are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Then select the option Dependent         Enrollment and Inactivate Dependent. (See Figure C-83)     -   Step-2: This navigates to dependent search screen. (See Figure         C-84)     -   Step-3: This pop ups a screen with the search result. (See         Figure C-85)     -   Step-4: Click on any dependent id for selection. This navigates         to a screen confirming for the selected employee to make         inactivate. Click Inactivate button. (See Figure C-86)     -   Step-5: Confirms the status Click search button navigates to         Dependent search screen. (See Figure C-87)

Modify Individual Member

The screen is to have modification of details pertaining to an individual member. The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new individual member details.

The sequential steps involved in modify individual member are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Select the option Individual         Member. Then Select Individual member and modify individual         member. (See Figure C-88)     -   Step-2: Navigates to search screen individual employee. Either         enters the id or first letter of employee name to perform search         operation. Click search button. (See Figure C-89)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with the search result. (See         Figure C-90)     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection     -   Step-5: This navigates to general information pertaining to         individual employee screen. The process of modifying individual         member is similar to the process explained for Individual         Member.

Inactivate Individual Member

The screen is to inactivate individual member from active state.

The sequential steps involved in inactivate individual member are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Select the option Individual         Member. Then Select Individual member and inactivate individual         member. (See Figure C-91)     -   Step-2: Navigates to search screen individual employee. Enter         value in any one of the fields or simply click search button to         perform search operation.     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with the search result. (See         Figure C-92)     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection. This navigates         to a screen confirming for the selected employee to make         inactivate. Click Inactivate button. (See Figure C-93)     -   Step-5: Confirms the status. Click search to navigate back to         Group search screen. (See Figure C-94)

Create Dependent

The screen is to create a dependent for an individual employee member.

The sequential steps involved in creating a dependent for an individual member are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Select the option Individual         Member. Then Select Individual member dependent and create         dependent. (See Figure C-95)     -   Step-2: Navigates to search screen individual employee. Enter         value in any one of the field. (See Figure C-96)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with the search result. (See         Figure C-97)     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection. This navigates         to add dependent screen. The process of creating a dependent is         similar to the process explained for Individual Member creating         a group by alternate with option.

Modify Dependent

The screen is to create a dependent for an individual member.

The sequential steps involved in creating a dependent for an individual member are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Select the option Individual         Member. Then Select Individual member dependent and modify         dependent. (See Figure C-98)     -   Step-2: Navigates to search screen individual dependent. Either         enters the id or first letter of employee name to perform search         operation. Click search button. (See Figure C-99)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with the search result. (See         Figure C-100)     -   Step-4: Click on any dependent id for selection. This navigates         to add dependent screen. The process of creating a dependent is         similar to the process explained for Individual Member creating         a group by alternate with option

Inactivate Dependent

The screen is to inactivate a dependent for an individual member.

The sequential steps involved in creating a dependent for an individual member are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Select the option Individual         Member. Then Select Individual member dependent and inactivate         dependent. (See Figure C-101)     -   Step-2: Navigates to search screen individual dependent. Either         enters the id or first letter of employee name to perform search         operation. Click search button. (See Figure C-102)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with the search result. (See         Figure C-103)     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection. This navigates         to a screen confirming for the selected employee to make         inactivate. Click Inactivate button. (See Figure C-104)     -   Step-5: Confirms the status of inactivation. Click search button         to navigate back to dependent search. (See Figure C-105)

4 COBRA Enrollment

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Enrollment->COBRA Enrollment->New COBRA to Existing COBRA

Pre-Requisites

All master records must be available in the system for a successful enrollment. Master Records are as follows:

-   -   Carrier Maintenance—Refer “User Manual for Carrier Maintenance”         for further information on the master records.     -   Work Group—Refer “User Manual for Sales and Marketing” for         further information on the Work Group records.     -   Internal Associates—Refer “User Manual for Sales and Marketing”         for further information on the Internal Associates records.     -   Association Master—Refer Section 2 of this document on         “Association”.     -   Eligibility Criteria (New Business COBRA)—members must satisfy         eligibility rule for COBRA.

Member for existing COBRA Enrollment must be in termed status.

Application Functions

This application can be sub divided into following major functions:

-   -   New COBRA Enrollment—New COBRA Enrollment for the Group who         bring in their existing COBRA members into the PacAdvantage         consist of the following operations:         -   Create New COBRA—to input details of a COBRA members is for             a specific group.         -   Modify New COBRA—to search a COBRA prior to enrollment for             making modifications.     -   Inactivate New COBRA—to search a COBRA prior to enrollment for         making inactive.     -   Existing COBRA Enrollment—Existing COBRA Enrollment is for those         employee and or dependents that have terminated from the         existing group due to various reasons. This consist of the         following operations:         -   Create Existing COBRA—to input details of a COBRA members             for a specific group wherein the members are terminated.         -   Modify Existing COBRA—to search a COBRA Group of the termed             members for making modifications prior to enrollment.         -   Inactivate Existing COBRA—to search a COBRA Group of the             termed members for inactivating prior to enrollment.

Create COBRA (New Business)

The screen is to create new COBRA. The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new COBRA.

The sequential steps involved in create new COBRA are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select COBRA Enrollment. Select the New COBRA and then select         Create COBRA. (See Figure C-106)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to group search for adding COBRA.         Enter value in any one of the fields, or simply click Search to         perform search operation. (See Figure C-107)     -   Step-3: The screen displays the search result. (See Figure         C-108)     -   Step-4: Choose a group id.     -   Step-5: Choose the option of enrolling as single or member with         dependents. If the option is with dependents, enter number of         dependents.     -   Step-6: Click continue button     -   Step-7: Screen navigates to general info for new business COBRA         group. First name and last name are mandatory and other fields         are optional. Enter the values in the respective field as per         the format briefed in field's explanation section. Click         continue button. (See Figure C-109)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Parent Group ID Text to display the Parent Group ID. Parent Group Text to display the Parent Group Name. Name COBRA Group Text to display the COBRA Group ID. ID COBRA Type Text to display the COBRA Group Type whether Cal COBRA or Federal COBRA. Group Effective Text to display effective date of the parent group. Date Work Group Text to Display the internal Work group associated with the Parent Group Status Text to display status of the group. Post Mark Date Text for post mark date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Accepts in the format MM/DD/YYYY Received Date Text for received date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Accepts in the format MM/DD/YYYY Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. First name is mandatory. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for last name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Last name is mandatory. Suffix Choose the Suffix from the drop down list of salutations available. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. Address Physical Home Address or Mailing Address Information: Address The text for company address. Accepts alphabets and numeric values not exceeding 35 characters Apt The text for company suite/apt # Accepts alphabets and numeric values of not exceeding 35 characters Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric of either 5 or 9 digits. City, State and County are populated automatically for the correct zip code. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets of not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America County Choose the name of the county from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Mode of Choose the mode of correspondence from the drop Correspondence down list available Phone Number The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values of not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Extension The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values of not exceeding 5 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Fax The text for fax number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values of not exceeding 10 digits. The format is 9999 Email The text for email of the contact person. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and navigates to Billing Information screen and the system generates Group ID. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info and Add Employees are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between is tabs are possible only if there is a valid group ID generated and assigned to the group. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-8: Screen navigates billing info of group. Enter the values         in the respective field as per the format briefed in field's         explanation section. Click continue. (See Figure C-110)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Mode of payment Choose a mode of payment from the drop down list available. Based on selection corresponding fields will enable to enter the values. For e.g. if the value selected is card payment, EFT will be disabled and allows only entering card details and vice versa. Credit Card Information Cardholder's The text for cardholder's name. Accepts alphabets and Names space between two words. Credit Card Type Choose the type of credit card from the drop down list available. Credit Card No The text for credit card number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 30 digits Expiration Date Choose a month of expiration from the drop down list available Expiration Year The text for expiration year. Accepts numeric values of exactly 4. Example 2002. Billing Address As it appears on the credit Card Street Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters. ZIP The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. State The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. City Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America EFT Information Bank Name The text for bank name. Accepts alphabets and space between two words. Routing Number The text for routing number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. Account Number The text for account number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. Account Type Choose the type of account from the drop down list available. Depositor's Name The text for depositor's name. Accepts alphabets and space between two words. Initial Payment Information Amount Received The text for amount received. Accepts only numeric values in the format 999999999.99 Date Receive The text for date received. Choose from the calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY. Check # The text for check number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. No Check Check the option of no checks received for any non- Received receipt of checks.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and Navigates to coverage Information screen. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info and Add Employees are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between is tabs are possible only if there is a valid group ID generated and assigned to the group. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-9: Screen navigates coverage info of group. Enter the         values in the respective field as per the format briefed in         field's explanation section. Click continue. (See Figure C-111)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description COBRA effective The text for COBRA effective date. Choose a date by date clicking calendar icon Qualifying event Choose a qualifying even from the drop down list available COBRA end date The text for COBRA end date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon Send bill to Choose the option of sending the bills either to group or self (individual) Plan Information Line of coverage Choose a line of coverage from the drop down list available Medical waived Click the check box for medical waive if the employee is waiving medical. Carrier selection Choose a carrier selection from the drop down list (Benefit level) available Coverage choice Choose a coverage from the drop down list available PCP ID/Medical The text for PCP ID. Accepts alphabets and numeric group ID values not exceeding 10 characters. Are you an Click the check box if you are an existing patient existing patient PCP last name The text for PCP last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. PCP first name The text for PCP first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Prior plan type Choose a plan type from the drop down list available Prior plan name Choose a plan name from the drop down list available Prior insurance The text for insurance start date. Choose a date by start date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Prior insurance The text for insurance end date. Choose a date by end date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Other coverage The text for other coverage. Accepts alphabets with kept values not exceeding 50 characters. RAF The text to display RAF applicable for the Primary Group. Employee Click the check box, to have employee signature signature Date signed The text for date signed. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Date cannot accept future date.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of employee coverage information. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. COBRA Click COBRA summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary of information entered for COBRA creation Continue Navigates add dependent screen. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info and Add Employees are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between is tabs are possible only if there is a valid group ID generated and assigned to the group. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-10: Screen navigates to add dependent screen. Enter the         values in the respective field as per the format briefed in         field's explanation section. Click. Continue. (See Figure C-112)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description First Name The text for first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. First name is mandatory. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for last name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Last name is mandatory. Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon.. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Birth date cannot be later than the current date. Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. Relationship Choose the relationship from the drop down list available. Street Address The text for address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Suite The text for suite/apt #.. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, and State are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Selected carrier The text for selected carrier. It is a read only field Coverage choice The text for coverage. It is a read only field Service area The text for service area. It is a read only field Prior plan type Choose a plan type from the drop down list available Prior plan The text for plan name. Accepts alphabets Waived Click the check box if medical is waived Start date The text for start date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon End date The text for end date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon PCP ID/ The text for PCP ID. Accepts alphabets PCP last name The text for PCP last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes PCP first name The text for PCP first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes Disabled Click the option of temporary or permanent. This is dependent enable if the relationship opted is child Domestic partner Click the option for domestic partner. It depends on the value selected in relationship Legal guardian Click the option for legal guardian. It depends on the value selected in relationship Signature Click the check box if the signature is opted

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of dependent information. It is only a temporary addition. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Continue Screen navigates to Missing info. Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info and Add Employees are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between is tabs are possible only if there is a valid group ID generated and assigned to the group. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-11: Missing info screen displays the information that is         left out while creating a COBRA. Enter the values in the         respective field as per the format briefed in field's         explanation section. Click Enroll. (See Figure C-114)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Group Contains header information of the Group Information Header Name of the Text for the Name of the Group Group Group ID Text and Link for the Group ID to navigate to the Group General Info screen Group Type Specifies the Type of the Group like Small Employer Group Proposed The text for Proposed Effective Date. Choose a date by Effective Date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Default effective date is first of the following month. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the group. Work Group Text for Work Group. This specifies the internal work group attached to the Group. Internal is based on the writing agent's work group. Tree Structure Enrollment Missing Information is broken down into tree structure. The tree can by expanded or collapsed. The level of the tree is as per the example given below: − Employee − Dependent − Dependent Where (−) signifies expanded view and (+) signifies collapsed view. Group Missing This identifies all the eligibility rules and the Info information that are incomplete on Group level for completing the enrollment process. Missing Entities List the missing entities for the group. Provides a link to go to the respective screen to fill in the relevant information to complete all the required entries. Message List the message against each missing entities. Employee This identifies all the eligibility rules and the Missing Info information that are incomplete on Employee level for completing the enrollment process. Missing Entities List the missing entities for the employee. Provides a link to go to the respective screen to fill in the relevant information to complete all the required entries. Message List the message against each missing entities. Dependent This identifies all the eligibility rules and the information that are incomplete on dependent level for Missing Info completing the enrollment process. Missing Entities List the missing entities for the dependent. Provides a link to go to the respective screen to fill in the relevant information to complete all the required entries. Message List the message against each missing entities. Enrollment Choose from the drop down list the action to be Action performed for enrollment. Enroll/Decline Remarks Text for remarks if any. Reasons for Choose from the drop down list the reasons for Decline decline. Reasons for Other Text for other reason. If the reason for decline is other than the reasons available.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Enroll Saves the data if there are no missing information and navigates to enrollment confirmation page. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes <<, <, >, >> The enrollment missing information shows record for 5 employees on single screen. If the employee size increases more than 5. These buttons are used for navigating to the next and previous records for viewing. << - Show first record (s) < - Show previous record (s) > - Show next record (s) >> - Show last record (s) Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen. Preview Click Preview Invoice to pop up a new browser window Invoice to preview the invoice for the group

Missing Information

The following table provides explanation for each missing information and what needs to be done to remove missing information from the screen Missing Entity Message Reasons/Remedy Member Level General These are missing information pertains to the Information Member Level information required in the COBRA Member General Information Screen Address Address information is Fill in the address not specified information in the Employee General Info Screen City City is not specified Fill in the City in the Employee General Info Screen State State is not specified Fill in the City in the Employee General Info Screen ZIP Code ZIP Code is not specified Fill in the ZIP Code in the Employee General Info Screen Date of Birth Date of Birth is not Fill in the Date of Birth in specified the Employee General Info Screen Gender Gender is not specified Choose the Gender in the Employee General Info Screen SSN SSN is not specified Fill in the SSN in the Employee General Info Screen. If the employee refuse to provide SSN then click auto generate SSN/Unique ID in the Employee General Info Screen. Auto generation of SSN/Unique ID will be available only for the user with role as level II and above Mode of Mode of Correspondence Choose the Mode of Correspondence is not specified Correspondence for Employee from the list in Employee general info screen Email Email for Employee is This is required if the not specified mode of correspondence selected is Email. Fill in the Email in the Employee general info screen Billing These missing information pertains to the Group Information Level information required in the Billing Information Screen Mode of payment Mode of payment is not Choose the Mode of specified Payment for the group from the list in Group Billing Info Screen Check Number Check Number is not Fill in the Check number specified. in the Group Billing Info Screen Check Date Date Check received is Fill in the Date received not specified in the Group Billing Info Screen Check Number Check Number received Fill in the Check Number is not specified in the Group Billing Info Screen Cardholder's Cardholder's name is not This is required if the Name specified mode of payment opted by group is Credit Card. Fill in the Cardholder's name in the Group Billing Info Screen. Credit Card Type Credit Card Type is not This is required if the specified. mode of payment opted by group is Credit Card Choose the Credit Card Type for the group from the list in Group Billing Info Screen Credit Card Credit Card Number is This is required if the Number not specified mode of payment opted by group is Credit Card. Fill in the Credit Card Number in the Group Billing Info Screen. Expiration Date Credit Card Expiration This is required if the Date is not specified mode of payment opted by group is Credit Card. Fill in the Credit Card Expiration Date in the Group Billing Info Screen. Bank Name Bank name is not This is required if the specified mode of payment opted by group is EFT. Fill in the Bank Name in the Group Billing Info Screen. Routing Number Routing Number is not This is required if the specified mode of payment opted by group is EFT. Fill in the Routing Number in the Group Billing Info Screen. Account Type Account Type is not This is required if the specified mode of payment opted by group is EFT. Fill in the Account Type in the Group Billing Info Screen Depositor's Name Depositor's Name is not This is required if the specified mode of payment opted by group is EFT. Fill in the Depositor's Name in the Group Billing Info Screen Coverage These missing information pertains to the Group Information Level information required in the Coverage Information Screen COBRA Qualifying Event is not Choose the Qualifying Qualifying specified Event for the group from Event the list in Coverage Information Screen COBRA End COBRA End Date not Choose the Qualifying Date specified Event for the group from the list in Coverage Information Screen to automatically calculate the COBRA end date based on the Qualifying event Send Bill To Where COBRA bill Choose one of the option needs to be sent is not specified (Group or Self) specified in Coverage Information Screen Line of Coverage No line of Coverage is Choose one of the line of opted by the member coverage in Coverage Information Screen Plan Selection No Plan is elected by the Choose one of the plan in member Coverage Information Screen Medical LOC Medical Line of coverage Medical line of coverage is not elected by Member required to decide the Coverage Choice. Choose Medical line of coverage in Coverage Information Screen Coverage Choice No coverage choice Medical line of coverage is specified for Medical required to decide the Line of coverage Coverage Choice. Choose coverage choice in Coverage Information Screen Coverage No coverage choice This is required if the Choice - specified for Dental Line member opts for Dental Dental of coverage Plan. Choose coverage choice in Coverage Information Screen Coverage No coverage choice This is required if the Choice - specified for Vision Line member opts for Vision Vision of coverage Plan. Choose coverage choice in Coverage Information Screen Coverage Choice- No coverage choice This is required if the CAM specified for CAM member opts for CAM Line of coverage Plan. Choose coverage choice in Coverage. Information Screen Dependent Count Number of Dependents is This would be the case not sufficient to satisfy when the dependent Coverage Choice. information is not entered into the system. Add Dependent. This can also occur if the number of dependent as specified in coverage choice does not match with the dependents available. Add Dependent. Employee Employee signature is Verify employee's Signature missing signature and check Employee Signature checkbox in the Employee Coverage Info Screen Date Signed Date Signed is missing Verify Date signed and fill in the Date Signed in the Employee Coverage Info Screen Plan availability Medical Plan selected by Normally the Plan for the the Employees not employee is listed based available in the service on the Plan available in area. the employees Service Area. Rare cases if the User Modifies the ZIP Code in the Employee General Info Screen and fails to update the Plan for the specific ZIP code, Service Area combination this message would be shown. Pick the plans that are available for the Employee in the Employee Coverage Info screen. Plan availability Dental Plan selected by Normally the Plan for the the Employees not employee is listed based available in the service on the Plan available in area. the employees Service Area. Rare cases if the User Modifies the ZIP Code in the Employee General Info Screen and fails to update the Plan for the specific ZIP code, Service Area combination this message would be shown. Pick the plans that are available for the Employee in the Employee Coverage Info screen. Plan availability Vision Plan selected by Normally the Plan for the the Employees not employee is listed based available in the service on the Plan available in area. the employees Service Area. Rare cases if the User Modifies the ZIP Code in the Employee General Info Screen and fails to update the Plan for the specific ZIP code, Service Area combination this message would be shown. Pick the plans that are available for the Employee in the Employee Coverage Info screen. Plan availability CAM Plan selected by Normally the Plan for the the Employees not employee is listed based available in the on the Plan available in service area. the employees Service Area. Rare cases if the User Modifies the ZIP Code in the Employee General Info Screen and fails to update the Plan for the specific ZIP code, Service Area combination this message would be shown. Pick the plans that are available for the Employee in the Employee Coverage Info screen. Dependent These missing information pertains to the Information Dependent Level information required in the Dependent Information Screen Date of Birth Date of Birth is not Fill in the Date of Birth in specified the Dependent General Info Screen Gender Gender is not specified Choose the Gender in the Dependent General Info Screen SSN SSN is not specified Fill in the SSN in the Dependent General Info Screen. If the dependent refuse to provide SSN then click auto generate SSN/Unique ID in the Dependent General Info Screen. Auto generation of SSN/Unique ID will be available only for the user with role as level II and above Relationship Relationship of the Choose the dependent dependent with the relationship from the employee not specified Dependent Info Screen Relationship - Relationship, child is Verify if the child is Child specified for child above disabled and choose if 23 years of age Disabled Permanent or Temporary. Signature Dependent signature is This is required if the missing dependent age is above 18. Verify the signature for the dependent and check the checkbox Signature in the dependent info screen Relationship Number of spouse Check for the relationship is more than one in the dependent info screen. There can only be one of the following relationship for the dependent: Spouse or Ex - Spouse or domestic partner. Choose different relationship for the other dependent in the dependent info screen

-   -   Step-12: On clicking enroll button, screen navigates to         confirmation screen, for having created a group under COBRA         Enrollment. Click search button to navigate back to Group Search         screen. (See Figure C-115)

Modify COBRA

The screen is to have modification of details pertaining to a COBRA member. The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new member details.

The sequential steps involved in modify COBRA are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Select the option COBRA         Enrollment. Then New COBRA and modify COBRA. (See Figure C-116)     -   Step-2: Navigates to group COBRA search screen. Enter value in         any one of the fields, or simply click Search to perform search         operation. (See Figure C-117)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with the search result. (See         Figure C-118)     -   Step-4: Click on any group id for selection     -   Step-5: This navigates to general information pertaining to         group screen. The process of modifying group is similar to the         process explained vide from step 7 through step 12 of creating a         COBRA group

Inactivate COBRA

The screen is to inactivate a COBRA from the active status.

The sequential steps involved in inactivate a COBRA are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Select the option COBRA         Enrollment. Then select New COBRA and inactivate COBRA. (See         Figure C-119)     -   Step-2: Navigates to group COBRA screen. Enter value in any one         of the fields, or simply click Search to perform search         operation. (See Figure C-120)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with the search result. (See         Figure C-21)     -   Step-4: Click on any group id for selection. This navigates to a         screen confirming for the selected group to make inactivate.         Click Inactivate button. (See Figure C-122)     -   Step-5: Confirms the status. (See Figure C-123)

Existing COBRA—Create COBRA

The screen is to create COBRA for existing type. The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new COBRA.

The sequential steps involved in create new COBRA are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select COBRA Enrollment. Select the Existing COBRA and then         select Create COBRA. (See Figure C-124)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to employee search for adding         COBRA. Enter employee id or enter first letter of employee name         for search. Click Search button. (See Figure C-125)     -   Step-3: The screen displays the search result. (See Figure         C-126)     -   Step-4: Click on employee id.     -   Step-5: Choose the option of sending bill either to group or         self. Enter the date by clicking calendar icon, provided if the         check box is clicked for verified member signature. (See Figure         C-127)     -   Step-6: Choose the Member and state COBRA Election options for         each member from the table and clicks continue.     -   Step-7: Screen navigates to general info of group. First name         and last name are mandatory and other fields are optional. Enter         the values in the respective field, as per the format briefed in         field's explanation section. (See Figure C-128)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Parent Group ID Text to display the Parent Group ID. Parent Group Text to display the Parent Group Name. Name COBRA Group Text to display the COBRA Group ID. ID COBRA Type Text to display the COBRA Group Type whether Cal COBRA or Federal COBRA. Group Effective Text to display effective date of the parent group. Date Work Group Text to Display the internal Work group associated with the Parent Group Status Text to display status of the group. Post Mark Date Text for post mark date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Accepts in the format MM/DD/YYYY Received Date Text for received date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Accepts in the format MM/DD/YYYY Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. First name is mandatory. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for last name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Last name is mandatory. Suffix Choose the Suffix from the drop down list of salutations available. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. Address Physical Home Address or Mailing Address Information: Address The text for company address. Accepts alphabets and numeric values not exceeding 35 characters Apt The text for company suite/apt # Accepts alphabets and numeric values of not exceeding 35 characters Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric of either 5 or 9 digits. City, State and County are populated automatically for the correct zip code. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets of not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America County Choose the name of the county from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Mode of Choose the mode of correspondence from the drop Correspondence down list available Phone Number The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values of not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Extension The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values of not exceeding 5 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Fax The text for fax number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values of not exceeding 10 digits. The format is 9999 Email The text for email of the contact person. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and navigates to Billing Information screen and the system generates Group ID. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info and Add Employees are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between is tabs are possible only if there is a valid group ID generated and assigned to the group. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-8: Enter the values in the respective field, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. Screen can be         navigated to Billing Info by either clicking continue button or         through other respective tabs. (See Figure C-129)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Mode of payment Choose a mode of payment from the drop down list available. Based on selection corresponding fields will enable to enter the values. For e.g. if the value selected is card payment, EFT will be disabled and allows only entering card details and vice versa. Credit Card Information Cardholder's The text for cardholder's name. Accepts alphabets and Names space between two words. Credit Card Type Choose the type of credit card from the drop down list available. Credit Card No The text for credit card number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 30 digits Expiration Date Choose a month of expiration from the drop down list available Expiration Year The text for expiration year. Accepts numeric values of exactly 4. Example 2002. Billing Address As it appears on the credit Card Street Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters. ZIP The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. State The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. City Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America EFT Information Bank Name The text for bank name. Accepts alphabets and space between two words. Routing Number The text for routing number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. Account Number The text for account number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. Account Type Choose the type of account from the drop down list available. Depositor's Name The text for depositor's name. Accepts alphabets and space between two words. Initial Payment Information Amount Received The text for amount received. Accepts only numeric values in the format 999999999.99 Date Receive The text for date received. Choose from the calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY. Check # The text for check number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. No Check Check the option of no checks received for any non- Received receipt of checks.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and Navigates to coverage Information screen. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info and Add Employees are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between is tabs are possible only if there is a valid group ID generated and assigned to the group. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-9: Screen can be navigated to Coverage Info by either         clicking continue button or through other respective tabs. Enter         the values in the respective field, as per the format briefed in         field's explanation section. (See Figure C-130)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Plan Election Choose Plan Click on the check box to select the plan. Send bills to Choose the Option Group or Self for “Send bill to”. Member Signature Check this if member signature is verified Date Signed The text for Date Signed. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and Navigates to either Dependent Info Screen or COBRA Summary screen. Cobra Summary Saves the data and Navigates COBRA Summary screen. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info and Add Employees are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between is tabs are possible only if there is a valid group ID generated and assigned to the group. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-10: Screen can be navigated to Dependent Info by either         clicking continue button or through other respective tabs. (See         Figure C-131)     -   Step-11: Dependent Screen for COBRA is Display only screen.         Click continue to navigate to COBRA Missing Info screen. (See         Figure C-132)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Group Contains header information of the Group Information Header Name of the Text for the Name of the Group Group Group ID Text and Link for the Group ID to navigate to the Group General Info screen Group Type Specifies the Type of the Group like Small Employer Group Proposed The text for Proposed Effective Date. Choose a date by Effective Date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Default effective date is first of the following month. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the group. Pend Date Date Finalized Work Group Text for Work Group. This specifies the internal work group attached to the Group. Internal is based on the writing agent's work group. Tree Structure Enrollment Missing Information is broken down into tree structure. The tree can by expanded or collapsed. The level of the tree is as per the example given below: − Employee − Dependent − Dependent Where (−) signifies expanded view and (+) signifies collapsed view. Group Missing This identifies all the eligibility rules and the Info information that are incomplete on Group level for completing the enrollment process. Missing Entities List the missing entities for the group. Provides a link to go to the respective screen to fill in the relevant information to complete all the required entries. Message List the message against each missing entities. Employee This identifies all the eligibility rules and the Missing Info information that are incomplete on Employee level for completing the enrollment process. Missing Entities List the missing entities for the employee. Provides a link to go to the respective screen to fill in the relevant information to complete all the required entries. Message List the message against each missing entities. Dependent This identifies all the eligibility rules and the Missing Info information that are incomplete on dependent level for completing the enrollment process. Missing Entities List the missing entities for the dependent. Provides a link to go to the respective screen to fill in the relevant information to complete all the required entries. Message List the message against each missing entities. Enrollment Choose from the drop down list the action to be Action performed for enrollment. Enroll/Decline Remarks Text for remarks if any. Reasons for Choose from the drop down list the reasons for Decline decline. Reasons for Other Text for other reason. If the reason for decline is other than the reasons available.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Enroll Saves the data if there are no missing information and navigates to enrollment confirmation page. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes <<, <, >, >> The enrollment missing information shows record for 5 employees on single screen. If the employee size increases more than 5. These buttons are used for navigating to the next and previous records for viewing. << - Show first record (s) < - Show previous record (s) > - Show next record (s) >> - Show last record (s) Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen. Preview Click Preview Invoice to pop up a new browser window Invoice to preview the invoice for the group

-   -   Step-12: On clicking enroll button, screen navigates to         confirmation screen, for having created a group under COBRA         Enrollment. Click search button to navigate back to Group Search         screen. (See Figure C-133)

Modify COBRA

The screen is to modify COBRA details for existing type. The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new COBRA.

The sequential steps involved in modify COBRA are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Select the Existing COBRA and         then select New COBRA. (See Figure C-134)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to group search for adding COBRA.         Enter group id or enter first letter of group name for search.         Click Search button. (See Figure C-135)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with the search result.     -   Step-4: Click on any group id for selection. Screen navigates to         general info screen pertaining to group. The process and flow         for modification are similar to that of creating a group, which         are explained vide step 7 through step 11

Inactivate COBRA

The screen is to inactivate a COBRA details from its active in existing type. (See Figure C-136)

The sequential steps involved in inactivating COBRA are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select New Business Enrollment. Select the Existing COBRA and         then select Inactivate COBRA. (See Figure C-137)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to group search for COBRA. Enter         group id or enter first letter of group name for search. Click         Search button. (See Figure C-138)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with the search result.     -   Step-4: Click on any group id for selection. This navigates to a         screen confirming for the selected group to make inactivate.         Click Inactivate button. (See Figure C-139)     -   Step-5: Confirms the status. Click Search navigates employee         search screen. (See Figure C-140)

5 Termination

Termination is the transaction module that encompasses the process of terminating the group and member enrolled with PacAdvantage in the PX2 System. This process allows terminating Groups, Members and dependent from the PacAdvantage program.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Enrollment->Termination->Group Termination         -   ->Employee Termination         -   ->Dependent Termination         -   ->Multiple Group Termination

Pre-Requisites

The groups and member must exist in the system for the termination process to occur.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions for termination:

-   -   Group Termination—to terminate a group     -   Employee Termination—to terminate an employee     -   Dependent Termination—to terminate a dependent     -   Multiple Group Termination—to terminate multiple groups

Group Termination

The screen is to terminate a group.

The sequential steps involved in terminating a group are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Termination. Then select Group Termination. (See Figure         C-141)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to group search to select a group.         Enter value in any one of the field or simply click Search         button to perform search operation. (See Figure C-142)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-143)     -   Step-4: Click on any group id for selection. The screen         navigates to term request (See Figure C-144)     -   Step-5: Enter the fields with appropriate values as per the         format briefed in field's explanation. Click continue.     -   Step-6: Screen navigates to process term. Enter the details of         effective term date and change term status and click Continue.         (See Figure C-145)     -   Step-7: Confirms the termination of a group. (See Figure C-146)     -   Step-8: Click Search button to go back to Group Search screen.

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Request for Term Mode of Choose a mode of request from the drop down list Request available. The field is mandatory. Post Mark Date The text for post mark date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The postmark date cannot be greater than system date. The field is mandatory. Date Received The text for received date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The received date cannot be greater than system date. The field is mandatory. Request Term The text for request term date. Choose a date in the Date format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The request term date should be the last day of that particular month except in case of death. The field is mandatory. Reason for Choose a reason from the drop down list The field is Term mandatory. Others The text for narrating other info, provided the option for reason for terms is others Authorized Choose Authorized contact from the list. The field is contact mandatory. Process Term Effective Term The text for request term date. Choose a date in the Date format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. Change Term Choose a status from the drop down list for change Status term

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Search is performed based on the input Continue Saves the data and navigates to next screen in the flow of termination. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

Employee Termination

The screen is to terminate an employee.

The sequential steps involved in terminating an employee are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Termination. Then select Employee Termination. (See         Figure C-147)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to employee search to select a         group. Enter value in any of the field or simply click Search         button to perform. search operation. (See Figure C-148)     -   Step-3: This pops a screen with search result.     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection. The screen         navigates to term request. (See Figure C-149)     -   Step-5: Enter the fields with appropriate values as per the         format briefed in field's explanation. Click continue.     -   Step-6: Screen navigates to process term. Enter the details of         effective term date and change term status and click Continue.         (See Figure C-150)     -   Step-7: Confirms the termination of a employee. (See Figure         C-151)     -   Step-8: Clicking Search button leads to Employee search screen.

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Request for Term Mode of Request Choose a mode of request from the drop down list available. This field is mandatory. Post Mark Date The text for post mark date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The postmark date cannot be greater than system date This field is mandatory. Date Received The text for received date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The Date received cannot be greater than system date. This field is mandatory. Request Term The text for request term date. Choose a date in the Date format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The request term date should be the last day of that particular month. This field is mandatory. Reason for Term Choose a reason from the drop down list Others The text for narrating other info, provided the option for reason for terms is others Authorized The text for authorized contact. The field is contact mandatory. Process Term Effective Term The text for request term date. Choose a date in the Date format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. Change Term Choose a status from the drop down list for change Status term

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Search is performed based on the input Continue Saves the data and navigates to next screen in the flow of termination. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

Dependent Termination

The screen is to terminate a dependent.

The sequential steps involved in terminating a dependent are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Termination. Then select Dependent Termination. (See         Figure C-152)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to dependent search to select a         group. Enter value in any one of the field or simply click         Search button to perform search operation. (See Figure C-153)     -   Step-3: This pops a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-154)     -   Step-4: Click on any dependent id for selection. The screen         navigates to term request. (See Figure C-155)     -   Step-5: Enter the fields with appropriate values as per the         format briefed in field's explanation. Click continue.     -   Step-6: Screen navigates to process term. Enter the details of         effective term date and change term status and click Continue.         (See Figure C-156)     -   Step-7: Confirms the termination of a dependent. (See Figure         C-157)     -   Step-8: Click Search button to navigate back to Dependent Search         screen.

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Request for Term Mode of Request Choose a mode of request from the drop down list available. The field is mandatory. Post Mark Date The text for postmark date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The postmark date cannot be greater than system date. The field is mandatory. Date Received The text for received date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The Date Received cannot be greater than system date. The field is mandatory. Request Term The text for request term date. Choose a date in the Date format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The request term date should be the last day of that particular month. The field is mandatory. Reason for Term Choose a reason from the drop down list. The field is mandatory. Others The text for narrating other info, provided if the option for reason for terms is others Authorized The text for authorized contact. The field is contact mandatory. Process Term Effective Term The text for request term date. Choose a date in the Date format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. Change Term Choose a status from the drop down list for change Status term

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Search is performed based on the input Continue Saves the data and navigates to next screen in the flow of termination. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

Multiple Group Termination

The screen is to terminate multiple groups.

The sequential steps involved in terminating multiple groups are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Termination. Then select Multiple Group Termination. (See         Figure C-158)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to term request Enter the fields         with appropriate values as per the format briefed in field's         explanation. Click continue. (See Figure C-159)     -   Step-3: Confirms the termination of a groups. (See Figure C-160)     -   Step-4: Click search button to navigate back to Group         Termination screen.

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Request for Term Mode of Request Choose a mode of request from the drop down list available Post Mark Date The text for post mark date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The post mark date cannot be greater than system date Date Received The text for received date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The post mark date cannot be greater than system date Request Term The text for request term date. Choose a date in the Date format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The request term date should be the last day of that particular month Reason for Term Choose a reason from the drop down list Others The text for narrating other info, provided if the option for reason for terms is others

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Search is performed based on the input Continue Saves the data and navigates to next screen in the flow of termination. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

6 Reinstatement

Reinstatement is the transaction module that encompasses the process of reinstating the group and member enrolled with PacAdvantage in the PX2 System. This process allows reinstating Groups, Members and dependent to the PacAdvantage program.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Enrollment->Reinstatement->Group Reinstatement         -   ->Employee Reinstatement         -   ->Dependent Reinstatement

Pre-Requisites

The groups and member must exist in the system and also terminated for processing reinstatement.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions for reinstatement:

-   -   Group Reinstatement—to reinstate a group     -   Employee Reinstatement—to reinstate an employee     -   Dependent Reinstatement—to reinstate a dependent

Group Reinstatement

The screen is to reinstate a group.

The sequential steps involved in reinstating a group are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Reinstatement. Then select Group Reinstatement. (See         Figure C-161)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to group search to select a group.         Enter value in any one of the fields, or simply click search         button to perform search operation. (See Figure C-162)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-163)     -   Step-4: Click on any group id for selection. The screen         navigates to reinstate request. (See Figure C-164)     -   Step-5: Enter the fields with appropriate values as per the         format briefed in field's explanation. Click continue     -   Step-6: Screen navigates to process reinstate. Enter the details         of effective term date and change term status and click         Continue. (See Figure C-165)     -   Step-7: Confirms the reinstatement of a group. (See Figure         C-166)     -   Step-8: Click Search button to go back to Group Search screen.

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Initiate Group Reinstatement Mode of Request Choose a mode of request from the drop down list available. The field is mandatory. Post Mark Date The text for post mark date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The postmark date cannot be greater than system date. The field is mandatory. Date Received The text for received date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The Date Received cannot be greater than system date. The field is mandatory. Request Reinstate The text for request term date. Choose a date in the Date format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The request reinstate date should be the first day of next month. The field is mandatory. Reason for Choose a reason from the drop down list. The field is Reinstate mandatory. Others The text for narrating other info, provided the option for reason for reinstate is others Authorized The text for authorized contact. The field is contact mandatory. Process Reinstatement Effective Term The text for request term date. Choose a date in the Date format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. Change Reinstate Choose a status from the drop down list for change Status reinstate

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Search is performed based on the input Continue Saves the data and navigates to next screen in the flow of reinstatement. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

Employee Reinstatement

The screen is to reinstate an employee.

The sequential steps involved in reinstating an employee are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Reinstatement. Then select Employee Reinstatement. (See         Figure C-167)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to employee search to select a         group. Enter value in any one of the fields, or simply click         search button to perform search operation. (See Figure C-168)     -   Step-3: This pops a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-169)     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection. The screen         navigates to reinstate request. (See Figure C-170)     -   Step-5: Enter the fields with appropriate values as per the         format briefed in field's explanation. Click continue.     -   Step-6: Screen navigates to process reinstate. Enter the details         of effective term date and change status and click Continue.         (See Figure C-171)     -   Step-7: Confirms the reinstate of an employee. (See Figure         C-172)     -   Step-8: Click Search button to navigate back to Employee Search         screen.

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Initiate Employee Reinstatement Reason for Term Text for reason for term. The field is read only Term Date Text for termination date. Field is read only. Mode of Request Choose a mode of request from the drop down list available. The field is mandatory. Post Mark Date The text for post mark date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The postmark date cannot be greater than system date. The field is mandatory. Date Received The text for received date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The Date Received cannot be greater than system date. The field is mandatory. Request Reinstate The text for request term date. Choose a date in the Date format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The request reinstate date should be the first day of next month. The field is mandatory. Reason for Choose a reason from the drop down list. The field is Reinstate mandatory. Others The text for narrating other info, provided the option for reason for reinstate is others Authorized The text for authorized contact. The field is contact mandatory. Process Reinstatement Effective Term The text for request term date. Choose a date in the Date format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. Change Reinstate Choose a status from the drop down list for change Status reinstate

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Search is performed based on the input Continue Saves the data and navigates to next screen in the flow of termination. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

Dependent Reinstatement

The screen is to reinstate a dependent.

The sequential steps involved in reinstating a dependent are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Reinstatement. Then select Dependent Reinstatement. (See         Figure C-173)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to dependent search to select a         group. Enter dependent id or enter first letter of dependent         name for search. Click Search button. (See Figure C-174)     -   Step-3: This pops a screen with search result. (See FIG. 175)     -   Step-4: Click on any dependent id for selection. The screen         navigates to reinstate request. (See Figure C-176)     -   Step-5: Enter the fields with appropriate values as per the         format briefed in field's explanation. Click continue.     -   Step-6: Screen navigates to process reinstate. Enter the details         of effective term date and change term status and click         Continue. (See Figure C-177)     -   Step-7: Confirms the reinstatement of a dependent. (See Figure         C-178)     -   Step-8: Click search button to go back to Dependent Search         screen.

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Initiate Dependent Reinstatement Mode of Request Choose a mode of request from the drop down list available. The field is mandatory. Post Mark Date The text for post mark date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The postmark date cannot be greater than system date. The field is mandatory. Date Received The text for received date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The Date Received cannot be greater than system date. The field is mandatory. Request Reinstate The text for request term date. Choose a date in the Date format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The request reinstate date should be the first day of next month. The field is mandatory. Reason for Choose a reason from the drop down list. The field is Reinstate mandatory. Others The text for narrating other info, provided the option for reason for reinstate is others Authorized The text for authorized contact. The field is contact mandatory. Process Reinstatement Effective Term The text for request term date. Choose a date in the Date format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. Change Reinstate Choose a status from the drop down list for change Status reinstate

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Search is performed based on the input Continue Saves the data and navigates to next screen in the flow of termination. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

7 Appeals & Grievances

Appeals and grievance is the transaction module that encompasses the process for the groups and members enrolled with PacAdvantage in the PX2 System to raise appeals and grievance. Appeals and Grievance is the process of maintaining a status for all Appeals and Grievances received from the customer and follow up with the decision made either by PacAdvantage-Roseville or PacAdvantage-SF.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Enrollment->Appeals and Grievances->Create         -   ->Modify         -   ->Close

Pre-Requisites

Group and member information must be available in the system for making an appeal or grievance.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions for reinstatement:

-   -   Create—to create an appeal & grievance     -   Modify—to modify an appeal & grievance     -   Close—to close an appeal & grievance

Create

The screen is to create an appeal and grievance.

The sequential steps involved in creating an appeal & grievance are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Appeals & Grievances. Then select Create. (See Figure         C-179)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select a group or member.         Based on the selection the information of group/member will be         displayed. Enter value in any one of the fields, or simply click         search button to perform search operation. (See Figure C-180)     -   Step-3: This pops a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-181)     -   Step-4: Click on any group/member id for selection. The screen         navigates to create grievance. (See Figure C-182)     -   Step-5: Enter the fields with appropriate values as per the         format briefed in field's explanation. Click continue     -   Step-6: Screen navigates to confirming create grievance. (See         Figure C-183)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Grievance Information Post Mark Date The text for post mark date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The post mark date cannot be greater than system date Date Received The text for received date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The post mark date cannot be greater than system date Nature of The text for nature of grievance. Choose a type from Grievance the drop down list available Subject of The text for subject of grievance. Choose a type from Grievance the drop down list available Remarks The text for remarks. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Search is performed based on the input Save Saves the data and navigates to next screen in the flow of creating a grievance Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

Modify

The screen is to modify an appeal and grievance.

The sequential steps involved in modifying an appeal & grievance are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Appeals & Grievances. Then select Modify. (See Figure         C-184)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select either by         complainant or by grievance. Based on the selection the         information of group/member with grievance details will be         displayed. Enter group/member/grievance id o for search. Click         Search button. (See Figure C-185)     -   Step-3: The screen navigates to process grievance Enter the         fields with appropriate values as per the format briefed in         field's explanation. (See Figure C-186)     -   Step-4: Click Save.     -   Step-5: The screen confirms the modification of grievance. (See         Figure C-187)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Process Grievance Search by Choose the option to search by complainant or search by grievance. Based on this option the Either Grievance ID or Complainant ID field will be enabled. Complainant Choose a type of complainant from either group or Type member Complainant ID The text for complainant id. Accepts numeric values. Forward for Click this option to have approval approval Forward To The text for the person to whom it has to be forwarded Forward Date The text for forward date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon Batch Date The text for batch date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon Additional The text for additional remarks. Accepts alphabets, Remarks numeric and special characters

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Search is performed based on the input Save Saves the data and navigates to next screen in the flow of creating a grievance Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

Close

The screen is to close an appeal and grievance.

The sequential steps involved in closing an appeal & grievance are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Appeals & Grievances. Then select Close. (See Figure         C-188)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select either by         complainant or by grievance. Based on the selection the         information of group/member with grievance details will be         displayed. Enter group/member/grievance id o or enter first         letter of group/member's name for search. Click Search. (See         Figure C-189)     -   Step-3: The screen navigates to close grievance Enter the fields         with appropriate values as per the format briefed in field's         explanation. (See Figure C-190)     -   Step-4: Click Save.     -   Step-5: The screen confirms the close of grievance. (See Figure         C-191)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Complainant Choose a type of complainant from either group or Type member Complainant The text for complainant id. Accepts numeric values ID Conclusion Choose a conclusion from the drop down list available Reason The text for reason. If the reason is others, it will enable the field other reason for entry Other Reason The text for other reason. Field is enabled only if the option under reasons is others Batch Date The text for batch date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Search is performed based on the input Save Saves the data and navigates to next screen in the flow of creating a grievance Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

8 Carrier Issues

Carrier Issues is the transaction module that encompasses the process for the groups and members enrolled with PacAdvantage in the PX2 System to raise issues with the carriers. Carrier Issues is the process of maintaining a status for all Carrier Issues received from the customer and follow up with the carrier for resolution and inform the customer of resolution.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Enrollment->Carrier Issues->Create         -   ->Modify         -   ->Close

Pre-Requisites

There are no pre-requisites for using this application.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions for reinstatement:

-   -   Create—to create carrier issue     -   Modify—to modify carrier issue     -   Close—to close carrier issue

Create

The screen is to create carrier issue.

The sequential steps involved in creating carrier issue are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Carrier Issues. Then select Create. (See Figure C-192)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select a group or member.         Based on the selection the information of group/member will be         displayed. Enter value in any one of the field or simply click         search button to perform search operation. (See Figure C-193)     -   Step-3: This pops a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-194)     -   Step-4: Click on any group/member id for selection. The screen         navigates to create carrier issue. (See Figure C-195)     -   Step-5: Enter the fields with appropriate values as per the         format briefed in field's explanation.     -   Step-6: Click Save     -   Step-7: Screen navigates to confirming create carrier issues.         (See Figure C-196)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Carrier Issue Information Received Date The text for received date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. Urgent Click the check box, if it is urgent Carrier Choose a carrier from the drop down list available Reported Issue Choose a reported issue from the drop down list available Remarks The text for remarks. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Search is performed based on the input Save Saves the data and navigates to next screen in the flow of creating carrier issue Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

Modify

The screen is to modify carrier issue.

The sequential steps involved in modifying a carrier issue are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Carrier Issues. Then select Modify. (See Figure C-197)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select either by         complainant or by carrier issue. Based on the selection the         information of group/member with grievance details will be         displayed. Enter the value for either customer id or carrier         issue id. The field is mandatory. (See Figure C-198)     -   Step-3: Click search. The screen navigates to process carrier         issue to modify. (See Figure C-199)     -   Step-4: Enter the fields with appropriate values as per the         format briefed in field's explanation     -   Step-5: Click Save.     -   Step-6: The screen confirms the modification of carrier issues.         (See Figure C-200)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search by Select search either by client type or by carrier issue type Customer Type Choose a Customer Type from either group or member. The field is enabled only if the search is selected as client type Customer ID The text for customer id. Accepts numeric values Carrier Issue ID The text for carrier issue id. Accepts numeric values. The field is enabled only if the selected type is carrier issue type Notify carrier Choose an option as yes or no for notifying a carrier Mode of Choose a mode from the drop down list available Notification Date Notified The text for notification date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon Batch Date The text for batch date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon Additional The text for remarks. Accepts alphabets, numeric and Remarks special characters

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Search is performed based on the input Save Saves the data and navigates to next screen in the flow of creating a grievance Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

Close

The screen is to close carrier issue.

The sequential steps involved in closing carrier issue are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Carrier Issues. Then select Close. (See Figure C-201)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select either by customer         or by carrier issue. Based on the selection the information of         group/member with carrier issue details will be displayed. Enter         group/member/carrier issue id for search. The field is         mandatory. Click Search. (See Figure C-202)     -   Step-3: The screen navigates to close carrier issue Enter the         fields with appropriate values as per the format briefed in         field's explanation. (See Figure C-203)     -   Step-4: Click Save.     -   Step-5: The screen confirms the close of carrier issue. (See         Figure C-204)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search by Select search either by client type or by carrier issue type Customer Type Choose a Customer Type from either group or member. The field is enabled only if the search is selected as client type Customer ID The text for customer id. Accepts numeric values with exactly 9 digits Carrier Issue ID The text for carrier issue id. Accepts numeric values with exactly 9 digits. The field is enabled only if the selected type is carrier issue type Actual Issue Choose an issue for actual issue from the drop down list available Resolution Choose a resolution from the drop down list available Retransmission Click yes or no for retransmission Date Carrier The text for carrier received date. Choose a date in the Received format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon Notify Originator Click yes or no for notifying originator Batch Date The text for batch date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon Resolution The text for resolution comments. Accepts alphabets, comments numeric and special characters

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Search is performed based on the input Save Saves the data and navigates to next screen in the flow of creating a grievance Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

9 Add On

Add On is the transaction module that encompasses the process of Adding New Employee or Dependent to the group and or member enrolled with PacAdvantage in the PX2 System.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Enrollment->Add On->Employee Add On         -   ->Dependent Add On

Pre-Requisites

Group and the member must be enroll and all their relevant information must be available in the system to Add On Employee and or dependent.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions for reinstatement:

-   -   Add Employee—to add employee     -   Add Dependent—to add dependent     -   Modify Dependent—to modify employee     -   Modify Dependent—to modify dependent

Add Employee

The screen is to add an employee.

The sequential steps involved in adding an employee are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Add On. Select Employee Add On. Then click Add Employee.         (See Figure C-205)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select a group. Enter         value in any one of the fields, or simply click search button to         perform search operation. (See Figure C-206)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-207)     -   Step-4: Click on any group id for selection. Screen navigates to         change request screen for adding an employee.

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Group Information Name of the Text for the Name of the Group. Read Only field group Effective Date Text for Employee Effective date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Defaults effective date of the Group. Effective date cannot be past date Read only field Group ID Text for Group ID. Read only field. Status Text for status. Read only field Group Type Text for group type. Read only field. Work Group Text for work group. Read only field. Group Information Mode of Request Choose a mode of request from the drop down list available Post Mark Date Text for post mark date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Accepts in the format MM/DD/YYYY Entry to this field is mandatory Received Date Text for received date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Accepts in the format MM/DD/YYYY. Entry to this field is mandatory. Reasons for Choose a reason for add on from the drop down list Add On available Others Text for others. This field is enabled only if the option for reasons for add on is others

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the entered information and navigates to next screen Employee General Info. Cancel Clears or restores the content entered in the fields only prior to saving the records

-   -   Step-5: Enter the fields with appropriate values as per the         format briefed in field's explanation     -   Step-6: Screen navigates to add employee general information.         First and Last name are mandatory other fields are optional.         Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the format         briefed in field's explanation section. (See Figure C-209)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Information Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. First name is mandatory. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for last name Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Last name is mandatory. Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Birth date cannot be later than the current date. Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. Address Information: Physical and Alternate Address-Note: Enter Alternate Address if different from the Physical Address. Street Address The text for address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Apt The text for suite/apt #.. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, State and County are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America County Choose the name of the county from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Mode of Choose the mode of correspondence from the drop Correspon- down list available dence Phone Number The text for telephone number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Extension The text for extension number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 5 digits Fax The text for fax number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Email The text for email of the employee. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and navigates to coverage information for employees. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary information entered for group creation Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen. Tab General Info, Coverage Info, Add Dependent are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between the tabs is possible only if there is a valid Employee ID generated and assigned to the employee. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-7: Screen navigates to coverage information. Even though         the fields are optional, enter the values in the respective         fields, as per the format briefed in field's explanation section         and click Continue. (See Figure C-210)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Information Hours worked per The text for worked hours per week. Accepts numeric week values not exceeding 2 digits. Date of The text for date of employment. Choose a date by employment clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Employee type Choose an employee type from the drop down list available Pay Roll Check box for Pay Roll verification. Check this if pay roll is verified Plan Information Line of coverage Choose a line of coverage from the drop down list available Medical waived Click the check box for medical waive if the employee is waiving medical. Carrier selection Choose a carrier selection from the drop down list (Benefit level) available Coverage choice Choose a coverage from the drop down list available PCP ID/Medical The text for PCP ID. Accepts alphabets and numeric group ID values not exceeding 10 characters. Are you an Click the check box if you are an existing patient existing patient PCP last name The text for PCP last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. PCP first name The text for PCP first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Prior plan type Choose a plan type from the drop down list available Prior plan name Choose a plan name from the drop down list available Prior insurance The text for insurance start date. Choose a date by start date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Prior insurance The text for insurance end date. Choose a date by end date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Other coverage The text for other coverage. Accepts alphabets with kept values not exceeding 50 characters. Employee Click the check box, to have employee signature signature Date signed The text for date signed. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Date cannot accept future date.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of employee coverage information. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Update Update the contents of Plan Information. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Cancel Cancels the operation that was currently performed prior to saving the record. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary of information entered for group creation Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen. Continue Saves the data and navigates to Coverage Information screen.. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tab General Info, Coverage Info, Add Dependent are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between the tabs are possible only if there is a valid Employee ID generated and assigned to the employee Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-8: Screen navigates to add dependent information. First         name and last name fields are mandatory and other fields are         optional. Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section and click either         Enrollment Summary or Add dependent. (See Figure C-211)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Dependent Information First Name The text for first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. First name is mandatory. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for last name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Last name is mandatory. Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon.. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Birth date cannot be later than the current date. Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. Relationship Choose the relationship from the drop down list available. Street Address The text for address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Suite The text for suite/apt #.. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, and State are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Line of Coverage Selected carrier The text for selected carrier. It is a read only field Coverage choice The text for coverage. It is a read only field Service area The text for service area. It is a read only field Prior plan type Choose a plan type from the drop down list available Prior plan The text for plan name. Accepts alphabets Waived Click the check box if Line of Coverage is waived. Start date The text for insurance start date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. End date The text for insurance end date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. PCP ID/ The text for PCP ID. Accepts alphabets and numeric values not exceeding 10 characters. PCP last name The text for PCP last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. PCP first name The text for PCP first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Disabled Click the option of temporary or permanent. This is dependent enable if the relationship opted is child Domestic partner Click the option for domestic partner. It depends on the value selected in relationship Legal guardian Click the option for legal guardian. It depends on the value selected in relationship Signature Click the check box if the signature is opted

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Employee Saves the data and navigates to the screen for adding employees. Add Dependent Saves the data and navigates to the screen for adding dependent Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary of information entered for group creation Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tab General Info, Coverage Info, Add Dependent are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between the tabs are possible only if there is a valid Employee ID generated and assigned to the employee Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-9: Clicking enrollment summary button screen navigates to         enrollment summary. This screen shows the overall information         that is entered will be shown. (See Figure C-212)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each element in the screen. Element Description Group Contains header information of the Group Information Header Name of Text for the Name of the Group the Group Group ID Text and Link for the Group ID to navigate to the Group General Info screen Group Type Specifies the Type of the Group like Small Employer Group Status Text to specify the status of the group. Work Group Text for Work Group. This specifies the internal work group attached to the Group. This is based on the writing agent's work group. Enrollment Enrollment Summary Information is broken down into Summary tree structure. The tree can by expanded or collapsed. Information The level of the tree is as per the example given below: − Employee − Dependent − Dependent Where (−) signifies expanded view and (+) signifies collapsed view. Employee ID Text for Employee ID Employee SSN Text for Employee SSN Employee Name Text for employee Name (First Name and Last Name) Effective Date Text for Employee Effective date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Defaults effective date of the Employee. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the employee. Dependent ID Text for Dependent ID Dependent SSN Text for Dependent SSN Dependent Name Text for Dependent Name (First Name and Last Name) Effective Date Text for Dependent Effective date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Defaults effective date of the Employee. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the Dependent.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Pre Enrollment Saves the data and performs validation and eligibility checks against the information required for enrollment and navigates to the screen Missing Information. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-10: Clicking pre enrollment navigates to missing info         screen. It gives the information that is left out while entering         input for creating a group. For a successful creation of a group         the missing information should be empty. (See Figure C-213)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each element in the screen. Element Description Group Contains header information of the Group Information Header Name of Text for the Name of the Group the Group Group ID Text and Link for the Group ID to navigate to the Group General Info screen Group Type Specifies the Type of the Group like Small Employer Group Effective Date The text for Effective Date. Status Text to specify the status of the group. Work Group Text for Work Group. This specifies the internal work group attached to the Group. Internal is based on the writing agent's work group. Tree Structure Enrollment Missing Information is broken down into tree structure. The tree can by expanded or collapsed. The level of the tree is as per the example given below: − Employee − Dependent − Dependent Where (−) signifies expanded view and (+) signifies collapsed view. Employee This identifies all the eligibility rules and the Missing Info information that are incomplete on Employee level for completing the enrollment process. Missing Entities List the missing entities for the employee. Provides a link to go to the respective screen to fill in the relevant information to complete all the required entries. Message List the message against each missing entities. Dependent This identifies all the eligibility rules and the Missing Info information that are incomplete on dependent level for completing the enrollment process. Missing Entities List the missing entities for the dependent. Provides a link to go to the respective screen to fill in the relevant information to complete all the required entries. Message List the message against each missing entities. Enrollment Choose from the drop down list the action to be Action performed for enrollment. Enroll/Decline Remarks Text for remarks if any. Reasons Choose from the drop down list the reasons for for Decline decline. Reasons for Text for other reason. If the reason for decline is other Other than the reasons available.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Send mail Click this link to send missing information to the Internal Work Group (GMS representatives) attached to this Group. Preview Invoice Click this Link to preview the Invoice details prior to generation of invoice. Enroll Saves the data if there are no missing information and navigates to enrollment confirmation page. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes <<, <, >, >> The enrollment missing information shows record for 5 employees on single screen. If the employee size increases more than 5. These buttons are used for navigating to the next and previous records for viewing. << - Show first record (s) < - Show previous record (s) > - Show next record (s) >> - Show last record (s) Employee ID Click Employee ID to navigates to the Employee's general info screen. Preview Invoice Click Preview Invoice to pop up a new browser window to preview the invoice for the group

-   -   Step-11: On completing all the relevant information that is         required for a successful addition of an employee, the following         is the sample screen for a successful creation. (See Figure         C-214)     -   Step-12: Click Search employee to navigate back to Search         Employee screen.

Modify Employee

The screen is to modify an employee.

The sequential steps involved in modifying an employee are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Add On. Select Employee Add On. Then click Modify         Employee. (See Figure C-215)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select a group. Enter         value in any one of the field or simply click Search button to         perform search operation. (See Figure C-216)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-217)     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection. This navigates         to General info of employees. The flow and method of modifying         are similar to that of creation, which is explained in Add         Employee, vide step 6 through step 11.

Modify Dependent

The screen is to modify a dependent. Here an employee can be added to a group and a dependent to that employee can be modified. The sequential steps involved in modifying dependent are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Add On. Select Employee Add On. Then click Modify         Dependent. (See Figure C-218)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select a dependent Enter         value in any one of the field or simply click Search button to         perform search operation. (See Figure C-219)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-220)     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection. This navigates         to Add Dependent of an employee. The flow and method of         modifying are similar to that of creation, which is explained in         Add Employee, vide step 8 through step 11.

Inactivate Dependent

The screen is to inactivate a dependent.

The sequential steps involved in inactivating dependent are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Add On. Select Employee Add On. Then click Inactivate         Dependent. (See Figure C-221)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select a dependent. Enter         value in any one of the field or simply click search button to         perform search operation. (See Figure C-222)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-223)     -   Step-4: Click on any Dependent ID for selection. Screen         navigates to Inactivate. (See Figure C-224)     -   Step-5 Click Inactivate button, leads to confirmation screen.         (See Figure C-225)

Add Dependent

The screen is to add a dependent.

The sequential steps involved in adding a dependent are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Add On. Select Dependent Add On. Then click Add         Dependent. (See Figure C-226)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select a group/employee         Enter value in any one of the field, or simply click search         button, to perform search operation. (See Figure C-227)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-228)     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection. This navigates         to change request for add on dependent screen. Enter the fields         with appropriate values as per the format briefed in field's         explanation. Click Continue. (See Figure C-229)     -   Step-5: Screen navigates to Add on Dependent screen. Enter the         fields with appropriate values as per the format briefed in         field's explanation. Click Enrollment summary. Enrollment         summary and missing information are similar to Add Dependent and         it is explained under Add Employee vide step 8 through step 11.         (See Figure C-230)

Field Explanation

Refer for field explanations explained in Add Employee

Button Functionality

Refer for field explanations explained in Add Employee

Modify Dependent

The screen is to modify a dependent, where a dependent is added to an already enrolled employee. The process and flow are similar to that of modify dependent under Employee Add on.

The sequential steps involved in modifying dependent are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Add On. Select Employee Add On. Then click Modify         Dependent. (See Figure C-231)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select a dependent Enter         value in any one of the field or simply click Search button to         perform search operation. (See Figure C-232)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-233)     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection. This navigates         to Add Dependent of an employee. The flow and method of         modifying are similar to that of creation, which is explained in         Add Employee, vide step 8 through step 11.

10 En-Operations

Enrollment Operation is a utility process for generation various file in the specified output format for transmission to the Carrier, PacAdvantage and Mail House. These operations are Export Membership Data, Export PacAdvantage Data, Export Transmission Data, ROE Process, and ROE Packet Generation.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Enrollment->En-Operations->Export Membership Data         -   ->Export PacAdvantage Data         -   ->Export Transmission Data         -   ->ROE Process         -   ->ROE Packet Generation

Pre-Requisites

All master and transaction records must be available in the system for Enrollment Operation.

Output file format and information for each carrier must be available in the system. Refer “User Manual for Carrier Maintenance” for further information on the output file formats for Carriers (Enrollment Transmission)

Application Functions

This application has the following functions for reinstatement:

-   -   Export Membership Data     -   Export PacAdvantage Data     -   Export Transmission Data     -   ROE Process     -   ROE Packet Generation

Export Membership Data

The screen is to export membership data.

The sequential steps involved in exporting membership data are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select EN-Operations. Select Export Membership Data. (See Figure         C-234)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Export Membership Data. (See         Figure C-235)     -   Step-3: Choose the option of carrier or plan, member status,         term effective date and file format and click Export     -   Step-4: Initially the status will be not exported. Once the         export button is clicked after filling necessary fields, a new         browser window open for downloading the file. (See Figure C-236)     -   Step-5: Click “Click here to download” link and then click Ok to         download the file     -   Step-6: Click on the Search button navigates to the screen shown         below. Enter Export ID and search for the export status. Click         on the Export ID link to show the screen with export details or         Click back to go back to the export screen. (See Figure C-237)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Export ID Read only field to display export id value Status Read only field to display the status of export. Exported By Read only field to display the user who exported the files Export Date Read only field to display the export date Carrier Choose this option and select from the list if the data export is based on the Carrier Plan Choose this option and select from the list if the data export is based on the Plan Member Status Choose from the List the Member status. Member Status can be Active, Termed or Both. The field is mandatory Term Effective Enter the date for Term Effective Date or select a date Date by clicking calendar icon. The field is mandatory if the Member status option is Termed or Both. File Format Choose a format from drop down list for output format that should be generated. The field is mandatory

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description New Click on new button enables to have a new Export of files. Export Click on Export button will perform the action of exporting the files based on selection criteria Search Click on search button navigates to a screen to have a search on entering Export ID. View Export Log Click on view export log to have a pop up display showing the status of exported files Hide Export Log Click on hide export log to hide the pop up display message. Clear Clears the content and restore the operation that was currently performed prior to saving the record Back Goes back to Export screen.

Export PacAdvantage Data

The screen is to export PacAdvantage Data.

The sequential steps involved in exporting PacAdvantage data are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select EN-Operations. Select Export PacAdvantage Data. (See         Figure C-238)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Export PacAdvantage Data. (See         Figure C-239)     -   Step-3: Click Export     -   Step-4: Initially the status will be not exported. Once the         export button is clicked, the user has an option to view the         status of export process by clicking Search.     -   Step-5: Click back button to go back to Export. PacAdvantage         Data Screen. (See Figure C-240)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Export ID Read only field to display export id value Status Read only field to display the status of export. Exported By Read only field to display the user who exported the files Export Date Read only field to display the export date

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description New Click on new button enables to have a new Export of files. Export Click on Export button will perform the action of exporting the files based on selection criteria Search Click on search button navigates to a screen to have a search on entering Export ID. View Export Log Click on view export log to have a pop up display showing the status of exported files Hide Export Log Click on hide export log to hide the pop up display message. Clear Clears the content and restore the operation that was currently performed prior to saving the record Back Goes back to Export PacAdvantage Data screen.

Export Transmission Data

The screen is to export transmission data.

The sequential steps involved in exporting transmission data are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select EN-Operations. Select Export Transmission Data. (See         Figure C-241)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Export Transmission Data. (See         Figure C-242)     -   Step-3: Click Export     -   Step-4: Initially the status will be not exported. Once the         export button is clicked after filling necessary fields, the         user has an option to view the status of export process by         clicking Search. (See Figure C-243)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Export ID Read only field to display export id value Status Read only field to display the status of export. Exported By Read only field to display the user who exported the files Export Date Read only field to display the export date Transmit for the Enter the date for Transmit for the following Date following Date From or select a date by clicking calendar icon. The From field is mandatory. Transmit for the Enter the date for Transmit for the following Date To following or select a date by clicking calendar icon. The field is Date To mandatory. Comments Text to enter Comments if any.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description New Click on new button enables to have a new Export of files. Export Click on Export button will perform the action of exporting the files based on selection criteria Search Click on search button navigates to a screen to have a search on entering Export ID. Back Goes back to Export Transmission Data screen.

ROE Process

The screen is to process ROE data.

The sequential steps involved in processing ROE are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select EN-Operations. Select ROE Process. (See Figure C-244)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to ROE Process. (See Figure C-245)     -   Step-3: Click Generate

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Run ID The text for sequential number of Run ID. It is a read only field and is auto generated Renewal Date The text for Renewal Date during which the ROE/OE process is to be initiated. Run By The text for name of the user who initiates ROE process. It is a read only field.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description New Click on New button to start new ROE Process. Generate Click Generate to Initiate ROE Process. ROE process once initiated for a specific period cannot be reinitiated once again. Cancel Click cancel to reset the fields.

ROE Packet Generation

The screen is to process ROE Packet Generation.

The sequential steps involved in generating ROE Packets are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select EN-Operations. Select ROE Packet Generation. (See Figure         C-246)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to ROE Packet Generation. Select         ROE cycle period and apply filter conditions for Generating         ROE/OE packets. (See Figure C-247)     -   Step-3: Click Generate     -   Step-4: Initially the status will be not imported. Once the         export button is clicked after filling necessary fields, the         user has an option to view the status of export process by         clicking Search. (See Figure C-248)     -   Step 5: Click Back button to go back to ROE

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Export ID The text for Export ID. This is auto generated by the system Status The text for Export Status. This is a read only field. The system shows the Export status based on data exported Exported By The text for Exported By. This is a read only field. Export Date The text for Export date. This is a read only field. ROE Cycle Choose the ROE Cycle period for which the ROE/OE packet are to be generated. Post Mark Date The text for post mark date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The postmark date cannot be greater than system date. The field is mandatory. Comments Text to specify comments if any. Selected Groups The text displays the selected group count based on the ROE Cycle period. Example 0 to 100. It is a read only field Group ID The text for Group ID. Accepts numeric values only. Group Name The text for group name. Accepts any characters. Group Type Choose the group type from the list. Group Size From The text for group size and specifies the starting range. Accepts numeric values only. Group Size To The text for group size and specifies the ending range. Accepts numeric values only. View Selected Check the View Selected Check Box to view only selected groups.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Filter Click the Filter to display the Group based on the search criteria/filter conditions provided. Clear Filter Clear the Content of the fields. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Check All on this The “Check All on this Page” Link will check all the Page records in the table on this Page Clear All on this The “Clear All on this Page” Link will uncheck all the Page records in the table that are checked on this Page. Invert Selection The Invert Selection Link will invert the selection criteria for the check boxes. I.e. All Check Groups would be unchecked and vice versa. <<, <, >, >> These buttons are used for navigating to the next and previous records for viewing. << - Show first record (s) < - Show previous record (s) > - Show next record (s) >> - Show last record (s) New Click New to start new operation on this screen Generate Click Generate to generate ROE/OE packets for Mail House Transmission. Search Click Search Button to search the Status of the ROE/ OE Packet generation Cancel Cancels the operation that was currently performed prior to saving the record. Back Goes back to ROE Transmission screen.

11 Change

Changes is the transaction module that encompasses the process of accommodating and maintaining all information that is required for Groups ad Members. Change can be done for Groups, COBRA Members, Individual Member, Employee and Dependent.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Enrollment->En-Operations->Group Change         -   ->COBRA Change         -   ->Individual Employee Change         -   ->Employee Change         -   ->Dependent Change

Pre-Requisites

Groups and Members must be enrolled and all the relevant information must be available in the system for making changes.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions for reinstatement:

-   -   Create New Change Request     -   Modify Change Request

Group Change Create New Request

The screen is to have an request for any change in Group

The sequential steps involved in change request for group are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Change. Select Group change and Create Change Request.         (See Figure C-249)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Group Search screen. Enter any         value in one of the field to perform search operation. (See         Figure C-250)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-251)     -   Step-4: Click on any group id for selection the screen navigates         to Group Change Request. (See Figure C-252)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Group Information Name of the Text for the Name of the Group. This is read group only field. Effective Date Text for Effective date. This is read only field. Group ID Text for Group ID. This is read only field.. Status Text for status. This is read only field. Group Type Text for group type. This is read only field.. Work Group Text for work group. This is read only field.. General Information Mode of Request Choose a mode of request from the drop down list available Post Mark Date Text for post mark date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Accepts in the format MM/DD/YYYY Entry to this field is mandatory Received Date Text for received date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Accepts in the format MM/DD/YYYY. Entry to this field is mandatory. Reasons for Choose a reason for change from the drop down list Change available Others Text for others. This field is enabled only if the option for reasons for change is others

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the entered information and navigates to next level, which show the pick list for the changes that are sought. Clear Clears or restores the content entered in the fields as was prior to saving the records.

-   -   Step-5: Choose mode of request, Post mark date, date received         and reason for change. Clicks continue. This screen would be         available only if there are no change requests pending for the         group.     -   Step-6: Navigates to group changes, which allows the option to         pick the changes sought. Check the items that need to be change         and click on continue button. This screen is dynamically built         to display only those changes that can be performed on the         specific group selected. (See Figure C-253)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Group Information Name of the group Text for the Name of the Group. Read Only field Effective Date Text for Effective date. This is read only field. Group ID Text for Group ID. This is read only field. Status Text for status. This is read only field. Group Type Text for group type. This is read only field. Work Group Text for work group. This is read only field. General Information Contact Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Information1 Contact Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Information2 Physical Address Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Billing Address Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Tax Identification Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Billing Address Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Billing Information Payment information Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Agent Information Writing Agent Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Agent of Record Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications General Agency Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Coverage Information RAF Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Waiting Period Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Medical LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Vision LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Dental LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications CAM LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Others Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and navigates to General information for groups. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-7: On clicking continue, navigates to General Information         of group Respective tabs can also clicked to navigate to         corresponding screens. Continue would be enabled only if the         changes are sought on this screen, else use tab to navigate to         the next screen. (See Figure C-254)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Company Information Legal Name The text for name of the group. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 60 characters. Field is mandatory Doing Business As The text for business nature. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 60 characters. Field is optional Type of Business Choose the type of business from the drop down list available Tax Identification The text for tax identification. Accepts numeric values of exactly 9 digits Address Information: Physical and Billing Address-Note: Enter Billing Address if different from the Physical Address. Street Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Suite The text for company suite/apt # Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, State and County are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America County Choose the name of the county from the drop down list of counties available for the ZIP Code entered. Contact Information Mode of Choose the mode of correspondence from the drop Correspondence down list available. Contact 1 and Contact 2 Fill in the relevant for Contact 1 and 2. Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Phone Number The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values of exactly 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Extension The text for extension number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 5 digits. Fax The text for fax number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values of exactly 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Email The text for email of the contact person. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters Contact Comments The text for comments. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters. Field is optional

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and navigates to Billing Information screen and the system generates Group ID. This is enabled only if changes are sought on this screen. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage Info are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-8: On clicking continue, navigates to Billing Information         Respective tabs can also clicked to navigate corresponding         screens. (See Figure C-255)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Mode of Choose a mode of payment from the drop down list payment available. Based on selection corresponding fields will enable to enter the values. For e.g. if the value selected is card payment, EFT will be disabled and allows only entering card details and vice versa. Credit Card Information Cardholder's The text for cardholder's name. Accepts alphabets and Names space between two words. Credit Card Choose the type of credit card from the drop down list Type available. Credit Card No The text for credit card number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 30 digits Expiration Date Choose a month of expiration from the drop down list available Expiration The text for expiration year. Accepts numeric values Year of exactly 4. Example 2002. Billing Address As it appears on the credit Card Street Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters. ZIP The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. State The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. City Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America EFT Information Bank Name The text for bank name. Accepts alphabets and space between two words. Routing The text for routing number. Accepts numeric values Number not exceeding 9 digits. Account The text for account number. Accepts numeric values Number not exceeding 9 digits. Account Type Choose the type of account from the drop down list available. Depositor's The text for depositor's name. Accepts alphabets and Name space between two words. Initial Payment Information Amount The text for amount received. Accepts only numeric Received values in the format 999999999.99 Date Receive The text for date received. Choose from the calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY. Check # The text for check number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. No Check Check the option of no checks received for any non- Received receipt of checks.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and Navigates to Agent Information screen. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information for the group. Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage Info are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-9: On clicking continue, navigates to Agent Information.         Respective tabs can also clicked to navigate corresponding         screens. (See Figure C-256)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Agent ID Choose an agent id by clicking search icon Agent Type Choose an agent type from the drop down list available. Based on the selection of the agent type the percent commission split entry and the Receive ROE packets option would be available. Percent The text for percent commission. Accepts numeric commission values in the range of 1-100 (Example 100.00). This split will be enabled only if the Agent type selected is “Agent Of Record” Sum of the percentage for all the Agent of Record added should be equal to 100.00. Receive Click the check box to receive ROE/OE packets for ROE/OE agent. This option will not be available for Agent Type packets “General Agent”. Agent The text for agent commission. Defaults the value Commission defined in CM - rate Administration for Agent Commission. Accepts numeric values less than or equal to the defaulted value in the in the range of 1-100 (Example 4.45) Check the box Click the check box for a group with out an agent. This if the group is option will be available only for the Agent Type, “Agent without an of Record and Writing Agent”. agent

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of agent information. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields Update Update the contents of agent information. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only on saving the record Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving the record Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Continue Saves the data and navigates to Coverage Information screen. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tab General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage Info are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-10: On clicking continue, navigates to Coverage         Information. Respective tabs can also clicked to navigate         corresponding screens. (See Figure C-257)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Hours worked per week The text for worked hours per week. Accepts numeric values. Date of employment The text for date of employment. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Employee type Choose an employee type from the drop down list available Line of coverage Choose a line of coverage from the drop down list available Medical waived Click the check box for medical waive if the employee is waiving medical. Carrier selection Choose a carrier selection from the drop down list (Benefit level) available Coverage choice Choose a coverage from the drop down list available PCP ID/Medical The text for PCP ID. Accepts alphabets and numeric group ID values not exceeding 10 characters. Are you an existing patient Click the check box if you are an existing patient PCP last name The text for PCP last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. PCP first name The text for PCP first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Prior plan type Choose a plan type from the drop down list available Prior plan name Choose a plan name from the drop down list available Prior insurance The text for insurance start date. Choose a date by start date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Prior insurance end The text for insurance end date. Choose a date by date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Other coverage kept The text for other coverage. Accepts alphabets with values not exceeding 50 characters. RAF Text to display the RAF applicable for the Individual Association Member. Employee signature Click the check box, to have employee signature Date signed The text for date signed. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Date cannot accept future date.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of employee coverage information. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Update Update the contents of Plan Information. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only on saving. Cancel Cancels the operation that was currently performed prior to saving the record. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen. Continue Saves the data and navigates to Missing Information screen.. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tab General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage Info are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-11: Clicking change summary button screen navigates to         missing info screen. This screen shows the overall information         that is entered will be shown. (See Figure C-258)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Group Missing Information Missing Entity List the missing entities for the group change Message Provides a message for the missing entities Change Information Change Rule Specifies the pick list for the changes Change status Show the change status as incomplete, complete Change Choose from the list change status confirmation Change Action Choose from the list of change action Remarks Text for briefing the change action

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Confirm Navigates to confirmation screen by incorporating all the changes made Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-12: Confirms the changes incorporated in-group request.         Click Group Change Search to go back to Group Search screen.         (See Figure C-259)

Group Modify Pending Change

The screen is to have an request for any change in Group

The sequential steps involved in change request for group are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Change. Select Group change and Modify Pending Change.         (See Figure C-260)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Group Search screen. Enter any         value in one of the field to perform search operation. (See         Figure C-261)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-262)     -   Step-4: Navigates to group changes, which allows the option to         have changes required. If no option is selected the continue         button in respective pages will be disabled and changes cannot         be performed. (See Figure C-263)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanations explained in Create New Change Request under Group Change

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality explained in Create New Change Request under Group Change.

-   -   Step-5: On clicking continue, navigates to General Information         of group Respective tabs can also clicked to navigate to         corresponding screens. The process and flow for modifying change         request is similar to that of create new change request. (See         Figure C-264)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanations explained in Create New Change Request.

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality explained in Create New Change Request.

COBRA Change Create New Request

The screen is to have an request for any change in COBRA

The sequential steps involved in change request for COBRA are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Change. Select COBRA change and Create Change Request.         (See Figure C-265)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Employee Search screen. Enter         any value in one of the field to perform search operation. (See         Figure C-266)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-267)     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection the screen         navigates to Employee change Request. (See Figure C-268)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanations explained in Create New Change Request

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality explained in Create New Change Request.

-   -   Step-5: Screen navigates to employee change (pick list). Select         the options to have any modifications, so that the selected         screen will enable the continue button. This screen is         dynamically built to display only those changes that can be         performed on the specific group selected. (See Figure C-269)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Group Information Name of the group Text for the Name of the Group. This is read only field. Effective Date Text for Effective date. This is read only field. Group ID Text for Group ID. This is read only field.. Status Text for status. This is read only field. Group Type Text for group type. This is read only field. Work Group Text for work group. This is read only field. Employee ID Text for employee ID This is read only field. Employee Name Text for employee name. This is read only field General Information Change in employee Selecting this option will enable to allow for any address modifications Change SSN information Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Employee Date of Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications birth Change in employee Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications demographic location Billing Information Payment Instruction Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Coverage Information Medical LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Vision LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Dental LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications CAM LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Hours worked Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Employee Type Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Date of employment Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications

-   -   Step-6: On clicking continue, screen navigates to General Info         screen. Make any corrections if previously opted in change         request, then only continue button will be enabled. Otherwise         navigate screens through tabs. (See Figure C-270)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each element in the screen. Element Description Group Contains header information of the Group Information Header Name of the Text for the Name of the Group. This is read only field. group Effective Date Text for Effective date. This is read only field. Group ID Text for Group ID. This is read only field.. Status Text for status. This is read only field. Group Type Text for group type. This is read only field. Work Group Text for work group. This is read only field. Employee ID Text for employee ID This is read only field. Employee Text for employee name. This is read only field Name Employee Information Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. This is read only field First Name The text for first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. First name is mandatory. This is read only field Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. This is read only field Last Name The text for last name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Last name is mandatory. This is read only field Suffix Choose the Suffix from the drop down list of salutations available This is read only field. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon Allows for modification, as it has been opted for change from the pick up list. Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. This is read only field Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. This is read only field Address Information Street Address The text for address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Apt The text for suite/apt #.. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters This is read only field Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, State and County are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. This is read only field City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. This is read only field State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America This is read only field County Choose the name of the county from the drop down list of States available in United States of America This is read only field Mode of Choose the mode of correspondence from the drop Correspon- down list available This is read only field dence Phone Number The text for telephone number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 This is read only field Extension The text for extension number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 5 digits This is read only field Fax The text for fax number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 This is read only field Email The text for email of the employee. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters This is read only field

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and Navigates to Billing Information screen. This is enabled only if changes are sought on this screen Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information for the group. Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-7: On clicking continue, screen navigates to Billing Info.         Make any corrections if previously opted in change request, then         only continue button will be enabled. Otherwise navigate screens         through tabs. (See Figure C-271)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Mode of payment Choose a mode of payment from the drop down list available. Based on selection corresponding fields will enable to enter the values. For e.g. if the value selected is card payment, EFT will be disabled and allows only entering card details and vice versa. Credit Card Information Cardholder's The text for cardholder's name. Accepts alphabets and Names space between two words. This is read only field Credit Card Type Choose the type of credit card from the drop down list available. Credit Card No The text for credit card number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 30 digits Expiration Date Choose a month of expiration from the drop down list available Expiration Year The text for expiration year. Accepts numeric values of exactly 4. Example 2002. Billing Address As it appears on the credit Card Street Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters. ZIP The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. State The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. City Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America EFT Information Bank Name The text for bank name. Accepts alphabets and space between two words. Routing Number The text for routing number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. Account Number The text for account number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. Account Type Choose the type of account from the drop down list available. Depositor's Name The text for depositor's name. Accepts alphabets and space between two words. COBRA Billing Information Send Bills to Choose the option to send the bills to Group or Sel.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and Navigates to Coverage Information screen. This is enabled only if changes are sought on this screen Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information for the group. Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-8: On clicking continue, screen navigates to Coverage Info.         Make any corrections if previously opted in change request, then         only continue button will be enabled. Otherwise navigate screens         through tabs. (See Figure C-272)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Plan Information Line of Choose a line of coverage from the drop down list coverage available Medical Click the check box for medical waive if the employee waived is waiving medical. Carrier Choose a carrier selection from the drop down list selection available (Benefit level) Coverage Choose a coverage from the drop down list available choice PCP The text for PCP ID. Accepts alphabets and numeric ID/Medical values not exceeding 10 characters. group ID Are you an Click the check box if you are an existing patient existing patient PCP last name The text for PCP last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. PCP first name The text for PCP first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Prior plan type Choose a plan type from the drop down list available Prior plan Choose a plan name from the drop down list available name Prior insurance The text for insurance start date. Choose a date by start date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Prior insurance The text for insurance end date. Choose a date by end date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Additional The text for additional coverage. Accepts alphabets Coverage with values not exceeding 50 characters. Date signed The text for date signed. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Date cannot accept future date.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of employee coverage information. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Update Update the contents of Plan Information. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Cancel Cancels the operation that was currently performed prior to saving the record. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen. Continue Saves the data and navigates to Missing Information screen, if it is enabled... Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tab General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info, are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-9: On clicking continue, screen navigates to Missing Info.         (See Figure C-273)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Missing Information Missing Entity List the missing entities for the group change Message Provides a message for the missing entities Enrollment Lists all the changes sought in the pick list Information Status Displaying the status of change. Change Information Change Rule Specifies the pick list for the changes Change status Show the change status as incomplete, complete Change Choose from the list change status confirmation Change Action Choose from the list of change action Remarks Text for briefing the change action

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Confirm Navigates to confirmation screen by incorporating all the corrections made Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-10: After entering the respective fields, click continues,         which navigates to confirmation screen. (See Figure C-274)

COBRA Modify Pending Change

The screen is to have an request for any change in COBRA

The sequential steps involved in change request for COBRA are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Change. Select COBRA change and Modify Pending Change.         (See Figure C-275)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Employee Search screen. Enter         any value in one of the field to perform search operation. (See         Figure C-276)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-277)     -   Step-4: Navigates to employee changes, which allows the option         to have changes required. If no option is selected the continue         button in respective pages will be disabled and changes cannot         be performed. (See Figure C-278)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanations explained in Create New Change Request under COBRA Change

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality explained in Create New Change Request under COBRA Change

-   -   Step-5: On clicking continue, navigates to General Information         of group Respective tabs can also clicked to navigate to         corresponding screens. The process and flow for modifying change         request is similar to that of create new change request. (See         Figure C-279)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanations explained in Create New Change Request, under COBRA Change

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality explained in Create New Change Request, under COBRA Change.

Individual Member Change Create New Request

The screen is to have a request for any change in Individual Member

The sequential steps involved in change request for Individual Member are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Change. Select Individual Member change and Create Change         Request. (See Figure C-280)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Employee Search screen. Enter         any value in one of the field to perform search operation. (See         Figure C-281)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-282)     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection the screen         navigates to Employee change Request. (See Figure C-283)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanations explained in Create New Change Request

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality explained in Create New Change Request.

-   -   Step-5: Screen navigates to employee change (pick list). Select         the options to have any modifications, so that the selected         screen will enable the continue button. (See Figure C-284)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Group Information Name of the group Text for the Name of the Group. This is read only field. Effective Date Text for Effective date. This is read only field. Group ID Text for Group ID. This is read only field.. Status Text for status. This is read only field. Group Type Text for group type. This is read only field. Work Group Text for work group. This is read only field. Employee ID Text for employee ID This is read only field. Employee Name Text for employee name. This is read only field General Information Change in employee Selecting this option will enable to allow for any address modifications Change SSN Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications information Employee Date of birth Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Change in employee Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications demographic location Billing Information Payment Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Instruction modifications Coverage Information Medical LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Vision LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Dental LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications CAM LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Hours worked Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Employee Type Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Date of employment Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications

-   -   Step-6: On clicking continue, screen navigates to General Info         screen. Make any corrections if previously opted in change         request, then only continue button will be enabled. Otherwise         navigate screens through tabs. (See Figure C-285)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each element in the screen. Element Description Group Contains header information of the Group Information Header Name of the Text for the Name of the Group. This is read only field. group Effective Date Text for Effective date. This is read only field. Group ID Text for Group ID. This is read only field.. Status Text for status. This is read only field. Group Type Text for group type. This is read only field. Work Group Text for work group. This is read only field. Employee ID Text for employee ID This is read only field. Employee Text for employee name. This is read only field Name Employee Information Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. This is read only field First Name The text for first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. First name is mandatory. This is read only field Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. This is read only field Last Name The text for last name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Last name is mandatory. This is read only field Suffix Choose the Suffix from the drop down list of salutations available This is read only field. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon Allows for modification, as it has been opted for change from the pick up list. Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. This is read only field Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. This is read only field Address Information Street Address The text for address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Apt The text for suite/apt #.. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters This is read only field Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, State and County are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. This is read only field City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. This is read only field State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America This is read only field County Choose the name of the county from the drop down list of States available in United States of America This is read only field Mode of Choose the mode of correspondence from the drop Correspon- down list available This is read only field dence Phone Number The text for telephone number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 This is read only field Extension The text for extension number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 5 digits This is read only field Fax The text for fax number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 This is read only field Email The text for email of the employee. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters This is read only field

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and Navigates to Billing Information screen. This is enabled only if changes are sought on this screen Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information for the group. Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-7: On clicking continue, screen navigates to Billing Info.         Make any corrections if previously opted in change request, then         only continue button will be enabled. Otherwise navigate screens         through tabs. (See Figure C-286)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Mode of payment Choose a mode of payment from the drop down list available. Based on selection corresponding fields will enable to enter the values. For e.g. if the value selected is card payment, EFT will be disabled and allows only entering card details and vice versa. Credit Card Information Cardholder's The text for cardholder's name. Accepts alphabets and Names space between two words. This is read only field Credit Card Type Choose the type of credit card from the drop down list available. Credit Card No The text for credit card number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 30 digits Expiration Date Choose a month of expiration from the drop down list available Expiration Year The text for expiration year. Accepts numeric values of exactly 4. Example 2002. Billing Address As it appears on the credit Card Street Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters. ZIP The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. State The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. City Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America EFT Information Bank Name The text for bank name. Accepts alphabets and space between two words. Routing Number The text for routing number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. Account Number The text for account number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. Account Type Choose the type of account from the drop down list available. Depositor's Name The text for depositor's name. Accepts alphabets and space between two words.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and Navigates to Coverage Information screen. This is enabled only if changes are sought on this screen Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information for the group. Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-8: On clicking continue, screen navigates to Coverage Info.         Make any corrections if previously opted in change request, then         only continue button will be enabled. Otherwise navigate screens         through tabs. (See Figure C-287)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Information Hours worked per The text for worked hours per week. Accepts numeric week values not exceeding 2 digits. Date of The text for date of employment. Choose a date by employment clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Employee Type Choose an Employee Type from the drop down list available RAF Discounting RAF List the RAF tier applicable for the group based on the RAF tier available on group's effective date. Plan Information Line of coverage Choose a line of coverage from the drop down list available Medical waived Click the check box for medical waive if the employee is waiving medical. Carrier selection Choose a carrier selection from the drop down list (Benefit level) available Coverage choice Choose a coverage from the drop down list available PCP ID/Medical The text for PCP ID. Accepts alphabets and numeric group ID values not exceeding 10 characters. Are you Click the check box if you are an existing patient an existing patient PCP last name The text for PCP last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. PCP first name The text for PCP first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Prior plan type Choose a plan type from the drop down list available Prior plan name Choose a plan name from the drop down list available Prior insurance The text for insurance start date. Choose a date by start date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Prior insurance The text for insurance end date. Choose a date by end date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Additional The text for additional coverage. Accepts alphabets Coverage with values not exceeding 50 characters. Date signed The text for date signed. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Date cannot accept future date.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of employee coverage information. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Update Update the contents of Plan Information. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Cancel Cancels the operation that was currently performed prior to saving the record. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen. Continue Saves the data and navigates to Missing Information screen, if it is enabled.. . Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tab General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info, are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-9: On clicking continue, screen navigates to Missing Info.         (See Figure C-288)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Missing Information Missing Entity List the missing entities for the group change Message Provides a message for the missing entities Enrollment Lists all the changes sought in the pick list Information Status Displaying the status of change. Change Information Change Rule Specifies the pick list for the changes Change status Show the change status as incomplete, complete Change Choose from the list change status confirmation Change Action Choose from the list of change action Remarks Text for briefing the change action

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Confirm Navigates to confirmation screen by incorporating all the corrections made Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-10: After entering the respective fields, click continues,         which navigates to confirmation screen. (See Figure C-289)

Individual Member Modify Pending Change

The screen is to have a request for any change in Individual Member

The sequential steps involved in change request for Individual Member are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Change. Select Individual Member change and Modify         Pending Change. (See Figure C-290)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Employee Search screen. Enter         any value in one of the field to perform search operation. (See         Figure C-291)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-292)     -   Step-4: Navigates to employee changes, which allows the option         to have changes required. If no option is selected the continue         button in respective pages will be disabled and changes cannot         be performed. (See Figure C-293)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanations explained in Create New Change Request under Individual Change

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality explained in Create New Change Request under Individual Change

-   -   Step-5: On clicking continue, navigates to General Information         of group Respective tabs can also clicked to navigate to         corresponding screens. The process and flow for modifying change         request is similar to that of create new change request. (See         Figure C-294)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanations explained in Create New Change Request, under Individual Member Change

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality explained in Create New Change Request, under Individual Member Change.

Employee Change Create New Request

The screen is to have a request for any change in Employee

The sequential steps involved in change request for Employee are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Change. Select Employee change and Create Change Request.         (See Figure C-295)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Employee Search screen. Enter         any value in one of the field to perform search operation. (See         Figure C-296)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-297)     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection screen navigates         to Employee change Request. (See Figure C-298)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanations explained in Create New Change Request

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality explained in Create New Change Request.

-   -   Step-5: Screen navigates to employee change (pick list). Select         the options to have any modifications, so that the selected         screen will enable the continue button. (See Figure C-299)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Group Information Name of the group Text for the Name of the Group. This is read only field. Effective Date Text for Effective date. This is read only field. Group ID Text for Group ID. This is read only field.. Status Text for status. This is read only field. Group Type Text for group type. This is read only field. Work Group Text for work group. This is read only field. Employee ID Text for employee ID This is read only field. Employee Name Text for employee name. This is read only field General Information Change in employee Selecting this option will enable to allow for any address modifications Change SSN Selecting this option will enable to information allow for any modifications Employee Date of Selecting this option will enable birth to allow for any modifications Change in employee Selecting this option will enable to demographic allow for any modifications location Billing Information Payment Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Instruction modifications Coverage Information Medical LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Vision LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Dental LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications CAM LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Hours worked Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Employee Type Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Date of employment Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications

-   -   Step-6: On clicking continue, screen navigates to General Info         screen. Make any corrections if previously opted in change         request, then only continue button will be enabled. Otherwise         navigate screens through tabs. (See Figure C-300)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each element in the screen. Element Description Group Contains header information of the Group Information Header Name of Text for the Name of the Group. This is read only field. the group Effective Date Text for Effective date. This is read only field. Group ID Text for Group ID. This is read only field.. Status Text for status. This is read only field. Group Type Text for group type. This is read only field. Work Group Text for work group. This is read only field. Employee ID Text for employee ID This is read only field. Employee Text for employee name. This is read only field Name Employee Information Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. This is read only field First Name The text for first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. First name is mandatory. This is read only field Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. This is read only field Last Name The text for last name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Last name is mandatory. This is read only field Suffix Choose the Suffix from the drop down list of salutations available This is read only field. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon Allows for modification, as it has been opted for change from the pick up list. Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. This is read only field Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. This is read only field Address Information Street Address The text for address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Apt The text for suite/apt #.. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters This is read only field Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, State and County are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. This is read only field City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. This is read only field State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America This is read only field County Choose the name of the county from the drop down list of States available in United States of America This is read only field Mode of Choose the mode of correspondence from the drop Correspon- down list available This is read only field dence Phone Number The text for telephone number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 This is read only field Extension The text for extension number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 5 digits This is read only field Fax The text for fax number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 This is read only field Email The text for email of the employee. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters This is read only field

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and Navigates to Coverage Information screen. This is enabled only if changes are sought on this screen Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information for the group. Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-7: On clicking continue, screen navigates to Coverage Info.         Make any corrections if previously opted in change request, then         only continue button will be enabled. Otherwise navigate screens         through tabs. (See Figure C-301)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Information Hours worked per The text for worked hours per week. Accepts numeric week values not exceeding 2 digits. Date of The text for date of employment. Choose a date by employment clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Employee Type Choose an Employee Type from the drop down list available Plan Information Line of coverage Choose a line of coverage from the drop down list available Medical waived Click the check box for medical waive if the employee is waiving medical. Carrier selection Choose a carrier selection from the drop down list (Benefit level) available Coverage choice Choose a coverage from the drop down list available PCP ID/Medical The text for PCP ID. Accepts alphabets and numeric group ID values not exceeding 10 characters. Are you an Click the check box if you are an existing patient existing patient PCP last name The text for PCP last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. PCP first name The text for PCP first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Prior plan type Choose a plan type from the drop down list available Prior plan name Choose a plan name from the drop down list available Prior insurance The text for insurance start date. Choose a date by start date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Prior insurance The text for insurance end date. Choose a date by end date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Additional The text for additional coverage. Accepts alphabets Coverage with values not exceeding 50 characters. Date signed The text for date signed. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Date cannot accept future date.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of employee coverage information. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Update Update the contents of Plan Information. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Cancel Cancels the operation that was currently performed prior to saving the record. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen. Continue Saves the data and navigates to Missing Information screen, if it is enabled... Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tab General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info, are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-8: On clicking continue, screen navigates to Missing Info.         (See Figure C-302)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Missing Information Missing Entity List the missing entities for the group change Message Provides a message for the missing entities Enrollment Lists all the changes sought in the pick list Information Status Displaying the status of change. Change Information Change Rule Specifies the pick list for the changes Change status Show the change status as incomplete, complete Change Choose from the list change status confirmation Change Action Choose from the list of change action Remarks Text for briefing the change action

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Confirm Navigates to confirmation screen by incorporating all the corrections made Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-9: After entering the respective fields, click continues,         which navigates to confirmation screen. (See Figure C-303)

Employee Modify Pending Change

The screen is to have a request for any change in Employee

The sequential steps involved in change request for Employee are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Change. Select Employee change and Modify Pending Change.         (See Figure C-304)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Employee Search screen. Enter         any value in one of the field to perform search operation. (See         Figure C-305)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-306)     -   Step-4: Navigates to employee changes, which allows the option         to have changes required. If no option is selected the continue         button in respective pages will be disabled and changes cannot         be performed. (See Figure C-307)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanations explained in Create New Change Request under Employee Change

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality explained in Create New Change Request under Employee Change

-   -   Step-5: On clicking continue, navigates to General Information         of group Respective tabs can also clicked to navigate to         corresponding screens. The process and flow for modifying change         request is similar to that of create new change request. (See         Figure C-308)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanations explained in Create New Change Request, under Employee Change

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality explained in Create New Change Request, under Employee Change.

Dependent Change Create New Request

The screen is to have a request for any change in Dependent

The sequential steps involved in change request for Dependent are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Change. Select Dependent change and Create Change         Request. (See Figure C-309)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Dependent Search screen. Enter         any value in one of the field to perform search operation. (See         Figure C-310)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-311)     -   Step-4: Click on any dependent id for selection the screen         navigates to Dependent change Request. (See Figure C-312)

Field Explanation

Refer field explanations explained in Create New Change Request

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality explained in Create New Change Request.

-   -   Step-5: Screen navigates to employee change (pick list). Select         the options to have any modifications, so that the selected         screen will enable the continue button. (See Figure C-313)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Group Information Name of the group Text for the Name of the Group. This is read only field. Effective Date Text for Effective date. This is read only field. Group ID Text for Group ID. This is read only field.. Status Text for status. This is read only field. Group Type Text for group type. This is read only field. Work Group Text for work group. This is read only field. Dependent ID Text for Dependent ID This is read only field. Dependent Name Text for Dependent name. This is read only field General Information Change in Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Dependent address modifications Change SSN Selecting this option will enable to allow information for any modifications Dependent Date of Selecting this option will enable to birth allow for any modifications Change in Selecting this option will enable to Dependent allow for any modifications demographic location Dependent Selecting this option will enable to Relationship allow for any modifications Coverage Information Change in Plan Selecting this option will enable to information allow for any modifications

-   -   Step-6: On clicking continue, screen navigates to Dependent         Change screen. Make any corrections if previously opted in         change request, then only continue button will be enabled.         Otherwise navigate screens through tabs. (See Figure C-314)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each element in the screen. Element Description Group Contains header information of the Group Information Header Name of Text for the Name of the Group. This is read the group only field. Effective Date Text for Effective date. This is read only field. Group ID Text for Group ID. This is read only field.. Status Text for status. This is read only field. Group Type Text for group type. This is read only field. Work Group Text for work group. This is read only field. Dependent ID Text for Dependent ID This is read only field. Dependent Name Text for Dependent name. This is read only field Dependent Information First Name The text for first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. First name is mandatory. This is read only field Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. This is read only field Last Name The text for last name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Last name is mandatory. This is read only field Suffix Choose the Suffix from the drop down list of salutations available This is read only field. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon Allows for modification, as it has been opted for change from the pick up list. Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. This is read only field Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. This is read only field Street Address The text for address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Apt The text for suite/apt #.. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters This is read only field Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, State and County are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. This is read only field City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. This is read only field State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America This is read only field Relationship Choose the relationship from the drop down list available. This is read only field

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Change Summary Saves the data and Navigates to Change Summary Information screen. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information for the group.

-   -   Step-7: On clicking continue, screen navigates to Missing Info.         (See Figure C-315)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Dependent Missing Information Missing Entity List the missing entities for the group change Message Provides a message for the missing entities Enrollment Lists all the changes sought in the pick list Information Status Displaying the status of change. Change Information Change Rule Specifies the pick list for the changes Change status Show the change status as incomplete, complete Change Choose from the list change status confirmation Change Action Choose from the list of change action Remarks Text for briefing the change action

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Confirm Navigates to confirmation screen by incorporating all the corrections made Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-8: after entering the respective fields, click continues,         which navigates to confirmation screen. (See Figure C-316)     -   Step-9: Click Dependent Search to navigate back to Dependent         Search screen.

Dependent Modify Request Change

The screen is to have a request for any change in Dependent

The sequential steps involved in change request for Dependent are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select Change. Select Dependent change and Modify Change         Request. (See Figure C-317)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Dependent Search screen. Enter         any value in one of the field to perform search operation. (See         Figure C-318)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-319)     -   Step-4: Navigates to Dependent changes, which allows the option         to have changes required. If no option is selected the continue         button in respective pages will be disabled and changes cannot         be performed. (See Figure C-320)     -   Step-5: On clicking continue, navigates to Dependent Change. The         process and flow for modifying change request is similar to that         of create new change request. (See Figure C-321)     -   Step-6: On clicking continue, screen navigates to Missing Info.         (See Figure C-322)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Dependent Missing Information Missing Entity List the missing entities for the group change Message Provides a message for the missing entities Enrollment Lists all the changes sought in the pick list Information Status Displaying the status of change. Change Information Change Rule Specifies the pick list for the changes Change status Show the change status as incomplete, complete Change Choose from the list change status confirmation Change Action Choose from the list of change action Remarks Text for briefing the change action

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Confirm Navigates to confirmation screen by incorporating all the corrections made Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-7: After entering the respective fields, click continues,         which navigates to confirmation screen. (See Figure C-323)     -   Step-8: Click Dependent Search to navigate back to Dependent         Search screen.

Field Explanation

Refer field explanations explained in Create New Change Request, under Dependent Change

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality explained in Create New Change Request, under Dependent Change

12 ROE/OE

ROE is the transaction module that encompasses the process of Re-qualification and open enrollment for Group and Members enrolled with PacAdvantage in the PX2 System. ROE (Re-qualification and open enrollment) is the process of Re-qualifying the Group and Members on their anniversary. Once a year, on the anniversary date of a group's enrollment in PacAdvantage, the group's participation, contribution and qualification is reviewed. This review is to ensure that the group meets the qualification requirement.

OE (Open Enrollment) is the process during the anniversary of the group wherein the group has the privilege to make the changes to the plan, waiting period etc that were earlier not open for changes.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Enrollment->ROE->Group Enrollment         -   ->Employee Enrollment         -   ->Dependent Enrollment         -   ->Individual Member         -   ->COBRA         -   ->Manual ROE

Pre-Requisites

The Process ROE operation should be initiated prior to making the ROE/OE changes to the Groups and Members.

Group and the member must be enroll and all their relevant information must be available in the system in order to accomplish the task for ROE/OE.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions for reinstatement:

-   -   Modify—to modify group, employee, dependent, individual         enrollment entries

Group Enrollment

The screen is to modify group enrollment

The sequential steps involved in modifying group enrollment are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select ROE. Select Group Enrollment. Then click Process Group.         (See Figure C-324)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select a group. Enter         value in any one of the field, or simply click search button to         perform search operation. (See Figure C-325)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-326)     -   Step-4: Click on any Group ID for selection. Screen navigates to         change request screen for making ROE/OE changes for a group.         (See Figure C-327)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Group General Information Contact Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Information Address Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Information Tax Identification Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Demographic Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications location Billing Information Billing Information Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Agent Information Agent Information Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Coverage Information RAF Discounting Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Workers Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Compensation Flag TEFRA flag Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications 1099 Flag Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Domestic Partner Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Support flag COBRA Support flag Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Part time support Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications flag Waiting period Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications information Medical LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Vision LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Dental LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications CAM LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for, each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and navigates to General information for groups. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-5: On clicking continue, navigates to General Information         of group Respective tabs can also clicked to navigate to         corresponding screens. Continue would be enabled only if the         changes are sought on this screen, else use tab to navigate to         the next screen. (See Figure C-328)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Company Information Legal Name The text for name of the group. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 60 characters. Field is mandatory Doing The text for business nature. Accepts alphanumeric Business As and special characters not exceeding 60 characters. Field is optional Type of Business Choose the type of business from the drop down list available Tax Identification The text for tax identification. Accepts numeric values of exactly 9 digits Address Physical and Billing Address-Note: Information: Enter Billing Address if different from the Physical Address. Street Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Suite The text for company suite/apt # Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, State and County are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America County Choose the name of the county from the drop down list of counties available for the ZIP Code entered. Contact Information Mode of Choose the mode of correspondence from the drop Correspondence down list available. Contact 1 and Fill in the relevant for Contact 1 and 2. Contact 2 - Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Phone Number The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values of exactly 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Extension The text for extension number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 5 digits. Fax The text for fax number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values of exactly 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Email The text for email of the contact person. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters Contact The text for comments. Accepts alphabets, numeric Comments and special characters. Field is optional

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and navigates to Billing Information screen and the system generates Group ID. This is enabled only if changes are sought on this screen Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage Info are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-6: On clicking continue, navigates to Group Billing         Information of group Respective tabs can also clicked to         navigate to corresponding screens. Continue would be enabled         only if the changes are sought on this screen, else use tab to         navigate to the next screen. Enter the values in the respective         fields, as per the format briefed in field's explanation section         and click Continue. (See Figure C-329)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Mode of payment Choose a mode of payment from the drop down list available. Based on selection corresponding fields will enable to enter the values. For e.g. if the value selected is card payment, EFT will be disabled and allows only entering card details and vice versa. Credit Card Information Cardholder's The text for cardholder's name. Accepts alphabets and Names space between two words. Credit Card Type Choose the type of credit card from the drop down list available. Credit Card No The text for credit card number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 30 digits Expiration Date Choose a month of expiration from the drop down list available Expiration Year The text for expiration year. Accepts numeric values of exactly 4. Example 2002. Billing Address As it appears on the credit Card Street Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters. ZIP The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. State The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. City Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America EFT Information Bank Name The text for bank name. Accepts alphabets and space between two words. Routing Number The text for routing number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. Account Number The text for account number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. Account Type Choose the type of account from the drop down list available. Depositor's Name The text for depositor's name. Accepts alphabets and space between two words. Initial Payment Information Amount Received The text for amount received. Accepts only numeric values in the format 999999999.99 Date Receive The text for date received. Choose from the calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY. Check # The text for check number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. No Check Check the option of no checks received for any non- Received receipt of checks.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen.

Element Description

-   -   Continue Saves the data and Navigates to Agent Information         screen. This is enabled only if changes are sought on this         screen     -   Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to         the previous state as was before saving the changes     -   Enrollment Summary Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen         and display the summary of information entered for group.     -   Missing Information Click missing information refreshes the         screen and displays the missed information for the group.     -   Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage Info are         the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen         is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled         use this tab to navigate to the next screen. Also while         navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the         screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations         on the screen.     -   Step-7: On clicking continue, navigates to Group Agent         Information of group Respective tabs can also clicked to         navigate to corresponding screens. Continue would be enabled         only if the changes are sought on this screen, else use tab to         navigate to the next screen. (See Figure C-330)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each element in the screen. Element Description Agent ID Choose an agent id by clicking search icon Agent Type Choose an agent type from the drop down list available. Based on the selection of the agent type the percent commission split entry and the Receive ROE packets option would be available. Percent The text for percent commission. Accepts numeric commission values in the range of 1-100 (Example 100.00). This split will be enabled only if the Agent type selected is “Agent Of Record” Sum of the percentage for all the Agent of Record added should be equal to 100.00. Receive Click the check box to receive ROE/OE packets for ROE/OE agent. This option will not be available for Agent Type packets “General Agent”. Agent The text for agent commission. Defaults the value Commission defined in CM - rate Administration for Agent Commission. Accepts numeric values less than or equal to the defaulted value in the in the range of 1-100 100 (Example 4.45) Check the Click the check box for a group with out an agent. This box if the option will be available only for the Agent Type, “Agent group is of Record and Writing Agent”. without an agent

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of agent information. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Update Update the contents of agent information. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only on saving the record Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving the record Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary of information entered for group creation Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Continue Saves the data and navigates to Coverage Information screen. This is enabled only if changes are sought on this screen Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tab General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage Info are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen.. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-8: On clicking continue, navigates to Group Coverage         Information of group Respective tabs can also clicked to         navigate to corresponding screens. Continue would be enabled         only if the changes are sought on this screen, else use tab to         navigate to the next screen. (See Figure C-331)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen Element Description Waiting Period Information Employee Type Choose an Employee Type from the drop down list available Waiting Period Choose a waiting period from the drop down list available RAF Discounting RAF List the RAF tier applicable for the group based on the RAF tier available on group's effective date. Contribution Line of Choose a line of coverage from the drop down list Coverage available elected Contribution Choose a contribution for from the drop down list For available. Contribution can be for an employee or dependent. Contribution Choose a contribution type from the drop down list Type available. List the contribution type “% Lowest Cost HMO”, “% Lowest Cost Plan”, “% Specified Plan”, “Flat $ Amount”. On Selecting % Specified Plan the page would get refreshed and the Plan Name for the Specified LOC would be populated in the Drop Down List “Plan Name” Contribution The text for contribution amount. Accepts numeric Amount values in the format 99999999.99 for flat $ amount and for the rest of the option it accepts as % value say 100.00 Plan Name Choose a plan name from the drop down list available if the Contribution Type selected is “% Specified Plan” Current Group Choose a group insurer from the drop down list Insurer available Whether group Click the option yes or no legally required to provide workers compensation coverage Workers Choose a compensation carrier name from the drop compensation down list available carrier name Number of The text for total number of employees including full Employees time and part time. Accepts numeric values (Full time and part time) Number of full The text for number of full time employees at the time time employees of applying. Accepts numeric values at the time of application Number of The text for number of eligible employees at the time eligible of applying. Accepts numeric values employees at the time of application Number of The text for number of employees at the time of employee applying. Accepts numeric values applying Have you Click the option yes or no employed 20 or more employees for 20 or more weeks during the current or preceding year (TEFRA) Have you Click the option yes or no employed 20 or more employees during at least 50% of the preceding calendar year (COBRA) Are you Click the option yes or no offering coverage to employees working more 20-29 hours per week Are you Click the option yes or no offering coverage to domestic partners

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen Element Description Add (Waiting Add the contents of Waiting Period information. It is Period only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only Information) on saving the record. Add Add the contents of Contribution and Coverage elected. (Contribution) It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Update Updates the contents of Waiting Period information. It (Waiting is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only Period on saving the record. Information) Update Update the contents of Contribution and Coverage (Contribution) elected. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary information entered for group creation Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information View Missing Saves the data and navigates to Missing Information Info Page Save & Create Saves the data entered and navigates to the screen New Group Group Hierarchy for creating New Group. Cancel Clears or restores the content entered in the fields only prior to saving the records. Tab General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage Info are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between tabs is possible only if there is a valid group ID generated and assigned to the group. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-9: On clicking Enrollment Summary, screen navigates to         Summary screen. (See Figure C-332)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Total Full Time Value is shown based on the actual full time employee Applied (A) applied (System Identified) Total part Time Value is shown based on the actual part time employee Applied (B) applied (System Identified) Employee Text to enter Employee Waived. Contains only whole Waived (C) number. Accepts numbers not exceeding 5 digits. Manually entered based on verification. Employee Text to enter Employee Declined. Contains only whole Declined (D) number. Accepts numbers not exceeding 5 digits. Manually entered based on verification. Total Eligible Text to display total eligible employee. Employee Employee (E) = Applying is sum total of A + B + D. Total Employee Text to display total employee applying. Employee Applying (F) Applying is sum total of A + B. % Participation Test to display % participation. Participation is % of E/F Based on Info Provided Total Full Time Text for Total Full Time Applied. Based on the Applied (A) information provide on the Coverage Info screen Total part Time Text for Total Part Time Applied. Based on the Applied (B) information provide on the Coverage Info screen Total Employees Text to display total employee applied. Employee Applied Applied is sum total of A + B Total Full Time Value is shown based on the actual full time employee Applied (A) applied (System Identified)

-   -   Step-10: On clicking continue, navigates to Missing Info screen.         (See Figure C-333)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Missing Information Missing Entity List the missing entities for the group change Message Provides a message for the missing entities Enrollment Lists all the changes sought in the pick list Information Status Displaying the status of change. Dependent Missing Information Missing Entity List the missing entities for the group change Message Provides a message for the missing entities Enrollment Lists all the changes sought in the pick list Information Status Displaying the status of change. Change Information ROE/OE Status Specifies the pick list for the changes Remarks Text for briefing the change action Reason for Choose from the list of reasons for decline. This field is Decline enabled only if the status of ROE/OE is opted as decline Others Text for briefing the other status and description

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Finalize Navigates to confirmation screen by incorporating all the corrections made Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-11: On clicking Finalize, navigates to confirmation screen.         (See Figure C-334)

Employee Enrollment

The screen is to modify employee enrollment

The sequential steps involved in modifying employee enrollment are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select ROE/OE Select Employee Enrollment. Then click Process         Employee. (See Figure C-335)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select an employee. Enter         value in any one of the field or simply click Search button to         perform search operation. (See Figure C-336)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-337)     -   Step-4: Click on any Employee ID for selection. Screen navigates         to change request screen for making ROE/OE changes for an         employee. (See Figure C-338)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Group Information Name of the group Text for the Name of the Group. Read Only field Effective Date Text for Employee Effective date. This is read only field. Group ID Text for Group ID. This is read only field. Status Text for status. This is read only field. Group Type Text for group type. This is read only field. Work Group Text for work group. This is read only field. Employee ID Text for Employee ID. This is read only field. Employee Name Text for Employee Name. This is read only field. Employee General Information Changes Employee Date of Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Birth modifications. Employee Address Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Employee SSN Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Employee Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Demographic modifications Information Employee Coverage Information Changes Payroll Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Employee Type Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Medical LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Vision LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Dental LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications CAM LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and navigates to General information for employees. This is enabled only if changes are sought on this screen Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-5: On selecting the options for changes click Continue.         Screen navigates to Employee General Information screen. (See         Figure C-339)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Information Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Birth date cannot be later than the current date. Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. Address Information Street Address The text for address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Apt The text for suite/apt #.. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, State and County are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America County Choose the name of the county from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Mode of Choose the mode of correspondence from the drop Correspondence down list available Phone Number The text for telephone number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Extension The text for extension number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 5 digits Fax The text for fax number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Email The text for email of the employee. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and navigates to Coverage information for employees. This is enabled only if changes are sought on this screen Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tab General Info, Coverage Info, are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-6: After making any changes in the fields as explained in         the field explanation, click Continue. Screen navigates to         employee Coverage Info screen. (See Figure C-340)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Information Hours worked per The text for worked hours per week. Accepts numeric week values not exceeding 2 digits. Date of The text for date of employment. Choose a date by employment clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Employee type Choose an employee type from the drop down list available Plan Information Line of coverage Choose a line of coverage from the drop down list available Medical waived Click the check box for medical waive if the employee is waiving medical. Carrier selection Choose a carrier selection from the drop down list (Benefit level) available Coverage choice Choose a coverage from the drop down list available PCP ID/Medical The text for PCP ID. Accepts alphabets and numeric group ID values not exceeding 10 characters. Are you an Click the check box if you are an existing patient existing patient PCP last name The text for PCP last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. PCP first name The text for PCP first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Prior plan type Choose a plan type from the drop down list available Prior plan name Choose a plan name from the drop down list available Prior insurance The text for insurance start date. Choose a date by start date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Prior insurance The text for insurance end date. Choose a date by end date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Other coverage The text for other coverage. Accepts alphabets with kept values not exceeding 50 characters. Employee Click the check box, to have employee signature signature Date signed The text for date signed. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Date cannot accept future date.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of employee coverage information. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Update Update the contents of Plan Information. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary of information entered for group creation Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen. Continue Saves the data and navigates to Missing Information screen, if it is enabled. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tab General Info, Coverage Info, are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-7: After entering the fields as per the field details         explained in field explanation. Click Continue. Screen navigates         to Enrollment Summary. (See Figure C-341)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each element in the screen. Element Description Group Contains header information of the Group Information Header Name of the Text for the Name of the Group Group Group ID Text and Link for the Group ID to navigate to the Group General Info screen Group Type Specifies the Type of the Group like Small Employer Group Proposed The text for Proposed Effective Date. Choose a date by Effective clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format Date MM/DD/YYYY. Default effective date is first of the following month. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the group. Work Group Text for Work Group. This specifies the internal work group attached to the Group. This is based on the writing agent's work group. Enrollment Enrollment Summary Information is broken down into Summary tree structure. The tree can by expanded or collapsed. Information The level of the tree is as per the example given below: −Employee −Dependent −Dependent −Employee −Dependent −Employee +Employee −Employee +Dependent +−Employee Where (−) signifies expanded view and (+) signifies collapsed view. Employee ID Text for Employee ID Employee SSN Text for Employee SSN Employee Name Text for employee Name (First Name and Last Name) Effective Date Text for Employee Effective date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Defaults effective date of the Group. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the employee. Enrollment There are two part of this information: Information 3) Entered based on verification 4) Based on the information provide on the Coverage Info screen Entered based on verification Total Full Time Value is shown based on the actual full time employee Applied (A) applied (System Identified) Total part Time Value is shown based on the actual part time employee Applied (B) applied (System Identified) Employee Text to enter Employee Waived. Contains only whole Waived (C) number. Accepts numbers not exceeding 5 digits. Manually entered based on verification. Employee Text to enter Employee Declined. Contains only whole Declined (D) number. Accepts numbers not exceeding 5 digits. Manually entered based on verification. Total Eligible Text to display total eligible employee. Employee Employee (E) = Applying is sum total of A + B + D. Total Employee Text to display total employee applying. Employee Applying (F) Applying is sum total of A + B. % Participation Test to display % participation. Participation is % of E/F Based on Info Provided Total Full Time Text for Total Full Time Applied. Based on the Applied (A) information provide on the Coverage Info screen Total part Time Text for Total Part Time Applied. Based on the Applied (B) information provide on the Coverage Info screen Total Employees Text to display total employee applied. Employee Applied Applied is sum total of A + B

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Pre Enrollment Saves the data and performs validation and eligibility checks against the information required for enrollment and navigates to the screen Missing Information. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes <<, <, >, >> The enrollment summary shows record for 5 employees on single screen. If the employee size increases more than 5. These buttons are used for navigating to the next and previous records for viewing. << - Show first record (s) < - Show previous record (s) > - Show next record (s) >> - Show last record (s) Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen.

-   -   Step-8: On clicking Pre-Enrollment, screen navigates to missing         info. (See Figure C-342)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Missing Information Missing Entity List the missing entities for the group change Message Provides a message for the missing entities Enrollment Lists all the changes sought in the pick list Information Status Displaying the status of change. Dependent Missing Information Missing Entity List the missing entities for the group change Message Provides a message for the missing entities Enrollment Lists all the changes sought in the pick list Information Status Displaying the status of change. Change Information ROE/OE Status Specifies the pick list for the changes Remarks Text for briefing the change action Reason for Choose from the list of reasons for decline. This field is Decline enabled only if the status of ROE/OE is opted as decline Others Text for briefing the other status and description

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Finalize Navigates to confirmation screen by incorporating all the corrections made Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-9: On clicking Finalize, navigates to confirmation screen.         Click continue to navigate back to Group search irrespective of         process, as the process is being carried out for a group. (See         Figure C-343)

Dependent Enrollment

The screen is to modify dependent enrollment

The sequential steps involved in modifying dependent enrollment are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select ROE. Select Dependent Enrollment. Then click Modify. (See         Figure C-344)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select an dependent.         Enter the search criteria for Searching for the dependent. (See         Figure C-345)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-346)     -   Step-4: Click on any Dependent ID for selection. Screen         navigates to change request screen for making ROE/OE changes for         an employee. (See Figure C-347)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Dependent General Information Changes Name of the group Text for the Name of the Group. Read Only field Effective Date Text for Employee Effective date. This is read only field. Group ID Text for Group ID. This is read only field. Status Text for status. This is read only field. Group Type Text for group type. This is read only field. Work Group Text for work group. This is read only field. Employee ID Text for Employee ID. This is read only field. Employee Name Text for Employee Name. This is read only field. Dependent ID Text for Dependent ID. This is read only field. Dependent Name Text for Dependent Name. This is read only field. Dependent General Information Changes Dependent to waive Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Vision Plan modifications. Information Dependent to waive Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Dental Plan modifications Information Dependent to waive Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Medical Plan modifications Information Prior Plan Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Information modifications Dependent Address Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Information modifications Dependent SSN Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Dependent Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Relationship modifications Dependent Date of Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Birth modifications Dependent Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Personal modifications Information

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and navigates to Dependent General information for employees. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-5: On clicking continue, navigates to Dependent General         Information screen. Respective tabs can also clicked to navigate         to corresponding screens. If any other tabs like Coverage or         General Info, or if Enrollment summary, Cancel is disabled, due         to non-selection of changes sought, use missing information link         to navigate to the missing info screen. (See Figure C-348)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Dependent Information Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Birth date cannot be later than the current date. Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. Address Information Street Address The text for address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Apt The text for suite/apt #.. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, State and County are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Line of Coverage Information [For Medical, Vision, Dental] Selected Product Text for the product selected. It is a read only field. Coverage Choice Choose a coverage from the drop down list available Waived Click the check box for any waive. Service Area The text for service area. PCP ID/Medical The text for PCP ID. Accepts alphabets and numeric group ID values not exceeding 10 characters. PCP last name The text for PCP last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. PCP first name The text for PCP first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Prior insurance The text for insurance start date. Choose a date by start date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Prior insurance The text for insurance end date. Choose a date by end date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Other coverage The text for other coverage. Accepts alphabets with kept values not exceeding 50 characters. Additional The text for additional coverage. Accepts alphabets Coverage with values not exceeding 50 characters. Disabled Click the option of temporary or permanent. This is dependent enable if the relationship opted is child Domestic partner Click the option for domestic partner. It depends on the value selected in relationship Legal guardian Click the option for legal guardian. It depends on the value selected in relationship Signature Click the check box if the signature is opted

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Enrollment Saves the data and navigates to Summary screen. This Summary is enabled only if changes are sought on this screen. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tab General Info, Coverage Info, are the tabs visible on this screen. If any other tabs like Coverage or General Info, or if Enrollment summary, Cancel is disabled, due to non-selection of changes sought, use missing information link to navigate to the missing info screen.

-   -   Step-6: After entering the fields as per the field details         explained in field explanation. Click Continue. Screen navigates         to Enrollment Summary. (See Figure C-349)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each element in the screen. Element Description Group Contains header information of the Group Information Header Name of the Text for the Name of the Group Group Group ID Text and Link for the Group ID to navigate to the Group General Info screen Group Type Specifies the Type of the Group like Small Employer Group Proposed The text for Proposed Effective Date. Choose a date by Effective Date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Default effective date is first of the following month. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the group. Work Group Text for Work Group. This specifies the internal work group attached to the Group. This is based on the writing agent's work group. Enrollment Enrollment Summary Information is broken down into Summary tree structure. The tree can by expanded or collapsed. Information The level of the tree is as per the example given below: −Employee −Dependent −Dependent −Employee −Dependent −Employee +Employee −Employee +Dependent +−Employee Where (−) signifies expanded view and (+) signifies collapsed view. Employee ID Text for Employee ID Employee SSN Text for Employee SSN Employee Name Text for employee Name (First Name and Last Name) Effective Date Text for Employee Effective date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Defaults effective date of the Group. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the employee. Enrollment There are two part of this information: Information 5) Entered based on verification 6) Based on the information provide on the Coverage Info screen Entered based on verification Total Full Time Value is shown based on the actual full time employee Applied (A) applied (System Identified) Total part Time Value is shown based on the actual part time employee Applied (B) applied (System Identified) Employee Text to enter Employee Waived. Contains only whole Waived (C) number. Accepts numbers not exceeding 5 digits. Manually entered based on verification. Employee Text to enter Employee Declined. Contains only whole Declined (D) number. Accepts numbers not exceeding 5 digits. Manually entered based on verification. Total Eligible Text to display total eligible employee. Employee Employee (E) = Applying is sum total of A + B + D. Total Employee Text to display total employee applying. Employee Applying (F) Applying is sum total of A + B. % Participation Test to display % participation. Participation is % of E/F Based on Info Provided Total Full Time Text for Total Full Time Applied. Based on the Applied (A) information provide on the Coverage Info screen Total part Time Text for Total Part Time Applied. Based on the Applied (B) information provide on the Coverage Info screen Total Employees Text to display total employee applied. Employee Applied Applied is sum total of A + B

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Pre Enrollment Saves the data and performs validation and eligibility checks against the information required for enrollment and navigates to the screen Missing Information. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes <<, <, >, >> The enrollment summary shows record for 5 employees on single screen. If the employee size increases more than 5. These buttons are used for navigating to the next and previous records for viewing. << - Show first record (s) < - Show previous record (s) > - Show next record (s) >> - Show last record (s) Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen.

-   -   Step-7: On clicking Pre-Enrollment, screen navigates to missing         info. (See Figure C-350)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Missing Information Missing Entity List the missing entities for the group change Message Provides a message for the missing entities Enrollment Lists all the changes sought in the pick list Information Status Displaying the status of change. Dependent Missing Information Missing Entity List the missing entities for the group change Message Provides a message for the missing entities Enrollment Lists all the changes sought in the pick list Information Status Displaying the status of change. Change Information ROE/OE Status Specifies the pick list for the changes Remarks Text for briefing the change action Reason for Choose from the list of reasons for decline. This field Decline is enabled only if the status of ROE/OE is opted as decline Others Text for briefing the other status and description

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Finalize Navigates to confirmation screen by incorporating all the corrections made Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-8: On clicking Finalize, navigates to confirmation screen.         Click continue to go back to Group search. (See Figure C-351)

COBRA

The screen is to modify COBRA

The sequential steps involved in modifying COBRA are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select ROE. Select COBRA. (See Figure C-352)     -   Step-2: he screen navigates search to select a group. Enter the         search criteria for Searching for the group. (See Figure C-353)     -   Step-3: his pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-354)     -   Step-4: lick on any Group ID for selection. Screen navigates to         change request screen for making ROE/OE changes for a group.         (See Figure C-355)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Group Information Parent Text to display the Parent Group ID. This is a read Group ID only field Parent Group Text to display the Parent Group Name. This is a read Name only field COBRA Text to display the COBRA Group ID. This is a read Group ID only field COBRA Type Text to display the COBRA Group Type whether Cal COBRA or Federal COBRA. This is a read only field Group Text to display effective date of the parent group. This Effective Date is a read only field Work Group Text to Display the internal Work group associated with the Parent Group This is a read only field Status Text to display status of the group. This is a read only field Mode of Choose a mode of request from the drop down list Request available. The field is mandatory. Post Mark Date The text for post mark date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The postmark date cannot be greater than system date. The field is mandatory. Date Received The text for received date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. The received date cannot be greater than system date. The field is mandatory. Reason for Choose a reason from the drop down list The field is Change mandatory. Others The text for narrating other info, provided the option for reason for terms is others

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and navigates to General information for groups. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-5: On clicking continue, navigates to Group General         Information of group Respective tabs can also clicked to         navigate to corresponding screens. Continue would be enabled         only if the changes are sought on this screen, else use tab to         navigate to the next screen. (See Figure C-356)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Parent Text to display the Parent Group ID. Group ID Parent Group Text to display the Parent Group Name. Name COBRA Text to display the COBRA Group ID. Group ID COBRA Type Text to display the COBRA Group Type whether Cal COBRA or Federal COBRA. Group Effective Text to display effective date of the parent group. Date Work Group Text to Display the internal Work group associated with the Parent Group Status Text to display status of the group. Post Mark Date Text for post mark date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Accepts in the format MM/DD/YYYY Received Date Text for received date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Accepts in the format MM/DD/YYYY Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. First name is mandatory. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for last name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Last name is mandatory. Suffix Choose the Suffix from the drop down list of salutations available. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. Address Physical Home Address or Mailing Address Information: Address The text for company address. Accepts alphabets and numeric values not exceeding 35 characters Apt The text for company suite/apt # Accepts alphabets and numeric values of not exceeding 35 characters Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric of either 5 or 9 digits. City, State and County are populated automatically for the correct zip code. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets of not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America County Choose the name of the county from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Mode of Choose the mode of correspondence from the drop Correspondence down list available Phone Number The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values of not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Extension The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values of not exceeding 5 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Fax The text for fax number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values of not exceeding 10 digits. The format is 9999 Email The text for email of the contact person. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and navigates to Billing Information screen and the system generates Group ID. This is enabled only if changes are sought on this screen Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info and Add Employees are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-6: On clicking continue, navigates to Group Billing         Information of group Respective tabs can also clicked to         navigate to corresponding screens. Continue would be enabled         only if the changes are sought on this screen, else use tab to         navigate to the next screen. Enter the values in the respective         fields, as per the format briefed in field's explanation section         and click Continue. (See Figure C-357)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Mode of payment Choose a mode of payment from the drop down list available. Based on selection corresponding fields will enable to enter the values. For e.g. if the value selected is card payment, EFT will be disabled and allows only entering card details and vice versa. Credit Card Information Cardholder's The text for cardholder's name. Accepts alphabets and Names space between two words. Credit Card Type Choose the type of credit card from the drop down list available. Credit Card No The text for credit card number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 30 digits Expiration Date Choose a month of expiration from the drop down list available Expiration Year The text for expiration year. Accepts numeric values of exactly 4. Example 2002. Billing Address As it appears on the credit Card Street Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters. ZIP The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. State The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. City Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America EFT Information Bank Name The text for bank name. Accepts alphabets and space between two words. Routing Number The text for routing number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. Account Number The text for account number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. Account Type Choose the type of account from the drop down list available. Depositor's Name The text for depositor's name. Accepts alphabets and space between two words.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and Navigates to coverage Information screen. This is enabled only if changes are sought on this screen Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info and Add Employees are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-7: On clicking continue, navigates to Group Coverage         Information of group Respective tabs can also clicked to         navigate to corresponding screens. Continue would be enabled         only if the changes are sought on this screen, else use tab to         navigate to the next screen. (See Figure C-358)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen Element Description COBRA effective The text for COBRA effective date. Choose a date by date clicking calendar icon Qualifying event Choose a qualifying even from the drop down list available COBRA end date The text for COBRA end date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon Send bill to Choose the option of sending the bills either to group or self (individual) Plan Information Line of coverage Choose a line of coverage from the drop down list available Medical waived Click the check box for medical waive if the employee is waiving medical. Carrier selection Choose a carrier selection from the drop down list (Benefit level) available Coverage choice Choose a coverage from the drop down list available PCP ID/Medical The text for PCP ID. Accepts alphabets and numeric group ID values not exceeding 10 characters. Are you an Click the check box if you are an existing patient existing patient PCP last name The text for PCP last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. PCP first name The text for PCP first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Prior plan type Choose a plan type from the drop down list available Prior plan name Choose a plan name from the drop down list available Prior insurance The text for insurance start date. Choose a date by start date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Prior insurance The text for insurance end date. Choose a date by end date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Other coverage The text for other coverage. Accepts alphabets with kept values not exceeding 50 characters. RAF The text to display RAF applicable for the Primary Group. Employee Click the check box, to have employee signature signature Date signed The text for date signed. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Date cannot accept future date.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of employee coverage information. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. COBRA Click COBRA summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary of information entered for COBRA creation Continue Navigates add dependent screen. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info and Add Employees are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between is tabs are possible only if there is a valid group ID generated and assigned to the group. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-8: On clicking continue, navigates to Dependent Information         of group Respective tabs can also clicked to navigate to         corresponding screens. Continue would be enabled only if the         changes are sought on this screen, else use tab to navigate to         the next screen. (See Figure C-359)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description First Name The text for first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. First name is mandatory. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for last name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Last name is mandatory. Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon.. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Birth date cannot be later than the current date. Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. Relationship Choose the relationship from the drop down list available. Street Address The text for address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Suite The text for suite/apt # . . . Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, and State are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Selected carrier The text for selected carrier. It is a read only field Coverage choice The text for coverage. It is a read only field Service area The text for service area. It is a read only field Prior plan type Choose a plan type from the drop down list available Prior plan The text for plan name. Accepts alphabets Waived Click the check box if medical is waived Start date The text for start date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon End date The text for end date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon PCP ID/ The text for PCP ID. Accepts alphabets PCP last name The text for PCP last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes PCP first name The text for PCP first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes Disabled Click the option of temporary or permanent. This is dependent enable if the relationship opted is child Domestic partner Click the option for domestic partner. It depends on the value selected in relationship Legal guardian Click the option for legal guardian. It depends on the value selected in relationship Signature Click the check box if the signature is opted

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of dependent information. It is only a temporary addition. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Continue Screen navigates to Missing info. Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Coverage Info and Add Employees are the tabs visible on this screen. The navigation between is tabs are possible only if there is a valid group ID generated and assigned to the group. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-9: On clicking continue, navigates to Missing Info screen.         (See Figure C-360)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Missing Information Missing Entity List the missing entities for the group change Message Provides a message for the missing entities Enrollment Lists all the changes sought in the pick list Information Status Displaying the status of change. Dependent Missing Information Missing Entity List the missing entities for the group change Message Provides a message for the missing entities Enrollment Lists all the changes sought in the pick list Information Status Displaying the status of change. Change Information ROE/OE Status Specifies the pick list for the changes Remarks Text for briefing the change action Reason for Choose from the list of reasons for decline. This field is Decline enabled only if the status of ROE/OE is opted as decline Others Text for briefing the other status and description

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Finalize Navigates to confirmation screen by incorporating all the corrections made Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-10: On clicking Finalize, navigates to confirmation screen.         (See Figure C-361)

Manual ROE

The screen is to have manual ROE

The sequential steps involved in having manual ROE are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select ROE. Select Manual ROE. (See Figure C-362)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select a process. Entries         to the fields are mandatory. Click Search. (See Figure C-363)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-364)     -   Step-4: Choose a employee id and click Process Manual. Click         Search to navigate back to group search screen. (See Figure         C-365)

Individual Member Modify

The screen is to modify Individual Member The sequential steps involved in modifying Individual Member are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select ROE. Select Individual Member and then Modify Individual         Member. (See Figure C-366)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select an employee. Enter         the search criteria for Searching for the Employee. (See Figure         C-367)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-368)     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection the screen         navigates to Individual Employee Change (pick list). (See Figure         C-369)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Group Information Name of the group Text for the Name of the Group. This is read only field. Effective Date Text for Effective date. This is read only field. Group ID Text for Group ID. This is read only field.. Status Text for status. This is read only field. Group Type Text for group type. This is read only field. Work Group Text for work group. This is read only field. Employee ID Text for employee ID This is read only field. Employee Name Text for employee name. This is read only field Association ID Text for Association ID This is read only field. Association Name Text for Association name. This is read only field Employee General Information Employee address Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications SSN information Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Employee Date of Selecting this option will enable to allow for any birth modifications Employee Selecting this option will enable to allow for any demographic modifications location Employee Billing Information Billing Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Information modifications Employee Agent Information Agent Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Information modifications Coverage Information RAF Discounting Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Employee Type Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Payroll Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Medical LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Vision LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Dental LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications CAM LOC Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Hours worked Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Employee Type Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Date of Selecting this option will enable to allow for any employment modifications

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and navigates to General information for groups. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-5: On clicking continue, navigates to General Information         of group Respective tabs can also clicked to navigate to         corresponding screens. Continue would be enabled only if the         changes are sought on this screen, else use tab to navigate to         the next screen. (See Figure C-370)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Group Information Name of the Text for the Name of the Group. This is read only group field. Effective Date Text for Effective date. This is read only field. Group ID Text for Group ID. This is read only field.. Status Text for status. This is read only field. Group Type Text for group type. This is read only field. Work Group Text for work group. This is read only field. Employee ID Text for employee ID This is read only field. Employee Name Text for employee name. This is read only field Association ID Text for Association ID This is read only field. Association Name Text for Association name. This is read only field Employee Information Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. First name is mandatory. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Last name is mandatory Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. Address Physical and Alternate Address- Note: Enter Information; Alternate Address if different from the Physical Address. Street Address The text for address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Suite The text for suite/apt # Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, State and County are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America County Choose the name of the county from the drop down list of counties available for the ZIP Code entered. Mode of Choose the mode of correspondence from the drop Correspondence down list available. Phone Number The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Extension The text for extension number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 5 digits. Fax The text for fax number of the contact person Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999 Email The text for email of the contact person. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Navigates to Billing Information screen.. This is enabled only if changes are sought on this screen Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage Info are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen.. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-6: On clicking continue, navigates to Billing Information         of group Respective tabs can also clicked to navigate to         corresponding screens. Continue would be enabled only if the         changes are sought on this screen, else use tab to navigate to         the next screen. (See Figure C-371)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Mode of payment Choose a mode of payment from the drop down list available. Based on selection corresponding fields will enable to enter the values. For e.g. if the value selected is card payment, EFT will be disabled and allows only entering card details and vice versa. Credit Card Information Cardholder's The text for cardholder's name. Accepts alphabets and Names space between two words. Credit Card Type Choose the type of credit card from the drop down list available. Credit Card No The text for credit card number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 30 digits Expiration Date Choose a month of expiration from the drop down list available Expiration Year The text for expiration year. Accepts numeric values of exactly 4. Example 2002. Billing Address As it appears on the credit Card Street Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters. ZIP The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. State The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. City Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America EFT Information Bank Name The text for bank name. Accepts alphabets and space between two words. Routing Number The text for routing number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. Account Number The text for account number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits. Account Type Choose the type of account from the drop down list available. Depositor's Name The text for depositor's name. Accepts alphabets and space between two words.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and Navigates to Agent Information screen. This is enabled only if changes are sought on this screen Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary of information entered for group. Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information for the group. Tabs General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage Info are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen.. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen.

-   -   Step-7: On clicking continue, navigates to Agent Information of         group Respective tabs can also clicked to navigate to         corresponding screens. Continue would be enabled only if the         changes are sought on this screen, else use tab to navigate to         the next screen. (See Figure C-372)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Agent ID Choose an agent id by clicking search icon Agent Type Choose an agent type from the drop down list available. Based on the selection of the agent type the percent commission split entry and the Receive ROE packets option would be available. Percent The text for percent commission. Accepts numeric commission values in the range of 1-100 (Example 100.00). This split will be enabled only if the Agent type selected is “Agent Of Record” Sum of the percentage for all the Agent of Record added should be equal to 100.00. Receive Click the check box to receive ROE/OE packets for ROE/OE agent. This option will not be available for Agent Type packets “General Agent”. Agent The text for agent commission. Defaults the value Commission defined in CM - rate Administration for Agent Commission. Accepts numeric values less than or equal to the defaulted value in the in the range of 1-100 (Example 4.45) Check the box Click the check box for a group with out an agent. This if the group is option will be available only for the Agent Type, “Agent without an of Record and Writing Agent”. agent

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of agent information. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Update Update the contents of agent information. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only on saving the record Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving the record Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary of information entered for group creation Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Continue Saves the data and navigates to Coverage Information screen. This is enabled only if changes are sought on this screen Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tab General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage Info are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen.. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-8: On clicking continue, navigates to Coverage Information         of group Respective tabs can also clicked to navigate to         corresponding screens. Continue would be enabled only if the         changes are sought on this screen, else use tab to navigate to         the next screen. (See Figure C-373)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Information Hours worked per The text for worked hours per week. Accepts numeric week values not exceeding 2 digits. Date of hire The text for date of hire. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Employee type Choose an employee type from the drop down list available Pay Roll Check box for Pay Roll verification. Check this if pay roll is verified. RAF Discounting RAF List the RAF tier applicable for the group based on the RAF tier available on group's effective date. Plan Information Line of coverage Choose a line of coverage from the drop down list available Medical waived Click the check box for medical waive if the employee is waiving medical. Carrier selection Choose a carrier selection from the drop down list (Benefit level) available Coverage choice Choose a coverage from the drop down list available PCP ID/Medical The text for PCP ID. Accepts alphabets and numeric group ID values not exceeding 10 characters. Are you an Click the check box if you are an existing patient existing patient PCP last name The text for PCP last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. PCP first name The text for PCP first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Prior plan type Choose a plan type from the drop down list available Prior plan name Choose a plan name from the drop down list available Prior insurance The text for insurance start date. Choose a date by start date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Prior insurance The text for insurance end date. Choose a date by end date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Additional The text for additional coverage. Accepts alphabets Coverage with values not exceeding 50 characters. Date signed The text for date signed. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Date cannot accept future date.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen Element Description Add (Waiting Add the contents of Waiting Period information. It is Period only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only Information) on saving the record. Add Add the contents of Contribution and Coverage (Contribution) elected. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Update (Waiting Updates the contents of Waiting Period information. It Period is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only Information) on saving the record. Update Update the contents of Contribution and Coverage (Contribution) elected. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Cancel Cancels the operation that was currently performed prior to saving the record. Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Enrollment Click enrollment summary refreshes the screen and Summary display the summary information entered for group creation Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information View Missing Saves the data and navigates to Missing Information Info Page Save & Create Saves the data entered and navigates to the screen New Group Group Hierarchy for creating New Group. Cancel Clears or restores the content entered in the fields only prior to saving the records. Tab General Info, Billing Info, Agent Info, Coverage Info are the tabs visible on this screen. Navigation to the next screen is also possible by using tabs If continue button is disabled use this tab to navigate to the next screen.. Also while navigating through the tab the content that are changed on the screen are not saved unless explicitly saved by other operations on the screen

-   -   Step-9: Click Enrollment Summary link to have a summary detail.         Click Pre Enrollment, which also leads to Missing Info screen.         (See Figure C-374)     -   Step-10: Clicking change summary button screen navigates to         missing info screen. This screen shows the overall information         that are entered will be shown. (See Figure C-375)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Missing Information Missing Entity List the missing entities for the group change Message Provides a message for the missing entities Enrollment Lists all the changes sought in the pick list Information Status Displaying the status of change. Change Information ROE/OE Status Specifies the pick list for the changes Remarks Text for briefing the change action Reason for Decline Choose from the list of reasons for decline. This field is enabled only if the status of ROE/OE is opted as decline Others Text for briefing the other status and description

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Finalize Navigates to confirmation screen by incorporating all the corrections made Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-11: On clicking Finalize, navigates to confirmation screen.         Click Continue to go back to Group search screen. (See Figure         C-376)

Individual Dependent Modify

The screen is to modify Individual Member Dependent

The sequential steps involved in modifying Individual Member Dependent are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select ROE. Select Individual Member and then Modify Dependent.         (See Figure C-377)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates search to select an dependent.         Enter the search criteria for Searching for the Dependent. (See         Figure C-378)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-379)     -   Step-4: Click on any employee id for selection the screen         navigates to Individual Employee Change (pick list). (See Figure         C-380)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Group Information Name of the group Text for the Name of the Group. Read Only field Effective Date Text for Employee Effective date. This is read only field. Group ID Text for Group ID. This is read only field. Status Text for status. This is read only field. Group Type Text for group type. This is read only field. Work Group Text for work group. This is read only field. Employee ID Text for Employee ID. This is read only field. Employee Name Text for Employee Name. This is read only field. Dependent ID Text for Dependent ID. This is read only field. Dependent Name Text for Dependent Name. This is read only field. Dependent General Information Changes Dependent to waive Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Vision Plan modifications. Information Dependent to waive Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Dental Plan modifications Information Dependent to waive Selecting this option will enable to allow for any CAM Plan modifications Information Dependent to waive Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Medical Plan modifications Information Prior Plan Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Information modifications Dependent Address Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Information modifications Dependent SSN Selecting this option will enable to allow for any modifications Dependent Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Relationship modifications Dependent Date of Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Birth modifications Dependent Selecting this option will enable to allow for any Personal modifications Information

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Continue Saves the data and navigates to Dependent General information for employees. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-5: n clicking continue, navigates to Dependent General         Information screen. Respective tabs can also clicked to navigate         to corresponding screens. If any other tabs like Coverage or         General Info, or if Enrollment summary, Cancel is disabled, due         to non-selection of changes sought, use missing information link         to navigate to the missing info screen. (See Figure C-381)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Dependent Information First Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Birth date cannot be later than the current date. Social Security The text for social security number for every Number individual. This can also be auto generated by clicking auto generate link. Accepts numeric value of exactly 9 digits. Users with User Role as Level 2 and above can only auto generate SSN. Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. Address Information Street Address The text for address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Apt The text for suite/apt#.. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters with values not exceeding 35 characters Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of either 5 or 9 digits. City, State and County are populated automatically on entering the correct zip code and entering the tab key. City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Line of Coverage Information [For Medical, Vision, Dental] Selected Product Text for the product selected. It is a read only field. Coverage Choice Choose a coverage from the drop down list available Waived Click the check box for any waive. Service Area The text for service area. PCP ID/Medical The text for PCP ID. Accepts alphabets and numeric group ID values not exceeding 10 characters. PCP last name The text for PCP last name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. PCP first name The text for PCP first name. Accepts alphabets and special character like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Prior insurance The text for insurance start date. Choose a date by start date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Prior insurance The text for insurance end date. Choose a date by end date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Other coverage The text for other coverage. Accepts alphabets with kept values not exceeding 50 characters. Additional The text for additional coverage. Accepts alphabets Coverage with values not exceeding 50 characters. Disabled Click the option of temporary or permanent. This is dependent enable if the relationship opted is child Domestic partner Click the option for domestic partner. It depends on the value selected in relationship Legal guardian Click the option for legal guardian. It depends on the value selected in relationship Signature Click the check box if the signature is opted

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Enrollment Saves the data and navigates to Summary screen. This Summary is enabled only if changes are sought on this screen. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes Tab General Info, Coverage Info, are the tabs visible on this screen. If any other tabs like Coverage or General Info, or if Enrollment summary, Cancel is disabled, due to non-selection of changes sought, use missing information link to navigate to the missing info screen.

-   -   Step-6: After entering the fields as per the field details         explained in field explanation. Click Continue. Screen navigates         to Enrollment Summary. (See Figure C-382)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each element in the screen. Element Description Group Contains header information of the Group Information Header Name of the Text for the Name of the Group Group Group ID Text and Link for the Group ID to navigate to the Group General Info screen Group Type Specifies the Type of the Group like Small Employer Group Proposed The text for Proposed Effective Date. Choose a date by Effective Date clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Default effective date is first of the following month. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the group. Work Group Text for Work Group. This specifies the internal work group attached to the Group. This is based on the writing agent's work group. Enrollment Enrollment Summary Information is broken down into Summary tree structure. The tree can by expanded or collapsed. Information The level of the tree is as per the example given below: − Employee − Dependent − Dependent − Employee − Dependent − Employee + Employee − Employee + Dependent +− Employee Where (−) signifies expanded view and (+) signifies collapsed view. Employee ID Text for Employee ID Employee SSN Text for Employee SSN Employee Name Text for employee Name (First Name and Last Name) Effective Date Text for Employee Effective date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Defaults effective date of the Group. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the employee. Dependent ID Text for Dependent ID Dependent SSN Text for Dependent SSN Dependent Name Text for Dependent Name (First Name and Last Name) Effective Date Text for Dependent Effective date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Defaults effective date of the Group. Effective date cannot be past date Status Text to specify the status of the Dependent.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Missing Click missing information refreshes the screen and Information displays the missed information. For a successful creation of a group, there should be no missing information Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes <<, <, >, >> The enrollment summary shows record for 5 employees on single screen. If the employee size increases more than 5. These buttons are used for navigating to the next and previous records for viewing. << - Show first record (s) < - Show previous record (s) > - Show next record (s) >> - Show last record (s) Group ID Click Group ID to navigates to the Group's general info screen.

-   -   Step-7: On clicking Pre-Enrollment, screen navigates to missing         info. (See Figure C-383)

Field Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Employee Missing Information Missing Entity List the missing entities for the group change Message Provides a message for the missing entities Enrollment Lists all the changes sought in the pick list Information Status Displaying the status of change. Dependent Missing Information Missing Entity List the missing entities for the group change Message Provides a message for the missing entities Enrollment Lists all the changes sought in the pick list Information Status Displaying the status of change. Change Information ROE/OE Status Specifies the pick list for the changes Remarks Text for briefing the change action Reason for Decline Choose from the list of reasons for decline. This field is enabled only if the status of ROE/OE is opted as decline Others Text for briefing the other status and description

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Finalize Navigates to confirmation screen by incorporating all the corrections made Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes

-   -   Step-8: On clicking Finalize, navigates to confirmation screen.         (See Figure C-384)

13 View

View option is to facilitate to have any change, or to view the contents of Group, Employee and Dependent.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Enrollment->View->View Group     -   Enrollment->View->View Employee     -   Enrollment->View->View Dependent

Pre-Requisites

The groups, employees and dependents must exist in the system.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions for reinstatement:

-   -   View Group—to view the contents of group     -   View Employee—to view the contents of employee     -   View Dependent—to view the contents of dependents

View Group

The screen is to view the contents of a group, for further process like to change, only to view the contents or to create a new group.

The sequential steps involved in viewing the details of a group are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select View. Then select View Group. (See Figure C-385)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to group search to select a group.         Enter value in any one of the fields, or simply click search         button to perform search operation. (See Figure C-386)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-387)     -   Step-4: Choose a group id for selection. On clicking Change         button, screen navigates to group change request screen, which         is similar to change request for Group explained under CHANGE.         The flow and process are same based on the type of group         selected. (See Figure C-388)

On clicking View button, screen navigates to group view screen. The screen is to only to have view option. Click Search Group to navigate back to Group search screen (See Figure C-389)

On clicking Create New button, screen navigates to group hierarchy screen which is explained under NEW BUSINESS, to create a new group.

View Employee

The screen is to view the contents of an employee, for further process like to change, only to view the contents or to create a new employee

The sequential steps involved in viewing details of an employee are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select View. Then select View Employee. (See Figure C-390)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to employee search to select an         employee. Enter value in any one of the fields, or simply click         search button to perform search operation. (See Figure C-391)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-392)     -   Step-4: Choose an employee id for selection.

On clicking Change button, screen navigates to employee change request screen, which is similar to change request for Employee explained under CHANGE. The flow and process are same as explained under CHANGE. (See Figure C-FIG. 393)

On clicking View button, screen navigates to employee view screen. The screen is to only to have view option. Click Search employee to navigate back to Employee search screen. (See Figure C-394)

On clicking Create New button, screen navigates to Change request for employee add on screen to add new employees.

View Dependent

The screen is to view the contents of an dependent, for further process like to change, only to view the contents or to create a new dependent

The sequential steps involved in viewing details of a dependent are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Enrollment and         select View. Then select View Dependent. (See Figure C-395)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to employee search to select an         employee. Enter value in any one of the fields, or simply click         search button to perform search operation. (See Figure C-396)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         C-397)     -   Step-4: Choose an dependent id for selection.

On clicking Change button, screen navigates to dependent change request screen, which is similar to change request for Dependent explained under CHANGE. The flow and process are same as explained under CHANGE. (See Figure C-398)

On clicking View button, screen navigates to dependent view screen. The screen is to only to have view option. Click Search employee to navigate back to Dependent search screen. (See Figure C-399)

On clicking Create New button, screen navigates to Change request for dependent add on screen to add new dependents.

PX2 User Manual Finance Version 1.0 August 2 2002 Copyright ©2002 Benefit Partners, Inc.

Contents Introduction 1-1 The Applications 1-1 Billing 2-1 Access 2-1 Pre-requisites 2-1 Application Functions 2-2 Suppress Batch Billing 2-3 Batch Billing 2-5 Manual Billing 2-8 Billing Adjustments  2-13 Dynamic Text  2-16 Cash Receipts 3-1 Access 3-1 Pre-requisites 3-1 Application Functions 3-1 Manual Batch 3-2 Credit Card Over Phone 3-6 Cash Reconciliation 4-1 Access 4-1 Pre-requisites 4-1 Application Functions 4-1 Manual Reconciliation 4-2 Billing & Payments History 4-4 Finance Operations 5-1 Access 5-1 Pre-requisites 5-1 Application Functions 5-1 Premium Transmission 5-2 Mail House Billing Data Export 5-5 Lock Box  5-10 EFT Data Export  5-12 Credit Card Export  5-16 Credit Card Import  5-18 Mail house commission data export  5-21 Risk Adjustment  5-24 Cash Disbursement 6-1 Access 6-1 Pre-requisites 6-1 Application Functions 6-1 Commission Disbursement 6-2 Commission Adjustments 6-6

1 Introduction

Finance is the transaction module that encompasses the process of Billing, Cash Receipts, Cash Reconciliation and other Finance Operations like Premium Transmission Data Output, Mail House Billing Data Output, Lockbox and EFT Imports, Credit Card Import and export, Commission Check Run and Import Risk Adjustment Factors. These operations are for the various group and members participating in the PacAdvantage program.

The Applications

The above-mentioned processes are accomplished in several applications embedded into the Finance Module. These applications steer the tasks of creating, and maintaining operational information relevant for financial transactions within PX2 entities, thereby helping achieve the goals of the Finance Module.

-   -   Billing—Billing is the process of creating invoice for the         customers enrolled in the PacAdvantage program. The Invoice on a         broad base is classified into two types—First Time Invoice         (invoice to the group/member that has enrolled as new business)         and Running invoice or periodic invoice (To the existing         Group/Members).     -   Cash Receipts—. Cash Receipt is the process of entering the cash         received by BPI into the system. The cash receipt can be         received in various modes as defined by the business process.         Cash Receipt includes Lock Box receipts, Check, Credit Card, EFT         and Transfer.     -   Cash Reconciliation—Cash Reconciliation is the process of         reconciling the cash receipts and adjustments to individual         invoices and reconciling the amount paid by the group.     -   Cash Disbursement—Cash Disbursement is the process of handling         commission. It deals with both commission disbursement as well         as commission adjustments.     -   Finance Operations—Finance Operation consists of the utility         operations within the finance module for various processes like         Premium Transmission Data Output, Mail House Billing Data         Output, Lockbox and EFT Imports, Credit Card Import and export,         Commission Check Run and Import Risk Adjustment Factors.

2 Billing

Billing is the transaction module that encompasses the process of creating and maintaining invoices for the group and member enrolled with PacAdvantage in the PX2 System. Billing mainly can be categorized in to two.

First Time invoice, generate first time invoice for the groups/members who have enrolled as new business and Periodic invoice.

Generate running invoice to the existing groups/members.

Billing also has other utility as a support to the billing process viz. Suppress Batch Billing, Batch Bill, Batch Billing Adjustments, Manual Bill and Dynamic Text.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Finance->Billing->Suppress Batch Billing         -   ->Batch Billing         -   ->Manual Billing         -   ->Billing Adjustments         -   ->Dynamic Text

Pre-Requisites

All relevant master and transaction records must be available in the system for a successful billing. Master and transaction records are as follows:

-   -   Carrier Maintenance—Refer “User Manual for Carrier Maintenance”         for further information on the master records.     -   Agent/Agency—Refer “User Manual for Sales and Marketing” for         further information on the Agent/Agency records.     -   Enrollment—“User Manual for Enrollment” for further information         on the enrolled group and member records. All the information         about the existing group/members and their real time transaction         details are required to invoice correctly.

When bill run is in process there should be no other activities performed on the PX2 System. Bill generation process requires considerable overheads. Probable the best time to start batch billing process is at the end of the day when there would be no user accessing the system.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Suppress Batch Billing—Suppress Batch Billing is the process of         suppressing periodic bill for a specific Group/Member or         collective group and members     -   Batch Billing—Batch billing is the process of generating running         invoice for the existing groups/members. To run this process,         scheduler must be started.     -   Manual Billing—Manual billing is the process of creating the         invoice manually for a specific group of members where in some         special adjustments needs to be made.     -   Billing Adjustments—Billing adjustment is the process of         adjusting the bill amount either in full or in part against its         value, for a specific group of members where in some special         adjustments needs to be made.     -   Dynamic Text—This process provides a feature to add dynamic         content on the bills sent to the for a specific Group/Member or         collective groups and members

Suppress Batch Billing

The sequential steps involved in Suppress Batch Billing are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Billing. Then select Suppress Batch Billing. (See Figure         D-1)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Suppress Batch Billing screen.         (See Figure D-2)     -   Step-3: Choose the group ids to suppress and click save button.         This will disable save, filter and clear filter buttons and will         have only new button enabled to proceed further.

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Bill Period The text for bill period. Choose from the list the invoice period for suppressing the bill. Selected Group The text displays the selected group count based on the invoice period. Example 0 to 100. It is a read only field Group Id The text for group Id. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 7 digits. Group Name The text for group name. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters. Group Type Choose a group type from the drop down list available ROE Cycle Date The text for ROE Cycle Date From. Choose from the From calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY. ROE Cycle Date The text for ROE cycle end date. Choose from the To calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Effective Date The text for effective start date. Choose from the From calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Effective Date To The text for effective end date. Choose from the calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Group Size From The text for group size and specifies the starting range. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 3 digits. Group Size To The text for group size and specifies the ending range. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 3 digits. Rate Type Choose the rate type option from either Blended or Non-Blended Rate View Choose view option from the available options like All/Suppressed groups/Un-suppressed groups View Selected Check the View Selected Check Box to view only selected groups. Table Table displays the Groups selected based on the Search and filter conditions.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Bill Period On Selecting the bill period, shows all the groups/ members available for the specific invoice period Check All (At Suppress Bill Header) Check All link Checks all the groups from database. Clear All (At Suppress Bill Header). Clear All link uncheck all the groups that are checked from database. Filter Click the Filter to display the Group based on the search criteria/filter conditions provided. Clear Filter Clear the Content of the fields. New Click New to start new operation on this screen Suppress Click Suppress to Suppress billing for the groups selected Save Click Save to save the content of suppress billing Un-Suppress Click Un-Suppress to Un-Suppress billing for the groups selected. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Check All on this The “Check All on this Page” Link will check all the Page records in the table on this Page Invert Selection The Invert Selection Link will invert the selection criteria for the check boxes. I.e. All Check Groups would be unchecked and vice versa. <<, <, >, >> These buttons are used for navigating to the next and previous records for viewing. << - Show first record (s) < - Show previous record (s) > - Show next record (s) >> - Show last record (s)

Batch Billing

The sequential steps involved in Batch Billing are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Billing. Then select Batch Billing. (See Figure D-3)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to batch billing screen. (See         Figure D-4)     -   Step-3: Select the bill period and click process button to         create invoice for all the groups that are un-suppressed for         that bill run period.

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Run Id The text for sequential number of Run Id. It is a read only field and is auto generated Bill Period Choose month and year for bill period from the drop down list available, during which bills are to be generated.. Run By The text for name of the user who generated the bill. It is a read only field.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Process Click Process to start the bill run process for the all the groups and member for the specified billing period selected. New Click New to start new operation for the Bill Run. View Status Click view status to navigate to Auto Billing Status Search

-   -   Step-4: On clicking view status button the screen navigates to         auto billing status search screen. {See Figure D-5}     -   Step-5: Enter the value of any one field or simply click search         button to perform Search operation     -   Step-6: This pops up a search result screen. (See Figure D-6)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Run Id The text for run id. It accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. Run Date The text for run date. Choose from the calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Run Status Choose a run status from the drop down list available. Run Status can be Completed, In Progress or Error

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Click Search to search for the Billing Status based on the search criteria entered. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the editable field. Back Navigates back to Auto Billing screen.

Manual Billing

The sequential steps involved in Manual Billing

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Billing. Then select Manual Billing. (See Figure D-7)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Manual Invoice screen. (See         Figure D-8)     -   Step-3: Choose period and group id. If the bill for the group id         is already generated for the selected month, will display the         contents and create button will be disabled. Otherwise, create         button will be enabled to generate a bill.

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Invoice Details Bill # Shows the Bill #. This is auto generated by the system. Bill Date Shows the Bill Date. Show the date when this bill was generated in the format MM/DD/YYYY Period The text for invoice period. Choose from the list the invoice period for creating the bill. Due Date Shows the Due Date. Show the date when this bill is due in the format MM/DD/YYYY Status Shows the status of the Bill. Reconciled Date Shows the Reconciled Date. Show the date when this bill is reconciled in the format MM/DD/YYYY Group Information Group Id Text for Group ID. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 7 digits. Group Type Text for Group Type. It is a read only field. Group Name Text for Group Name. It is a read only field Status Text for Status. It is a read only field Association Name Text for Association Name. It is a read only field Rate Type Text for Rate Type. It is a read only field Group Level Adjustment Type Choose a type of adjustment from the drop down list available Amount The text for adjustment amount. Accepts value in the format of currency (example 999999999.99) Period The text for the period of adjustment. Choose month and year from the drop down list. Billing Summary Displays the bill summary. Prior period billed Text for Prior period billed amount. It is a read only amount field Adjustments since Text for Adjustments since prior period. It is a read prior period only field Payments Text for Payments Received. It is a read only field Received Past Due Amount Text for Past Due Amount. It is a read only field Current bill Text for Current bill amount. It is a read only field amount Total Due Text for Total Due. It is a read only field Employee Level Displays Employee Level Adjustments. This can be Adjustments due to Add On or Termed Employee/Members. Current Premium Displays current premium due for each employees Due Bill Summary Displays the bill summary Sub Total - Text for Sub Total - Medical Premium. It is a read Medical Premium only field Sub Total - Text for Sub Total - Dental Premium. It is a read Dental Premium only field Sub Total - Text for Sub Total - Vision Premium. It is a read Vision Premium only field Sub Total - CAM Text for Sub Total - CAM Premium. It is a Premium read only field Administration Text for Administration member Fees. It is a read member Fees only field Agent member Text for Agent member Fees. It is a read only field Fees Administration Text for Administration flat Fee. It is a read only flat Fee field Agent flat Fee Text for Agent flat Fee. It is a read only field Total due current Text for Total due current period. It is a read only period field Add Past Due Text for Add Past Due Amount. It is a read only Amount field Total Due Text for Total Due. It is a read only field

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanations for each button in the screen. Element Description New Click New to create a new manual bill. Create Click Create to Creates bill based on the information provided Add Add the contents of adjustments into the table below. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Calculate Click calculate button to calculate the adjustments based on the adjustment period selected. Update Update the contents of adjustments. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked.

Billing Adjustments

The sequential steps involved in Dynamic Text are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Billing. Then select Billing Adjustments. (See Figure         D-9)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Adjustment Screen. (See Figure         D-10)     -   Step-3: Enter adjustment date.     -   Step-4: Choose a group id by clicking search icon. Corresponding         fields are read only and selecting a group id populates the         data.     -   Step-5: Choose Type of group level adjustment and period. Only         if the value of type is Late Fee, Calculate button is enabled to         calculate and fetch the value in amount field otherwise         calculate button is disabled.     -   Step-6: Click Search button lead to have details of adjustment         ids, generated. (See Figure D-11)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Adjustment Details Adjustment Id This field is a read only and system generated id of exactly 10 digits. Adjustment Date Text for Adjustment Date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon to have a date in the MM/DD/YYYY format. Status Shows the status of the adjustment. Group Information Group ID Choose a group ID by clicking search icon. Field is mandatory. Group Type Field is read only. Populates data based on the selected group ID Group Name Field is read only. Populates data based on the selected group ID Association Name Field is read only. Populates data based on the selected group ID Status Field is read only. Populates data based on the selected group ID Rate Type Field is read only. Populates data based on the selected group ID Group Level Adjustments Type Choose a type of group level adjustment from the drop down list available. Field is mandatory Amount Amount is calculated based on the inputs of type and period. Value gets populated by clicking calculate button Period Choose a period for which group level adjustment is sought. Field is mandatory.

Button Functionality Element Description Calculate Click calculate button to calculate the adjustments based on the adjustment period selected. New Click New to create a new group level adjustment Save Click Save to save the content of billing adjustment Search Click Search to search for the group level adjustment status based on the search criteria entered.

Dynamic Text

The sequential steps involved in Dynamic Text are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Billing. Then select Dynamic Text. (See Figure D-12)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to dynamic text screen. (See Figure         D-13)     -   Step-3: Enter the text for dynamic text. This field is         mandatory.     -   Step-4: Enter the values in the fields as per the format briefed         in fields' explanation table. Choose a group id.     -   Step-5: On clicking Save button, the assigned dynamic text will         be made available for the selected group and disable all the         fields except New to continue the flow.

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Dynamic Text The text for dynamic text. Accepts all characters. Invoice Period The text for invoice period. Choose from the list the invoice period for embedding dynamic text on the bill. Selected Group The text displays the selected group count based on the invoice period. Example 0 to 100. It is a read only field Group Id The text for group Id. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 7 digits. Group Name The text for group name. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters. Group Type Choose a group type from the drop down list available ROE Cycle Date The text for ROE Cycle Date From. Choose from the From calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY. ROE Cycle Date The text for ROE cycle end date. Choose from the To calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Effective Date The text for effective start date. Choose from the From calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Effective Date To The text for effective end date. Choose from the calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Group Size From The text for group size and specifies the starting range. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 3 digits. Group Size To The text for group size and specifies the ending range. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 3 digits. View Selected Check the View Selected Check Box to view only selected groups. Table Table displays the Groups selected based on the Search and filter conditions.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Invoice Period On Selecting the invoice period, shows all the groups/members available for the specific invoice period Check All (At Dynamic Text Header) Check All link Checks all the groups displayed. Clear All (At Dynamic Text Header). Clear All link uncheck all the groups that are checked Filter Click the Filter to display the Group based on the search criteria/filter conditions provided. Clear Filter Clear the Content of the fields. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Check All on this The “Check All on this Page” Link will check all the Page records in the table on this Page Invert Selection The Invert Selection Link will invert the selection criteria for the check boxes. I.e. All Check Groups would be unchecked and vice versa. <<, <, >, >> These buttons are used for navigating to the next and previous records for viewing. << - Show first record (s) < - Show previous record (s) > - Show next record (s) >> - Show last record (s) New Click New to start new operation on this screen Save Click Save to save the Content of the dynamic text

3 Cash Receipts

Cash Receipt is the transaction module that encompasses the process of creating and maintaining Cash receipts for the group and member enrolled and invoiced in the PX2 System. Cash Receipt is the process of entering the cash received by BPI into the system. The cash receipt can be received in various modes as defined by the business process. Cash Receipt includes Lock Box receipts, Check, Credit Card, EFT and Transfer. Cash Receipts here identifies the Manual Cash batch and Credit Card over phone.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Finance->Cash Receipts->Manual Batch         -   ->Credit Card over Phone

Pre-Requisites

All relevant transactional data pertaining to the group and member must be available for the Cash receipt process.

Invoice should be generated and available for the Group/Member for cash receipts for existing groups and members.

For new business enrollment the group information must be available in the system to enter the cash batch

All billing information and the mode of payments must be available in the system.

For credit card over phone process, Internet connection is a mandatory.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Manual Batch: Manual batch is the process of entering the         payments and receipts into the system manually. The payments and         receipts are identified based on the batch type that can be         Manual Batch, NSF Batch, Returns Batch, Positive Transfer,         Negative Transfer, Direct Deposit and Wire Transfer.     -   Credit Card over Phone: Credit Card over phone is a interface         built for processing credit card transactions over phone for the         Group/Member who opts to pay be credit card.

Manual Batch

The sequential steps involved in Manual Batch are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Cash Receipts. Then select Manual Batch (See Figure D-14)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Manual Batch screen. (See Figure         D-15)     -   Step-3: Choose Batch type and enter tape total.     -   Step-4: Enter the values in the respective fields as per the         format briefed in fields' explanation table.     -   Step-5: On clicking add will do the temporary storage and         clicking Save will have a permanent storage.     -   Step-6: Clicking Search button navigates to search screen to         have the details of Batch Ids generated. In the search screen,         either value can be entered or simply click search button to         perform the search operation.     -   Step-7: Following is the search result screen. Click back, to go         back to Manual Batch screen. (See Figure D-16)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Batch Information Batch Id The text for Batch ID. This is auto generated by the system Batch Date The text for batch date. Batch Date defaults to the current date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format M/DD/YYYY. Batch Total The text for Batch Total. This is dynamically calculated by the system based on the batch entries Batch Type Choose the batch type from the list provided. Batch type can be Manual Batch, NSF Batch, Returns Batch, Positive Transfer, Negative Transfer, Direct Deposit and Wire Transfer. Tape Total The text for Tape Total. Accepts value in the format of currency (example 9999999999.99). This field is mandatory. Tape Balance The text for Tape Balance. This is dynamically calculated by the system based on the batch entries. Batch Status The text for Batch Status. Displays the status of the batch. Batch can be Open or Closed Check Information Post Mark Date The text for Post Mark date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format M/DD/YYYY. Post Mark Date cannot be greater than Received date. Received Date The text for Received date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format M/DD/YYYY. Received Date cannot be future date. This field is mandatory. Check # The text for Check #. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. This field is mandatory. Check Amount The text for amount received. Accepts value in the format of currency (example 9999999999.99). This field is mandatory. Check amount should be equal Group Amount Total. Check Distribution Group Id Text for Group ID. Group ID accepts numeric value of exactly 7 digits. This field is mandatory. Group Name Text for Group name. It is a read only field Amount The text for amount received. Accepts value in the format of currency (example 9999999999.99) Comments Choose the comments from the list provided Others Text for others. If the Comments is Others specify other comment Table Display the Check distribution added for the batch.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Click the Add Link to add additional row for the Check Distribution Add Click add button to add the content of check distribution to the table. The Check distribution amount should be equal to the check amount to add. This is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. New Click New to Create a new Batch entry Save Click Save to save the batch entry data. Delete Click Delete to delete the batch entry record checked for deletion. Becomes permanent only on saving the record. Close Click Close button to close the batch data and process auto reconciliation. Closing the batch is possible only if Tape Balance is equal to zero. Search Click search for searching the existing status of Batch Data.

Credit Card Over Phone

The sequential steps involved in Credit card over phone are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Cash Receipts. Then select Credit Card Over Phone. (See         Figure D-17)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Credit Card over phone screen to         have transaction, credit card information and amount         distribution details. (See Figure D-18)     -   Step-3: Enter the values in the fields as per the format briefed         in fields' explanation table.     -   Step-4: Click Save to save the content. Initially Process button         will be disabled. Once the contents are saved, Process button is         enabled to process the contents.     -   Step-5: Click Process button to process the transaction. Once         Process is click, both Save and Process buttons are disabled.     -   Step-6: Click Search button to have the list of all transactions         ids This pops up a search screen. (See Figure D-19)     -   Step-7: Enter the value in any one of the field or simply click         search to perform search operation.     -   Step-8: This navigates to a screen with search results. (See         Figure D-20)     -   Step-9: Click a transaction id for selection to view/modify the         content or otherwise click back to credit card over phone         screen.

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Transaction Information Transaction Id The text for Transaction ID. This is auto generated by the system Transaction Date The text for Transaction date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format M/DD/YYYY. Transaction The text for Transaction Status. This is a read only Status field. The system shows the transaction status based on credit card authorization Credit Card Information Card Holder's The text for cardholder's name. Accepts alphabets Name and space between two words. Credit Card The text for credit card number. Accepts numeric Number values not exceeding 30 digits Credit Card Type Choose the type of credit card from the drop down list available. Expiration Date Choose a month and year of expiration from the drop down list available First Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Street Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Zip Text for ZIP Code. Accepts numeric value of exactly 5 digits. Payment Amount Text for Payment Amount. Displays the amount due. Amount Distribution Group Id Text for Group ID. Group ID accepts numeric value of exactly 7 digits. Group Name Text for Group name. It is a read only field Amount Due Text for Amount Due. It is a read only field Payment Amount The text for amount received. Accepts value in the format of currency (example 9999999999.99) Remarks Text for Remarks. Accepts 50 characters

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Click the Add Link to add additional row for the Check Distribution New Click new to Create a new Credit Card over phone entry Save Click Save to save the Credit Card over phone entry. Process Click Process to process the credit card transaction Search Click search for searching the existing Credit Card Information entered. Back Click Back Button to go back to the Credit card over phone screen.

4 Cash Reconciliation

Cash Reconciliation is the transaction module that encompasses the process of reconciling the invoices, cash receipts and adjustments for a specific group and member enrolled and invoiced in the PX2 System. Reconciled Cash can be disbursed to the Carriers, Agents, PacAdvantage and Benefit Partners. Normally cash reconciliation is an automated process. But under special circumstances when the Cash Receipts, Invoices and Adjustments do not match the reconciliation can be done manually using the Cash reconciliation Process.

Also it encompasses the history of billing and payment details.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Finance->Cash Reconciliation->Manual Reconciliation         -   ->Billing & Payment History

Pre-Requisites

Billing, Cash Receipts entries should have occurred for reconciliation.

Enrollment—Refer User Manual for Enrollment for further information on the enrollment process. Real time information and the transaction on the Group and member is required for Reconciliation.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Manual Reconciliation.     -   Billing & Payment History

Manual Reconciliation

The sequential steps involved in Manual Reconciliation are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Cash Reconciliation. Then select Manual Reconciliation         (See Figure D-21)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Group Search screen. (See Figure         D-22)     -   Step-3: Enter value in any one of the field or simply click         Search button to perform search operation.     -   Step-4: This pops up a screen with search result (See Figure         D-23)     -   Step-5: Click on any group id for selection     -   Step-6: Screen navigates to Cash Reconciliation. (See Figure         D-24)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Group Id Text to display the Group ID, This is a read only field Group Name Text to display the Group Name, This is a read only field Association Name Text for Association Name. It is a read only field Rate Type Text for Rate Type. It is a read only field Group Type Text for Group Type It is a read only field Left to Balance Text to display the Left to Balance, This is a read only field. This field is dynamically populated based on the Check box selected for the reconciliation.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Click Search to search for a new group for processing reconciliation Clear Click Clear to Cancel and restore to the state as was on loading the page Post Click Post Reconciliation to Post Reconciliation. If Reconciliation the Amount Left To Balance is within (+/−2) any user can post reconciliation. If the Amount is between $3.00 to $50.00 User with Level II authorization only can post reconciliation. Amount Between $51.00 to $100.00 User with Level III authorization only can post reconciliation. For amount greater than $100.00 User with Level IV authorization only can post reconciliation.

Billing & Payments History

The sequential steps involved in billing and payment history are listed below

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Cash Reconciliation. Then Billing & Payments History.         (See Figure D-25)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates group search. (See Figure D-26)     -   Step-3: Enter value in any one of the field or simply click         search button to perform searach operation.     -   Step-4: This pops up a search result screen. (See Figure D-27)     -   Step-5: Click a group id for selection.     -   Step-6: Navigates to history screen. (See Figure D-28)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Group Information Group Id Text for Group ID. It is a read only field. Group Type Text for Group Type. It is a read only field. Group Name Text for Group Name. It is a read only field Status Text for Status. It is a read only field Association Name Text for Association Name. It is a read only field Rate Type Text for Rate Type. It is a read only field

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Click Search to search for billing and payments history

5 Cash Disbursement

Cash disbursement consists of utility operations like commission disbursement and commission adjustment.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Finance->Cash Disbursement->Commission disbursement         -   ->Commission adjustments

All relevant transactional data pertaining to the group and member must be available for the cash disbursement.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Commission disbursement     -   Commission adjustments

Commission Disbursement

The sequential steps involved in Agent Commission run are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Finance Operations. Select Disbursement and then select         Commission Disbursement. (See Figure D-29)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Commission Disbursement Screen.         (See Figure D-30)     -   Step-3: Choose Bill period from the drop down list. Click         Process     -   Step-4: Click View Status to have the details of Run ids         generated. Search screen pops up. Enter value in any of the         fields, or simply click Search button to perform search         operation. (See Figure D-31)     -   Step-5: This pops up a screen with search result. Click any Run         Id for selection to view the status of a particular run id. (See         Figure D-32)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Run Id The text for Export ID. This is auto generated by the system Bill Period The text for Export date. This is a read only field. Run By The text for Export Status. This is a read only field. The system shows the Export status based on premium transmission data export

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Process Click Process to start the bill run process for the all the groups and member for the specified billing period selected. New Click New to start new operation for the Bill Run. Search Click Search to navigate to Commission Billing Run Status Search

Commission Adjustments

The sequential steps involved in Commission Adjustments are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Cash disbursement. Then select Commission Adjustments     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to commission adjustment. (See         Figure D-33)     -   Step-3: Choose a type of adjustment. (See Figure D-34)     -   Step-4: Choose an agent/agency id by clicking search icon. Agent         name gets populated based on the selected value.     -   Step-5: Enter adjustment amount. Then click save.     -   Step-6: Click on search button yields the details of the         adjustment ids created. (See Figure D-35)

6 Finance Operations

Finance Operation consists of the utility operations within the finance module for various processes like Premium Transmission Data Output, Mail House Billing Data Output, Lockbox and EFT Exports, Credit Card Import and export, and Import Risk Adjustment Factors.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Finance->Finance Operations->Premium Transmission         -   ->Billing         -   ->Cash Receipts         -   ->Risk Adjustment

Pre-Requisites

All relevant transactional data pertaining to the group and member must be available for the Finance Operations. To run this process, scheduler must be started.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Premium Transmission     -   Mail House Billing     -   Lock Box     -   EFT Data Export     -   Credit Card Export     -   Credit Card Import     -   Mail house Commission Data Export     -   Risk Adjustment Import

Premium Transmission

The sequential steps involved in Premium Transmission are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Finance Operations. Then select Premium Transmission (See         Figure D-36)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Transmission screen. (See Figure         D-37)     -   Step-3: Choose the dates for transmit and comments if any. Click         Export. Immediately, the export status will display the status         as “In Progress”.     -   Step-4: Click Search to know the status of the export ids         generated. (See Figure D-38)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Export Id The text for Export ID. This is auto generated by the system Export Status The text for Export Status. This is a read only field. The system shows the Export status based on premium transmission data export Exported By The text for Exported By. This is a read only field. Export Date The text for Export date. This is a read only field. Transmit for the Choose “Transmit for the following Dates From” by following Dates clicking calendar icon. The date can be in the format From: MM/DD/YYYY Transmit for the Choose “Transmit for the following Dates To” by following Dates To clicking calendar icon. The date can be in the format MM/DD/YYYY Table Display the Transmission ID for the Carrier and Carrier Name Comments The text for Comments.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description New Click New button to Create new Premium Data Transmission Export Click Export button to Export the Premium Data Transmission based on the selection criteria Search Click Search Button to Search for the Premium Data Transmission and view the Export Status

Mail House Billing Data Export

The sequential steps involved in Mail House Billing Export Data are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Finance Operations. Select Billing and then select Mail         House Billing Data Export. (See Figure D-39)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Mail House Billing screen. (See         Figure D-40)     -   Step-3: Choose Export date and a group id for export. Click         Export.     -   Step-4: Click view status to know the status of export ids         generated. Search screen pops up. Enter value in any of the         field, or simply click search button to perform search         operation. (See Figure D-41)     -   Step-5: Click back to navigate back to Mail House Billing         screen. (See Figure D-42)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Mail House Billing Data Export Id The text for Export ID. This is auto generated by the system Status The text for Export Status. This is a read only field. The system shows the Export status based on data exported Exported By The text for Exported By. This is a read only field. Export Date The text for Export date. This is a read only field. Export Date as of Choose “Export Date as of” from the list of billing period Selected Groups The text displays the selected group count based on the invoice period. Example 0 to 100. It is a read only field Comments The text for Comments. Filter Group Id The text for group Id. Accepts numeric values only. Group Name The text for group name. Accepts any characters. Group Type Choose a group type from the drop down list available ROE Cycle Date The text for ROE Cycle Date From. Choose from the From calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY. ROE Cycle Date The text for ROE cycle end date. Choose from the To calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Effective Date The text for effective start date. Choose from the From calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Effective Date To The text for effective end date. Choose from the calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Group Size From The text for group size and specifies the starting range. Accepts numeric values only. Group Size To The text for group size and specifies the ending range. Accepts numeric values only. View Selected Check the View Selected Check Box to view only selected groups. Table Table displays the Groups selected based on the Search and filter conditions.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Check All (At Text Header) Check All link Checks all the groups displayed. Clear All (At Text Header). Clear All link uncheck all the groups that are checked Filter Click the Filter to display the Group based on the search criteria/filter conditions provided. Clear Filter Clear the Content of the fields. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Check All on this The “Check All on this Page” Link will check all the Page records in the table on this Page Invert Selection The Invert Selection Link will invert the selection criteria for the check boxes. I.e. All Check Groups would be unchecked and vice versa. View Selected Check the View Selected Check Box to view only selected groups. <<, <, >, >> These buttons are used for navigating to the next and previous records for viewing. << - Show first record (s) < - Show previous record (s) > - Show next record (s) >> - Show last record (s) New Click New to start new operation on this screen Save Click Save to save the Content of the Mail House Billing View status Click view status button to search the Status of the Mail House Billing Process

Process Lock Box

The sequential steps involved in Lock Box are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Finance Operations. Select Cash Receipts and then select         Lock Box. (See Figure D-43)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Import Lock Box screen. (See         Figure D-44)     -   Step-3: On clicking Search Button enables to have a list of         Import Ids. This pops up a search screen. (See Figure D-45)     -   Step-4: Enter value in any of the field or simply click search         button to perform search operation. This navigates to a screen         with search result. (See Figure D-46)     -   Step-5: Choose an Import ID for selection to alter the content         or simply click back button to navigate back to Lockbox screen.     -   Step-6: Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         formats specified in the field explanation table and click         Import.

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Import Id Read only field to display import id value Status Read only field to display the status of import Import Date Read only field to display the import date Imported By Read only field to display the user who imported the files Import File Enter the file path or select the path by clicking browse button. The field is mandatory Batch Date Enter the date for Batch date or select a date by clicking calendar icon. The field is mandatory. Tape Total Text for tape Total. Enter the tape total. Accepts numeric values in the format 9999999.99 Comment Text for comments.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description New Click on new button enables to have a new import of Lockbox File. Import Click on import button will perform the action of importing the file selected. Search Click on the Search button to search for the Lockbox file import status. Browse Click on the Browse button will enable to choose a file to import

EFT Data Export

The sequential steps involved in EFT Data Export are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Finance Operations. Select Cash Receipts and then select         EFT Data Export. (See Figure D-47)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to EFT Data Export screen. (See         Figure D-48)     -   Step-3: On clicking Search button leads to EFT Data Search         screen to have all the Export Ids. (See Figure D-49)     -   Step-4: Enter the value in any one of the field or simply click         search button to perform search operation. This pops up a screen         with search results. (See Figure D-50)     -   Step-5: Choose an Export ID for selection, otherwise click Back         button to navigate back to EFT Data Export.     -   Step-6: Enter the values in the respective fields as per the         format briefed under Fields' Explanation and click Export.

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Export EFT Data Export Id The text for Export ID. This is auto generated by the system Status The text for Export Status. This is a read only field. The system shows the Export status based on data exported Exported By The text for Exported By. This is a read only field. Export Date The text for Export date. This is a read only field. Export Date as of Choose “Export Date as of” from the list of billing period Selected Groups The text displays the selected group count based on the invoice period. Example 0 to 100. It is a read only field Total Bill Text to display the total bill amount. This is read Amount only field Comments The text for Comments. Filter Group Id The text for group Id. Accepts numeric values only. Group Name The text for group name. Accepts any characters. Group Type Choose a group type from the drop down list available ROE Cycle Date The text for ROE Cycle Date From. Choose from the From calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY. ROE Cycle Date The text for ROE cycle end date. Choose from the To calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Effective Date The text for effective start date. Choose from the From calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Effective Date To The text for effective end date. Choose from the calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Group Size From The text for group size and specifies the starting range. Accepts numeric values only. Group Size To The text for group size and specifies the ending range. Accepts numeric values only. View Selected Check the View Selected Check Box to view only selected groups. Table Table displays the Groups selected based on the Search and filter conditions.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Exported date As On Selecting the Exported date As on, shows all the on groups/members available for the specific period Check All (At Text Header) Check All link Checks all the groups displayed. Clear All (At Text Header). Clear All link uncheck all the groups that are checked Filter Click the Filter to display the Group based on the search criteria/filter conditions provided. Clear Filter Clear the Content of the fields. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Check All on this The “Check All on this Page” Link will check all the Page records in the table on this Page Invert Selection The Invert Selection Link will invert the selection criteria for the check boxes. I.e. All Check Groups would be unchecked and vice versa. <<, <, >, >> These buttons are used for navigating to the next and previous records for viewing. << - Show first record (s) < - Show previous record (s) > - Show next record (s) >> - Show last record (s) New Click New to start new operation on this screen Export Click Save to save the Content of the EFT Export Commit Click Commit to effect the EFT Payment Search Click on Search navigates to have EFT search Back Click Back navigates back to EFT payment screen

Credit Card Export

The sequential steps involved in Credit Card Export are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Finance Operations. Select Cash Receipts and then select         Credit Card Export. (See Figure D-51)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Credit Card Export Screen (See         Figure D-52)     -   Step-3: Choose export date and a group id. Click Export. This         pops up a screen for confirmation to download. Click Ok. (See         Figure D-53)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Credit Card Export Export Id The text for Export ID. This is auto generated by the system Status The text for Export Status. This is a read only field. The system shows the Export status based on data exported Exported By The text for Exported By. This is a read only field. Export Date The text for Export date. This is a read only field. Export Date as of Choose “Export Date as of” from the list of billing period Selected Groups The text displays the selected group count based on the invoice period. Example 0 to 100. It is a read only field Comments The text for Comments. Filter Group Id The text for group Id. Accepts numeric values only. Group Name The text for group name. Accepts any characters. Group Type Choose a group type from the drop down list available ROE Cycle Date The text for ROE Cycle Date From. Choose from the From calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY. ROE Cycle Date The text for ROE cycle end date. Choose from the To calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Effective Date The text for effective start date. Choose from the From calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Effective Date To The text for effective end date. Choose from the calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Group Size From The text for group size and specifies the starting range. Accepts numeric values only. Group Size To The text for group size and specifies the ending range. Accepts numeric values only. View Selected Check the View Selected Check Box to view only selected groups. Table Table displays the Groups selected based on the Search and filter conditions.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Exported date As On Selecting the Exported date As on, shows all the on groups/members available for the specific period Check All (At Text Header) Check All link Checks all the groups displayed. Clear All (At Text Header). Clear All link uncheck all the groups that are checked Filter Click the Filter to display the Group based on the search criteria/filter conditions provided. Clear Filter Clear the Content of the fields. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Check All on this The “Check All on this Page” Link will check all the Page records in the table on this Page Invert Selection The Invert Selection Link will invert the selection criteria for the check boxes. I.e. All Check Groups would be unchecked and vice versa. <<, <, >, >> These buttons are used for navigating to the next and previous records for viewing. << - Show first record (s) < - Show previous record (s) > - Show next record (s) >> - Show last record (s) New Click New to start new operation on this screen Save Click Save to save the Content of the Credit Card Export

Credit Card Import

The sequential steps involved in Credit Card Import are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Finance Operations. Select Cash Receipts and then select         Credit Card Import. (See Figure D-54)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Credit Card Import Screen. (See         Figure D-55)     -   Step-3: Choose a file to import by clicking Browse button. The         file should be in the format of .txt     -   Step-4: Click Import button to import the selected file. If the         file selected is imported successfully, status will show         imported.

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Import Id Read only field to display import id value Status Read only field to display the status of import Import Date Read only field to display the import date Imported By Read only field to display the user who imported the files Import File Enter the file path or select the path by clicking browse button. The field is mandatory Comments Text for Comments

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description New Click on new button enables to have a new import of Credit Card File.. Import Click on import button will perform the action of importing the file selected.

Mail house commission data export

The sequential steps involved in Agent Commission run are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Finance Operations. Select Cash Receipts and then select         Mail house Commission data export. (See Figure D-56)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Mail House Commission Data         Export Screen (See Figure D-57)     -   Step-3: Choose export date and group id to be exported. Click         Export.     -   Step-4: Click view status to have the status details of export         ids generated. Search screen pops up. Enter value in any of the         field or simply click search button to perform search operation.         (See Figure D-58)     -   Step-5: This pops up a screen with search result. Click Back to         navigate back to Mail house commission data export screen. (See         Figure D-59)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Cheque Billing Export Id The text for Export ID. This is auto generated by the system Status The text for Status. This is a read only field. The system shows the Export status based on premium transmission data export Exported By The text for Exported By. This is a read only field. Export Date The text for Export date. This is a read only field. Exported date As On Selecting the Exported date As on, shows all the on groups/members available for the specific period Selected Groups Displays the number of groups selected from the Of total number of available groups Comments The text for Comments. Filter Agent/Agency Id Text for agent/agency id. Accepts numeric values of not exceeding 10 digits Agent/Agency Choose either agent or agency to incorporate names Agent First Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Field is mandatory Agent Last Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Field is mandatory Agency Legal Name View Selected Check the View Selected Check Box to view only selected groups. Effective Date The text for effective start date. Choose from the From calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Effective Date To The text for effective end date. Choose from the calendar icon in the format MM/DD/YYYY Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Check All on this The “Check All on this Page” Link will check all the Page records in the table on this Page Invert Selection The Invert Selection Link will invert the selection criteria for the check boxes. I.e. All Check Groups would be unchecked and vice versa.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description New Click New to start new operation on this screen Export Click Export button to Export the check billing data based on the selection criteria Search Click Search Button to Search for the check billing data and view the Export Status Filter Click the Filter to display the Group based on the search criteria/filter conditions provided. Clear Filter Clear the Content of the fields.

Risk Adjustment

The sequential steps involved in Risk Adjustment Import are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Finance and         select Finance Operations. Select Risk Adjustment and then         select Risk Adjustment Import. (See Figure D-60)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to Import Risk Adjustment Factor.         (See Figure D-61)     -   Step-3: Choose a file to import by clicking Browse button. The         file format should be of .txt Click Import to import the         selected file.     -   Step-4: Click search button to know the status of import ids         generated. This pops up a search screen, where the enter any         value in one of the field or simply click search to perform         search operation.     -   Step-5: This pops up a screen with search result. Click on any         import id to view the contents or otherwise click Back button to         navigate back to Import Risk Adjustment Factor screen. (See         Figure D-62)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Import Id Read only field to display import id value Import Status Read only field to display the status of import Imported By Read only field to display the user who imported the files Import Date Read only field to display the import date Import File Enter the file path or select the path by clicking browse button. The field is mandatory Effective Date Enter the date for Effective date or select a date by clicking calendar icon. The field is mandatory.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description New Click on new button enables to have a new import of Risk Adjustment Factor File. Import Click on import button will perform the action of importing the file selected. Search Click on the Search button to search for the Risk Adjustment file import status.

PX2 User Manual

Others

Version 1.0

Jul. 31, 2002

Copyright© 2002 Benefit Partners, Inc.

1 Introduction

Others encompass the modules like Search Zip, Call Tracking, Manual Mail Merge, Report and Letter Regeneration.

The Applications

Search Zip—. Search Zip provides basically two types of searches. First it analyses the zip codes provided namely zip1 and zip2 and provides the distance between the two locations. Another one is search can be made either by entering zip code, county or city

Call Tracking—. Call Tracking is used to track the calls that are made or received with specific business intension. It can be inbound (calls received) or outbound (calls made). It also has a feature for identifying task on hand for the calls as “To do List”

Manual Mail Merge—. The Mail Merge module addresses the functionality of the system where it needs to generate business correspondences using predefined templates. The templates are basically RTF files with placeholders for dynamic data in them. The output is usually a RTF file, but at times this could be a PostScript or a PDF document

Letter Regeneration—. The Letter Regeneration is mainly to generate letters as per the templates provided. The templates can be selected based on the selected criteria, namely Group, Employee, Agent and Dependent.

Reports—. Report Module encompasses the process of displaying the business information to the viewers. The objective of the Reports is to provide information captured in the system to the user in a presentable manner. The reports can be single, two-dimensional and multi dimensional providing the information to the decision-maker

2 Search Zip

Search Zip provides basically two types of searches. First it analyses the zip codes provided namely zip1 and zip2 and provides the distance between the two locations. Entering zip code, county or city can make another one is search.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Others->Search Zip

Pre-Requisites

Zip search provides the distance between the two zip codes and also search can be made by either on zip code, county or city.

Application Functions

The application consists of only one screen.

-   -   Zip Search—to arrive the distance of two zip codes and also to         have a search either on zip code, county or city.

Search Zip

Zip search provides the distance between the two zip codes and also either on zip code, county or city can make search.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Others and Search         Zip. (See Figure E-1)     -   Step-2: Choose any one from the options [City, County, Zip] and         enter corresponding value in the text field. Entry to this field         is mandatory, before clicking Search button.     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen with search results. (See Figure         E-2)     -   Step-4: Enter zip code1 and zip code2, as per field explanation         provided in Fields Explanation table. Also choose the search         option from City/County/Zip. Click Search. (See Figure E-3)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields Element Description Zip1 Enter the value for zip1. Accepts numeric values of 5 digits. Zip2 Enter the value for zip1. Accepts numeric values of 5 digits. Both zip1 and zip2 cannot have the same value. Distance between The text displays the distance between zip1 and zip2 zip1 and zip is City Choosing the value of the radio button for city for the text typed in the search box will display matched records. The text entered for this search should be alpha. County Choosing the value of the radio button for county for the text typed in the search box will display matched records. The text entered for this search should be alpha. Zip Choosing the value of the radio button for zip for the value typed in the search box will display matched records. The value entered for this search should be numeric with 5 digits.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen Element Description Search Click on the search button will search based on the selection of the radio button value for the text entered in the search box. Search box should not be empty. Cancel Click on the cancel button to clear the data entered on the screen and focus on the same screen to proceed. Print Click on Print will print the contents of the table generated based on the search criteria. Go button Click on the go button to analyze the zip codes entered for their availability and displays the result for the valid zip codes.

3 Call Tracking

Call Tracking is used to track the calls that are made or received with specific business intension. It can be inbound (calls received) or outbound (calls made). It also has a feature for identifying task on hand for the calls as “To do List”.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Others->Call Tracking         -   ->To Do List

Pre-Requisites

Group & Agent information must be available in the system as a pre-requisite

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Call Tracking—to keep track of information received from         group/agent     -   To Do List—gives a list of task to be performed

Call Tracking

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Call Tracking. Then select call tracking. (See Figure         E-4)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to Call Tracking screen. (See Figure         E-5)     -   Step-3: Select a value for call type from the list available         Choose. Group/Agent Id by clicking search icon. (See Figure E-6)     -   Step-4: On clicking search icon, a search screen pops up. Search         operation can be performed either based on the inputs or even if         the fields are empty. (See Figure E-7)     -   Step-5: Click on group id for selection     -   Step-6: Enter the value of the fields, as per the format briefed         in field's explanation section     -   Step-7: Click save button.

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Call Type Choose a type of call from the drop down list available Referenced Entity Choose an entity from either Group or Agent. Group is the default selected value Group Id The text for group id. Choose a group id by clicking search icon. It is valid only if the option of referenced entity is group. The field is mandatory Agent Id The text for agent id. Choose an agent id by clicking search icon. It is valid only if the option of referenced entity is agent. The field is mandatory Caller Name The text for caller name Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Field is mandatory Nature of Call Choose a nature of call from the drop down list available. Field is mandatory Other The text for others. It accepts alphanumeric values. The field is active only if the value of nature of call is other Date & Time The text for date and time. It is a system generated value and it is read only Follow-up Click the check box, if the follow-up is required required Follow-up Date The text for follow-up date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. It is mandatory only if the follow-up value is clicked. Comment The text for comments. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters except double quotes of maximum length 255 characters

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Save Saves the entered information not only for the present screen. Search Clears the screen and perform search operation based on the input value for group/agent. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

To do list

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Others and select         Call Tracking. Then select To Do List. (See Figure E-8)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to “To Do” List screen.     -   Step-3: Choose call type. Enter date for either follow-up date         or called date. Click Search. (See Figure E-9)     -   Step-4: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         E-10)     -   Step-5: On selecting an entity by clicking the check box, it         means that the status is going to be changed.     -   Step-6: On clicking save it will ask for confirming the change         in status. Once it is confirmed the task is completed and get         removed from the list.

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Call Type Choose a type of call from the option of inbound and outbound. The default value selected is inbound Follow-up Date The text for follow-up date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. provided the option of follow-up-date is selected Called Date The text for called date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon, provided called date is selected

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Save Saves the entered information not only for the present screen. Search Clears the screen and perform search operation based on the input value for group/agent. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes. Close Close the window.

4 Manual Mail Merge

The Mail Merge module addresses the functionality of the system where it needs to generate business correspondences using predefined templates. The templates are basically RTF files with placeholders for dynamic data in them. The output is usually a RTF file, but at times this could be a PostScript or a PDF document

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Others->Manual Mail Merge

Pre-Requisites

All the pre-defined templates for generating business correspondence must be available for generating the same.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Mail Merge—to generate business correspondence as per the         available templates.

Manual Mail Merge

The screen is to generate business correspondence.

The sequential steps involved in manual mail merge are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu others select         Manual Mail Merge. (See Figure E-11)     -   Step-2: Navigates to a screen wherein a category has to be         selected. Based on the selected category, the templates         pertaining to that category will be displayed for generating         business correspondence. (See Figure E-12)     -   Step-3: Choose a template id for generating the business         correspondence. (See Figure E-13)     -   Step-4: This navigates to a screen, which has mainly three         headings stating about the details of Template information, the         category selected and the output option. The header that         contains the fields based on the selected category, are all         dynamically generated to have search operation. (See Figure         E-14)     -   Step-5: The content of the fields based on the category         selected, has to be selected by search icon. Enter any value or         first letter in any one of the fields to perform search         operation. Click search icon. (See Figure E-15)     -   Step-6: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         E-16)     -   Step-7: Click on any hyperlink for selection.     -   Step-8: Choose the output option. If the option is View the user         can a view of the business letter generated from the chosen         template or otherwise if the option is Print to Mailroom will         queue the business correspondence generated to printer. A pop up         screen will appear stating the status of mail merge. (See Figure         E-17)     -   Step-9: On clicking Ok button, screen navigates to word document         as follows: (See Figure E-18)

5 Letter Regeneration

Letter Regeneration is used to generate letters for a specific period with specific type of letter say Add On, Termination etc., with specific addressee say Employee, Group, Dependent etc.,

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Others->Letter Regeneration

Pre-Requisites

Relevant information must be available in the system as a pre-requisite

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Letter Regeneration—to generate letters with specific request

Letter Regeneration

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Others and then         Letter Regeneration. (See Figure E-19)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to Letter Regeneration screen.     -   Step-3: Enter the values in the respective field as per the         format explained in fields' explanation table.     -   Step-4: Based on the selected value in Address Type, will allow         to have search operation for address, by clicking the search         icon. (See Figure E-20)     -   Step-5: By clicking the search icon for addressee, search screen         displays, for the selected value in address type.     -   Step-6: Select an employee id. The selected employee name gets         reflected in Letter Regeneration screen. (See Figure E-21)     -   Step-7: According to the inputs, the templates will be displayed         by clicking Search button to generate a letter. If no option is         selected and simply clicking search button will display all the         templates.     -   Step-8: Click on any template for selection to generate a         letter.

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Letter The text for From date to generate a letter. Choose a generated date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar between icon provided And The text for To date to generate a letter. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon provided Type of letter Choose a type of letter from the drop down list available namely, Add On, Termination, Missing Info, Others Addressee type Choose a type of addressee from the drop down list available namely, Group, Employee, Dependent, Agent. This field is mandatory. Addressee Based on the selected value of addressee type, will restrict to choose a addressee by clicking the search icon. Addressee Text for addressee name. This is a read only field. name Data is populated by selecting an addressee by clicking search icon.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Clears the screen and perform search operation based on the input value. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

6 Reports

Reports Module encompasses the process of displaying the business information to the viewers. The objective of the Reports is to provide information captured in the system to the user in a presentable manner. The reports can be single, two-dimensional and multi dimensional providing the information to the decision-maker.

Reports are categorized based on the modules and the purpose of the reports.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Others->Reports

Pre-Requisites

All the master and transactional data must be available in the system to display the real time reporting feature.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Generate—to generate reports

Report

The screen is to generate report

The sequential steps involved in generating a report are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Others select         Report. (See Figure E-22)     -   Step-2: The screen navigates to report heading, which are         identified as major headings to cover all the information. (See         Figure E-23)     -   Step-3: Choose any heading. Click (+) to expand and (−) to         collapse. Screen displays the sub-headings under each major         heading. (See Figure E-24)     -   Step-4: Choose any sub-heading to have report.     -   Step-5: Navigates to a screen for entering the query criteria.         These fields are built dynamically based on the report sought.         (See Figure E-25)     -   Step-6: Enter the search criteria as available on the screen and         Click Generate Report. Click on the back button to navigated         back to the Report Screen.     -   Step-7: Opens up a new browser window and displays the report in         the crystal viewer. (See Figure E-26)

PX2 User Manual Sales & Marketing Version 1.0 August 12 2002 Copyright ©2002 Benefit Partners, Inc.

Contents Introduction 1-1 The Applications 1-1 Supply Request 2-1 Access 2-1 Access 2-1 Internal Supply Request 2-3 External Supply Request 2-6 Work Groups 3-1 Access 3-1 Pre-requisites 3-1 Application Functions 3-1 Category 3-2 Main Workgroup 3-4 Child Workgroup 3-7 Mail Members  3-10 Swap Members  3-13 Associates 4-1 Access 4-1 Pre-requisites 4-1 Application Functions 4-1 Associate 4-1 Campaign 5-1 Access 5-1 Pre-requisites 5-1 Application Functions 5-1 Source Type 5-2 Source Sub Type 5-5 Campaign 5-7 Campaign Search  5-12 Sales Master 6-1 Access 6-1 Pre-requisites 6-1 Application Functions 6-2 Create Agency 6-2 Search Agency 6-9 Create Agent  6-15 Search Agent  6-23 Create Lead  6-29 Search Lead  6-35 Campaign to Lead  6-40 Lead Tracking  6-44 Lead Tracking - To Do List  6-49 Create Agent Profile  6-50 Search Agent Profile  6-54 Quotes 7-1 Access 7-1 Pre-requisites 7-1 Application Functions 7-1 Group/Lead Info 7-2

1 Introduction

Sales and Marketing is the master and transaction module that encompasses the process of creating and maintaining master and transaction information that is required for the PX2 System like Agent, Agency, Lead, Quotes, Work Group, Associates, Supplier request, Lead and Agent Tracking and Campaign.

The Applications

The above-mentioned processes are accomplished in several applications embedded into the Sales and Marketing Module. These applications steer the tasks of creating, and maintaining master and transaction information for the PX2 entities, thereby helping achieve the goals of the Sales and Marketing.

Supply Request—A Supply Request is the process of ordering the handbooks, rate books, forms and application, complementary, super directories that are sent to the employer groups and its members through the mailroom. Supplier Request basically consists of Internal Supplier request to cater to the internal needs of the BPI and External Supplier request to cater to the external needs of the BPI.

Work Groups—Workgroups is the process of categorization of a group of agents, internal working personnel of BPI, external working personnel associated with BPI into a subset of work groups.

Associates—The Associated is the process of identifying and managing the personnel who are employed by BPI and work with BPI.

Campaign—A campaign is the process of identifying a segment of potential employer groups targeted through the media like the radio, newspaper, mailers etc. Benefit Partners organizes for the marketing campaigns through third parties or by itself periodically.

Sales Master—Sales Master is the process of maintaining the entire master records relevant to the Sales. This includes operations like creation and maintenance of Agent, Agency, Lead Masters, Lead Tracking, and Agent Profiles.

Quotes—Quotes are the processes of providing Quotes for potential business entities as well as existing business entities. Quotes can be requested for small Employer Groups or Alternate Groups (Individual Association Member, Association Group, COBRA etc.) as well as for employees of those groups.

2 Supply Request

Supplier request is to setup basic information for ordering various Handbooks, stationeries and other materials needs by BPI for their day to day business in the PX2 system Supplier Request are of two types, Internal and External

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Sales & Marketing->Supply Request->Internal Supply Request     -   Sales & Marketing->Supply Request->External Supply Request     -   Sales & Marketing->Supply Request->Confirm Internal     -   Sales & Marketing->Supply Request->Confirm External

Pre-Requisites

Both internal and external supplier request contains header and the items (As Stock # in the header and Items below). The data for the Stock # and the Items are available in the tables TBL_BPICAS_CODE_CTRL and TBL_BPICAS_UTIL.

Table TBL_BPICAS_CODE_CTRL has CODE_ID, CODE_VALUE and CODE_DESC

The table needs to be populated to have the Stock # on the screen

Example Data CODE_ID CODE_VALUE CODE_DESC EXTERNAL PSP Pre-Selected package EXTERNAL HB Hand Book INTERNAL SOS Standard Office Supply

Table TBL_BPICAS_UTIL has REQUEST_TYPE, SUB_CLASS, UTIL_NAME and UTIL_DESC

The table needs to be populated to have the Items on the screen

Example Data REQUEST_TYPE SUB_CLASS UTIL_NAME UTIL_DESC EXTERNAL HB DNH Dental Hand Book INTERNAL SOS BR Binder Clips Small

Application Functionality

The application consists of two screens.

-   -   Internal Supply Request—to have internal supply request     -   External Supply Request—to have external supply request

Internal Supply Request

-   -   Step-1: After successful login, click Supply Request then select         Internal Supply Request. (See Figure F-1)     -   Step-2: Navigates to Internal Supply Request screen. Entry in         one quantity field is mandatory. Also confirmation can be         accessed by clicking confirmation tab. (See Figure F-2)     -   Step-3: On clicking Save navigates Confirmation screen. (See         Figure F-3)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Qty Enter the value for quantity. Accepts only numeric values. At least one value for quantity is mandatory. Special Enter the text for special instructions. Accepts Instructions alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 255 characters. The field is optional.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Save button Click on save button to the save the content keyed in and navigates to confirmation screen displaying the Confirmation ID. Cancel button Click on clear button clears the content and appears again for fresh entries

External Supply Request

-   -   Step-1: After successful login, click Supply Request then select         External Supply Request. (See Figure F-4)     -   Step-2: Navigates to External Supply Request screen. Entry in         one quantity field is mandatory. Also confirmation can be         accessed by clicking confirmation tab. (See Figure F-5)     -   Step-3: On clicking Save navigates to Confirmation screen. (See         Figure F-6)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Qty Enter the value for quantity. Accepts only numeric values. At least one value for quantity is mandatory. Customer Request Enter a date or click calendar icon to select a date. The Date field is mandatory. Confirm Choose the option by ticking the checkbox to have a fulfillment confirmation of request made by email. by Email Agent/Employer Enter the value for agent/employer group id. The field Group Id is mandatory. Or Choose the Agent or Group by clicking the Search Icon Company Name Enter the text for company name. The field is mandatory Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Suite The text for company suite Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. The field is mandatory State Choose a state from the drop down list. The field is mandatory Referenced Entity Choose the option either Group or Agent Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of exactly 5 digits. Ship via Choose the option of delivery from the available modes like Mailroom, Will Call, Special Enter the text for special instructions. Accepts Instructions alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 255 characters.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Save button Click on save button to the save the content keyed in and navigates to confirmation screen displaying the Confirmation ID. Cancel button Click on clear button clears the content and appears again for fresh entries

3 Work Groups

Work Group is to setup basic information like Category, Work Group and Child Work Group. Workgroups is the concept of categorization of a group of agents, internal working personnel of BPI, external-working personnel associated with BPI into a subset of work groups. Also this provides a feature of swapping the members within the work group.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Sales & Marketing->Work Groups->Category     -   Sales & Marketing->Work Groups->Main Workgroup     -   Sales & Marketing->Work Groups->Child Workgroup     -   Sales & Marketing->Work Groups->Mail Members     -   Sales & Marketing->Work Groups->Swap Members

Pre-Requisites

There are no pre-requisites for using this application.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Category—To Create, Modify and view Category     -   Main Workgroup—To Create, Modify and view Main Workgroup     -   Child Workgroup—To Create, Modify and view Child Workgroup     -   Mail Members—To Create, Modify and view Mail Members     -   Swap Members—To Swap members between source and destination work         groups

Category

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Work Groups. Then select Category. (See Figure F-7)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to category screen. Enter the category         name with its description as per the format briefed in field's         explanation section. (See Figure F-8)     -   Step-3: Click Add button to have a temporary storage.     -   Step-4: Select a category name by clicking Edit button to modify         a category name. (See Figure F-9)     -   Step-5: Change any modifications and click Update     -   Step-6: Click Save button to save the contents

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Name The text for category name. Accepts alphabets and numeric and “/” values not exceeding 30 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory. Description The text for category description. Accepts alphabets and numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 255 characters.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Elemet Description Add Add the contents of category. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent record only after saving Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent record only after saving Update Update the contents of category. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent record only after saving Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Print The Print will pops up a screen displaying the content of the table created and enables the user to have print out of the same. Save Saves the entered category in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are shown. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

Main Workgroup

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Work Groups. Then select Main Workgroup. (See Figure         F-10)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to main workgroup screen. Choose a         category name. Enter the main workgroup name with its         description and also select the option whether it is a child         work group or main work group, as per the format briefed in         field's explanation section. (See Figure F-11)     -   Step-3: Click Add button to have a temporary storage.     -   Step-4: Select a main workgroup name by clicking Edit button to         modify a main workgroup name. (See Figure F-12)     -   Step-5: Change any modifications and click Update     -   Step-6: Click Save button to save the contents

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Category Choose a category from the drop down list available Name The text for main workgroup name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values not exceeding 30 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory. Description The text for main workgroup description. Accepts alphabets and numeric and all special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 255 characters. Field is optional Is this a child Choose this option, if the main work group is also a workgroup child work group

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of main workgroup. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent record only after saving Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent record only after saving Update Update the contents of main workgroup. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent record only after saving Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Print The Print will pops up a screen displaying the content of the table created and enables the user to have print out of the same. Save Saves the entered main workgroup in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are shown. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

Child Workgroup

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Work Groups. Then select Child Workgroup. (See Figure         F-13)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to child workgroup screen. Choose a         main workgroup. Enter the child workgroup name with its         description, as per the format briefed in field's explanation         section. (See Figure F-14)     -   Step-3: Click Add button to have a temporary storage.     -   Step-4: Select a child workgroup name by clicking Edit button to         modify a child workgroup name. (See Figure F-15)     -   Step-5: Change any modifications and click Update     -   Step-6: Click Save button to save the contents

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Main workgroup Choose a main workgroup from the drop down list available Name The text for child workgroup name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values not exceeding 30 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory. Description The text for child workgroup description. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special character except double quotes not exceeding 255 characters. Field is optional

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of child workgroup. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent record only after saving Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent record only after saving Update Update the contents of child workgroup. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent record only after saving Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Print The Print will pops up a screen displaying the content of the table created and enables the user to have print out of the same. Save Saves the entered Child Workgroup in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are shown. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

Mail Members

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Work Groups. Then select Mail Members. (See Figure         F-16)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to mail member's screen. Choose a child         workgroup Enter the mail id, as per the format briefed in         field's explanation section. (See Figure F-17)     -   Step-3: Click Add button to have a temporary storage.     -   Step-4: Selecting a mail member and clicking Edit button to         modify a mail member name. (See Figure F-18)     -   Step-5: Change any modifications and click Update     -   Step-6: Click Save button to save the contents

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Child workgroup Choose a child workgroup from the drop down list available Mail Id The text for mail id. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters Entry to this field are mandatory.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of mail member. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent record only after saving Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent record only after saving Update Update the contents of mail member. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent record only after saving Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Print The Print will pops up a screen displaying the content of the table created and enables the user to have print out of the same. Save Saves the entered Mail Members in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are shown. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

Swap Members

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Work Groups. Then select Swap Members. (See Figure         F-19)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to swap members screen. Choose a         category, source child group and destination child group to swap         members. Also select from the options, whether swap is to be         full, partial or duplicate. (See Figure F-20)     -   Step-3: Click Search to list the members for swapping from the         Source work group to the destination work group.     -   Step-4: Select the members for swapping and click Swap to swap         the members from Source Work group to the destination Work         Group.     -   Step-5: Change any modifications and click Update     -   Step-6: Click Save button to save the contents

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Choose Category Choose the Category from the list. List all the Child Work Group for the specific Category selected. Choose Source Choose the Source Child Work group from the list Child Work group Choose Destination Choose the Destination Child Work group from Child Work group the list Do you want to do a Choose the Option Full, Partial or Duplicate Default full swap or a value of selection is Full partial swap?

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Click the search button to list the Member belonging to the Source Work Group for swapping. Based on the Option, Full, Partial or Duplicate the Check box is enabled or disabled. Say for Full the Check box is disabled and the others the check box is enabled. Swap Click Swap to swap the member from Source to Destination Child Work Group Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked.

4 Associates

An associate is to setup basic information of associates working with BPI in the PX2 System. Associates can be of two types, Internal and External.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Sales & Marketing->Associates

Pre-Requisites

Work of Category Internal or External must be available in the system for Assigning associated work group.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Associate—To Create, Modify and Delete Associates

Associate

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Associates. (See Figure F-21)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates general information. Choose associate         type as either internal or external. (See Figure F-22)     -   Step-3: Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section.     -   Step-4: Choose an available workgroup and assign it by         clicking>>button. Then enter the value of license number if         applicable.     -   Step-5: Click Add button to have a temporary storage     -   Step-6: Select an associate and click Edit button to modify an         associate name. (See Figure F-23)     -   Step-7: Change any modifications and click Update     -   Step-8: Click Save button to save the contents

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Associate Type Choose a type from either Internal or External. Default value selected is External Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for associate first name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. This field is mandatory Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for associate last name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Suffix Choose the suffix from the drop down list of suffixes available. Title The text for title. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except single quotes not exceeding 255 characters. Address The text for associate address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Suite The text for associate suite Accepts alphanumeric and special characters except double quotes not exceeding 35 characters City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America. This field is mandatory Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of exactly 5 digits. This field is mandatory Phone The text for telephone number of the associate. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. Extension The text for extension of telephone number Accepts numeric values not exceeding 4 digits. The format is 9999. Fax The text for fax number of the associate. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. E-mail The text for email of the associate person. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters. Department Choose Department from the List. Workgroups Displays available workgroup based on the selection of associate type Assigned Choose a work group from the available and assigned workgroups it to assigned work group by clicking “>>” button. This field is mandatory License The text for license number. Accepts numeric values number not exceeding 10 digits

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of associates. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent record only after saving Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent record only after saving Update Update the contents of associate. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent record only after saving Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Print The Print will pops up a screen displaying the content of the table created and enables the user to have print out of the same. Save Saves the entered associate in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are shown. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

5 Campaign

A marketing campaign is an initiative where an identifiable segment of potential employer groups are targeted and organizes for the marketing campaigns through third parties or by BPI PacAdvantage periodically.

The details of a campaign initiative are captured in the system through the campaign master the campaign master provides information on the campaign, duration and the personnel associated with the campaign. The media through which a campaign is done is captured in the system using the source type and source subtype.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Sales & Marketing->Campaign->Source Type     -   Sales & Marketing->Campaign->Source Sub Type     -   Sales & Marketing->Campaign->Campaign     -   Sales & Marketing->Campaign->Campaign Search

Pre-Requisites

There are no pre-requisites for using this application.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Source Type     -   Source Sub Type     -   Campaign     -   Campaign Search

Source Type

The source type defines the media through which a campaign can be conducted. The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new source type.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of a source type are listed below

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales &         Marketing. Select Campaign and then Source Type. (See Figure         F-24)     -   Step-2: Enter the value of source type and select the option of         input source as per the format briefed in field's explanation         section. (See Figure F-25)     -   Step-3: Click Add button to have a temporary storage.     -   Step-4: Selecting a source type and clicking Edit button to         modify/a source type.     -   Step-5: Change any modifications and click Update. (See Figure         F-26)     -   Step-6: Click Save button to save the contents.

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Source Type The text for source type name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values not exceeding 40 characters. Entry to this field is mandatory. Source Type Name does not accept duplicate values Input Source Choose the option of Yes or No. with a default value selected as Yes Table Table displays the Source type data added

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of source type. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent record only after saving Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent record only after saving Update Update the contents of source type. It is only a temporary update. Becomes permanent record only after saving Check Box Check box will be disabled which has any reference to other fields. Otherwise the checkbox will be enabled to have the utility of check all/clear all. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the enabled records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the enabled records in the table that are checked. Print The Print will pops up a screen displaying the content of the table created and enables the user to have print out of the same. Save Saves the entered source type in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are shown. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

Source Sub Type

Source sub type provides the information on the subcategory that may come under the source type. The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new source sub type.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of a source sub type are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales &         Marketing. Select Campaign and then Source Sub Type. (See Figure         F-27)     -   Step-2: Select a source sub type. Enter the value of source sub         type with its description as per the format briefed in field's         explanation section. (See Figure F-28)     -   Step-3: Click Add button to have a temporary storage.     -   Step-4: Selecting a source sub type and clicking Edit button to         modify a source sub type.     -   Step-5: Change any modifications and click Update     -   Step-6: Click Save button to save the contents. (See Figure         F-29)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Source Type Choose a source type from the available drop down list. This field is mandatory. Source sub The text for source sub type name. Accepts alphabets Type and numeric values of maximum length 40. Entry to this field is mandatory. Source Sub Type Name does not accept duplicate values Description The text for description of source sub type. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quote with values not exceeding 255 characters. Field is optional.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Add Add the contents of source sub type. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent record only after saving Edit Edit button will allow for editing a specific record in the table. Delete Delete button will delete the records in the table checked for deletion. It is only a temporary deletion. Becomes permanent record only after saving Update Update the contents of source sub type. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent record only after saving Check Box Check box will be disabled which has any reference to other fields. Otherwise the checkbox will be enabled to have the utility of check all/clear all. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the enabled records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the enabled records in the table that are checked. Print The Print will pops up a screen displaying the content of the table created and enables the user to have print out of the same. Save Saves the entered source sub type in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are shown. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

Campaign

The campaign master provides information on the campaign, duration and the personnel associated with the campaign. The media through which a campaign is done is captured in the system using the source type and source subtype.

The source type defines the media through which a campaign can be conducted and the source sub type provides the information on the subcategory that may come under the source type. The screen provides functionality to save, edit or add new source type The sequential steps involved in the creation of a Campaign are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales &         Marketing. Select Campaign and then Campaign. (See Figure F-30)     -   Step-2: Enter the text for campaign name and its description.         (See Figure F-31)     -   Step-3: Choose source type and source sub type from drop down         list. Based on the selection of Source Type the page gets         refreshed to list the corresponding Source Sub Type.     -   Step-4: Choose an associated workgroup. Make it assigned         workgroup by clicking>>button.     -   Step-5: Choose from and to dates of duration by clicking         calendar icon     -   Step-6: Click Save button. Screen gets refreshed with auto         generated Campaign Id. The save button is now in update mode.         (See Figure F-32)     -   Step-7: Click Import button to import files. It pop up a new         window. (See Figure F-33)     -   Step-8: Choose the file to be imported and click import button.     -   Step-9: Confirms the status of imported files. Click Back to         Import Screen to navigates back for further importing of files.         (See Figure F-34)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Campaign Master Campaign Name The text for campaign name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values not exceeding 40 characters. Field is mandatory. Campaign ID Text to Display Campaign ID. This is a read only field. Description The text for description of campaign name. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes not exceeding 50 characters. Field is optional. Source Type Choose a source type from drop down list. Field is mandatory. Source Sub Type Choose a source sub type from the drop down list. Source sub type depends on the selection of source type. Field is mandatory. Associated Work groups are listed. Workgroup Assigned Assign a work group. Field is mandatory Workgroup Duration From Choose a valid date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format in MM/DD/YYYY. Field is mandatory. Duration To Choose a valid date by clicking calendar icon. To date cannot be greater than from date. Date accepts the format in MM/DD/YYYY. Field is mandatory Import Campaign Data Campaign ID Text to Display Campaign ID. This is a read only field. File Path Enter the file path or select the path by clicking browse button. The field is mandatory File Format Choose a format from drop down list for File Format, which should match with selection of file. The field is mandatory Comments Text to enter comments. Accepts alphabets, numeric Element Description and special characters except double quotes not exceeding 250 characters. This field is optional

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Campaign Master New Creates a new campaign. Save Saves the entered campaign information. The page gets refreshed with auto generated campaign id. The save button is now shown as Update Button and Import button is enabled Import Click import to display a pop up screen to import the campaign data. Update Updates the contents modified Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes. Import Campaign Data New Click new button to Import new Campaign data View Previous Navigates to a screen displaying imported files for the Import particular campaign id. Back to Navigates back to import screen for further import of Campaign Import files. Import Click import to import the campaign data in the database

Campaign Search

Campaign search is to search campaign based on either campaign id or campaign name. Campaign search is to have view, delete or modify the campaigns already created

The sequential steps involved in the campaign search are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales &         Marketing. Select Campaign and then Campaign Search. (See Figure         F-35)     -   Step-2: Search operation can be performed by clicking the search         button either by entering the values in the fields or even with         empty fields. Campaign id or a first letter of campaign name to         have search operation. (See Figure F-36)     -   Step-3: Displays the results of search. (See Figure F-37)     -   Step-4: Select a campaign and choose the option of modify or         view. If the option is modify the following screen appears for         modification. (See Figure F-38)     -   Step-5: Change the contents and click Update.     -   Step-6: If the option is view, the following screen appears only         to have a view. Campaigns that are not referred elsewhere can         also be deleted. (See Figure F-39)     -   Step-7: Click New Campaign button to go back to campaign create         screen.

Fields Explanation

Refer field explanations provided for Create Campaign

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Clears the screen and perform search operation based on the input value for group/agent. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

6 Sales Master

Sales Master is to setup basic information for Agent, Agency and Lead in the PX2 System. Sales Master also has functionality of Lead tracking, maintenance of Agent profile and Campaign to Lead conversion.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Sales & Marketing->Sales Master->Create Agency     -   Sales & Marketing->Sales Master->Search Agency     -   Sales & Marketing->Sales Master->Create Agent     -   Sales & Marketing->Sales Master->Search Agent     -   Sales & Marketing->Sales Master->Create Lead     -   Sales & Marketing->Sales Master->Search Lead     -   Sales & Marketing->Sales Master->Campaign to Lead     -   Sales & Marketing->Sales Master->Lead Tracking     -   Sales & Marketing->Sales Master->Lead Tracking—To do list     -   Sales & Marketing->Sales Master->Create Agent Profile     -   Sales & Marketing->Sales Master->Search Agent Profile

Pre-Requisites

Pre-requisites for using this application are as follows:

Work Group must be defined and available in the system

Campaign data must be available to convert Campaign to lead

Associates data must be available for assigning BSS representatives.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Create Agency—to create/edit details of Agency     -   Search Agency—to search the details of Agency for view         modification or deletion     -   Create Agent—to create/edit details of Agent     -   Search Agent—to search the details of Agent for view         modification or deletion     -   Create Lead—to create/edit details of lead     -   Search Lead—to search the details of lead for view modification         or deletion     -   Campaign to Lead—to convert campaign data to lead     -   Lead Tracking—to track the information on lead     -   Lead Tracking to do List—to track and follow up on lead     -   Create Agent Profile—to create/edit details of Agent Profile     -   Search Agent Profile—to search the details of Agent Profile for         view modification or deletion

Create Agency

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Sales Master. Then select Create Agency. (See Figure         F-40)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to Agency Master screen. (See Figure         F-41)     -   Step-3: Enter the values for the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. Click Next.     -   Step-4: Navigates to second part of the agency master's screen         for filling in further information. (See Figure F-42)     -   Step-5: Enter the values for the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. For agency work         group, it should be selected by clicking search icon.     -   Step-6: This pops up a screen for workgroup search. (See Figure         F-43)     -   Step-7: Choose category, Main workgroup and child workgroup from         the respective drop down list and Click Add.     -   Step-8: This displays a screen with the selected workgroup. (See         Figure F-44)     -   Step-9: After filling all the fields in agency master, click         save to create agency master. Following is the sample         confirmation screen for a successful creation of agency master.         (See Figure F-45)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Company Name The text for company name. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters. Field is mandatory DBA The text for business nature. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters. Field is optional Street Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Suite The text for company suite. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of exactly 5 digits. Field is mandatory Phone The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. Fax The text for fax number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. Mode of Choose a mode of communication from the drop down Communication list available. Based on the selected value, related fields are mandatory. Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Field is mandatory Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Field is mandatory Street Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Suite The text for company suite Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of exactly 5 digits. Field is mandatory Phone The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. Extension The text for extension of telephone number Accepts numeric values not exceeding 4 digits. The format is 9999. Fax The text for fax number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. E-mail The text for email of the contact person. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters. Broker Type Choose an option for broker type from either Statewide, Regional or unknown Exclude from Click this option to have exclusion of broadcast fax Broadcast Fax Exclude from Click this option to have exclusion of Employee/ employee/member term letter Member Term Letter Exclude from Click this option to have exclusion of overdue overdue premium premium notice notice Exclude from Click this option to have exclusion of Employee/ employee/member add on letter Member Add on Letter Agency Choose a agency work group by clicking search icon Workgroup Internal Choose an internal workgroup from the drop down list Workgroup available. The field is mandatory. BSS Rep Choose a value for BSS Rep from the drop down list available Tax ID/SSN The text for Tax ID/SSN. Accepts numeric values of exactly 9 digits License Number The text for License number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 15 digits License Type Choose a type for license from the drop down list available License The text for License expiration date. Choose a date in Expiration the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. E&O Number The text for E&O number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 15 digits E&O Expiration The text for E&O Expiration date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. Preferred Mode Choose an option for mode of payment either Check or of payment ACH Bank Name The text for bank name. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 50 characters. Account Number The text for accounts number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits Element Description Account Type Choose a type of account from the drop down list available Routing Number The text for routing number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. Name of the The text for name of the account holder. Accepts Account alphabets and numeric values not exceeding 50 characters. Payee Name The text for payee name. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 60 characters. Requires special Click this option for any special handling is required handling

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Next Click Next to move to the next screen for entering the Agency information. Save Saves the entered information entered for the Agency in the screen one and two. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes. Close Closes the window and go back to agency master screen Previous Navigates to the previous screen. If any data is entered on this screen it validate the data prior to moving to the previous screen.

Search Agency

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Sales Master. Then select Search Agency. (See Figure         F-46)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to Search Agency Master screen. (See         Figure F-47)     -   Step-3: Either enter the value in any one of the field or simply         click Search.     -   Step-4: This pops up a screen with the search result. (See         Figure F-48)     -   Step-5: Choose an Agency Id for selection. The selected agency         id can be modified or view and delete. If modify button is         clicked details with the contents will be displayed for any         modification or otherwise clicking view/delete button will         enabled to view or deleted.     -   Step-6: If the modify button is clicked following will be         screen. Enter the text at the respective fields for         modification, if any. The flow and procedure for modifying an         agency master is similar to create agency master. (See Figure         F-49)     -   Step-7: If the view/delete button is clicked, following is the         screen, which allows to view and delete. (See Figure F-50)     -   Step-8: After viewing the contents, if the new agency is clicked         will enable to add new agency master or if the delete button is         clicked will delete the agency master that is currently in view.         (See Figure F-51)     -   Step-9: On clicking delete, navigates to confirming the deletion         of agency record. From here clicking new agency button can         create also new agency. (See Figure F-52)

Fields Explanation

Refer Field explanation provided for Create New Agency

Button Functionality

Refer Button Functionality provided for Create New Agency.

Create Agent

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Sales Master. Then select Create Agent. (See Figure         F-53)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to Agent Master screen. (See Figure         F-54)     -   Step-3: Enter the values for the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. Click Next.     -   Step-4: Navigates to second part of the agent master screen for         entering further information. (See Figure F-55)     -   Step-5: Enter the values for the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. For agent work         group, it should be selected by clicking search icon.     -   Step-6: The selection procedure for Work group search is similar         to that of workgroup search explained in Create Agency. For         Associated agencies the procedure is same but the sample screen         is as follows. (See Figure F-56)     -   Step-7: Enter the first letter of agency id or agency name to         perform search operation     -   Step-8: This displays a screen with the selected workgroup. (See         Figure F-57)     -   Step-9: After filling all the fields in agent master, click save         to create agent master. Following is the sample confirmation         screen for a successful creation of agent master. (See Figure         F-58)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description First Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Field is mandatory Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Field is mandatory Company Name The text for company name. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters. Field is mandatory DBA The text for business nature. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters. Field is optional Street Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Suite The text for company suite Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of exactly 5 digits. Field is mandatory Phone The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. Fax The text for fax number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. Mode of Choose a mode of communication from the drop down Communication list available. Based on the selected value, related fields are mandatory. E-mail The text for email of the contact person. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters. Gender Choose a gender from the drop down list available. Date of Birth The text for date of birth. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. Birth date cannot be later than the current date. Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Field is mandatory Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Field is mandatory Street Address The text for address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Suite The text for suite Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of exactly 5 digits. Field is mandatory Phone The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. Extension The text for extension number of the employee. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 4 digits Fax The text for fax number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. E-mail The text for email of the contact person. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters. Broker Type Choose an option for broker type from either Statewide, Regional or unknown Exclude from Click this option to have exclusion of broadcast fax Broadcast Fax Exclude from Click this option to have exclusion of Employee/ Member Term Letter employee/member term letter Exclude from Click this option to have exclusion of overdue overdue premium premium notice notice Exclude from Click this option to have exclusion of Employee/ employee/member add on letter Member Add on Letter Agent Workgroup Choose a agent work group by clicking search icon Internal Choose an internal workgroup from the drop down list Workgroup available. The field is mandatory. BSS Rep Choose a value for BSS Rep from the drop down list available Associated Choose a Associated Agency by clicking search icon Agency Tax ID/SSN The text for Tax ID/SSN. Accepts numeric values of exactly 9 digits License Number The text for License number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 15 digits License Type Choose a type for license from the drop down list available License The text for License expiration date. Choose a date in Expiration the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. E&O Number The text for E&O number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 15 digits E&O Expiration The text for E&O Expiration date. Choose a date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. Preferred Mode Choose an option for mode of payment either Check or of payment ACH Bank Name The text for bank name. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters except double quotes with values not exceeding 50 characters. Account Number The text for accounts number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 9 digits Account Type Choose a type of account from the drop down list available Routing Number The text for routing number. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. Name of the The text for name of the account holder. Accepts Account alphabets and numeric values not exceeding 50 characters. Payee Name The text for payee name. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 60 characters. Requires special Click this option for any special handling is required handling

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Next Click Next to move to the next screen for entering the Agency information. Save Saves the entered information entered for the Agency in the screen one and two. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes. Close Closes the window and go back to agency master screen Previous Navigates to the previous screen. If any data is entered on this screen it validate the data prior to moving to the previous screen.

Search Agent

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Sales Master. Then select Search Agent. (See Figure         F-59)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to Search Agent Master screen. (See         Figure F-60)     -   Step-3: Either enter the value in any one of the field or simply         click Search.     -   Step-4: This pops up a screen with the search result. (See         Figure F-61)     -   Step-5: Choose an Agent Id for selection. The selected agent id         can be modified or view and delete. If modify button is clicked         details with the contents will be displayed for any modification         or otherwise clicking view/delete button will enabled to view or         deleted.     -   Step-6: If the modify button is clicked following will be         screen. (See Figure F-62)     -   Step-7: Enter the text at the respective fields for         modification, if any. The flow and procedure for modifying an         agency master is similar to create agency master.     -   Step-8: If the view/delete button is clicked, following is the         screen that can have view or delete. (See Figure F-63)     -   Step-9: After viewing the contents, if the new agency is clicked         will enable to add new agency master or if the delete button is         clicked it will delete the agent master which is currently in         view.     -   Step-10: On clicking delete, navigates to confirming the         deletion of agency record. From here clicking new agency button         can create new agency. (See Figure F-64)

Fields Explanation

Refer field explanation provided for Create Agent.

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality provided in Create Agent

Create Lead

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Sales Master. Then select Create Lead. (See Figure         F-65)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to Lead Master screen. (See Figure         F-66)     -   Step-3: Enter the values for the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. Click Next.     -   Step-4: Navigates to second part of the lead master screen for         entering further information. (See Figure F-67)     -   Step-5: Enter the values for the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in field's explanation section. Based on the         selection of name as either agent/agency the corresponding value         for agency/agent is selected by clicking search icon.     -   Step-6: After filling all the fields in lead master, click save         to create lead master. Following is the sample confirmation         screen for a successful creation of lead master. (See Figure         F-68)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Group Type Choose the Group Type from the list. Association Id Choose the association id from the list. If the Group type is Guaranteed, Endorsed, PEO or Chamber corresponding association name will be listed. Member Type Choose the member type as Individual Member or Association Group. This option will be available if the Association selected is Guaranteed. Source Sub Type Choose sub source type from the list. Company Name The text for company name. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters. Field is mandatory DBA The text for business nature. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters. Field is optional Street Address The text for company address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Suite The text for company suite Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of exactly 5 digits. Field is mandatory Phone The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. Fax The text for fax number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. Salutation Choose the salutation from the drop down list of salutations available. First Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 25 characters. Field is mandatory Middle Initial The text for middle initial. Accepts alphabets not exceeding 1 character. Last Name The text for contact name. Accepts alphabets and special characters like hyphen and single quotes not exceeding 35 characters. Field is mandatory Street Address The text for address. Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters Suite The text for suite Accepts alphanumeric and special characters not exceeding 35 characters City The text for city. Accepts alphabets and space between two words not exceeding 30 characters. State Choose the name of the state from the drop down list of States available in United States of America Zip The text for zip. Accepts numeric value of exactly 5 digits. Field is mandatory Phone The text for telephone number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. Extension The text for extension of telephone number Accepts numeric values not exceeding 4 digits. The format is 9999. Fax The text for fax number of the contact person. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 10 digits. The format is (999) 999-9999. E-mail The text for email of the contact person. Accepts alphabets, numeric and special characters in the standard email format of length not exceeding 100 characters. None Choose the option as none if applicable. Agent Choose an agent by clicking search icon. The option is enabled only if the value is selected as agent for name. Agency Choose an agency by clicking search icon. The option is enabled only if the value is selected as agency for name. Internal Choose an internal workgroup from the drop down list Workgroup available. The field is mandatory. BSS Rep Choose a value for BSS Rep from the drop down list available No. Of employees The text for number of employees. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 4 digits. Plan Type Choose a plan type from the drop down list available Current Carrier Choose a current carrier from the drop down list available Deductible The text for deductible. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 12 digits. Co Pay The text for co pay. Accepts numeric values not exceeding 12 digits. Benefit level in The text for benefit level in network Network Benefit level The text for benefit level out of network out of Network Employer The text for employer contribution. Contribution in % Approximate The text for approximate monthly premium. monthly premium Renewal Date The text for renewal date. Accepts date in the format MM/DD/YYYY by clicking calendar icon. Best time to call The text for best to call. Comments The text for comments. Mode of Select a mode of communication from the drop down communications list available

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Save Saves the entered information not only for the present screen. Search Clears the screen and perform search operation based on the input value for group/agent. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes. Close Closes the window and go back to agency master screen Previous Navigates to the screen earlier to this.

Search Lead

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Sales Master. Then select Search Lead. (See Figure         F-69)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to Search Lead screen. (See Figure         F-70)     -   Step-3: Either enter value in any of the field or simply click         Search.     -   Step-4: This pops up a screen with the search result. (See         Figure F-71)     -   Step-5: Choose an Lead Id for selection. The selected lead id         can be modified or view and delete. If modify button is clicked         details with the contents will be displayed for any modification         or otherwise clicking view/delete button will enabled to view or         deleted.     -   Step-6: If the modify button is clicked following will be         screen. (See Figure F-72)     -   Step-7: Enter the text at the respective fields for         modification, if any. The flow and procedure for modifying a         lead master is similar to create lead master.     -   Step-8: If the view/delete button is clicked, following is the         screen that can have view or delete. (See Figure F-73)     -   Step-9: After viewing the contents, if the new lead is clicked,         will enable to add new lead master or if the delete button is         clicked it will delete the lead master, which is currently in         view.     -   Step-10: On clicking delete, navigates to confirming the         deletion of lead record. From here clicking new lead button can         create new lead. (See Figure F-74)

Fields Explanation

Refer field explanation provided for Create Lead

Button Functionality

Refer button functionality provided for Create Lead

Campaign to Lead

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Sales Master. Then select Campaign to Lead. (See         Figure F-75)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to Campaign to Lead screen. (See Figure         F-76)     -   Step-3: Enter the value of a campaign id or choose a campaign id         by clicking search icon     -   Step-4: Either enter value in any of the field or simply click         Search. (See Figure F-77)     -   Step-5: Click on any campaign id for selection (See Figure F-78)     -   Step-6: By clicking Search Campaign Data the following screen         gets displayed. (See Figure F-79)     -   Step-7: Choose Campaign id. Click Convert to lead This converts         campaign to lead and the selected campaign gets

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Campaign Id Text for Campaign ID. Enter the Campaign ID or click the search icon. Campaign Text for Campaign ID Name From Date The text for From Date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY. To Date The text for To Date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Search Click search to display the Campaign ID based on the search criteria. Close Closes the window and go back to campaign to lead screen Element Description Search Displays the content of selected campaign id Campaign Data Convert to Converts campaign to lead and the item gets removed Lead from the campaign id list table. Check All The “Check All” Link will check all the records in the table Clear All The “Clear All” Link will uncheck all the records in the table that are checked. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the field.

Lead Tracking

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Sales Master. Then select Lead Tracking. (See Figure         F-80)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to Lead Tracking screen. (See Figure         F-81)     -   Step-3: Enter the value of a lead id and Click Get Status to         display the current status of the lead or choose a lead id by         clicking search icon. (See Figure F-82)     -   Step-4: Either enter value in any one of the field or simply         click Search.     -   Step-5: This pops up a screen with search result. (See Figure         F-83)     -   Step-6: Click on any lead id for selection. The status of the         lead is displayed.     -   Step-7: Choose the respective values and click save. (See Figure         F-84)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Lead Id Text for Lead ID. Enter lead id of choose Lead ID by clicking the Search Icon. Company Read only field to display Company Name Name Phone Read only field to display Company Phone First Name Read only field to display First Name Last Name Read only field to display Last Name Call Status Choose from the Call Status provided. Contact Result Choose from the Contact Result provided. Only if the “Call Status” option is “Made Contact” this will be enabled. Qualified Lead Choose from the Qualified Lead Result provided. Only Result if the “Contact Result” option is “Qualified Lead” this will be enabled. Non-Qualified Choose from the Non-Qualified Lead Reasons Lead Reasons provided. Only if the “Contact Result” option is “Non- Qualified Lead” this will be enabled. Not Interested Choose from the Not Interested Reasons provided. Reasons Only if the “Qualified Lead Result” option is “Not Interested” this will be enabled. Post Quote Choose from the Post Quote Result provided. Only if Result the “Qualified Lead Result” option is “Produced Quotes” this will be enabled. Status Displays the status dynamically based on the combination of the options selected. Notes Text area to enter brief notes on the lead tracking Follow up Date The text for Follow up Date. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Date accepts the format MM/DD/YYYY.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Save Saves the entered information not only for the present screen. Get Status Show the status of the Lead being Tracked. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields or restore to the previous state as was before saving the changes.

Lead Tracking—To Do List

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Sales Master. Then select Lead Tracking—To Do List.     -   Step-2: Screen pops up a new window Lead Tracking To Do List         screen. The screen can have only view option. The contents of         this screen are the inputs of lead tracking screen. This screen         displays the follow up on the Lead tracking. (See Figure F-85)     -   Step-3: Click close.

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description User Id Read only field for User id. Lead Id Read only field for Lead Id. Lead Name Read only field Lead Name. Phone Read only field for Phone. Follow up Date Read only field for follow up date.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Close Closes the pop up window.

Create Agent Profile

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Create Agent Profile (See Figure F-86)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to Agent Profile (See Figure F-87)     -   Step-3: Click Save. Confirms the creation of agent profile. (See         Figure F-88)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Agent Details Workgroup Name Choose a work group name from the available list. List all child workgroup for the selected workgroup Agent ID Choose a agent id from the available list Agent Name Text for agent name. Field is read only Company Name Text for agent name. Field is read only Present Rating Text for present rating accepts numeric values Profile Information Do you currently Choose the option from Yes or No sell Health Insurance Do you currently Choose the option from Yes/No/Unknown sell PacAdvantage Types of Insurance Select the check box of insurance from the available sold by Agent check box list. Percentage of time Text for percentage of time focussed on health focused on Health insurance. Accepts numeric values. Insurance Average Group Text for average group size [within Pac Advantage]. Size(within Accepts numeric values. PacAdvantage) Average Group Text for average group size [outside Pac Size(outside Advantage]. Accepts numeric values.. PacAdvantage) Percentage of staff Text for percentage of staff concentrating on Health concentrating on Insurance. Accepts numeric values. Health Insurance Years in Business Text for years in business. Accepts numeric values. Subjective Ratings Broker knowledge Choose a rating from 0 to 4 of PacAdvantage Broker Potential Choose a rating from 0 to 4 Broker loyalty and Choose a rating from 0 to 4 confidence with PacAdvantage Subjective Rating Choose a rating from 0 to 4 Other Information Marketing Plans Choose a marketing plan from the available drop list. No. 1 Selling Plan Choose a plan for selling plan [plan-1] from the available drop down list No. 2 Selling Plan Choose a plan for selling plan [plan-2] from the available drop down list

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Save button Click on save button to the save the content keyed in and navigates to confirmation screen displaying the Confirmation ID. Cancel button Click on clear button clears the content and appears again for fresh entries

Search Agent Profile

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Sales & Marketing         and select Sales Master. Then select Search Agent Profile. (See         Figure F-89)     -   Step-2: Screen navigates to Search Agent Profile screen (See         Figure F-90)     -   Step-3: Either enter value in any of the field or simply click         Search.     -   Step-4: This pops up a screen with the search result. (See         Figure F-91)     -   Step-5: Choose an Agent Id for selection. The selected agent id         can be modified or viewed. If modify button is clicked details         with the contents will be displayed for any modification or         otherwise clicking view button will enabled to view the contents         and prevents any modification     -   Step-6: If the modify button is clicked following will be         screen. (See Figure F-92)     -   Step-7: Enter the text at the respective fields for         modification, if any. The flow and procedure for modifying an         agency profile is similar to create agency profile. On any         change, and clicking Update will pop up a screen. (See Figure         F-93)     -   Step-8: If the view button is clicked, following is the screen,         which can have only to view the contents, and no modification is         allowed. (See Figure F-94)     -   Step-9: After viewing the contents, if the new agency is clicked         will enable to add new agency profile.

Fields Explanation

Refer field explanation referred in Create Agent Profile

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Save Click on save button to the save the content keyed in and navigates to confirmation screen displaying the Confirmation ID. Cancel Click on clear button clears the content and appears again for fresh entries Modify Modify enables to edit and modifications is possible View View enables to edit the content and modification is not possible Update Update the contents of source sub type. It is only a temporary addition. Becomes permanent record only after saving New Agent Profile Creates a new agent profile

7 Quotes

Quotes are provided for potential business entities as well as existing business entities. Quotes can be requested for small Employer Groups or Alternate Groups (Individual Association Member, Association Group, COBRA etc.) as well as for employees of those groups. Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Sales & Marketing->Quotes

Pre-Requisites

All master data must be available in the system for generation of Quotes. Pre-requisites for using this application are as follows:

-   -   Carrier Maintenance—Refer “User Manual for Carrier Maintenance”         for further information on the master records.     -   Agent/Agency—Refer “User Manual for Sales and Marketing” for         further information on the Agent/Agency records.     -   Work Group—Refer “User Manual for Sales and Marketing” for         further information on the Work Group records.     -   Internal Associates—Refer “User Manual for Sales and Marketing”         for further information on the Internal Associates records.     -   Enrollment—Refer “User Manual for Enrollment” for further         information on the Group and Member records.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Create Quotes     -   Modify Quote/Create Quote Revision     -   Generate Quote     -   Generate Interim Quote     -   View Missing Information

Create Quotes

This function enables the user to input necessary input information/parameters for quotes and save the information for retrieval at a later point in time.

A quote is unique for each Group and Lead; any changes to the quote will result in a new revision. To modify an existing quote or create a new quote revision, please refer to next section “Modify Quote/Create Quote Revision”.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click menu Sales & Marketing and         select the option Quotes. (See Figure F-95)     -   Step-2: Browser navigates to Group/Lead Info screen. Choose         whether the quote is for a Lead or an Existing Group. Select the         Lead/Group by clicking Lookup icon, found next to the lead/group         Id field. Alternately, if the lead/group id is known, it can be         entered directly into the field. (See Figure F-96)     -   Step-3: On clicking the Lookup icon, based on whether the quote         is for a lead or group, the browser navigates to either lead         search or to group search screen. (See Figure F-97)     -   A lead can be searched using first few characters of lead name,         contact first/last name or contact phone number.     -   A group can be searched using first few characters of its legal         name, contact first/last name or tax id/SSN or group's effective         date or phone number. (See Figure F-98)     -   Step-4: Click on the group/lead, for which the quote is being         created, to return to the main screen.     -   Step-5: On selecting a lead/group, either using the lookup         option or entering directly into the field, lead/group details         and agent details get populated on the screen.     -   If quoting for a group, an additional option, “Populate Current         Enrollment” is enabled. Clicking the option populates additional         group information like coverage and contribution option, agent         fee, current employee information with their plans.     -   Step-6: Choose the coverage and contribution options selected by         the lead/group.     -   Alternately, the “Default Coverage and Contribution” option can         be used. Default coverage and contribution is Medical coverage         alone selected with an employer contribution of 50% of lowest         cost HMO plan towards employee premium and none towards         dependent premium.     -   Note: This section is enabled only if the lead/group is an         employer group.     -   Step-7: Click on the “Employee Info” tab on the top or the link         at the bottom to navigate to employee information screen. If         “Populate Current Enrollment” option was selected earlier, the         screen comes populated with current employee information.     -   Use “Set Size” option to set the number of employees on the         quote; the screen inserts specified number of blank employee         rows. Enter employee name, employee age/date of birth, coverage         option, number of persons covered under the employee (including         the employee), and the employee's zip code of residence. (See         Figure F-99)     -   Note: If zip code is not specified for an employee, the         lead's/group's zip code is used for rates calculation.     -   Alternately, employee information can be uploaded from a flat         file. (See Figure F-100)     -   Specify the file format, whether CSV ASCII or Fixed Position         ASCII, browse and locate the file to be uploaded. Click Upload         to upload employee information from the file.     -   Step-8: Click on the “Quote Output” tab on the top or the link         at the bottom to navigate to quote output screen. (See Figure         F-101)     -   Choose whether Standard quote or Interim quote is required.         (Interim quote is explained in a subsequent section).     -   Use “Exclude Plans” option to exclude any plans that should not         appear on the quote. Select the plan(s) that need to be excluded         (Hold ‘Control’ key to select multiple plans) and click Add         button.     -   Enter other information required for quotes like quote for, mode         of output and addressee information.     -   Step-9: Click Save button to save quote input information.

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields.

Common Element Description Quote # The id with which the quote is uniquely identified along with the revision. The field is read only. Quote id is auto generated. Quote Date Date on the quote. The field is read only and reflects the value entered in the quote date field on the “Group/Lead Info” tab. Lead/Group Id Unique id of lead/group being quoted. The field is read- only and reflects the value entered in the lead/group id field on the “Group/Lead Info” tab. Lead/Group Name of the lead/group being quoted. This field is read Name only. Type Lead/Group's type; whether Small Employer Group, Individual Association Member, Cal-COBRA etc.

Group/Lead Info Tab Element Description Lead/Group Information Quote for Choose the option to quote for either lead or group. Lead/Group Id Unique id of lead/group being quoted. Lead/Group id can be selected by clicking Lookup icon. Other revisions List all revisions for the quote and allows user to select a specific revision. General Information Quote Date Date on the quote. Entry in this field is mandatory. Mode of Choose a type of mode of request from the drop down Request list available Post Mark Date Date on which request for quote was post-marked. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Entry in this field is mandatory. Receive Date Date on which request for quote was received. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Entry in this field is mandatory. Rate Type Choose a rate type to be used for quoting. Agent Agent commission percentage to be used for blended Commission rate calculation. Entry in this field is mandatory. The field is enabled only for the quotes on blended rate structure. Effective Date Effective date for the quote. Choose a date by clicking calendar icon. Entry in this field is mandatory. Coverage & Contribution Information Use default Check to generate quote using default coverage and coverage and contribution options. Default coverage and contribution contribution is Medical coverage alone selected with an employer contribution of 50% of lowest cost HMO plan towards employee premium and none towards dependent premium Contribution For the line of coverage, choose contribution type opted Type by the lead/group. Leave as blank, when not quoting the line of coverage. Specify Plan When employer contribution is percentage of specified plan, choose specified plan. Value for EE Specify employer contribution towards employee's premium. Value for Dep Specify employer contribution towards dependent's premium.

Employee Info Tab. Element Description Employee Information Quote Spec EE Check to indicate employees to be quoted, when using “Employee Rate Illustration”, “Cal-COBRA” or “Fed- COBRA” options. Employee Name of employee. Entry in this field is mandatory. Name Age/DOB Age or date of birth of employee. Date of birth has to specify in MM/dd/yyyy format. Entry in this field is mandatory. Tier Coverage choice opted by the employee. Entry in this field is mandatory. # Count of members covered under the employee's coverage including the employee. System defaults value in this field based on the coverage type selected but is editable by the user. Zip Zip code of employee's residence. If no value is provided, employer's zip code is used for rate calculation. County County of employee's residence. This is normally a read-only field except in cases where employee's zip code spans multiple counties. In such cases, when the user tries to generate a quote, the system prompts the user to select the county. Medical Plan Medical plan to be used when quoting using “Quote for specified plans only” option. Dental Plan Dental plan to be used when quoting using “Quote for specified plans only” option. Vision Plan Vision plan to be used when quoting using “Quote for specified plans only” option. CAM Plan CAM plan to be used when quoting using “Quote for specified plans only” option. Total Total number of employees on the quote. This field is Employees read only. Total Waiving Total number of employees waiving medical coverage. Total Declining Total number of employees declining coverage through PacAdvantage plans. Total COBRAs Total number of COBRAs covered under the employer. Rate Differential Factor Calculated by Specify whether differential factor has to be calculated System/ by the system or is entered by the user. Option for Entered by entry by user is allowed only when quoting for a lead user or doing a group renewal quote. Differential Rate differential factor applicable for the lead/group. Factor

Interim Quote Tab Element Description Medical Quote Medical Check to include quote for medical coverage. Contribution Check to include employer contribution summary in Summary? quote output. Employer Check to include employer rate summary in quotes Summary output for each of the contribution options, namely, % of lowest cost HMO plan, % of lowest cost plan, % of specified plan and flat $ amount. Employee Quotes Check to include individual employee quote sheets in quotes output for each of the contribution option. Value for Specify contribution percentage or dollar amount of Employee employer (in case of flat dollar contribution) towards employee's premium for each of the contribution option. Value for Specify contribution percentage or dollar amount of Dependent employer (in case of flat dollar contribution) towards dependent's premium for each of the contribution option. Dental Quote Dental Check to include quote for dental coverage. Contribution Check to include employer contribution summary in Summary? quote output. Employer Check to include employer rate summary in quotes Summary output for each of the contribution options, namely, % of lowest cost plan, % of specified plan and flat $ amount. Employee Quotes Check to include individual employee quote sheets in quotes output for each of the contribution option. Value for Specify contribution percentage or dollar amount of Employee employer (in case of flat dollar contribution) towards employee's premium for each of the contribution option. Value for Specify contribution percentage or dollar amount of Dependent employer (in case of flat dollar contribution) towards dependent's premium for each of the contribution option. Vision Quote Vision Check to include quote for vision coverage. Contribution Check to include employer contribution summary in Summary? quote output. Employer Check to include employer rate summary in quotes Summary output for each of the contribution options, namely, % of lowest cost plan, % of specified plan and flat $ amount. Employee Quotes Check to include individual employee quote sheets in quotes output for each of the contribution option. Value for Specify contribution percentage or dollar amount of Employee employer (in case of flat dollar contribution) towards employee's premium for each of the contribution option. Value for Specify contribution percentage or dollar amount of Dependent employer (in case of flat dollar contribution) towards dependent's premium for each of the contribution option. CAM Quote CAM Check to include quote for CAM coverage. Contribution Check to include employer contribution summary in Summary? quote output. Employer Check to include employer rate summary in quotes Summary output for each of the contribution options, namely, % of lowest cost plan, % of specified plan and flat $ amount. Employee Quotes Check to include individual employee quote sheets in quotes output for each of the contribution option. Value for Specify contribution percentage or dollar amount of Employee employer (in case of flat dollar contribution) towards employee's premium for each of the contribution option. Value for Specify contribution percentage or dollar amount of Dependent employer (in case of flat dollar contribution) towards dependent's premium for each of the contribution option.

Quote Output Element Description Generate Specify whether to generate a standard quote or an interim quote. It is not sufficient to enter input parameters for interim quotes; this field has to be set to “Interim Quote” to generate an interim quote. Quote for Specify whether to quote only for plans specified specified against each employee. plans only Exclude specified Exclude plans from appearing in the quote output. plan Quote for Specify whether quote is for a group or selected set of employees within the group. When quoting When quoting for groups, specify whether the quote groups, include output should have employer rate summary alone or employer rate summary and employee quote pages. Mode of Output Specify mode of quote output. Send to whose Specify whether the quote has to be sending to agent's attention attention or group's attention or other. If “other” is selected name and address or email or fax of addressee has to be specified. Include program Specify whether to include program brochure as part of brochure the quote output or not.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen.

Common Element Description New Clears the screen to allow creation of a quote. Save Saves quote input information to the database. The saved quote can be retrieved at a later point in time. Search Allows searching for a saved quote.

Group/Lead Info Tab Element Description Populate Current Populates quotes screen with additional group Enrollment information like coverage and contribution option, agent fee, current employee information with their plans.

Employee Info Tab Element Description Set Size Sets the size of the employee information entry table based on the number entered in the field preceding the button. Upload Employee Allows uploading employee information from text files Information of specific format. Delete Deletes selected (checked) employee rows from the entry table.

Quote Output Tab Element Description Generate quote Generates quotes output based on the quotes output options specified.

Modify Quote/Create Quote Revision

This function enables the user to modify input information for an existing quote and save it as modification to current revision or as a new revision.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click menu Sales & Marketing and         select the option Quotes.     -   Step-2: Click Search button to search for an existing quote. The         browser navigates to quotes search screen.     -   A quote can be searched using quote number, quote date, first         few characters of lead/group name. (See Figure F-102)

Click on quote to be modified to return to the main screen. (See Figure F-103)

-   -   Step-3: Existing revision available for the quote gets listed in         next to lead/group id field in the “Lead/Group Information”         section. Select the revision number to modify. The screen         refreshes to load the selected revision.     -   Step-4: Make necessary modifications to the quotes input         information and click save button. The system prompts with a         question “Do you want to save changes as a new revision? . . . ”         Click OK to save the modifications as a new revision; click         Cancel to save the modifications to the same revision.

Generate Quote

This function enables the user to generate a quote and view, print, email or fax the quote output.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click menu Sales & Marketing and         select the option Quotes. (See Figure F-104)     -   Step-2: Click Search button to search for an existing quote. The         browser navigates to quotes search screen.     -   A quote can be searched using quote number, quote date, first         few characters of lead/group name.     -   Click on the quote to be modified to return to the main screen.     -   Step-3: Click on the “Quote Output” tab on the top or the link         at the bottom to navigate to quotes output screen. Ensure that         the mode of output and “attention to” information are as         desired. Click Generate Quote button to generate the quote.     -   If “View” option was selected, a popup window appears and the         quote output opens up as a word document in the window.     -   If “Email” or “Fax” option was selected, the quotes output is         send via email or fax directly to “Group”, “Agent” or “Other” as         specified in “attention to” information.     -   If “Print in Mailroom” option was selected, the quote output is         send to the mailroom queue.

Generate Interim Quote

This function enables the user to generate an interim quote and view, print, email or fax the quote output.

An interim quote is different from a standard quote, in that, parameters can be specified for all the 4 contribution options.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click menu Sales & Marketing and         select the option Quotes.     -   Step-2: Click Search button to search for an existing quote. The         browser navigates to quotes search screen.     -   A quote can be searched using quote number, quote date, first         few characters of lead/group name.     -   Click on the quote to be modified to return to the main screen.     -   Step-3: Click on the “Interim Quote” tab on the top or the link         at the bottom to navigate to employee information screen.         Specify the line of coverage to be quoted and the contribution         parameters for each line of coverage. (See Figure F-105)     -   Step-4: Click on the “Quote Output” tab on the top or the link         at the bottom to navigate to quotes output screen. Choose         Interim quote option. Ensure that other information required for         quotes like quote for, mode of output and addressee information         is entered as desired. Click Generate Quote button to generate         the quote.

View Missing Information

This function enables the user to view any missing input information required for quote generation. The option would also list out any business rule that is not satisfied.

-   -   Step 1: After successful logon, click menu Sales & Marketing and         select the option Quotes.     -   Step-2: Please refer to previous sections on how to create a new         quote or modify a saved quote. Before clicking on save button to         the save the quote-input information to the database, click on         the “Missing Info” tab on the top or the link at the bottom to         navigate to missing information screen.     -   Step-3: If the quote has any mission information or any business         rule not satisfied, the screen would list out all such items.         (See Figure F-106)     -   The missing information is grouped on how the input fields are         grouped in the input screens. Click on the hyperlink at the top         corner of each section to navigate to the specific area in the         input screen where the missing information is located.

Related Applications

No related applications

PX2 User Manual User Administration Version 1.0 July 08, 2002 Copyright ©2002 Benefit Partners, Inc.

Contents Introduction 1-1 The Applications 1-1 Module 2-1 Access 2-1 Pre-requisites 2-1 Application Functions 2-1 Create Module 2-1 Modify module 2-3 Delete Module 2-5 Related Applications 2-6 Application 3-1 Access 3-1 Pre-requisites 3-1 Application Functions 3-1 Create Application 3-1 Modify Application 3-4 Delete Application 3-6 Related Applications 3-7 Resources 4-1 Access 4-1 Pre-requisites 4-1 Application Functions 4-1 Create Resource 4-1 Modify Resource 4-3 Delete Resource 4-6 Related Applications 4-7 Group 5-1 Access 5-1 Pre-requisites 5-1 Application Functions 5-1 Create Group 5-1 Modify Group 5-3 Delete Group 5-5 Related Applications 5-6 User 6-1 Access 6-1 Pre-requisites 6-1 Application Functions 6-1 Create User 6-1 Modify User 6-3 Delete User 6-6 Related Applications 6-7 User Role 7-1 Access 7-1 Pre-requisites 7-1 Application Functions 7-1 Create User Role 7-1 Modify User Role 7-3 Delete User Role 7-4 Related Applications 7-5 Mapping 8-1 Access 8-1 Pre-requisites 8-1 Application Functions 8-1 User Role Group 8-1 Group Access Rights 8-4 User Access Rights 8-7 Related Applications  8-11 Password Configuration 9-1 Access 9-1 Pre-requisites 9-1 Application Functions 9-1 Password Configuration 9-1 Related Applications 9-3

1 Introduction

User Administration is the administrative module that encompasses the processes of creating and maintaining the PX2 entities like Module, Application, Resource, Group, User, User Role, Group Access rights, User Role Group Mapping and Password Configuration.

The Applications

The above-mentioned processes are accomplished in several applications embedded into the User Administration system. These applications steer the tasks of creating, and administering the PX2 entities, thereby helping achieve the goals of the User Administration system.

Module Master—Modules are the encapsulation from a wider perspective, of the broad functionalities of the PX2 system. For e.g. Carrier Maintenance, Sales and Marketing, Enrollment, Finance etc. This module master application is used to manage modules within the PX2 system.

Application Master—An application represents a business use case or a set of related use cases. The organization of related resources or pages in sequence constitute an application. A module consists of many applications. For e.g. Carrier Maintenance module consists of following applications viz. Zip Master, Carrier Master, and M Plan etc. This application master application is used to manage applications within the PX2 system.

Resource Master—These are entities or pages that are organized in logical sequence to achieve the functionality of an application. An application can have one or more resources, access to which is administered by the User Administration module. This resource master application is used to manage resources within the PX2 system.

Group Master—A group is a functional or logical collection of users. The grouping is based on the nature of operations performed by the users. A user can belong to multiple groups. This group master application is used to manage groups within the PX2 system.

User Master—A user is an entity representing a person working in any of the departments in Benefit Partners Inc. The identity of the user is to be authenticated by the User Administration System in consideration of his/her group and role. A user can belong to multiple groups and can play multiple roles. This user master application is used to manage users within the PX2 system.

User Role Master—User role represents a job a particular person performs in the system. A user can play multiple roles in the system. For e.g., a manager can play the role of a data entry personnel as well as that of an authorizing body. When logged in as data entry personnel, he/she may not have the privileges what was available as a manager. This user role master application is used to manage user roles within the PX2 system.

Mapping—This crucial process involves the creation of modular combinations of the entities. This process of mapping the entities is three-fold as detailed below.

User Role Group Mapping—This bi-fold process assigns a selected role to a user and then assigns the user to a selected group.

Group Access Rights—This process assigns access rights to a group for an application. Subsequently the resources in the selected application could be allotted individual Read, Write or No Access rights to the group.

User Access Rights—This process assigns access rights to the user for an application's resources. This assignment over-rides the rights available to the group to which the user belongs.

Password Configuration—This process configures the various password-related parameters. These parameters include maximum & minimum password length, maximum & minimum expiry days, password repeat count etc.

2 Module

Modules are the encapsulation from a wider perspective, of the functionalities associated with the PX2 system. For e.g. Carrier Maintenance, Sales and Marketing, Enrollment, Finance etc.

The module comprises of a group of applications. The following modules form an integral part of the core administrative system viz. Carrier Maintenance, Enrollment, Sales and Marketing and Finance.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Security->Module->Create/Modify         -   ->Delete Module

Pre-Requisites

There are no pre-requisites for using this application.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Create Module     -   Modify Module     -   Delete Module

Create Module

This function enables the creation of a new module. This creates a module with a unique id, under which several applications could be organized. The sequential steps involved in the creation of a new module are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Module and select         the option Create/Modify. (See Figure G-G-1)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective field as per the         format briefed in the Fields Explanation section, and click the         Save button. (See Figure G-2)

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanations for each of the screen fields. Element Description Module Id The id with which the module is uniquely identified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Module Name The text for module name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Comments The comments pertinent to the module being created. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is optional.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Save Saves the entered module information in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are cleared. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields.

Modify Module

This function enables the modification of an existing module. After modification, the organization of applications under the module remains intact.

The sequential steps involved in the modification of an existing module are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Module and select         the option Create/Modify (See Figure G-3)     -   Step-2: Module id has to be selected by clicking the lookup         icon. (See Figure G-4)     -   This pops a window enlisting the existing module ids. (See         Figure G-5)     -   Step-3: Choose a module id by double clicking on any of the         listed module ids. The selected module id gets inserted in the         module id field automatically. (See Figure G-6)     -   Step-4: Change the contents to be modified and click Update.

Fields Explanation

The following table provides explanation for each of the screen fields. Element Description Module Id The id with which the module is uniquely identified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Module Name The text for module name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Comments The comments pertinent to the module being modified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is optional.

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen Element Description Module Id The id with which the module is uniquely identified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Module Name The text for module name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Comments The comments pertinent to the module being modified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is optional.

Delete Module

This function enables the deletion of an existing module. Only the modules that are not associated with any other application are available for deletion.

The sequential steps involved in the deletion of an existing module are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Module and select         the Delete option. (See Figure G-7)     -   Step-2: Check the ids of the modules to be deleted. Only modules         that do not have any applications organized under them can be         deleted.     -   Step-3: Click the Delete button to perform delete operation on         the selected modules. (See Figure G-8)

Button Functionality

The following table provides explanation for each button in the screen. Element Description Check Box Check the modules to be deleted. Check box will be in disabled state for applications that have been used in any of the higher-level entities of the User Administration system. Delete Deletes the selected applications.

Related Applications

Related applications are:

-   -   Application Master     -   Resource Master

3 Application

An application represents a business use case or a set of related use cases. The organization of related resources or pages in sequence constitute an application. A module consists of many applications. For e.g. Carrier Maintenance module consists of following applications viz. Zip Master, Carrier Master, and M Plan etc. Each application is constituted of several pages.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Security->Application->Create/Modify         -   ->Delete Application

Pre-Requisites

The Module, under which the application is to be organized, must have been created and available.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Create application     -   Modify application     -   Delete application

Create Application

This function enables the creation of a new application. This creates an application with a unique id under which several resources could be organized.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of a new application are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Application and         select the option Create/Modify. (See Figure G-9)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in Fields Explanation section. (See Figure G-10)     -   Step-3: To select an application, click the lookup icon. This         pops a window enlisting the existing application ids. Choose an         application id by double clicking on any application id for         selection. Corresponding application name of the selected         application id will be inserted automatically. (See Figure G-11)     -   Step-4: Enter the application name directly.     -   Step-5: Enter the comments directly.     -   Step-6: To select a module, click the lookup icon. This pops a         window enlisting the existing module ids. Choose a module id by         double clicking on any module id for selection. The module name         of the selected module id will be inserted automatically (See         Figure G-12)     -   Step-7: Click Save button to save the contents.

Fields Explanation Element Description Application Id The id with which the application is uniquely identified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Selection could also be made, by clicking the lookup icon. Application Name The text for application name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Comments The comments pertinent to the Application being created. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is optional. Select the module Clicking on the Lookup icon enlists the existing modules, selecting which automatically makes an entry in the field. Entry in this field is mandatory. On this selection, modules selected will get associated with the application being created.

Button Functionality Element Description Application Id The id with which the application is uniquely identified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Selection could also be made, by clicking the lookup icon. Application Name The text for application name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Comments The comments pertinent to the Application being created. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is optional. Select the module Clicking on the Lookup icon enlists the existing modules, selecting which automatically makes an entry in the field. Entry in this field is mandatory. On this selection, modules selected will get associated with the application being created.

Modify Application

This function enables the modification of an existing application. After modification, the organization of resources under the application remains intact.

The sequential steps involved in the modification of an existing application are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Application and         select the option Create/Modify. (See Figure G-13)     -   Step-2: Application id could be directly entered or selected by         clicking the lookup icon. (See Figure G-14)     -   This pops a window enlisting the existing application ids. (See         Figure G-15)     -   Step-3: Choose an application id by double clicking on any         application id. The selected application id gets automatically         inserted in the application id field with its corresponding         application name.     -   Step-4: Module has to be selected by clicking the lookup icon.         [See step-3 of create application] (See Figure G-16)     -   Step-5: Change the contents to be modified and click Update.

Fields Explanation Element Description Application Id The id with which the application is uniquely identified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Application Name The text for Application name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Comments The comments pertinent to the application being modified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is optional. Selected the Clicking on the lookup icon enlists the existing module Modules, selecting which automatically makes an entry in the field. Entry in this field is mandatory. Upon this selection, the selected modules will get associated with the application being modified.

Button Functionality Element Description Update Saves the entered Application information in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are cleared. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields.

Delete Application

This function enables the deletion of an existing application. Only the applications that are not associated with any other resource or module are available for deletion.

The sequential steps involved in the deletion of an existing application are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Application and         select the Delete option. (See Figure G-17)     -   Step-2: Check the application ids to be deleted. Only         applications that don't have any resources under them can be         deleted.     -   Step-3: Click Delete button to perform delete operation on the         selected application ids. (See Figure G-18)

Button Functionality Element Description Check Box Check the applications to be deleted. Check box will be in disabled state for applications that have been used in any other User Administration levels of higher than it. Delete Deletes the selected applications.

Related Applications

Related applications are:

-   -   Module Master     -   Resource Master

4 Resources

These are entities or pages that are organized in logical sequence to achieve the functionality of an application. An application can have one or more resources, access to which is administered by the User Administration module.

The resources accessible from the system can be protected using a single access control (ACL). The ACL specifies the nature of access rights available for a page. For e.g. Read or Write or None.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Security->Resource->Create/Modify         -   ->Delete Resource

Pre-Requisites

An application is constituted of resources. The application, to which the resources are to be attached, must be available in the system.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Create resource     -   Modify resource     -   Delete resource

Create Resource

This function enables the creation of a new resource. This creates a resource with a unique id.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of a new resource are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click menu Resource and select         the option of Create/Modify. (See Figure G-19)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective fields, as per the         format briefed in Fields Explanation section. (See Figure G-20)     -   Step-3: For selecting an application, click the lookup icon.         This pops a window enlisting the existing application ids.         Choose an application id by double clicking on any application         id for selection. The name of the selected application id will         be inserted automatically. (See Figure G-21)     -   Step-4: Enter the resource name directly.     -   Step-5: Enter screen URL directly.     -   Step-6: Enter comments directly.     -   Step-7: Click the Save button to save the contents.

Fields Explanation Element Description Resource Id The id with which the resource is uniquely identified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Resource Name The text for resource name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Screen URL The path URL for accessing the resource. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Comments The comments pertinent to the resource being created. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is optional. Select the Clicking on the lookup icon enlists the existing Application applications, selecting which automatically makes an entry in the field. Entry in this field is mandatory. Upon this selection, the application selected will get associated with the resource being created.

Button Functionality Element Description Save Saves the entered resource information in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are cleared. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields.

Modify Resource

This function enables the modification of an existing resource.

The sequential steps involved in the modification of an existing module are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click Resource menu and select         the option Create/Modify. (See Figure G-22)     -   Step-2: Resource id has to be selected by clicking the lookup         icon. (See Figure G-23)     -   This pops a window enlisting the existing application ids. (See         Figure G-24)     -   Step-3: Choose a resource id by double clicking on any resourced         id. The selected resource id gets automatically inserted in the         resource id field with its corresponding resource name.     -   Step-4: Application has to be selected by clicking the lookup         icon. [See step-3 of create resource] (See Figure G-25)     -   Step-5: Change the contents to be modified and click Update.

Fields Explanation Element Description Resource Id The id with which the resource is uniquely identified. Entry in to this field is mandatory. Resource Name The text for resource name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Screen URL The URL of the resource. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Comments The comments pertinent to the resource being modified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values Entry in this field is optional. Selected the Clicking on the lookup icon enlists the existing Application applications selecting which automatically makes an entry in the field. Entry in this field is mandatory. On this selection, applications selected will get associated with the resource being modified.

Button Functionality Element Description Update Saves the entered resource information in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are cleared. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields.

Delete Resource

This function enables the deletion of an existing resource. Only the resources that are not associated with any application are available for deletion.

The sequential steps involved in the deletion of an existing resource are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click Resource menu and select         the Delete option. (See Figure G-26)     -   Step-2: Select the values of resource ids to be deleted. The         resources that are not associated with any application only are         available for deletion.     -   Step-3: Click Delete button to perform delete operation on the         selected resources. (See Figure G-27)

Button Functionality Element Description Check Box Check the resources to be deleted. Check box will be in disabled state for resources that have been used in any other User Administration levels of higher than this. Delete Deletes the selected resources.

Related Applications

Related applications are:

-   -   Module Master     -   Application Master

5 Group

A group is a functional or logical collection of users. The grouping is based on the nature of operations performed by the users. A user can belong to multiple groups. Groups provide an efficient way to manage large numbers of users because an administrator can specify permissions for an entire group at one time. The resources can be allocated to a group instead of assigning to an individual user. The user being a part of the group acquires access rights to those resources attached to the group.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Security->Group->Create/Modify         -   ->Delete Group

Pre-Requisites

There are no pre-requisites for using this application.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Create group     -   Modify group     -   Delete group

Create Group

This function enables the creation of a new group. This creates a group with a unique id under which several users could be organized.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of a new group are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Group and select         the option Create/Modify. (See Figure G-28)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective fields as per the         format briefed in the field's explanation section, and click the         Save button. (See Figure G-29)

Fields Explanation Element Description Group Id The id with which the group is uniquely identified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Group Name The text for group name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Comments The comments pertinent to the group being created. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is optional.

Button Functionality Element Description Save Saves the entered group information in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields get cleared. Clear Clears the contents entered in the fields.

Modify Group

This function enables the modification of an existing group. After modification, the organization of users under the group remains intact.

The sequential steps involved in the modification of an existing group are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Group and select         the option Create/Modify. (See Figure G-30)     -   Step-2: Group id has to be selected by clicking the lookup icon.     -   This pops a window enlisting the existing application ids. (See         Figure G-31)     -   Step-3: Choose a group id by double clicking on any group id for         selection. The selected group id gets automatically inserted in         the group id field with its corresponding group name. (See         Figure G-32)     -   Step-4: Change the contents to be modified and click the Update         button. (See Figure G-33)

Fields Explanation Element Description Group Id The id with which the group is uniquely identified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Group Name The text for group name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Comments The comments pertinent to the group being modified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values Entry in this field is optional.

Button Functionality Element Description Update Saves the entered group information in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are cleared. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields.

Delete Group

This function enables the deletion of an existing group. Only the groups that are not associated with any other application are available for deletion.

The sequential steps involved in the deletion of an existing group are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Group and select         the Delete option. (See Figure G-34)     -   Step-2: Check the ids of the groups to be deleted. The disabled         checkboxes represent the groups that are previously mapped to         any users.     -   Step-3: Click the Delete button to perform delete operation on         the selected groups. (See Figure G-35)

Button Functionality Element Description Check Box Check the groups to be deleted. Check box will be in disabled state for groups that have been previously associated with users. Delete Deletes the selected groups.

Related Applications

Related application is:

-   -   Users

6 User

A user is an entity representing a person working in any of the departments in Benefit Partners Inc. The identity of the user is to be authenticated by the User Administration system in consideration of his/her group and role. A user can belong to multiple groups and can play multiple roles.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Security->User->Create/Modify         -   ->Delete User

Pre-Requisites

Groups must have been created and available to attach users to those groups. This attachment can be of any form like one user to one group or one user to many groups.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Create user     -   Modify user     -   Delete user

Create User

This function enables the creation of a new user.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of a new user are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu User and select         the option Create/Modify. (See Figure G-36)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective fields as per the         format briefed in Fields Explanation section, and click the Save         button. (See Figure G-37)

Fields Explanation Element Description First Name The first name of the user. Accepts alphabets of length not exceeding 25 characters. Entry in this field is mandatory. Middle Initial The middle initial of the user. Accepts only 1 alphabet character. Entry in this field is optional. Last Name The last name of the user. Accepts alphabets of length not exceeding 35 characters. Entry in this field is mandatory. User Id The id with which the user is uniquely identified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Password The password to logon. Accepts alphabets, numeric values and special characters. Entry in this field is mandatory. Display name The display name is the name by which a user wishes to display his/her name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Phone The telephone number of a user. Accepts only 10 digits of numeric and should be in the format 999 999 9999. Entry in this field is mandatory. Extension The extension number to access a user. Accepts only 4 digits of numeric and should be in the format 9999. Entry in this field is optional. Fax The fax number of a user. Accepts only 10 digits of numeric and should be in the format 999 999 9999. Entry in this field is optional. E-mail The email id of a user. Accepts alphabets, numeric values and special characters of length not exceeding 100 with a valid email format. Entry in this field is mandatory. Lock Lock the user access to the PX2 system. On checking the lock check box, the user is denied access to the entire PX2 system.

Button Functionality Element Description Save Saves the entered user information in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are cleared. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields.

Modify User

This function enables the modification of an existing user.

The sequential steps involved in the modification of an existing user are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu User and select         the option Create/Modify. (See Figure G-38)     -   Step-2: User id has to be selected by clicking the lookup icon.         (See Figure G-39)     -   Step-3: This pops up a screen. Enter the user id. To run a         search on existing user ids type a few letter(s) and click on         the Search button. (See Figure G-40)     -   Step-4: Double click on any user-id for selection. Corresponding         display name will get inserted in the field automatically. (See         Figure G-41)     -   Step-5: Change the contents to be modified and click Update.

Field Explanation Element Description First Name The first name of the user. Accepts alphabets of length not exceeding 25 characters. Entry in this field is mandatory. Middle Initial The middle initial of the user. Accepts only 1 alphabet character. Entry in this field is optional. Last Name The last name of the user. Accepts alphabets of length not exceeding 35 characters. Entry in this field is mandatory. User Id The id with which the user is uniquely identified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Password The password to logon. Accepts alphabets, numeric values and special characters. Entry in this field is mandatory. Display name The display name is the name by which a user wishes to display his/her name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Phone The telephone number of a user. Accepts only 10 digits of numeric and should be in the format 999 999 9999. Entry in this field is mandatory. Extension The extension number to access a user. Accepts only 4 digits of numeric and should be in the format 9999. Entry in this field is optional. Fax The fax number of a user. Accepts only 10 digits of numeric and should be in the format 999 999 9999. Entry in this field is optional. Entry in this field is mandatory. E-mail The email id of a user. Accepts alphabets, numeric values and special characters of length not exceeding 100 with a valid email format. Entry in this field is mandatory. Lock Lock the user access to the PX2 system. On checking the lock check box the user is denied access to the entire PX2 system.

Button Functionality Element Description Update Saves the entered user information in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are cleared. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields.

Delete User

This function enables the deletion of an existing user. Only the users that are not associated with any other groups are available for deletion.

The sequential steps involved in the deletion of an existing user are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu User and select         the Delete option. (See Figure G-42)     -   Step-2: Check the user ids to be deleted. Only the users that         are not associated with any other groups are available for         deletion.     -   Step-3: Click Delete button to perform delete operation on the         selected user ids. (See Figure G-43)

Button Explanation Element Description Check Box Check the users to be deleted. Check box will be in disabled state for users that have been used in any other User Administration levels of higher than it. Delete Deletes the selected users.

Related Applications

Related application is:

-   -   Group Master

7 User Role

User role represents a job a particular person performs in the system. A user can play multiple roles in the system. For e.g. a manager can play the role of data entry personnel as well as that of an authorizing body. When logged in as data entry personnel, he/she may not have the privileges what was available as a manager.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Security->Application->Create/Modify         -   ->Delete User Role

Pre-Requisites

There are no pre-requisites as such for using this application.

Application Functions

This application has the following functions:

-   -   Create user role     -   Modify user role     -   Delete user role

Create User Role

This function enables the creation of a new user role. This creates a user role with a unique id to which several users could be mapped.

The sequential steps involved in the creation of a new user role are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful login, click the menu User Role and         select the option Create/Modify. (See Figure G-44)     -   Step-2: Enter the values in the respective fields as per the         format briefed in fields explanation section, and click the Save         button. (See Figure G-45)

Field Explanation Element Description User Role Id The id with which the user role is uniquely identified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values of length not exceeding 35 characters. Entry in this field is mandatory. User Role Name The text for user role name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Comments The comments pertinent to the user role being created. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is optional.

Button Functionality Element Description Save Saves the entered user role information in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields get cleared. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields.

Modify User Role

This function enables the modification of an existing user role. Many user roles can be assigned to a user but only one role can be exercised at a time.

The sequential steps involved in the modification of an existing user role are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu User Role and         select the option Create/Modify. (See Figure G-46)     -   Step-2: Enter the User role or select the user role id by         clicking the lookup icon. (See Figure G-47)     -   This pops a window enlisting the existing application ids. (See         Figure G-48)     -   Step-3: Double click on any user role id for selection.         Corresponding display name will get inserted in the field         automatically. (See Figure G-49)     -   Step-4: Change the contents to be modified and click the Update         button.

Field Explanation Element Description User Role Id The id with which the user role is uniquely identified. Accepts alphabets and numeric values of length not exceeding 35 characters. Entry in this field is mandatory. User Role Name The text for user role name. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is mandatory. Comments The comments pertinent to the user role being created. Accepts alphabets and numeric values. Entry in this field is optional.

Button Functionality Element Description Update Saves the entered user role information in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are cleared. Cancel Clears the contents entered in the fields.

Delete User Role

This function enables the deletion of an existing user role. Only he user roles that are not mapped to any users are only available for deletion.

The sequential steps involved in the deletion of an existing user role are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu User Role and         select the Delete option. (See Figure G-50)     -   Step-2: Check the user role ids to be deleted. The user roles         that are not associated with any other higher-level hierarchy of         users only are available for deletion.     -   Step-3: Click Delete button to perform delete operation on the         selected user role ids. (See Figure G-51)

Button Explanation Element Description Check Box Check the user role to be deleted. Check box will be in disabled state for user roles that have been used in any other User Administration levels of higher than it. Delete Deletes the selected User roles.

Related Applications

Related applications are:

-   -   User     -   Mapping

8 Mapping

The Mapping master is the application used to create mapping between Groups, User and User Roles. This crucial process involves the creation of modular combinations of these entities.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Security->User Role->Group Access Rights         -   ->User Role Group         -   ->User Access Rights

Pre-Requisites

Users, Groups, User Roles, Resources must be available in the system to establish mapping amongst them.

Application Functions

This application is to establish a relationship between Groups, User and User Roles.

-   -   Create/Remove Group Access Rights     -   Create/Remove User Role Group     -   Create/Remove User Access Rights

User Role Group

This bi-fold process assigns a selected role to a user and then assigns the user to a selected group.

The sequential steps involved in the creating user role group are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Mapping and         select the User Role Group option. (See Figure G-52)     -   Step-2: User id has to be selected by clicking the lookup icon.         (See Figure G-53)     -   This pops up a screen. Enter the user id. (See Figure G-54)     -   To run a search on existing user ids type a few letter(s) and         click on the Search button.     -   Step-3: Double click on any user-id for selection. User id and         its corresponding display name will get inserted in the         respective fields automatically.     -   Step-4: To assign a role to the user, select an existing role by         clicking the lookup icon. This pops a window enlisting the         existing roles. Choose a role by double clicking on any role.         The selected role name gets inserted in the role field         automatically. (See Figure G-55)     -   Step-5: Click Select button to complete the mapping of user to         role. The window gets refreshed displaying the list of available         groups. (See Figure G-56)     -   Step-6: Now to associate the user with the assigned role to a         group, check the group ids to be associated with.     -   Step-7: Click on Save button to complete the process of mapping         of the user to role to group.

Field Explanation Element Description User Id The id with which the user is uniquely identified. Display Name The display name is the name by which a user wishes to display his/her name. Select the Role The selection of a role is to assign a role to the selected user id.

Button Functionality Element Description Select Select will map the selected user to the selected role and enlist the existing groups. Save Saves the entered user, role, and group information in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are cleared. Clear/Cancel The mapping process carried out up to that point gets cancelled. Clears the contents entered in the fields.

Group Access Rights

This process assigns access rights to a group for an application. Subsequently the resources in the selected application could be allotted individual read, write or no access rights to the group.

The sequential steps involved in the creating group access rights are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful login, click the menu Mapping and         select the Group Access Rights option. (See Figure G-57)     -   Step-2: Group id has to be selected by clicking the lookup icon.         This pops a window enlisting the existing groups ids. Choose a         group id by double clicking on any group id for selection. The         selected group id gets inserted in the group id field         automatically. (See Figure G-58)     -   Step-3: Now to assign applications to the selected group, select         the application id by clicking the lookup icon. This pops a         window enlisting the existing applications. Choose an         application by double clicking on any application id for         selection. The selected application id gets inserted in the         application field automatically. (See Figure G-59)     -   Step-4: Click the Select button to complete the mapping of group         to application. The window gets refreshed displaying the         resources available under the application. (See Figure G-60)     -   Step-5: Now to assign resource-wise access rights to the         assigned group and application, check the resource names to be         associated with and set the desired access right from the         adjoining access right list as read or write or no access.     -   Step-6: Click on Save button to complete the process of creating         group access rights.

Field Explanation Element Description Select the Group The id with which the group is uniquely identified. Select the The id with which the application is uniquely Application identified. ACL [Access Level indicates the level of accessing methods say control level] read, write and no access for the each of the resources.

Button Explanation Element Description Select Select will map the selected group to the selected Application and enlist the resources under the selected application. Save Saves the entered information in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are cleared. Clear/Cancel The group access rights carried out up to that point gets cancelled. Clears the contents entered in the fields.

User Access Rights

User access rights represent the privileges required for accessing resources. An administrator protects resources by establishing access control lists to grant permissions to users and groups. Individual user permissions take precedence over group permissions. Individual user permission overrides the more restrictive group permission.

This process assigns access rights to the user for an application's resources. This assignment over-rides the rights available to the group to which the user belongs.

The sequential steps involved in the creating user access rights are listed below.

-   -   Step-1: After successful logon, click the menu Mapping and         select the User Access Rights (See Figure G-61)     -   Step-2: User id has to be selected by clicking the lookup icon.         (See Figure G-62)     -   Enter the user id. To run a search on existing user ids type a         few letter(s) and click on the Search button. The screen         illustrated below pops up.     -   Step-3: Double click on any user-id for selection. Corresponding         display name will get inserted in the field automatically.     -   Step-4: Application id has to be selected by clicking the lookup         icon. This pops a window enlisting the existing application ids.         Choose an application id by double clicking on any application         id for selection. The selected application id gets inserted in         the application id field automatically. (See Figure G-63)     -   Step-5: To assign a role to the user with assigned application,         now select an existing role by clicking the lookup icon. This         pops a window enlisting the existing roles. Choose a role by         double clicking on any role for selection. The selected role         name gets inserted in the role field automatically. (See Figure         G-64)     -   Step-6: Click Select button to complete the process of user         access rights. The window gets refreshed displaying the         resources available under the selected application. (See Figure         G-65)     -   Step-7: Now to assign resource-wise access rights to the         assigned user, application and role, check the resource names to         be associated with and set the desired access right from the         adjoining access right list as read or write or no access.     -   Step-8: Click on Save button to complete the process of creating         user access rights.

Field Explanation Element Description User Id The id with which the user is uniquely identified. Display Name The display name is the name by which a user wishes to display his/her name. Select the The id with which the application is uniquely Application identified. Select the Role The selection of a role is to assign a role to the selected user id, application. ACL [Access Level indicates the level of accessing methods say control level] read, write and no access for the each of the resources.

Button Functionality Element Description Select Select will map the selected User, Role to the selected Application and enlist the resources under the selected Application. Save Saves the entered information in the database. The page gets refreshed and the contents entered in the fields are cleared. Clear/Cancel The user access rights carried out up to that point gets cancelled. Clears the contents entered in the fields.

Related Applications

Related applications are:

-   -   Users     -   Groups     -   User Roles     -   Resources

9 Password Configuration

This process configures the various password-related parameters. These parameters include maximum & minimum password length, maximum & minimum expiry days, password repeat count etc.

Access

The application can be accessed from the main menu as follows:

-   -   Security->Configure->Password Configuration

Pre-Requisites

There are no pre-requisites as such for using this application.

Application Functions

This application is to administer the parameters related to password.

Configure Password

Password configuration is mainly to monitor and control the usage of password.

Following is the screen snapshot for password configuration. (See Figure G-66)

Fields Explanation Element Description Maximum Maximum allowed length in characters of the Password length password. Entry in this field is mandatory. Minimum Minimum allowed length in characters of the password length password. Entry in this field is mandatory. Maximum Expiry Maximum allowed date for password expiration in Days days. Entry in this field is mandatory. Minimum Expiry Minimum allowed date for password expiration in Days days. Entry in this field is mandatory. Prompt Expiry Prompt expiry date is to highlight as a reminder for Period password expiration in days. Entry in this field is mandatory. Password Repeat This specifies the number of times the password has Count to have a new entry with no repetition of previous passwords. Entry in this field is mandatory. Invalid Password Invalid password count will have the count of Count attempting with invalid passwords before the user is locked. Entry in this field is mandatory. Lock time for Lock time for password in HH:MM:SS format to password have session-out. Entry in this field is mandatory.

Button Functionality Element Description Save Saves the entered password information in the database. The page gets refreshed and the content entered in the fields appear on the screen.

Related Applications

None

Benefit Parners Inc Process Specification BPI_CAS_FSD_CM_01 Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_CM_01 Version: <1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Nov. 27, 2001 Sudhakar K 1.0 Approved Version Apr. 04, 2002 Lala Viswanath 1.1 Approved Version Oct. 24, 2002 Riyaz Mohamed 1.2 Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Background 5

2.2. Process Description & Flow 5

2.2.1. Create Carrier Master 5

2.2.2. Process Flow Diagrams 6

3. User Interface 8

3.1. User Interface Screens 8

3.1.1. Screen ID's 8

3.1.2. User Interface ID: Create Carrier Master 8

3.1.3. User Interface ID: Create Product 15

3.1.4. User Interface ID: Search Carrier Master 18

3.1.5. User Interface ID: Modify Carrier Master 20

3.1.6. User Interface ID: Modify Carrier Product 27

3.1.7. User Interface ID: View Carrier Master 31

3.1.8. User Interface ID: Search Product 33

3.1.9. User Interface ID: View Product Info 34

3.1.10. Screen Flow 36

1. Introduction

1.1 Purpose

This purpose of this document is to identify the process associated with the business use case Create Carrier Master.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference

Business Use Specification Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_CM_001 Create Carrier Master

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1 Background

Create Carrier Master is user for creation of master record for the carrier which includes the general information about the carrier, Department Contact Information, Mode of Communications Line of Coverage, plan type and the benefit level offered by the carrier and the benefit description.

2.2. Process Description & Flow

This process describes the Use Case “Create Carrier Master”. This document is the amendment of BPI_CAS_FSD_CM_(—)01 (Version 1.1).

2.2.1. Create Carrier Master

The flow of the process is as described below.

-   -   a. Input the general information about the carrier.     -   b. Input the Department Contact Information     -   c. Validate if the department contact information has the right         data type.     -   d. If yes add the information to a temporary storage.     -   e. If not re enter the information correctly and add again.     -   f. Continue adding further department contact information.     -   g. If yes follow steps from b) to e)     -   h. Edit or delete the Department Contact Information.     -   i. On edit remove the data from temporary storage and populate         the department contact information data to the fields and change         the data. Continue from c) to e).     -   j. On delete remove the data from the temporary storage.     -   k. Can continue from step b) onwards or go to step l)     -   l. If not then check if the data entered for the general carrier         information is correct or erroneous.     -   m. If erroneous re enter the correct data.     -   n. If Correct then save the data to the repository.     -   o. System auto generates a unique identification number for the         carrier.     -   p. Choose the Line of coverage     -   q. For the line of coverage choose the system show the Plan         type.     -   r. Choose the Plan Type     -   s. For the plan type choose the system show the benefit level     -   t. Choose the benefit level and enter the benefit level name for         the specific carrier and add.     -   u. The Line of coverage, plan type, Benefit Level and the name         is populated in and shown.     -   v. Check if the data entered is correct or erroneous.     -   w. If erroneous then edit or delete the benefit level name.     -   x. Else continue adding the next line of coverage     -   y. If the process is completed save the data.     -   z. The data is saved into the repository and unique         identification number is generated for the all the benefit level         offered by the specific carrier a         -   CarrierName_PlanType_BenefitLevel_UniqueID

2.2.2. Process Flow Diagrams

(See Figure H-1)

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Screen ID's Corresponding HTML File Screen ID (SID) Screen Name Name carrier.general Carrier General Info /bpi/cas/carrier/master/ CarrierInfo.jsp carrier.search Carrier Search /bpi/cas/carrier/master/Carrier Search.jsp carrier.view Carrier General Info /bpi/cas/carrier/master/Carrier View GeneralInfo.jsp carrier.product Carrier Product Info /bpi/cas/carrier/master/Carrier Product.jsp carrier.prodsearch Search Product /bpi/cas/carrier/master/Product Search.jsp carrier.prodinfo Carrier Product Info /bpi/cas/carrier/master/Product View.jsp

3.1.2. User Interface ID: Create Carrier Master

3.1.2.1. Screen Name: Create Carrier Master

-   -   (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)001_(—)001)

(See Figure H-2)

3.1.2.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being Create Create Carrier navigated Carrier Master Master Sub Header Text Sub Header Provide Content Area Text Carrier Carrier General General Information Information Sub Header Text Sub Header Text for the Company Address Address Address Company Text Company Text for the entry field Name Name Company Entry Field Company Entry Field for Company name Name (Entry Name (Entry Field) Field) Address Text Address Text for the Address Address Entry Field Address Entry Field for Address (Entry Field) (Entry Field) Suite/Apt # Text Suite/Apt # Text for Suite/Apt # Suite/Apt # Entry Field Suite/Apt # Entry Field for Suite/Apt # (Entry Field) (Entry Field) City Text City Text for City City (Entry Entry Field City (Entry Entry Field for City Field) Field) State Text State Text for state State (Entry Entry Field State (Entry Entry Field for State Field) Field) ZIP Text ZIP Text for ZIP ZIP (Entry Entry Field ZIP (Entry Entry Field for ZIP Field) Field) Sub Header Text Sub Header Text for the sub heading Contact Contact Department Department Department Drop Down Department List all the departments for the carrier for List contact information Contact Text Contact Name Text for Contact name Name Salutation Text Salutation Text for Salutation First Name Text First Name Text for First name Middle name Text Middle name Text for middle name Last name Text Last name Text for last name Suffix Text Suffix Text for Suffix Title Text Title Text for title Salutation Entry Field Salutation Entry Field for Salutation First Name Entry Field First Name Entry field for first name Middle name Entry Field Middle name Entry field for middle name Last name Entry Field Last name Entry field for last name Suffix Entry Field Suffix Entry Field for Suffix Title Entry Field Title Entry Field for title Address Text Address Text for the Address Address Entry Field Address Entry Field for Address (Entry Field) (Entry Field) Suite/Apt # Text Suite/Apt # Text for Suite/Apt # Suite/Apt # Entry Field Suite/Apt # Entry Field for Suite/Apt # (Entry Field) (Entry Field) City Text City Text for City City (Entry Entry Field City (Entry Entry Field for City Field) Field) State Text State Text for state State (Entry Entry Field State (Entry Entry Field for State Field) Field) ZIP Text ZIP Text for ZIP ZIP (Entry Entry Field ZIP (Entry Entry Field for ZIP Field) Field) Mode of Drop Down Mode of List various modes of contact preferred Communication List Communication Phone Text Phone Text for phone FAX Text FAX Text for FAX Email Text Email Text for email Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone number FAX Entry Field FAX Entry field for FAX Email Entry Field Email Entry field for email ADD Button ADD To add the above details on to the html (HTML table after validation check. Submit button) Table HTML Table Table Table for adding up the contact information Delete Button Delete To delete the contact information checked (HTML for deletion Button) Check All Text Link Check All To check all the check boxes in the table Clear All Text Link Clear All To un check all the check boxes checked in the table Delete Check box Delete To check the items for deletion Edit Button Edit To edit the contact information against the (HTML row selected for edition Button) Department Text Department Shows the name of the department added. Name Name For example finance, marketing etc. Last Name Text Last Name Name of the contact person Phone Text Phone Phone of the contact person FAX Text FAX FAX of the contact person Email Text Email Email address of the contact person SAVE Button SAVE Save all the above information to the (HTML repository Submit button) CANCEL Button CANCEL To reset the entries made in all the fields (HTML reset button)

3.1.2.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text # Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1. Company Name Refer Document Refer Document (Entry Field) No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 2. Address (Entry Refer Document Refer Document Field) No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 3. Suite/Apt # Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 4. Suite/Apt # Refer Document Refer Document (Entry Field) No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 5. City Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 6. City (Entry Refer Document Refer Document Field) No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 7. State Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 8. State (Entry Refer Document Refer Document Field) No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 9. ZIP (Entry Field) Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 10. Department Should list various departments like If none of the option is Finance, Sales, Administration, selected. Then should Technical, Miscellaneous etc from the show an Error Dialog repository. Box With message. The First option should be - “Department Name - Choose One -. Subsequent options Is required” should be listed alphabetically. 11. Salutation Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 12. First Name Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 13. Middle name Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 14. Last name Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 15. Suffix Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 16. Title Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 17. Address (Entry Refer Document Refer Document Field) No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 18. Suite/Apt # Refer Document Refer Document (Entry Field) No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 19. City (Entry Refer Document Refer Document Field) No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 20. State (Entry Refer Document Refer Document Field) No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 21. ZIP (Entry Field) Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 22. Mode of Should list various types of Mode of If none of the option is Communication Communications like Phone, FAX, selected. Then should email, USPS etc. from the repository. show an Error Dialog The First option should be - Box With message. Choose One -. Subsequent options should be listed alphabetically. 23. Phone Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 24. Email Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 25. FAX Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 26. ADD Should function with Enter Key Error Dialog Box Cursor Positioned on the “ADD” Text: button or Mouse Click. “Department Name - Check if the Contact Department is Is required” selected. If -choose one-default option is only selected throw a Java script error message. Check if the Mode of Communication is selected. If -choose one-default option is only selected throw a Java script error message. Check if the value entered for the fields for the Department contact information are correct. If not throw error message. Success: Populates the HTML Table with the data on each column as relevant with the data entered in the entry field. 27. Table Should have column header and each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. i.e. First row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of any text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. 28. Delete Should function with Enter Key Error Message: Cursor Positioned on the “Delete” “Please choose the button or on Mouse Click. row or rows to be Delete Button should work on deleted.” multiple deletes based on the check box or boxes selected. If the user clicks on the delete button without checking any of the delete check box should throw error message. Success: Deletes the row or rows from the HTML Table(temporary storage) 29. Check All On clicking the “Check All” link On clicking the should check all the check boxes in “Check All” link the HTML table. should check all the check boxes in the HTML table. 30. Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link On clicking the “Clear should uncheck all the checked check All” link should boxes in the HTML table. uncheck all the checked check boxes in the HTML table. 31. Delete Check box option with default Check box option with “unchecked” default “unchecked” 32. Edit Should function with Enter Key Should function with Cursor Positioned on the “Edit” Enter Key Cursor button or on Mouse Click. Positioned on the On clicking the edit button the row “Edit” button or on edited should be removed from the Mouse Click. HTML table and the data should be On clicking the edit populated back on the editable entry button the row edited fields. should be removed from the HTML table and the data should be populated back on the editable entry fields. 33. Department Display the data in a text Name 34. Name Display the data in a text 35. Phone Display the data in a text 36. Email Display the data in a text 37. FAX Display the data in a text 38. SAVE Should function with Enter Key Error Dialog Box Cursor Positioned on the “SAVE” Text: button or on Mouse Click. “The value entered for On saving the data the data gets saved ‘field name’ is to the database. incorrect. Please enter Validation Check: For the entire field the correct value.” on the carrier general information. Note: The field name Check if the data entered for the should be picked up Carrier General Information is correct. dynamically for the If not throw error message. each field that is Check if there is data populated on the erroneous. Department Contact information field. For general script If yes show a dialog box with message validations for “Would you like to Add the common functionality department contact information before refer saving” Yes/No. BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON If yes allow the user to add the data. System Error: If no save the data without adding the Common Text shall be Department contact information to the followed for the HTML Table. System Error. On Successful saving the flow should Dialog Box Text: automatically be navigated to the next screen. (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_002) 39. Cancel Cancel Button should clear all the content filled on the entry fields.

3.1.3. User Interface ID: Create Product

3.1.3.1. Screen Name: Create Product (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)001_(—)002)

(See Figure H-3)

3.1.3.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being Carrier Carrier navigated Offered Plan Offered Plan Trans Id Text Trans Id Text for Trans Id Trans Id Entry Field Trans Id To Enter Trans Id Plan Name Text Plan Name Text for Plan Name Plan Name Entry Field Plan Name To Enter Plan Name Carrier Name Text Carrier Name Text for Carrier Name Carrier Name Drop Down Carrier Name Lists various Carrier Names. List Line of Text Line of Text for Line of Coverage Coverage Coverage Line of Drop Down Line of Lists various line of coverage offered. Coverage List Coverage Example Medical, Dental, Vision, CAM etc. Plan Type Text Plan Type Text for plan type Plan Type Drop Down Plan Type List the Plan Type available for the line of List coverage selected. Example HMO, PPO, PSO etc. Add Button Add To add the Benefit Level Name to the (HTML HTML table. Button) Table HTML table Table For adding and displaying all the names of the benefit level offered by the carrier Delete Button Delete To delete single or multiple rows of the (HTML benefit level checked Button) Check All Text Link Check All To check all the check boxes in the table Clear All Text Link Clear All To un check all the check boxes checked in the table Enrolment Button Enrolment To Navigate to Enrolment Transmission Screen Premium Button Premium To Navigate to Premium Transmission Screen Delete Check box Delete To check the items for deletion Edit Button Edit To edit the benefit level against the row (HTML selected for edition Button) SAVE Button SAVE Save all the above information to the (HTML repository Submit button) Cancel Button Cancel To reset the entries made in all the fields (HTML reset button)

3.1.3.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text # Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1. Trans Id This name should be brought from the Plan Id is required previous screen PlanId accepts BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_001. alphanumeric values only 2. Line of Coverage Should list various types of Line of Note: The Screen Coverage from the database. should not be Default Line of Coverage should be - refreshed when Choose One - choosing different Subsequent line of coverage should be Line of Coverage. listed alphabetically. Line of Coverage is On choosing the line of coverage required corresponding Plan Type should be listed. On choosing different Line of Coverage the Plan Type List should be refreshed and new set of plan type should be listed for the new line of coverage selected. 3. Plan Type Should list various types of Plan Type Note: The Screen from the database. should not be Plan Type should be Listed refreshed when alphabetically choosing different On choosing the Plan Type Plan Type. Corresponding Benefit Level Should Plan Type is required be listed. On choosing different Plan Type the Benefit Level List should be refreshed and new set of Benefit Level should be listed of the new Plan Type selected. 4. Carrier Name Should be entered Carrier Name is required 5. Plan Name Should be entered Plan Name is required 6. Add Should function with Enter Key Error Dialog Box Cursor Positioned on the “ADD” Text: button or Mouse Click. “The name entered for Check if alternate Benefit Level name alternate Benefit Level is valid. Name is incorrect. If not throw error message. Please enter the Check if there is no duplicate entry for correct name.” the Combination of Line of Coverage, “The is no name Plan Type and Benefit level selected. entered for Benefit If Duplicate Show Error Message Level Name. Please Check if there is blank field if so enter the name.” throw error message Error Dialog Box Success: The items selected with the Text: benefit level name are added to the “The Benefit Level HTML table below (temporary) Name for the combination of Line of Coverage, Plan type and Benefit Level is already entered. Please select other combination.” 7. Table Should have column header and each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. i.e. First row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of any text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. 8. Delete Should function with Enter Key Error Message: Cursor Positioned on the “Delete” “Please choose the button or on Mouse Click. row or rows to be Delete Button should work on deleted.” multiple deletes based on the check box or boxes selected. If the user clicks on the delete button without checking any of the delete check box should throw error message. Success: Deletes the row or rows from the HTML table(temporary storage) 9. Check All On clicking the “Check All” Link all On clicking the the rows with the check box option are “Check All” Link all checked. the rows with the check box option are checked. 10. Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” Link all On clicking the “Clear the rows with the check box option All” Link all the rows checked are unchecked. with the check box option checked are unchecked. 11. Delete Check box option with default “unchecked” 12. Edit Should function with Enter Key Note: All edits that are Cursor Positioned on the “Edit” done on the data from button or on Mouse Click. the repository or On clicking the edit button the row database, history of edited should be removed from the the changes made table and the data should be populated must be available. back on the editable entry field. 13. SAVE Should function with Enter Key System Error: Cursor Positioned on the “SAVE” Common Text shall be button or on Mouse Click. followed for the Validation Check: System Error. Check if there is any data entered in Dialog box: the alternate Benefit Level Name “Would you like to field. Add the Alternate If yes show a dialog box with message Benefit Level name “Would you like to Add the Alternate before saving” Yes/ Benefit Level name before saving” No. Yes/No. If yes allow the user to add the data. If no save the data without adding the Alternate Benefit Level Name to the HTML Table. On saving the data the data gets saved to the database. Success: On Successful saving the flow should be automatically be navigated back to the previous screen. (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_001) 14. Cancel Cancel Button should clear all the content filled on the entry fields.

3.1.4. User Interface ID: Search Carrier Master

3.1.4.1. Screen Name: Search Carrier Master (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)001_(—)003)

(See Figure H-4)

3.1.4.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose

3.1.4.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text # Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1. Carrier name Default option on the list is - Choose One - Lists all the active carrier in alphabetical order 2. View Should function with Enter Key Error Dialog Box Cursor Positioned on the “View” Text: “Please choose button or on Mouse Click. a carrier to view On clicking the View Button if no information” Carrier name is selected then throw an error message. Else Success should navigate to the view page BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_006 with the data pertaining to the carrier selected. 3. Edit Should function with Enter Key Error Dialog Box Cursor Positioned on the “Edit” Text: button or on Mouse Click. “Please choose a carrier to On clicking the Edit Button if no Edit information” Carrier name is choose then throw an error message. Else Success should navigate to the Edit pages BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_004 with the data pertaining to the carrier selected.

3.1.5. User Interface ID: Modify Carrier Master

3.1.5.1. Screen Name: Modify Carrier Master (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)001_(—)004)

(See Figure H-5)

3.1.5.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being Edit Carrier Edit Carrier navigated Master Master Sub Header Text Sub Header Provide Content Area Text Carrier Carrier General General Information Information Sub Header Text Sub Header Text for the Company Address Address Address Company Text Company Text for the entry field Name Name Company Entry Field Company Entry Field for Company name with data Name (Entry Name (Entry filled and editable Field) Field) Address Text Address Text for the Address Address Entry Field Address Entry Field for Address with data filled (Entry Field) (Entry Field) and editable Suite/Apt # Text Suite/Apt # Text for Suite # Suite/Apt # Entry Field Suite/Apt # Entry Field for Suite/Apt #with data (Entry Field) (Entry Field) filled and editable City Text City Text for City City (Entry Entry Field City (Entry Entry Field for City with data filled and Field) Field) editable State Text State Text for state State (Entry Entry Field State (Entry Entry Field for State with data filled and Field) Field) editable ZIP Text ZIP Text for ZIP ZIP (Entry Entry Field ZIP (Entry Entry Field for ZIP with data filled and Field) Field) editable Sub Header Text Sub Header Text for the sub heading Contact Contact Department Department Department Drop Down Department List all the departments for the carrier for List contact information Contact Text Contact Name Text for Contact name Name Salutation Text Salutation Text for salutation First Name Text First Name Text for First name Middle name Text Middle name Text for middle name Last name Text Last name Text for last name Suffix Text Suffix Text for suffix Title Text Title Text for title Salutation Entry Field Salutation Entry Field for salutation First Name Entry Field First Name Entry field for first name Middle name Entry Field Middle name Entry field for middle name Last name Entry Field Last name Entry field for last name Suffix Entry Field Suffix Entry Field for suffix Title Entry Field Title Entry Field for title Address Text Address Text for the Address Address Entry Field Address Entry Field for Address (Entry Field) (Entry Field) Suite/Apt # Text Suite/Apt # Text for Suite # Suite/Apt # Entry Field Suite/Apt # Entry Field for Suite/Apt # (Entry Field) (Entry Field) City Text City Text for City City (Entry Entry Field City (Entry Entry Field for City Field) Field) State Text State Text for state State (Entry Entry Field State (Entry Entry Field for State Field) Field) ZIP Text ZIP Text for ZIP ZIP (Entry Entry Field ZIP (Entry Entry Field for ZIP Field) Field) Mode of Drop Down Mode of List various modes of contact preferred Communication List Communication Phone Text Phone Text for phone FAX Text FAX Text for FAX Email Text Email Text for email Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone number Email Entry Field Email Entry field for email address FAX Entry Field FAX Entry field for FAX ADD Button ADD To add the above details on to the HTML (HTML table below Submit button) Table HTML Table Table Table for adding up the contact information. The table also contains all the contact information already available in a multiple rows. Delete Button Delete To delete the contact information. (HTML Button) Check All Text Link Check All To check all the check boxes in the table Clear All Text Link Clear All To un check all the check boxes checked in the table Delete Check box Delete To check the items for deletion Edit Button Edit To edit the contact information against the (HTML row selected for edition Button) Department Text Department Shows the name of the department added. Name Name For example finance, marketing etc. Last Name Text Last Name Last Name of the contact person Phone Text Phone Phone of the contact person Email Text Email Email address of the contact person FAX Text FAX Fax of the contact person SAVE Button SAVE Save all the above information to the (HTML repository Submit button) CANCEL Button CANCEL Cancels the current operations and sets to (HTML Reset the value as before saving button) EDIT Button EDIT Navigates to the next screen without CARRIER (HTML CARRIER saving the data. The purpose is if the OFFERED Submit OFFERED editing needs to be done for the next PLAN button) PLAN screen (BPI_SCREEN_005) New Button(HTML New To create a new page as first time. button)

3.1.6. User Interface ID: Modify Carrier Product

3.1.6.1. Screen Name: Modify Carrier Product

-   -   (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)001_(—)005)

(See Figure H-6)

3.1.6.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose

3.1.6.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text # Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1. Carrier name This name should be brought from the previous screen BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_004. 2. Line of Coverage Should list various types of Line of Note: The Screen Coverage from the database. should not be Default Line of Coverage should be - refreshed when Choose One - choosing different line Subsequent line of coverage should be of coverage. listed alphabetically. On choosing the line of coverage corresponding Plan Type should be listed. On choosing different Line of Coverage the Plan Type List should be refreshed and new set of plan type should be listed for the new line of coverage selected. 3. Plan Type Should list various types of Plan Type Note: The Screen from the database. should not be Plan Type should be Listed refreshed when alphabetically choosing different On choosing the Plan Type Plan Type. Corresponding Benefit Level Should be listed. On choosing different Plan Type the Benefit Level List should be refreshed and new set of Benefit Level should be listed of the new Plan Type selected. 4. Benefit Level Should list various types of Benefit Level from the database. Benefit Level should be listed alphabetically. 5. Benefit Level The field is used for filling Benefit Name Level Name 6. Alternate name The field is used for entering Error Dialog Box Alternate Benefit Level Name Text: “The value entered for Alternate Benefit Level Name is incorrect. Please enter the correct value.” 7. Add Should function with Enter Key Error Dialog Box Cursor Positioned on the “ADD” Text: button or Mouse Click. “The value entered for Check if Alternate Benefit Level name Benefit Level Name is is valid. incorrect. Please enter If not throw error message. the correct value.” Check if there is no duplicate entry for Embedded Error the Combination of Line of Coverage, Message: Plan Type and Benefit level selected. Show this message on If Duplicate Show Error Message space above the Success: The items selected with the HTML table with benefit level name are added to the RED color. HTML table below (temporary) “The Benefit Level Name for the combination of Line of Coverage, Plan type and Benefit Level is already available. Please select other benefit level.” 8. Table Should have column header and each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. i.e. First row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of any text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. 9. Delete Check box option with default “unchecked” 10. Delete Should function with Enter Key Error Message: Cursor Positioned on the “Delete” “Please choose the button or on Mouse Click. row or rows to be Delete Button should work on deleted.” multiple deletes based on the check box or boxes selected. If the user clicks on the delete button without checking any of the delete check box should throw error message. Note: the delete action should only delete the single or multiple rows selected from the view inside the table. However the data must not be deleted from the database on saving. It should only inactivate the benefit level name/ names selected for deletion. 11. Edit Should function with Enter Key Repository Data Cursor Positioned on the “Edit” should be green in button or on Mouse Click. color and the On clicking the edit button the row Temporary data edited should be removed from the should be red in color. table and the data should be populated back on the editable entry field. 12. SAVE Should function with Enter Key System Error: Cursor Positioned on the “SAVE” Common Text shall be button or on Mouse Click. followed for the Validation Check: System Error. Check if there is any data entered in Dialog box: the Alternate Name field. “Would you like to If yes show a dialog box with message Add the Alternate “Would you like to Add Alternate Benefit Level name Benefit Level name before saving” before saving” Yes/ Yes/No. No. If yes allow the user to add the data. Note: For all the If no save the data without adding the changes made history Benefit Level Name to the HTML of changes should be Table. available for viewing On saving the data the data gets saved via reports for the to the database. specific modules. Success: On Successful saving the flow should be automatically be navigated back to the Search Screen. (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_003) Note: Data must not be deleted from the database on saving. It should only inactivate the benefit level name/ names selected for deletion. 13. Cancel To cancel the previous operation.

3.1.7. User Interface ID: View Carrier Master

3.1.7.1. Screen Name: View Carrier Master (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)001_(—)006)

(See Figure H-7)

3.1.7.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being View Carrier View Carrier navigated Master Master Sub Header Text Sub Header Name for the sub header carrier carrier general general Information Information Carrier name Dynamic Text Carrier name Name of the carrier being viewed Sub Header Text Sub Header Name of the sub header Address Address Company Text Company Text for the entry field Name Name Company Text Company Text for Company name with data filled Name Name Address Text Address Text for the Address Address Entry Field Address Text for Address with data filled Suite/Apt # Text Suite/Apt # Text for Suite # Suite/Apt # Text Suite/Apt # Text for Suite/Apt # with data filled City Text City Text for City City Text City Text for City with data filled State Text State Text for state State Text State Text for State with data filled ZIP Text ZIP Text for ZIP ZIP Text ZIP Text for ZIP with data filled Table HTML Table Table Table for populating the contact details Department Text Department Shows the name of the department added. Name Name For example finance, marketing etc. Name Text Name Name of the contact person Phone Text Phone Phone of the contact person Email Text Email Email address of the contact person FAX Text FAX Fax of the contact person Back HTML Back Submit Button to navigate back to the start Button screen Delete HTML Delete Button to delete the particular record Button currently viewed.

3.1.7.3. Front End Validations

None.

3.1.8. User Interface ID: Search Product

3.1.8.1. Screen Name: Search Product (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)001_(—)007)

(See Figure H-8)

3.1.8.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Search Text Search To give the heading for Product Product the screen being navigated Plan name Text Plan name Title for carrier name Plan name Drop Down Plan name List all the active carrier List names available in the system View HTML View Button to view the Button carrier name selected Edit HTML Edit Button to edit the Button carrier name selected

3.1.8.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text Element # Name Action/Validation Details Message 1. Carrier Default option on the list is - name Choose One - Lists all the active carrier in alphabetical order 2. View Should function with Enter Key Error Dialog Box Cursor Positioned on the “View” Text: “Please choose button or on Mouse Click. a carrier to view On clicking the View Button if no information” Carrier name is selected then throw an error message. Else Success should navigate to the view page BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_006 with the data pertaining to the carrier selected. 3. Edit Should function with Enter Key Error Dialog Box Cursor Positioned on the “Edit” Text: button or on Mouse Click. “Please choose a On clicking the Edit Button if no carrier to Edit Carrier name is choose then information” throw an error message. Else Success should navigate to the Edit pages BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_004 with the data pertaining to the carrier selected.

3.1.9. User Interface ID: View Product Info

3.1.9.1. Screen Name: View Product Info (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)001_(—)008)

(See Figure H-9)

3.1.9.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being Carrier Carrier navigated Product Info Product Info Sub Header Text Sub Header Name for the sub header Plan Info Plan Info Plan Id Text Plan Id Provide Text Plan Id Dynamic Text Plan Id Name of the Plan Id being viewed Plan Name Text Plan Name Provide Text Plan Name Dynamic Text Plan Name Name of the Plan Name being viewed Carrier Name Text Carrier Name Provide Text Carrier Name Dynamic Text Carrier Name Name of the Carrier Name being viewed Line Of Text Line Of Provide Text Coverage Coverage Line Of Dynamic Text Line Of Name of the Line Of Coverage Name Coverage Coverage being viewed Plan Type Text Plan Type Provide Text Plan Type Dynamic Text Plan Type Name of the Plan Type being viewed Carrier name Dynamic Text Carrier name Name of the carrier being viewed Sub Header Text Sub Header Name of the sub header Address Address Table HTML Table Table Table for populating the plan offered Benefit level Text Benefit level For showing the benefit level name name name Product Text Product Name For showing the Product name Name Delete HTML Delete Button to delete the particular record Button currently viewed. Back HTML Back To Navigate to Search Screen Button

3.1.9.3. Front End Validations

None.

3.1.10. Screen Flow

(See Figure H-10)

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification BPI_CAS_FSD_CM_02 Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_CM_02 Version: <1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Nov. 27, 2001 Sudhakar K 1.0 Approved version Apr. 05, 2002 Lala Viswanath 1.1 Approved version Oct. 24, 2002 Riyaz Mohamed 1.2 Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1 Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definition, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2. Process Indentification 5

2.1 Background 5

2.2 Process Describtion & Flow 5

2.2.1. Create Line of Coverage 5

2.2.2. Create Plan Type 5

2.2.3. Create Benefit Level 5

2.2.4. Process Flow Diagrams 7

3. User Interface 8

3.1. User Interface Screens 8

3.1.1. Screen ID's 8

3.1.2. User Interface ID: Create Line of Coverage 8

3.1.3. User Interface ID: Create Plan Type 11

3.1.4. User Interface ID: Create Benefit Level 14

3.1.5. Screen Flow 17

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

This purpose of this document is to identify the process associated with the business use case Create Plan. This document is the amendment of BPI_CAS_FSD_CM_(—)02 (Version 1.0).

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_CM_002 Create M Plan

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1. Background

This process identifies the functionality for creation of Line of Coverage, Plan Type and Benefit Level.

This process is used to create various Line of Coverage, Plan type and benefit level offered by PacAdvantage. Line of coverage includes the coverage offered by PacAdvantage e.g. Medical, Dental, Vision, Chiropractic, Voluntary Medical etc. These classify broad range of all the line of coverage offered.

Plan type includes plan type for specific line of coverage e.g. PPO, HMO, PSO etc.

-   -   Benefit Level specifies the specific benefit level offered for         the line of coverage and plan type e.g. Standard, Preferred,         preferred plus etc.

2.2. Process Description & Flow

2.2.1. Create Line of Coverage

-   -   1. Input Line of Coverage name     -   2. Validate Line of Coverage name     -   3. If yes add the information to a temporary storage.     -   4. If not re enter the information correctly and add again.     -   5. Edit or delete Line of Coverage name     -   6. If erroneous re enter the correct data.     -   7. If Correct then save the data to the repository     -   8. System auto generates a unique identification number for Line         of Coverage

Refer Process Flow Diagram

2.2.2. Create Plan Type

-   -   1. Input Plan Type name     -   2. Validate Plan Type name     -   3. If yes add the information to a temporary storage.     -   4. If not re enter the information correctly and add again.     -   5. Edit or delete Plan Type name     -   6. If erroneous re enter the correct data.     -   7. If Correct then save the data to the repository     -   8. System auto generates a unique identification number for Plan         Type

Refer Process Flow Diagram

2.2.3. Create Benefit Level

-   -   1. Input Benefit Level name     -   2. Validate Benefit Level name     -   3. If yes add the information to a temporary storage.     -   4. If not re enter the information correctly and add again.     -   5. Edit or delete Benefit Level name     -   6. If erroneous re enter the correct data.     -   7. If Correct then save the data to the repository     -   8. System auto generates a unique identification number for         Benefit Level

Refer Process Flow Diagram

2.2.4. Process Flow Diagrams

(See Figure H-11)

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Screen ID's Screen ID (SID) Screen Name Corresponding HTML File Name plan.loc Line of Coverage /bpi/cas/carrier/mplan/LineOfCoverage.jsp plan.plan Plan Type /bpi/cas/carrier/mplan/PlanType.jsp plan.ben Benefit Level /bpi/cas/carrier/mplan/BenefitLevel.jsp

3.1.2. User Interface ID: Create Line of Coverage

3.1.2.1. Screen Name: Create Line of Coverage (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)002_(—)001) (See Figure H-12)

3.1.2.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being Header Line Line of navigated of coverage coverage Line of Text Line of Provide text Coverage Coverage Loc Name Entry Field Loc Name Entering line of coverage Add HTML Add Button for adding the Line of coverage to Button the table below Table HTML table Table For adding and displaying all the names of the Line of Coverage Delete Button Delete To delete the line of Coverage checked (HTML Button) Check All Text Link Check All To check all the check boxes in the table Clear All Text Link Clear All To un check all the check boxes checked in the table Delete Check box Delete To check the items for deletion Edit Button Edit To edit the Line of coverage against the (HTML row selected for edition Button) Save Button Save Save all the above information to the (HTML repository Submit button) Cancel Button Cancel To reset the entries made in all the fields (HTML reset button)

3.1.2.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message— # Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1. Line of This field is used for entering the “Line of Coverage - coverage Entry line of coverage. The Line of Is required.” coverage should be alphanumeric “Line of Coverage - only. The special character Accepts alphanumeric permitted is only space bar values only” between the two words. And can have max length 20. Blank line of coverage not allowed 2. Add On Clicking add button or pressing On click of Add button enter key field with the cursor checks for the above position on the Add button, The mentioned validations + data gets added to the table. “Line of Coverage - Validation checks are done to not Already exists.” allow null value on the entry field (Occurs on duplicate and the entry field should have record entry) only alphanumeric values. Duplicate name for the line of coverage should not be allowed. 3. Table Should have column header and each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. i.e. First row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of any text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. 4. Delete Should function with Enter Key “! Select record(s) for Cursor Positioned on the “Delete” deletion” button or on Mouse Click. (If the operation is in Delete Button should work on Edit Mode & delete multiple deletes based on the operation is invoked) check box or boxes selected. If the user clicks on the delete button without checking any of the delete check box should throw error message. Success: Deletes the row or rows from the table (temporary storage) 5. Check All On clicking the “Check All” link should check all the check boxes in the HTML table. 6. Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link should uncheck all the checked check boxes in the HTML table. 7. Delete Check box option with default Delete Check box is “unchecked” disabled and grayed out if the data in the corresponding row/ rows has child parent relationship. (I.e. it has reference somewhere else in the database.) 8. Edit Should function with Enter Key “! Complete the update Cursor Positioned on the “Edit” process” button or on Mouse Click. (If the operation is already On clicking the edit button the row in Edit Mode & another Edit edited should be disabled and the operation is invoked) data should be populated back on the editable entry field. Note: All data that are from the repository should be in green color. The data that is added and not saved should be in red. The data selected for editing should be displayed in gray. The “Add” button will be changed to “Update” button. 9. Save Should function with Enter Key For general script Cursor Positioned on the “SAVE” validations for common button or on Mouse Click. functionality refer On saving the data the data gets BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON saved to the database. System Error: Check if there is data populated for Common Text shall be editing. If yes show a dialog box followed for the with message “Complete update System Error. Process.” “! Do any operation to save.” (Displayed when invoked immediately after the screen is loaded). “! Complete the update process” (Displayed when Save is invoked in Edit Mode). 10. Cancel Should reset all the entries to previous status before saving. i.e. the fields should be blank. If any of the data has been selected for editing, the same data should appear when cancel button is clicked.

3.1.3. User Interface ID: Create Plan Type

3.1.3.1. Screen Name: Create Plan Type (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)002_(—)002) (See Figure H-13)

3.1.3.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being Header Plan Type navigated Plan Type Plan Type Text Plan Type Provide text Plan type Entry Field Plan type Entering Plan type Entry Entry Add HTML Add Button for adding the Plan Type to the Button table below Table HTML table Table For adding and displaying all the names of the Plan Type Delete Button Delete To delete the Plan Type checked (HTML Button) Check All Text Link Check All To check all the check boxes in the table Clear All Text Link Clear All To un check all the check boxes checked in the table Delete Check box Delete To check the items for deletion Edit Button Edit To edit the Plan Type against the row (HTML selected for edition Button) SAVE Button SAVE Save all the above information to the (HTML repository Submit button) CANCEL Button CANCEL To reset the entries made in all the fields (HTML reset button)

3.1.3.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text # Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1. Plan type Entry This field is used for entering the Plan Error Dialog Box: Type. The Plan Type should be “Plan Name - is alphanumeric only. The special character required” permitted is only space bar between the “Plan Name - Accepts two words. And can have max length 255. alphanumeric values only” Blank line of coverage not allowed 2. Add On Clicking add button or pressing Error Dialog Box: enter key field with the cursor On click of Add button position on the button, The data checks for the above gets added to the table. Validation mentioned validations + checks are done to not allow null “Plan Name - already value on the entry field and the exists.” entry field should have only (Occurs on duplicate alphanumeric values. record entry) 3. Table Should have column header and each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. i.e. First row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of any text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. 4. Delete Should function with Enter Key Error Dialog Box: Cursor Positioned on the “Delete” “! Select record(s) for button or on Mouse Click. deletion” Delete Button should work on “! Complete the update multiple deletes based on the process” check box or boxes selected. If the (If the operation is in user clicks on the delete button Edit Mode & delete without checking any of the delete operation is invoked) check box should throw error message. Success: Deletes the row or rows from the table temporarily. 5. Check All On clicking the “Check All” link should check all the check boxes in the HTML table. 6. Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link should uncheck all the checked check boxes in the HTML table. 7. Delete Check box option with default Delete Check box is “unchecked” disabled and grayed out if the data in the corresponding row/rows has child parent relationship. (i.e. it has reference somewhere else in the database.) 8. Edit Should function with Enter Key “! Complete the update Cursor Positioned on the “Edit” process” button or on Mouse Click. (If the operation is already On clicking the edit button the row in Edit Mode & another Edit edited should be disabled in the operation is invoked) table and the data should be populated back on the editable entry field. Note: All the data inside the table that are available from the repository should be green in color text. The temporary data should be red in color text. The data selected for editing should be displayed in gray. The “Add” button will be changed to “Update” button. 9. Save Should function with Enter Key For general script Cursor Positioned on the “SAVE” validations for common button or on Mouse Click. functionality refer On saving the data the data gets BPI_CAS_FSD_COM saved to the database. MON Check if there is data populated for System Error: editing. If yes show a dialog box Common Text shall be with message “Complete update followed for the Process.” System Error. “! Do any operation to save.” (Displayed when invoked immediately after the screen is loaded). “! Complete the update process.” (Displayed when Save is invoked in Edit Mode). 10. Cancel Should reset to the previous status on clicking the cancel button. i.e. make all the entry field blank. If any of the data has been selected for editing, the same data should appear when cancel button is clicked.

3.1.4. User Interface ID: Create Benefit Level

3.1.4.1. Screen Name: Create Benefit Level (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)002_(—)003) (See Figure H-14)

3.1.4.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being Header Benefit Level navigated Benefit Level Benefit Text Benefit Level Provide text Level Name Name Benefit Entry Field Benefit Level Entering the benefit level name Level Name Name Entry Entry Add HTML Add Button for adding the Benefit Level to the Button table below Table HTML table Table For adding and displaying all the names of the Benefit Level Delete Button Delete To delete the Benefit Level checked (HTML Button) Check All Text Link Check All To check all the check boxes in the table Clear All Text Link Clear All To un check all the check boxes checked in the table Delete Check box Delete To check the items for deletion Edit Button Edit To edit the Benefit Level against the row (HTML selected for edition Button) Save Button Save Save all the above information to the (HTML repository Submit button) Cancel Button Cancel To reset the entries made in all the fields (HTML reset button)

3.1.4.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text # Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1 Benefit Level This field is used for entering the Error Dialog Box: Benefit Level. The Benefit Level “Benefit Level - is should be alphanumeric only. The required” special character permitted is only “Benefit Level - space bar between the two words. Accepts alphanumeric values And can have max length 255. only” Blank line of coverage not allowed 2. Add On Clicking add button or pressing Error Dialog Box: enter key field with the cursor On click of Add button position on the button, The data checks for the above gets added to the table. Validation mentioned validations + checks are done to not allow null “Benefit Level - already value on the entry field and the exists.” entry field should have only alpha (Occurs on duplicate values. record entry) Should check for duplicate entries 3. Table Should have column header and each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. i.e. First row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of any text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. 4. Delete Should function with Enter Key Error Dialog Box: Cursor Positioned on the “Delete” “! Select the record(s) button or on Mouse Click. for deletion” Delete Button should work on “! Complete the update multiple deletes based on the process” check box or boxes selected. If the (If the operation is in user clicks on the delete button Edit Mode & delete without checking any of the delete operation is invoked) check box should throw error message. 5. Check All On clicking the “Check All” link should check all the check boxes in the HTML table. 6. Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link should uncheck all the checked check boxes in the HTML table. 7. Delete Check box option with default Delete Check box is “unchecked” disabled and grayed out if the data in the corresponding row/ rows has child parent relationship. (i.e. it has reference somewhere else in the database.) 8. Edit Should function with Enter Key “! Complete the update Cursor Positioned on the “Edit” process” button or on Mouse Click. (If the operation is already On clicking the edit button the row in Edit Mode & another Edit edited should be removed from the operation is invoked) table and the data should be populated back on the editable entry field. If the data is from the repository show it in green color text. If it is temporary data just added show it in red color text. The data selected for editing should be displayed in gray. The “Add” button will be changed to “Update” button. 9. Save Should function with Enter Key For general script Cursor Positioned on the “Save” validations for common button or on Mouse Click. On functionality refer saving the data the data gets BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON saved to the database. System Error: Check if there is data populated for Common Text shall be editing. If yes show a dialog box followed for the with message “Complete update System Error. Process.” “! Do any operation to save.” (Displayed when invoked immediately after the screen is loaded). “! Complete the update process.” (Displayed when Save is invoked in Edit Mode). 10. Cancel Should reset to the previous status on clicking the cancel button. If any of the data has been selected for editing, the same data should appear when cancel button is clicked.

3.1.5. Screen Flow

The flow of the process is as described below. (See Figure H-15)

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification BPI_CAS_FSD_CM_03 Document ID: BPI_CAS_FSD_CM_03 Version: <1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Nov. 27, 2001 Sudhakar K 1.0 Approved Version Apr. 4, 2002 Lala Viswanath 1.1 Approved Version Oct. 24, 2002 Riyaz Mohamed 1.2 Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbrevations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Background 5

2.2. Process Description & Flow 5

2.2.1. Admin Fee 5

2.2.2. Agent Fee 6

2.2.3. Additional Fee 6

2.2.4. Rate Differential 6

2.2.5. Process Flow Diagrams 7

3. User Interface 9

3.1. User Interface Screens 9

3.1.1. Screen ID's 9

3.1.2. User Interface ID: Rate Classification-Admin Fees 10

3.1.3. User Interface ID: Rate Classification-Search Admin Fees 13

3.1.4. User Interface ID: Rate Classification-View Admin Fees 15

3.1.5. User Interface ID: Rate Classification-Agent Commission 17

3.1.6. User Interface ID: Rate Classification-Search Agent Commision 21

3.1.7. User Interface ID: Rate Classification-View Agent Commission 23

3.1.8. User Interface ID: Rate Classification-Additional Fees 25

3.1.9. User Interface ID: Rate Classification-Search Additional Fees 27

3.1.10. User Interface ID: Rate Classification-View Additonal Fees 30

3.1.11. User Interface ID: Rate Classification-Differential Fees 31

3.1.12. User Interface ID: Rate Classification-Search Differential Fees 33

3.1.13. User Interface ID: Rate Classification-View Differential Fees 36

3.1.14. Screen Flow 38

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

This purpose of this document is to identify the process associated with the business use case Create Rate Master. This document is the amendment of BPI_CAS_FSD_CM_(—)03 (Version 1.1).

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_CM_003 Create Rate Master

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1. Background

This process describes the Use Case “Rate Master”.

Rate Master is used to upload all the rates for the products (Benefits) provided by individual health insurance provider (Carrier). The individual rate files are provided by PacAdvantage with the rate for all the products offered by all the carriers in a specific file format. This Process for loading the rates would be covered in the Document Reference No: BPI_CAS_FSD_EC

The rates are normally classified as blended rates and raw rates.

Raw rates would include only the premium rates for the products offered.

Blended rate would include the sum total of the entire raw rate, admin fees, agent commission additional fees and Differential Fees. The rate classification would define the formula for calculating the blended rate for the product under offering. Using the administrative screens the classification of rates for arriving to these calculations is provided.

Admin Fees: Further Admin fees can be of two types % of the premium or a fixed flat $ amount.

Agent Commission: Agent commission can be a % of premium or a flat $ amount per member or a flat $ amount per group size.

Additional Fees: Additional Fees can be a % premium or flat $ amount for the carrier.

Differential Fees: The amount type for Differential Rate should include Flat $ amount as Flat $ amount per member and also Flat $ amount per Group. When the Flat $ amount is per group it should be able to specify group size.

The state is divided into several service areas based on the number of counties and their population. In the state of California there are presently 6 service areas. The Rate is based on the service area where the employees are residing. Also there are cases when the ZIP code has two or more Service Areas. Under these conditions the ZIP code should be attached to those services areas from where the rates are to be picked.

2.2. Process Description & Flow

2.2.1. Admin Fee

The flow of the process is as described below.

-   -   1. Input the rate type information.     -   2. Validate if the rate type information has the right data         type.     -   3. If Correct then save the data to the repository.     -   4. Search admin fee records.     -   5. Select a record in modify mode     -   6. Edit the rate type information.     -   7. Validate if the rate type information has the right data         type.     -   8. If Correct then save the data to the repository.     -   9. Search admin fee records.     -   10. Select a record in view/delete mode     -   11. View the selected admin fee     -   12. Delete the selected admin fee from the repository.

Refer Process Flow Diagram FIG. 1.

2.2.2. Agent Fee

The flow of the process is as described below.

-   -   1. Input the rate type information.     -   2. Validate if the rate type information has the right data         type.     -   3. If Correct then save the data to the repository.     -   4. Search agent fee records.     -   5. Select a record in modify mode     -   6. Edit the rate type information.     -   7. Validate if the rate type information has the right data         type.     -   8. If Correct then save the data to the repository.     -   9. Search agent fee records.     -   10. Select a record in view/delete mode     -   11. View the selected agent fee.     -   12. Delete the selected agent fee from the repository.

Refer Process Flow Diagram FIG. 2.

2.2.3. Additional Fee

The flow of the process is as described below.

-   -   1. Input the rate type information.     -   2. Validate if the rate type information has the right data         type.     -   3. If Correct then save the data to the repository.     -   4. Search additional fee records.     -   5. Select a record in modify mode     -   6. Edit the rate type information.     -   7. Validate if the rate type information has the right data         type.     -   8. If Correct then save the data to the repository.     -   9. Search additional fee records.     -   10. Select a record in view/delete mode     -   11. View the selected additional fee.     -   12. Delete the selected additional fee from the repository.

Refer Process Flow Diagram FIG. 3.

2.2.4. Rate Differential

The flow of the process is as described below.

-   -   1. Input the rate type information.     -   2. Validate if the rate type information has the right data         type.     -   3. If Correct then save the data to the repository.     -   4. Search rate differential records.     -   5. Select a record in modify mode     -   6. Edit the rate type information.     -   7. Validate if the rate type information has the right data         type.     -   8. If Correct then save the data to the repository.     -   9. Search rate differential records.     -   10. Select a record in view/delete mode     -   11. View the selected rate differential.     -   12. Delete the selected rate differential from the repository.

Refer Process Flow Diagram FIG. 4.

2.2.5. Process Flow Diagrams

(See Figure H-16)

(See Figure H-17)

(See Figure H-18)

(See Figure H-19)

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Screen ID's Corresponding HTML File Screen ID (SID) Screen Name Name rate.admin Admin Fees /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AdminFee.jsp rate.admin.search Search Admin Fees /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AdminFeeSearch.jsp rate.admin.view View Admin Fees /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AdminFee View.jsp rate.admin.confirm Confirm Admin Fees /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AdminFee Confirm.jsp rate.agent Agent Commission /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AgentFee.jsp rate.agent.search Search Agent Commission /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AgentFeeSearch.jsp rate.agent.view View Agent Commission /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AgentFeeView.jsp rate.agent.confirm Confirm Agent Commission /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AgentFeeConfirm.jsp rate.add Additional Fees /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AdditionalFee.jsp rate.add.search Search Additional Fees /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AdditionalFee Search.jsp rate.add.view View Additional Fees /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AdditionalFee View.jsp rate.add.confirm Confirm Additional Fees /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AdditionalFee Confirm.jsp rate.ratediff Differential Fees /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/Differential Rate.jsp rate.ratediff.search Search Differential Fees /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/Differential RateSearch.jsp rate.ratediff.view View Differential Fees /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/Differential RateView.jsp rate.ratediff.confirm Confirm Differential Fees /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/Differential RateConfirm.jsp

3.1.2. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—Admin Fees

3.1.2.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—Admin Fees (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)003_(—)001) (See Figure H-20)

3.1.2.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Text Main Header To give heading for the screen being Header rate rate navigated Classification Classification for Admin for Admin Fees Fees Rate Type Radio Rate Type To Select a rate type (Whether Blended or Non Blended) Rate Type Radio Rate Type To Select a rate type (Whether Enroll or Renew) Group Type Drop Down Group Type List all the Group Type Available in the List system Association Drop Down Association List all the Association Type Available ID List ID in the system Member Radio Member To Select a Member type (Whether Type Type Individual or Association) Percentage Entry Field Percentage Entry field for entering % premium Premium Premium Effective Entry Field Effective To choose the date required, by Date Date calendar or entering it Amount Entry Field Amount Entry field for entering Amount in $ Medical Entry Field Medical Entry field for entering the Medical Fee in $ Dental Entry Field Dental Entry field for entering the Dental Fee in $ Vision Entry Field Vision Entry field for entering the Vision Fee in % CAM Entry Field CAM Entry field for entering the CAM Fee in % Save Button Save Save all the above information to the (HTML repository Submit button) Cancel Button Cancel To reset the entries made in all the (HTML reset fields Button)

3.1.2.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text # Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1. Rate Type Rate Type should be selected for “Rate Type - Is Adding Admin Fees(Either one of required” Blended Rate or Non Blended Rate) and (Either one of Enroll or Renew). 2. Group Type Should list all the Group Type “Group Type - Is within the system required” The first option should be - Choose One -. Subsequent Group Types should be listed in alphabetical order 3. Association Id Should list all the Association Id “Association Id - Is within the system. The first option required” should be - Choose One -. Subsequent Group Types should be listed in alphabetical 4. Member Type Member Type should be selected “Member Type - Is for Adding Admin Fees if Group required. Select either Type is Guaranteed Association. Individual Member or Association Group” 5. Percentage Percentage Premium should be “Percentage Premium entered if the rate type is Blended Premium - Is Required” “Percentage Premium - Accepts numeric value only (0 to 100)” 6. Effective Date Effective Date should be selected “Effective Date - Is from Calendar or entered required” For valid Date Format “Effective Date - Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common Accepts the format in MM/DD/YYYY” 7. Amount Amount should be entered if the “Amount - Is rate type is Non Blended required” “Amount - Accepts currency format only (###.##) 8. Medical Medical should be entered if the “Medical - Is rate type is Non Blended required” “Medical - Accepts currency format only (###.##)” 9. Dental Medical should be entered if the “Dental - Is rate type is Non Blended required” “Dental - Accepts currency format only (###.##)” 10. Vision Medical should be entered if the “Vision - Is rate type is Non Blended required” “Vision - Accepts numeric value only (0 to 100)” 11. CAM Medical should be entered if the “CAM - Is required” rate type is Non Blended “CAM - Accepts numeric value only (0 to 100)” 12. Save Should function with Enter Key For general script Cursor Positioned on the “SAVE” validations for button or on Mouse Click. common On saving the data the data gets functionality refer saved to the database. BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Should there be any validation System Error: error on any of the fields. Should Common Text shall show the script error and place the be followed for the cursor on the specific entry field. System Error. Check if the entries are not “! Do any operation to duplicate. save.” On Successful saving the flow (Displayed when should reside in the same screen. invoked immediately Exception: If the data selected for after the screen is edition is from the repository retain loaded). its previous state. i.e. the data “! Complete the update should be visible in the table after process.” saving. (Displayed when Save is Also show different text color for invoked in Edit Mode). the data added (temporary) and the data picked from the repository. 13. Cancel Should reset to the previous state on clicking the cancel button

3.1.3. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—Search Admin Fees

3.1.3.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—Search Admin Fees (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)003_(—)002) (See Figure H-21)

3.1.3.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Text Main Header To give heading for the screen being Header rate rate navigated Classification Classification for Admin for Admin Fees Fees Rate Type Radio Rate Type To Select a rate type (Whether Blended or Non Blended) Rate Type Radio Rate Type To Select a rate type (Whether Enroll or Renew) Group Type Drop Down Group Type List all the Group Type Available in the List system Association Drop Down Association List all the Association Type Available ID List ID in the system Percentage Entry Field Percentage Entry field for entering % premium Premium Premium Effective Entry Field Effective To choose the date required, by Date Date calendar or entering it Search HTML Search Button to search the data based on Button inputs and displays the results in HTML table below Table HTML table Table Shows the all the data in the column format View/ Button View/ Button to view the selected record Delete (HTML Delete data Button) Check Radio Button Check Index To check the items for modify, view Index and deletion Edit Button (HTML Edit To edit the data against the row Button) selected for edition Cancel Button Cancel To reset the entries made in all the (HTML fields Button)

3.1.3.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text # Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1 Effective Date Effective Date should be selected “Effective Date - from Calendar or entered Accepts the format in For valid Date Format MM/DD/YYYY” Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 2 Search Should function with Enter Key On click of Search Cursor Positioned on the “Search” button checks for the button or Mouse Click. above mentioned All the entries are valid. It fetches validations the records from repository based on inputs and displays the records in the table below. Else throws error dialog box. 3 Table Should have column header and each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. I.e. first row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of the text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. 4 View/Delete Should function with Enter Key “! Select any one of Cursor Positioned on the “View/ the record” Delete” button or on Mouse Click. If the user clicks on the view button without checking any of the view radio button should throw error message. Success: View the current row from the table. 5 Modify Should function with Enter Key Cursor Positioned on the “Modify” button or on Mouse Click. On clicking the modify button the row is edited and the data should be populated. 5 Cancel Should reset to the previous state on clicking the cancel button

3.1.4. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—View Admin Fees

3.1.4.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—View Admin Fees (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)003_(—)003) (See Figure H-22)

3.1.4.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Text Main Header To give heading for the Header rate rate screen being navigated Classification Classification for Admin for Admin Fees Fees Rate Type Text Field Rate Type Displays Blended or Non Blended rates Enroll Text Field Enroll Displays Enroll or Renew Renew Renew Group Type Text Field Group Type Displays Group Type Association Text Field Association Displays Association Type ID ID Member Text Field Member Displays Individual or Type Type Association Percentage Text Field Percentage Displays % premium Premium Premium Effective Text Field Effective Displays Effective date Date Date Amount Text Field Amount Displays Amount in $ Medical Text Field Medical Displays Medical Fee in $ Dental Text Field Dental Displays Dental Fee in $ Vision Text Field Vision Displays Vision Fee in % CAM Text Field CAM Displays CAM Fee in % Delete Button Delete To delete the data (HTML Button) New Admin Button New Admin Go to New Admin fee fees (HTML fees screen Button)

3.1.4.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text Element # Name Action/Validation Details Message 1 Delete Should function with Enter Key “Do you want to Cursor Positioned on the “Delete” delete the selected button or on Mouse Click. record?” If the user clicks on the delete button throw message box. Success: Deletes the row from the data base 2 New Admin Should go to the admin fees Fees screen clicking the New Admin Fees button

3.1.5. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—Agent Commission

3.1.5.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—Agent Commission (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)003_(—)004) (See Figure H-23)

3.1.5.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Text Main Header To give heading for the screen being Header rate rate navigated Classification Classification for Agent for Agent Fees Fees Rate Type Radio Rate Type To Select a rate type (Whether Blended or Non Blended) Rate Type Radio Rate Type To Select a rate type (Whether Enroll or Renew) Enrolled Check Box Enrolled To be checked if enrolled before 1997. before 1997 before 1997 Group Type Drop Down Group Type List all the Group Type Available in the List system Association Drop Down Association List all the Association Type Available ID List ID in the system Member Radio Member To Select a Member type (Whether Type Type Individual or Association) Percentage Entry Field Percentage Entry field for entering % premium Premium Premium Effective Entry Field Effective To choose the date required by Date Date calendar or entering Group Size Entry Field Group Size Entry field for entering Group size Lower Limit Lower Limit Lower limit. Group Size Entry Field Group Size Entry field for entering Group size Upper Limit Upper Limit Upper limit. Amount Entry Field Amount Entry field for entering Amount in $ Medical Entry Field Medical Entry field for entering the Medical Fee in $ Dental Entry Field Dental Entry field for entering the Dental Fee in $ Vision Entry Field Vision Entry field for entering the Vision Fee in % CAM Entry Field CAM Entry field for entering the CAM Fee in % Save Button Save Save all the above information to the (HTML repository Button) Cancel Button Cancel To reset the entries made in all the (HTML fields Button)

3.1.5.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text • Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1. Rate Type Rate Type should be selected for “Rate Type - Is Adding Agent Fees (Either one of Required” Blended or Non Blended Rate and Either one of Enroll or Renew) 2. Enrolled before Should be selected if enrolled 1997 before 1997. 3. Group Type Should list all the Group Type “Group Type - Is within the system required” The first option should be - Choose One -. Subsequent Group Types should be listed in alphabetical order 4. Association Id Should list all the Association Id “Association Id - Is within the system. The first option required” should be - Choose One -. Subsequent Group Types should be listed in alphabetical 5. Member Type Member Type should be selected “Member Type - Is for Adding Agent Fees if Group required. Select Type is Guaranteed Association. Individual Member or Association Group.” 6. Percentage Percentage Premium should be “Percentage Premium entered if the rate type is Blended Premium” - Is required “Percentage Premium in - Accepts numeric values only (0 to 100)” 7. Effective Date Effective Date should be selected “Effective Date - Is from Calendar or entered required” For valid Date Format “Effective Date - Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common Accepts the format in MM/DD/YYYY” 8. Group Size Group Size Lower Limit should be “Group Size Lower Lower Limit entered if the rate type is Non Limit - Is required” Blended “Group Size Lower limit - Accepts numeric values only (1-999)” 9. Group Size Group Size Upper Limit should be “Group Size Upper Upper Limit entered if the rate type is Non Limit - Is required” Blended “Group Size Upper Limit—Accepts numeric values only (1-999)” “Kindly enter Group Size Upper limit greater than Lower Limit” 10. Amount Amount should be entered if the “Amount - Is rate type is Non Blended required” “Amount - Accepts currency format only (###.##) 11. Medical Medical should be entered if the “Medical - Is rate type is Non Blended required” “Medical - Accepts currency format only (###.##)” 12. Dental Medical should be entered if the “Dental - Is rate type is Non Blended required” “Dental - Accepts currency format only (###.##)” 13. Vision Medical should be entered if the “Vision - Is rate type is Non Blended required” “Vision - Accepts numeric value only (0 to 100)” 14. CAM Medical should be entered if the “CAM - Is required” rate type is Non Blended “CAM - Accepts numeric value only (0 to 100)” 15. Save Should function with Enter Key For general script Cursor Positioned on the “SAVE” validations for button or on Mouse Click. common On saving the data the data gets functionality refer saved to the database. BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Should there be any validation System Error: error on any of the fields. Should Common Text shall show the script error and place the be followed for the cursor on the specific entry field. System Error. Check if the entries are not “! Do any operation to duplicate. save.” On Successful saving the flow (Displayed when should reside in the same screen. invoked immediately Exception: If the data selected for after the screen is edition is from the repository retain loaded). its previous state. I.e. the data should be visible in the table after saving. 16. Cancel Should reset to the previous state on clicking the cancel button

3.1.6. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—Search Agent Commission

3.1.6.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—Search Agent Commission (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)003_(—)005) (See Figure H-24) Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Text Main Header To give heading for the screen being Header rate rate navigated Classification Classification for Agent for Agent Fees Fees Rate Type Radio Rate Type To Select a rate type (Whether Blended or Non Blended) Enroll/ Radio Enroll/ To Select a rate type (Whether Enroll Renew Renew or Renew) Group Type Drop Down Group Type List all the Group Type Available in the List system Association Drop Down Association List all the Association Type Available ID List ID in the system Effective Entry Field Effective To choose the date required by Date Date calendar or entering Group Size Entry Field Group Size Entry field for entering Group size Lower Limit Lower Limit Lower limit. Group Size Entry Field Group Size Entry field for entering Group size Upper Limit Upper Limit Upper limit. Search HTML Search Button to search the data based on Button inputs and displays the results in HTML table below Table HTML table Table Shows the all the data in the column format View/ Button View/ Button to view the selected record Delete (HTML Delete data Button) Check Radio Button Check Index To check the items for modify, view Index and deletion Modify Button (HTML Modify To edit the data against the row Button) selected for edition Cancel Button Cancel To reset the entries made in all the (HTML fields Button)

3.1.6.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text • Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1 Effective Date Effective Date should be selected “Effective Date - from Calendar or entered Accepts the format in For valid Date Format MM/DD/YYYY” Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 2 Group Size Group Size Lower Limit should be “Group Size Lower Lower Limit entered if the rate type is Non limit- Accepts Blended numeric values only (1-999)” 3 Group Size Group Size Upper Limit should be “Group Size Upper Upper Limit entered if the rate type is Non Limit- Accepts Blended numeric values only (1-999)” “Kindly enter Group Size Upper limit greater than Lower Limit” 4 Search Should function with Enter Key On click of Search Cursor Positioned on the “Search” button checks for the button or Mouse Click. above mentioned validations All the entries are valid. It fetches the records from repository based on inputs and displays the records in the table below. Else throws error dialog box. 5 Table Should have column header and each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. I.e. first row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of the text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. 6 View/Delete Should function with Enter Key “! Select any one of Cursor Positioned on the “View/ the record” Delete” button or on Mouse Click. If the user clicks on the view button without checking any of the view radio button should throw error message. Success: View the current row from the table. 7 Modify Should function with Enter Key “! Select any one of Cursor Positioned on the “Modify” the record” button or on Mouse Click. On clicking the modify button the row is edited and the data should be populated. 8 Cancel Should reset to the previous state on clicking the cancel button

3.1.7. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—View Agent Commission

3.1.7.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—View Agent Commission (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)003_(—)006) (See Figure H-25)

3.1.7.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Text Main Header To give heading for the Header rate rate screen being navigated Classification Classification for Agent for Agent Fees Fees Rate Type Text Field Rate Type To Display rate type (Whether Blended or Non Blended) Enroll Type Text Field Enroll Type To Display enroll type (Whether Enroll or Renew) Enrolled Text Field Enrolled To Display enrolled before before 1997 before 1997 1997 or not. Group Type Text Field Group Type To Display Group Type Association Text Field Association To Display Association ID ID Type Member Text Field Member To Display member type Type Type (Individual or Association) Percentage Text Field Percentage To Display % premium Premium Premium Effective Text Field Effective To Display Effective date Date Date Group Size Text Field Group Size To Display Group size Lower Limit Lower Limit Lower limit. Group Size Text Field Group Size To Display Group size Upper Limit Upper Limit Upper limit. Amount Text Field Amount To Display Amount in $ Medical Text Field Medical To Display Medical Fee in $ Dental Text Field Dental To Display Dental Fee in $ Vision Text Field Vision To Display Vision Fee in % CAM Text Field CAM To Display CAM Fee in % Delete Button Delete To delete the data (HTML Button) New Agent Button New Agent To go to New Agent fees Fees (HTML Fees screen Button)

3.1.7.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text • Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1 Delete Should function with Enter Key “Do you want Cursor Positioned on the “Delete” to delete the button or on Mouse Click. selected If the user clicks on the delete record?” button throw message box. Success: Deletes the row from the data base 2 New Agent Should go to the agent fees screen Fees clicking the New Agent Fees button

3.1.8. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—Additional Fees

3.1.8.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—Additional Fees (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)003_(—)007) (See Figure H-26)

3.1.8.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Text Main Header To give heading for the Header rate rate screen being navigated Classification Classification for for Additional Additional Fees Fees Cobra Type Radio Cobra Type To Select a Cobra Type (Whether Cal Cobra or Federal Cobra) Additional Entry Field Additional Entry field for entering Fee Fee % Additional Fees Percentage Percentage Effective Entry Field Effective To choose the date Date Date required by calendar or entering Save Button Save Save all the above (HTML information to the Button) repository Cancel Button Cancel To reset the entries (HTML made in all the fields Button)

3.1.8.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text • Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1. Cobra Type Cobra Type should be selected for “Kindly choose Cobra” Adding Additional Fees 2. Additional Fee Additional Fee Percentage should “% Of Additional Fees - Percentage be entered. Is required” “% of Additional Fees - Accepts numeric value only (0 to 100) 3. Effective Date Effective Date should be selected “Effective Date - Is from Calendar or entered required” For valid Date Format “Effective Date - Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common Accepts the format in MM/DD/YYYY” 4. Save Should function with Enter Key For general script Cursor Positioned on the “SAVE” validations for button or on Mouse Click. common On saving the data the data gets functionality refer saved to the database. BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Should there be any validation System Error: error on any of the fields. Should Common Text shall show the script error and place the be followed for the cursor on the specific entry field. System Error. Check if the entries are not “! Do any operation to duplicate. save.” On Successful saving the flow (Displayed when should reside in the same screen. invoked immediately Exception: If the data selected for after the screen is edition is from the repository retain loaded). its previous state. I.e. the data should be visible in the table after saving. 5. Cancel Should reset to the previous state on clicking the cancel button

3.1.9. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—Search Additional Fees

3.1.9.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—Search Additional Fees (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)003_(—)008) (See Figure H-27)

3.1.9.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Text Main Header To give heading for the Header rate rate screen being navigated Classification Classification for for Additional Additional Fees Fees Cobra Type Radio Cobra Type To Select a Cobra Type (Whether Cal Cobra or Federal Cobra) Additional Entry Field Additional Entry field for entering Fee Fee % Additional Fees Percentage Percentage Effective Entry Field Effective To choose the date Date Date required by calendar or entering Search HTML Search Button to search the Button data based on inputs and displays the results in HTML table below Table HTML table Table Shows the all the data in the column format View/ Button View/ Button to view the Delete (HTML Delete selected record data Button) Check Radio Button Check Index To check the items for Index modify, view and deletion Modify Button Modify To edit the data (HTML against the row selected Button) for edition Cancel Button Cancel To reset the entries (HTML made in all the fields Button)

3.1.9.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text • Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1 Additional Fee Additional Fee Percentage should “% of Additional Fees - Percentage be entered. Accepts numeric value only (0 to 100) 2 Effective Date Effective Date should be selected “Effective Date - from Calendar or entered Accepts the format in For valid Date Format MM/DD/YYYY” Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 3 Search Should function with Enter Key On click of Search Cursor Positioned on the “Search” button checks for the button or Mouse Click. above mentioned validations All the entries are valid. It fetches the records from repository based on inputs and displays the records in the table below. Else throws error dialog box. 4 Table Should have column header and each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. I.e. first row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of the text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. 5 View/Delete Should function with Enter Key “! Select any one of Cursor Positioned on the “View/ the record” Delete” button or on Mouse Click. If the user clicks on the view button without checking any of the view radio button should throw error message. Success: View the current row from the table. 6 Modify Should function with Enter Key “! Select any one of Cursor Positioned on the “Modify” the record” button or on Mouse Click. On clicking the modify button the row is edited and the data should be populated. 7 Cancel Should reset to the previous state on clicking the cancel button

3.1.10. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—View Additional Fees

3.1.10.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—View Additional Fees (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)003_(—)009) (See Figure H-28)

3.1.10.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Text Main Header To give heading for the Header rate rate screen being navigated Classification Classification for for Additional Additional Fees Fees Cobra Type Text Field Cobra Type To Display Cobra Type (Whether Cal Cobra or Federal Cobra) Additional Text Field Additional To Display % Additional Fee Fee Fees Percentage Percentage Effective Text Field Effective To Display Effective date Date Date New HTML New Button to go to new Additional Button Additional Additional fees Fees Fees Delete Button Delete To delete the current (HTML additional fees data Button)

3.1.10.3. Front End Validations • Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1 Delete Should function with Enter Key “Do you Cursor Positioned on the “Delete” want to button or on Mouse Click. delete the If the user clicks on the delete selected button throw message box. record?” Success: Deletes the row from the data base 2 New Additional Should go to the additional fees Fees screen clicking the New additional Fees button

3.1.11. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—Differential Fees

3.1.11.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—Differential Fees (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)003_(—)010) (See Figure H-29)

3.1.11.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Text Main Header To give heading for the Header rate rate screen being navigated Classification Classification for for Differential Differential Factor Factor Group Size Entry Field Group Size Entry field for entering Lower Limit Lower Limit Group size Lower limit. Group Size Entry Field Group Size Entry field for entering Upper Limit Upper Limit Group size Upper limit. Differential Entry Field Differential Entry field for entering Factor Factor Differential Factor Effective Entry Field Effective To choose the date Date Date required by calendar or entering Applicable Radio Applicable To Select a Applicable For For For (Whether New Business Only or New Business or Renewal) Group Size Radio Group Size To Select a Group Criteria Criteria Size Criteria (Whether Eligible Employee or Enrolled Employee) Save Button Save Save all the above (HTML information to the Submit repository button) Cancel Button Cancel To reset the entries (HTML reset made in all the fields Button)

3.1.11.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text • Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1. Group Size Group Size Lower Limit should be “Group Size Lower Lower Limit entered. Limit - Is required” “Group Size Lower limit- Accepts numeric values only (1-999)” 2. Group Size Group Size Upper Limit should be “Group Size Upper Upper Limit entered. Limit - Is required” “Group Size Upper Limit- Accepts numeric values only (1-999)” “Kindly enter Group Size Upper limit greater than Lower Limit” 3. Differential Differential Factor should be “Differential Factor - Is Factor entered. required” “Differential Factor - Accepts numeric values only.” “Differential Factor - Cannot be Zero” 4. Effective Date Effective Date should be selected “Effective Date - Is from Calendar or entered required” For valid Date Format “Effective Date - Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common Accepts the format in MM/DD/YYYY” 5. Save Should function with Enter Key For general script Cursor Positioned on the “SAVE” validations for button or on Mouse Click. common On saving the data the data gets functionality refer saved to the database. BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Should there be any validation System Error: error on any of the fields. Should Common Text shall show the script error and place the be followed for the cursor on the specific entry field. System Error. Check if the entries are not “! Do any operation to duplicate. save.” On Successful saving the flow (Displayed when should reside in the same screen. invoked immediately after the screen is loaded).

3.1.12. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—Search Differential Fees

3.1.12.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—Search Differential Fees (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)003_(—)011) (See Figure H-30)

3.1.12.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Text Main Header To give heading for the screen being Header rate rate navigated Classification Classification for for Differential Differential Factor Factor Group Size Entry Field Group Size Entry field for entering Group size Lower Limit Lower Limit Lower limit. Group Size Entry Field Group Size Entry field for entering Group size Upper Limit Upper Limit Upper limit. Differential Entry Field Differential Entry field for entering Differential Factor Factor Factor Effective Entry Field Effective To choose the date required by Date Date calendar or entering Applicable Radio Applicable To Select a Applicable For (Whether For For New Business Only or New Business or Renewal) Group Size Radio Group Size To Select a Group Size Criteria Criteria Criteria (Whether Eligible Employee or Enrolled Employee) Search HTML Search Button to search the data based on Button inputs and displays the results in HTML table below Table HTML table Table Shows the all the data in the column format View/ Button View/ Button to view the selected record Delete (HTML Delete data Button) Check Radio Button Check Index To check the items for modify, view Index and deletion Modify Button (HTML Modify To edit the data against the row Button) selected for edition Cancel Button Cancel To reset the entries made in all the (HTML fields Button)

3.1.12.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text • Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1 Group Size Group Size Lower Limit should “Group Size Lower Lower Limit accept numeric. limit- Accepts numeric values only (1-999)” 2 Group Size Group Size Upper Limit should “Group Size Upper Upper Limit accept numeric. Limit- Accepts numeric values only (1-999)” “Kindly enter Group Size Upper limit greater than Lower Limit” 3 Differential Differential Factor should accept “Differential Factor - Factor numeric.. Accepts numeric values only.” 4 Effective Date Effective Date should be selected “Effective Date - from Calendar or entered Accepts the format in For valid Date Format MM/DD/YYYY” Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 5 Search Should function with Enter Key On click of Search Cursor Positioned on the “Search” button checks for the button or Mouse Click. above mentioned validations All the entries are valid. It fetches the records from repository based on inputs and displays the records in the table below. Else throws error dialog box. 6 Table Should have column header and each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. I.e. first row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of the text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. 7 View/Delete Should function with Enter Key “! Select any one of the Cursor Positioned on the “View/ record” Delete” button or on Mouse Click. If the user clicks on the view button without checking any of the view radio button should throw error message. Success: View the current row from the table. 8 Modify Should function with Enter Key “! Select any one of Cursor Positioned on the “Modify” the record” button or on Mouse Click. On clicking the modify button the row is edited and the data should be populated. 9 Cancel Should reset to the previous state on clicking the cancel button

3.1.13. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—View Differential Fees

3.1.13.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—View Differential Fees (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)003_(—)012) (See Figure H-31)

3.1.13.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Text Main Header To give heading for the Header rate rate screen being navigated Classification Classification for for Differential Differential Factor Factor Group Size Text Field Group Size To Display Group size Lower Limit Lower Limit Lower limit. Group Size Text Field Group Size To Display Group size Upper Limit Upper Limit Upper limit. Differential Text Field Differential To Display Factor Factor Differential Factor Effective Text Field Effective To Display Effective date Date Date Applicable Text Field Applicable To Display Applicable For For For (Whether New Business Only or New Business or Renewal) Group Size Text Field Group Size To Display Group Criteria Criteria Size Criteria (Whether Eligible Employee or Enrolled Employee) New Button New To go to Differential Differential (HTML Differential rate screen. Rate Button) Rate Delete Button Delete To delete the current (HTML Differential fee Button)

3.1.13.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text • Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1 Delete Should function with Enter Key “Do you want Cursor Positioned on the “Delete” to delete the button or on Mouse Click. selected If the user clicks on the delete record?” button throw message box. Success: Deletes the row from the data base 2 New Should go to the agent fees screen Differential clicking the New Differential Fees Fees button

3.1.14. Screen Flow

(See Figure H-32)

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification BPI_CAS_FSD_CM_04 Document ID: BPI_CAS_FSD_04 Version: <1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Nov. 27, 2001 Sudhakar K 1.0 Approved Version Apr. 04, 2002 Lala Viswanath 1.1 Approved Version Oct. 24, 2002 Riyaz Mohamed 1.2 Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Content

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Background 5

2.2. Process Description & Flow 5

2.2.1. Zip Code Search 5

2.2.2. Zip Distance 5

2.2.3. Process Flow Diagrams 6

3. User Interface 7

3.1. User Interface Screens 7

3.1.1. Screen ID's 7

3.1.2. User Interface ID: Zip Search 7

3.2. Screen Flow 10

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

This purpose of this document is to identify the process associated with the business use case Create ZIP. This document is the amendment of BPI_CAS_FSD_CM_(—)04 (Version 1.0).

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_CM_004 Create ZIP

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1. Background

This process describes the Use Case “Create ZIP”. Standard ZIP is loaded into the system. Refer the document reference no. BPI_CAS_FSC_EC for process of loading ZIP Code. Also for the specific ZIP Codes the corresponding service areas are loaded. The state is divided into several service areas based on the number of counties and their population. In the state of California there are presently 6 service areas. The Rate is based on the service area where the employees are residing.

2.2. Process Description & Flow

2.2.1. Zip Code Search

The Screen described below has two features provided:

Zip code search feature is by which the user can search for zip based on any of the selection criteria. Search for zip is based on City name, County name or a Valid Zip code. When user enters the search value, search results are displayed on a table format.

There is also provision for canceling the search value. Numbers of records fetched are also displayed on the screen.

There is also a feature to print the records fetched. A separate page is invoked on clicking the printer icon. The print page has the fetched records with print button. Clicking on which will invoke the printer dialog.

User can view records in Normal as well as Expanded mode. Expanded mode can be invoked by clicking the gif in the table header.

2.2.2. Zip Distance

Zip Distance feature is by which user can get the distance of the zip codes entered .Zip distance is calculated based on the geographical distribution of the area by its latitudinal & longitudinal position. The result is displayed in miles.

The user interface for Zip is provided below. The two screenshots is the same screen shown to describe these two features.

2.2.3. Process Flow Diagrams

(See Figure H-33)

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Screen ID's Screen ID Corresponding HTML File (SID) Screen Name Name zip.zipsearch Zip Search /bpi/cas/carrier/zip/ZipSearch.jsp

3.1.2. User Interface ID: Zip Search

3.1.2.1. Screen Name: Zip Search (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)004_(—)001) (See Figure H-34)

Zip Distance: BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_(—)004_(—)002 (See Figure H-35)

3.1.2.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Text Main Header To give heading for the screen Header Searching being navigated Searching ZIPS ZIPS City Text City Provide Text City Radio City To choose a city for search County Text County Provide Text County Radio County To choose a county for search ZIP Text ZIP Provide Text ZIP Radio ZIP To choose a zip for search Search Entry Field Search Entering the Zip search value Value Value Search HTML Search Button to be invoked for Button displaying the search results based on the Entered text in Search Value. Cancel HTML Cancel To clear the entered field. Button ZIP 1 Text ZIP 1 Provide Text ZIP 1 Entry Field ZIP 1 Entering the Zip1 value ZIP 2 Text ZIP 2 Provide Text ZIP 2 Entry Field ZIP 2 Entering the Zip2 value Go HTML Go Button to be invoked for Button displaying the distance between the two zip codes entered in miles. Cancel HTML Cancel To clear the entered field. Button

3.1.2.3. Front End Validations

Validation Details

This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the # Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1. City Max length of the search field is set. 2. County Max length of the search field is set. 3. Zip Max length of the search field is set. 4. Search On click of the button, “Search Value - Is records are fetched from required.” repository based on “City - Accepts selection criteria. alphabetic characters only.” “County - Accepts alphabetic characters only.” “ZIP - Accepts exactly 5 digit numbers only.” 5. Cancel On click of this button, entry field is cleared. 6. Go On click of the button, “Zip1 - Is required.” distance between the two “Zip2 - Is required.” zip codes is displayed. “ZIP - Accepts exactly 5 digit numbers only.” 7. Cancel On click of this button, entry field is cleared.

3.2. Screen Flow

This section describes the screen flow for the group enrollment process. (See Figure H-36)

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification Cobra Enrollment Document ID: BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_02 Version: <1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Dec. 18, 2001 Sudhakar k 1.0 Baseline Release Jan. 7. 2002 Sudhakar k 1.0 Rev 1 REVISION 1 Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1 Introduction 4

1.1 Purpose 4

1.2 Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3 Document Reference 4

1.4 Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2 Process Identification 5

2.1 Background 5

2.2 Process Description 5

2.3 Process Flow 5

3 User Interface 9

3.1 User Interface Screens 9

3.1.1 Screen ID's 9

3.1.2 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)001-Group Search 10

3.1.3 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)002-Group Information 13

3.1.4 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)003-Dependent Information 19

3.1.5 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)004-Coverage Information 24

3.1.6 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)006-Summary/Missing Information 28

3.1.7 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)007-Existing COBRA Employee Search 31

3.1.8 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)008-Existing COBRA Enrollment 34

3.1.9 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)009-Primary Member Information 38

3.1.10 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)010-Existing Coverage Information 42

3.2 Screen Flow: 45

4 Business Rule Mapping 46

5 User Role 49

1 Introduction

1.1 Purpose

The purpose of this document is to describe the process of COBRA Enrollment. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.

1.2 Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_EN Enrollment BPI_SCOPE_EN_002 COBRA Enrollment BPI_SCOPE_EN_001 Group Enrollment

1.3 Document Reference Document ID Document Name BPI_CAS_FSD_EN Functional Specification Document- Enrollment BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_001 Process Flow - New Business Enrollment BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_002 Process Flow - Enrollment Changes/Add-On BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_003 Process Flow - COBRA Enrollment/Changes BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_005 Process Flow - Termination/Reinstatement

1.4 Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2 Process Identification

2.1 Background

California State laws and federal laws govern COBRA Rules based on whether it is Cal COBRA or Federal COBRA.

The decision whether the Group is a CAL COBRA or FEDERAL COBRA would be based on the Group size or the number of employee in the group. If the number of the employee were greater than or equal to 20 then it would be FEDERAL COBRA. If the group size were less than 20 employees then it would be Cal COBRA. This needs to be entered at the time of group enrollment. Based on applications received for group.

2.2 Process Description

The objective of the COBRA Enrollment is to:

-   -   New Business COBRA Enrollment     -   Existing member converting to COBRA because of the qualifying         rules.     -   Add on for COBRA members     -   Changes to COBRA members     -   Requalification and Open enrollment and Open enrollment for the         COBRA members.

2.3 Process Flow

Process for COBRA is based on the type of COBRA enrollment

-   -   New Business COBRA Enrollment     -   Existing members converting into COBRA after termination

Process Flow for New Business COBRA Enrollment

-   -   1) Search for the group and select the SEG Group or Alternate         Group with whom the COBRA members are to be added.     -   2) Specify if the Member is enrolling as COBRA member as an         individual or with dependent     -   3) If the member is enrolling with dependent then specify the         number of dependent     -   4) Enter member general information, which includes the personal         information and address information.     -   5) Add the dependant/dependents if the option selected is with         dependent and enter the dependent/dependents information.     -   6) Enter COBRA information for the member and dependents as         applicable.     -   7) Select the Line of coverage options for the member and         dependent as applicable.     -   8) List COBRA member summary and select the Benefit Level         (Carrier Selection) based on the ZIP code and Service area         provided.     -   9) Show missing information for the COBRA enrollment.     -   10) Enroll/Decline the COBRA enrollment (based on ACL).

Process Flow for new Business COBRA (See Figure I-1)

Process Flow for existing Member COBRA Enrollment

-   -   1) Search for the group and employee who need to be converted         into the COBRA members.     -   2) Check the term status and reasons for the Employee/dependent.     -   3) Process COBRA Eligibility checks. This checks the eligibility         of the Employee if termed and the reasons for the term, which         form the basic for the qualifying event. Of if the employee is         not termed and the dependent/dependents are termed their reasons         for terms and qualifying event. If none qualify then COBRA         enrollment is declined based on ACL. If either qualifies then         the COBRA enrollment information is shown with option to select         line of coverage for the termed members.     -   4) Identify the primary member based on the criteria.         -   Employee is also termed and opts for COBRA then the employee             becomes the primary member.         -   If spouse is termed with children and spouse opts for COBRA             coverage then spouse becomes the primary member         -   If Children/child is termed and opts for COBRA coverage the             oldest child becomes the primary member.     -   5) Check if the Plan is available in the Primary members         ZIP/Service area. If so then the member should select the same         plan as was before. If not, pend and send quote for plans         available and then allow the member to select the plan that is         available in the new ZIP service area.     -   6) Dependents should have the same plan as well. However they         can waive any plan. (Refer the business rules for COBRA)     -   7) Show Summary and missing information.     -   8) Enroll/Decline member/members as COBRA group.

Process Flow for Existing COBRA conversion (See Figure I-2)

3 User Interface

3.1 User Interface Screens

3.1.1 Screen ID's Screen ID (SID) Screen Name Corresponding HTML File Name bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. Group Search /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/groupsearch/ search GroupSearch.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. Group Information /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/general general info/GeneralInfo.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. Billing Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/billinginfo/ billing BillingInfo.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. Coverage Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/coverage coverage info/CoverageInfo.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. Dependent Information /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/dependent dependent info/DependentInfo.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. Cobra Search /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/cobrasearch/ searchcobra CobraSearch.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. Missing Information /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/missing missing info/MissingInfo.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. Group Inactivate bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/groupinactivate/ inactivate GroupInactivate.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. Confirmation /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/confirmation/ confirmation Confirmation.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. Employee Search /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/employee employeesearch search/EmployeeSearch.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. Member Process /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/member memberprocess process/MemberProcess.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. Existing General /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/general general Information info/GeneralInfo.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. Existing Billing Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/billing billing info/BillingInfo.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. Existing Coverage Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/coverage coverage info/CoverageInfo.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. Existing Dependent Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/dependent dependent info/DependentInfo.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. Existing Cobra Search /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/cobra searchcobra search/CobraSearch.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. Existing Missing Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/missing missing info/MissingInfo.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. Existing confirmation /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/confirmation/ confirmation Confirmation.jsp bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. Existing Inactivate /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/group inactivate inactivate/GroupInactivate.jsp

3.1.2 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)001—Group Search

3.1.2.1 Screen Name: Group Search (See Figure I-3)

3.1.2.2 Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Name Element Type Label Purpose Group Id Text Group Id To provide text Group Id Entry Field Group Id Enter the group Id for Search Group Text Group Name To provide text Name Group Entry Field Group Name To enter group name for Name search Group Text Group Phone To provide text Phone Group Entry field Group phone Enter group phone number phone for search Search HTML button Search Button for searching the Group Table HTML Table Table Table to display group information Select Radio Button Select Group Button to select the Group group for Attaching the COBRA members Single Radio Button Single Member To choose if the COBRA Member Member is enrolling as a single member Member Radio Button Member To choose if the COBRA With With Member is enrolling as a dependent dependent member with dependent Dependent Entry Field Dependent Field to enter the number of Member Member dependent members being Count Count added to the member as COBRA

3.1.2.3 Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Group ID Enter valid group ID only Error Dialog Box: “Please enter valid group ID” Group Name Enter the group name None Group Phone Enter valid phone number for the Error Dialog Box: group “Please enter valid phone number” Search On click of the search button None should list the groups or a single group based on the search criteria. Select Group If the groups are multiple then the Error Dialog Box: radio button option to select the “Please select a specific group should be group with whom provided. you would like If the Group available is only one to add then it should be selected by COBRA default. member” Select member There should be option either to None Only or Member select single member or member with dependent with dependent. Dependent If the option selected is member Error Dialog Box: Member Count with dependent specify the “Please enter number of dependents. the number of dependent as the option selected is member with dependent.

3.1.2.4 Help Menu

New Business enrollment can bring in the members as COBRA. This screen is used for adding the COBRA members to the new business groups based on the selection of the group. Element Name Purpose Valid Values Search To search for Should list single or the Group multiple groups based on the search criteria. Single Member or This is to specify None member with if the member is dependent availing COBRA benefits individually or with dependents Dependent Specify the None Member Count count of the dependent members to be enrolled with the primary member as COBRA.

3.1.3 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)002—Group Information

3.1.3.1 Screen Name: Group Information (See Figure I-4)

3.1.3.2 Element Name Element Type Label Purpose Employer Text Employer Information To provide text Information Date PM Text Date PM To provide text Date PM Entry field Date PM Provide entry for Date Postmarked Date Text Date Recd To provide text Recd Date Entry field Date Recd Provide entry for Date Recd Received Salutation Text Salutation To provide text Salutation Drop Down List Salutation List the Salutation MR., MRS., MS. First Text First name To provide text name First Entry field First name Provide entry field for the name First name Last Text Last name To provide text name Last Entry Field Last Name Provide entry field for the Name Last name MI Text MI To provide text MI Entry Field MI Enter the middle initial Suffix Text Suffix To provide text Suffix List Suffix List the suffix for selection Social Text Social Security Number To provide text Security Number SSN Entry field SSN Enter the SSN number Unique Text Unique ID To provide text ID Unique Entry field (Uneditable). Unique ID Show the unique ID ID generated Auto HTML button Auto Generate Button to generate Unique Id Generate if SSN is not provided Date of Text Date of Birth To provide text Birth Date of Calendar Date of Birth Calendar to select the birth Birth date, Should also allow to enter date of birth as MM/ DD/YYYY Gender Text Gender To provide text Gender List Gender List whether Male or Female Physical Text Physical Main Address To provide text Main Address Street Entry field Street Address Enter the street address Address Suite/ Text Suite/Apts. To provide text Apts. Suite/ Entry Field Suite/Apts. Enter the suite/apts. number Apts. City Text City To provide text City Entry Field City Enter the city name State Text State To provide text State Drop Down List State List all the state in US ZIP Text ZIP To provide text ZIP Entry Field ZIP Enter zip code Service Text Service Area To provide text Area Service Entry Field (uneditable) Service Area Shows the Service Area Area or list based on the ZIP code typed Show list if the ZIP has multiple service area County Text County To provide text County Entry Field (uneditable) County Display the county name based on the zip and service area selected Preferred Text Preferred mode of To provide text mode of correspondence correspondence Mode of Drop Down List Mode of correspondence List the mode of correspondence communication, USPS, FAX, or email/web. Phone is not allowed. Phone Text Phone number To provide text number Phone Entry Field Phone To enter phone number Home Text Home FAX No. To provide text FAX No. FAX Entry Field FAX To enter FAX number Extension Entry Field Extension To enter extension number E-Mali Text E-Mali Address To provide text Address E-mail Entry field E-mail Address Enter email address Address Mailing Text Mailing Address To provide text Address Street Text Street Address To provide text Address Street Entry field Street Address Enter the street address Address Suite/ Text Suite/Apts./PO Box # To provide text Apts./PO Box # Suite/ Entry Field Suite/Apts./PO Box # Enter the suite/apts. number Apts./PO Box # City Text City To provide text City Entry Field City Enter the city name State Text State To provide text State Drop Down List State List all the state in US ZIP Text ZIP To provide text ZIP Entry Field ZIP Enter zip code Cancel HTML Reset Button Cancel To cancel the operation and reset for new selection Continue HTML Submit Continue To save the data gathered in Button this screen and continue to the next screen BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_(—) 003

3.1.3.3 Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Salutation Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON First name Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Last name Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON MI Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Suffix Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Birth date. Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON SSN Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Unique Id Unique 9 digit ID should be None generated if the SSN number is not provided. This unique ID should not be repeated for any employee. Also unique Id should be generated on change mode. Number should start with 999 999 000 and start descending e.g. 999 998 999 999 998 998 and so on Street Address Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Suite/Apts. Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON City Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON State Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON ZIP Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Service Area Should pick up the service area None based on the Zip code number typed in the above ZIP entry field from the database If there are multiple service area then it should list the service area for picking up the service area. County Show the county name based on none the ZIP code and Service area combination Mode of List mode of communications like Error Dialog Box: Communication USPS, FAX, Email/Web and “Please choose the mode of others. If the option selected is communication” Email then the Email address field cannot be blank. Default Option should be - choose one- If none is selected should throw error message. Phone Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Extension Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON FAX Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Extension Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON E-mail Address Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Gender Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Street Address Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Suite/Apts. Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON City Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON State Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON ZIP Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Cancel Reset Button To reset the value in the Entry Field to its previous state as was on loading the page Continue Should function with Enter Key Error Dialog Box: Cursor Positioned on the “The value entered for the Field Name “Continue” button or on Mouse is erroneous. Please enter valid values. Click. “Please choose the mode of Check for all the validation on the communication” fields If any data type error throw error message. Allows blank entry On Success Leads to the next page for filling further information on the employee. Screen BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_003

3.1.3.4 Help Menu

This screen is used for filling up the primary COBRA member information. The information contained here is the personal information and the address information. The ZIP and the service are provided here governs the rate calculation for the COBRA member. Element Name Purpose Valid Values Continue On clicking the None button leads to the next page for filling up the dependent information if applicable of member coverage information.

3.1.4 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)003—Dependent Information

3.1.4.1 Screen Name: Dependent Information (See Figure I-5)

3.1.4.2 Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Name Element Type Label Purpose Salutation Text Salutation To provide text Salutation List Salutation List type of salutation Dependent Text Dependent First name To provide text First name First Entry Field First Name Enter the first name Name Dependent Text Dependent Last name To provide text Last name Last Entry field Last name Enter the last name name MI Text MI To provide text MI Entry Field MI Enter the middle initial Suffix Text Suffix To provide text Suffix Entry Field Suffix Enter the suffix Dependent Text Dependent Social Security To provide text Social Number Security Number SSN Text SSN To provide text SSN Entry field SSN Enter the SSN number Unique Text Unique ID To provide text ID Unique Entry field (Uneditable). Unique ID Show the unique ID ID generated Gender Text Gender To provide text Gender List Gender List the gender Relationship Text Relationship To provide text Relationship List Relationship List all types of relation ship like spouse, domestic partner, child, step child others Birth Text Birth Date To provide text Date Birth Calendar Birth Date Calendar to choose the birth Date date Add HTML Submit Add Dependent To add the above dependent Dependent Button Information to the html table below Table HTML Table Table Table for adding up the dependent information Delete Button (HTML Delete To delete the items checked Button) for deletion Check Text Link Check All To check all the check boxes All in the table Clear All Text Link Clear All To un check all the check boxes checked in the table Delete Check box Delete To check the items for deletion Edit Button (HTML Edit To edit the items against the Button) row selected for edition Disabled Text Disabled To provide text Disabled Radio Button Disabled Radio Button Temporary or permanent Radio disability (Can be only one or Button the other) Default NONE. Domestic Text Domestic Partner To provide text Partner Domestic Check box Domestic Partner Is Form available if so check. Partner Legal Text Legal Guardian To provide text Guardian Legal Check box Legal Guardian Is Form available if so check. Guardian Signature Text Signature To provide text Signature Check box Signature Is signature available if check Continue HTML Button Continue On clicking the continue button save the information Cancel HTML reset Button Cancel To reset to the state as was before loading the page

3.1.4.3 Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message First Name Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common Last name Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common MI Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common Suffix Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common SSN Number Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common Unique Id Unique 9 digit ID should be None generated if the SSN number is not provided. This unique ID should not be repeated for any employee. Also unique Id should be generated on change mode. Number should start with 999 999 000 and start descending e.g. 999 998 999 999 998 998 and so on Birth Date Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common Gender Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common Relationship Default option should be - Error Dialog Box: Choose one-. If none is “Please select the relationship of the selected throw error message dependent with the employee” Add Dependent On clicking the Add Dependent Error Dialog Box: the dependent information gets “The value entered in the field name is filled in the HTML Table. All incorrect. Please enter valid entries” validation checks are performed on the entry field before adding the dependent. Table Should have column header and None each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. i.e. First row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of any text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. Note: The values inside the table on create mode would be blank. If this screen is reached on edit/ change mode then the values inside the table would be green in color if retrieved from the database, If temporarily added then it would be red in color. Delete Should function with Enter Key Error Dialog Box: Cursor Positioned on the “Delete” “Please choose the row or rows to be button or on Mouse Click. deleted.” Delete Button should work on multiple deletes based on the check box or boxes selected. If the user clicks on the delete button without checking any of the delete check box should throw error message. Success: Deletes the row or rows from the HTML Table (temporary storage) Check All On clicking the “Check All” link On clicking the “Check All” link should should check all the check boxes check all the check boxes in the HTML in the HTML table. table. Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link On clicking the “Clear All” link should should uncheck all the checked uncheck all the checked check boxes in check boxes in the HTML table. the HTML table. Delete Check box option with default Check box option with default “unchecked” “unchecked” Edit Should function with Enter Key On clicking the edit button the row Cursor Positioned on the “Edit” edited should be removed from the button or on Mouse Click. HTML table and the data should be On clicking the edit button the populated back on the editable entry row edited should be removed fields. from the HTML table and the data should be populated back on the editable entry fields. On clicking the edit for the data that is Green in color (permanent data) the edit becomes disabled and the Add button becomes Update. On clicking edit for the red color data (temporary data) the row with the data disappears from the table Domestic Partner Default is un checked. Allow to None check if applicable Legal Guardian Default is un checked. Allow to None check if applicable Signature Default is un checked. Allow to None check if applicable Continue Should function with Enter Key Dialog Box: Cursor Positioned on the “Do you want to add the coverage “Continue” button or on Mouse information before continuing” Yes/No Click. On success should save the data lead to the next page. Cancel Should reset to the state as was None before loading the page.

3.1.4.4 Help Menu

This screen is used for filling up the dependent COBRA member information. The information contained here is the personal information. If there are multiple dependent then you can add the dependent COBRA members here. Element Name Purpose Valid Values Continue On clicking the none button leads to the next page for filling up the member coverage information.

3.1.5 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)004—Coverage Information

3.1.5.1 Screen Name: Coverage Information (See Figure I-6)

3.1.5.2 Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Name Element Type Label Purpose COBRA Page sub Header COBRA qualifying Event To provide text qualifying Event Initial Text Initial COBRA effective date To provide text COBRA effective date Date Entry field Date Enter the initial effective date COBRA Text COBRA End Date To provide text End Date Period Entry field Period Enter the COBRA effective period Reasons Text Reasons for electing COBRA To provide text for electing COBRA Reasons Drop Down List Reasons for electing COBRA List the reasons for COBRA for election electing COBRA Where Text Where would you like the To provide text would bills to be sent you like the bills to be sent Where Check Box Where would you like the Check if the bill is to be sent would bills to be sent to the group or the member you like the bills to be sent Is Text Is member signature verified To provide text member signature verified Is Check box Is member signature verified Check if signature is verified member signature verified Line of HTML Table Line of Coverage Selection Table to display the Member Coverage Table names and the Line of Selection coverage check boxes for Table picking the line of coverage for each COBRA members Coverage Check Box Coverage Selection Check box to select the line Selection of coverage Show HTML button Show Coverage Choice Button to show the coverage Coverage choice for each line of Choice coverage based on the check box/boxes checked. Continue HTML Button Continue Button to save the data and lead to the next screen for showing the summary and selection of Benefit level offered by carriers (Screen BPI_CAS_SCR_EN 002_004)

3.1.5.3 Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Date Defaults to system date. User Error Dialog Box: can either enter the date of pick “Date cannot be the date form the calendar future date” Please enter past date” COBRA effective Defaults to 18 months. Can be None period changed by the user. Reasons for List the qualifying reasons for None electing COBRA COBRA. Where would you Option to bill either the group of None like the bills to be the COBRA member based on sent the flag checked Is member Check if the member signature is None signature verified verified Line of Coverage Table to show the Line of None Selection Table coverage against each member for picking the option. The Line of coverage displayed is based on the line of coverage selected by the primary group. Note: The table would display the Member name in the following priority. Employee as primary member Spouse as the next member Other members would be listed based on the age. Coverage Check Box to pick any None Selection combination of coverage's for all the member for this specific COBRA group Show Coverage On click of the Coverage choice None Choice system should identify the coverage choice based on the options checked. Whether member only, member and spouse etc. Continue On clicking the continue button Dialog Box: saves the data and leads to the “Are you sure page to continue” BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_005

3.1.5.4 Help Menu

This screen is used for filling up the COBRA qualifying events and the COBRA tenure for the members. Also there is an option to select the line of coverage opted for the various members. Element Name Purpose Valid Values Continue On clicking the None button leads to the next page for selecting the benefit level (Carrier)

3.1.6 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)006—Summary/Missing Information

3.1.6.1 Screen Name: Missing Info (See Figure I-7)

3.1.6.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Name Element Type Label Purpose Member Text Member Missing Information To provide text Missing Information Employee Expandable Tree Employee Tab Should be able to expand the Tab Employee Tab to list the Details for the Employee Missing and information and Also show an expandable tab for the Dependent Missing Information Enrollment Drop Down List Enrollment Status List the status of enrollment. Status Can be Enroll or Decline Remarks Entry Field Remarks Remark for the status of enrollment Reasons Drop Down List Reasons for Decline List the reasons for decline for Decline Other Entry Field Other Reasons Any other reasons for decline Reasons or others Cancel HTML Button Cancel To reset the operation Process HTML Button Process Enrollment Process the enrollment and Enrollment leads to the enrollment confirmation page. BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_001_011

3.1.6.3 Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Enrollment Status List the status of enrollment. The Error Dialog Box: default option should be -choose “Please choose enrollment status one- before continuing.” If the option selected is Decline. Should list the list box containing reasons for the decline. If none is selected throw error message. Remarks Can accept any character. Reasons for List the reasons for the decline. Error Dialog Box: Decline The default option should be - “Please choose reasons for declining choose one- before continuing.” If none is selected throw error message. Other Reasons Can accept any character. None Cancel Resets to the status as was on None loading this page. Process Should function with Enter Key Error Dialog Box: Enrollment Cursor Positioned on the “Please choose enrollment status “Process Enrollment” button or on before continuing.” Mouse Click. “Please choose reasons for declining On success leads to the before continuing.” confirmation page. BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_001_011 It checks the eligibility rule for the COBRA member once again. Process the post enrollment activity like sending emails, welcome letter. First month invoices and email alert to GMS, Sales and finance.

3.1.7 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)007—Existing COBRA Employee Search

3.1.7.1 Screen Name: Employee Search (See Figure I-8)

3.1.7.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Name Element Type Label Purpose Group Text Group ID To provide text ID Group Id Entry field Group Id Enter the group id for searching the employee Employee Text Employee ID To provide text ID Employee Entry field Employee ID Enter the Employee ID for searching ID the employee Employee Text Employee SSN To provide text SSN Employee Entry field Employee SSN Enter the Employee SNN for SSN searching the employee Phone Text Phone number To provide text number Phone Entry field Phone number Enter the Employee Phone number number for searching the employee List HTML Tree List Employee Tree to List the Employee Employee and their dependent Employee HTML Table Employee Table Table to list employee Table information and status Dependent HTML table Dependent Table Table to list dependent Table information and status Process HTML button Process COBRA Button to check the COBRA COBRA eligibility and take to the next page BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_008 if eligible. If not the show the same page.

3.1.7.3 Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Group Id Enter the Group ID or pick the Group ID can be entered along with group ID based on the Group any other valid fields for the employee search provided below. Employee ID Enter the employee Id or pick the Note: At least on of the field with the employee based on the search criteria for the employee must employee search window. be entered Employee SSN Enter the employee SSN or pick Note: At least on of the field with the the employee based on the search criteria for the employee must employee search window. be entered Phone number Enter the employee Phone or Note: At least on of the field with the pick the employee based on the search criteria for the employee must employee search window. be entered List Employee Tree to open up if dependent None exist for the employee Employee Table List the employee with status and None effective date Dependent Table List the dependent with status None and effective date Process COBRA Check the status and term Embedded error if non-of the member reasons and process the is termed or not qualifies for COBRA. eligibility check for the existing member to COBRA Note: It should check the following status. Term Status, Term reasons Only the member termed all eligible for the COBRA. The reasons for term can either decline COBRA enrollment or define the COBRA period.

3.1.8 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)008—Existing COBRA Enrollment

3.1.8.1 Screen Name: COBRA Enrollment (See Figure I-9)

3.1.8.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Name Element Type Label Purpose COBRA Page sub Header COBRA qualifying Event To provide text qualifying Event Initial Text Initial COBRA effective date To provide text COBRA effective date Date Entry field Date Enter the initial effective date COBRA Text COBRA End Date To provide text End Date Period Entry field Period Enter the COBRA effective period Default to the period based on the qualifying event. Reasons Text Reasons for Term To provide text for Term Reasons Dynamic Text Reasons for Term Reasons for Term based on for Term the term reasons provided Term Text Term Date To provide text Date Term Dynamic text Term Date Display the term date of the Date member Where Text Where would you like the To provide text would bills to be sent you like the bills to be sent Where Check Box Where would you like the Check if the bill is to be sent would bills to be sent to the group or the member you like the bills to be sent Is Text Is member signature verified To provide text member signature verified Is Check box Is member signature verified Check if signature is verified member signature verified Line of HTML Table Line of Coverage Selection Table to display the Member Coverage Table names and the Line of Selection coverage check boxes for Table picking the line of coverage for each COBRA members Check if Check box Check if member is not Check if the member is not member enrolling for COBRA enrolling for COBRA is not enrolling for COBRA Coverage Check Box Coverage Selection Check box to select the line Selection of coverage Show HTML button Show Coverage Choice Button to show the coverage Coverage choice for each line of Choice coverage based on the check box/boxes checked. Continue HTML Button Continue Button to save the data and lead to the next screen for showing the summary and selection of Benefit level offered by carriers (Screen BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_009)

3.1.8.3 Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Date Default to the date next to the Error Dialog term date. Allow for making Box: changes based on authorization “Date cannot be prior to the term date. Please enter the valid date” Period Default to the period based on none the Qualifying events. Allow to change based on authorization Where would you Check the option for billing, none like the bills to be Whether to the group or the sent member Is member Check if signature is verified none signature verified Line of Coverage Table to show the Line of None Selection Table coverage against each member for picking the option. The Line of coverage displayed is based on the line of coverage selected by the primary group. Note: The table would display the Member name in the following priority. Employee as primary member Spouse as the next member Other members would be listed based on the age. Check if member This is check if the member is not None is not enrolling for opting for the COBRA COBRA Coverage Check Box to pick any None Selection combination of coverage's for all the member for this specific COBRA group Show Coverage On click of the Coverage choice None Choice system should identify the coverage choice based on the options checked. Whether member only, member and spouse etc. Continue On clicking the continue button Dialog Box: saves the data and leads to the “Are you page sure to BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_009 continue”

3.1.9 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)009—Primary Member Information

3.1.9.1 Screen Name: Primary Member Information (See Figure I-10)

Note: This screen is pre filled with the employee information available in the employee master for all the members and the dependents belonging to this employee. Changes can be made to the information as applicable.

3.1.9.2 Element Name Element Type Label Purpose Main Text Main Address To provide text Address Street Entry field Street Address Enter the street address Address Suite/ Text Suite/Apts. To provide text Apts. Suite/ Entry Field Suite/Apts. Enter the suite/apts. number Apts. City Text City To provide text City Entry Field City Enter the city name State Text State To provide text State Drop Down List State List all the state in US ZIP Text ZIP To provide text ZIP Entry Field ZIP Enter zip code Service Text Service Area To provide text Area Service Entry Field(uneditable) Service Area Shows the Service Area Area or list based on the ZIP code typed Show list if the ZIP has multiple service area County Text County To provide text County Entry Field(uneditable) County Display the county name based on the zip and service area selected Preferred Text Preferred mode of To provide text mode correspondence of correspondence Mode of Drop Down List Mode of correspondence List the mode of correspondence communication, USPS, FAX, email Home Text Home Phone number To provide text Phone number Phone Entry Field Phone To enter phone number Extension Entry Field Extension To enter extension number Home Text Home FAX No. To provide text FAX No. FAX Entry Field FAX To enter FAX number Extension Entry Field Extension To enter extension number E-Mali Text E-Mali Address To provide text Address E-mail Entry field E-mail Address Enter email address Address Alternate Text Alternate Address To provide text Address Street Text Street Address To provide text Address Street Entry field Street Address Enter the street address Address Suite/ Text Suite/Apts./PO Box # To provide text Apts./PO Box # Suite/ Entry Field Suite/Apts./PO Box # Enter the suite/apts. number Apts./ PO Box # City Text City To provide text City Entry Field City Enter the city name State Text State To provide text State Drop Down List State List all the state in US ZIP Text ZIP To provide text ZIP Entry Field ZIP Enter zip code Cancel HTML Reset Button Cancel To cancel the operation and reset for new selection Continue HTML Submit Continue To save the data gathered in Button this screen and continue to the next screen BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_(—) 010

3.1.9.3 Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Street Address Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Suite/Apts. Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON City Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON State Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON ZIP Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Service Area Should pick up the service area None based on the Zip code number typed in the above ZIP entry field from the database If there are multiple service area then it should list the service area for picking up the service area. County Show the county name based on none the ZIP code and Service area combination Mode of List mode of communications like Error Dialog Box: Communication USPS, FAX, Email and others. If “Please choose the mode of the option selected is Email then communication” the Email address field cannot be blank. Default Option should be - choose one- If none is selected should throw error message. Phone Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Extension Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON FAX Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Extension Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON E-mail Address Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Street Address Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Suite/Apts. Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON City Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON State Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON ZIP Refer Document Refer Document No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON No.BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Cancel Reset Button To reset the value in the Entry Field to its previous state as was on loading the page Continue Should function with Enter Key Error Dialog Box: Cursor Positioned on the “The value entered for the Field Name “Continue” button or on Mouse is erroneous. Please enter valid values. Click. “Please choose the mode of Check for all the validation on the communication” fields If any data type error throw error message. Allows blank entry On Success Leads to the next page for filling further information on the employee. Screen BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_010

3.1.10 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)010—Existing Coverage Information

3.1.10.1 Screen Name: Coverage Information (See Figure I-11)

3.1.10.2 Element Name, Element Type, Label & Purpose Element Name Element Type Label Purpose Benefit HTML Table Benefit Level (carrier Table to display all the Level Selection) Members in the row and The (carrier Benefit level selection option Selection) in the Columns. Member Link Member name Provide feature to edit the name member information by clicking this link Coverage HTML ROW Coverage Choice The row get pre populated Choice based on the choice made in the screen BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_009 Benefit Link Benefit Level Name Link to the carrier selection Level for the specific line of Name coverage if not available in the ZIP and service area of the Primary member. PCP info Link PCP info (Available) Link to edit the PCP info of (Available) the individual members as applicable. COBRA HTML Button COBRA Summary Button to click for saving the Summary date and navigating to the next page for displaying COBRA summary/missing information Cancel HTML rest button Cancel Button to reset to the state as was on loading the page.

3.1.10.3 Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Benefit Level Should have column header and None (carrier Selection) each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. I.e. First row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of any text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. The Header and the Left Column should be distinguishable. Member name This is a link to edit the member None information when on change or edit mode. This PCP Info This is a link to edit the PCP None information for the specific member. If PCP information is not available then on clicking the link it allows to fill in the PCP information for the specific line of coverage. Coverage Choice Displays the dynamic text based None on the choices checked in the previous screen BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_004 Benefit Level Default benefit level would that None Selection the employee selected when the status was enrolled. On clicking the Link show a minimized window with option to select the benefit level for the specific line of coverage. Note the line of coverage is displayed based on the Group options. (i.e only if the group has selected the line of coverage. Also the benefit level (carrier) displayed is based on the ZIP code/Service area of the primary COBRA member. Only if the prior Benefit level is not available in the current ZIP/ service are of the primary member this is allowed to be changed. COBRA On clicking the COBRA Summary Dialog Box: Summary button save the content of this “Are you sure page into the repository and you would like to leads to the COBRA summary continue” page to display the COBRA missing information. Screen BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_006 This also does all the COBRA eligibility checks prior to the display of summary page. Cancel Resets to the state as was on none loading the page.

Note: the rest of the flow is common for both new Business COBRA and the Existing member conversion to COBRA.

Screen BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)006 followed by COBRA enrollment.

3.2 Screen Flow:

Screen Flow Diagram for COBRA Enrollment (See Figure I-12)

4 Business Rule Mapping Activity Rules New Business COBRA (NB Need to know initial COBRA effective date brings in COBRA) Need to have system calculate COBRA end date (18 mo, 36 mo, or other) based on Term Reason (Qualifying events). For system to do this we need to have the following data captured during the New Business COBRA Enrollment a) Initial Effective date b) Qualifying events COBRA coverage COBRA coverage has no lapse of time from the date of term & COBRA enrollment Exception: Death Main subscribers coverage is terminated date of death and not the end of the month: qualified beneficiaries (i.e. spouse/child) effective date of COBRA is the day after the members death Note: Since the COBRA coverage has no lapse of time it should be basically effective from the day following the term date what ever be the reasons. Normal terms are always done on the end of the Month. Death is done on the day of the death. COBRA Election 60 days to elect COBRA coverage from the time of COBRA notification letter. 60 days is based off the: Date that we are notified of the termination (Postmark date for termination) OR The termination date WHICHEVER IS LATER. The decision is to be made based on manual review by GMS personnel. COBRA Election for Federal If a FED COBRA group, we need to include an additional 14 days from COBRA termination notification date because FED Employers have 14 days to notify their employees of their rights after which they notify the plan administrator/Pac Advantage). The decision is to be made based on manual review by GMS personnel. COBRA Premium Dues COBRA members initial premium (all premiums from effective date to current) must be made/mailed/postmarked within 45 days from the COBRA election date (the date the application is postmarked) If payment is not MADE within this time frame, the COBRA coverage is termed flat (effective date). Any partial premium payments made will be reimbursed. Provide over ride for 45th day rule (ACL) (This override needs to be available upon creating the COBRA) COBRA Employee governed by If main Employer group goes into possible term status or is termed, the Employer (Groups) COBRA will need to be notified and put in same status. Employee will have the same coverage type, carrier & co-pay as when termed (continue with exact coverage as before) Cannot add dependents that were not previously covered (until o/e or qualifying event) Benefit Levels Benefit level cannot change. Optional benefits and medical offered by the group is not mandatory [Line of Coverage] Possible extension of COBRA Social Security disability - coverage extended to a total of 29 month coverage (11 mo. Extension) (all other term reasons apply) The main subscriber does not have to elect to extend the coverage for himself, just his dependents can elect to take the extension Age 60 prior to loss of employment & worked for Employer for 5 consecutive years - coverage extended until the Employee turns age 65 (all other term reasons apply) The main subscriber does not have to elect to extend the coverage for himself, just his dependents can elect to take the extension Also there should be a facility to grant COBRA extension if applicable based on authority. Qualifying Events Qualifying Beneficiaries Continuation period TERMINATION_OF_EMPLOYMENT Employee, Spouse and Children 18 REDUCTION_OF_WORK_HOURS Employee, Spouse and Children 18 CAN_NO_LONGER_AFFORD_COVERAGE Employee, Spouse and Children 18 OBTAINED_COVERAGE_ELSE_(—) Employee, Spouse and Children 18 WHERE DEATH Spouse and Children 36 ENTITLED_TO_MEDICARE Employee, Spouse and Children 36 FRAUD_OR_MISREPRESENTATION Employee, Spouse and Children 36 DPND_OBTAINED_COVERAGE_(—) Employee, Spouse and Children 18 ELSEWHERE DIVORCE_OR_LEGAL_SEPARATION Employee, Spouse and Children 36 EMPLOYEE_CANNOT_AFFORD_(—) Spouse 36 SPOUSE_COVERAGE DPND_DEATH None 18 DPND_ENTITLED_TO_MEDICARE Dependent Spouse and Children 36 DPND_FRAUD_OR_MISREPRESENTATION None 36 OVER_AGE_23 Dependent Child 18 NO_LONGER_AN_ELIGIBLE_DEPENDENT Dependent Spouse and Children 18 NO_LONGER_A_DISABLED_CHILD Dependent Child 18 EMPLOYEE_CAN_NO_LONGER_(—) Child 18 AFFORD_CHILD_COVERAGE OTHERS Employee, Spouse and Children 36 There are other qualifying events, which are also considered while COBRA enrollment based on their Reason For Term.

5 User Role

The respective level of user role can over rule the following missing information. User Role Level II, Level III, Level IV S.No., Missing Information Condition 1 SSN already exists. Employee SSN already exists 2 SSN already exists. Dependent SSN already exists

Benefit Partners INC Process Specification Functional Design Process Specification: Add On and Change Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)03

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference 18/10/2001 Sudhakar K 1.0 Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Background 5

Process Description 5

2.3. Process Flow 5

2.4. User Interface Screens 5

Change:- Employee Change New Request 19

3. Business Rule Mapping 23

4. User Role 27

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

his document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_EN Enrollment BPI_SCOPE_EN_002 Enrollment Add On

Other Document Reference Document ID Document name BPI_CAS_FSD_EN Functional Specification Document - Enrollment BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_001 Process Flow - New Business Enrollment BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_003 Process Flow - COBRA Enrollment/Changes BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_005 Process Flow - Termination/Reinstatement BPI_CAS_RULEBOX RULE BOX for Add on and change

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

Process Flow and Description

This process is used to make changes to the Existing groups/members or dependents or add a new member/dependent to the Group or employee based on the business rules associated with changes and “Add ON's”.

2.1. Background

2.2. Process Description

The objective of the process

2.3. Process Flow

This process is used to make changes to the Existing groups/members or dependents or add a new member/dependent to the Group or employee based on the business rules associated with changes and “Add ON's”.

2.4. User Interface Screens

2.4.1. Screen ID's Screen Screen ID (SID) Name Corresponding HTML File Name Enrollment.addon.newemp.groupsearch Group Search bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/groupsearch Enrollment.addon.newemp.changerequest ChangeRequest bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/changerequest Enrollment.addon.newemp.groupgeneral EmployeeGeneral bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/addemployee Info Enrollment.addon.newemp.employeecoverage EmployeeCoverage bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/employeecoverage Info Enrollment.addon.newemp.dependent DependentGeneral bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/adddependent Info Enrollment.addon.newemp.missing PreEnrollment bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/preenrollment Enrollment.addon.newemp.summary EnrollmentSummary bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/ enrollmentsummary Enrollment.addon.newemp.confirmation Confirmation bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/confirmation Enrollment.addon.newemp.employeesearch Employee bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/employeesearch Search enrollment.addon.newemp.dependentsearch Dependent bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/dependentsearch Search enrollment.addon.employeesearch Employee bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/adddependent/ Search employeesearch enrollment.addon.changerequest Change bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/adddependent/ Request changerequest enrollment.addon.dependent Dependent bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/adddependent/dependent General Info enrollment.addon.adddependentsearch Modify bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/adddependent/ dependent dependentsearch enrollment.addon.missingforadddependent PreEmrollment bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/adddependent/preenrollment enrollment.addon.addconfirmation Confirmation bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/adddependent/confirmation bpi.enrollment.change.group.groupsearch Group Search bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/groupsearch bpi.enrollment.change.group.changerequest Change bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/changerequest Request bpi.enrollment.change.group.identifychanges Identify bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/identifychanges Chagnes bpi.enrollment.change.group.general Group bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/generalinfo GeneralInfo bpi.enrollment.change.group.billing Group Billing bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/billinginfo Info bpi.enrollment.change.group.agent Agent Info bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/agentinfo bpi.enrollment.change.group.coverage Coverage Info bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/coverageinfo bpi.enrollment.change.group.missinginfo Missing Info bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/missinginfo bpi.enrollment.change.group.confirmation Confirmation bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/confirmation bpi.enrollment.change.group.groupmodify Modify Search bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/groupmodifysearch search bpi.enrollment.change.employee.employee Employee bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/employeesearch search Search bpi.enrollment.change.employee.changerequest Change bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/changerequest Request bpi.enrollment.change.employee.identifychanges Identify bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/identifychanges Changes bpi.enrollment.change.employee.individual Individual bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/indivemployee employee Employee bpi.enrollment.change.employee.individual Individual bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/indivbilling billing Billing bpi.enrollment.change.employee.individual Individual bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/indivcoverage coverage Coverage bpi.enrollment.change.employee.individual Individual bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/indivmissing missing Employee Missing bpi.enrollment.change.employee.employee Modify Search bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/employeemodify modifysearch search bpi.enrollment.change.employee.employee Employee bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/employeeconfirm confirm Confirm bpi.enrollment.change.employee.employee Employee bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/employeegeneral general General Info bpi.enrollment.change.employee.employee Employee bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/employeecoverage coverage Coverage bpi.enrollment.change.employee.employee Missing Info bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/employeemissing missing bpi.enrollment.change.dependent.dependent Dependent bpi/cas/enrollment/change/dependent/dependentsearch search Search bpi.enrollment.change.dependent.changerequest Change bpi/cas/enrollment/change/dependent/changerequest Request bpi.enrollment.change.dependent.identify Identify bpi/cas/enrollment/change/dependent/identifychanges changes Changes bpi.enrollment.change.dependent.dependent Dependent bpi/cas/enrollment/change/dependent/dependentgeneral general General bpi.enrollment.change.dependent.missing Missing Info bpi/cas/enrollment/change/dependent/missinginfo info bpi.enrollment.change.dependent.dependent Confirmation bpi/cas/enrollment/change/dependent/dependentconfirm confirm bpi.enrollment.change.dependent.dependent Modify Search bpi/cas/enrollment/change/dependent/dependentmodify modify

2.4.1.1. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

2.4.1.1.1 SID: enrollment.addon.newemp.groupsearch

2.4.1.1.1.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01—user Interface ID:BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)012

2.4.1.1.1.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer 3.1.13.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01 for the details.

2.4.1.1.2 SID: enrollment.addon.newemp.changerequest

2.4.1.1.2.1 Screen Snap Shot

2.4.1.1.2.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

2.4.1.1.3 SID: enrollment.addon.newemp.groupgeneral

2.4.1.1.3.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)002—Group General of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.3.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer 3.1.3.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01 for the details.

2.4.1.1.4 SID: enrollment.addon.newemp.employeecoverage

2.4.1.1.4.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)007—Employee Coverage of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.4.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer 3.1.8.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01 for the details.

2.4.1.1.5 SID: enrollment.addon.newemp.dependent

2.4.1.1.5.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)008—Dependent of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.5.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer 3.1.9.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01 for the details

2.4.1.1.6 SID: enrollment.addon.newemp.missing

2.4.1.1.6.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)010—Missing Information of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.6.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.11.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.7 SID: enrollment.addon.newemp.summary

2.4.1.1.7.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)009—Enrollment Summary of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.7.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.10.1 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.8 SID: enrollment.addon.newemp.confirmation

2.4.1.1.8.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)011—Enrollment Confirmation of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.8.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.12.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.9 SID: enrollment.addon.newemp.employeesearch

2.4.1.1.9.1 Screen Snap ShotElement Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)013—Employee Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.9.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.14.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.10 SID: enrollment.addon.newemp.dependentsearch

2.4.1.1.10.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)014—Dependent Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.10.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.15.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.11 SID: enrollment.addon.employeesearch

2.4.1.1.1.1.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)013—Employee Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.11.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.14.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.12 SID: enrollment.addon.changerequest

2.4.1.1.12.1 Screen Snap Shot

2.4.1.1.12.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

2.4.1.1.13 SID: enrollment.addon.dependent

2.4.1.1.13.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)008—Dependent of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.13.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

2.4.1.1.14 SID: enrollment.addon.adddependentsearch

2.4.1.1.14.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)014—Dependent Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.14.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.15.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.15 SID: enrollment.addon.missingforadddependent

2.4.1.1.15.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)010—Missing Information of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)001

2.4.1.1.15.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.11.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.16 SID: enrollment.addon.addconfirmation

2.4.1.1.16.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)011—Enrollment Confirmation of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.16.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.12.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

2.4.1.1.17 Change Screen SID

2.4.1.1.17.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

BPI_CAS_RULKEBOX

2.4.1.1.17.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to User Interface ID BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

BPI_CAS_RULKEBOX

2.4.2. Screen Flow

(See Figure I-13)

(See Figure I-14)

(See Figure I-15)

(See Figure I-16)

(See Figure I-17)

Change:—Group Change New Request

(See Figure I-18)

Change:—Group Modify Pending Changes

(See Figure I-19)

Change:—Employee Change New Request

(See Figure I-20)

Change:—Employee Modify Pending Changes

(See Figure I-21)

Change:—Dependent Change New Request

(See Figure I-22)

Change:—Dependent Modify Pending Changes

(See Figure I-23)

3. Business Rule Mapping Activity Rules Employer Add On The rate for the employer is guaranteed for one year (One year from the date of enrollment) Hence the entire rates that is effective for the employer/ group needs to be effective for the new employees as well. However the eligibility of the Employee is base on the normal eligibility rules that is applicable for the Employee at the time of enrollment. Counts for the add-on employee can go more than 70 and up to 100 if Small Employer Group (override based on ACL). If Guaranteed association then there is no limit on the employee count at any time. Process Add on Shows the missing information of the Add On employee and emails the missing information to the GMS rep. Process Add on On successful Add On the welcome mail is sent to the Employer/Employee and cc to Agent. Billing adjustment is made which would be handled in the Finance Module. Process Add On (waiting Period) Adding employee needs to check on the Waiting Period. If the employee does not satisfy the waiting period then it should send email to the GMS rep. Also the employee effective date should default to the date when the employee is actually eligible. If the Employee satisfied the waiting period and is 60 days past the waiting period then it should flag this as missing information as this becomes a late application, which needs clarification from the employer before enrolling the employee. This employee can be enrolled only with authorization. The employee application form is not deemed as “Late” if it is postmarked within 60 days from the eligibility date. If it is postmarked more than 60 days from the eligibility date, the application is declined as it is “Late”. Late application can be enrolled only on the next ROE.

Activity Rules Employee Add On (Adding Dependent) Employee Add On The rate for the employer is guaranteed for one year (One year form the date of enrollment) Hence the entire rate that is effective for the employer/ group needs to be effective for the new dependent as well. However the eligibility of the Dependent is base on the normal eligibility rules that is applicable for the Dependent at the time of enrollment. Coverage Choice to be manipulated by System automatically. Process Add on Shows the missing information of the Add On Dependent and emails the missing information to the GMS rep. Process Add on On successful Add On the welcome mail is sent to the Employer/Employee/Dependent and cc to Agent. Billing adjustment is made which would be handled in the Finance Module. General Rules If the employee has selected the Employee only option as coverage choice then it needs to be changed for adding a dependent. System would not allow adding dependent with Employee only status. Employer Change Demographic changes Demographic change can include change in Company Name, Contact name, Address, Phone, Fax, Email, Tax ID. All these change can be made and does not affect the business rules except for transmission of letter, email contacts Billing Changes All Billing changes are flag and email is sent to GMS rep and Finance for Information. Billing changes would effect the billing frequency or the mode of payment (EFT, Credit Card or Check) Waiting Period Change Change in the waiting period would affect the Employee Eligibility criteria for all add on employees, going forward, as the change may be. Change in the Employee type for the waiting period consideration would also affect the Employee Eligibility for the New Employees ‘Add-On’, going forward. Waiting Period would be based on the Employer Effective date. Effective date for changing the Waiting period should default to the 1^(st) of the following month. Waiting period can be changed only once from the date of enrollment (effective date) to one-year cycle for the employer. If the waiting period changes are more than once in the calendar year for the employer. This is to be notified to the GMS rep and only the authorized person can override this and allow for waiting period change beyond 1 in employer anniversary date (one year cycle). Employer Contribution Contribution would be based on the Employer Effective date. Effective date for changing the Contribution should default to the 1^(st) of the following month. Contribution can be changed only twice from the date of enrollment (effective date) to one-year cycle for the employer. If the Contribution changes are more than once in the calendar year for the employer. This is to be notified to the GMS rep and only the authorized person can override this and allow for contribution change beyond 1 in employer calendar year. Note: Effective dates for Contribution changes should be 1^(st) following month if the billing cycle has not completed. If the billing cycle is complete then it should be effective the next billing cycle. I.e 1^(st) of the month following the next month. Optional benefits Changes a) Medical: No change allowed. b) Dental Can be added only during ROE cycle. Can be dropped any time. Note if dental is dropped then it can be added in the ROE following 12 month from the date of dropping the dental plan. c) Vision and CAM: Can be added and dropped any time. Note if an optional benefit is dropped then it can be added in the ROE following 12 month from the date of dropping the optional benefit. d) This is to be notified to the GMS rep and only the authorized person can override this. Employee Counts (Number of employee) Can be changed only at next ROE cycle. COBRA Can Change any time but will effective from 1^(st) of the month only If this changes then any existing COBRA with this group will change accordingly and automatically, 1^(st) of the month. Should trigger automatic transmission TEFRA Can be change any time but will be effective from 1^(st) of the month only. Transmit record to the carrier only if the employee is 65+ Part time coverage/Domestic partner Can be change only during open enrollment or Re qualification and open enrollment. But should allow for overriding this feature based on authority. Note: Any over riding function should trigger auto email to the concerned GMS rep for making the changes based on their authority. Agent Change This triggers a new process flow. (Refer process flow diagram FIG. 4.)

Note: For all changes effective date will be defaulted based on POST MARK DATE, If POST MARK date is lesser than 15th Day of month then Effective date will be 1st day of next month else it will be 1st day of next of the next month

4. User Role

The respective level of user role can over rule the following missing information. User Role Level II, Level III, S.No., Missing Information Level IV Condition 1 SSN already exists. Employee 2 SSN already exists. Dependent

Employee, Group and Dependent Changes (w.r.t. Current Date) User Role Condition Level I Reinstatement date is with in 30 days prior or later Level II Reinstatement date is with in 30 days prior or later Level III Reinstatement date is with in 60 days prior or later

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specificaation ROE/OE Process Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)04 Version: <1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Dec. 18, 2001 Sudhakar k 1.0 Baseline Release Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

1.4. Document Reference 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Background 5

2.2. Process Description 5

2.3. Process Flow 6

3. User Interface 8

3.1. User Interface Screens 8

3.1.1. Screen ID's 8

3.1.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose 9

3.1.3. Screen Flow 21

4. Business Rule Mapping 24

5. User Role 25

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

The purpose of this document is to describe the process of ROE/OE Process. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_EN Enrollment BPI_SCOPE_EN_004 Enrollment - ROE

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

1.4. Document Reference Document ID Document Name BPI_CAS_FSD_EN Functional Specification Document - Enrollment BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_001 Process Flow - New Business Enrollment BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_002 Process Flow - Enrollment Changes/Add-On BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_003 Process Flow - COBRA Enrollment/Changes BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_005 Process Flow - Termination/Reinstatement

2. Process Identification

2.1. Background

Once a year, on the anniversary date of a group's enrollment in PacAdvantage (or for some, it's July 1st, not their anniversary date), the group's participation, contribution and qualification is reviewed. This review is to ensure that the group meets the qualification requirement. The main objective of this process is to review these criteria and re qualify as needed, notify them of rate changes and provide an opportunity for employees of the group to make changes to their enrollment.

This process is identified as Re-qualification and open enrollment. Also there is another process associated with this called as open enrollment where in the group has the privilege to make the changes to the plan, waiting period etc.

The difference between the two processes is that for re-qualification the Group has to under go the eligibility check to qualify for their next term.

For open enrollment the group need not re qualify and under go the eligibility checks.

The group should already have been enrolled with the PacAdvantage and have no termination date for the ROE to be done.

2.2. Process Description

The objective of the ROE/OE Process is to:

-   -   Annual Re qualification or open enrollment form filled by the         Employer     -   Open Enrollment Change form completed by employee, if applicable     -   Employee Enrollment form(s) completed by employee, if applicable     -   Dependent Enrollment form(s) completed by employee, if         applicable

The following are the other requirements that will be supported and constraints on the proposed system:

-   -   1) The system has to initiate ROE/OE process 3 months prior to         the actual anniversary date for the specific group. This process         needs to be initiated by GMS personnel.     -   2) System has to pick up the Groups for ROE based on the rules         defined below:     -   Group Size: less than or equal to 4—All the groups needs to be         re-qualified.     -   Group Size: 5 to 9—10% of the Group needs to be re-qualified     -   Group Size: greater than or equal to 10—1% of the group needs to         be re-qualified.     -   3) System has to randomly pick up the groups based on the above         rules for ROE based on random generator algorithm.     -   4) All other Group that is a part of ROE and OE needs to have         their open enrollment processed.     -   5) Also their needs to be a facility to have manual OE process         wherein the Employee or Employees are manually picked for ROE or         OE process. Manual OE is usually performed based on searching         the Employee based on line of coverage and plan.     -   6) There needs to be a feature to Finalize the ROE or OE for all         the groups that have the same REO/OE cycle.

2.3. Process Flow

Process for ROE/OE

The process starts after manual initiation

-   -   1) Identify the group that has their anniversary date 3 months         hence.

2) Based on the group size identify if the group needs to be re-qualified.

-   -   3) Randomly pick up the group for re-qualification     -   4) If the group is not picked for re-qualification then the         group only needs to have open enrollment.     -   5) Send ROE/OE packets to mail house. The packet includes the         Agent Packet and the group packet.     -   6) Also sent the packets to the COBRA members of the existing         group.     -   7) Send reminder for the ROE/OE every month.     -   8) Receive the ROE/OE packets completed by the Group and enter         into the system.     -   9) Follow up for missing information     -   10) Convey the Group/Agent about the ROE status on completion of         the process.

Note the screens for entry of data for the ROE/OE processes are similar to the Group/Employee/Dependent Changes screen. However for the ROW/OE process the status would be identified as ROE process.

Process Flow Diagram—ROE process (See Figure I-24)

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Screen ID's Screen ID (SID) Screen Name Corresponding HTML File Name enrollment.roe.groupsearch Group Search /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/groupsearch enrollment.roe.request Group Request /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/request enrollment.roe.identifygroupchange Identify Group Change /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/identifygroupchange Request enrollment.roe.groupgeneral Group General Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/groupgeneral enrollment.roe.groupbilling Group Billing Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/groupbilling enrollment.roe.groupagent Group Agent Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/groupagent enrollment.roe.agentsearch Agent Search /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/agentsearch enrollment.roe.groupcoverage Group Coverage Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/groupcoverage enrollment.roe.employeesearch Employee Search /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/employeesearch enrollment.roe.identifyemployeechange Identify Employee Change /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/identifyemployeechange Request enrollment.roe.employeegeneral Employee General Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/addemployee enrollment.roe.employeecoverage Employee Coverage Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/employeecoverage enrollment.roe.dependentsearch Dependent Search /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/dependentsearch enrollment.roe.identifydependentchange Identify Dependent Change /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/identifydependentchange Request enrollment.roe.dependentgeneral Dependent General /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/adddependent enrollment.roe.groupsummary Group Summary /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/enrollmentsummary enrollment.roe.groupmissing Group Missing Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/preenrollment/ enrollment.roe.groupconfirm Group Confirm /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/groupconfirm enrollment.roe.individualemployeesearch Indiv Employee Search/ /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivemployeesearch Indiv Group Search enrollment.roe.indivemployeerequest Indiv Employee Request /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivemployeerequest enrollment.roe.identifyindivemployee Identify Indiv Employee /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/identifyindivemployeechange change Change Request enrollment.roe.individualemployeegeneral Indiv Employee General /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivemployee Info enrollment.roe.individualbilling Indiv Billing Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivbilling enrollment.roe.individualagent Indiv Agent Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivagent enrollment.roe.individualagentsearch Indiv Agent Search /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivagent enrollment.roe.individualemployeecoverage Indiv Coverage Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivcoverage enrollment.roe.individualdependentsearch Indiv Dependent Search /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivdependentsearch enrollment.roe.identifyindivdependent Identify indiv Dependent /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/identifyindivdependent change Change Request change enrollment.roe.individualdependentgeneral Indiv Dependent General /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivdependent/ Info enrollment.roe.individualsummary Indiv Enrollment Summary /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivenrollmentsummary enrollment.roe.individualmissing Indiv Pre Enrollment /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivpreenrollment bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.searchcobra COBRA Search /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/cobraroesearch bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.request COBRA ROE/OE /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/request Process Request bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.identify Identify COBRA ROE/ /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/identifychanges changes OE Change Request Info bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.general COBRA General Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/generalinfo bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.billing COBRA Billing Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/billinginfo bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.coverage COBRA Coverage Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/coverageinfo bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.dependent COBRA Dependent Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/dependentinfo bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.missing COBRA Missing Info /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/missinginfo bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.confirmation COBRA Confirmation /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/confirmation Enrollment.roe.manualroe ROE/OE Process /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/manualroe Enrollment.roe.roetransfer ROE/OE Transfer /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/roetransfer

3.1.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

3.1.2.1. SID: enrollment.roe.groupsearch

3.1.2.1.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)012—Group Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.1.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.13.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.2. SID: enrollment.roe.request

3.1.2.2.1 Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-25)

3.1.2.3. SID: enrollment.roe.identifygroupchange

3.1.2.3.1 Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-26)

3.1.2.4. SID: enrollment.roe.groupgeneral

3.1.2.4.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)002—Group General of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.4.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.3.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.5. SID: enrollment.roe.groupbilling

3.1.2.5.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)003—Billing of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.5.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.4.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.6. SID: enrollment.roe.groupagent

3.1.2.6.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)005—Agent of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.6.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.6.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.7. SID: enrollment.roe.agentsearch

3.1.2.7.1 Screen Snap Shot

3.1.2.7.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

3.1.2.8. SID: enrollment.roe.groupcoverage

3.1.2.8.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)004—Group Coverage of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.8.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.5.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.9. SID: enrollment.roe.employeesearch

3.1.2.9.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)013—Employee Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.9.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.14.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.10. SID: enrollment.roe.identifyemployeechange

3.1.2.10.1 Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-27)

3.1.2.11. SID: enrollment.roe.employeegeneral

3.1.2.11.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)006—Employee Information of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.11.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.7.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.12. SID: enrollment.roe.employeecoverage

3.1.2.12.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)007—Employee Coverage of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.12.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.8.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.13. SID: enrollment.roe.dependentsearch

3.1.2.13.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)014—Dependent Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.13.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.15.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.14. SID: enrollment.roe.identifydependentchange

3.1.2.14.1 Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-28)

3.1.2.15. SID: enrollment.roe.dependentgeneral

3.1.2.15.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)008—Dependent of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.15.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.9.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.16. SID: enrollment.roe.groupsummary

3.1.2.16.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)009—Enrollment Summary of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.16.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.10.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.17. SID: enrollment.roe.groupmissing

3.1.2.17.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)100—Missing Information of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.17.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.11.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.18. SID: enrollment.roe.groupconfirm

3.1.2.18.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)011—Enrollment Confirmation of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)001

3.1.2.18.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.12.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.19. SID: enrollment.roe.individualemployeesearch

3.1.2.19.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)013—Employee Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.19.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.14.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.20. SID: enrollment.roe.indivemployeerequest

3.1.2.20.1 Screen Snap Shot

3.1.2.20.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

3.1.2.21. SID: enrollment.roe.identifyindivemployeechange

3.1.2.21.1 Screen Snap Shot

3.1.2.21.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

3.1.2.22. SID: enrollment.roe.individualemployeegeneral

3.1.2.22.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)006—Employee Information of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.22.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.7.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.23. SID: enrollment.roe.individualbilling

3.1.2.23.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)003—Billing of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.23.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.4.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.24. SID: enrollment.roe.individualagent

3.1.2.24.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)005—Agent of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.24.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.6.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.25. SID: enrollment.roe.individualagentsearch

3.1.2.25.1 Screen Snap Shot

3.1.2.25.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

3.1.2.26. SID: enrollment.roe.individualemployeecoverage

3.1.2.26.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)007—Employee Coverage of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.26.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.8.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.27. SID: enrollment.roe.individualdependentsearch

3.1.2.27.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)014—Dependent Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.27.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.15.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.28. SID: enrollment.roe.identifyindivdependentchange

3.1.2.28.1 Screen Snap Shot

3.1.2.28.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

3.1.2.29. SID: enrollment.roe.individualdependentgeneral

3.1.2.29.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)008—Dependent of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.29.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.9.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.30. SID: enrollment.roe.individualsummary

3.1.2.30.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)009—Enrollment Summary of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.30.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.10.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.31. SID: enrollment.roe.individualmissing

3.1.2.31.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)010—Missing Information of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.31.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.11.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.32. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.searchcobra

3.1.2.32.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to 3.1.1 Screen Shot: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)001 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)02

3.1.2.32.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)02

3.1.2.33. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.request

3.1.2.33.1 Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-29)

3.1.2.34. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.identifychanges

3.1.2.34.1 Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-30)

3.1.2.35. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.general

3.1.2.35.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to 3.8.1 Screen Shot: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)009 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)02

3.1.2.35.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.8.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)02

3.1.2.36. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.billing

3.1.2.36.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)003—Billing of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.36.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.4.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.37. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.coverage

3.1.2.37.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to 3.9.1 Screen Shot: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)010 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)02

3.1.2.37.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.9.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)02

3.1.2.38. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.dependent

3.1.2.38.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to 3.3.1 Screen Shot: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)003 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)02

3.1.2.38.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.3.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)02

3.1.2.39. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.missing

3.1.2.39.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to 3.5.1 Screen Shot: BPI_SCR_EN_(—)002_(—)006 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)02

3.1.2.39.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.5.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)02

3.1.2.40. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.confirmation

3.1.2.40.1 Screen Snap Shot

Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_(—)001_(—)011—Enrollment Confirmation of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.2.40.2 Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Refer to 3.1.12.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)01

3.1.3. Screen Flow

(See Figure I-31)

(See Figure I-32)

(See Figure I-33)

4. Business Rule Mapping Activity Rules ROE Process Identify the group randomly based on the Group size for ROE. ROE validation All the eligibility rules that are applicable as new business enrollment are applicable for the ROE as well. Open Open enrollment allows for making the changes that are Enrollment normally not possible during the normal changes. Billing Bill in a normal way if the ROE/OE has a completed status. Make the bill for the new effective date. If the ROE/OE has a status as pend then pend the bill for the new effective date.

5. User Role

The respective level of user role can over rule the following missing information. User Role Level II, Level III, S.No., Missing Information Level IV Condition ROE OE SEG/Alternate/Indiv Group 1 SSN already exists. Employee SSN already exists 2 SSN already exists. Dependent SSN already exists 3 Employer Tax Id already Employer Tax Id already exists exists. ROE OE COBRA Group 1 SSN already exists. Employee SSN already exists 2 SSN already exists. Dependent SSN already exists

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification Termination Reinstatemenet Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)05 Version: <1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference December 12, 2001 Sudhakar K 1.0 Initial version January 8, 2002 Sudhakar K 1.0 rev 1 Revision 1 Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Background 5

2.2. Process Description 5

2.3. Process Flow 5

3. User Interface 7

3.1. User Interface Screens 7 3.1.1. Screen ID's 7

3.1.2. Screen Flow 36

4. Business Rule Mapping 37

5. User Role 41

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

The purpose of this document is to identify the process associated with the business use case Termination and Reinstatement

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_EN Enrollment BPI_SCOPE_EN_005 Termination and Reinstatement

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1. Background

<Brief Description of the Process>

2.2. Process Description

Process Flow for Group Term

This process is used to terminate or reinstate the Group, Employee and or Dependent.

The FIG. 1 shows the process flow for the group termination. The group can be termed broadly based on two reasons; Non-payment of Premium or by group request for termination. Non-payment of premium is an automated process and starts and completes the term process automatically. The employer request is a manual term process and the Group is termed manually.

Automated Term process initiates the Term Process. Letter is sent to the Group with 15 days notice for reinstatement. The system holds the status as “Term Pending” although the group believes they are completely termed. The reason for this is to prevent the sending of termination then reinstatement transmissions to the carriers; which causes confusion. The finance department then processes the term to completion if the payment is not received. Finance also has ability to override the term pend status based on authority.

Manual Term process is based on the request received from the group. All manual term process is notified to finance for necessary action. If the Group has a shortfall then the system notifies the finance department and finance processes the term. Term letter is send to the Group for paying through the balance premium. If the balance premium is paid then the finance department completes the term. If the balance is not paid then finance terms the group retrospectively.

If the Group has a refund due them then the system notifies the finance department and finance processes the refund and completes the term process.

Process Flow for Employee Term

Employee term is based on the Employer request to terminate the employee based on certain reasons. Based on these reasons the employee is termed and all employees who are termed needs to be sent the COBRA packets for COBRA enrollment. Billing adjustments are made for the employee term in the next invoice generated.

Process Flow for Dependent Term

Dependent term is based on the Employer/Employee request to terminate the Dependent based on certain reasons. Based on these reasons the Dependent is termed and the termed Dependent are sent the COBRA packets for COBRA enrollment. Billing adjustments are made for the Dependent term in the next invoice generated for the Group.

2.3. Process Flow

Process flow description (See Figure I-34)

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Screen ID's Screen ID Corresponding HTML File (SID) Screen Name Name enrollment.termination. Search Group for Termination /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/ groupsearch group/GroupSearch.jsp enrollment.termination. Group Termination Request /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/ grouptermination group/GroupTerminationRequest.jsp request enrollment.termination. Group Termination Process /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/ groupprocess group/GroupProcessTermination.jsp termination enrollment.termination. Group Termination /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/ grouptermination Confirmation group/GroupTerminationConfirm.jsp confirm enrollment.termination. Multiple Group Termination /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/ multiple Request group/MultipleGroupTermination groupsearch Request.jsp enrollment.termination. Multiple Group Termination /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/ multiple Confirmation group/MultipleGroupTermination grouptermination Confirm.jsp confirm enrollment.termination. Search Employee for /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/ employee Termination employee/EmployeeSearch.jsp search enrollment.termination. Employee Termination Request /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/ employee employee/EmployeeTermination terminationrequest Request.jsp enrollment.termination. Employee Process Termination /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/ employee employee/EmployeeProcess processtermination Termination.jsp enrollment.termination. Employee Termination /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/ employee Confirmation employee/EmployeeTermination terminationconfirm Confirm.jsp enrollment.termination. Search Dependent for /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/ dependent Termination dependent/DependentSearch.jsp search enrollment.termination. Dependent Termination /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/ dependent Request dependent/DependentTermination terminationrequest Request.jsp enrollment.termination. Dependent Process Termination /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/ dependent dependent/DependentProcess processtermination Termination.jsp enrollment.termination. Dependent Termination /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/ dependent Confirmation dependent/DependentTermination terminationconfirm Confirm.jsp enrollment.reinstatement. Search Group for /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/ groupsearch Reinstatement group/GroupSearch.jsp enrollment.reinstatement. Group Reinstatement Request /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/ groupreinstatementrequest group/GroupReinstatement Request.jsp enrollment.reinstatement. Group Process Reinstatement /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/ groupprocess group/GroupProcessReinstatement.jsp reinstatement enrollment.reinstatement. Group Reinstatement /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/ groupreinstatementconfirm Confirmation group/GroupReinstatement Confirm.jsp enrollment.reinstatement. Search for Employee /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/ employee Reinstatement employee/EmployeeSearch.jsp search enrollment.reinstatement. Employee Reinstatement /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/ employee Request employee/EmployeeReinstatement reinstatement Request.jsp request enrollment.reinstatement. Employee Process /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/ employee Reinstatement employee/EmployeeProcess processreinstatement Reinstatement.jsp enrollment.reinstatement. Employee Reinstatement /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/ employee Confirmation employee/EmployeeReinstatement reinstatement Confirm.jsp confirm enrollment.reinstatement. Search Dependent for /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/ dependent Reinstatement dependent/DependentSearch.jsp search enrollment.reinstatement. Dependent Reinstatement /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/ dependent Request dependent/DependentReinstatement reinstatement Request.jsp request enrollment.reinstatement. Dependent Process /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/ dependent Reinstatement dependent/DependentProcess processreinstatement Reinstatement.jsp enrollment.reinstatement. Dependent Reinstatement /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/ dependent Confirmation dependent/DependentReinstatement reinstatement Confirm.jsp confirm

3.1.1.1. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

SID: enrollment.termination.groupsearch

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-35) Element Name Element Type Purpose Group Id Entry Field Enter Group Id Group Name Entry Field Enter Group Name Phone Number Entry Field Enter Phone Number

SID: enrollment.termination.groupterminationrequest

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-36) Element Name Element Type Purpose Mode of Request Selection Box Entry Field for the Group Id. Postmark Date Entry Field Entry Field for the Group Name Date Received Entry Field Entry Field for the Date Received Authorized Contact Selection Box Entry Field for the Authorized Contact Requested Term Entry Field Entry Field for the Request Term Date Date Reason for Term Selection Box Select the Reason for Term Other Reason Entry Field Entry Field for the Other Reason

SID: enrollment.termination.groupprocesstermination

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-37) Element Name Element Type Purpose Effective Term Date Entry Field Entry Field for the Group Id. Change Term Status Select Box Select Change Term Status

SID: enrollment.termination.groupterminationconfinn

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-38)

SID: enrollment.termination.multiplegroupsearch

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-39) Element Name Element Type Purpose Postmark Date Entry Field Entry Field for the Group Name Date Received Entry Field Entry Field for the Date Received Requested Term Entry Field Entry Field for the Request Term Date Date Reason for Term Selection Box Select the Reason for Term Other Reason Entry Field Entry Field for the Other Reason

SID: enrollment.termination.multiplegroupterminationconfirm

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-40)

SID: enrollment.termination.employeesearch

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-41) Element Name Element Type Purpose Group Name Entry Field Entry Field for the Group Name. Group Id Entry Field Entry Field for the Group ID Employee First Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee First Name Name Employee Last Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee Last Name Name Employee Phone Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee Phone Number Number Employee SSN Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee SSN Employee ID Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee ID

SID: enrollment.termination.employeeterminationrequest

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-42) Element Name Element Type Purpose Mode of Request Selection Box Entry Field for the Group Id. Postmark Date Entry Field Entry Field for the Group Name Date Received Entry Field Entry Field for the Date Received Authorized Contact Selection Box Entry Field for the Authorized Contact Requested Term Entry Field Entry Field for the Request Term Date Date Reason for Term Selection Box Select the Reason for Term Other Reason Entry Field Entry Field for the Other Reason

SID: enrollment.termination.employeeprocesstermination

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-43) Element Name Element Type Purpose Effective Term Date Entry Field Entry Field for the Group Id. Change Term Status Select Box Select Change Term Status

SID: enrollment.termination.employeeterminationconfirm

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-44)

SID: enrollment.termination.dependentsearch

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-45) Element Element Name Type Purpose Employee First Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee First Name. Name Employee Last Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee Last Name Name Employee SSN Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee SSN Employee Id Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee Id Dependent Entry Field Entry Field for the Dependent First Name First Name Dependent Last Entry Field Entry Field for the Dependent Last Name Name Dependent Entry Field Entry Field for the Dependent SSN SSN Dependent Id Entry Field Entry Field for the Dependent Id

SID: enrollment.termination.dependentterminationrequest

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-46) Element Name Element Type Purpose Mode of Request Selection Box Entry Field for the Group Id. Postmark Date Entry Field Entry Field for the Group Name Date Received Entry Field Entry Field for the Date Received Authorized Contact Selection Box Entry Field for the Authorized Contact Requested Term Entry Field Entry Field for the Request Date Term Date Reason for Term Selection Box Select the Reason for Term Other Reason Entry Field Entry Field for the Other Reason

SID: enrollment.termination.dependentprocesstermination

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-47) Element Name Element Type Purpose Effective Term Date Entry Field Entry Field for the Term Date. Change Term Status Select Box Select Change Term Status

SID: enrollment.termination.dependentterminationconfirm

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-48)

SID: enrollment.reinstatement.groupsearch

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-49) Element Name Element Type Purpose Group Id Entry Field Enter Group Id Group Name Entry Field Enter Group Name Phone Number Entry Field Enter Phone Number

SID: enrollment.reinstatement.groupreinstatementrequest

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-50) Element Name Element Type Purpose Mode of Request Selection Box Entry Field for the Group Id. Postmark Date Entry Field Entry Field for the Group Name Date Received Entry Field Entry Field for the Date Received Authorized Contact Selection Box Entry Field for the Authorized Contact Reinstatement Date Entry Field Entry Field for the Request Rein Requested Date Reason for Selection Box Select the Reason for Reinstatement Reinstatement Other Reason Entry Field Entry Field for the Other Reason

SID: enrollment.reinstatement.groupprocessreinstatement

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-51) Element Name Element Type Purpose Effective Date Entry Field Entry Field for the Date. Change Status Select Box Select Change Status

SID: enrollment.reinstatement.groupreinstatementconfirm

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-52)

SID: enrollment.reinstatement.employeesearch

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-53) Element Element Name Type Purpose Group Name Entry Field Entry Field for the Group Name. Group Id Entry Field Entry Field for the Group ID Employee First Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee First Name Name Employee Last Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee Last Name Name Employee Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee Phone Phone Number Number Employee SSN Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee SSN Employee ID Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee ID

SID: enrollment.reinstatement.employeereinstatementrequest

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-54) Element Name Element Type Purpose Mode of Request Selection Box Entry Field for the Group Id. Postmark Date Entry Field Entry Field for the Group Name Date Received Entry Field Entry Field for the Date Received Authorized Contact Selection Box Entry Field for the Authorized Contact Reinstatement Date Entry Field Entry Field for the Request ReinX Requested Number Reason for Selection Box Select the Reason for Reinstatement Reinstatement Other Reason Entry Field Entry Field for the Other Reason

SID: enrollment.reinstatement.employeeprocessreinstatement

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-55) Element Name Element Type Purpose Effective Date Entry Field Entry Field for the Date. Change Status Select Box Select Change Status

SID: enrollment.reinstatement.employeereinstatementconfirm

Screen Snap Shot

SID: enrollment.reinstatement.dependentsearch

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-56) Element Element Name Type Purpose Employee First Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee First Name. Name Employee Last Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee Last Name Name Employee SSN Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee SSN Employee Id Entry Field Entry Field for the Employee Id Dependent Entry Field Entry Field for the Dependent First Name First Name Dependent Last Entry Field Entry Field for the Dependent Last Name Name Dependent Entry Field Entry Field for the Dependent SSN SSN Dependent Id Entry Field Entry Field for the Dependent Id

SID: enrollment.reinstatement.dependentreinstatementrequest

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-57) Element Name Element Type Purpose Mode of Request Selection Box Entry Field for the Group Id. Postmark Date Entry Field Entry Field for the Group Name Date Received Entry Field Entry Field for the Date Received Authorized Contact Selection Box Entry Field for the Authorized Contact Reinstatement Date Entry Field Entry Field for the Request Rein Requested Date Reason for Selection Box Select the Reason for Reinstatement Reinstatement Other Reason Entry Field Entry Field for the Other Reason

SID: enrollment.reinstatement.dependentprocessreinstatement

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-58) Element Name Element Type Purpose Effective Date Entry Field Entry Field for the Date. Change Status Select Box Select Change Status

SID: enrollment.reinstatement.dependentreinstatementconfirm

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-59)

3.1.2. Screen Flow (See Figure I-60)

4. Business Rule Mapping Activity Rules Term Process (request received from) The person who requested the term should be the designated contact person or agent assigned to that group. Other persons are not authorized to initiate the term request. Term Process (Manual) On employer request the term process is initiated. The term process should check the billing status and the balance due or refund. If the group has paid through and there is no shortage or surplus then this process should auto initiate the term process. Send letters the Group, Employee and dependent. Notify via mail to the GMS rep if the group size is less than 15 and if above 15 notify the Sales rep. If there is a shortage then send a mail to the finance and put the term status as term pending. Finance should initiate follow up for collecting the balance due and sent the term letter and payment letter. On receipt of payment term the Group. If the Payment is not received then retro terms the group. If there is refund due to the group the finance should process the refund and initiate the term there after. Note: GMS can process Term up to 30days. (LEVEL I) Term beyond 30 days-60 days can be processed only by lead (LEVEL II) Term extended beyond 60 days is based on ultimate authority to a specified user ((LEVEL III and IV) Term Process (Automated) Automated term process is initiated if the group does not pay the premium or there is shortage of premium. Term letter is sent to the group on 32 day of non-receipt of payment and the Group is given 15-day notice to repay. If the Group does not pay within 32 +15 days the finance should finalize term based on authority. General Term rules If the group is termed then all the employees and dependents for the group are termed. The COBRA Members associated with the group should also be termed. The term letter should be sent to the entire member for the Group including the COBRA group. EFT and auto credit card deductions should stop on term. Term Process Dependent can be terminated based on various reason provide for the employee termination All term should be effective end of the current month or if the term is requested for the month after the current month. Dependent cannot be termed with past date beyond 30 days. Exception: Death of the dependent. The dependent is termed the on the day of the death. Term Rules Auto initiate Dependent terms if the age of the dependent is 23 and the dependent other than spouse or domestic partner are no longer eligible. Also send the COBRA packet to the dependent if termed. Billing Adjustment Make adjustment to the billing for the termed dependent in the next billing cycle. Term Process (request received from) The person who requested the term should be the designated contact person. Other persons are not authorized to initiate the term request. Term Process (Manual) On employer request the term process is initiated. The term process should check the billing status and the balance due or refund. If the group has paid through and there is no shortage or surplus then this process should auto initiate the term process. Send letters the Group, Employee and dependent. Notify via mail to the GMS rep if the group size is less than 15 and if above 15 notify the Sales rep. If there is a shortage then send a mail to the finance and put the term status as term pending. Finance should initiate follow up for collecting the balance due and sent the term letter and payment letter. On receipt of payment term the Group. If the Payment is not received then retro terms the group. If there is refund due to the group the finance should process the refund and initiate the term there after. Note: GMS can process Term up to 30days. (LEVEL I) Term beyond 30 days-60 days can be processed only by lead (LEVEL II) Term extended beyond 60 days is based on ultimate authority to a specified user (LEVEL III and IV) Term Process (Automated) Automated term process is initiated if the group does not pay the premium or there is shortage of premium. Term letter is sent to the group on 32 day of non-receipt of payment and the Group is given 15-day notice to repay. If the Group does not pay within 32 +15 days the finance should finalize term based on authority. General Term rules If the group is termed then all the employees and dependents for the group are termed. The COBRA Members associated with the group should also be termed. The term letter should be sent to the entire member for the Group including the COBRA group. EFT and auto credit card deductions should stop on term. Term Process This is to complete the term process where the term status was term pend. All auto initiated term process has the term status as term pend. It requires user intervention to complete the term process based on authority. Term Process Employee can be terminated based on various reason provide for the employee termination All term should be effective end of the current month or if the term is requested for the month after the current month. Employee cannot be termed with past date beyond 30 days. Exception: Death of the employee. The employee is termed the on the day of the death. Process Associated with term All employee terms should send term letter to the employee and group. The employee can opt for COBRA and hence the COBRE enrollment packet should be sent to the employee Billing Adjustment There should be billing adjustment in the subsequent bill for the termed employee. Term Process Dependent can be terminated based on various reason provide for the employee termination All term should be effective end of the current month or if the term is requested for the month after the current month. Dependent cannot be termed with past date beyond 30 days. Exception: Death of the dependent. The dependent is termed the on the day of the death. Term Rules Auto initiate Dependent terms if the age of the dependent is 23 and the dependent other than spouse or domestic partner are no longer eligible. Also send the COBRA packet to the dependent if termed. Billing Adjustment Make adjustment to the billing for the termed dependent in the next billing cycle. Reinstatement Process The person who requested the reinstatement should be the designated contact person. Other persons are not authorized to initiate the reinstatement request. If reinstatement cannot happen then send the denial letter. If reinstated notify finance System should calculate the reinstatement fees. Finance will reinstate on receipt of payment. Note When the group is reinstated all the members associated with the group are also reinstated. Including COBRA group. GMS can reinstate within 30 days. Any period above this needs authorization. Reinstatement Process The person who requested the reinstatement should be the designated contact person. Other persons are not authorized to initiate the reinstatement request. If reinstatement cannot happen then send the denial letter. Note When the Employee is reinstated all the dependents of the Employee are also reinstated. Reinstatement Process The person who requested the reinstatement should be the designated contact person. Other persons are not authorized to initiate the reinstatement request. If reinstatement cannot happen then send the denial letter. If reinstated notify finance for reinstatement fees calculation if applicable.

5. User Role

The respective level user can terminate or reinstate the dependent, employee or group based on the criteria mention in the following table. The following validations are done with respect to the current date. S.No., User Role Condition Dependent Termination 1 Level I Termination date is with in 30 days prior or later 2 Level II Termination date is with in 60 days prior or later 3 Level III, Termination date is with in 90 days prior or later Level IV Employee Termination 1 Level I Termination date is with in 30 days prior or later 2 Level II Termination date is with in 60 days prior or later 3 Level III, Termination date is with in 90 days prior or later Level IV Group Termination 1 Level I Termination date is with in 30 days prior or later 2 Level II Termination date is with in 60 days prior or later 3 Level III, Termination date is with in 90 days prior or later Level IV Dependent Reinstatement 1 Level I Reinstatement date is with in 30 days prior or later 2 Level II Reinstatement date is with in 60 days prior or later 3 Level III, Reinstatement date is with in 90 days prior or later Level IV Employee Reinstatement 1 Level I Reinstatement date is with in 30 days prior or later 2 Level II Reinstatement date is with in 60 days prior or later 3 Level III, Reinstatement date is with in 90 days prior or later Level IV Group Reinstatement 1 Level I Reinstatement date is with in 30 days prior or later 2 Level II Reinstatement date is with in 60 days prior or later 3 Level III, Reinstatement date is with in 90 days prior or later Level IV

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification Apeals and Grievances Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)06 Version: <1.0> Revision History

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation BPI_CAS_FSD_EN Functional Specification Document- Enrollment BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_001 Process Specification - New Business Enrollment BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_002 Process Specification - Enrollment Changes/Add-On BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_003 Process Specification - COBRA Enrollment/Changes BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_004 Process Specification - ROE/OE BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_005 Process Specification - Termination/ Reinstatement

2. Process Identification

2.1. Background

Any process or transaction that is performed by PacAdvantage is subject to a review process. The rule for such is defined in the PacAdvantage handbook. There are cases when the Customer is not satisfied with some of the decisions made during the administration of the program. When a customer is not satisfied with the decision made they can submit a request for Program Review. Once a decision has been made to grant or deny the request, an Appeal can then be submitted to overturn the decision of the Program Review. Not all decisions are appealable. In any case, all grievances need to be sent to PacAdvantage-Roseville, along with other certain requirements, for making a decision whether to consider the Grievances or to reject them as the case may be.

PacAdvantage-Roseville makes the decision on the initial requests or “Program Reviews” and forwards the response to the customer. Upon receipt of a second request or “Appeal”, if the decision is appealable, Pac Advantage-Roseville forwards the information to PacAdvantage-SF to make a ruling. (If the decision is not appealable, PacAdvantage-Roseville sends a letter regarding such to the customer.) PacAdvantage-SF then returns a ruling and PacAdvantage-Roseville forwards the response to the customer.

This entire process needs to be captured and tracked by the system.

Any transaction within the system has a history. The personnel handling the grievance need to review the history and generate a report regarding the grievance for review.

2.2. Process Description

The objective of the Grievance process is to:

-   -   1) Maintain a status for all Grievances received from the         customer and follow up with the decision made either by         PacAdvantage-Roseville or PacAdvantage-SF.

The following are the other requirements that will be supported and constraints on the proposed system:

-   -   1) The system would track the initial request from open to         close.     -   2) The system would track subsequent requests, if a proper         appeal, from re-open to close.     -   3) Track subsequent requests, if not a proper appeal, for         receive dates, remarks and any correspondence.     -   4) The system would also have a history of all the transactions         to get the report for the Nature of Grievance.

2.3. Process Flow

Process for Grievances—first request (or “Program Review”)

-   -   1) Receive the Grievance from Group and/or Member and/or Agent         representing the Group and/or Member.     -   2) Categorize the nature of the Grievance.     -   3) Review the history and collect all the relevant documents for         the Grievance.     -   4) Make decision to approve/deny the Grievance.     -   5) Close the Grievance.     -   6) Send relevant letters.     -   7) If the Grievance is in favor of the group or the employee,         send notification to Finance and or GMS to take necessary action         (Reinstate the Group/Member).

Process for Grievances—second request (or “Appeal”)

-   -   1) Receive the Grievance from the Group and/or Member and/or         Agent representing the Group and/or Member.     -   2) Categorize the nature of the Grievance.     -   3) Review the history and collect all the relevant documents for         the Grievance.     -   4) Forward the document with relevant information to         PacAdvantage-SF.     -   5) Follow up with PacAdvantage-SF regarding the decision on the         Grievance.     -   6) On receiving the decision convey the decision to the Group         and or employee.     -   7) Close the Grievance.     -   8) Send relevant letters.     -   9) If the Grievance is in favor of the group or the employee         send notification to Finance and or GMS to take necessary action         (Reinstate the Group/Member).

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Screen ID's Corresponding Screen ID (SID) Screen Name HTML File Name bpi.enrollment.grievance.appellant Grievance Search grievancesearch search bpi.enrollment.grievance.grievance Grievance Create Grievancecreate create bpi.enrollment.grievance.grievance Grievance Modify Grievancemodify modify bpi.enrollment.grievance.grievance Grievance Close Grievanceclose close

3.1.1.1. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

SID: bpi.enrollment.grievance.appelantsearch (See Figure I-61)

Element Name Element Name Element Type Label Purpose Complainant Text Complainant Type To display text Type appellantType Radio button Complainant Type To select the type “Group” or “Member” Complainant Text Complainant ID To display text ID appellantId Text Field Complainant ID To enter complainant id Company Text Company Name To display text Name companyName Text Field Company Name To enter company name First Name Text First Name To display text firstName Text Field First Name To enter first name Last Name Text Last Name To display text lastName Text Field Last Name To enter last name SSN Text Field SSN/Tax ID To enter SSN or Tax ID Phone Text Phone Number To display text Number phoneNumber Text Field Phone Number To enter phone number search HTML button Search To perform Search operation cancel HTML button Cancel To reset the all search fields Search Table HTML Table To list the Complainant ID, Company Name, First Name, Last Name and Phone number is displayed on the screen

3.1.1.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

SID: bpi.enrollment.grievance.grievancecreate (See Figure I-62) Element Name Element Type Label Purpose Complainant Text Complainant Type To display text Type Complainant Text Complainant Type To display complainant type Type dynamically Complainant Text Complainant ID To display text ID Complainant Text Complainant ID To display complainant type ID dynamically Group HTML Table Group Information To display company name, contact Information name, address, phone, effective date, ROE date, status Postmark Text Postmark Date To display text Date postMarkDate Calendar Postmark Date To enter the postmark date Received date Text Received date To display text receivedDate Calendar Received date To enter the received date Nature Of Text Nature of Grievance To display text Grievance natureOfGrievance List Nature of Grievance To list the Nature of Grievance. Upon selection of the Nature of Grievance, the corresponding Grievance Type is displayed on the screen Subject of Text Subject of Grievance To display text Grievance subjectOfGrievance List Subject of Grievance To list the Subject of Grievance for selection Urgent Text Urgent To display text urgent Checkbox Urgent To select the option of having urgent. Remarks Text Remarks To display text remarks Text Area Remarks To enter remarks larger area is provided save HTML button Save Submit the data and save in the database cancel HTML button Cancel To reset to previous status as was on loading the page

Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Postmark Date Should default to system date. Error Dialog Box: Postmark date can never be a future “Please choose the correct date. Postmark date and can be one day older than date can be a future date.” current date only. Received date Should default to system date. Error Dialog Box: Received date can never be a future “Please choose the correct date. Received date and should be equal to OR date can be a future date.” greater than current date. Nature of Default Option should be - Choose Error Dialog Box: Grievance One- Should list all the types of “Please choose the nature of grievance. Natures of Grievances Subject of Default Option should be - Choose Error Dialog Box: Grievance One- Should list all the types of “Please choose the subject of grievance. subject of Grievances Remarks Entry Text Area to enter the remarks None for the Grievance. The text area should have scrollbar if the content within the text area grows. Save Should function On clicking the Error Dialog Box: Save Button or pressing the Enter “The value entered for ‘field name’ is key with cursor on the “Save incorrect. Please enter the correct value.” Button” Note: The “field name” name should be Save the data to the repository with dynamically picked based on the name of the status of the Grievance as open. the field for which the error has occurred. Auto generate the grievance ID Cancel Should reset to the status as was on None loading the page on clicking the cancel button

3.1.1.3. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

bpi.enrollment.grievance.grievancemodify (See Figure I-63) Element Name Element Type Label Purpose Search by Text Search by Complainant To display text Complainant searchType Radio button Search by Complainant To select the option of search Search by Text Search by Grievance To display text Grievance searchType Radio button Search by Grievance To select the option of search Grievance ID Text Grievance ID To display text grievanceID Read only field Grievance ID To display Grievance ID. Ability to search for open Grievances Complainant Text Complainant ID To display text ID appellantId Entry Field Complainant ID To enter complainant ID. Ability to search for open Grievances for the specific complainant. search Button Search To search for the Grievance ID or the Complainant ID (group or member id) with open grievances Grievance HTML Table Grievance Process Table List the grievances based on the Process Table search criteria. Process HTML Button Process To show the grievance selected for further processing Grievance HTML Table Grievance Table to display Postmark Date, Received Date, Nature of Grievance, Subject of Grievance, Appellant Type, Appellant ID, Grievance Status, Remarks. Additional Text Additional Remarks To display text Remarks additionalRemarks Entry Field Additional Remarks To enter text Forward for Text Forward for Approval To display text Approval forwardForApproval Check box Forward for Approval To check if forwarding for approval Forward to Text Forward to To display text forwardedTo Entry Field Forward to If “Forward for Approval” is checked then this field must be completed. To enter the name of the person to whom the Grievance is to be forwarded Forward Date Text Forward Date To display text forwardDate Calendar Forward Date If “Forward for Approval” is checked then this field must be completed. Enter the forward date Batch Date Text Batch Date To display text batchDate Calendar Batch Date To enter batch date save HTML button Save Save the data and save in the database cancel HTML button Cancel To reset to previous status as was on loading the page

Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Grievance Entry field to enter grievance ID and Error Message: on tab should populate the Grievance “The grievance ID not available” based on the Grievance id Complainant Entry fields to enter Complainant ID Error Message: and on tab should populate all the “Complainant ID not available” Grievances for the specific appellant. Search Search for the Grievance ID or None Appellant ID Grievance Process The table gets populated based on None Table the search criteria. For Grievance ID the table shows only one grievance. For Appellant search the table shows all the grievances for the specific Appellant. Process Process the specific Row in the table NONE selected Grievance Table to display Postmark Date, None Received Date, Nature of Grievance, Subject of Grievance, Appellant Type, Appellant ID, Grievance Status, Remarks. Additional Entry field for additional remarks None Remarks Forward for Check box to check if forward or None Approval not. Forward To If “Forward for Approval” is Error Dialog Box: checked then this field must be “Please Enter the Forwarded to persons completed. To enter the name of the name” person to whom the Grievance is to be forwarded Forward Date Allow entering the date or picking Error Dialog Box: up from the calendar “Please Enter the Forwarded Date” If “Forward for Approval” is checked then this field must be completed. Enter the forward date Batch Date Allow entering the batch date or None picking up from the calendar Save Should function On clicking the Error Dialog Box: Save Button or pressing the Enter “The value entered for ‘field name’ is key with cursor on the “Save incorrect. Please enter the correct value.” Button” Note: The “field name” name should be Save the data on clicking the save dynamically picked based on the name of button. the field for which the error has occurred. Cancel Reset to the state as was on loading None the page

3.1.1.4. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

SID: bpi.enrollment.grievance.grievanceclose (See Figure I-64) Element Name Element Type Label Purpose Search by Text Search by Complainant To display text Complainant searchType Radio button Search by Complainant To select the option of search Search by Text Search by Grievance To display text Grievance searchType Radio button Search by Grievance To select the option of search Grievance ID Text Grievance ID To display text grievanceID Entry Field Grievance ID To enter Grievance ID. Ability to search for open Grievances Complainant Text To display text ID complainant Text Field Complainant ID To display Complainant ID. Ability ID to search for open Grievances for the specific complainant search Button Search To search for the Grievance ID or the Complainant ID(group or member id) with open grievances Grievance HTML Table Grievance Close Table List the grievances based on the Close Table search criteria. Grievance HTML Table Grievance Table Table to display Postmark Date, Table Received Date, Nature of Grievance, Subject of Grievance, Appellant Type, Appellant ID, Grievance Status, Remarks. Conclusion Text Conclusion To display text conclusion List Conclusion List the conclusion of appeal as Approved, Denied, or Cancelled Reason Text Reason To display text reason List Reason List the Reason for the conclusion otherReason Entry Field Other Reason To enter reason not included in Reason List Batch Date Text Batch Date To display text batchDate Calendar Batch Date To enter batch date Save HTML button Save Submit the data and save in the database

Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Grievance Entry field to enter grievance ID. Error Message: “Grievance ID is required” Complainant Entry fields to enter Complainant ID. Error Message: “Complainant ID is required” Search Search for the Grievance ID or None Appellant ID Grievance Close The table gets populated based on None Table the search criteria. For Grievance ID the table shows only one grievance. For Appellant search the table shows all the grievances for the specific Appellant. Close Process the specific Row in the table NONE selected Conclusion Default option should be - choose None one- . List the conclusions for closing the grievance as Approved, Denied or cancelled Reason Default option should be - choose None one- . List the reasons applicable Other Reason If the reason selected is others the None enter the other reason Batch Date Allow entering the batch date or None picking up from the calendar Submit Should function On clicking the Error Dialog Box: Submit Button or pressing the Enter “The value entered for ‘field name’ is key with cursor on the “Submit incorrect. Please enter the correct value.” Button” Note: The “field name” name should be Save the data on clicking the submit dynamically picked based on the name of button. the field for which the error has occurred.

3.1.2. Screen Flow

(See Figure I-65)

4. Business Rule Mapping Activity Rules Appeals and grievance Appeals and grievance is the screen that needs to be handled by personnel skilled with the operations of the PacAdvantage and the governing rules. All appeals are entered and followed up for the outcome of the appeals. The turn around time for the appeals should be 3 days at the BPI office for entering the record and gathering the reports and summarizing the history.

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification Association Master Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)07 Version: <1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Jan. 23, 2001 Sudhakar k 1.0 Baseline Release Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Background 5

2.2. Process Description 5

2.3. Process Flow 5

3. User Interface 7

3.1. User Interface Screens 7

3.1.1. Screen ID's 7

3.1.2. Screen Flow 17

4. Business Rule Mapping 15

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

The purpose of this document is to describe the process of Association Master. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_EN Enrollment SCOPE_ADD Addendum to the Scope Document BPI_SCOPE_EN_01 Business Use case specification - Group Enrollment BPI_SCOPE_EN_03 Business Use case specification - Create Individual Association

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1. Background

Associations are basically a body of groups/members representing certain types of associations within the State of California. Association Groups and Association Members can participate in the PacAdvantage program similar to small employer groups or members. Associations are classified as Guaranteed, Endorsed, PEO's or Chambers. Each of the associations classified have specific business rules when participating in PacAdvantage program. This document identifies the rules and business governing the association groups and members.

2.2. Process Description

The objective of the Association Master is to:

-   -   1) Create a master record for the association based on the         classification of the association and specify the business rules         associated with these classifications.     -   2) The master record for association includes         -   General information about the association         -   Contact information         -   Coverage Information         -   Agent information         -   Other information like internal work group, membership             status etc.

2.3. Process Flow

Process for Association Master

Create, modify or inactivate an association master is the basic operations that can be performed on the association master.

-   -   1) Enter general information about the association. The general         information includes         -   Association Type         -   Association Name         -   Affiliation ID         -   Address         -   Suite         -   City         -   State         -   ZIP     -   2) Enter contact information. The contact information includes         -   Salutation         -   First Name         -   Middle Initial         -   Last Name         -   Suffix         -   Contact Phone         -   Contact Fax         -   Email Address     -   3) Enter coverage information. Coverage information includes         -   Line of coverage offered         -   Domestic Partner Coverage         -   Rate Type         -   Admin Fees Type (Note: This are captured in Carrier             Maintenance Module (Rate Classification)         -   Agent Fees Type (Note: This are captured in Carrier             Maintenance Module (Rate Classification)         -   Additional Fees type (Note: This are captured in Carrier             Maintenance Module (Rate Classification)     -   4) Enter other information. Other information includes         -   Internal Work group         -   Membership status         -   Contract Date         -   Association re qualification period         -   Special Handling

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Screen ID's Screen ID Corresponding HTML File (SID) Screen Name Name enrollment.association. Association /bpi/cas/enrollment/association/ association General Info associationgeneral/Association general GeneralInfo.jsp enrollment.association. Association /bpi/cas/enrollment/association/ association Coverage Info associationcoverage/Association coverage CoverageInfo.jsp enrollment.association. Association /bpi/cas/enrollment/association/ association Other Info associationother/Association other OtherInfo.jsp enrollment.association. Association /bpi/cas/enrollment/association/ association Confirmation associationconfirm/Association confirm Confirm.jsp enrollment.association. Internal /bpi/cas/enrollment/association/ internal WorkGroup internalworkgroupsearch/Internal workgroupsearch Search WorkGroupSearch.jsp enrollment.association. Association /bpi/cas/enrollment/association/ association Search associationgeneral/Association generalsearch GeneralSearch.jsp

3.1.1.1. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

SID: enrollment.association.associationgeneral

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-66) Element Name Element Type Purpose General Header Text To provide content for header Information Association Text To provide text name Association Entry Field Enter association name name Search HTML Button To show pop up window to search for the association name for editing the data. Association Text To provide text Type Association Drop Down List List the types of Type association to select from Address Sub Header To provide content Information for sub header Address Text To provide text Address Entry field Enter the address Suite Text To provide text Suite Entry field Enter the suite number City Text To provide text City Entry field Enter the city name State Text To provide text State Drop Down List List the states in USA for selection ZIP Text To provide text ZIP Entry field Enter the ZIP code Contact Sub Header for Text for sub header content Information contact information Salutation Text To provide text Salutation Drop Down List Select the salutation First Name Text To provide text First name Entry field Enter first name MI Text To provide text MI Entry field Enter Middle initial Last name Text To provide text Last name Entry field Enter last name Suffix Text To provide text Suffix Drop down List To select the suffix Phone Text To provide text Phone Entry field Enter phone number Extension Text To provide text Extension Entry field Enter extension number FAX Text To provide text Fax Entry Field Enter the Fax number Email Text To provide text Email Entry field Enter the email address Continue HTML Button Save and continue to the next screen BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_007_002 Cancel Reset Button Reset to the status as was on loading the page

SID: enrollment.association.associationcoverage

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-67) Element Name Element Type Purpose Coverage Header Text To provide header for Coverage Information Line of Text To provide text coverage Line of Check boxes Check boxes to select Coverage multiple line of coverage offered Domestic Text To provide text Partner Coverage Domestic Radio Boxes To choose yes or no for Partner domestic partner coverage Coverage Coverage Rate Text To provide text Type Coverage Rate Radio Boxes To choose if the rate type is type blended or non blended Continue HTML Button Submit button to save the data entered in to the repository and navigate to the next screen BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_007_003 Cancel HTML reset Button To reset to the status as was on loading the page.

SID: enrollment.association.associationother

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-68) Element Name Element Type Purpose Other Header text To provide text for the header Information Internal work Text To provide text group Internal work Entry field Enter the work group ID group Search HTML Button Button to search for the work group to be attached to the association Membership Text To provide text status Membership Drop down list List the membership status as status active, closed or frozen Contract Date Entry field (Calendar) To enter or pick up the association's effective date Association re Entry field (Calendar) To enter or pick up the qualification association's re period qualification date Batch billing Text To provide text Batch billing Radio box To specify if the association groups and members are to billed as one batch Desired Text To provide text Association name on the bill Desired Radio Box To specify if the Association Association name should be on the bill or not name on the bill Continue HTML Button Button to save the information on this page Clear HTML reset Button To reset to the status as was on loading the page.

SID: enrollment.association.associationconfirm

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-69)

SID: enrollment.association.internalworkgroupsearch

Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. 70)

SID: enrollment.association.associationgeneralsearch

Screen Snap Shot (See Figure I-71)

3.1.2. Screen Flow

(See Figure I-72)

4. Business Rule Mapping Activity Rules Allow Are eligible to enroll at any time and follow business Employer rules for Non-Association Small Employer Groups 2-50. Groups 2-50 This rules applies for Guaranteed, Endorsed, PEO's and Chambers Allow Must have a membership number and apply after 60 Individual days (read as waiting period), but within 120 days, of Members becoming a member of the Association or of a group sponsored for coverage. Effective date of coverage will be within 45 days of receipt of a completed application. Declines must wait until Open Enrollment. Waives may enroll within 30 days of losing other employer- sponsored coverage. The Individual Association member is required to enroll in all lines of coverage offered by the Association Master. The Individual Association member is not eligible for COBRA. This is applicable only to Guaranteed association Allow Are eligible to enroll at any time and follow business Employer rules for Small Employer Groups 2-50 EXCEPT for the Groups >100 size of the group for Guaranteed association (Group size can be un limited for guaranteed association) Rates Rate for each association for various rate classification are defined in the carrier maintenance module. (Admin Fees, Agent Commission, Additional Fees and Rate differential) Agent All associations have an Agency and/or Agent(s). Commissions are applicable to both Group's and Association Member's. For both, the agent is attached at the Group/Association member, but can only be chosen from the particular agents attached to the association. Agent is selected based on the internal work group assigned to the agent/agency. Screen Rules Small employer group after identifying the association for Group would follow the same navigation as applicable for the Small employer group. The Group Affiliated to an association should also have the Membership Number and the date of membership. Screen Rules Individual association would follow the same navigation for Individual as applicable to the employee after selecting the Association association and validating that the association is members guaranteed. The only additional things needed are a “Membership Number” and a “Date of Membership”. Essentially the “Date of Membership” replaces the employee “Date of Hire” for an employee.

Benefits Partners Inc Process Specification Carrier Issues Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_(—)08 Version: >1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Dec. 18, 2001 Sudhakar k 1.0 Baseline Release Jan. 30, 2002 Sudhakar 1.0 Rev1 Revision Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Background 5

2.2. Process Description 5

2.3. Process Flow 5

Process for Carrier Issues 5

3. User Interface 6

3.1. User Interface Screens 6

3.1.1. Screen ID's 6

Screen Validations 14

3.1.2. Screen Flow 16

4. Business Rule Mapping 17

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

The purpose of this document is to describe the process of Carrier Issues. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_EN Enrollment SCOPE_ADD Addendum to the Scope Document

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation BPI_CAS_FSD_EN Functional Specification Document - Enrollment BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_001 Process Specification - New Business Enrollment BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_002 Process Specification - Enrollment Changes/Add-On BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_003 Process Specification - COBRA Enrollment/Changes BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_004 Process Specification - ROE/OE BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_005 Process Specification - Termination/Reinstatement

2. Process Identification

2.1. Background

Various issues can arise for a member or group once enrolled with a carrier through PacAdvantage. These issues can vary from not receiving identification cards to incomplete transmission upload by the carrier. As PacAdvantage becomes aware of these issues it is their responsibility to resolve the issue in a timely manner acting as a liaison between the member and the carrier. All issues need to be tracked from start to finish by reason for issue and related carrier for reporting on performance standards as well providing information to PacAdvantage-SF regarding recurring issues within a carrier.

Issues can arise at the Group level, for all members on a group and/or all members on a line of coverage. Issues can also arise at the Employee level and/or Dependent level, by member and/or by plan.

Within PacAdvantage there are personnel who specifically handle all carrier related issues. Other representatives within PacAdvantage can receive the initial request, document it as needed and forward it to the Carrier Issue personnel. The Carrier Issue personnel contact the carrier to resolve the issue. They mark the documentation as needed and then close the issue and forward the resolutions back to the initial requester (Originator). The Originator informs the member/group of resolution.

2.2. Process Description

The objective of the Carrier Issues process is to:

-   -   1) Maintain a status for all Carrier Issues received from the         customer and follow up with the carrier for resolution and         inform the customer of resolution.

The following are the other requirements that will be supported and constraints on the proposed system:

-   -   1) The system would track the initial request from open to         close.     -   2) The system would track both the reported issue and the actual         issue.     -   3) The system would track the final resolution.     -   4) The system would also have a history of all the transactions         to get the report for the Reported Issue.

2.3. Process Flow

Process for Carrier Issues

-   -   1) Representative is notified of the issue by the customer and         cannot resolve the issue alone.     -   2) Representative initiates a request either from the Group         level, Employee level, or Dependent level.     -   3) The representative categorizes the reported issue and         provides any supporting documentation.     -   4) The issue is marked as “Open” for the Carrier Issue personnel         to handle.     -   5) The Carrier Issue personnel contact the carrier.     -   6) The Carrier Issue personnel provide the carrier with         necessary information to resolve the issue. (i.e.         re-transmission, e-mail of information)     -   7) The Carrier Issue personnel mark the issue as “Closed” and         inform the Originator.     -   8) The originator follows-up with the member.

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Screen ID's

<List SID and the screen name and Corresponding HTML file for the screen. Corresponding Screen ID (SID) Screen Name HTML File Name bpi.enrollment.carrierissue.carrier Carrier Issue carrierissuesearch issuesearch Search bpi.enrollment.carrierissue.carrier Carrier Issue carrierissuecreate issuecreate Create bpi.enrollment.carrierissue.carrier Carrier Issue carrierissuemodify issuemodify Modify bpi.enrollment.carrierissue.carrier Carrier Issue carrierissueclose issueclose Close

3.1.1.1. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

SID: bpi.enrollment.carrierissue.carrierissuesearch (See Figure I-73) Element Name Element Type Label Purpose Customer Text Customer Type To display text Type clientType Radio button Customer Type To select the type “Group” or “Member” Customer ID Text Customer ID To display text clientId Text Field Customer ID To enter complainant id Company Text Company Name To display text Name companyName Text Field Company Name To enter company name First Name Text First Name To display text firstName Text Field First Name To enter first name Last Name Text Last Name To display text lastName Text Field Last Name To enter last name SSN Text Field SSN/Tax ID To enter SSN or Tax ID SSN Text Field SSN/Tax ID To enter SSN or Tax ID Phone Text Phone Number To display text Number phoneNumber Text Field Phone Number To enter phone number search HTML button Search To perform Search operation cancel HTML button Cancel To reset the all search fields Search Table HTML Table To list the Complainant ID, Company Name, First Name, Last Name and Phone number is displayed on the screen

3.1.1.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

SID: bpi.enrollment.carrierissue.carrierissuecreate (See Figure I-74) Element Element Name Type Purpose Received date Text To display text Received date Calendar To enter the received date Reported Issue Text To display text Reported Issue List To list the Reported Issue. Group Entry Field To enter Group ID if Client Type is Group. Ability to search for Group, upon selection or entry of the Group, the group's general information is displayed (Company Name, Contact Name, Address, Phone, Effective Date, ROE Date, Status) Member Entry Field To enter Member ID if Client Type is Member. Ability to search for Member, upon selection or entry of the member ID, the member's general information is displayed (Name, Address, Phone, Effective Date, ROE Date, Status, Benefit Level, Coverage Choice) Remarks Text To display text Remarks Entry Field To enter remarks Submit HTML Submit the data and button save in the database Cancel HTML To reset to previous status button as was on loading the page Cancel HTML To reset to previous status button as was on loading the page

Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Received date Should default to system date. Error Dialog Box: Received date can never be a future “Please choose the correct date. date. Received date can be a future date.” Reported Default Option should be - Choose Error Dialog Box: Issue One - Should list all the types of “Please choose the Reported Issues reported issue. Client Type Option to choose Group or member None with radio button group. Client Entry field to enter the group ID or None member ID based on the Client type selected. Based on the Client selected Display the Group or member information in the HTML table. Search Pop up window to search for the None Group or Member based on the Client type selected. Group HTML Table to display the Group None Information Member HTML Table to display member None information Remarks Entry Text Area to enter the remarks None for the Carrier Issue. The text area should have scrollbar if the content within the text area grows. Submit Should function On clicking the Error Dialog Box: Submit Button or pressing the Enter “The value entered for key with cursor on the “Submit ‘field name’ is incorrect. Button” Please enter the Save the data to the repository with correct value.”Note: the status of the Carrier Issue as The “field name” name open. should bedynamically Auto generate the Carrier Issue ID picked based on the name of the field for which the error has occurred. Cancel Should reset to the status as was on None loading the page on clicking the cancel button

3.1.1.3. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

SID: bpi.enrollment.carrierissue.carrierissuemodify (See Figure I-75) Element Name Element Type Purpose Carrier Issue ID Text To display text Carrier Issue ID Entry Field To enter Carrier Issue ID. Ability to search for open Carrier Issues Client Text To display text Client Entry Field To enter client ID. Ability to search for open Issues for the specific client Search Pop Up window To search for the Carrier Issue ID or the Client ID (group or member id) with open issues Carrier Issue HTML Table List the issues based on the search criteria. Process Table Process HTML Button To show the issue selected for further processing Carrier Issue HTML Table Table to display Received Date, Reported Issue, Client Type, Client ID, Issue Status, Remarks. Additional Text To display text Remarks Additional Entry Field To enter text Remarks Notify Carrier Text To display text Notify Carrier Radio Button To check if notifying to carrier Mode of Text To display text Notification Mode of List Box If “Notify Carrier” is checked then this field Notification must be completed. To enter the mode of notification Date Notified Text To display text Date Notified Calendar If “Notify Carrier” is checked then this field must be completed. Enter the notified date Batch Date Text To display text Batch Date Calendar To enter batch date Submit HTML button Submit the data and save in the database Cancel HTML button To reset to previous status as was on loading the page

Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Carrier Issue Entry field to enter Carrier Issue ID Error Message: and on tab should populate the “Carrier Issue ID is required” Carrier Issue based on the Carrier Issue id Client Entry fields to enter Client ID and on Error Message: tab should populate all the Carrier “Client ID is required” Issues for the specific Client. Search search for the Carrier Issue ID or None Client ID Carrier Issue The table gets populated based on None Process Table the search criteria. For Carrier Issue ID the table shows only one Carrier Issue. For Client search the table shows all the Carrier Issues for the specific Client. Process Process the specific Row in the table NONE selected Carrier Issue Table to display Received Date, None Reported Issue, Client Type, Client ID, Issue Status, Remarks. Additional Entry field for additional remarks None Remarks Notify Carrier Radio button to select if notify or not None Mode of If “Notify Carrier” is yes then this Error Dialog Box: Notification field must be completed. To enter “Please Enter the Mode of Notification” the Mode of Notification for whom the Issue is to be forwarded Date Notified Allow entering the date or picking Error Dialog Box: up from the calendar “Please Enter the Notified Date” If “Notify Carrier” is yes then this field must be completed. Enter the notified date Batch Date Allow entering the batch date or None picking up from the calendar Submit Should function On clicking the Error Dialog Box: Submit Button or pressing the Enter “The value entered for ‘field name’ is key with cursor on the “Submit incorrect. Please enter the correct value.” Button” Note: The “field name” name should be Save the data on clicking the submit dynamically picked based on the name of button. If the Mode of Notification is the field for which the error has occurred. Email, then open new message with appropriate information. If Mode of Notification is Fax, then enter appropriate information for fax. Cancel Reset to the state as was on loading None the page

3.1.1.4. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

SID: bpi.enrollment.carrierissue.carrierissueclose (See Figure I-76) Element Name Element Type Label Purpose Search by Text Search by Customer To display text Customer searchType Radio button Search by Customer To select the option of search Search by Text Search by Carrrier Issue To display text Carrrier Issue searchType Radio button Search by Carrrier Issue To select the option of search Carrier Issue Text Carrier Issue ID To display text ID carrierIssueId Entry Field Carrier Issue ID To enter Carrier Issue ID. Ability to search for open Carrier Issue Customer ID Text To display text customerId Text Field Customer ID To display Customer ID. Ability to search for open Carrier Issue for the specific Customer search Button Search To search for the Carrier Issue ID or the Customer ID(group or member id) with open carrier issues Carrier Issue HTML Table Carrier Issue Close Table List the carrier issue based on the Close Table search criteria. Carrier Issue HTML Table Carrier Issue Table Table to display Received Date, Table Reported Issue, Client Type, Client ID, Issue Status, Remarks. Actual Issue Text To display text Actual Issue Actual Issue List List the Actual Issue Actual Issue Retransmission Text To display text Retransmission Retransmission Radio button Select if retransmission Retransmission needed or not Resolution Text To display text Resolution Resolution List List the Resolution of Issue Resolution as Verbally Updated; Retransmitted, etc. Resolution Text To display text Resolution Comments Comments Resolution Entry Field To enter text Resolution Comments Comments Date Carrier Text To display text Date Carrier Resolved Resolved Date Carrier Calendar To enter date Carrier Date Carrier Resolved Resolved resolved Batch Date Text To display text Batch Date Batch Date Calendar To enter batch date Batch Date Notify Text To display text Notify Originator Originator Notify Radio Button To select if notifying to Notify Originator Originator Originator save HTML button Save Submit the data and save in the database

Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Carrier Issue Entry field to enter Carrier Issue ID Error Message: and on tab should populate the “Carrier Issue ID is required” Carrier Issue based on the Carrier Issue id Customer Entry fields to enter Client ID and on Error Message: tab should populate all the Carrier “Customer ID is required” Issues for the specific Client. Search search for the Carrier Issue ID or None Client ID Carrier Issue The table gets populated based on None Process Table the search criteria. For Carrier Issue ID the table shows only one Carrier Issue. For Client search the table shows all the Carrier Issues for the specific Client. Close Close the specific Row in the table None selected Carrier Issue Table to display Received Date, None Reported Issue, Client Type, Client ID, Issue Status, Remarks. Actual Issue Default option should be the same as reported issue. List all issues. Retransmission Radio button to select if retransmit None or not Resolution Default option should be —choose one—. List the resolutions for closing the issue as Updated, Denied or cancelled Resolution Entry field for additional comments None Comments Date Carrier Allow entering the date or picking None Resolved up from the calendar If “Notify Carrier” is yes then this field must be completed. Enter the notified date Batch Date Allow entering the batch date or None picking up from the calendar Notify Originator Radio button to select if notify or not. If yes send pre-formatted email to Originator. Submit Should function On clicking the Error Dialog Box: Submit Button or pressing the Enter “The value entered for ‘field name’ is key with cursor on the “Submit incorrect. Please enter the correct value.” Button” Note: The “field name” name should be Save the data on clicking the submit dynamically picked based on the name of button. If the Mode of Notification is the field for which the error has occurred. Email, then open new message with appropriate information. If Mode of Notification is Fax, then enter appropriate information for fax. Cancel Reset to the state as was on loading None the page

3.1.2. Screen Flow

(See Figure I-77)

4. Business Rule Mapping Activity Rules Carrier Issues Carrier Issue is the screen that needs to be handled by personnel skilled with the operations of the PacAdvantage and the coordination of data with the Carriers. All issues are entered and followed up for the resolution of the issue.

Benefit Partners Process Specification Billing Document Id: BPI₁₃CAS_FSD_FI_01 Version: <1.222 Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Jan. 10, 2002 Sudhakar K 1.0 Baseline Release Feb. 6, 2002 Sudhakar K 1.1 Revised Version Aug. 09, 2002 Chandrasekaran L 1.2 1. Changes to reflect screen    modifications 2. Changes to reflect latest    FSD format Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Background 5

2.2. Process Description 5

2.3. Process Flow 5

3. User Interface 7

3.1. User Interface Screens 7

3.1.1. Suppress Batch Billing 7

3.1.2. Group Auto Bill Suppressing 10

3.1.3. Manual Bill 10

3.1.4. Billing Adjustments 15

3.2. Interface Flow 16

4. Business Rule Mapping 17

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

The purpose of this document is to describe the process of Billing. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_FI_001 Finance - Business use case Specification - Billing

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1. Background

Billing is the process of creating the invoice for the Customers enrolled in the PacAdvantage program. The Invoice is on broad base classified into two—First Time Invoice (invoice to the group/member that has enrolled as new business) and Running invoice or periodic invoice (To the existing Group/Members).

2.2. Process Description

The objective of the Billing process is to:

-   -   1) Generate first time invoice to the groups/members who have         enrolled as new business. The invoice should get all the         information about the group/member prior to invoicing.         Generation of first time invoice is an automated process and         should be triggered on completion of group/member enrollment.     -   2) Generate running invoice or periodic invoice to the existing         groups/members. All the information about the existing         group/members and their real time transaction details are         required to invoice correctly.

This billing sub module also needs to have a feature to incorporate the following.

-   -   Suppress periodic Bill for a specific Group/Member or collective         group and members     -   Preview invoice prior to creation of actual invoice.     -   Suppress late fee for a specific Group/Member or collective         group and members     -   Calculate Reinstatement Fee for a specific Group/Member or         collective group and members     -   Include feature to add dynamic content on the bills sent to the         for a specific Group/Member or collective groups and members     -   Calculate additional fee for Credit card transaction if         applicable.     -   Calculate adjustment when there is retrospective change in         Benefit Level (for the Carrier Selected) for group/member and         make adjustments in the subsequent bill.     -   Calculate adjustment if the group/members have termed.     -   Generate manual invoice and preview invoices before generating         them.     -   All billing transactions would be period specific (i.e. the         bills would be associated with the month of coverage). Invoices         would be run only on a monthly basis, whatever is the billing         frequency. For example if the billing frequency opted is         quarterly. The excess amount would be adjusted as credits in the         subsequent month's invoices.     -   Invoice view/preview prior to generation of invoice needs to be         provided in the Enrollment module.

2.3. Process Flow

Process for billing—First Time Invoice

-   -   1) Enrollment is completed for the new business prior to         generation of First Time Invoice.     -   2) All information relevant for billing (Generation of Invoice         is gathered) These information are         -   Group ID         -   Group Billing Address         -   Billing information for the group like billing frequency,             mode of payment and relevant information for mode of payment             like EFT or Credit Card.         -   Employees and Dependents information         -   Member count         -   Employer Contribution         -   Employee Contribution         -   Raw Rate for Each of the Benefit Level for the specific             Carrier selected by the employee (for specific Age bracket,             Service Area, Coverage Choice with effective date)         -   Rate differential based on member count (Group size) with             effective date         -   Admin fees for the specific group type with effective date.         -   Agent commission that is defined in the Agent Info tab for             the group if defined. Otherwise the default agent commission             specified in the Carrier Maintenance Module (Agent             Commission Fees) with effective date.         -   Additional fees if any for the specific group type with             effective date.

Process for billing—Running Invoice (Periodic Invoice)

-   -   1) Monthly or periodic invoice is sent to the existing         group/members based on the Frequency selected by the         group/member and the mode of communication preferred.     -   2) Existing billing also gathers all information relevant for         billing.     -   3) In addition to this it also needs the previous invoice         history to calculate the additional fees, late fees,         reinstatement fees or as applicable.     -   4) The running invoice generated is for the coverage period         following the previous invoice period. I.e if the previous         invoice was generated in the month of Jan. 5, 2002 and for the         coverage period February 2002, The invoice generate on Feb. 5,         2001 would be for the coverage period March 2002,     -   5) Billing should also calculate the Fees required for Credit         Card transaction if applicable.     -   6) Adjustment for Add On employee/dependent or member.     -   7) Adjustment for Termed employee/dependent or member.     -   8) Reinstatement fees Termed Group, employee/dependent or member         are reinstated.     -   9) Invoice once created by the system cannot be cancelled.

An invoice is considered closed only if the invoice has been reconciled. Hence all open invoices should be considered for late fee calculation.

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Suppress Batch Billing

3.1.1.1. Screen Snapshot (See Figure J-1)

3.1.1.2. Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Bill Period Option Box Bill Period Bill period for which batch billing is suppressed Selected Display Text Selected Groups Displays count of groups selected out of total Groups groups Filter Group Id Text Box Group Id To filter groups based on group id Group Name Text Box Group Name To filter groups based on group name Group Type Option Box Group Type To filter groups based on group type Group Size Text Box Group Size To filter groups based on group size ROE Date Text Box ROE Date - To To filter groups based on ROE date of groups Range Effective Date Text Box Effective Date - To filter groups based on effective date of groups Range To Rate Type Option Box Rate Type To filter groups based on rate type View Option Box View To filter groups based on whether batch billing is suppressed or not Filter Command Filter Refreshes group selection table based on the filter entered Clear Filter Command Clear Filter Clears the filter and displays all groups in the group selection table Groups Selection For selecting groups for export. Options for Selection Table selection all groups, all groups in a page, deselecting all and selection inversion are available to the user. New Command New Clears the screen Save Command Save Saves the suppressed groups information to the database

3.1.1.3. Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Bill Period Check to see that billing “Please enter a period is not null valid billing period”

3.1.2. Group Auto Bill Suppressing

3.1.2.1. Screen Snapshot (See Figure J-2)

3.1.2.2. Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Run Id Display Text Import Id Displays unique system generated id for the bill process run Bill Period Option Box Bill Period Period for which batch billing is run Run By Display Text Run By Displays id of user who initiated the process New Command New Clears the screen Process Command Process Starts the batch billing process View Status Command View Status View status of batch billing process

3.1.2.3. Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Bill Period Check to see that billing “Please enter a period is not null valid billing period”

3.1.3. Manual Bill

3.1.3.1. Screen Snapshot (See Figure J-3)

3.1.3.2. Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Bill Details Bill # Display Text Bill # Displays unique system generated bill # Bill Date Display Text Bill Date Displays bill date Bill Period Option Box Bill Period Period for which group is billed Due Date Display Text Due Date Displays date on which bill is due Status Display Text Status Displays the status of bill: Open or Reconciled Reconciled Display Text Reconciled Date Displays date on which bill was reconciled Date Group Information Group Id Text Box Group Id Id of the group being billed Group Type Display Text Group Type Displays group type Group Name Display Text Group Name Displays group name Association Display Text Association Displays name of association if group is enrolled Name Name through one Status Display Text Status Displays status of group Rate Type Display Text Rate Type Displays the rate type for the group: blended or non-blended Billing Summary Prior Bill Display Text Prior period Displays prior period bill amount for the group Amount billed amount Adjustments Display Text Adjustments Displays adjustments total for the group since prior period Payments Display Text Payments Displays payments made by the group from received previous bill Past Due Display Text Past due amount Displays amount due from previous bill Current Bill Display Text Current bill Displays current bill amount amount Total Due Display Text Total due Displays total due from the group Employer Level Adjustments Adjustment Option Box Adjustment Type Type of adjustment Type Amount Text Box Amount Adjustment Amount Period Option Box Period Period for which adjustment entry is posted Adjustments Entry Table Entry Table Employee Level Adjustments Employee Display Employee Name Displays name of employee Name Column Period Display Period Displays adjustment period Column Plan Name Display Plan Name Displays the name of the plan Column Plan Type Display Plan Type Displays plan type Column Coverage Display Coverage Type Displays coverage option selected by the Type Column employee # Members Display # Members Displays member count under the employee's Column coverage Premium Display Premium Displays premium Column Admin Fee Display Admin Fee Displays admin fee Column Agent Fee Display Agent Fee Displays agent fee Column Total Premium Display Total Premium Displays total premium Column Employee Level Detail Employee Display Employee Name Displays name of employee Name Column Plan Name Display Plan Name Displays the name of the plan Column Plan Type Display Plan Type Displays plan type Column Coverage Display Coverage Type Displays coverage option selected by the Type Column employee # Members Display # Members Displays member count under the employee's Column coverage Premium Display Premium Displays premium Column Admin Fee Display Admin Fee Displays admin fee Column Agent Fee Display Agent Fee Displays agent fee Column Total Premium Display Total Premium Displays total premium Column Bill Summary Medical Display Text Subtotal - Displays medical premium subtotal Premium Medical Premium Dental Display Text Subtotal - Dental Displays dental premium subtotal Premium Premium Vision Display Text Subtotal - Vision Displays vision premium subtotal Premium Premium CAM Display Text Subtotal - CAM Displays CAM premium subtotal Premium Premium Admin Display Text Administration Displays total of member level admin fee Member Fee Member Fee Agent Member Display Text Agent Member Displays total of member level agent fee Fee Fee Admin Flat Display Text Administration Displays group level admin flat fee Fee Flat Fee Agent Flat Fee Display Text Agent Flat Fee Displays group level agent flat fee Current Due Display Text Total Due Displays current bill amount Current Period Past Due Display Text Add Past Displays amount due from previous bill Amount Due Total Due Display Text Total Due Displays total due from the group New Command New Clears the screen Create Command Create Creates the bill

3.1.3.3. Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Bill Period Check to see if bill period is not null “Please enter a and is valid valid bill period” Group Id Check to see if group id is not null “Please enter a and is valid valid group id” Adjustment Check to see that the value for the “Please enter a Type filed is not null and is valid valid adjustment type” Amount Check to see that the value for the “Please enter a valid filed is not null and is valid adjustment amount” Period Check to see that the value for the “Please enter a valid filed is not null and is valid adjustment period”

3.1.4. Billing Adjustments

3.1.4.1. Screen Snapshot (See Figure J-4)

3.1.4.2. Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Adjustment Id Display Text Adjustment Id Displays unique system generated id for the adjustment Adjustment Text Box Adjustment Date Adjustment Date Date Status Display Text Status Status of the adjustment: Open or Reconciled Group Id Text Box Group Id Id of group for which adjustment entry is made Group Type Display Text Group Type Displays group type Group Name Display Text Group Name Displays group name Association Display Text Association Displays name of association if group is enrolled Name Name through one Group Status Display Text Group Status Displays status of group Adjustment Option Box Adjustment Type Type of adjustment Type Amount Text Box Amount Adjustment Amount Period Option Box Period Period for which adjustment entry is posted New Command New Clears screen for a new adjustment entry Save Command Save Saves the adjustment entry to the database Search Command Search Provides search functionality for adjustments

3.1.4.3. Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Group Id Check to see that the value for the “Please enter a filed is not null and is valid valid group id” Adjustment Check to see that the value for the “Please enter a Type filed is not null and is valid valid adjustment type” Amount Check to see that the value for the “Please enter a valid filed is not null and is valid adjustment amount” Period Check to see that the value for the “Please enter a valid filed is not null and is valid adjustment period”

3.2. Interface Flow

N/A

4. Business Rule Mapping Activity Rules I - First Time Invoice Blended    For Small Employer Group (New Business) Note: All new business falls under blended rate only 1. Check All the member for Small Employer Group 2. Check the Employee Raw Rate for the Specific Line of Coverage for the (Carrier Selected) Benefit Level. 3. Apply formula on the entire employee for all the line of coverage provided by the group for the (Carrier Selected) Benefit Level (Age Bracket, Coverage Choice and Service Area for the specific Employee). Refer Formula 4. The Admin Fees, Agent Commission and Rate Differential Factor are governed by the effective date. Apply the effective date for these fees with the Effective date for the Group in deriving the Blended rate for the employees and the total amount payable by the Group. However the Agent commission is based on the one provided at the group level in the Agent Information Tab. It overrides the fee provided in the carrier maintenance agent commission fees. 5. Check if the initial payment made by the group equals the Total amount as derived above. If not then check the difference. Allow for Reconciliation up to $2 without and authorized intervention. For amount between $50-$3 Allow reconciliation based on security. For amount above $50 allow reconciliation based on ultimate authority. (This rule governs if the group can be enrolled or not. Hence there should be an invoice preview that identifies the Cash received and the total amount due for the new business) This should be viewable by all. 6. The rate should be picked up based on the rules specified below: Check the Effective date for the Group (Initial enrollment date) Check the rate from the rate table whose effective date is latest but less than the effective date of the Group. (E.g.) Group Effective date 3/1/01. Rate effective dates 1/1/01 and 7/1/01. In this example since the group effective date is 3/1/01 the Rate picked should be 1/1/01 effective date rate. 7. Show the Employer Contribution and the Employee Deduction in the invoice summary. Billing Address should be picked up based on the billing address provided by the group. If billing address is not provided, then business address should be considered for billing. Also check the mode of communication. If the group prefers to be mailed emailed or faxed and accordingly transmit the invoice. Refer Sample Invoice 1 for the Small Employer Group (New Business) Note: Small employer may bring in the COBRA members. Bill the COBRA members separately or along with the Group based on the decision made for billing the COBRA Group. If the COBRA members are billed separately. Generate a separate invoice for the each subscriber COBRA members. Refer Rule for COBRA Member Invoice However the bill for the COBRA members can be sent to the primary group if that option is selected. All COBRA Invoices whether billed to the primary group or the COBRA Group should have a separate invoice for all the COBRA groups. (New Business) Note: All new business falls under blended rate    For COBRA Members only even for COBRA members brought by new business. 1. Check the entire subscriber COBRA member for Small Employer Group (primary Group). 2. Check Coverage Choice for the Subscriber member for each lines of coverage and also note that these line of coverage are selected by the Primary group. 3. Check what are the line of coverage picked up be each of the members including the subscriber member and their dependent. Note: The rate for the COBRA member should be based on the following rule. Identify the subscriber member line of coverage selected. The age, service area and the coverage choice provided by the subscriber member is the governing rate. If the subscriber does not select the line of coverage that the dependent member have selected. Check if the dependent member have relation ship as spouse or child/children. If the Relationship is spouse then the Spouse Age should be the deciding factor for the rate and the coverage choice opted. If the relationship is child/children then the eldest dependent member should be the deciding factor for the rate based on the Age. Note however in all the above cases the Service Area is governed by the Service area of the Subscriber COBRA member. Note: If the Primary COBRA member is a child they have their own Group ID and their own line of coverage and benefit level. For Individual (New Business) Note: All new business falls under blended rate Association Member even for the individual association member. 1. Individual association member can have dependent attached to the member. 2. The rate for the individual association member is governed by the rate applicable for the Guaranteed association based on the effective date for the Association. 3. The individual members can have the same line of coverage as defined by the association. 4. The Admin Fee, Agent Commission, Additional fees and rate differential factor is as applicable for the Association with the effective date. 5. The calculation formula is the same as applicable for the employee of Small employer group. 6. The dependents for the individual association members are governed by what has been selected by the subscriber individual association member. Small employer Group New Business) Note: All new business falls under blended rate affiliated to association even for the Small employer group affiliated to an association. 1. Small employer groups affiliated with an association have the same rules as applicable to the Small employer group with exception for the rate. 2. The Admin fees, Agent commission, additional fees and Differential factor for the small employer groups affiliated with an association are as defined for the Association with effective date for the Association. 3. However the Agent commission is based on the one provided at the group level in the Agent Information Tab. It overrides the fee provided in the carrier maintenance agent commission fees II - First Time Invoice Formula Blended for Small Employer Group Blended Rate = (Raw Rate * Differential Factor)/(1- Agent Commission % - Admin Fee %) Example The formula for the premium calculation for invoice Blended is as follows (Blended) a) Raw Rate b) Agent Commission c) Admin fee d) Additional Fees e) Differential factor

III - First Time Invoice Formula Blended for COBRA Members Example The formula for the premium calculation for the invoice Blended for Cal COBRA is as follows: Cal Cobra Total Premium = Blended Rate * (1 + Additional Fees %)

IV - Running Invoice Blended 1. For Running invoice all that is applicable for first time invoice is applicable. In addition to that the running invoice has the following as well: 2. Late fee if applicable: Late fee charges are 5% on the Amount due in the prior invoices. The late fee calculation rule is as follows: Due Date: Postmark date: Received date: If the post mark date for cash receipt is available it should fall on or before due date. If postmark date is not available then if should check 5 calendar days backward from the date received and see if it falls within the due date. If the amount is received within the due date as per the above rules and is short late fee is still applied for the shortage of premium. If the above two conditions are not satisfied then late fee is charged for the Group or member. Note: Late fee is charged on the prior month's current premium (e.g.) Due date is 1^(st) of every month or the first business day of the month. Whichever is applicable. For example 2/1/01 Date payment received : 2/1/01 No late fee Date payment received is 2/2/01 and post marked 1/31/01 No late fee Date payment received is 2/3/01 and post marked 2/2/01 late fee applicable Date payment received is 2/6/01 and postmarked date not available. Look 5 days behind for the date for receipt. I.e 2/1/01 hence no late fees Date payment received is 2/8/01 and postmarked date not available. Look 5 days behind for the date for receipt. I.e 2/3/01 hence late fees applicable. 3. Balance forward if applicable: Balance forward is the amount balance from the previous invoice or shortage of premium. 4. Billing Adjustment: Billing adjustments can have various categories: Note The adjustment can be positive or negative based on the coverage period. Employee Coverage Choice Change Employee/Dependent Benefit Level(Selected carrier) change Employee/Dependent Termination Employee/Dependent Add On Rate for the Benefit Level Offered by the carrier changes retrospectively. I.e over writing the previous effective date that was applicable for the group. 5. Credit Card Payment transaction fee if applicable: Credit card transaction fee is 2.5% of the total amount due for the group/member 6. NSF Check if applicable: $25 handling fees is charged for the NSF check. 7. Reinstatement fees: (Reinstatement fees are on the following assumption that on the date of term all the previous balances on the group are settled.) The group needs to be reinstated on the date next to the term date. The Amount due for the reinstatement from the date following the term dates to the current month when the group is reinstated. (e.g.) Group Term Date: 2/31/01 Date when the group was reinstated 5/10/01 Effective reinstatement date is 3/1/01. Reinstatement fees is calculated for the Period 3/1/01 I.e. the month when the reinstatement occurred. The invoice contains the premium due for the next month as well i.e. 6/1/01. However the current amount due is based on the current period i.e. from 3/1/01 to 5/31/01, Next months period 6/31/01 and reinstatement fees Percentage on the premium due when reinstatement occurred (The amount on which the reinstatement fees is calculated.) Note: Subsequent billing cycle would contain the Reinstatement Adjustments and Reinstatement fees on reinstatement for the group/member. A reinstatement fee is 10% of the premium due when reinstatement occurred. V - Running Invoice Non - Blended Note: The difference in the rules for non-blended and blended is in the rate calculation rules. The rest of the processes are same as for the blended. Formula Formula for Non - Blended Rates The formula for the premium calculation for the invoice Non - Blended is as follows (Non-Blended) a) Raw Rate b) Agent Commission per Member c) Agent Commission per Group based on group size d) Admin fee per Member e) Admin fee per Group based on group size f) Additional Fees g) Differential factor Member Level Fees = Raw Rate + Member Count * (Agent Commission Per Member + Admin Fee Per Member) Note (If differential factor is applicable then Raw rate should be factored i.e Raw Rate * Differential Factor) Group Level Fees = Agent Commission per Group Size + Admin Fees per Group size Total Non Blended Premium Billed to Group = Member Level Fees + Group Level Fees Example Raw Rate = $100 Agent Commission per Member = $10 Agent Commission per Group based on group size = $50 for Group size => 15 Admin fee per Member = $10 Admin fee per Group based on group size = $50 for Group size => 15 Additional Fees = 10% on Raw Rate Differential factor Employee1 Member count including employee = 3 Employee2 Member count including employee = 2 Employee3 Member count including employee = 4 Employee4 Member count including employee = 5 Employee5 Member count including employee = 1 Total Member count = 15 Group size (=>15) = 15 Member Level Fee Employee1 = 100 + 3 (10 + 10) = $160 Employee2 = 100 + 2 (10 + 10) = $140 Employee3 = 100 + 4 (10 + 10) = $180 Employee4 = 100 + 5 (10 + 10) = $200 Employee5 = 100 + 1 (10 + 10) = $120 Member Level Fees = $800 Group Level Fees = $50 + $50 + $100 Total Non Blended Premium Billed to Group = Member Level Fees + Group Level Fees = $800 + $100= $900 This formula is for the specific Benefit Level (offered by carrier) for a specific line of coverage and a specific employee/member. The total amount billed to group should include all the Rates after applying this formula for all the employees/members and their line of coverage. Formula Formula for Non - Blended Rates Example The formula for the premium calculation for the invoice Non Blended for Cal COBRA is as follows: Member Premium for Cal COBRA = Raw Rate * (1 +Additional fee %) Example: Member Premium for Cal COBRA =0 100 * (1 + 0.10) = $110 Amount Billed to COBRA Group = $110 This formula is for the specific Benefit Level (offered by carrier) for a specific line of coverage and a specific employee/member. The total amount billed to COBRA Subscriber member should include all the Rates after applying this formula for all the members and their line of coverage.

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification Cash Receipt Document ID: BPI_CAS_FSD_FI_02 Version: <1.2> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Jan. 15, 2002 Sudhakar K 1.0 Baseline Release Feb. 8, 2002 Sudhakar K 1.1 Revision Aug. 09, 2002 Chandrasekaran L 1.2 3. Changes to    reflect screen    modifications 4. Changes to    reflect latest    FSD format Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbrevations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Background 5

2.2. Process Description 5

2.3. Process Flow 5

3. User Interface 7

3.1. User Interface Screens 7

3.1.1. Manual Cash Batch 7

3.2 Interface Flow 9

4. Business Rule Mapping 10

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

The purpose of this document is to describe the process of Cash Receipt. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_FI_002 Finance - Business use case Specification - Cash Receipt

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation EFT Electronic Fund Transfer

2. Process Identification

2.1. Background

Cash Receipt is the process of entering the cash received by BPI into the system. The cash receipt can be received in various modes as defined by the business process. Cash Receipt includes Lock Box receipts, Check, Credit Card, EFT and Transfer.

2.2. Process Description

This Cash Receipt sub module also needs to incorporate the following.

-   -   1) Enter the lock box payment received as a batch process into         the system     -   2) Enter EFT payment received as a batch process into the system     -   3) EFT payment made directly to Wells Fargo Bank     -   4) On line payment using the Credit Card and Check     -   5) User interface to make payment over phone by Credit card or         Check     -   6) Credit Card payment with automatic pulling of the cash or         manually on request     -   7) Handle negative check i.e. NSF's, Refund and Transfer.     -   8) Transfer of cash from one group to the other.

This Cash Receipt sub module also needs to have a feature to incorporate the following.

-   -   Batch the cash receipt based on the batch number defined.     -   There should be ability to batch each of the modes of the         payment received into a separate batch.     -   For EFT, Credit Card, On Line Check and Lockbox payments there         should be ability to upload the files into the system as one         batch. Reconciliation will follow once the batch is imported and         closed.     -   In addition, prior entry of Lock box total entry made needs to         tally with the lock box total.

This document details only one mode of cash entry namely, Manual Batch. Lockbox, EFT and payments through credit cards are detailed in their respective process specification documents.

2.3. Process Flow

Cash receipts into the system can be from the following sources:

-   -   EFT     -   Check received at BPI     -   Lock Box file     -   On line Credit Card     -   Check or Credit card over phone

The cash received by any of the above mode is batched and entered into the system. The batch number is identified based on the mode of payment receipts. All batches should be identified uniquely with batch number and timestamp.

The Payment received are either entered manually into the system or uploaded into the system from the files available. The batch total and sum of the entries made in each batch should tally before saving the batch.

Batch date should represent the deposit date.

Batch Types are:

-   -   1. Manual Batch     -   2. NSF Batch     -   3. Returns Batch     -   4. Positive Transfer     -   5. Negative Transfer     -   6. Lockbox Check     -   7. Auto-Batch EFT     -   8. Direct Deposit     -   9. Wire Transfer     -   10. CC over phone     -   11. Auto-Batch Credit Card     -   12. Online Credit Card

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Manual Cash Batch

3.1.1.1. Screen Snapshot (See Figure J-5)

3.1.1.2. Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Batch Information Batch Id Display Text Batch Id Displays unique system generated id for the batch Batch Date Text Box Batch Date Batch Date Batch Total Display Text Batch Total Displays total of all cash entries Batch Type Option Box Batch Type Type of manual batch. Possible options are Manual Batch, NSF Batch, Returns Batch, Positive Transfer, Negative Transfer Tape Total Text Box Tape Total Tape total of all cash entries Tape Balance Display Text Tape Balance Displays difference between the tape total and total of cash entries entered Batch Status Display Text Batch Status Displays status of batch: Open or Closed Check Information Postmark Date Text Box Postmark Date Date on which the payment was postmarked Received Date Text Box Received Date Date on which payment was received Check # Text Box Check # Check number Check Amount Text Box Check Amount Check amount Check Distribution Group Id Text Box Group Id Group against which payment is allocated Group Name Display Text Group Name Displays name of selected group Amount Text Box Amount Amount allocated to the group out of the total payment amount Comments Option Box Comments Standard comments for the payment, if any Others Text Box Others To enter any comments other than the standard ones Payment Editable Table Displays all payment entries for the batch for Entries editing New Command New Clears screen for a new batch entry Save Command Save Saves the batch information to the database Close Command Close Closes the batch. A batch can not be edited after closing Search Command Search To search for saved batches

3.1.1.3. Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Batch Information Batch Date Check to see if batch date is not null “Please enter a valid batch date” and is valid Batch Type Check to see if valid batch type is “Please select a valid batch type” selected Tape Total Check to see if tape total is not null “Please enter a valid tape total” and is valid Check Information Postmark Date Check to see if postmark date is not “Please enter a valid postmark date” null and is valid Received Date Check to see if the received date is “Please enter a valid received date” not null and is valid Check # Check to see if check number is not “Please enter a valid check number” null and is valid Check Amount Check to see if check amount is not “Please enter a valid check amount” null and is valid Check Distribution Group Id Check to see if group id is not null “Please enter a valid group id” and is valid Amount Check to see if amount is not null “Please enter a valid amount” and is valid

3.2. Interface Flow

N/A

4. Business Rule Mapping Activities Rules Batch Entry Unique id should be created for each batched. The batch total should be tallied to the individual sum before saving the batch. The batch id should be uniquely generated prior to creation of batch. Each cash receipt should have the postmark date, date received and the system date (I.e the date when the batch is created) and batch total. The line items within each batch should have a feature to Split the payment for multiple group ids if required. Batch date should be the deposit data. Any entries made to the batch can be saved prior to completion of the batch entries. However there would be a status for the batch which would indicate if the batch is closed or not. Modification can be done only to the batches that are open. Any batch that is closed cannot be modified. If there is an erroneous entry for the batch and the batch is saved. Only Transfer can be done and it is not allowed to delete the batch that are closed. Only the batches that are closed can be reconciled. Batch by File The batch that are created by uploading the files like for Lockbox, EFT or Credit Card will Uploads have an identification that payment for this batch was made by Lockbox, EFT or Credit Card. These batches are always closed. Negative NSF would be entered into the system and there would be an indicator indicating that this Check (NSF) batch is a NSF batch. Transfer Cash transfer may be due to the reason that the Cash has been wrongly enter for the group to which the cash does not belong. In such cased entering negative cash receipt for the Group for whom the cash has been wrongly entered and making positive cash to the group to whom the cash belongs makes the cash adjustment. There should be a positive and negative cash adjustment. Returns Refund would be a batch and would be handled similar to the NSF Check.

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification Cash Reconciliation Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_FI_03 Version: <1.2> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Jan. 15, 2002 Sudhakar K 1.0 Baseline Release Feb. 13, 2002 Sudhakar K 1.1 Revision Aug. 09, 2002 Chandrasekaran L 1.2 5. Changes to reflect screen    modifications 6. Changes to reflect latest    FSD format Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Background 5

2.2. Process Flow And Description 5

3. User Interface 7

3.1. User Interface Screens 7

3.1.1. Manual Reconciliation 7

3.1.2. Billing & Payments History 10

3.2. Interface Flow 12

4. Business Rule Mapping 13

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

The purpose of this document is to describe the process of Cash Reconciliation. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_FI_003 Finance - Business use case Specification - Cash Reconciliation

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation EFT Electronic Fund Transfer

2. Process Identification

2.1. Background

Cash Reconciliation is the process of reconciling the cash receipts to individual invoices and reconciling the amount paid by the group.

The objective of the Cash Reconciliation process is to reconcile:

-   -   1) Billed amounts and cash receipt     -   2) Cash to negative cash     -   3) Adjustment to cash     -   4) Adjustment to billed amounts     -   5) Billed amount to itself if the total due results in zero     -   6) Adjustment to Adjustment

2.2. Process Flow and Description

Process for Cash Reconciliation:

Reconciliation is the process of matching one to one the cash received on hand and the invoices that are open. The cash are received by numerous ways as described in BPI_CAS_FSD_FI_(—)02 (Cash Receipt). The invoice is generated for the various groups/members based on the premium due. These invoices are matched with the cash receipts and reconciled.

The rule for reconciliation should be as follows:

-   -   1. Look for the Negative Cash available and reconcile it with         the positive cash (for NSF checks).     -   2. Look for the oldest unreconciled invoice and reconcile with         the oldest cash.

The reconciliation process should look through all the invoices that have not been reconciled for a specific group and reconcile the invoice that has the earliest date with the cash received. It should also match the Cash receipt with the invoice amount.

Note: reconciliation process is started automatically when the cash receipt batch is closed and it reconciles the cash received with the invoices.

-   -   Billed amounts and cash receipt: This reconciliation process is         to reconcile the invoice that has not yet been reconciled for         the specific group and check if the invoice is earliest un         reconciled invoice for the specific group and reconcile the         invoice with the cash received form the group/member.     -   Cash to negative cash: This is the process of reconciling the         negative cash with the positive cash received from the group.         This case arises when there is a NSF check and the group's         invoice has been reconciled. The bank usually notifies NSF check         and then NSF Cash receipt entry is created in the system. Now on         receipt of a replacement check against the NSF check the NSF         check is reconciled with the replacement check provided the         amount tallies.     -   Adjustments to Cash: This is the process of reconciling the cash         receipt with the adjustment that may be available in the next         invoice. Example: If the group has received the invoice for the         next month and they have an employee termed this month after the         generation of invoice. The generated invoice would not identify         this adjustment for the termed employees as the employee was         termed after creation of invoice. But the Group may deduct the         adjustments for the termed employee and send the cash that would         be short as they would sent the check with the adjustments.         Hence this process should identify such conditions and adjust         the cash receipt for the invoice with adjustment taken in to         account. The next invoice would show the cash receipt and the         adjustment for the employees termed. This process can also be         coined as “Reconciled but not billed”.     -   Adjustment to billed amounts: This process identifies the         invoices that are already billed to the group and any         adjustments that are not made in the current invoice needs to be         adjusted in the next invoice with the adjustments made.     -   Billed amount to itself if the total due results in zero: This         is process identifies if the group is termed and the invoice is         already created for the group for the next month. Invoice would         be created for the termed group on group termination and would         adjust that with previous invoice. There would always be a final         invoice for the termed groups showing adjustments that would         include refund, or short fall or zero balance.     -   Adjustment to Adjustment: This process is for adjusting the late         fee with late fee is waived, Reinstatement fees with         reinstatement fee waive as the case may be. If the Late fee is         shown in the previous invoice that can be adjusted by waiving         late fee or reinstatement fees as applicable. Example: Late fees         may be $25.00 and waive late fees would be $ −25.00. Here         adjustment to adjustment would be $25 to $25. Also adjustment         needs to be made on invoice with invoice.

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Manual Reconciliation

3.1.1.1. Screen Snapshot (See Figure J-6)

3.1.1.2. Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Group Information Group Id Display Text Group Id Displays id of the group Group Type Display Text Group Type Displays group type Group Name Display Text Group Name Displays group name Association Display Text Association Displays name of association if group is enrolled Name Name through one Status Display Text Status Displays status of group Rate Type Display Text Rate Type Displays the rate type for the group: blended or non-blended Left to balance Display Text Left to balance Displays amount left to be reconciled Bill Information Bill # Display Bill # Column Coverage Display Coverage Period Period Column Due Date Display Due Date Column Bill Date Display Bill Date Column Bill Total Display Bill Total Column Total Due Display Total Due Column Adjustments Information Adjustment Id Display Adj. Id Column Adjustment Display Adj. Type Type Column Adjustment Display Adj. Date Date Column User Id Display User Id Column Coverage Display Cvrg Month Month Column Amount Display Amount Column Cash Receipts Batch Id Display Batch Id Column Postmarked Display Date PM Date Column Date Received Display Date Recd Column Check # Display Check # Column Batch Type Display Batch Type Column Payment Display Pmt Amt Amount Column Unused Display Unused Amt Amount Column Comments Display Comments Column Post Command Post Post reconciliation entries Reconciliation Reconciliation Clear Command Clear Clears screen for a new import. Search Command Search Provides functionality to search groups

3.1.1.3. Screen Validations

Note: Reconciliation can have any of the possible combination provided below:

-   -   1) Invoice to Invoice     -   2) Invoice to Cash receipt     -   3) Invoice to Adjustment     -   4) Cash receipt to cash receipt     -   5) Cash receipt to adjustment     -   6) Adjustment to adjustment

Hence, the validation for the amount left to balance is done based on any of the combination selected from the check boxes.

Note: Adjustments would be shown only under special conditions where term has been initiated after generation of invoices and the group pays short taking this adjustments into account.

3.1.2. Billing & Payments History

3.1.2.1. Screen Snapshot (See Figure J-7)

3.1.2.2. Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Group Information Group Id Display Text Group Id Displays id of the group Group Type Display Text Group Type Displays group type Group Name Display Text Group Name Displays group name Association Display Text Association Displays name of association if group is enrolled Name Name through one Status Display Text Status Displays status of group Rate Type Display Text Rate Type Displays the rate type for the group: blended or non-blended Bill Information Bill # Display Bill # Column Coverage Display Coverage Period Period Column Due Date Display Due Date Column Bill Date Display Bill Date Column Bill Total Display Bill Total Column Total Due Display Total Due Column Adjustments Information Adjustment Id Display Adj. Id Column Adjustment Display Adj. Type Type Column Adjustment Display Adj. Date Date Column User Id Display User Id Column Coverage Display Cvrg Month Month Column Amount Display Amount Column Cash Receipts Batch Id Display Batch Id Column Postmarked Display Date PM Date Column Date Received Display Date Recd Column Check # Display Check # Column Batch Type Display Batch Type Column Payment Display Pmt Amt Amount Column Unused Display Unused Amt Amount Column Comments Display Comments Column Search Command Search Provides functionality to search groups

3.1.2.3. Screen Validations

NA

3.2. Interface Flow

N/A

4. Business Rule Mapping Activities Rules Automated Automatic Reconciliation would be done on closing the batch for the cash receipt. If the Reconciliation cash receipt batch were closed then it would start the reconciliation process. The following process would be auto reconciled: Billed amounts and cash receipt Adjustment to cash Billed amount to itself if the total due results in zero Adjustment to billed amounts Reconciliation Reconciliation process would look for the earliest un reconciled invoice and reconciles it for the Existing provided it is less than $ +   2.00. Groups Reconciliation would be as per the following sequence. Look for the Negative Cash available and reconcile it with the positive cash (for NSF checks). Look for the oldest unreconciled invoice and reconcile with the oldest un-reconciled cash and so on. On Reconciliation the entire invoice, cash receipts would have a status as reconciled. Manual This process would trigger reconciliation manually based on authority or if the user is trying Reconciliation to reconcile and specific cash receipts with the invoice as the case may be. Manual reconciliation can be does only for those invoices that has not reconciled automatically Manual Cash to negative cash Reconciliation Adjustment to Adjustment Any reconciliation that is not completed by automatic reconciliation process would be reconciled manually. Formula for General formula for reconciliation would be as follows: reconciliation Billed amounts and cash receipt = (Invoice Amount − Cash Receipt) Adjustment to cash = (Adjustment − Cash Receipts) Billed amount to itself if the total due results in zero = (Invoice Amount + Invoice Amount) Adjustment to billed amounts = (Adjustment Amount + Invoice Amount) Cash to negative cash = (Cash receipt + cash receipt) Adjustment to Adjustment = (Adjustment + adjustment) General formula = (Invoice Amount + Adjustment Amount − Cash Receipt Amount) Example Invoice = $1000.00, Cash receipt = $ −100.00, Cash receipt = $ 918.00, Adjustment = $ −100.00, Adjustment = $ −80.00 Amount that can be Reconciled = 1000 − (−100) − (800) + (−100) + (−80) = 1000 + 100 − 918 − 100 − 80 = $ 2.00 This $ 2.00 is balance forward for the subsequent invoice. New Business Excluding COBRA and Individual Association Members who follow the reconciliation rules Reconciliation as per the Existing Group, the new business groups is auto reconcile if within $ +−2.00. If the amount is short by $100.00 the invoice and the cash receipt would be reconciled and the short fall would be balance forward in the next invoice. PacAdvantage Fund (A Cash Receipt Batch auto generated by the system) would adjust this short fall. This would be based on authority (Finance/GMS). Also for the new business the auto reconciliation process would apply to reconcile the Invoice Generated on successful enrollment with the cash receipt as initial enrollment payment.

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification Risk Adjustment Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_FI_05 Version: <1.2> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Jan. 15, 2002 Sudhakar K 1.0 Baseline Release Feb. 13, 2002 Sudhakar K 1.1 Revision Aug. 09, 2002 Chandrasekaran L 1.2 7. Changes to reflect screen    modifications 8. Changes to reflect latest    FSD format Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definition, Acronyms & Abbrevations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Background 5

2.2. Process Description 5

2.3. Process Flow 5

3. User Interface 6

3.1. User Interface Screens 6

3.1.1. Risk Adjustment Factors Import 6

3.2. Interface Flow 7

4 Business Rule Mapping 8

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

The purpose of this document is to describe the process of Risk Adjustment. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_FI_007 Finance - Business use case Specification - Risk Adjustment

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation EFT Electronic Fund Transfer

2. Process Identification

2.1. Background

Risk Adjustment is the process of accessing the risk borne by each of the Carrier in paying for the claims submitted to them by members.

Risk adjustment factor is assigned to the Carrier. Based on these factors the carrier may be classified as Payers, Receivers or None (if no factor is assigned). Payers are the one who pays in the risk adjustment amount to the Pool. Receivers are the one who receives the Risk Adjustment amount from the pool.

These risk adjustment factors are pre-defined by PacAdvantage.

2.2. Process Description

The objective of the Risk Adjustment process is to:

-   -   1) Provide for upload of Risk Adjustment (RA) factors in the         form of text files into PX2 system

The uploaded data would subsequently be used in cash disbursement reports for suggesting the amount to be paid out to carriers after application of RA factors.

The following are the other requirements that will be supported and constraints on the proposed system:

-   -   1) The system will maintain a log of all zip codes and service         area imports. The log information will include the user, the day         & time of import, the file path & format and the status of the         import.

2.3. Process Flow

Process for upload of Risk Adjustment factors

-   -   1) The import file and an effective date for import are all         input from the user.     -   2) The system checks to see if the file data is per the format         expected. If not, an error is reported.     -   3) If data already exists for an effective date, the system         prompts to the user as to whether it should overwrite the data         or cancel the import.     -   4) The system imports Risk Adjustment factors to its database.

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Risk Adjustment Factors Import

3.1.1.1. Screen Snapshot (See Figure J-8)

3.1.1.2. Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Import Id Display Text Import Id Displays unique id for the import Status Display Text Status Displays status of import Imported By Display Text Imported By Displays id of user who did the import Import Date Display Text Import Date Displays date on which import was done Import File Text Box Import File Full path of the file to be imported Effective Date Text Box Effective Date Date on which the RA factors becomes effective New Command New Clears screen for a new import. Import Command Import Starts the import process Search Command Search Provides functionality for search of imports

3.1.1.3. Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Import File Name Check to see that the value for the “Please enter a field is not null valid import file name” Effective Date Check to see that the value for the “Please enter a filed is not null and is valid valid effective date”

3.2. Interface Flow

N/A

4. Business Rule Mapping Activities Rules Risk The formula for risk Adjustment factor is as given below: Assessment Raw Rate = Premium Amount (Raw Rate for Medical Line of coverage and the benefit Formula level for the specific carrier opted by the member) Adjustment Factor = Fixed dollar amount per member count (can be negative or positive based on whether the Carrier is receiver or payer) Positive is the receiver and negative is the payer. Risk Adjustment amount = Raw rate + (Risk Adjustment factor * member count for that plan) Example Adjustment Factor = $ +5.00 for Aetna (receiver) Adjustment Factor = $ −2.00 for Health Net (payer) Employee 1 = $ 400 with (4 member inclusive of employee) Aetna Employee 2 = $ 300 with (2 member inclusive of employee) Health net Employee 3 = $ 200 with (1 member inclusive of employee) Health net For Health net 300 + (−2 * 2) + 200 + (−2 * 1) = 304 + 202 = 494.00 For Aetna 400 + (5 * 4) = $ 420.00 Note: the adjustment factor has an effective date attach to it. Normally it is loaded once in 6 months.

Benefit Partners Inc Functional Specification Document Mail Merge Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_MM Version: <1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Nov. 29, 2001 Chandrasekaran L 1.0 Baseline Release Mar. 20, 2002 Chandrasekaran L 1.1 1. Mail-merge list updated    with triggering    application, delivery    mode and whether    mail merge is    automated or manual. 2. Mail merge log    functionality added Aug. 02, 2002 Chandrasekaran L 2.0 1. Regeneration    functionality added 2. Template list updated 3. Modified to suit    latest FSD template Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Scope Document Reference 4

1.3. Process Specification Document Reference 4

1.4. Definitions Acronyms and Abbreviations 4

2. Module Functionality 5

2.1. Brief Description 5

3. Letter Regeneration 6

3.1. Brieft Description 6

3.2. Storing The Template 6

3.3. Storing The Dynamic Text 6

3.3.1. Implementation Notes 6

3.4. Reproducing A Letter 6

3.4.1. User Interface 7

4. Mail Merge Templates 8

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

The purpose of this document is to describe the functional requirements for the Mail Merge module. This document provides a brief description of the module functionality and identifies all the integration points with other modules.

This document is to be read in conjunction with the BPI Scope document, which identifies all the business use cases for the proposed system. For each business use case or a set of logically related use cases, a detailed process specification document is prepared. The process specification document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output for each business use case. This document consists of forward references to all the process specifications associated with the Mail Merge module.

1.2. Scope Document Reference

This section provides the scope document references for the module. Scope Document Reference Document Description Version BPI_SCOPE Scope Document for BPI 1.0 BPI_SCOPE_ADD Addendum to the BPI scope document 1.0

1.3. Process Specification Document Reference

This section provides the forward references to the process specification document for the module. Process Specification Document Reference Document Description Version

1.4. Definitions, Acronyms and Abbreviations Term Explanation Mail Merge Mail merge is the process of populating predefined templates with dynamic data to extract business correspondences like quotes, letters to groups, agents etc.

2. Module Functionality

2.1. Brief Description

The Mail Merge module addresses the functionality of the system where it needs to generate business correspondences using predefined templates. The templates are basically RTF files with placeholders for dynamic data in them. The output is usually a RTF file, but at times this could be a PostScript or a PDF document. The diagram below illustrates the mail merge process. (See Figure K-1)

Benefit Partners, Inc uses a lot of mail merge templates for their business correspondences. There are around 150 templates that are in use today.

The proposed system will also maintain a log of mail merge letters generated. The log information includes the template id, timestamp, triggering application, user generating the letter, and to whom the letter is addressed (i.e., which group or member or agent).

3. Letter Regeneration

3.1. Brief Description

Benefit Partners, Inc would like to have functionality where a letter can be reproduced exactly as the original at a later point in time without having to store a whole electronic copy of the original letter. This functionality would be achieved by storing just the dynamic text that goes into generation of the original letter and the template used for the original letter in a persistent medium. When a letter has to be reproduced the template used for the original letter and the dynamic text are retrieved from the persistent medium and merged to produce a copy of the original letter.

3.2. Storing the Template

The proposed functionality requires the template used for generation of the original letter, to be available at the time of reproducing the letter. This would be achieved by versioning the templates whenever there is a change to template. All the versions of a template would be maintained, as electronic copies, for achieving the proposed functionality. The current version to be used for each template would be specifiable in a configuration file (XML).

3.3. Storing the Dynamic Text

The dynamic that goes into generated letter would be stored as an entity (column) in a database table. The dynamic text would be stored as a key-value pair that maps each placeholder in the template with the data that goes in the placeholder. The likely database structure for the table that holds the dynamic data is shown in the “Data Structures” section.

3.3.1 Implementation Notes

Since the size of the dynamic text is relatively huge and varying for different letters, it would be stored as a long field in the database. Most of the database implementations (especially IBM DB2 UDB) suggest that a table containing long fields be placed on a separate storage disk in order to avoid a performance hit. With an idea on the average number of letters generated by Benefit Partners, Inc, it is estimated that the data size growth would be at the rate of 3.5-5 GB per year.

3.4. Reproducing a Letter

The proposed functionality would require a new application to reproduce a letter. The user would be able to search previously generated letters using different parameters like date and time of generation of original letter, type of letter (welcome, term, reinstate etc), intended addressee etc. The system would fetch the version of template used, retrieve the dynamic text from the database and reproduces the letter.

3.4.1 User Interface (See Figure K-2)

3.4.1.1 Screen Fields Explanation Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Period Text Boxes Letters generated To specify a criteria for searching letters based on between . . . generated date and time Type of letter Option Box Type of letter To specify a criteria for searching letters based on the type of letter. Letter types are welcome, term, add-on etc Addressee Text Box Addressee To specify a criteria for searching letters based on letter addressee. A lookup option is provided to search groups, employees, agents etc. Searched Display Table Displays letters that match the search criteria. Letters List Generate Command Generate Reproduces selected letters. Selected Selected

4. Mail Merge Templates

The following table lists out the mail merge templates to be used in the proposed system.

Note: Unless specified otherwise, delivery mode is addressee's preferred mode of communication. Dlry # Category/Module ID Description Trigger Process A/M Mode 1. Group 001 New group welcome New Biz A Enrollment 2. Group 002 Notification of adding new EE Add-on A employee 3. Group 003 Notification of adding DEP Add-on A dependent when employee is already enrolled 4. Group 004 Missing information for new New Biz A group Enrollment 5. Employee (add- 005 Missing information for new EE Add-on/ A on/changes) employee adding to existing Changes group 6. Group 006 Denial to enroll add-on EE/DEP Add- A (employee or dependent) on 7. Group 007 Notification of employee EE Term A and/or dependent term 8. Group 008 Notification of group changes GRP Changes A processed 9. Group 009 Notification of overdue Cash A & M premium Reconciliation 10. Group 011 Notification of employee or EE/DEP A dependent changes processed Changes 11. Group 012 Notification of employee M retroactive termination 12. Group 013 Missing info request dependent DEP Add-on/ A Changes 13. Group 014 Denial of reinstatement GRP A Reinstatement 14. Group 015 Approval of reinstatement GRP A Reinstatement 15. Cobra and 016 Request for missing COBRA A CalCobra information Enrollment 16. Group 017 Termination for non-payment GRP A of premium with reinstatement Termination 17. Group 018 Termination for non-payment GRP A of premium with no Termination reinstatement option 18. Group 019 New group not qualified New Biz A (declined) Enrollment 19. Employee (add-on) 020 Notification of add-on EE Add-on A employee to existing group 20. Employee 021 Notification of employee term EE Term A (termination) 21. Employee (group 022 Notification of retroactive GRP Term A termination) group term due to shortage of premium 22. Employee (group 023 Notification of group term GRP Term A termination) 23. Employee 024 Notification of employee EE/DEP A (changes) changes processed Changes Dependent Changes processed for dependent 24. Employee (group 025 Notification that group has GRP Changes A termination of line terminated a line of coverage of coverage) 25. Employee 026 Notification of retro- EE Term A (termination) termination 26. Employee (group 027 Notification to employee of GRP A reinstatement) group's reinstatement Reinstatement 27. Group 028 Group Requalification approval ROE Process A 28. Group 029 Termination for non- ROE Process A requalification 29. Employee 031 Notification to employee of DEP Add-on A (dependent new dependent enrollment when enrollment) employee is already enrolled 30. Group 032 Notification of termination of GRP Changes A line of coverage 31. Group 037 Voluntary termination GRP Term A 32. Group 038 Missing information at ROE or ROE Process A O/E 33. Agent 040 New agent welcome letter Agent Creation A 34. Employee (add-on) 041 CalCobra initial notification EE Add-on A USPS (always sent 2 business days after letter 020. Must be mailed USPS 35. Group 042 Denial of group change GRP Changes A 36. Group 043 Denial of change for employee EE/DEP A or dependent Changes 37. Employee 044 Notification of CalCobra rights EE Term A USPS (termination (always send 2 business days after letter 007. Must be mailed USPS. 38. Agent (group, 046 Cover letter for agents A employee or regarding group, employee, and dependent) dependent correspondence. 39. Group 052 Notification of waiver of late Late fee waive A fee 40. Group 053 Manual letter Declaration of M Eligibility for over age 23 Dependent Child 41. Group 054 Manual letter Certification of M Corporate Wage Earner of Self Employed Income 42. Group 055 Manual letter Termination due M to Shortage of premium 43. Group 057 Manual letter Notification of M employee on disability 44. Group 058 Manual letter Verification of M employee on un-paid leave 45. Association 060 Individual member termed due ROE Process A (requalification) to non-requalification 46. Cobra and 070 New Cobra/CalCobra welcome COBRA A CalCobra letter Enrollment 47. Cobra and 071 Cobra/CalCobra terming due to Automated A CalCobra ending of continuation period. Process Letter needs to be sent 60 days prior to the coverage end date. 48. CalCobra 072 CalCobra Voluntary Cal-COBRA A termination prior to Term continuation end date 49. Cobra 073 Cobra Voluntary termination COBRA Term A prior to continuation end date 50. Cobra and 074 Termination due to non- COBRA Term A CalCobra payment of initial Cobra/CalCobra premium 51. Cobra and 075 45 day premium notice Automated A CalCobra Process 52. Cobra and 076 Ineligible for Cobra/CalCobra COBRA A CalCobra Enrollment 53. Employee 078 Employee term notice with no EE Term A Cobra option 54. Grievance 080 Group denial of late fee waive Late fee waive A 55. Grievance 081 Group denial of copay change Appeals & A for employee/dependent Grievances 56. Grievance 082 Group denial of reinstatement Appeals & A for non-payment Grievances 57. Grievance 083 Group denial of retroactive Appeals & A effective date Grievances 58. Grievance 084 Group denial of retro- Appeals & A termination date Grievances 59. Grievance 085 Group denial of enrollment for Appeals & A employee or dependent Grievances 60. Grievance 086 Group denial for carrier change Appeals & A for employee/dependent Grievances 61. Grievance 087 Group denial to add a newborn Appeals & A dependent Grievances 62. Grievance 088 Group denial for a retro-active Appeals & A carrier transfer for employee or Grievances dependent 63. Grievance 089 Group denial to add domestic Appeals & A partner coverage Grievances 64. Grievance 090 Group denial of 2^(nd) review or Appeals & A appeal Grievances 65. Dependent 092 Manual letter M Declaration of eligibility for over age 23 dependent 66. Agent (Sales and 100 Event followup M Marketing 67. Agent (Sales and 101 Enrollment meeting M Marketing) questionnaire Need to tie information to a lead 68. Agent (Sales and 102 Business tracking report M Marketing) 69. Agent (Sales and 103 Lead Form M Marketing) 70. Agent (Sales and 104 Broker Survey letter M Marketing) 71. Agent (sales and 105 BSS intro to agent M marketing) 72. Agent (sales and 106 Follow-up on agent intro M Marketing) 73. Agent (Sales and 107 Letterhead - blank M Marketing) 74. Agent (sales and 108 Fax coversheet - blank M marketing) 75. Agent 109 Tax ID number request M (commissions) 76. Agent 110 Request W9 M (commissions) 77. Agent 111 Vehicle collection order M (commission) 78. Agent 112 Broker of record dispute M (commission) 79. Agent 113 Broker collection letter M (commission) 80. Agent 114 License expiration letter M (commission) 81. Agent 116 Debit 1 M (commissions) 82. Agent 117 Debit 2 M (Commission) 83. Agent 118 Debit 3 M (Commission) 84. Agent 119 Francise Tax Board M (Commissions) withholding 85. Group 120 Manual letter. Agent license M expired; group need to select new agent. 86. Group 121 Manual letter. $ Owed due to M denial of retro-term of EE/dependent 87. Group 122 Manual letter. $ Owed - M EE/dependent will be termed. 88. Group 124 Manual letter. Federal Cobra M election form 89. Agent 125 Requalification reminder letter M (requalification) to agent, contains a list of groups who have not returned material. 90. Agent (group non- 126 Overdue premiums for groups. M payment of Contains a list of agent's premium) groups. 91. Group 127 Manual letter Electronic Funds M Transfer Election Form 92. Supply ordering 127 A Pick list for fulfilling supply M requests 93. CalCobra only 128 Notification that Employer has GRP Changes A termed a line of coverage. (Sent to CalCobra when line of coverage is termed) 94. CalCobra only 129 Notification that Employer has GRP Changes A added a line of coverage. (Sent to CalCobra when adding the line of coverage at the employer master.) 95. Association 131 Notification of dependent term Assocn A individual member Member DEP Term 96. Association 132 Denial to enroll dependent Assocn A Individual member Member DEP Add-on 97. Association 133 Voluntary Termination Assocn A Individual member Member Term 98. Association 134 Missing information request at Assocn A Individual member ROE or OE Member ROE Process 99. Association 135 Denial of change request Assocn A Individual member Member Changes 100. Association 136 Notification of dependent retro- Assocn A Individual member term Member DEP Term 101. Association 137 Notification of Overdue Cash A&M Individual Member premium Reconciliation 102. Association 138 Individual member group Assocn A Individual member termination for NPOP with Member Term reinstatement option 103. Association 139 Denial of reinstatement Assocn A Individual member Member Reinstatement 104. Association 140 Dependent add-on welcome Assocn A Individual member letter Member DEP Add-on 105. Association 141 Missing information request at Assocn A Individual member new business or dependent add Member Enrollment or DEP Add-on 106. Association 142 Individual member group Assocn A Individual member termination with no Member Term reinstatement option 107. Association 143 Individual member new group Assocn A Individual member not eligible Member Enrollment 108. Association 144 Manual Letter. Individual M Individual member member premium shortage not received 109. Association 145 Manual letter. Outstanding M Individual member premium due on termed individual member group 110. Association 146 Manual letter. $ Owed due to M Individual member denial of retro-term of dependent. 111. Association 147 Manual Letter. $ Owed - M individual member dependent will be termed. 112. Association 148 Individual member notification Assocn A Individual member of retro-term Member Term 113. Association 149 Individual member welcome Assocn A Individual member Member Enrollment 114. Employee/Dependent 150 Cal-COBRA Election Form EE/DEP Term A 115. Dependent 151 Notification of dependent DEP Term A (termination) termination 116. Association 152 Approval of Individual Assocn A Individual member Association member Member reinstatement Reinstatement 117. Group (Dependent 153 Notification of dependent term DEP Term A termination) to Group 118. Group (Dependent 154 Notification of dependent DEP Term A retro termination) retroactive term to Group 119. Group (Dependent 155 Dependent add on denial DEP Add-on A add on denial) Notification letter 120. Grievance 156 Review Denial of Employee A Retroactive Effective date 121. Grievance 157 Review Denial of Dependent A Retroactive Effective date 122. Grievance 158 Review Denial of Dependent A Retroactive Termination date for employee 123. Grievance 159 Review Denial of dependent A late enrollee 124. Grievance 160 Manual letter. Claim form A return letter to Employee 125. Grievance 161 Manual letter. Claim form A return letter to Association member 126. Grievance 162 Manual letter. Dependent A Claim form return letter to Employee 127. Grievance 163 Manual letter. Claim form A return letter to Association member's Dependent 128. Group 164 Notification of Group Premium Group Term A Shortage Retro Term 129. Employee 165 Employee notification of DEP Term A (Dependent Retro Dependent Retro Term Term 130. Cobra Calcobra 166 Cobra Cal cobra notification of Group Term A group's Retro Term 131. Group (Cobra and 167 Parent Group Cover Letter for A Cal Cobra group) Cobra member 132. Group 167 A Group Cover Letter A 133. Association 168 Association Cover Letter A (Association Individual member 134. Employee 169 Denial of Dependent changes DEP Changes A (Dependent changes denial)

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification Reports Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_REP Version: <2.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Feb. 14, 2002 Sudhakar K 1.0 Baseline Release Apr. 29, 2002 Sudhakar K 1.0 Rev 1 Revised Version Oct. 17, 2002 Jerald agnal V 2.0 Revised Version Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 6

1.1. Purpose 6

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 6

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 6

2. Process Identification 7

2.1. Background 7

2.2. Process Description 7

2.3. Process Flow 7

3. User Interface 9

3.1. User Interface Screens 9

3.1.1. Reports: BPI_SCR_REP_INPUT 9

3.1.2. Help Menu 10

3.2. User Interface Screens 10

3.2.1. Reports: BPI_SCR_REP_OUTPUT 10

3.2.2. Help Menu 11

4. Business Rule Mapping 12

4.1. Module Name: Carrier Maintenance 12

4.1.1. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_CM_001 12

4.1.2. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_CM_002 12

4.1.3. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_CM_003 13

4.1.4. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_CM_005 13

4.1.5. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_CM_006 14

4.1.6. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_CM_007 15

4.2. Module Name: Sales And Marketing 16

4.2.1. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_001 16

4.2.2. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_002 16

4.2.3. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_003 17

4.2.4. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_004 17

4.2.5. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_005 18

4.2.6. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_006 18

4.2.7. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_007 19

4.2.8. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_008 19

4.2.9. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_009 20

4.2.10. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_010 20

4.2.11. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_011 21

4.2.12. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_012 21

4.2.13. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_013 22

4.2.14. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_014 22

4.2.15. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_015 23

4.2.16. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_016 23

4.2.17. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_017 24

4.2.18. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_018 24

4.2.19. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_019 25

4.2.20. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_020 25

4.2.21. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_021 26

4.2.22. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_022 26

4.2.23. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_SM_023 27

4.3. Module Name: Enrollment 28

4.3.1. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_001 28

4.3.2. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_002 29

4.3.3. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_003 29

4.3.4. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_004 30

4.3.5. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_005 30

4.3.6. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_006 31

4.3.7. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_007 31

4.3.8. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_008 32

4.3.9. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_009 32

4.3.10. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_010 33

4.3.11. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_011 33

4.3.12. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_012 34

4.3.13. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_013 34

4.3.14. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_014 35

4.3.15. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_015 35

4.3.16. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_016 36

4.3.17. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_017 36

4.3.18. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_018 37

4.3.19. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_020 37

4.3.20. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_021 37

4.3.21. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_023 39

4.3.22. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_024 39

4.3.23. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_026 39

4.3.24. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_027 40

4.3.25. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_030 40

4.3.26. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_031 42

4.3.27. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_032 42

4.3.28. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_033 43

4.3.29. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_034 43

4.3.30. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_035 44

4.3.31. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_036 44

4.3.32. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_037 45

4.3.33. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_038 45

4.3.34. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_039 46

4.3.35. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_040 46

4.3.36. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_041 47

4.3.37. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_042 47

4.3.38. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_043 48

4.3.39. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_044 48

4.3.40. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_045 49

4.3.41. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_046 49

4.3.42. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_047 50

4.3.43. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_048 50

4.3.44. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_051 51

4.3.45. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_EN_052 51

4.4. Module Name: Finance 52

4.4.1. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_001 52

4.4.2. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_002 52

4.4.3. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_003 53

4.4.4. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_004 53

4.4.5. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_005 54

4.4.6. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_006 54

4.4.7. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_007 56

4.4.8. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_008 57

4.4.9. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_009 59

4.4.10. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_010 60

4.4.11. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_011 62

4.4.12. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_012 63

4.4.13. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_013 65

4.4.14. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_014 66

4.4.15. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_015 67

4.4.16. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_016 67

4.4.17. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_017 68

4.4.18. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_018 68

4.4.19. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_019 69

4.4.20. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_020 69

4.4.21. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_021 70

4.4.22. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_022 70

4.4.23. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_025 71

4.4.24. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_026 72

4.4.25. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_027 72

4.4.26. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_028 73

4.4.27. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_029 73

4.4.28. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_031 74

4.4.29. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_032 75

4.4.30. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_033 75

4.4.31. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_035 76

4.4.32. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_036 77

4.4.33. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_038 77

4.4.34. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_040 77

4.4.35. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_041 78

4.4.36. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_042 78

4.4.37. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_FI_044 79

4.5. Module Name: Miscellaneous (Security, Work Group, Supply Request and Associates) 80

4.5.1. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_MISC_001 80

4.5.2. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_MISC_002 81

5. Interface Flow 82

6. Data Structures 83

6.1. Back End Validations 83

7. Non-Functional Requirements 84

8. Access Control List 85

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

The purpose of this document is to describe the process of Reports and reporting the information and the data available in the system. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_REP Reports

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1. Background

2.2. Process Description

The objective of the Reports is to provide information captured in the system to the user in a presentable manner.

The reports can be single, two-dimensional and multi dimensional providing the information to the decision-maker.

The objective of reporting is to paint that picture by analyzing and interpreting vast quantities of data-customer demographics, cross-sales, service calls, Internet experiences and online transactions—turning information into insight and developing conclusive, fact-based strategies to gain that competitive edge.

Reports are categorized based on the modules and the purpose of the reports.

2.3. Process Flow

All reports can be classified based on the following criteria:

-   -   Purpose of Report: Briefly outline the intended use and the         purpose of the report and what information it is to provide.     -   Intended Audience/Delivery To: This specifies the intended         audience for the report and to whom the report is to be         delivered. The can be ranging from President, Vice President         Operations, Managers and CFO's and BPI Team.     -   Frequency of reports (Monthly, Weekly daily etc.): The         frequencies of reports are based on whether the reports are         Automated or Manual. All automated reports would have the         frequency for delivery (Monthly, Weekly etc.). Manual reports         does not have any frequency and can also be called as adhoc         report, which is reported on the screen in the form of HTML         when, required by the user.     -   Mode of Delivery: All automated reports are delivered via email         to the users defined as the intended audience. Adhoc reports are         viewable on the screen and can be printed in HTML format.     -   Output Format (HTML, XL or RTF): Output Format can be XL, HTML         or RTF. The formats are based on the report type. All reports         that are automated are in XL format. The reports that are manual         or Adhoc are in HTML format.     -   User Interface required for the report or not: Adhoc Reports and         manual reports require user interface to generate the report.         These reports are generated in HTML format.     -   Automated reports does not require User interface.     -   Input to the system (Input parameters): This defines the input         parameters required to generate the Report. Input can be based         on single parameter, Multiple parameters with and/or Conditions.     -   Expected Output of the report (Output Parameters): This defines         the output of the report. The output can be single dimensional         or multi dimensional.     -   Output can also be based on certain logic's, calculation and         comparative reports or derivative of two or more reports         summarized.

The reports that are generated automatically should be delivered to the intended audience via email. Also all the generated reports should be store under some file path in a systematic manner (may be time stamp and report ID) and logged in file or Database (preferably in database) so that we can retrieve the reports retrospectively from this file path.

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Reports: BPI_SCR_REP_INPUT

3.1.1.1. Screen Snapshot

This is a generalized screen for all the reports. This screen can be split into two parts, one as an input parameter to obtain the desired report and the second part is the report itself. (See Figure L-1)

3.1.1.2. Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Name Element Type Purpose Module ID Text Describes the name of the module the report is extracted from. Report name Text Name of the report Report ID Text ID of the Report Parameters Text Specifies the input parameters for the report Parameter Entries Entry Field Specifies the entry fields for the parameters Fetch report HTML Button Button to fetch the report based on the input criteria

3.1.1.3. Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Parameter Entry Field for the parameters, E.g. Error Message: Entries group ID, Group name, from Date, “The data you have To Date etc. that is required to build entered is in correct” the dynamic reports. Please enter the Note: The number of parameters correct data.” depends on the report in question. The report output can be based on the input criteria. The input criteria are provided to narrow down the search results or narrow down to a specific output for the report.

3.1.2. Help Menu Element Name Purpose Valid Values Parameter Entries Describe the Based on specific Reports parameters used for the report.

3.2. User Interface Screens

3.2.1. Reports: BPI_SCR_REP_OUTPUT

3.2.1.1. Screen Snapshot (See Figure L-2)

This is a generalized screen for all the reports. This screen can be split into two parts, one as an input parameter to obtain the desired report and the second part is the report itself.

3.2.1.2. Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Name Element Type Purpose Module Name Text Describes the name of the module the report is extracted from. Report name Text Name of the report Report ID Text ID of the Report Report Description Text Brief Description of the report Report HTML Table HTML Table Containing the Report Back HTML Button Button to navigate back to the Previous Page. (INPUT for the Report)

3.2.1.3. Screen Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Report The HTML Table for the report is None dynamic and based on the report can be single or multi dimensional. Back HTML Button to navigate to the None previous screen (Input Screen)

3.2.2. Help Menu Element Name Purpose Valid Values Report Shows the Based on the report the output can be generated reports single of multi dimensional.

4. Business Rule Mapping

4.1. Module Name: Carrier Maintenance

4.1.1. Report ID: BPI_CAS_REP_CM_(—)001 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_CM_001 Report Name Rates in different format Purpose of This report is used to show the rates for the various Report health products offered by Carrier Delivery To Carriers and All BPI users Frequency Non periodic Mode of None Delivery Output Format XL or HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report 1. Eff_Date 2. Carrier_ID 3. Plan_Type_ID 4. Benefit_ID Output of the Product Name, Product Name, Rates for Employee Only, Report Employee and Spouse, Employee and Dependents, Employee, Spouse and Dependents.

4.1.2. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_CM_(—)002 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_CM_002 Report Name Comparison on the current rates provided by the carrier with past rate. Purpose of This report is to compare the current rate offered Report by the carrier with their previous rates based on a specified period. Delivery To PacAdvantage and All BPI users Frequency Non periodic Mode of None Delivery Output Format XL or HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report 1. Eff_Date 2. Carrier_ID 3. Plan_Type_ID 4. Benefit_ID 5. Eff_Date1 6. Carrier_ID1 7. Plan_Type_ID1 8. Benefit_ID1 Output of the Product Name, Product Name, Rates for Employee Only, Report Employee and Spouse, Employee and Dependents, Employee, Spouse and Dependents.

4.1.3. Report ID:BPI_CAS REP_CM_(—)003 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_CM_003 Report Name Plan availability Purpose of This report is used to show the plan availability for the Report specified carrier in a Zip's available in California. Delivery To Carriers and All BPI users Frequency Non periodic Mode of None Delivery Output Format XL or HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report 1. Eff_Date 2. Plan ID Output of the Product Name, Carrier name, ZIP, Effective Date and Report Rating Region.

4.1.4. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_CM_(—)005 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_CM_005 Report Name ZIP Codes with No Coverage Purpose of This report is used to show the Zip's in California where Report there is no coverage. Delivery To Carriers and All BPI users Frequency Non periodic Mode of None Delivery Output Format XL or HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report EFF_DATE, LOC_ID. Output of the ZIP, Effective Date of Plan non-Availability. Report

4.1.5. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_CM_(—)006 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_CM_006 Report Name Plan Changes - Member Effected Purpose of When there is a change in the plan availability in a Report specific ZIP code and or County or whenever a plan ceases to exist report about the entire member in the specific ZIP or County with that planshould be listed. Delivery To Carriers and All BPI users Frequency Non periodic Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated/Should be triggered by Plan changes Manual Input to report EFF_DATE, PLAN_ID Output of the Group name, Group ID, Member Name, Member SSN Report or Unique ID, Member Benefit Level, Coverage Choice, ZIP, County, Service Area

4.1.6. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_CM_(—)007 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_CM_007 Report Name Consolidated report on Rate Classification sorted by Rate Type (Admin, Agent Commission, Additional fees and Differential Factor) Purpose of To report on the Fees structure for the rate Classification Report based on the Admin fees, Agent Commission Additional fees and differential factor. Delivery To Adhoc Frequency Non periodic Mode of none Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report PARAMEFFDATE Output of the Rate Type - Blended: Report Group Type, Agent Commission, Admin Fee, Rate Type - Non Blended: LOC Type, Group Type, Group Size, Per Member Flat Amt, Per Group Flat Amt, Differential Factor: Group size down limit, Group size up limit, Differential factor.

4.2. Module Name: Sales and Marketing

4.2.1. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)001 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_001 Report Name Sold Group Details for Period Specified Purpose of This report is used to show the Total Groups sold for a Report specified effective date and also show the cumulative sales up to date Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL or HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual and Automated Manual Input to report Effective Date Output of the Group Name, Group ID, Writing Agent Name, Report Marketing Source, Contact Date, Active Subscribers Count, Active Dependent Count

4.2.2. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)002 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_002 Report Name Sold Group Details for Period Specified based on Group Type Purpose of This report is used to show the Total Groups sold for a Report specified effective date and also show the cumulative sales up to date for a specific group type Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL or HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual and Automated Manual Input to report Effective Date, Group Type Output of the Group Name, Group ID, Writing Agent Name, Report Marketing Source, Contact Date, Subscribers Count, Dependent Count

4.2.3. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)003 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_003 Report Name Average Group Size Purpose of This report is used to show the average group size, Report i.e. employees/group for Small Employer Group Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL or HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual and Automated Manual Input to report Effective Date Output of the Group Name, Group ID, Writing Agent Id, Marketing Report Source, Contact Date, Subscribers Count, Dependent Count

4.2.4. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)004 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_004 Report Name Comparison between case sold Current Months and Previous Year Current Month Purpose of This report is used to compare the Case sold in the Report current month with the cash sold in the previous year current month. Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of email Delivery Output Format XL or HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual/Automated Manual Input to report Effective Date Output of the Group Type, Current New Groups, Current New Report Subscribers, Current New Dependents, Current New Member, Prior Year Current New Groups, Prior Year Current New Subscribers, Prior Year Current New Dependents, Prior Year Current New Members, This Month New Subscribers % of Total, This Month New Groups % of Total, % of Change from Prior Year

4.2.5. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)005 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_005 Report Name Group Enrollment With line of Coverage Purpose of This report is used to identify the groups enrolled with Report each line of coverage based on effective date. Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of email Delivery Output Format XL or HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual/Automated Manual Input to report Effective Date Output of the Group Type, Year To Date Groups, Year To Date Report Subscribers, Year To Date Dependents, Year To Date Members, Current New Groups, Current New Subscribers, Current New Dependents, Current New Members, Current Terminated Groups, Current Terminated Subscribers, Current Terminated Dependents, Current Terminated Members, Net Gain/Loss Groups, Net Gain/Loss Subscribers, Net Gain/Loss Dependents, Net Gain/Loss Members

4.2.6. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)006 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_006 Report Name Leads by Source for Specified Period Purpose of This report is used to identify the leads generated Report based on the source sub type for the specified period. Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Weekly, Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual/Automated Manual Output of the Source Code, Last 12 Months Lead Given, Last 12 Report Months Lead Sold, Last 12 Months Close Ratio, Last 90 Days Lead Given, Last 90 days Lead Sold, Last 90 Days Close Ratio, This Month Lead Given, This Month Lead Sold, This Month Close Ratio,

4.2.7. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)007 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_007 Report Name New Lead tracking for brokers Purpose of This report is used to track the new agent and leads. Report Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Weekly, Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Agent Name, Last 12 Months Lead Given, Last 12 Report Months Lead Sold, Last 12 Months Close Ratio, Last 90 Days Lead Given, Last 90 days Lead Sold, Last 90 Days Close Ratio, This Month Lead Given, This Month Lead Sold, This Month Close Ratio,

4.2.8. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)008 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_008 Report Name Quote Tracking Purpose of This report is used to track the quotes generated Report per week to the quotes converted to sales. Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Weekly, Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the For Quote Generation and Groups Sold (Last 30 days, Report Last 90 days, Last 120 day and Last 365 days)

4.2.9. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)009 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_009 Report Name Quote With 10 or More employees Purpose of This report is used to track the quotes with 10 Report or more employees for follow up. Delivery To Sales Team Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Quote No, Company Name, Agent Name, EE Count, Report Quote Date, Quote Rev, Lead No, Source Sub Type

4.2.10. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)010 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_010 Report Name Sales with 10 of More employees Purpose of This report is used to track the sales with 10 or more Report employees for follow up and customer service. Delivery To Sales team, GMS Team Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Group Number, Company Name, Writing Agent, Report Employee Count, Effective Date, Quote Number, Lead Number, Source Sub Type

4.2.11. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)011 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_011 Report Name Quote by Sales Rep/Work Group Purpose of This report is used to track the quote generated Report by sales rep belonging to a specific work group. Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Work Group Name, Date Quoted, Company Name, Report Agent ID, Marketing Source, Proposed Effective Date, EE count.

4.2.12. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)012 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_012 Report Name Agent Extract Purpose of This report is used to extract information about the agents Report up to date Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Agent ID, Agent Name, Company Name, Gender, Report Address, Suite, city, State, Zip, County ID, Phone, Fax, Email, DOB, Agent Tax ID, Work Group, Commission Groups, Writing Groups, Internal Reps

4.2.13. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)013 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_012 Report Name Agent Extract Purpose of This report is used to extract information about the agents Report up to date Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Agent ID, Agent Name, Company Name, Gender, Report Address, Suite, city, State, Zip, County ID, Phone, Fax, Email, DOB, Agent Tax ID, Work Group, Commission Groups, Writing Groups, Internal Reps

4.2.14. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)014 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_014 Report Name Quarterly Sales By County Purpose of This report is used to provide Quarterly sales done by Report outside sales rep by county Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the County ID, County Name, Current Group ID, Current Report Effective Date, Current Subscriber's Total, Current Dependent's Total, Current Member's Total, Year to Date Group's Total, Year to Date ubscriber's Total, Year to Date Dependent's Total, Year to Date Member's Total

4.2.15. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)015 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_015 Report Name Enrollment for an Agent Purpose of This report is used to provide enrollment done by an Report agent and the group demographics (for Active Groups Only) Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of None Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Date, Agent Id Output of the Group Id, Group Name, Address, Suite, City, State, Zip, Report Phone, Email, Effective Date, Group ROE Cycle, EE count, DEP count

4.2.16. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)016 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_016 Report Name Enrollment for an Agencies Purpose of This report is used to provide enrollment done by an Report agency and associated writing agent, the group demographics (for Active Groups Only) Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of None Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Date, Agency Id Output of the Group ID, Group Name, Address, Suite, City, State, Report Zip, Phone, Email, Writing Agent ID, Effective Date, Group ROE Cycle, EE count, DEP count

4.2.17. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)017 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_017 Report Name Association Available Purpose of This report is used to provide information about the Report association and association groups and individual member. Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of None Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Date, Association ID Output of the Group Id, Group Name, Address, Suite, City, State, Report Zip, Phone, Email, Writing Agent ID, Group Eective Date, Group ROE Cycle, EE count, DEP count

4.2.18. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)018 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_018 Report Name List of Agent with Agencies along with Group Purpose of This report is used to provide information on a Report agencies and the groups and members attached to the agent/agencies Delivery To All BPI Frequency Adhoc/Monthly Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Date, Agency Id Output of the Group ID, Group Name, Address, Suite, City, State, Zip, Report Phone, Email, Group Effective Date, Group ROE Cycle, EE count, DEP count

4.2.19. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)019 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_019 Report Name Agent with Group/member Counts Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Report a agent with Group and member count. Delivery To All BPI Frequency Adhoc/Monthly Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Date Output of the Agent ID, New Agent, Agent Name, Agent Type, Report Group Count, Member Count, BSU Rep, Group Type, Period

4.2.20. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)020 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_020 Report Name Sold Cases by Sales Reps Purpose of To see what groups have sold for the month. Report Delivery To Weekly/Monthly totals to each BSU rep in their work group. Frequency Monthly/Weekly Mode of email Delivery Output Format XL or HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual and Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Agent ID, New Agent, Agent Name, Agent Type, Group Report ID, Group Name, BSU Rep, Group Type, EE members, Quote Date, Effective Date, Finalized Date, Rate Tier

4.2.21. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)021 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_021 Report Name Lead Tracking Purpose of To see history of the BSU reps leads. Report Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Weekly to each BSU rep in their work group. Frequency Monthly/Weekly Mode of email Delivery Output Format XL or HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual and Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Agent ID, Agent Name, Company, Date Lead Added, Report Source, BSU Rep, Quote Process Date, Group Size, Lead Follow Up Date, Lead Status, Enrolled Date

4.2.22. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)022 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_022 Report Name Hot and Cold Agents Purpose of To report on the agent based on the agents business with Report PacAdvantage Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Weekly to each BSU rep in their work group. Frequency Adhoc Mode of none Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Date Output of the Agent Id, New Agent, Agent Name, Agent Type, Report Business Generated Leads/Conversion, Member Count, Workgroup, Period

4.2.23. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_SM_(—)023 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_SM_023 Report Name Agent Profile Purpose of To report on the agent Profile statue Report Delivery To BSS Manager, Vice President Operations, President Weekly to each BSU rep in their work group. Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Date Output of the Agent Id, New Agent, Agent First Name, Agent Last Report Name, Agent Type, Agent Profile Information, Status, Bsu Rep

4.3. Module Name: Enrollment

4.3.1. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)001 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_001 Report Name Enrollment By Plan Purpose of This report is used to provide information on enrollment Report by Benefit Level for each line of coverage Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Effective Date Output of the Plan Name, Plan Type, Line of Coverage, prior month Report Total members, Current month New Subscriber, Current month dependent, current termination, current month net gain and loss, total members active last month + net gain and loss, number of members Currently enrolled, This month new subscription % and % change from previous month.

4.3.2. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)002 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_002 Report Name Enrollment By Counties Purpose of This report is used to provide information on enrollment Report by Counties for each line of coverage Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the State, County, Plan Type, Line of Coverage, Active Report Member last period, New Subscriber Current Month, New Dependent Current Month, Terminated Current Month, Net gain/Loss, System generated Currently Enrolled Count. Currently Enrolled Active Subscribers and Active Dependents.

4.3.3. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)003 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_003 Report Name Enrollment By Association Purpose of This report is used to provide information on enrollment Report by Association Name Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Association ID, Group Name, Association name, Report Number of New Groups, Subscribers, dependents, Total Number of Groups, Subscribers and dependent up to date.

4.3.4. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)004 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_004 Report Name Enrollment By Counties Purpose of This report is used to provide information on enrollment Report by Counties Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Group Type, County Name, Report (Total Enrolled) # of Groups, Total Active Subscriber, Total Active Dependent (New Enrollment for Current Period) New Subscriber, New Dependent, This period terms Net gain/Loss, # of Groups, # of COBRA, # of Association

4.3.5. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)005 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_005 Report Name Monthly Individual Application received and processes Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Report Applications received and processed on weekly/monthly basis. (This report is based on mail room entry) Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated, Manual Manual Input to report Applications received Date Output of the Line Of Coverage, Small Employer Group - Subscribers, Report Small Employer Group - Dependents, COBRA Subscribers, COBRA dependents, Association Subscribers and Association dependents.

4.3.6. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)006 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_006 Report Name Total Enrollment By Benefit Level (Carrier Offered) Purpose of This report is used to provide information on total Report enrollment based on the benefit level offered by carriers. (Small Employer Groups) Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Effective Date Output of the Plan Name, Plan Type, Active Last Period, This Period Report New Subscribers, This Period New Dependents, This Period Terminated, This Period Net Gain Loss, Active Subscribers, Active Dependents

4.3.7. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)007 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_007 Report Name Applications Declined by reasons Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Report Applications declined based on specific reasons. Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Reasons for Decline, # of Subscriber Application, Report # of Dependent Application, COBRA Subscriber Application, COBRA Dependent Application, Association Subscriber Application, Association Dependent Applications.

4.3.8. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)008 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_008 Report Name Group applications Declined by reasons Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Group Report Applications declined based on specific reasons. Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Reasons for Decline, # of Group Application, Report # of Association Application, # of COBRA Application.

4.3.9. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)009 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_009 Report Name Member Termination Summary Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Members Report Termed. Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Group Type, Subscriber Terminated this Period, Report Dependent Terminated this period, Members Terminated this period

4.3.10. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)010 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_010 Report Name Group Termination Summary Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Groups Report Termed. Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Group Type, No of Groups terminated this period, Report Subscriber Terminated this period, Dependent Terminated this period, Members Terminated this period.

4.3.11. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)011 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_011 Report Name New Group Summary Purpose of This report is used to provide information on New Report Groups Enrolled during Current Period Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Group Type, New Groups, New Subscribers, New Report Dependents, New members

4.3.12. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)012 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_012 Report Name New Employees and Add-On Summary Purpose of This report is used to provide information on New Report Employees and Add On's Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Group Type, New Subscribers, New Dependents, New Report members

4.3.13. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)013 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_013 Report Name Group Termination details for a specific group size. Purpose of This report is used to provide information on termed Report Groups by Group Size Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Small Employer Group Term reasons, Writing Agent, Report Group Size (<=4, 5-9, 10-14, 15-24, 25-29, 30>=) Total Groups, Total Members, Total Subscriber and Total Dependent.

4.3.14. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)014 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_014 Report Name Member Demographics by Age Bucket Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Member Report demographics by age bucket Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Age and gender, Line of Coverage, Group type, New Report Subscriber this period, New Dependent This period, New Member this period, Total Subscriber, total dependent, total member Age of enrolled member (<=29, 30-39, 40-49, 50-59, 60-64, 65>=)

4.3.15. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)015 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_015 Report Name Member Demographics for Newly Enrolled members Purpose of This report is used to provide information on newly Report enrolled member by member demographics Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Age and gender, Line of Coverage, Group type, New Report Subscriber this period, New Dependent This period, New Member this period Age of Newly enrolled subscriber Age of enrolled member (<=29, 30-39, 40-49, 50-59, 60-64, 65>=)

4.3.16. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)016 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_016 Report Name Employee Demographics by Coverage Choice. Purpose of This report is used to provide information on enrolled Report employee by coverage choice. Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Loc, Coverage Choice (Employee only, Employee Report and Child/ren, Employee Spouse, Employee family) New Subscriber, New Dependent, New member this period. Total Enrollments Subscriber, Dependent, Member Currently Enrolled up to date, Age of enrolled Subscriber (<=29, 30-39, 40-49, 50-59, 60-64, 65>=)

4.3.17. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)017 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_017 Report Name Group Enrollment by group type with and without agent Purpose of This report is used to provide information on enrolled Report Group with/without agent. Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Group Type, With agent or without agent, Group Count, Report Total active subscribers, Total active Dependents, This Period New groups, This period new Subscribers, This period Add ons, This period terms, Net gain and loss, No of SEG Groups, No of Cobras, No of Associations.

4.3.18. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)018 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_018 Report Name Aging Report for Pending status Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Report performance by duration for Received applications and pending up to date. (i.e. how many applications and what type are in pend status. Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Daily Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Date Output of the Process Type, Reference_ID, Date Started, Started By, Report Work group, Days in Pending Status.

4.3.19. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)020 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_020 Report Name Group Enrolled by Group Size Purpose of This report is used to provide information on group Report enrolled by group size Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Group Size, Group Name, Writing Agent, Group Count, Report Subscribers Count, Dependent Count, Total Member Count, (Group Size as (<=4, 5-9, 10-14, 15-24, 25-29, 30>=))

4.3.20. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)021 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_021 Report Name Define Contribution Purpose of This report is used to provide information on group Report enrolled by Contribution Type for Small Employer Group Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Employer Defined Contribution, Product Type, Report Contribution Type, Contribution Amount, Groups Current Month, Groups Calendar Year to Date

4.3.21. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)023 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_023 Report Name Report on Other's Remarks form all the screens Purpose of This report is used to provide information on New Report remarks that needs to be added in to the system Delivery To IT, VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Manual Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Screen ID Output of the Module Name, Element Name, Remarks/Others Report

4.3.22. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)024 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_024 Report Name Summary Report Purpose of This report is used to provide information on summary Report of Enrollment as on date Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Group type, Current Group Count, Current Subscriber Report Count, Current Dependent Count, Current Member Count, Year-to-date Group Count, Year-to-date Subscriber Count, Year-to-date Dependent Count, Year-to-date Member Count.

4.3.23. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)026 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_026 Report Name Employee and Members by Line of Coverage Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Report employees lives by line of coverage and member per group by line of coverage. Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Line of Coverage, Employees Count, Dependent Report Counts, member Counts Number of Members Per group/Line of Coverage.

4.3.24. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)027 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_030 Report Name Un Insured Groups and employees Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Report Groups and Employees Enrolling without prior coverage. Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date. Output of the Employee Count Active up to date without prior Report Coverage, Employee Count up to date without prior Coverage Current Employee Count without prior coverage, Current Employee Count Termed without prior coverage.

4.3.25. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)030 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_030 Report Name Un Insured Groups and employees Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Report Groups and Employees Enrolling without prior coverage. Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date. Output of the Employee Count Active up to date without prior Report Coverage, Employee Count up to date without prior Coverage Current Employee Count without prior coverage, Current Employee Count Termed without prior coverage.

4.3.26. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)031 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_031 Report Name Prior Insurance Carrier Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Report Employees with prior coverage information. Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Ad hoc Mode of Manual Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Date Output of the Prior Coverage carrier name, Employee Count Report

4.3.27. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)032 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_032 Report Name ROE Report Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Ad On, Report Change after and before ROE Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Output of the Group Id, ROE Status, ROE Result, Date Received Report Requal Info, Date Postmark Requal info type, No of Employees, No of COBRA'S.

4.3.28. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)033 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_033 Report Name Carrier issues by Carrier and By issues Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Carrier Report Issues by Issues and By Carrier Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Carrier Name, Carrier Issue Reported, Carrier Issue - Report Actual, Date Received, Date Resolved Total Days To process

4.3.29. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)034 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_034 Report Name Appeals and Grievances Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Appeals Report and Grievances Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Nature of Appeals, Appellant Type, Appellant Name, Report Group No, Date Received, Date Closed, Conclusion

4.3.30. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)035 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_035 Report Name COBRA Enrollment by COBRA Type Purpose of This report is used to provide information on COBRA Report Enrollment by COBRA type and by Line of Coverage Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the COBRA Type, No of New COBRA's Groups Report Subscribers & Dependents - for Current and Enrolled Total

4.3.31. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)036 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_036 Report Name Disabled Dependent Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Disabled Report Dependent Delivery To VP Finance, Vice President Operations, President Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Group Id, Group Name, Disabled Type, Disabled Report Dependent Count

4.3.32. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)037 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_037 Report Name Employee Status up to date Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Employee Report Status up to date. Delivery To All BPI Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Group ID Output of the Group Id, Group Name, Employee SSN, Employee Report Name, Employee Status Up to date, Effective Date

4.3.33. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)038 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_038 Report Name Employer/Group Status (Including COBRA and Small Employer and Individual Association Member and Association group) Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Group Report Level Status up to date. Delivery To All BPI Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Group ID Output of the Group ID, Group Type, Employee Status Up to date, Report Effective Date, Employee Count, Member Count.

4.3.34. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)039 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_039 Report Name COBRA/Cal COBRA Status up to date Purpose of This report is used to provide information on COBRA/ Report Cal COBRA Status up to date. Delivery To All BPI Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report GROUP ID Output of the Parent Group Id, Parent Group Name, Anniversary Report Date, COBRA Group Id, COBRA Group Name, COBRA type, Status Up to Date, Effective Date, Member Count, COBRA Tenure, COBRA End Date

4.3.35. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)040 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_040 Report Name Association Group and Member Counts Purpose of This report is used to provide information on a Report specific association and the Groups and individual members affiliated with the Association Delivery To All BPI Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Association ID Output of the Association ID, Association name, Association Type, Report Association Group Type, Group ID/Member ID, Employee SSN, Employee Name, Status Up to Date, Effective Date of Status, Anniversary Date, Employee Count, Member Count

4.3.36. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)041 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_041 Report Name Carrier Issues for a specific Carrier (Member Level) Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Carrier Report Issues on a specific carrier. Delivery To All BPI Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Carrier ID Output of the Carrier ID, Carrier Name, List of Member for the carrier Report specified with SSN # or ID, Date of Birth, Effective Date with the carrier, Plan Opted by Member, Transmission status, Transmission Date.

4.3.37. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)042 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_042 Report Name Carrier Issues for a specific Carrier (Group Level) Purpose of This report is used to provide information on Carrier Report Issues on a specific carrier (Group Level). Delivery To All BPI Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Carrier ID Output of the Carrier ID, Carrier Name, Group ID, Group name, Report Effective Date, Member Count, Transmission status, Transmission Date.

4.3.38. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)043 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_043 Report Name Report on Transaction History for Enrollment (Group Level) Purpose of This report is used to provide information on the History Report of all the transactions and changes (Enrollment) made on the group up to date. Delivery To All BPI Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Group ID Output of the Group Id, Group Name, Group Type, Nature of Report Transaction, Transaction Description, Effective Date, User Id

4.3.39. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)044 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_044 Report Name Report on Transaction History for Enrollment (Employee Level) Purpose of This report is used to provide information on the History Report of all the transactions and changes (Enrollment) made on the employee up to date. Delivery To All BPI Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Group ID Output of the Group Id, Group Name, Group Type, Employee ID, Report Employee SSN, Nature of Transaction, Transaction Description Effective Date, User Id

4.3.40. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)045 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_045 Report Name Report on Transaction History for Enrollment (Dependent Level) Purpose of This report is used to provide information on the History Report of all the transactions and changes (Enrollment) made on the dependent up to date. Delivery To All BPI Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Group ID Output of the Group ID, Group name, Group Type, Employee Report ID/SSN, Dependent Id Dependent SSN, Nature of Transaction, Transaction Description, Effective Date, User Id

4.3.41. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)046 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_046 Report Name Agent Change record for a specific group Purpose of This report is used to provide information on the Agent Report Change record for a specific group Delivery To All BPI Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Date Output of the Agent ID, Agent Name, Effective Change Date Report

4.3.42. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)047 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_047 Report Name Report on ROE/OE on Groups Purpose of This report is used to provide information on the Groups Report that underwent or is in process for ROE/OE. Delivery To All BPI Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Date Output of the Group Id, Group Name, Group Type, Effective Date, Report Process (ROE or OE), ROE/OE Date.

4.3.43. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)048 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_048 Report Name Report on Blended Vs Non Blended Group Purpose of This report is used to provide information on the Report Blended Vs Non Blended Group. Delivery To All BPI Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Date Output of the Group Id, Group Name, Group Type, Effective Date, Report Blended/Non Blended, Blended Group Count, Non Blended group Count

4.3.44. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)051 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_EN_051 Report Name Reports on Group schedule to be termed. Purpose of This is to report on the Groups whose are scheduled to Report be termed. Delivery To VP Operations, GMS Manager Frequency Monthly Mode of email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Date Output of the Group ID, Group name, Group Type, Work Group, Report Terminated Date, Term Process initiation Date, Term Reasons, Days Pending

4.3.45. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_EN_(—)052 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_044 Report Name Enrollment Transmission Status Purpose of This report is used to show the status for the transmission Report for various external transmissions for a specified duration Delivery To IT Frequency Non periodic Mode of None Delivery Output Format XL or HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report From Date To Date Output of the Transmission Time and Date, Process Period, Data Report Format Transmission Type, File Size, Record Count, Status.

4.4. Module Name: Finance

4.4.1. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)001 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_001 Report Name Pending Commission Purpose of To report on the list of commissions reconciled but Report unpaid at the month-end. Delivery To CFO, Manager Finance Frequency Monthly, Adhoc Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated, Manual Manual Input to report Agent ID Output of the Agent ID, Agent name (Commission Payee), Period Report End Date, Billing Period, Group ID, Month Period Ending, Writing Agent ID, Writing Agent name, Member Counts for the Group, Line of Coverage, Commission Split Percent, Flat Fee (Group Level), Per Member Fees, Total Fees Payable, Monthly Premium amount, Blended/ Non Blended.

4.4.2. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)002 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_002 Report Name Agent Owing PacAdvantage Money Purpose of To report on the list of agents who must pay back Report commission to the PacAdvantage. Represents receivable to PacAdvantage at the month-end. Delivery To CFO, Manager Finance Frequency Monthly, Adhoc Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated, Manual Manual Input to report Output of the Agent ID, Agent Type, Commission Address Block, B/F Report Amount (Balance Forward)

4.4.3. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)003 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_003 Report Name Cash Batches Purpose of To report on the list of cash batches entered during Report the month in question. Delivery To CFO, Manager Finance Frequency Monthly, Adhoc Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated, Manual Manual Input to report Start Date, End Date, Batch Type Output of the Batch Number, Deposit Date, Tape Total, Batch Total, Report Batch Type, Batch Status, User ID

4.4.4. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)004 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_004 Report Name MRMIB Blended Rate Comparison Purpose of To report on medical and dental member counts Report associated with blended rate invoices reconciled during the month. Used to allocate cash reconciled between blended and non-blended. Delivery To CFO, Manager Finance Frequency Monthly, Adhoc Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated, Manual Manual Input to report Date, Output of the Group Id, Invoice Period, Current medical count, Current Report dental count, prior medical count, prior dental count, Reconciled date

4.4.5. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)005 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_005 Report Name A/R Totals by Group Purpose of To report on customer account balance on the month-end. Report Delivery To CFO, Manager Finance Frequency Monthly, Adhoc Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated, Manual Manual Input to report Output of the Group ID, A/R, Unbilled, Un App Cash, Total A/R, Report Current, 30 Days, 60 Days, 90 Days, over 120

4.4.6. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)006 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_006 Report Name Reconciled not Billed Break Down Purpose of To report on distribution of adjustment and members Report associated with those adjustments used in reconciliation that has not yet appeared on an invoice and will appear in the next invoice. Delivery To CFO, Manager Finance Frequency Monthly, Adhoc Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated, Manual Manual Input to report Adjustment Period Output of the HEALTH PLAN PREMIUMS - GROSS Report ADD: CAL COBRA FEES LESS: RISK ADJUSTMENT WITHHELD HEALTH PLAN PREMIUMS - NET AGENT COMMISSIONS FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED GROUP DIRECT FEES FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED ADMINISTRATIVE FEES FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED LATE FEES REINSTATEMENT FEES NSF FEES COBRA FEES VARIANCE +/−$2.00 OTHER FEES TOTAL PREMIUM RISK ADJUSTMENT PAYABLE (MEMO) MEMBERS MEDICAL DENTAL VISION CAM

4.4.7. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)007 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_007 Report Name Reconciled not Billed Break Down Details (Group Level) Purpose of To report on distribution of adjustment and members Report associated with those adjustments used in reconciliation that has not yet appeared on an invoice and will appear in the next invoice. This done for individual groups. Delivery To CFO, Manager Finance Frequency Monthly, Adhoc Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated, Manual Manual Input to report Adjustment Period Output of the GROUP NO, Report GROUP NAME, GROUP EFF_DATE, GROUP TYPE, AGENT NO, BILLING PERIOD, INVOICE DATE, RECONCILIED DATE, CURRENT MONTH PREMIUM, PRIOR PERIOR ADJ'S, PLAN_ID, HEALTH PLAN PREMIUM, CAL COBRA FEES, RISK ADJ WITHHELD, HEALTH PLAN PREMIUMS - GROSS ADD: CAL COBRA FEES LESS: RISK ADJUSTMENT WITHHELD HEALTH PLAN PREMIUMS - NET AGENT COMMISSIONS FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED GROUP DIRECT FEES FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED ADMINISTRATIVE FEES FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED LATE FEES REINSTATEMENT FEES NSF FEES COBRA FEES VARIANCE +/−$2.00 OTHER FEES TOTAL PREMIUM RISK ADJUSTMENT PAYABLE (MEMO) MEMBERS MEDICAL DENTAL VISION CAM

4.4.8. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)008 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_008 Report Name A/R Break Down (Carrier Level) Purpose of To report on distribution of amount appearing on Report unreconciled invoices along with the member count. Delivery To CFO, Manager Finance Frequency Monthly, Adhoc Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated, Manual Manual Input to report Bill Period Output of the HEALTH PLAN PREMIUMS - GROSS Report ADD: CAL COBRA FEES LESS: RISK ADJUSTMENT WITHHELD HEALTH PLAN PREMIUMS - NET AGENT COMMISSIONS FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED GROUP DIRECT FEES FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED ADMINISTRATIVE FEES FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED LATE FEES REINSTATEMENT FEES NSF FEES COBRA FEES VARIANCE +/−$2.00 OTHER FEES TOTAL PREMIUM RISK ADJUSTMENT PAYABLE (MEMO) MEMBERS MEDICAL DENTAL VISION CAM

4.4.9. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)009 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_009 Report Name A/R Break Down Details (Group Level) Purpose of To report on distribution of amount appearing on Report unreconciled invoices along with the member count. This done for individual groups Delivery To CFO, Manager Finance Frequency Monthly, Adhoc Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated, Manual Manual Input to report Period Output of the GROUP NO, Report GROUP NAME, GROUP EFF_DATE, GROUP TYPE, AGENT NO, BILLING PERIOD, INVOICE DATE, RECONCILIED DATE, CURRENT MONTH PREMIUM, PRIOR PERIOR ADJ'S, PLAN_ID, HEALTH PLAN PREMIUM, CAL COBRA FEES, RISK ADJ WITHHELD, HEALTH PLAN PREMIUMS - GROSS ADD: CAL COBRA FEES LESS: RISK ADJUSTMENT WITHHELD HEALTH PLAN PREMIUMS - NET AGENT COMMISSIONS FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED GROUP DIRECT FEES FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED ADMINISTRATIVE FEES FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED LATE FEES REINSTATEMENT FEES NSF FEES COBRA FEES VARIANCE +/−$2.00 OTHER FEES TOTAL PREMIUM RISK ADJUSTMENT PAYABLE (MEMO) MEMBERS MEDICAL DENTAL VISION CAM

4.4.10. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)010 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_010 Report Name Billing Distribution (Carrier Level) Purpose of To report on distribution on amount and member counts Report appearing on invoices generated during the month. Delivery To CFO, Manager Finance Frequency Monthly, Adhoc Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated, Manual Manual Input to report From Date To Date Output of the HEALTH PLAN PREMIUMS - GROSS Report ADD: CAL COBRA FEES LESS: RISK ADJUSTMENT WITHHELD HEALTH PLAN PREMIUMS - NET AGENT COMMISSIONS FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED GROUP DIRECT FEES FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED ADMINISTRATIVE FEES FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED LATE FEES REINSTATEMENT FEES NSF FEES COBRA FEES VARIANCE +/−$2.00 OTHER FEES TOTAL PREMIUM RISK ADJUSTMENT PAYABLE (MEMO) MEMBERS MEDICAL DENTAL VISION CAM

4.4.11. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)011 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_011 Report Name Billing Distribution Detail (Group Level) Purpose of To report on distribution on amount and member counts Report appearing on invoices generated during the month. This is done for the individual group Delivery To CFO, Manager Finance Frequency Monthly, Adhoc Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated, Manual Manual Input to report From Date To Date Output of the GROUP NO, Report GROUP NAME, GROUP EFF_DATE, GROUP TYPE, AGENT NO, BILLING PERIOD, INVOICE DATE, RECONCILIED DATE, CURRENT MONTH PREMIUM, PRIOR PERIOR ADJ'S, PLAN_ID, HEALTH PLAN PREMIUM, CAL COBRA FEES, RISK ADJ WITHHELD, HEALTH PLAN PREMIUMS - GROSS ADD: CAL COBRA FEES LESS: RISK ADJUSTMENT WITHHELD HEALTH PLAN PREMIUMS - NET AGENT COMMISSIONS FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED GROUP DIRECT FEES FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED ADMINISTRATIVE FEES FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED LATE FEES REINSTATEMENT FEES NSF FEES COBRA FEES VARIANCE +/−$2.00 OTHER FEES TOTAL PREMIUM RISK ADJUSTMENT PAYABLE (MEMO) MEMBERS MEDICAL DENTAL VISION CAM

4.4.12. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)012 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_012 Report Name Cash balancing (Carrier Level) Purpose of To report on distribution of the Dollars associated with Report all the invoices reconciled during the current period (Week, Month). Delivery To CFO, Manager Finance Frequency Monthly, Weekly, Adhoc Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated, Manual Manual Input to report From Date To Date Output of the HEALTH PLAN PREMIUMS - GROSS Report ADD: CAL COBRA FEES LESS: RISK ADJUSTMENT WITHHELD HEALTH PLAN PREMIUMS - NET AGENT COMMISSIONS FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED GROUP DIRECT FEES FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED ADMINISTRATIVE FEES FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED LATE FEES REINSTATEMENT FEES NSF FEES COBRA FEES VARIANCE +/−$2.00 OTHER FEES TOTAL PREMIUM RISK ADJUSTMENT PAYABLE (MEMO) MEMBERS MEDICAL DENTAL VISION CAM

4.4.13. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)013 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_013 Report Name Cash balancing (Group Level) Purpose of To report on distribution of the Dollars associated with Report all the invoices reconciled during the current period (Week, Month) for individual benefit level. Delivery To CFO, Manager Finance Frequency Monthly, Weekly, Adhoc Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated, Manual Manual Input to report From Date To Date Output of the GROUP NO, Report GROUP NAME, GROUP EFF_DATE, GROUP TYPE, AGENT NO, BILLING PERIOD, INVOICE DATE, RECONCILIED DATE, CURRENT MONTH PREMIUM, PRIOR PERIOR ADJ'S, PLAN_ID HEALTH PLAN PREMIUM, CAL COBRA FEES, RISK ADJ WITHHELD, HEALTH PLAN PREMIUMS - GROSS ADD: CAL COBRA FEES LESS: RISK ADJUSTMENT WITHHELD HEALTH PLAN PREMIUMS - NET AGENT COMMISSIONS FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED GROUP DIRECT FEES FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED ADMINISTRATIVE FEES FLAT FEES MEDICAL - NON-BLENDED DENTAL - NON-BLENDED MEDICAL - BLENDED DENTAL - BLENDED VISION - BLENDED CAM - BLENDED LATE FEES REINSTATEMENT FEES NSF FEES COBRA FEES VARIANCE +/−$2.00 OTHER FEES TOTAL PREMIUM RISK ADJUSTMENT PAYABLE (MEMO) MEMBERS MEDICAL DENTAL VISION CAM

4.4.14. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)014 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_014 Report Name Un Reconciled Cash Purpose of To report on List of unreconciled cash items at the end Report of the month. Delivery To CFO, Manager Finance Frequency Monthly, Weekly, Adhoc Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated, Manual Manual Input to report Start Date End Date Output of the Crec No, Group No, Date, Amount, Status, Term Date Report

4.4.15. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)015 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_015 Report Name Cash Receipt Report Purpose of To report on List of cash items in each cash batch Report Delivery To CFO, Manager Finance Frequency Monthly, Weekly, Adhoc Mode of Email Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Batch Number Output of the ID, Date, Check No, Amount, Rec (Reconciled), Group Report ID and Group name.

4.4.16. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)016 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_016 Report Name Group and Premium transmitted to the Carrier Purpose of To report on the Groups and the premium transmitted Report to the carriers based on the member. (Premium Transmission based on members Delivery To GMS, Finance Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Start Date End Date Output of the Employer Tax ID, Group ID, Employer Tax ID, Report Employee ID, Carrier ID, Year ID, Plan Code, Premium Code, Premium Billed Amt (as Sent), Premium Billed Amt (Translated), Premium Applied Date, Premium Due Date, Geographic Area.

4.4.17. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)017 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_017 Report Name Employee Level Adjustments based on Changes Purpose of To report on the employee level adjustments based on Report changes. (Employee Add On, Employee Term, Dependent Add On, Dependent Term, Change of Benefit Level, Change of Coverage Choice (Employee Only, Employee Spouse etc.) Delivery To GMS, Finance Frequency Adhoc Mode of none Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Start Date End Date Output of the Group ID, Group Name, Employee ID, Employee SSN, Report Adjustment Amount, Effective Date, Adjustment Period, Adjustment Type, Adjustment Status.

4.4.18. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)018 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_018 Report Name Fees Applied or Waived on Group Level Purpose of To report on all types of fees applied and or waived for a Report specific group during the defined period. Delivery To GMS, Finance Frequency Adhoc Mode of none Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Start Date End Date Output of the Group ID, Group Name, Fees Type, Fees Amount, Report Invoice Number, Invoice Date, Reconciliation Status.

4.4.19. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)019 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_019 Report Name Premium History on Group/Employee Level Purpose of To report on the premium collected from group (broken Report down to employee) up to date Delivery To GMS, Finance Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Group ID Output of the Invoice ID, Invoice Date, Group ID, Total Inv, Report Total Due.

4.4.20. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)020 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_020 Report Name Group Not paid “Accounts receivable total by Group” Purpose of To report on the groups not paid - Sort by Agent Report Delivery To GMS, Finance Frequency Adhoc Mode of none Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Output of the Agent ID, Agent Name, Invoice Amount Due, Period Report Outstanding, Group ID, Group Name.

4.4.21. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)021 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_021 Report Name Group paid short Purpose of To report on the groups paid short - Sort by Agent Report Delivery To GMS, Finance Frequency Adhoc Mode of none Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Output of the Agent ID, Agent Name, Amount Due, Period Report Outstanding, Group ID, Group Name, Amount Received, Amount Received, Amount short, Due Date.

4.4.22. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)022 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_022 Report Name Group for Refund Purpose of To report on the groups for Refund Report Delivery To GMS, Finance Frequency Adhoc Mode of none Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Output of the Group ID, Group name, Agent ID, Agent name, Report Refund Amount, reasons for Refund.

4.4.23. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)025 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_025 Report Name Prepaid Commission Purpose of To report on distribution of next month's invoices Report reconciled and paid in current Delivery To CFO, Manager Finance Frequency Monthly, Adhoc Mode of email Delivery Output Format XL, HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated/Manual Manual Input to report Year Month Output of the Group ID, Group Effective Date, Group Type, Bill Report Period, Invoice Date, Reconciled Date, Flat Fees, Medical Blended, Other, Medical Member Fees, Dental Blended, Dental Member Fees, Vision Blended, CAM Blended, Total.

4.4.24. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)026 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_026 Report Name Un Applied (Open) Commission Adjustment Purpose of To report on commission adjustments to Apply to Report the next commission run. (These are not yet applied and may change) Delivery To CFO, Commission Specialist Frequency Adhoc Mode of none Delivery Output Format XL/HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Start Date End Date Output of the Commission Adjustment ID, Date of Adjustment, Type Report (1099, Amount, Both), Adjustment Amount, Description, Agent name and Agent ID

4.4.25. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)027 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_027 Report Name Invoice and Payment History Purpose of To report on invoice and payment history and date both Report reconciled Delivery To GMS and Finance Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Group ID Output of the Type, Date, Amount, Reconciled Report

4.4.26. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)028 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_028 Report Name Commission Register Purpose of To report on the results of semi monthly Commission run Report Delivery To Commission Specialist and CFO Frequency Semi monthly after Commission Run Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Commission Period Output of the Check Number, Check Date, Check Amount, Report Commission Amount, prior balance Forward amount, Commission Fees, Total Adjustment, 1099 Amount, B/F Amount, Agent Id, Commission period, Commission payee (B/F - Balance Forward usually relating to negative balance)

4.4.27. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)029 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_029 Report Name Summary of unpaid Commission Purpose of To preview all commission to be paid this period. Report Includes current period and those payable from the prior periods (previously pended). Sum of Current amount will be equal to the cash balance report for the commissions for the same period. Delivery To Commission Specialist and CFO Frequency Run after each Commission Run Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL User Interface no Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Commission Period Output of the Agent ID, Commission payee, type, Period End Date, Report Period, Commission fees.

4.4.28. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)031 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_031 Report Name Agent License Expiration date Purpose of To report on agent and their license expiration date Report Delivery To Commission specialist Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Date Output of the Agent ID, Agent Name, Effective Date, Address, City, Report Phone, License No, Expiration Date, Status

4.4.29. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)032 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_032 Report Name Listing of groups by Agent Purpose of To report on list of all groups associated with an agent Report sort by status. Delivery To Commission specialist, GMS, Finance and CFO Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Agent ID Output of the Group Id, Group Name, Effective Date, Group Report Status, Agent id, Agent Name.

4.4.30. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)033 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_033 Report Name Listing of an agent's groups and reconciliation history for the last 4 months invoices with current commission payable. Purpose of To report on the group's recent history, agent and total Report commission payable by agent and to show what commissions are currently payable. (Should be able to sort) Delivery To Commission specialist, GMS, Finance and CFO and agent Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Date Agent ID Output of the Agent Id, Agent Name, Agent License, Group Id, Group Report Name, Enrolled Status, Invoices For 30 Days, Invoices For 60 Days, Invoices For 90 Days, Invoices For 120 Days,

4.4.31. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)035 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_035 Report Name Cash Extract Purpose of To report on individual payments entered to identify Report and trace on group level Delivery To GMS, Finance Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Start Date End Date Output of the Cash Receipt Id, Group Id, Cash Rec Date, Amount, Report Batch, Batch Date

4.4.32. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)036 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_036 Report Name New Business Purpose of To report all new business entered, by day Report Delivery To Customer Service, Finance, Management Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Start Date End Date Output of the Group ID, Group Name, Date Received, Check Report Amount, Effective Date, Status

4.4.33. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)038 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_038 Report Name Operating Account Daily cash Activity Purpose of To summarize cash activity in system and Report through the bank Deliver To Finance, Accounting manager, CFO Frequency Monthly, Adhoc Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual/Auto Manual Input to report Date Output of the Date, Manual Batch, NSF Batch, Returns Batch, Positive Report Transfer, Negative Transfer, Lockbox Check, Auto-Batch EFT, Direct Deposit, Wire Transfer, CC Over Phone, Auto-Batch Credit Card, Online Credit Card, TR to 4159 297506, TR to 4159 297456, Interest Received

4.4.34. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)040 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_040 Report Name Recap pf A/R & A/P Purpose of To summarize for entry to financials Report Delivery To Accounting Manager, CFO Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL HTML User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Auto Manual Input to report Bill Period Output of the Code Number, Carrier, Un reconciled, Report Reconciled/Unbilled, Total

4.4.35. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)041 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_041 Report Name Deferred revenue & Expense & Worksheet for journal entries Purpose of To itemize amounts for deferred revenue and expenses Report (for financials) and journal entries for these. Delivery To Accounting Manager, CFO Frequency Monthly Mode of Email Delivery Output Format XL HTML User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Auto Manual Input to report Output of the Account No, Description, Deferred Revenue Report

4.4.36. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)042 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_042 Report Name Check with Commission Statement Purpose of To pay agents and report commission activity for a Report period. Delivery To Mail house (electronically), agents Frequency Semi-Monthly Mode of None Delivery Output Format Paper check, HTML, electronic file to mail house. User Interface No Required Yes/ No Automated or Automated Manual Input to report Agent ID, Commission Period Output of the Group Id, Group Name, Month Paid, Effective Date, Report Product Type, Total Member, Split Percentage, Flat Fee, PM Fee, Total Fees, Monthly Premium, % Com, 1099 Amount.

4.4.37. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_FI_(—)044 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_FI_044 Report Name Finance Transmission Status Purpose of This report is used to show the status for the Report transmission for various external transmissions for a specified duration Delivery To IT Frequency Non periodic Mode of None Delivery Output Format XL or HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report From Date To Date Output of the Transmission Time and Date, Process Period, Data Report Format Transmission Type, File Size, Record Count, Status.

4.5. Module Name: Miscellaneous (Security, Work Group, Supply Request and Associates)

4.5.1. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_MISC_(—)001 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_MISC_001 Report Name User Access right report from Security Purpose of This report is used to provide information on the user Report name, user roles, user groups and access rights Delivery To All BPI Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report User ID Output of the User ID, User name, User roles, User group, Resource, Report Access rights.

4.5.2. Report ID:BPI_CAS_REP_MISC_(—)002 Report ID BPI_CAS_REP_MISC_002 Report Name Report on Work group Purpose of This report is used to provide information on the work Report groups and the Groups and member counts per work group Delivery To All BPI Frequency Adhoc Mode of None Delivery Output Format HTML User Interface Yes Required Yes/ No Automated or Manual Manual Input to report Work group ID Output of the Work Group ID, Work Group Name, Group Count, Report Member Count

5. Interface Flow

This outlines the menu for the reports. (See Figure L-3)

6. Data Structures

Not Applicable Data Element Name Data Element Type

6.1. Back End Validations

Not applicable Field Element Name Back End Validation

7. Non-Functional Requirements Non Functional Requirement Details

8. Access Control List User ID Job Description Functionality Access Level

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification Campaign Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_SM—01 Version: <1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Nov. 24, 2001 Ramamoorthi Mahalingam 1.0 Initial Version Dec. 03, 2001 Ramamoorthi Mahalingam 1.1 Updated Version Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Process Description & Flow 5

2.2. Process Flow Diagram 5

3. User Interface 7

3.1. User Interface Screeens 7

3.1.1. Screen ID's 7

3.1.2. User Interface ID: Source Type 7

3.1.3. User Interface ID: Source Sub Type 10

3.1.4. User Interface ID: Campaign Master-Create 13

3.1.5. User Interface ID: Modify Campaign Master 16

3.1.6. User Interface ID: View Campaign Master 20

3.1.7. Screen Flow 24

4. Business Rule Mapping 26

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

This functional specification document addresses the part of the sales and marketing system that would assign and track the marketing campaigns, which are made by BPI as part of their marketing efforts.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_SM.DOC Sales & Marketing BPI_SCOPE_SM_01 Create Sales Rep Master

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1. Process Description & Flow

A marketing campaign is an initiative where an identifiable segment of potential employer groups are targeted through the media like the radio, newspaper, mailers etc. Benefit Partners organizes for the marketing campaigns through third parties or by itself periodically.

The details of a campaign initiative are captured in the system through the campaign master.

The campaign master provides information on the campaign, duration and the personnel associated with the campaign. The media through which a campaign is done is captured in the system using the source type and source subtype.

The source type defines the media through which a campaign can be conducted and the source sub type provides the information on the subcategory that may come under the source type.

The source type and source sub type are configurable and must be created in sequence of source type followed by source subtype. For associated source type and source subtype for a campaign, the details get reflected on the campaign master only if it is captured prior to creation the campaign master.

Creation and modification of a campaign master leads to generation of email to the internal and external sales reps.

The source type can be used as an input for marketing methods in the agent profile and as source in the employer group master on enrollment.

The responses received from a marketing campaign are captured in Employer Group Master.

This would typically help in analyzing the responses made to the marketing campaign and also provide necessary tracking information for future market campaign planning and decision-making on the effectiveness of the campaign. This would provide a tracking mechanism that would measure the affect that an ad or ad campaign has on brand and/or company awareness, interest, attitude and enrollment conversions.

The internal sales rep makes a request for the welcome packets through the supply request

The flow diagram describes a typical flow on a campaign. The source type, source subtype and campaign can also be modified, viewed and inactivated.

2.2. Process Flow Diagram (See Figure M-1)

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Screen ID's Screen ID Corresponding HTML (SID) Screen Name File Name utl.campaign.sourcetype Source type /bpi/cas/marketing/ campaign/SourceType.jsp utl.campaign.sourcesubtype Source /bpi/cas/marketing/ sub type campaign/SourceSubType.jsp utl.campaign.create Campaign /bpi/cas/marketing/campaign/ CampaignMaster.jsp utl.campaign.search Search /bpi/cas/marketing/campaign/ Campaign CampaignSearch.jsp utl.campaign.view View /bpi/cas/marketing/campaign/ Campaign CampaignView.jsp

3.1.2. User Interface ID: Source Type

3.1.2.1. Screen name: Source Type (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)001_(—)001) (See Figure M-2)

3.1.2.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being “Source “Source Type” navigated Type” Source Type Text Source Type Text For “Source Type” Source Type Entry Field Source Type Entry field for entering the source type Entry Field Entry Field Input Source Text Input Source Text for “Input Source” Input Source List Input Source List with values Yes/No - Default No List List Add HTML Button Add Button for adding the Source Type/Input Source information in to the HTML table. Changes with label “Modify” when the row in the table is on edit mode. Table HTML table Table For displaying all the information added by pressing the add button, in the form of rows, for every add operation/Rows retrieved from the permanent repository Delete Button Delete To delete the rows checked (HTML Button) Check All Text Link Check All To check all the check boxes in the table Clear All Text Link Clear All To un check all the check boxes checked in the table/does not function when all the checkboxes in the table are unchecked Delete Check box Delete To check the items for deletion Edit Button Edit To edit the rows entered by “Add”/ (HTML “Modify”/displayed from permanent Button) repository against the row selected for editing Save Button Save Save the information to the repository (HTML Submit button) Cancel Button Cancel Reset information as described in the scenarios

3.1.2.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Source Mandatory Entry When the Add HTML Button is Type Becomes non editable when on modify mode pressed with an empty entry on the Entry for data from permanent repository source type entry field, an Error Field Dialog Box pops up with the message “Please enter the source type before adding to the table” with “yes” option On press of Yes Button, The cursor must be placed on the source type entry field Input Default - No Not Applicable Source List Add On Clicking the add button or pressing the When the Add HTML Button is enter key field with the cursor positioned on the pressed with an empty entry on the Add button, the data gets added to the table. source type entry field, an Error Validation checks are done to not allow null Dialog Box pops up with the message value on the source type entry field. “Please enter the source type before Must not allow duplicate entries on the source adding to the table” with “yes” option. type. On press of Yes Button, The cursor Must not allow the length of the field entry to go must be placed on the source entry beyond as per the database design for the field column For duplicate entries, Error dialog box - “Duplicate values not allowed. Please enter again” Modify On Clicking modify button or the pressing the None enter key field with the cursor position on the modify button, The data gets added to the table. Table Should have column header and each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. i.e. First row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of any text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. The letters must be green in color for the rows retrieved from the permanent repository and red for the rows in temporary storage. All the letters of the row on edit must be in dark gray. Delete Should function with enter key cursor Error Dialog Box: “Please choose the positioned on the “Delete” button or on mouse row or rows to be deleted.” with “yes” click option Delete button should work on multiple deletes based on the check box or boxes selected. If the user clicks on the delete button without checking any of the check box should throw error message. Success: Deletes the row or rows from the table (temporary storage) Check On clicking the “Check All” link should check all Not Applicable All the check boxes in the HTML table. Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link should uncheck Not Applicable all the checked check boxes in the HTML table. Edit Should function with Enter Key Cursor positioned on the “Edit” button or on mouse click. Refer Interface flow on scenarios - “edit data” Save Should function with enter key cursor Not Applicable positioned on the “Save” button or on mouse click. On saving the data the data gets saved to the permanent repository. Cancel All the data entered is reset with empty/initial Not Applicable values in the data entry fields as the case may be (Text Field, List etc). If a row is already modified and added to the table on the screen and the Cancel button is pressed, the row remains with the modified values Browser When a user tries to close the window with out Error Dialog box message: “Do you Window saving data into the permanent repository, a want to save all changes before dialog box pops up closing/leaving the window? “with a “Yes” and “No” option. On press of “Yes” leads to saving of information and “No” leads to the source type screen with the original values

3.1.3. User Interface ID: Source Sub Type

3.1.3.1. Screen name: Source Sub Type (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)001_(—)002) (See Figure M-3)

3.1.3.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being “Source Sub “Source Sub navigated Type” Type” Source Type Text Source Type Text For “Source Type” Source Type Non Editable Source Type Search with a List of all active source types List field with List retrieved from the permanent repository. search Source Sub Text Source Sub Text For “Source Sub Type” Type Type Source Sub Entry Field Source Sub Entry field for entering the source sub type Type Entry Type Entry Field Field Description Text Description Text for “Description” Description Entry Field Description Entry field for entering the description Entry Field Entry Field Add HTML Button Add Button for adding the Source Type/Source Sub Type information in to the HTML table. Changes with label “Modify” when the row in the table is on edit mode. Table HTML table Table For displaying all the information added by pressing the add button in the form of rows, for every add operation/rows retrieved from the permanent repository Delete Button Delete To delete the rows checked (HTML Button) Check All Text Link Check All To check all the check boxes in the table Clear All Text Link Clear All To un check all the check boxes checked in the table/does not function when all the checkboxes in the table are unchecked Delete Check box Delete To check the items for deletion Edit Button Edit To edit the rows entered by “Add”, “Modify”, (HTML displayed from permanent repository against Button) the row selected for editing Save Button Save Save the information to the repository (HTML Button) Cancel Button Cancel Cancel information as described in the scenarios

3.1.3.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Source Mandatory Entry When the Add/Modify HTML Button Sub Becomes non editable when on modify mode is pressed with an empty entry on the Type for data from permanent repository source sub type entry field, an Error Entry Dialog Box pops up with the Field message “Please enter the source sub type before adding to the table” with “yes” option On press of Yes Button, The cursor must be placed on the source sub type entry field Source Default - “Choose One” with list of all active When the Add/Modify HTML Button Type source types is pressed without choosing a source List Becomes non editable when on modify mode type, an Error Dialog Box pops up for data from permanent repository with the message “Please choose the source type before adding to the table” with “yes” option On press of Yes Button, The user is allowed to choose a source type with the original values still available for the source sub type. Add On Clicking add button or the pressing the When the Add HTML Button is enter key field with the cursor position on the pressed with an empty entry on the Add button, The data gets added to the table. source sub type entry field, an Error Validation checks are done to not allow null Dialog Box pops up with the value on the source sub type entry field. message “Please enter the source Must not allow duplicate entries for a sub type before adding to the table” combination of source type and source subtype with “yes” option. Must not allow the length of the field entry to go When the Add HTML Button is beyond as per the database design for the pressed without choosing a source column type, an Error Dialog Box pops up with the message “Please choose the source type before adding to the table” with “yes” option For duplicate entries, Error dialog box - “Duplicate values not allowed. Please enter again” Modify On Clicking Modify button or the pressing the When the “Modify” HTML Button is enter key field with the cursor position on the pressed with an empty entry on the Modify button, the data gets added to the table. source sub type entry field, an Error Validation checks are done to not allow null Dialog Box pops up with the value on the source sub type entry field message “Please enter the source Must not allow duplicate entries for a sub type before adding to the table” combination of source type and source subtype with “yes” option. Must not allow the length of the field entry to go On press of Yes Button, The cursor beyond as per the database design for the must be placed on the source entry column field For duplicate entries, Error dialog box - “Duplicate values not allowed. Please enter again” Table Should have column header and each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. i.e. First row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of any text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. The letters must be green in color for the rows retrieved from the permanent repository and red for the rows in temporary storage. All the letters of the row on edit must be in dark gray. Delete Should function with enter key cursor Error Dialog Box: “Please choose positioned on the “Delete” button or on mouse the row or rows to be deleted.” with click “yes” option Delete button should work on multiple deletes based on the check box or boxes selected. If the user clicks on the delete button without checking any of the check box should throw error message. Success: Deletes the row or rows from the table (temporary storage) Check On clicking the “Check All” link should check all Not Applicable All the check boxes in the HTML table. Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link should uncheck Not Applicable all the checked check boxes in the HTML table. Edit Should function with Enter Key Cursor positioned on the “Edit” button or on mouse click. Refer Interface flow on (source subtype) scenarios - “edit data” Save Should function with enter key cursor Not Applicable positioned on the “Save” button or on mouse click. On saving the data the data gets saved to the permanent repository. Cancel All the data entered is Cancel with empty/initial Not Applicable values in the data entry fields as the case may be (Text Field, List etc). If a row is already modified and added to the table on the screen and the Cancel button is pressed, the row remains with the modified values

3.1.4. User Interface ID: Campaign Master—Create

3.1.4.1. Screen name: Campaign Master—Create (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)001_(—)003) (See Figure M-4)

3.1.4.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being “Campaign “Campaign navigated Master” Master” Campaign Text Campaign Text For “Campaign Name” Name Name Campaign Entry field Campaign Entry field for entering the campaign name Name Name Entry Field Entry Field Description Text Description Text for “Description” Description Entry Field Description Entry field for entering the description Entry Field Entry Field Source Type Text Source Type Text for “Source Type” Source Type Non Editable Source Type Provides a list of active source types Field with Search Sub Type Text Sub Type Text for “Source Sub Type” Source Sub Non editable Source Sub Provides a List of active source subtypes for Type Field with Type a selected source type Search Import HTML Button Import HTML Button with Import Label leads to import screen for importing the data for the campaign data. Associated Text Associated Text for “Associated Workgroups” Workgroups Workgroups Associated Combo Box Associated Contains the agent list added on selection Workgroups Workgroups from the “Associated Workgroups”-Child Combo Box Combo Box work groups available Associated List Associated List of Active workgroups - child work groups Workgroups Workgroups from database List List Duration Text Duration Text for “Duration” From Date Text From Date Text for “From” To Date Text To Date Text for “To” From Date Calendar From Date Calendar for From Date To Date Calendar To Date Calendar for To Date Save HTML Button Save Button for saving the data

3.1.4.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Campaign Mandatory Entry When the “Save” HTML Button is Name pressed with an empty entry on the Entry campaign name, an Error Dialog Box Field pops up with the message “Please enter the Campaign Name” with “yes” option. On press of Yes Button, The cursor must be placed on the campaign name entry field Import Must be visible only if the source type Button selected has input source option as yes Save On clicking the save button or pressing the When the save HTML Button is enter key field with the cursor positioned on pressed with an empty entry on the the save button, The data gets inserted to the Campaign, an error dialog box pops permanent repository. up with the message “Please enter Validation checks are done to not allow null the campaign name” If campaign value on the campaign name. name is not filled up and placement Must not allow duplicate entries for a of cursor in respective field. combination of campaign for a from date and For duplicate entries, Error dialog to date for a combination of source type and box - “Duplicate values not allowed. source subtype Please enter again” Must not allow the length of the field entry to For Invalid dates (from date - beyond - go beyond as per the database design for the to date) or (To date - before - column from date) - Error dialog box - Must choose the Source Type, Sub Type. “Please check the validity of from From date must not be less than the system and to dates” with Yes option date - caution message For invalid dates (from date, to date From date must not be beyond the to date or less than the system date)- caution to date must not be before the from date. message in an error dialog box - To date must not be lesser than system date - “Dates selected is before the system caution message date - is it valid entry?” with yes and no option. If Yes - acceptable and if No - not acceptable. If the source type is not selected, then on press of the save button leads to error dialog box with error message “Choose Source Type” with Yes option If the source subtype is not selected, then on press of the save button leads to the error dialog box with error message “choose the source subtype” with Yes option On press of Yes on both cases, goes to the screen with the original values and enables the user to choose the Source Type or Source Subtype

3.1.5. User Interface ID: Modify Campaign Master

3.1.5.1. Screen name: Modify Campaign Master

Step1 (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)001_(—)004) (See Figure M-5)

-   -   Step 2 (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)001_(—)005) (See Figure M-6)

3.1.5.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Step-1: Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the “Search “Search screen being navigated Campaign Campaign Master” Master” Campaign Text Campaign Text For “Campaign Name” Name Name Campaign Entry Campaign Text field for entering Name Field Name Campaign name. Campaign ID Text Campaign ID Text for Campaign Id Campaign ID Entry Campaign ID Text field for entering Field campaign id Search Button Search Search for Campaigns Cancel Button Cancel Cancel the operation Modify Button Modify To edit the current record View/Delete Button View/Delete To View the current record

Step-2: Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being “Modify “Modify navigated Campaign Campaign Master” Master” Campaign Text Campaign Text For “Campaign Name” Name Name Campaign Entry Field Campaign Text for modifying Campaign name. Name Name Description Text Description Text for “Description” Description Entry Field Description Entry field for modifying the description Entry Field Entry Field Source Type Text Source Type Text for “Source Type” Source Type List Source Type Search feature with a List of active source types with default source type saved during the creation of the campaign master Sub Type Text Sub Type Text for “Source Sub Type” Source Sub List Source Sub Search feature with a list of active source Type Type subtypes for a selected source type with the default value of the sub type saved during the creation of the campaign master. Import HTML Button Import HTML Button for Import Associated Text Associated Text for “Associated Workgroups” workgroups workgroups Associated Combo Box Associated Contains the workgroups list added on Workgroups Workgroups selection from the “Associated Workgroups” - Combo Box Combo Box child workgroups available for category “Campaign”- saved during the creation of the campaign master Associated List Associated List of Active workgroups from database Workgroups Workgroups minus the workgroup list - child workgroups in List List the combo box Duration Text Duration Text for “Duration” From Date Text From Date Text for “From” To Date Text To Date Text for “To” From Date Calendar From Date Calendar for From Date and showing the date saved during the creation of the campaign master To Date Calendar To Date Calendar for To Date and showing the date saved during the creation of the campaign master Update HTML Button Modify Button for modifying data

3.1.5.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Modify in Must choose a campaign When the modify button is pressed step 1 without choosing the campaign, error screen dialog “Choose a campaign” with a yes option. Campaign Non Editable Campaign Name field Name Text Import Must be enabled only if the campaign Button master create record has an input source Modify On clicking “Modify” button or pressing the When the “Modify” HTML Button is enter key field with the cursor positioned on pressed with an empty entry on the the “Modify” button, the data gets modified to Campaign, an error dialog box pops the permanent repository and makes the data up with the message “Please enter of an input file of the previous entry inactive. the campaign name” Validation checks are done to not allow null For duplicate entries, Error dialog value on the campaign name. box - “Duplicate values not allowed. Must not allow duplicate entries for a Please enter again” combination of campaign for a from date and For Invalid dates (from date - beyond - to date for a combination of source type and to date) or (To date - before - source subtype from date) - Error dialog box - Must not allow the length of the field entry to “Please check the validity of from go beyond as per the database design for the and to dates” with Yes option column For invalid dates (from date, to date From date must not be less than the system less than the system date)- caution date - caution message message in an error dialog box - From date must not be beyond the to date or “Dates selected is before the system to date must not be before the from date. date - is it valid entry?” with yes and To date must not be lesser than system date - no option. If Yes - acceptable and if caution message No - not acceptable. If the source type is not selected, then on press of the save button leads to error dialog box with error message “Choose Source Type” with Yes option If the source subtype is not selected, then on press of the save button leads to the error dialog box with error message “choose the source subtype” with Yes option On press of Yes on both cases, goes to the screen with the original values and enables the user to choose the Source Type or Source Subtype

3.1.6. User Interface ID: View Campaign Master

This screen below captures the information for viewing campaign master

-   -   Step-1: Choose the campaign for viewing navigates to the view         campaign master screen     -   Step-2: View the campaign master

3.1.6.1. Screen Name: View Campaign Master (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)001_(—)006) (See Figure M-7)

(See Figure M-8)

3.1.6.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Step-1: Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for “Search “Search the screen being Campaign Campaign navigated Master” Master” Campaign Text Campaign Text For “Campaign Name Name Name” Campaign Entry Field Campaign Text field for entering Name Name Campaign name. Campaign ID Text Campaign ID Text for Campaign Id Campaign ID Entry Campaign ID Text field for entering Field campaign id Search Button Search Search for Campaigns Cancel Button Cancel Cancel the operation Modify Button Modify To edit the current record View/Delete Button View/Delete To View the current record

Step-2: Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being “View “View Campaign navigated Campaign Master” Master” Campaign Text Campaign Text For “Campaign Name” Name Name Campaign Text Campaign Non Editable field for viewing campaign Name Name name Description Text Description Text for “Description” Description Text Description Non Editable field for viewing the description Source Type Text Source Type Text for “Source Type” Source Type Text Source Type Non Editable field for viewing the Source Type Source Sub Text Source Sub Text for “Source Sub Type” Type Type Source Sub Text Source Sub Non Editable field for viewing the Source Sub Type Type Type Associated Text Associated Text for “Associated Workgroups” Workgroups Workgroups Associated Non Editable Associated Contains the Workgroup list active for the Workgroups Combo Box Workgroups campaign Combo Box Combo Box Duration Text Duration Text for “Duration” From Date Text From Date Text for “From” To Date Text To Date Text for “To” From Date Text From Date Shows the from date for the campaign To Date Text To Date Shows the to date for the campaign

3.1.6.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text View in Must choose a campaign When the view button is pressed step 1 without choosing the campaign, error screen dialog “Choose a campaign” with a yes option.

3.1.7. Screen Flow (See Figure M-9)

4. Business Rule Mapping

Source Type Activity Rules Create Source Type Should have unique Id for a source Type - 10 digits with an increment of 1, Say 0000000001, 0000000002, 0000000003 and so on.

Source Sub Type Activity Rules Create Source Sub Type Should have unique Id 10 digit for a source sub type with an increment of 1, Say 0000000001, 0000000002, 0000000003 and so on.

Campaign Activity Rules Create Campaign Should have unique Id 10 digit for a campaign with Master an increment of 1, Say 0000000001, 0000000002, 0000000003 and so on.

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification Sales Master Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_SM_02 Version: <1.022 Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Dec. 16, 2001 Ramamoorthi Mahalingam 1.0 Dec. 16, 2001 Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbrevations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Process Description & Flow 5

3. User Interface 6

3.1. User Interface Screens 6

3.1.1. Screen ID's 6

3.1.2. User Interface ID: Create Lead Master 6

3.1.3. User Interface ID: Search Lead Master 13

3.1.4. User Interface ID: Modify Lead Master 14

3.1.5. User Interface ID: View & Delete Lead Master 21

3.1.6. User Interface ID: Create Agent Master 27

3.1.7. User Interface ID: Search Agent Master 34

3.1.8. User Interface ID: Modify Agent Master 36

3.1.9. User Interface ID: View & Delete Agent Master 43

3.1.10. User Interface ID: Create Agency Master 49

3.1.11. User Interface ID: Search Agency Master 56

3.1.12. User Interface ID: Modify Agency Master 57

3.1.13. User Interface ID: View & Deleter Agency Master 63

3.1.14. User Interface Id: Lead Tracking 68

4. Business Rule Mapping 75

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

This functional specification document addresses the part of the sales and marketing system that would deal with creation of master records for sales like the Lead master, Agent/Agency master.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_SM_002 Agent Master BPI_SCOPE_SM_003 Agency Master BPI_SCOPE_SM_006 Lead Master

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1. Process Description & Flow (See FIG. 10)

The user creates the sales masters which shall include lead master, agent master and agency master and has the ability to view, delete and modify apart from create function.

-   -   user can navigate to the screens from the content area or from         the menus

The users also maintain tracking information of a lead in a lead master.

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Screen ID's

<List SID and the screen name and Corresponding HTML file for the screen. Corresponding HTML File Screen ID (SID) Screen Name Name sales.leadmaster.creategeninfo Lead Master Page 1 of 2 LeadMasterCreate1.jsp sales.leadmaster.createotherinfo Lead Master Page 2 of 2 LeadMasterCreate2.jsp sales.leadmaster.search Search Lead Master LeadMasterSearch.jsp sales.leadmaster.view View Lead Master LeadMasterView.jsp sales.agentmaster.creategeninfo Agent Master Page 1 of 2 AgentMasterCreate1.jsp sales.agentmaster.createotherinfo Agent Master Page 2 of 2 AgentMasterCreate2.jsp sales.agentmaster.search Search Agent Master AgentMasterSearch.jsp sales.agentmaster.view View Agent Master AgentMasterView.jsp sales.agencymaster.creategeninfo Agency Master Page 1 of 2 AgencyMasterCreategeninfo.jsp sales.agencymaster.createotherinfo Agency Master Page 2 of 2 AgencyMasterCreateotherinfo.jsp sales.agencymaster.search Search Agency Master AgencyMasterSearch.jsp sales.agencymaster.view View Agency Master AgencyMasterView.jsp sales.leadmaster.leadtrack Lead Tracking LeadTrack.jsp

3.1.2. User Interface ID: Create Lead Master

3.1.2.1. Screen Name: Create Lead Master (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)001, BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)002 & BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)003)

This screen below captures the information for creating lead master.

-   -   Step 1: Fill the mandatory information in page1. Click “Next” to         navigate to page2.     -   Step 2: Fill the mandatory information in page2 and click “Save”         to save the Lead Master data.     -   Step 3: Saving of Lead data takes you to Confirmation page.

Page1 (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)001) (See Figure M-11)

Page2 (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)002) (See Figure M-12)

Confirmation page (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)003) (See Figure M-13)

3.1.2.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Element Name Type Type Purpose Lead Type Text Lead Type Text showing “Lead Type” Group Type Text Group Type Text showing “Group Type” Group Type Select Feature Group Type To select “Group Type” Association ID Text Association ID Text showing “Association ID” Association ID Select Feature Association ID To select “Associations”, if the Group Type selected is either Guaranteed Association or Endorsed Association or PEO Association or Chamber Association. Member Type Text Member Type Text for “Member Type” Member Type Radio Button Member Type To select either Individual Member or Association Member if Group Type selected is a Guaranteed Association who offers both Individual and Association Member coverage Source Sub Text Source Sub Text for “Source Sub Type” Type Type Source Sub Non Editable Source Sub Search feature for a source Type Field Type Search Entry field Type Search Field Field Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “General “General Information” Information” Company Text Company Text for “Company Name”. Company Entry Field Company Entry field for company. DBA Text DBA Text for “DBA”. DBA Entry Field DBA Entry field for dba. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact “Contact Information” Information” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 1” “Contact - 1” Salutation Text Salutation Text for “Salutation” Salutation Select Feature Salutation Select feature for selecting a salutation. First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry Field for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn” Extn Entry Field Extn Entry Field for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Email Text Email Text for “Email” Email Entry Field Email Entry Field for Email. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 2” “Contact - 2” First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry Field for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn” Extn Entry Field Extn Entry Field for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Email Text Email Text for “Email” Next HTML Button Next Takes the user to next screen. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to original values Email Entry Field Email Entry Field for Email. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Associated “Associated Personnel” Personnel” None Radio None Default radio option. Agent Radio Agent Radio for associated agent Agent Non-Editable Agent Shows the number of associated agent. Text Agent-Popup Image Agent-Popup Clicking this will open a new window, using which user can assign agents for this Lead. Agency Radio Agency Radio for associated agency Agency Non-Editable Agency Shows the number of associated agency(s). Text Agency-Popup Image Agency-Popup Clicking this will open a new window, using which user can assign agency(s) for this Lead. Internal Text Internal Text for “Internal Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Internal Select Feature Internal Shows the internal workgroups. User can Workgroup Workgroup select a internal workgroup for this lead. BSS Rep Text BSS Rep Text for “BSS Rep” BSS Rep Select Feature BSS Rep Shows the BSS Rep (Associates) for the selected internal workgroup. User can select a BSS Rep for this Lead. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Past Plan “Past Plan Details” Details” Number of Text Number of Text for “Number of Employees” Employees Employees Number of Entry Field Number of Entry field for entering the number of Employees Employees employees Entry Field Entry Field Plan Type Text Plan Type Text for “Plan Type” Plan Type Drop Down List Plan Type List for selecting the Plan Type used by the entry field entry field company at present—Picks up values based on the plan types defined in the CM Module Current Text Current Carrier Text for “Current Carrier” Carrier Current Drop Down List Current Carrier List for selecting the current carrier—picks up Carrier Entry Entry field values from the list carriers available in the field CM Module Deductible Text Deductible Text for “Deductible” Deductible Entry Field Deductible Entry field for entering the Deductible at Entry field Entry field present Co Pay Text Co Pay Text for “Co Pay Amount” Amount Amount Co Pay Entry Field Co Pay Entry field for entering the Co Pay Amount at Amount Entry Amount Entry present field field Benefit level in Text Benefit level in Text for “Benefit Level In Network” network network Benefit Level Entry Field Benefit Level in Entry field for entering the current carrier in network network Entry Entry field field Benefit Level Text Benefit Level Text for “Benefit Level Out of Network” Out of Out of Network Network Benefit Level Entry Field Benefit Level Entry field for entering the Benefit level out of Out of Out of Network network Network Employer Text Employer Text for “Employer Contribution” Contribution Contribution Employer Entry Field Employer Entry field for entering the employer Contribution Contribution contribution Entry Field Entry Field Approximately Text Approximately Text for “Approximately Monthly Premium” Monthly Monthly Premium Premium Approximately Entry Field Approximately Entry field for entering the Approximately Monthly Monthly Monthly Premium at present. Premium Entry Premium Entry Field Field Renewal Date Text Renewal Date Text for “Renewal Date” Renewal Date Entry Field Renewal Date Entry field for entering Date. Renewal Date Image Renewal Date User Can click on this image and select the Image Image date using calendar window. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Other “Other Information” Information” Best Time to Text Best Time to Text for “Best Time to Call” Call Call Best Time to Entry field Best Time to entry field for entering the best time to call. Call Call Comments Text Comments Text for “Comments” Comments Entry field Comments Entry Field for the comments Entry Field Entry Field Mode of Text Mode of Text for “”Mode of Communication Communication Communication Mode Of List Mode Of List providing the list of mode of Communication Communication communication - Shall include Email, Fax, USPS Previous HTML Button Previous Takes user to the Previous page. Save HTML Button Save Saves the Data. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to original values

3.1.2.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Group Type Mandatory. Error Dialog Box on Save “Is Required”. Association For Guaranteed Association or Endorsed Error Dialog Box on Save “Is ID Association or PEO Association or Chamber Required” Association, Association is Mandatory Member Type For Guaranteed Association, Member Type is Mandatory Company Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Name Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes” Zip Mandatory. Accepts exactly 5 numeric digits. Error Dialog Box “Accepts exactly 5 digits number only”. Contact1 First Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Name Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes” Contact1 Zip Mandatory. Accepts exactly 5 numeric digits. Error Dialog Box “Accepts exactly 5 digits number only”. Internal Mandatory. Error Dialog on Save “Is workgroup Required”.

3.1.2.4. Screen Flow

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen: Scenario Description Next The User can navigate to the next screen (page2). Previous The User can navigate to the previous screen (page1). Save The system checks for all the validations for all the mandatory information filled up, the system successfully saves the data. Upon saving the data, shows a Confirmation page to the user. Cancel The User can have the information reset to the original values

3.1.3. User Interface ID: Search Lead Master

3.1.3.1. Screen Name: Search Lead Master (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)004)

This screen below captures the information for searching an existing “Lead”.

-   -   Step 1: Enter the mandatory lead information and click the         search button. This page will display the result of search. User         can choose a lead and navigate to either “Modify” screen or         “View/Delete” screen. (See Figure M-14)

3.1.3.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Name Element Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading “Lead “Lead for the screen Search” Search” Lead ID Text Lead ID Text For “Lead ID” Lead ID Entry Field Lead ID Entry field for lead id Lead Type Text Lead Type Text For “Lead ID” Lead Type Select Feature Lead Type Select Feature for selecting the Group Type First Name Text First Name Text For “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry field for First Name Last Name Text Last Name Entry field for Last Name Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry field for Last Name Company Text Company Text For “First “Company” Company Entry Field Company Entry field for Company Phone Text Phone Entry field for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry field for Phone Lead Button Radio Button Lead Button Used to select the lead for Radio Radio modifying or viewing/deleting. Modify HTML Button Modify Leads to the modify screen of the selected lead View/Delete HTML Button View/Delete Leads to the view/delete screen of the selected

3.1.3.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Lead ID Mandatory. Any one of the fields Error Dialog Box on Search in the search screen is mandatory. “Accepts Alphanumeric Accepts Alphanumeric values only values only.”

3.1.3.4. Screen Flow

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the search screen. Scenario Description Search The system checks for all the validations for all the mandatory information. Fetches the lead(s) that matches with the search conditions. Cancel Clears the search fields

3.1.4. User Interface ID: Modify Lead Master

3.1.4.1. Screen Name: Modify Lead Master (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)005, BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)006 & BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)007)

This screen below captures the information for modifying lead master.

-   -   Step-1: Using search screen (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)004),         search the available Lead(s).     -   Step-2: Select a Lead and click “Modify” to navigate to page1.     -   Step-3: Modify the lead information and click “Next” to navigate         you to page2.     -   Step-4: Click the “Save” to save the modified lead information.     -   Step-5: Saving of Lead data takes you to Confirmation page.

Page1 (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)005) (See Figure M-15)

Page2 (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)006) (See Figure M-16)

Confirmation Page (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)007) (See Figure M-17)

3.1.4.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Element Name Type Type Purpose Lead Type Text Lead Type Text showing “Lead Type” Group Type Text Group Type Text showing “Group Type” Group Type Select Feature Group Type To select “Group Type” Association ID Text Association ID Text showing “Association ID” Association ID Select Feature Association ID To select “Associations”, if the Group Type selected is either Guaranteed Association or Endorsed Association or PEO Association or Chamber Association. Member Type Text Member Type Text for “Member Type” Member Type Radio Button Member Type To select either Individual Member or Association Member if Group Type selected is a Guaranteed Association who offers both Individual and Association Member coverage Source Sub Text Source Sub Text for “Source Sub Type” Type Type Source Sub Non Editable Source Sub Search feature for a source Type Field Type Search Entry field Type Search Field Field Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “General “General Information” Information” Company Text Company Text for “Company Name”. Company Entry Field Company Entry field for company. DBA Text DBA Text for “DBA”. DBA Entry Field DBA Entry field for dba. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact “Contact Information” Information” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 1” “Contact - 1” Salutation Text Salutation Text for “Salutation” Salutation Select Feature Salutation Select feature for selecting a salutation. First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry Field for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn” Extn Entry Field Extn Entry Field for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Email Text Email Text for “Email” Email Entry Field Email Entry Field for Email. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 2” “Contact - 2” First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry Field for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn” Extn Entry Field Extn Entry Field for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Email Text Email Text for “Email” Next HTML Button Next Takes the user to next screen. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to original values Email Entry Field Email Entry Field for Email. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Associated “Associated Personnel” Personnel” None Radio None Default radio option. Agent Radio Agent Radio for associated agent Agent Non-Editable Agent Shows the number of associated agent. Text Agent-Popup Image Agent-Popup Clicking this will open a new window, using which user can assign agents for this Lead. Agency Radio Agency Radio for associated agency Agency Non-Editable Agency Shows the number of associated agency(s). Text Agency-Popup Image Agency-Popup Clicking this will open a new window, using which user can assign agency(s) for this Lead. Internal Text Internal Text for “Internal Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Internal Select Feature Internal Shows the internal workgroups. User can Workgroup Workgroup select a internal workgroup for this lead. BSS Rep Text BSS Rep Text for “BSS Rep” BSS Rep Select Feature BSS Rep Shows the BSS Rep (Associates) for the selected internal workgroup. User can select a BSS Rep for this Lead. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Past Plan “Past Plan Details” Details” Number of Text Number of Text for “Number of Employees” Employees Employees Number of Entry Field Number of Entry field for entering the number of Employees Employees employees Entry Field Entry Field Plan Type Text Plan Type Text for “Plan Type” Plan Type Drop Down List Plan Type List for selecting the Plan Type used by the entry field entry field company at present - Picks up values based on the plan types defined in the CM Module Current Text Current Carrier Text for “Current Carrier” Carrier Current Drop Down List Current Carrier List for selecting the current carrier - picks up Carrier Entry Entry field values from the list carriers available in the field CM Module Deductible Text Deductible Text for “Deductible” Deductible Entry Field Deductible Entry field for entering the Deductible at Entry field Entry field present Co Pay Text Co Pay Text for “Co Pay Amount” Amount Amount Co Pay Entry Field Co Pay Entry field for entering the Co Pay Amount at Amount Entry Amount Entry present field field Benefit level in Text Benefit level in Text for “Benefit Level In Network” network network Benefit Level Entry Field Benefit Level in Entry field for entering the current carrier in network network Entry Entry field field Benefit Level Text Benefit Level Text for “Benefit Level Out of Network” Out of Out of Network Network Benefit Level Entry Field Benefit Level Entry field for entering the Benefit level out of Out of Out of Network network Network Employer Text Employer Text for “Employer Contribution” Contribution Contribution Employer Entry Field Employer Entry field for entering the employer Contribution Contribution contribution Entry Field Entry Field Approximately Text Approximately Text for “Approximately Monthly Premium” Monthly Monthly Premium Premium Approximately Entry Field Approximately Entry field for entering the Approximately Monthly Monthly Monthly Premium at present. Premium Entry Premium Entry Field Field Renewal Date Text Renewal Date Text for “Renewal Date” Renewal Date Entry Field Renewal Date Entry field for entering Date. Renewal Date Image Renewal Date User Can click on this image and select the Image Image date using calendar window. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Other “Other Information” Information” Best Time to Text Best Time to Text for “Best Time to Call” Call Call Best Time to Entry field Best Time to entry field for entering the best time to call. Call Call Comments Text Comments Text for “Comments” Comments Entry field Comments Entry Field for the comments Entry Field Entry Field Mode of Text Mode of Text for “”Mode of Communication Communication Communication Mode Of List Mode Of List providing the list of mode of Communication Communication communication - Shall include Email, Fax, USPS Previous HTML Button Previous Takes user to the Previous page. Save HTML Button Save Saves the Data. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to original values

3.1.4.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Group Type Mandatory. Error Dialog Box on Save “Is Required”. Association For Guaranteed Association or Endorsed Error Dialog Box on Save “Is ID Association or PEO Association or Chamber Required” Association, Association is Mandatory Member Type For Guaranteed Association, Member Type is Mandatory Company Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Name Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes” Zip Mandatory. Accepts exactly 5 numeric digits. Error Dialog Box “Accepts exactly 5 digits number only”. Contact1 First Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Name Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes” Contact1 Zip Mandatory. Accepts exactly 5 numeric digits. Error Dialog Box “Accepts exactly 5 digits number only”. Internal Mandatory. Error Dialog on Save “Is workgroup Required”.

3.1.4.4. Screen Flow

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen: Scenario Description Next The User can navigate to the next screen (page2). Previous The User can navigate to the previous screen (page1). Save The system checks for all the validations for all the mandatory information filled up, the system successfully saves the data. Upon saving the data, shows a Confirmation page to the user. Cancel The User can have the information reset to the original values

3.1.5. User Interface ID: View & Delete Lead Master

3.1.5.1. Screen Name: View & Delete Lead Master (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)008 & BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)009)

This screen below captures the information for view/delete lead master.

-   -   Step-1: Using search screen (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)004),         search the available Lead(s).     -   Step-2: Select a Lead and click “View/Delete” to navigate to         view/delete page.     -   Step-3: Click the “Delete” to delete the lead information.     -   Step-4: Deletion of Lead data takes you to Confirmation page.     -   View/Delete Page (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)08) (See Figure M-18)     -   Confirmation Page (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)09) (See Figure         M-19)

DB Admin should only do Delete Lead Master. The “inactivation” of a Lead Master should change the status of Lead as “Dead”. The only other case for “Delete” as noted here would be to get rid of erroneous information added to the system; for this we should prompt for specific reasons as to why the Lead is being deleted. Upon deletion, the status of Lead is changed to “2” in DB.

3.1.5.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Lead ID Text Lead ID Text showin “Lead ID” Lead ID Read-only Text Lead ID Shows the value of “Lead ID” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Master “Master Information” Information” Group Type Text Group Type Text showing “Group Type” Group Type Read-only Text Group Type Shows the value of “Group Type” Association Text Association Text showing “Association ID” Type Type Association Read-only Text Association Shows the value of “Association Type” Type Type Member Type Text Member Type Text for “Member Type” Member Type Read-only Text Member Type Shows the value of “Member Type” Source Sub Text Source Sub Text for “Source Sub Type” Type Type Source Sub Read-only Text Source Sub Shows the value of “Source sub type” Type Search Type Search Field Field Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “General “General Information” Information” Company Text Company Text for “Company Name”. Company Read-only Text Company Shows the value of company. DBA Text DBA Text for “DBA”. DBA Read-only Text DBA Shows the value of dba. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Read-only Text Street Address Shows the value of street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Read-only Text Suite Shows the value of Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Read-only Text City Shows the value of City. State Text State Text for “State” State Read-only Text State Shows the value of state Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Read-only Text Zip Shows the value for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Read-only Text Phone Shows the value for Phone. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Read-only Text Fax Shows the value for Fax. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact “Contact Information” Information” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 1” “Contact - 1” Salutation Text Salutation Text for “Salutation” Salutation Read-only Text Salutation Shows the value for salutation. First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Read-only Text First Name Shows the value for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Read-only Text MI Shows the value for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Read-only Text Last Name Shows the value for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Read-only Text Street Address Shows the value for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Read-only Text Suite Shows the value for Suite. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Read-only Text Zip Shows the value for Zip. City Text City Text for “City” City Read-only Text City Shows the value for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Read-only Text State Shows the value for state Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Read-only Text Phone Shows the value for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn” Extn Read-only Text Extn Shows the value for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Read-only Text Fax Shows the value for Fax. Email Text Email Text for “Email” Email Read-only Text Email Shows the value for Email. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 2” “Contact - 2” First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Read-only Text First Name Shows the value for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Read-only Text MI Shows the value for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Read-only Text Last Name Shows the value for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Read-only Text Street Address Shows the value for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Read-only Text Suite Shows the value for Suite. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Read-only Text Zip Shows the value for Zip. City Text City Text for “City” City Read-only Text City Shows the value for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Read-only Text State Shows the value for State. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Read-only Text Phone Shows the value for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn” Extn Read-only Text Extn Shows the value for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Read-only Text Fax Shows the value for Fax. Email Text Email Text for “Email” Email Read-only Text Email Shows the value for Email. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Associated “Associated Personnel” Personnel” Agent Text Agent Text for “Agent” Agent Read-only Text Agent Shows the number of associated agent. Agency Text Agency Text for “Agency” Agency Read-only Text Agency Shows the number of associated agency(s). Internal Text Internal Text for “Internal Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Internal Read-only Text Internal Shows the value for internal workgroups. Workgroup Workgroup BSS Rep Text BSS Rep Text for “BSS Rep” BSS Rep Read-only Text BSS Rep Shows the value for BSS Rep (Associates). Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Past Plan “Past Plan Details” Details” Number of Text Number of Text for “Number of Employees” Employees Employees Number of Read-only Text Number of Shows the value for number of employees Employees Employees Entry Field Entry Field Plan Type Text Plan Type Text for “Plan Type” Plan Type Read-only Text Plan Type Shows the value for Plan Type. entry field entry field Current Text Current Carrier Text for “Current Carrier” Carrier Current Read-only Text Current Carrier Shows the value for current carrier Carrier Entry Entry field field Deductible Text Deductible Text for “Deductible” Deductible Read-only Text Deductible Shows the value for Deductible at present Entry field Entry field Co Pay Text Co Pay Text for “Co Pay Amount” Amount Amount Co Pay Read-only Text Co Pay Shows the value for Co Pay Amount at Amount Entry Amount Entry present field field Benefit level in Text Benefit level in Text for “Benefit Level In Network” network network Benefit Level Read-only Text Benefit Level in Shows the value for current carrier in network network Entry Entry field field Benefit Level Text Benefit Level Text for “Benefit Level Out of Network” Out of Out of Network Network Benefit Level Read-only Text Benefit Level Shows the value for Benefit level out of Out of Out of Network network Network Employer Text Employer Text for “Employer Contribution” Contribution Contribution Employer Read-only Text Employer Shows the value for employer contribution Contribution Contribution Entry Field Entry Field Approximately Text Approximately Text for “Approximately Monthly Premium” Monthly Monthly Premium Premium Approximately Read-only Text Approximately Shows the value for Monthly Premium at Monthly Monthly present. Premium Entry Premium Entry Field Field Renewal Date Text Renewal Date Text for “Renewal Date” Renewal Date Read-only Text Renewal Date Shows the value for Renewal Date. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Other “Other Information” Information” Best Time to Text Best Time to Text for “Best Time to Call” Call Call Best Time to Read-only Text Best Time to Shows the value for the best time to call. Call Call Comments Text Comments Text for “Comments” Comments Read-only Text Comments Shows the value for comments Entry Field Entry Field Mode of Text Mode of Text for “”Mode of Communication Communication Communication Mode Of Read-only Text Mode Of Shows the value for mode of communication Communication Communication New Lead HTML Button New Lead Takes the user to “Create Lead Master” screen Delete HTML Button Delete Deletes the Lead Master in database.

3.1.5.3. Front End Validations

None

3.1.5.4. Screen Flow

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the step2 screen. Scenario Description New Lead Used to Navigate to “Create Lead Master” screen. Delete Inactivates (Delete) the Record.

3.1.6. User Interface ID: Create Agent Master

3.1.6.1. ScreenName: CreateAgentMaster (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)010, BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)011 & BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)012)

This screen below captures the information for creating agent master.

-   -   Step-1: Fill the mandatory information in page1. Click “Next” to         navigate to page2.     -   Step-2: Fill the mandatory information in page2 and click “Save”         to save the Agent Master data.     -   Step-3: Saving of Agent data takes you to Confirmation page.

Page1 (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)010) (See Figure M-20)

Page2 (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)011) (See Figure M-21)

Confirmation page (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)012) (See Figure M-22) Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Agent “Agent Information” Information” First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry Field for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Company Text Company Text for “Company Name”. Name Name Company Entry Field Company Entry field for company. Name Name DBA Text DBA Text for “DBA”. DBA Entry Field DBA Entry field for dba. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Entry Field Extn. Entry Field for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Mode of Text Mode of Text for “Mode of Communication” communication communication Mode of Entry Field Mode of Entry Field for Mode of Communication. Communication Communication Gender Text Gender Text for “Gender” Gender Select Feature Gender Select feature for gender. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Entry Field Email Entry Field for “Email” Date of Birth Text Date of Birth Text for Email. Date of Birth Entry Field Date of Birth Entry Field for Date of Birth. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact “Contact Information” Information” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 1” “Contact - 1” Salutation Text Salutation Text for “Salutation” Salutation Select Feature Salutation Select feature for selecting a salutation. First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry Field for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Entry Field Extn. Entry Field for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Entry Field Email Entry Field for “Email” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 2” “Contact - 2” Salutation Text Salutation Text for “Salutation” Salutation Select Feature Salutation Select feature for selecting a salutation First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry Field for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Entry Field Extn. Entry Field for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Entry Field Email Entry Field for “Email” Next HTML Button Next Takes user to the Next page. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to original values Broker Type Text Broker Type Text for “Broker Type” Broker Type Radio Buttons Broker Type Statewide, Regional and Unknown (default) Sub Header Sub Header “Additional “Additional Preferences” Preferences” Exclude from Check box Exclude from If checked then Yes. Broadcast Broadcast Messaging Messaging Exclude from Check box Exclude from If checked then yes. overdue overdue premium premium notices notices Exclude from Check box Exclude from If checked then Yes Employee/Member Employee/Member Term Term Letters Letters Exclude from Check Box Exclude from If checked then Yes Employee/Member Employee/Member Add-on Add-on Term Letters Term Letters Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Associated “Associated Personnel” Personnel” Agent Text Agent Text for “Agent Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Agent Non-Editable Agent Shows the number of associated agent. Text Agent-Popup Image Agent-Popup Clicking this will open a new window, using which user can assign agents for this Lead. Agency Text Agency Text for “Agency Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Agency Non-Editable Agency Shows the number of associated agency(s). Text Agency-Popup Image Agency-Popup Clicking this will open a new window, using which user can assign agency(s) for this Lead. Internal Text Internal Text for “Internal Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Internal Select Feature Internal Shows the internal workgroups. User can Workgroup Workgroup select a internal workgroup for this lead. BSS Rep Text BSS Rep Text for “BSS Rep” BSS Rep Select Feature BSS Rep Shows the BSS Rep (Associates) for the selected internal workgroup. User can select a BSS Rep for this Lead. Sub Header Text Sub Header Text for License Information “License “License Information” Information” Tax ID/SSN Text Tax ID/SSN Text For “Tax ID/SSN” TaxID/SSN Entry field TaxID/SSN Entry field for entering the TAX ID/SSN Entry Field Entry Field License Text License Text for “License Number” Number Number License Calendar License Calendar Expiration Expiration E&O Number Text E&O Number Text for “E&O” E&O Number Entry Field E&O Number Entry field for E&O Number E&O Text E&O Text for “E & O Expiration List” Expiration Expiration E&O Editable E&O Calendar for E&O expiration calendar Expiration text/Calendar Expiration Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the subsection “Bank “Bank Information” Information” Preferred Mode Text Preferred Mode Text for “Preferred Mode of Payment” of Payment of Payment Preferred Mode Radio Button Preferred Mode Check or ACH of Payment of Payment Bank Name Text Bank Name Text for Bank Name Bank Name Entry Field Bank Name Entry field for Bank Name Account Text Account Text for Account Number Number Number Account Entry field Account Entry Field For Account Number Number Number Routing Text Routing Text for Routing Number Number Number Routing Entry field Routing Entry Field for Routing Number Number Number Account Type Text Account Type Text for Account Type Account Type Select feature Account Type Select feature to select the type of account Name on the Text Name on the Text for “Name on the account” Account Account Name on the Entry Field Name on the Entry field for “Name on the Account” Account Account Payee Name Text Payee Name Text for Payee Name Payee Name Entry field Payee Name Entry Field for Payee Name Requires Check Box Requires Check box for “requires special handling” if Special Special checked - means Yes Handling Handling Previous HTML Button Previous Takes user to the Previous page. Save HTML Button Save Saves the Data. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to original values

3.1.6.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Agent “Agent Information” Information” First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry Field for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Company Text Company Text for “Company Name”. Name Name Company Entry Field Company Entry field for company. Name Name DBA Text DBA Text for “DBA”. DBA Entry Field DBA Entry field for dba. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entr Field for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Entry Field Extn. Entry Field for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Mode of Text Mode of Text for “Mode of Communication” communication communication Mode of Entry Field Mode of Entry Field for Mode of Communication. Communication Communication Gender Text Gender Text for “Gender” Gender Select Feature Gender Select feature for gender. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Entry Field Email Entry Field for “Email” Date of Birth Text Date of Birth Text for Email. Date of Birth Entry Field Date of Birth Entry Field for Date of Birth. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact “Contact Information” Information” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 1” “Contact - 1” Salutation Text Salutation Text for “Salutation” Salutation Select Feature Salutation Select feature for selecting a salutation. First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry Field for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Entry Field Extn. Entry Field for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Entry Field Email Entry Field for “Email” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 2” “Contact - 2” Salutation Text Salutation Text for “Salutation” Salutation Select Feature Salutation Select feature for selecting a salutation. First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry Field for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Entry Field Extn. Entry Field for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Entry Field Email Entry Field for “Email” Next HTML Button Next Takes user to the Next page. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to original values Broker Type Text Broker Type Text for “Broker Type” Broker Type Radio Buttons Broker Type Statewide, Regional and Unknown (default) Sub Header Sub Header “Additional “Additional Preferences” Preferences” Exclude from Check box Exclude from If checked then Yes. Broadcast Broadcast Messaging Messaging Exclude from Check box Exclude from If checked then yes. overdue overdue premium premium notices notices Exclude from Check box Exclude from If checked then Yes Employee/Member Employee/Member Term Term Letters Letters Exclude from Check Box Exclude from If checked then Yes Employee/Member Employee/Member Add-on Add-on Term Letters Term Letters Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Associated “Associated Personnel” Personnel” Agent Text Agent Text for “Agent Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Agent Non-Editable Agent Shows the number of associated agent. Text Agent-Popup Image Agent-Popup Clicking this will open a new window, using which user can assign agents for this Lead. Agency Text Agency Text for “Agency Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Agency Non-Editable Agency Shows the number of associated agency(s). Text Agency-Popup Image Agency-Popup Clicking this will open a new window, using which user can assign agency(s) for this Lead. Internal Text Internal Text for “Internal Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Internal Select Feature Internal Shows the internal workgroups. User can Workgroup Workgroup select a internal workgroup for this lead. BSS Rep Text BSS Rep Text for “BSS Rep” BSS Rep Select Feature BSS Rep Shows the BSS Rep (Associates) for the selected internal workgroup. User can select a BSS Rep for this Lead. Sub Header Text Sub Header Text for License Information “License “License Information” Information” Tax ID/SSN Text Tax ID/SSN Text For “Tax ID/SSN” TaxID/SSN Entry field TaxID/SSN Entry field for entering the TAX ID/SSN Entry Field Entry Field License Text License Text for “License Number” Number Number License Calendar License Calendar Expiration Expiration E&O Number Text E&O Number Text for “E&O” E&O Number Entry Field E&O Number Entry field for E&O Number E&O Text E&O Text for “E & O Expiration List” Expiration Expiration E&O Editable E&O Calendar for E&O expiration calendar Expiration text/Calendar Expiration Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the subsection “Bank “Bank Information” Information” Preferred Mode Text Preferred Mode Text for “Preferred Mode of Payment” of Payment of Payment Preferred Mode Radio Button Preferred Mode Check or ACH of Payment of Payment Bank Name Text Bank Name Text for Bank Name Bank Name Entry Field Bank Name Entry field for Bank Name Account Text Account Text for Account Number Number Number Account Entry field Account Entry Field For Account Number Number Number Routing Text Routing Text for Routing Number Number Number Routing Entry field Routing Entry Field for Routing Number Number Number Account Type Text Account Type Text for Account Type Account Type Select feature Account Type Select feature to select the type of account Name on the Text Name on the Text for “Name on the account” Account Account Name on the Entry Field Name on the Entry field for “Name on the Account” Account Account Payee Name Text Payee Name Text for Payee Name Payee Name Entry field Payee Name Entry Field for Payee Name Requires Check Box Requires Check box for “requires special handling” if Special Special checked - means Yes Handling Handling Previous HTML Button Previous Takes user to the Previous page. Save HTML Button Save Saves the Data. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to original values

3.1.6.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text First Name Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes”. Last Name Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes”. Company Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Name Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes” Zip Mandatory. Accepts exactly 5 numeric digits. Error Dialog Box “Accepts exactly 5 digits number only”. Contact1 First Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Name Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes” Contact1 Last Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Name Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes” Contact1 Zip Mandatory. Accepts exactly 5 numeric digits. Error Dialog Box “Accepts exactly 5 digits number only”. Internal Mandatory. Error Dialog on Save “Is workgroup Required”.

3.1.6.4. Screen Flow

The user enters the information on the agent master

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen Scenario Description Save Saves the agent data and shows the user confirmation page. Next Navigates to the page2. Previous Navigates to the page1. Cancel Resets the information

3.1.7. User Interface ID: Search Agent Master

3.1.7.1. Screen Name: Search Agent Master (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)013)

This screen below captures the information for searching an existing “Agent”.

-   -   Step-1: Enter the mandatory agent information and click the         search button. This page will display the result of search. User         can choose a agent and navigate to either “Modify” screen or         “View/Delete” screen. (See Figure M-23)

3.1.7.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen “Agent Search” “Agent Search” Agent ID Text Agent ID Text For “Agent ID” Agent ID Entry Field Agent ID Entry field for agent id First Name Text First Name Text For “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry field for First Name Last Name Text Last Name Text for Last Name Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry field for Last Name Company Text Company Text For “First “Company” Company Entry Field Company Entry field for Company Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry field for Phone Tax ID Text Tax ID Text For “Tax ID” Tax ID Select Feature Tax ID Entry field for Tax Agent Button Radio Button Agent Button Used to select the agent for modifying or Radio Radio viewing/deleting. Modify HTML Button Modify Agents to the modify screen of the selected agent View/Delete HTML Button View/Delete Agents to the view/delete screen of the selected

3.1.7.3. Front End Validations Element Error Message Name Action/Validation Details Text Agent Mandatory. Any one of the fields in the search Error Dialog ID screen is mandatory. Accepts Alphanumeric Box on Search values only “Accepts Alphanumeric values only.”

3.1.7.4. Screen Flow

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the search screen. Scenario Description Search The system checks for all the validations for all the mandatory information. Fetches the agent(s) that matches with the search conditions. Cancel Clears the search fields

3.1.8. User Interface ID: Modify Agent Master

3.1.8.1. Screen Name: Modify Agent Master (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)014, BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)015 & BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)016)

This screen below captures the information for modifying agent master.

-   -   Step-1: Using search screen (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)013),         search the available Agent(s).     -   Step-2: Select a Agent and click “Modify” to navigate to page 1.     -   Step-3: Modify the Agent information and click “Next” to         navigate you to page2.     -   Step-4: Click the “Save” to save the modified agent information.     -   Step-5: Saving of Agent data takes you to Confirmation page.

Page1 (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)014) (See Figure M-24)

Page2 (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)015) (See Figure M-25)

Confirmation Page (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)016) (See Figure M-26)

3.1.8.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Name Element Type Label Purpose Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Agent “Agent Information” Information” First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry Field for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Company Name Text Company Text for “Company Name”. Name Company Name Entry Field Company Entry field for company. Name DBA Text DBA Text for “DBA”. DBA Entry Field DBA Entry field for dba. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Entry Field Extn. Entry Field for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Mode of Text Mode of Text for “Mode of Communication” communication communication Mode of Entry Field Mode of Entry Field for Mode of Communication. Communication Communication Gender Text Gender Text for “Gender” Gender Select Feature Gender Select feature for gender. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Entry Field Email Entry Field for “Email” Date of Birth Text Date of Birth Text for Email. Date of Birth Entry Field Date of Birth Entry Field for Date of Birth. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact “Contact Information” Information” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 1” “Contact - 1” Salutation Text Salutation Text for “Salutation” Salutation Select Feature Salutation Select feature for selecting a salutation. First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry Field for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Entry Field Extn. Entry Field for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Entry Field Email Entry Field for “Email” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 2” “Contact - 2” Salutation Text Salutation Text for “Salutation” Salutation Select Feature Salutation Select feature for selecting a salutation. First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry Field for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Entry Field Extn. Entry Field for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Entry Field Email Entry Field for “Email” Next HTML Button Next Takes user to the Next page. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to original values Broker Type Text Broker Type Text for “Broker Type” Broker Type Radio Buttons Broker Type Statewide, Regional and Unknown (default) Sub Header Sub Header “Additional “Additional Preferences” Preferences” Exclude from Check box Exclude from If checked then Yes. Broadcast Broadcast Messaging Messaging Exclude from Check box Exclude from If checked then yes. overdue overdue premium premium notices notices Exclude from Check box Exclude from If checked then Yes Employee/Member Employee/Member Term Term Letters Letters Exclude from Check Box Exclude from If checked then Yes Employee/Member Employee/Member Add-on Add-on Term Letters Term Letters Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Associated “Associated Personnel” Personnel” Agent Text Agent Text for “Agent Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Agent Non-Editable Agent Shows the number of associated agent. Text Agent-Popup Image Agent-Popup Clicking this will open a new window, using which user can assign agents for this Lead. Agency Text Agency Text for “Agency Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Agency Non-Editable Agency Shows the number of associated agency(s). Text Agency-Popup Image Agency-Popup Clicking this will open a new window, using which user can assign agency(s) for this Lead. Internal Text Internal Text for “Internal Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Internal Select Feature Internal Shows the internal workgroups. User can Workgroup Workgroup select a internal workgroup for this lead. BSS Rep Text BSS Rep Text for “BSS Rep” BSS Rep Select Feature BSS Rep Shows the BSS Rep (Associates) for the selected internal workgroup. User can select a BSS Rep for this Lead. Sub Header Text Sub Header Text for License Information “License “License Information” Information” Tax ID/SSN Text Tax ID/SSN Text For “Tax ID/SSN” TaxID/SSN Entry field TaxID/SSN Entry field for entering the TAX ID/SSN Entry Field Entry Field License Text License Text for “License Number” Number Number License Calendar License Calendar Expiration Expiration E&O Number Text E&O Number Text for “E&O” E&O Number Entry Field E&O Number Entry field for E&O Number E&O Expiration Text E& O Expiration Text for “E & O Expiration List” E&O Expiration Editable E& O Expiration Calendar for E& O expiration calendar text/Calendar SubHeader Text Sub Header To give the heading for the subsection “Bank “Bank Information” Information” Preferred Mode Text Preferred Mode Text for “Preferred Mode of Payment” of Payment of Payment Preferred Mode Radio Button Preferred Mode Check or ACH of Payment of Payment Bank Name Text Bank Name Text for Bank Name Bank Name Entry Field Bank Name Entry field for Bank Name Account Text Account Text for Account Number Number Number Account Entry field Account Entry Field For Account Number Number Number Routing Text Routing Text for Routing Number Number Number Routing Entry field Routing Entry Field for Routing Number Number Number Account Type Text Account Type Text for Account Type Account Type Select feature Account Type Select feature to select the type of account Name on the Text Name on the Text for “Name on the account” Account Account Name on the Entry Field Name on the Entry field for “Name on the Account” Account Account Payee Name Text Payee Name Text for Payee Name Payee Name Entry field Payee Name Entry Field for Payee Name Requires Check Box Requires Check box for “requires special handling” if Special Special checked - means Yes Handling Handling Previous HTML Button Previous Takes user to the Previous page. Save HTML Button Save Saves the Data. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to original values

3.1.8.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text First Name Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes”. Last Name Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes”. Company Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Name Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes” Zip Mandatory. Accepts exactly 5 numeric digits. Error Dialog Box “Accepts exactly 5 digits number only”. Contact1 First Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Name Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes” Contact1 Last Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Name Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes” Contact1 Zip Mandatory. Accepts exactly 5 numeric digits. Error Dialog Box “Accepts exactly 5 digits number only”. Internal Mandatory. Error Dialog on Save “Is workgroup Required”.

3.1.8.4. Screen Flow

The user enters the information on the agent master

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen Scenario Description Save Saves the agent data and shows the user confirmation page. Next Navigates to the page2. Previous Navigates to the page1. Cancel Resets the information

3.1.9. User Interface ID: View & Delete Agent Master

3.1.9.1. Screen Name: View & Delete Agent Master (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)017 & BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)018)

This screen below captures the information for view/delete agent master.

-   -   Step-1: Using search screen (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)013),         search the available Agent(s).     -   Step-3: Select a Agent and click “View/Delete” to navigate to         view/delete page.     -   Step-3: Click the “Delete” to delete the agent information.     -   Step-4: Deletion of Agent data takes you to Confirmation page.

View/Delete Page (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)017) (See Figure M-27)

Confirmation Page (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)018) (See Figure M-28)

3.1.9.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Agent “Agent Information” Information” First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Read-only Text First Name Display the value for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Read-only Text MI Display the value for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Read-only Text Last Name Display the value for Last Name. Company Text Company Text for “Company Name”. Name Name Company Read-only Text Company Display the value for company. Name Name DBA Text DBA Text for “DBA”. DBA Read-only Text DBA Display the value for dba. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Read-only Text Street Address Display the value for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Read-only Text Suite Display the value for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Read-only Text City Display the value for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Read-only Text State Display the value for state. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Read-only Text Zip Display the value for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Read-only Text Phone Display the value for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Read-only Text Extn. Display the value for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Read-only Text Fax Display the value for Fax. Mode of Text Mode of Text for “Mode of Communication” communication communication Mode of Read-only Text Mode of Display the value for Mode of Communication. Communication Communication Gender Text Gender Text for “Gender” Gender Read-only Text Gender Display the value for gender. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Read-only Text Email Display the value for “Email” Date of Birth Text Date of Birth Text for Email. Date of Birth Read-only Text Date of Birth Display the value for Date of Birth. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact “Contact Information” Information” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 1” “Contact - 1” Salutation Text Salutation Text for “Salutation” Salutation Read-only Text Salutation Display the value for salutation. First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Read-only Text First Name Display the value for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Read-only Text MI Display the value for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Read-only Text Last Name Display the value for Last Name. Company Text Company Text for “Company Name”. Name Name Company Read-only Text Company Display the value for company. Name Name DBA Text DBA Text for “DBA”. DBA Read-only Text DBA Display the value for dba. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Read-only Text Street Address Display the value for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Read-only Text Suite Display the value for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Read-only Text City Display the value for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Read-only Text State Display the value for state. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Read-only Text Zip Display the value for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Read-only Text Phone Display the value for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Read-only Text Extn. Display the value for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Read-only Text Fax Display the value for Fax. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Read-only Text Email Display the value for “Email” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 2” “Contact - 2” Salutation Text Salutation Text for “Salutation” Salutation Read-only Text Salutation Display the value for salutation. First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Read-only Text First Name Display the value for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Read-only Text MI Display the value for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Read-only Text Last Name Display the value for Last Name. Company Text Company Text for “Company Name”. Name Name Company Read-only Text Company Display the value for company. Name Name DBA Text DBA Text for “DBA”. DBA Read-only Text DBA Display the value for dba. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Read-only Text Street Address Display the value for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Read-only Text Suite Display the value for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Read-only Text City Display the value for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Read-only Text State Display the value for state. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Read-only Text Zip Display the value for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Read-only Text Phone Display the value for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Read-only Text Extn. Display the value for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Read-only Text Fax Display the value for Fax. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Read-only Text Email Display the value for “Email” Next HTML Button Next Takes user to the Next page. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to original values Broker Type Text Broker Type Text for “Broker Type” Broker Type Read-only Text Broker Type Display the value for Broker Type Sub Header Sub Header Display the checked values “Additional “Additional Preferences” Preferences” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Associated “Associated Personnel” Personnel” Agent Text Agent Text for “Agent Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Agent Non-Editable Agent Shows the number of associated agent. Text Agency Text Agency Text for “Agency Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Agency Non-Editable Agency Shows the number of associated agency(s). Text Internal Text Internal Text for “Internal Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Internal Read-only Text Internal Shows the internal workgroups. Workgroup Workgroup BSS Rep Text BSS Rep Text for “BSS Rep” BSS Rep Read-only Text BSS Rep Shows the BSS Rep (Associates) for the selected internal workgroup. Sub Header Text Sub Header Text for License Information “License “License Information” Information” Tax ID/SSN Text Tax ID/SSN Display the value for “Tax ID/SSN” TaxID/SSN Read-only Text TaxID/SSN Entry field for entering the TAX ID/SSN Entry Field Entry Field License Text License Display the value for “License Number” Number Number License Read-only Text License Calendar Expiration Expiration E&O Number Text E&O Number Text for “E&O” E&O Number Read-only Text E&O Number Display the value for E&O Number E&O Text E&O Text for “E & O Expiration List” Expiration Expiration E&O Read-only Text E&O Display the value for E&O expiration Expiration Expiration Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the subsection “Bank “Bank Information” Information” Preferred Mode Text Preferred Mode Text for “Preferred Mode of Payment” of Payment of Payment Preferred Mode Read-only Text Preferred Mode Display the value for Mode of payment of Payment of Payment Bank Name Text Bank Name Text for Bank Name Bank Name Read-only Text Bank Name Display the value for Bank Name Account Text Account Text for Account Number Number Number Account Read-only Text Account Display the value for Account Number Number Number Routing Text Routing Text for Routing Number Number Number Routing Read-only Text Routing Display the value for Routing Number Number Number Account Type Text Account Type Text for Account Type Account Type Read-only Text Account Type Display the value for type of account Name on the Text Name on the Text for “Name on the account” Account Account Name on the Read-only Text Name on the Display the value for “Name on the Account” Account Account Payee Name Text Payee Name Text for Payee Name Payee Name Read-only Text Payee Name Display the value for Payee Name Requires Read-only Text Requires Display the value for “requires special handling” if Special Special checked - means Yes Handling Handling Previous HTML Button Previous Takes user to the Previous page. Save HTML Button Save Saves the Data. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to original values

3.1.9.3. Front End Validations

None.

3.1.9.4. Screen Flow

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the step 2 screen. Scenario Description New Agent Used to Navigate to “Create Agent Master” screen. Delete Inactivates (Delete) the Record.

3.1.10. User Interface ID: Create Agency Master

3.1.10.1. Screen Name: Create Agency Master (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)019, BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)020 & BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)021)

This screen below captures the information for creating agency master.

-   -   Step-1: Fill the mandatory information in page1. Click “Next” to         navigate to page2.     -   Step-2: Fill the mandatory information in page2 and click “Save”         to save the Agency Master data.     -   Step-3: Saving of Agency data takes you to Confirmation page.

Page1 (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)019) (See Figure M-29)

Page2 (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)020) (See Figure M-30)

Confirmation page (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)021) (See Figure M-31)

3.1.10.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “General “General Information” Information” Company Text Company Text for “Company Name”. Name Name Company Entry Field Company Entry field for company. Name Name DBA Text DBA Text for “DBA”. DBA Entry Field DBA Entry field for dba. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Mode of Text Mode of Text for “Mode of Communication” communication communication Mode of Entry Field Mode of Entry Field for Mode of Communication. Communication Communication Date of Birth Text Date of Birth Text for Email. Date of Birth Entry Field Date of Birth Entry Field for Date of Birth. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact “Contact Information” Information” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 1” “Contact - 1” Salutation Text Salutation Text for “Salutation” Salutation Select Feature Salutation Select feature for selecting a salutation. First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry Field for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Entry Field Extn. Entry Field for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Entry Field Email Entry Field for “Email” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 2” “Contact - 2” Salutation Text Salutation Text for “Salutation” Salutation Select Feature Salutation Select feature for selecting a salutation. First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry Field for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Entry Field Extn. Entry Field for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Entry Field Email Entry Field for “Email” Next HTML Button Next Takes user to the Next page. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to original values Broker Type Text Broker Type Text for “Broker Type” Broker Type Radio Buttons Broker Type Statewide, Regional and Unknown (default) Sub Header Sub Header “Additional “Additional Preferences” Preferences” Exclude from Check box Exclude from If checked then Yes. Broadcast Broadcast Messaging Messaging Exclude from Check box Exclude from If checked then yes. overdue overdue premium premium notices notices Exclude from Check box Exclude from If checked then Yes Employee/Member Employee/Member Term Term Letters Letters Exclude from Check Box Exclude from If checked then Yes Employee/Member Employee/Member Add-on Add-on Term Letters Term Letters Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Associated “Associated Personnel” Personnel” Agent Text Agent Text for “Agent Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Agent Non-Editable Agent Shows the number of associated agent. Text Agent-Popup Image Agent-Popup Clicking this will open a new window, using which user can assign agents for this Lead. Internal Text Internal Text for “Internal Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Internal Select Feature Internal Shows the internal workgroups. User can Workgroup Workgroup select a internal workgroup for this lead. BSS Rep Text BSS Rep Text for “BSS Rep” BSS Rep Select Feature BSS Rep Shows the BSS Rep (Associates) for the selected internal workgroup. User can select a BSS Rep for this Lead. Sub Header Text Sub Header Text for License Information “License “License Information” Information” Tax ID/SSN Text Tax ID/SSN Text For “Tax ID/SSN” TaxID/SSN Entry field TaxID/SSN Entry field for entering the TAX ID/SSN Entry Field Entry Field License Text License Text for “License Number” Number Number License Calendar License Calendar Expiration Expiration E&O Number Text E&O Number Text for “E&O” E&O Number Entry Field E&O Number Entry field for E&O Number E&O Text E&O Text for “E & O Expiration List” Expiration Expiration E&O Editable E&O Calendar for E&O expiration calendar Expiration text/Calendar Expiration Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the subsection “Bank “Bank Information” Information” Preferred Mode Text Preferred Mode Text for “Preferred Mode of Payment” of Payment of Payment Preferred Mode Radio Button Preferred Mode Check or ACH of Payment of Payment Bank Name Text Bank Name Text for Bank Name Bank Name Entry Field Bank Name Entry field for Bank Name Account Text Account Text for Account Number Number Number Account Entry field Account Entry Field For Account Number Number Number Routing Text Routing Text for Routing Number Number Number Routing Entry field Routing Entry Field for Routing Number Number Number Account Type Text Account Type Text for Account Type Account Type Select feature Account Type Select feature to select the type of account Name on the Text Name on the Text for “Name on the account” Account Account Name on the Entry Field Name on the Entry field for “Name on the Account” Account Account Payee Name Text Payee Name Text for Payee Name Payee Name Entry field Payee Name Entry Field for Payee Name Requires Check Box Requires Check box for “requires special handling” if Special Special checked - means Yes Handling Handling Previous HTML Button Previous Takes user to the Previous page. Save HTML Button Save Saves the Data. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to orginal values

3.1.10.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Company Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Name Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes” Zip Mandatory. Accepts exactly 5 numeric digits. Error Dialog Box “Accepts exactly 5 digits number only”. Contact1 First Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Name Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes” Contact1 Last Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Name Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes” Contact1 Zip Mandatory. Accepts exactly 5 numeric digits. Error Dialog Box “Accepts exactly 5 digits number only”. Internal Mandatory. Error Dialog on Save “Is workgroup Required”.

3.1.10.4. Screen Flow

The user enters the information on the agent master

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen Scenario Description Save Saves the agent data and shows the user confirmation page. Next Navigates to the page2. Previous Navigates to the page1. Cancel Resets the information

3.1.11. User Interface ID: Search Agency Master

3.1.11.1. Screen Name: Search Agency Master (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)022)

This screen below captures the information for searching an existing “Agency”.

-   -   Step-1: Enter the mandatory agent information and click the         search button. This page will display the result of search. User         can choose a agent and navigate to either “Modify” screen or         “View/Delete” screen. (See Figure M-32)

3.1.11.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen “Agent Search” “Agent Search” Agency ID Text Agency ID Text For “Agency ID” Agency ID Entry Field Agency ID Entry field for agency id Agency Name Text Agency Name Text For “Agency Name” Agency Name Entry Field Agency Name Entry field for Agency Name Phone Text Phone Entry field for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry field for Phone Tax ID Text Tax ID Text For “Tax ID” Tax ID Select Feature Tax ID Entry field for Tax Lead Button Radio Button Lead Button Used to select the agency for modifying or Radio Radio viewing/deleting. Modify HTML Button Modify Leads to the modify screen of the selected agency View/Delete HTML Button View/Delete Leads to the view/delete screen of the selected

3.1.11.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Agency Mandatory. Any one of the Error Dialog Box on Search ID fields in the searchscreen is “Accepts Alphanumeric values mandatory. Accepts only.” Alphanumeric values only

3.1.11.4. Screen Flow

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the search screen. Scenario Description Search The system checks for all the validations for all the mandatory information. Fetches the agency(s) that matches with the search conditions. Cancel Clears the search fields

3.1.12. User Interface ID: Modify Agency Master

3.1.12.1. Screen Name: Modify Agency Master (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)023, BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)024 & BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)025)

This screen below captures the information for modifying agency master.

-   -   Step-1: Using search screen (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)013),         search the available Agency(s).     -   Step-2: Select a Agency and click “Modify” to navigate to page1.     -   Step-3: Modify the Agency information and click “Next” to         navigate you to page2.     -   Step-4: Click the “Save” to save the modified agency         information.     -   Step-5: Saving of Agency data takes you to Confirmation page.

Page1 (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)023) (See Figure M-33)

Page2 (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)024) (See Figure M-34)

Confirmation Page (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)025) (See Figure M-35)

3.1.12.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “General “General Information” Information” Company Text Company Text for “Company Name”. Name Name Company Entry Field Company Entry field for company. Name Name DBA Text DBA Text for “DBA”. DBA Entry Field DBA Entry field for dba. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Mode of Text Mode of Text for “Mode of Communication” communication communication Mode of Entry Field Mode of Entry Field for Mode of Communication. Communication Communication Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact “Contact Information” Information” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 1” “Contact - 1” Salutation Text Salutation Text for “Salutation” Salutation Select Feature Salutation Select feature for selecting a salutation. First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry Field for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Entry Field Extn. Entry Field for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Entry Field Email Entry Field for “Email” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 2” “Contact - 2” Salutation Text Salutation Text for “Salutation” Salutation Select Feature Salutation Select feature for selecting a salutation. First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry Field for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for “MI”. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Entry Field Street Address Entry field for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Suite Entry Field for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Entry Field City Entry Field for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Select Feature State Select feature for selecting a state in US. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Entry Field Extn. Entry Field for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Entry Field Email Entry Field for “Email” Next HTML Button Next Takes user to the Next page. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to original values Broker Type Text Broker Type Text for “Broker Type” Broker Type Radio Buttons Broker Type Statewide, Regional and Unknown (default) Sub Header Sub Header “Additional “Additional Preferences” Preferences” Exclude from Check box Exclude from If checked then Yes. Broadcast Broadcast Messaging Messaging Exclude from Check box Exclude from If checked then yes. overdue overdue premium premium notices notices Exclude from Check box Exclude from If checked then Yes Employee/Member Employee/Member Term Term Letters Letters Exclude from Check Box Exclude from If checked then Yes Employee/Member Employee/Member Add-on Add-on Term Letters Term Letters Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Associated “Associated Personnel” Personnel” Agent Text Agent Text for “Agent Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Agent Non-Editable Agent Shows the number of associated agent. Text Agent-Popup Image Agent-Popup Clicking this will open a new window, using which user can assign agents for this Lead. Internal Text Internal Text for “Internal Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Internal Select Feature Internal Shows the internal workgroups. User can Workgroup Workgroup select a internal workgroup for this lead. BSS Rep Text BSS Rep Text for “BSS Rep” BSS Rep Select Feature BSS Rep Shows the BSS Rep (Associates) for the selected internal workgroup. User can select a BSS Rep for this Lead. Sub Header Text Sub Header Text for License Information “License “License Information” Information” Tax ID/SSN Text Tax ID/SSN Text For “Tax ID/SSN” TaxID/SSN Entry field TaxID/SSN Entry field for entering the TAX ID/SSN Entry Field Entry Field License Text License Text for “License Number” Number Number License Calendar License Calendar Expiration Expiration E&O Number Text E&O Number Text for “E&O” E&O Number Entry Field E&O Number Entry field for E&O Number E&O Text E&O Text for “E & O Expiration List” Expiration Expiration E&O Editable E&O Calendar for E&O expiration calendar Expiration text/Calendar Expiration Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the subsection “Bank “Bank Information” Information” Preferred Mode Text Preferred Mode Text for “Preferred Mode of Payment” of Payment of Payment Preferred Mode Radio Button Preferred Mode Check or ACH of Payment of Payment Bank Name Text Bank Name Text for Bank Name Bank Name Entry Field Bank Name Entry field for Bank Name Account Text Account Text for Account Number Number Number Account Entry field Account Entry Field For Account Number Number Number Routing Text Routing Text for Routing Number Number Number Routing Entry field Routing Entry Field for Routing Number Number Number Account Type Text Account Type Text for Account Type Account Type Select feature Account Type Select feature to select the type of account Name on the Text Name on the Text for “Name on the account” Account Account Name on the Entry Field Name on the Entry field for “Name on the Account” Account Account Payee Name Text Payee Name Text for Payee Name Payee Name Entry field Payee Name Entry Field for Payee Name Requires Check Box Requires Check box for “requires special handling” if Special Special checked - means Yes Handling Handling Previous HTML Button Previous Takes user to the Previous page. Save HTML Button Save Saves the Data. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to original values

3.1.12.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Company Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Name Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes” Zip Mandatory. Accepts exactly 5 numeric digits. Error Dialog Box “Accepts exactly 5 digits number only”. Contact1 First Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Name Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes” Contact1 Last Mandatory. Accepts all alphanumeric and Error Dialog Box on Save Name Special characters except double quotes. “Accepts all alphanumeric and Special characters except double quotes” Contact1 Zip Mandatory. Accepts exactly 5 numeric digits. Error Dialog Box “Accepts exactly 5 digits number only”. Internal Mandatory. Error Dialog on Save “Is workgroup Required”.

3.1.12.4. Screen Flow

The user enters the information on the agent master

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen Scenario Description Save Saves the agent data and shows the user confirmation page. Next Navigates to the page2. Previous Navigates to the page1. Cancel Resets the information

3.1.13. User Interface ID: View & Delete Agency Master

3.1.13.1. Screen Name: View & Delete Agency Master (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)026 & BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)027)

This screen below captures the information for view/delete agency master.

-   -   Step-1: Using search screen (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)013),         search the available Agency(s).     -   Step-2: Select a Agency and click “View/Delete” to navigate to         view/delete page.     -   Step-3: Click the “Delete” to delete the agency information.     -   Step-4: Deletion of Agency data takes you to Confirmation page.

View/Delete Page (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)026) (See Figure M-36)

Confirmation Page (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)027) (See Figure M-37)

3.1.13.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “General “General Information” Information” Company Text Company Text for “Company Name”. Name Name Company Read-only Text Company Display the value for company. Name Name DBA Text DBA Text for “DBA”. DBA Read-only Text DBA Display the value for dba. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Read-only Text Street Address Display the value for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Read-only Text Suite Display the value for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Read-only Text City Display the value for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Read-only Text State Display the value for state. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Read-only Text Zip Display the value for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Read-only Text Phone Display the value for Phone. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Read-only Text Fax Display the value for Fax. Mode of Text Mode of Text for “Mode of Communication” communication communication Mode of Read-only Text Mode of Display the value for Mode of Communication. Communication Communication Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact “Contact Information” Information” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 1” “Contact - 1” Salutation Text Salutation Text for “Salutation” Salutation Read-only Text Salutation Display the value for salutation. First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Read-only Text First Name Display the value for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Read-only Text MI Display the value for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Read-only Text Last Name Display the value for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Read-only Text Street Address Display the value for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Read-only Text Suite Display the value for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Read-only Text City Display the value for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Read-only Text State Display the value for state. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Read-only Text Zip Display the value for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Read-only Text Phone Display the value for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Read-only Text Extn. Display the value for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Read-only Text Fax Display the value for Fax. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Read-only Text Email Display the value for “Email” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Contact - 2” “Contact - 2” Salutation Text Salutation Text for “Salutation” Salutation Read-only Text Salutation Display the value for salutation. First Name Text First Name Text for “First Name” First Name Read-only Text First Name Display the value for First Name. MI Text MI Text for “MI” MI Read-only Text MI Display the value for MI. Last Name Text Last Name Text for “Last Name” Last Name Read-only Text Last Name Display the value for Last Name. Street Address Text Street Address Text for “Street Address”. Street Address Read-only Text Street Address Display the value for street address. Suite Text Suite Text for “Suite” Suite Read-only Text Suite Display the value for Suite. City Text City Text for “City” City Read-only Text City Display the value for City. State Text State Text for “State” State Read-only Text State Display the value for state. Zip Text Zip Text for “Zip” Zip Read-only Text Zip Display the value for Zip. Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Read-only Text Phone Display the value for Phone. Extn. Text Extn. Text for “Extn.” Extn. Read-only Text Extn. Display the value for Extn. Fax Text Fax Text for “Fax” Fax Read-only Text Fax Display the value for Fax. Email Text Email Text for Email. Email Read-only Text Email Display the value for “Email” Next HTML Button Next Takes user to the Next page. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to original values Broker Type Text Broker Type Text for “Broker Type” Broker Type Read-only Text Broker Type Display the value for Broker Type Sub Header Sub Header Display the checked values “Additional “Additional Preferences” Preferences” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the sub section “Associated “Associated Personnel” Personnel” Agent Text Agent Text for “Agent Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Agent Non-Editable Agent Shows the number of associated agent. Text Internal Text Internal Text for “Internal Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Internal Read-only Text Internal Shows the internal workgroups. Workgroup Workgroup BSS Rep Text BSS Rep Text for “BSS Rep” BSS Rep Read-only Text BSS Rep Shows the BSS Rep (Associates) for the selected internal workgroup. Sub Header Text Sub Header Text for License Information “License “License Information” Information” Tax ID/SSN Text Tax ID/SSN Display the value for “Tax ID/SSN” TaxID/SSN Read-only Text TaxID/SSN Entry field for entering the TAX ID/SSN Entry Field Entry Field License Text License Display the value for “License Number” Number Number License Read-only Text License Calendar Expiration Expiration E&O Number Text E&O Number Text for “E&O” E&O Number Read-only Text E&O Number Display the value for E&O Number E&O Text E&O Text for “E & O Expiration List” Expiration Expiration E&O Read-only Text E&O Display the value for E&O expiration Expiration Expiration Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the subsection “Bank “Bank Information” Information” Preferred Mode Text Preferred Mode Text for “Preferred Mode of Payment” of Payment of Payment Preferred Mode Read-only Text Preferred Mode Display the value for Mode of payment of Payment of Payment Bank Name Text Bank Name Text for Bank Name Bank Name Read-only Text Bank Name Display the value for Bank Name Account Text Account Text for Account Number Number Number Account Read-only Text Account Display the value for Account Number Number Number Routing Text Routing Text for Routing Number Number Number Routing Read-only Text Routing Display the value for Routing Number Number Number Account Type Text Account Type Text for Account Type Account Type Read-only Text Account Type Display the value for type of account Name on the Text Name on the Text for “Name on the account” Account Account Name on the Read-only Text Name on the Display the value for “Name on the Account” Account Account Payee Name Text Payee Name Text for Payee Name Payee Name Read-only Text Payee Name Display the value for Payee Name Requires Read-only Text Requires Display the value for “requires special handling” if Special Special checked - means Yes Handling Handling Previous HTML Button Previous Takes user to the Previous page. Save HTML Button Save Saves the Data. Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets the Data to original values

3.1.13.3. Front End Validations

None.

3.1.13.4. Screen Flow

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the step 2 screen. Scenario Description New Agency Used to Navigate to “Create Agency Master” screen. Delete Inactivates (Delete) the Record.

3.1.14. User Interface Id: Lead Tracking

3.1.14.1. Screen Name: Lead Tracking (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)002_(—)028)

This screen below captures the lead tracking information of a lead and the lead tracking shall be a tab in lead master screens (See Figure M-38)

3.1.14.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being navigated “Lead “Lead Tracking” Tracking” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the sub heading “Tracking “Tracking Information” Information” Present Status Text Present Status Text For “Present Status” Present Status Non Editable Present Status Non Editable field showing status code and Entry Fields present status which may be updateable due to change in selection on screen Present Desc Text Present Desc Text For “Present Desc” Present Desc Non Editable Present Desc Non Editable field present description which may Entry Fields be updateable due to change in selection on screen Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the screen being navigated “Call Status” “Call Status” Radio Buttons Radio Buttons Radio Buttons “Made Contact”, “Disconnected Number”, “Wrong Number”, “Unreachable”. Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the screen being navigated “Contact “Contact Result” Result” Radio Buttons Radio Buttons Radio Buttons “Qualified” and “Non-Qualified Lead” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the screen being navigated “Qualified Lead “Qualified Lead Result” Result” Radio Buttons Radio Buttons Radio Buttons “Produced Quote”, “Not Interested”, “No Quote at this time” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the screen being navigated “Non-Qualified “Non-Qualified Lead Lead Reasons” Reasons” Radio Buttons Radio Buttons Radio Buttons “<2 Eligible Employees”, “>50 Eligible Employees” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the screen being navigated “Not Interested “Not Interested Reasons” Reasons” Radio Buttons Radio Buttons Radio Buttons “Not up for renewal”, “Doesn't want/need/Provide Insurance” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the screen being navigated “Post Quote “Post Quote Result” Result” Sold Group ID Text Sold Group ID Text for “Sold Group ID” Sold Group ID Non Editable Sold Group ID Entry field for “Sold Group ID” Field Radio Buttons Radio Buttons Radio Buttons “Enrolling”, “Not Enrolling”, “Sold” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the screen being navigated “Status Log & “Status Log & Notes” Notes” Status Text Status Text for “Status” Status Non Editable Status Field Notes Text Notes Text for “Notes” Notes Text Area Notes Text Area for Notes Follow Up Text Follow Up date Text for Follow Up date date Follow Up Calendar Follow Up date date Add HTML Button Add Button for adding data in the temporary repository HTML Table Scrollable HTML Table Table containing added values from the status log HTML Table and notes Save HTML Button Save For saving into the repository

3.1.14.3. Front End Validations Present S No Status Code Present Status Description New 1 New Lead. The source of the lead could be a data upload of leads New entries on a call from a group If there is a new entry on a call from a group, the status should be “New” with the Source Sub Type determining “Inbound Call.” Dead 2 The Lead is a dead lead Re Call 3 When a call is made to the lead and the lead is found to reachable on a call but the rep is not able to make contact/wherever a recall has to be made Prospect - No 4 When a lead is contacted and is found eligible - and Quote/ the lead shows interest but doesn't want a quote Materials Prospect - 5 When a lead is contacted and is found eligible - and Quote/Materials the lead shows interest and wants a quote Sent Post Quote - 6 If the present status is not “Dead” then allow change Enrolling to enrolling status if the lead is in the process of enrolling (there could be instances where status 3 and/or 4 and/or 5 have been skipped all-together) Post Quote - 7 The lead has enrolled and has been assigned a Sold group number

The present status shall be New (1) for a lead where the lead is new to the system and has not been followed up. The data is one that is uploaded into the system. There could be instances where the lead master is created when a lead calls up and this lead's status must be “New”

There shall be 6 sections Call status, Contact Result, Not-Qualified Lead Reasons, Qualified Lead Result, Not Interested Reason, Post Quote Result.

“Call Status” section is enabled when the Status is New (1) or Re-Call (3)

The Call status would have the radio buttons “Disconnected Number”, “Wrong Number”, “Unreachable”, “Made Contact”. Select Radio Button Result Disconnected Number Change Status - Dead (2), Log Wrong Number Change Status - Dead (2), Log Unreachable Change Status - Recall (3), Log Made Contact Enable Section “Contact Result”

Contact Result

The contact result section shall have the following radio buttons “Qualified Lead” and “Non-Qualified Lead” Select Radio Button Result Qualified Lead Enable section “Qualified Lead Result” Non-Qualified Lead Enable section “Non-Qualified Lead Reasons”

Non-Qualified Lead Reasons

The Non Qualified Reasons section shall have the following radio buttons “<2 eligible employees” and “>50 Eligible Employees” Select Radio Button Result <2 eligible employees Change status = Dead (2)/Log >5 Eligible employees Change status = Dead (2)/Log

Qualified Lead Result

The “Qualified Lead Result” section shall have the following radio buttons “Produced Quotes”, “No Quote at his Time”, “Not Interested” Select Radio Button Result Produced Quotes Change Status = Prospect - Quote/Materials Sent (5) No Quote at this Time Change Status = Prospect - No Quote/ Materials (4) Not Interested Enable section - “Not Interested” Reasons”

Not Interested Reasons

The “Not Interested Reasons” section shall have the following options “Not up for renewal”, “Doesn't Want/Need/Provide Insurance”. Select Radio Button Result Not up for renewal - Call again Change Status - Recall (3)/Log Doesn't Want/Need/Provide Insurance Change Status - Dead (2)/Log

Post Quote

The Post Quote section shall have the following radio buttons Select Radio Button Result Enrolling Change Status - Post Quote Enrolling (6)/Log Not Enrolling Change Status - Dead (2)/Show an entry field for entering the reasons/log Sold Change Status - Sold - Show an entry field for entering the group number (7)/ log

Log

This section will contain the following

Status Log Non Editable Entry field with System Date

Notes Text Area

Follow-up Date—Calendar

Add function

Table that would have columns—Log-Log date-Notes-Follow up Date

The Status Log area would automatically have status entries based on whatever choices are made on the screen/maintain log. The Notes Text Area shall contain the space for entering any notes during a call. The next follow up date would be a calendar for choosing the next follow up date.

There could be times when the status has not changed and the log would be empty but notes may be there. In such instances the notes is only added to the table along with follow up date

On adding the information, the information on the Log, Log Date, Notes and Follow up date gets added to the table and the user must save the information to have the data saved in the permanent repository,

When ever the user comes to the lead tracking, the previously made notes/log must be non editable.

The user must add the log entries/Notes or must be displayed with an error dialog “Kindly add the Status Log & Notes”

The user will not be allowed to quit without saving the information

When a user logs in, based on the access control The user is provided with a screen with a button “Things to do today” which shall also be part of the Menu.

The user is provided with the user information to choose from and on selection of the same and confirming the user goes into the “Things to do Today Area”

The user would be provided with a report and with the functionality to print the same.

The report content shall be based on the following based on the follow-up date made by the user in all leads

Details of lead—Company Name, Contact Name, Phone, Status and “Lead Info” button which on pressing would lead to the opening of the lead master in another window.

A check box to confirm a call has been made

The report would be in scrollable table with check all, clear all feature.

The user must save the information to make the updates in the database

If the user has not completed all calls for the follow up day mentioned, must have the incomplete calls information under pending calls section when the user logs in the next day.

3.1.14.4. Screen Flow

4. Business Rule Mapping Activity Rules Create Lead ID Auto generated ID with values 0000000001 to 9999999999 Create Agent Auto generated ID with values AG0000001 to AG99999999 Create Agency Auto generated ID with values AG00000001 to AG99999999

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification Agent Profile Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_SM_03 Version: <1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Dec. 03, 2001 Mahalingam Ramamoorthi 1.0 Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbrevations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Process Description & Flow 5

3. User Interface 6

3.1. User Interface Screens 6

3.1.1. Screen ID's 6

3.1.2. User Interface ID: Create Agent Profile 6

3.1.3. User Interface ID: Search Agent Profile 12

3.1.4. User Interface ID: Modify Agent Profile 13

3.1.5. User Interface ID: View Agent Profile 17

4. Business Rule Mapping 22

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

This functional specification document addresses the part of the sales and marketing system that would facilitate the creation of agent profile.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name None None

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1. Process Description & Flow

Agent Profile facilitates in creating the profile of agents and ranking them accordingly. The results of this ranking would enable the sales & marketing team to focus on the agents from a better business perspective. The data generated out of an agent profile study leads to identify agent potential and necessary sales strategy.

The prerequisite for creating an agent profile for an agent is that the agent must have an entry in the Agent master.

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Screen ID's Corresponding HTML Screen ID (SID) Screen Name File Name utl.agentprofile.create Agent Profile AgentProfile.jsp utl.agentprofile.view View Agent Profile AgentProfileView.jsp utl.agentprofile.search Search Agent Profile AgentProfileSearch.jsp

3.1.2. User Interface ID: Create Agent Profile

3.1.2.1. Screen Name: Create Agent Profile (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)003_(—)001) (See Figure M-39)

(See Figure M-40)

3.1.2.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being “Create Agent “Create Agent navigated Profile” Profile” Workgroup Name Text Workgroup Name Text for “Agent ID” Workgroup Name Drop down Workgroup Name Should list all the workgroup names within list the system The first option should be - Choose One -. Subsequent workgroup name should be listed in alphabetical order Agent ID Text Agent ID Text for “Agent ID” Agent ID Drop down Agent ID Search Window showing the agent ids for list the selected Child groups. The search feature shall contain the details of agents like agent ID, Agent name, Zip Code and the present rating based on statistics available. The user is also allowed to enter/query for a search based on the entry for an agent id. Agent Name Text Agent Name Text for “Agent Name” Agent Name Dynamic text Agent Name When you select a particular agent id you should get the Agent name. Company Name Text Company Name Text for “Agent Name” Company Name Dynamic text Company Name When you select a particular agent id you should get the company name. Sub Header Text Sub Header Heading for “Present Rating” “Present Rating” “Present Rating” Present Rating 1 Non Editable Present Rating 1 Text for rating - 1, 2, 3, 4 Text Present Rating 2 Non Editable Present Rating 2 Text for rating - Inactive, Quoter, Active & Text Producer Sub Header Text Sub Header Heading for “Profile Information” “Profile “Profile Information” Information” Text for “Do you Text Text for “Do you Text for “Do you currently sell health currently sell currently sell Insurance?” health health Insurance?” Insurance?” Radio Button with Radio Button Radio Button with Radio Button with “Yes” Label Yes label Yes label Radio Button with Radio Button Radio Button with Radio Button with “No” Label No label No label Text for “Do you Text Text for “Do you Text for “Do you currently sell Pac sell Pac sell Pac Advantage?” Advantage?” Advantage?” Radio Button with Radio Button Radio Button with Radio Button with “Yes” Label Yes label Yes label Radio Button with Radio Button Radio Button with Radio Button with “No” Label No label No label Radio Button with Radio Button Radio Button with Radio Button with “Unknown” Label Shall Unknown label Unknown label be default Text for “what Text Text for “what Text for “what insurance Types dealing Insurance Types Insurance Types with?” dealing with? dealing with? Check Box Check Box Check Box Check Box for selection selection for selection for 1) Life 9) Life 2) Home 10) Home 3) P&C 11) P&C 4) Disability 12) Disability 5) Auto 13) Auto 6) Securities 14) Securities 7) Health 15) Health 8) Others 16) Others Text for Text Text for Text for “Percentage time focused on “Percentage time “Percentage time selling health insurance” focused on focused on selling health selling health insurance” insurance” Entry field for Entry Field Entry field for Entry field accepting Positive percentage “Percentage time “Percentage time values till 100 focused on focused on selling health selling health insurance” insurance” Text for “Average Text Text for “Average Text for “Average Group Size (with In Pac Group Size (with Group Size (with Advantage)” In Pac In Pac Advantage)” Advantage)” Entry field for Entry Field Entry field for Entry Field showing information on “Average Group “Average Group average group size in Pac Advantage Size (with In Pac Size (with In Pac Advantage)” Advantage)” Text for “Average Text Text for “Average Text for “Average Group Size (outside Pac Group Size Group Size Advantage) (outside Pac (outside Pac advantage) advantage) Entry Field for Entry Field Entry Field for Entry Field for entering information on “Average Group “Average Group average group size outside Pac Advantage Size (outside Pac Size (outside Pac advantage)” advantage)” Text for “Years in Text Text for “Years in Text for “Years in Business” Business” Business” Entry field for Entry Field Entry field for Entry Field entering “Years in Business” “Years in “Years in Business” Business” Text for “% of Text Text for “% of Text for “% of staff concentrating on health staff staff Insurance” concentrating on concentrating on health Insurance” health Insurance” Entry field for “% Entry Field Entry field for “% Entry field for entering “% of staff of staff of staff concentrating on health Insurance” concentrating on concentrating on health Insurance” health Insurance” Sub Heading Text Sub Heading Sub Heading For “Subjective For “Subjective for “Subjective Rating” Rating” Rating” Text for “Broker Text Text for “Broker Text for “Broker Knowledge of Pac Knowledge of Knowledge of Advantage” Pac Advantage” Pac Advantage” Text for “Broker Text Text for “Broker Text for “Broker Potential” Potential” Potential” Text for “Broker Text Text for “Broker Text for “Broker Loyalty & Confidence with Loyalty & Loyalty & Pac Advantage” Confidence with Confidence with Pac Advantage” Pac Advantage” Radio Button Radio Button Radio Button Radio Button selection selection selection 1) 0 7) 0 2) 1 8) 1 3) 2 9) 2 4) 3 10) 3 5) 4 11) 4 6) 5 12) 5 Sub Heading Text Sub Heading Text for “Other Information” “Other “Other Information” Information” Text for Text Text for Text for “Marketing Methods” “Marketing “Marketing Methods” Methods” List for marketing List List for marketing List for marketing methods methods methods Text for “No 1 Text Text for “No 1 Text for “No 1 Selling Plan” Selling Plan” Selling Plan” List for “No 1 List List for “No 1 List for No 1 Selling Plan Selling Plan” Selling Plan” Text for “No 2 Text Text for “No 2 Text for “No 2 Selling Plan” Selling Plan” Selling Plan” List for “No 2 List List for “No 2 List for No 2 Selling Plan Selling Plan” Selling Plan” Save Button HTML Button Save Button Saves the information Cancel Button HTML Button Cancel Button Resets to Original values

3.1.2.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Save All fields are non mandatory When the save HTML Button is The following fields must be positive numeric pressed with an invalid entry, an entries error dialog box pops up with the Percentage of time focused on health message “Please enter valid insurance(0-100) numeric values” with “yes” option Average Groups size (within Pac Advantage) On press of Yes Button, The Average group size (not within cursor must be placed on the PacAdvanatge) corresponding first entry field Years in Business (0-999) % Of staff concentrating on health insurance (0-100)

3.1.2.4. Screen Flow

When the user first calls for the step 1 screen, the user is displayed with the choose child work group search feature. The child work group shall contain only those child workgroups, which belong to the category “Agents”. The child workgroups contain a non-editable entry field with search option.

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen Scenario Description On Entering the The List of Child work groups be displayed. The child work groups shall screen contain only those child work groups which are under the category “Agent” After selecting a The user after selecting the child workgroup, it gets the agents and will be child work group displayed. After selecting a Agent ID with search feature in the screen snapshot, present rating and agent id average group size for Pac advantage is populated with the real time values on selection of an agent id. All subjective rating will have default values of Unknown. For queries-“Do you currently sell health Insurance?” and “Do you sell Pac Advantage?” - default values is “Yes” Marketing Methods, No 1 Selling Plan and No 2 Selling Plan would default with ‘Choose One” Option and the values shall be picked up from the product profile ID from the carrier master. Save Saves data into the permanent repository on saving the information after the validation checks and goes to the confirmation page Cancel Resets values to original values Close the browser The browser window cannot be closed/user can't navigate to another page without saving/ without saving the data. The user is prompted with the option of either saving Navigating to the data and closing/leaving the window or not saving the data and closing/ another page leaving the window. without saving Close the browser/ The browser window can be closed/user can leave once all the data is saved leave the page in the permanent repository. after saving

3.1.3. User Interface ID: Search Agent Profile

3.1.3.1. Screen Name: Search Agent Profile (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)003_(—)002)

This screen below captures the information for searching an existing “Agent Profile”.

-   -   Step-1: Enter the mandatory agent information and click the         search button. This page will display the result of search. User         can choose a agent and navigate to either “Modify” screen or         “View” screen. (See Figure M-41)

3.1.3.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen “Agent Search” “Agent Search” Agent ID Text Agent ID Text For “Agent ID” Agent ID Entry Field Agent ID Entry field for agent id First Name Text First Name Text For “First Name” First Name Entry Field First Name Entry field for First Name Last Name Text Last Name Text for Last Name Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry field for Last Name Company Text Company Text For “First “Company” Company Entry Field Company Entry field for Company Phone Text Phone Text for “Phone” Phone Entry Field Phone Entry field for Phone Tax ID Text Tax ID Text For “Tax ID” Tax ID Select Feature Tax ID Entry field for Tax Agent Button Radio Button Agent Button Used to select the agent for modifying or Radio Radio viewing/deleting. Modify HTML Button Modify Agents to the modify screen of the selected agent View/Delete HTML Button View/Delete Agents to the view/delete screen of the selected

3.1.3.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Agent Mandatory. Any one of the fields Error Dialog Box on Search ID in the search screen is mandatory. “Accepts Alphanumeric Accepts Alphanumeric values only values only.”

3.1.3.4. Screen Flow

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the search screen. Scenario Description Search The system checks for all the validations for all the mandatory information. Fetches the agent(s) that matches with the search conditions. Cancel Clears the search fields

3.1.4. User Interface ID: Modify Agent Profile

3.1.4.1. Screen Name: Modify Agent Profile (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)003_(—)003) (See Figure M-42)

(See Figure M-43)

3.1.4.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

This screen contains the default values—the values created in the database on creation of agent profile Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being “Modify Agent “Modify Agent navigated Profile” Profile” Agent ID Text Agent ID Text for “Agent ID” Agent ID Non Editable Agent ID Text for Agent for selected agent profile Text Sub Header Text Sub Header Heading for “Present Rating” “Present Rating” “Present Rating” Present Rating 1 Non Editable Present Rating 1 Text for rating - 1, 2, 3, 4 Text Present Rating 2 Non Editable Present Rating 2 Text for rating - Inactive, Quoter, Active & Text Producer Sub Header Text Sub Header Heading for “Profile Information” “Profile “Profile Information” Information” Text for “Do you Text Text for “Do you Text for “Do you currently sell health currently sell currently sell Insurance?” health health Insurance?” Insurance?” Radio Button with Radio Button Radio Button with Radio Button with “Yes” Label Yes label Yes label Radio Button with Radio Button Radio Button with Radio Button with “No” Label No label No label Text for “Do you Text Text for “Do you Text for “Do you currently sell Pac currently sell Pac currently sell Pac Advantage?” Advantage?” Advantage?” Radio Button with Radio Button Radio Button with Radio Button with “Unknown” Label Unknown label Unknown label Radio Button with Radio Button Radio Button with Radio Button with “Yes” Label Yes label Yes label Radio Button with Radio Button Radio Button with Radio Button with “No” Label No label No label Text for “what Text Text for “what Text for “what insurance Types dealing Insurance Types Insurance Types with?” dealing with? dealing with? Check Box Check Box Check Box Check Box for selection selection for selection for Life Life Home Home P&C P&C Disability Disability Auto Auto Securities Securities Health Health Others Others Text for Text Text for Text for “Percentage time focused on “Percentage time “Percentage time Health Insurance” focused on focused on Health Insurance” Health Insurance” Entry field for Entry Field Entry field for Entry field accepting Positive percentage “Percentage time “Percentage time values till 1100 focused on health focused on health Insurance” Insurance” Text for “Average Text Text for “Average Text for “Average Group Size (with In Pac Group Size (with Group Size (with Advantage)” In Pac In Pac Advantage)” Advantage)” Entry field for Entry Field Entry field for Entry Field showing information on “Average Group “Average Group average group size in Pac Advantage Size (with In Pac Size (with In Pac Advantage)” Advantage)” Text for “Average Text Text for “Average Text for “Average Group Size (outside Pac Group Size Group Size Advantage) (outside Pac (outside Pac advantage) advantage) Entry Field for Entry Field Entry Field for Entry Field for entering information on “Average Group “Average Group average group size outside Pac Advantage Size (outside Pac Size (outside Pac advantage)” advantage)” Text for “Years in Text Text for “Years in Text for “Years in Business” Business” Business” Entry field for Entry Field Entry field for Entry Field entering “Years in Business” “Years in “Years in Business” Business” Text for “% of Text Text for “% of Text for “% of staff concentrating on health staff staff Insurance” concentrating on concentrating on health Insurance” health Insurance” Entry field for “% Entry Field Entry field for “% Entry field for entering “% of staff of staff of staff concentrating on health Insurance” concentrating on concentrating on health Insurance” health Insurance” Sub Heading Text Sub Heading Sub Heading For “Subjective For “Subjective for “Subjective Rating” Rating” Rating” Text for “Broker Text Text for “Broker Text for “Broker Knowledge of Pac Knowledge of Knowledge of Advantage” Pac Advantage” Pac Advantage” Text for “Broker Text Text for “Broker Text for “Broker Potential” Potential” Potential” Text for “Broker Text Text for “Broker Text for “Broker Loyalty & Confidence with Loyalty & Loyalty & Pac Advantage” Confidence with Confidence with Pac Advantage” Pac Advantage” Radio Button Radio Button Radio Button Radio Button selection selection selection Unknown Unknown Neutral Neutral Neutral+ Neutral+ Mild Mild Positive Positive Positive+ Positive+ Very Very Positive Positive Sub Heading Text Sub Heading Text for “Other Information” “Other “Other Information” Information” Text for Text Text for Text for “Marketing Methods’ “Marketing “Marketing Methods” Methods” List for marketing List List for marketing List for marketing methods methods methods Text for “No 1 Text Text for “No 1 Text for “No 1 Selling Plan” Selling Plan” Selling Plan” List for “No 1 List List for “No 1 List for No 1 Selling Plan Selling Plan” Selling Plan” Text for “No 2 Text Text for “No 2 Text for “No 2 Selling Plan” Selling Plan” Selling Plan” List for “No 2 List List for “No 2 List for No 2 Selling Plan Selling Plan” Selling Plan” Modify HTML Button Modify Modifies the data Cancel HTML Button Cancel Resets to the original created values

3.1.4.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Modify All fields are non mandatory When the modify HTML Button is The following fields must be positive numeric pressed with an invalid entry, an error entries dialog box pops up with the message Percentage of time focused on health “Please enter valid numeric values” with Insurance (0-100) “yes” option Average Groups size (with in Pac Advantage) On press of Yes Button, The cursor Average group size (not with in must be placed on the corresponding PacAdvanatge) entry field Years in Business (0-999) % Of staff concentrating on health insurance(0-100)

3.1.4.4. Screen Flow Scenario Description On entering the All values default to the created values. screen Non-editable text includes the agent id and present ratings, which is dynamic. Modify Modifies data in the permanent repository on saving the information after the validation checks and goes to the confirmation page

3.1.5. User Interface ID: View Agent Profile

3.1.5.1. Screen Name: View Agent Profile (BPI_CAS_SM_SCR_(—)003_(—)004) (See Figure M-44)

3.1.5.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

This screen contains only the values—the values created in the database on creation/modification of agent profile

All the values are NOT EDITABLE Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being “View Agent “View Agent navigated Profile” Profile” Agent ID Text Agent ID Text for “Agent ID” Agent ID Non Editable Agent ID Non Editable Text showing the agent ID for Text the associated agent profile ID Sub Header Text Sub Header Heading for “Present Rating” “Present Rating” “Present Rating” Present Rating 1 Non Editable Present Rating 1 Text for rating - 1, 2, 3, 4 Text Present Rating 2 Non Editable Present Rating 2 Text for rating - Inactive, Quoter, Active & Text Producer Sub Header Text Sub Header Heading for “Profile Information” “Profile “Profile Information” Information” Text for “Do you Text Text for “Do you Text for “Do you currently sell health currently sell currently sell Insurance?” health health Insurance?” Insurance?” Radio Button with Radio Button Radio Button with Radio Button with “Yes” Label Yes label Yes label Radio Button with Radio Button Radio Button with Radio Button with “No” Label No label No label Text for “Do you Text Text for “Do you Text for “Do you currently sell Pac currently sell Pac currently sell Pac Advantage?” Advantage?” Advantage?” Radio Button with Radio Button Radio Button with Radio Button with “Unknown” Label Unknown label Unknown label Radio Button with Radio Button Radio Button with Radio Button with “Yes” Label Yes label Yes label Radio Button with Radio Button Radio Button with Radio Button with “No” Label No label No label Text for “what Text Text for “what Text for “what insurance Types dealing Insurance Types Insurance Types with?” dealing with? dealing with? Check Box Check Box Check Box Check Box for selection selection for selection for Life Life Home Home PFC PFC F&C F&C Disability Disability Auto Auto Securities Securities Health Health Others Others Text for Text Text for Text for “Percentage of time focused on “Percentage of “Percentage of health insurance time focused on time focused on health Insurance” health Insurance” Non Editable Non Editable Non Editable Non Editable Entry field accepting Positive Entry field for Entry Field Entry field for percentage values till 100 “Percentage of “Percentage of health insurance health insurance sold vs. Total sold vs. Total Products sold” Products sold” Text for “Average Text Text for “Average Text for “Average Group Size (with In Pac Group Size (with Group Size (with Advantage)” In Pac In Pac Advantage)” Advantage)” Non Editable Non Editable Non Editable Non Editable Entry Field showing Entry field for Entry Field Entry field for information on average group size in Pac “Average Group “Average Group Advantage Size (with In Pac Size (with In Pac Advantage)” Advantage)” Text for “Average Text Text for “Average Text for “Average Group Size (outside Pac Group Size Group Size Advantage) (outside Pac (outside Pac advantage) advantage) Non Editable Non Editable Non Editable Non Editable Entry Field for entering Entry Field for Entry Field Entry Field for information on average group size outside “Average Group “Average Group Pac Advantage Size (outside Pac Size) outside Pac advantage)” advantage)” Text for “Years in Text Text for “Years in Text for “Years in Business” Business” Business” Non Editable Non Editable Non Editable Non Editable Entry Field entering “Years Entry field for Entry Field Entry field for in Business” “Years in “Years in Business” Business” Text for “% of Text Text for “% of Text for “% of staff concentrating on health staff staff Insurance” concentrating on concentrating on health Insurance” health Insurance” Non Editable Non Editable Non Editable Non Editable Entry field for entering “% of Entry field for “% Entry Field Entry field for “% staff concentrating on health Insurance” of staff of staff concentrating on concentrating on health Insurance” health Insurance” Sub Heading Text Sub Heading Sub Heading For “Subjective For “Subjective for “Subjective Rating” Rating” Rating” Text for “Broker Text Text for “Broker Text for “Broker Knowledge of Pac Knowledge of Knowledge of Advantage” Pac Advantage” Pac Advantage” Text for “Broker Text Text for “Broker Text for “Broker Potential” Potential” Potential” Text for “Broker Text Text for “Broker Text for “Broker Loyalty & Confidence with Loyalty & Loyalty & Pac Advantage” Confidence with Confidence with Pac Advantage” Pac Advantage” Radio Button Radio Button Radio Button Radio Button selection selection selection Unknown Unknown Neutral Neutral Neutral+ Neutral+ Mild Mild Positive Positive Positive+ Positive+ Very Very Positive Positive Sub Heading Text Sub Heading Text for “Other Information” “Other “Other Information” Information” Text for Text Text for Text for “Marketing Methods’ “Marketing “Marketing Methods” Methods” Non Editable field Non Editable Non Editable field Non Editable field for marketing methods for marketing field for marketing methods methods Text for “No 1 Text Text for “No 1 Text for “No 1 Selling Plan” Selling Plan” Selling Plan” Non Editable field Non Editable Non Editable field Non Editable field for No 1 Selling Plan for “No 1 Selling field for “No 1 Selling Plan” Plan” Text for “No 2 Text Text for “No 2 Text for “No 2 Selling Plan” Selling Plan” Selling Plan” Non Editable field Non Editable Non Editable field Non Editable field for No 2 Selling Plan for “No 2 Selling field for “No 2 Selling Plan” Plan”

3.1.5.3. Front End Validations

None.

3.1.5.4. Screen Flow Scenario Description On Entering the All values default to the Non Editable screen created/modified values. Present rating would be dynamic.

-   -   4. Business Rule Mapping

The agent is evaluated with the following ratings. The ratings are established on 2 accounts. One is when the user enters the screen—displays the present rating and another on completion on save operation. The system does an automatic rating of the agent and the same can be viewed by reports and on modify operation. The sales rep on entering the values saves the data and the ratings are picked up based on entries made (ratings described below).The cumulative ratings are stored in the database for reporting purposes. Activity Rules Create Agent Should have unique Id 4 digit for a agent profile profile record with an increment of 1, Say 1000, 1001, 1002 and so on.

Present Rating for Pac Advantage Business Broker PacAdvanatge Business Potential Value Zero sold cases and zero quotes in last 12 months Inactive 1 Zero sold cases and 1+ quotes in last 12 months Quoter 2 New agent or old agent with renewed interest Prospect 3 (other than the balance 4) 1+ sold cases in last 12 months Active 4 1+ sold cases and 1+ quotes in last 12 months Producer 5 (consistently quoting and selling)

Average Group size with in Pac Advantage—Picks up the real time value from the database for the agent.

Profile Information Ratings Corresponding Rank Value Item Type Description 1 2 3 4 5 Do you currently sell health insurance? Y/N Manual Enter N Y N/A N/A N/A Percentage of time focused on health Insurance % Manual Enter <60%    61-70%    71-80%    81-90%    90-100% Average Group Size (outside PacAdvanatge) Int Manual Enter >50 1-5  6-10 11-15 >15 Average Group Size (within PacAdvanatge) Int System Calc >50 1-5  6-10 11-15 >15 Date Business Began (years in business) Date Manual Enter >15 <2 2-5  5-10 10-15  % of Staff concentrating on health? % Manual Enter <60%    61-70%    71-80%    81-90%    90-100%

Subjective Ratings

Broker Relationship and Loyalty: Sales Reps opinion of this broker's loyalty to and confidence in PacAdvanatge as a program and concept as well as their confidence in PacAdvanatge adminstrative abilities and responsiveness.

0. (Unknown)—No Data available

1. (Neutral)

Neutral Impression of PacAdvanatge. Sells PacAdvanatge if there are no other choices available.

2. (Neutral Plus)

Agent has a somewhat favorable but guarded impression of PacAdvanatge program and it's responsiveness. Sells PacAdvanatge when group has too many Kaiser enrollees, when pricing is favorable, or when program is specifically requested but prefers to sell other health products or competing programs.

3. (Mild Positive)

The agent has a positive impression of PacAdvanatge program. Sees value in choice concept. Confident in the administration of the PacAdvanatge program, but often sells competing products.

4. (Positive Plus)

Agent is fully confident of PacAdvanatge administration and concept. Sells us in most situations; may occasionally sell a competing product.

5. (Very Positive)

Agent promotes the choice concept. Has total confidence in PacAdvanatge product, service and administration. Sells PacAdvanatge before all other products and competing programs. Broker Knowledge Of PacAdvanatge: Sales Reps opinion of this broker's knowledge of choice. Includes PacAdvanatge and other choice based product concepts (i.e. CC, BC). Ranks brokers' confidence in being able to independently sell and promote PacAdvanatge and related programs.

0. (Unknown)—No Data available

1. (Neutral) Agent has little or no knowledge of PacAdvanatge or other choice programs and products.

2. (Neutral Plus) Knows a little about PacAdvanatge and other choice programs, but focus and preference is for other health products. Requires significant coaching on basics of our product, the choice concept and PacAdvanatge administration.

3 (Mild Positive)

Agent understands basics of choice programs and PA, but may not be familiar with many administrative details of PA, (i.e. enrollment guidelines, participation rules, paperwork requirements, etc.). Does not know all the situations were Pac Advantage or other choice programs can “fit” (answer: just about everywhere). Requires some coaching on the product and concept.

4. (Positive Plus)

Agent is pretty familiar with PA and its admin rules. Knows most, but not all situations where choice programs work.

They can freely and independently discuss and promote PA or other programs with clients, but may require assistance from time to time.

5. (Very Positive)

Agent Broker has very good understanding of choice based programs and concepts and has a solid grasp of most PA administrative details. Familiar with all the situations where PA or other choice based programs “fit”. Can confidently sell Pac Advantage or other choice programs with little or no assistance.

Broker Potential

Sales Reps opinion of this broker's involvement or interest in all OTHER HEALTH INSURANCE programs, besides PacAdvanatge, and the reps assessment of this broker's NEW SALES potential for PA.

0. (Unknown)—No data Available

1 (Neutral) Inactive or broker does very little health insurance. Broker has indicated little or no interest in new group health selling. Does not sell any or very few other group health insurance products.

2. (Neutral Plus)

Broker sells some group health insurance cases upon request, (three or more annually) but it is not the primary focus of business.

3. (Mild positive)

Broker has other some health business, (more than 10 cases) and focus is at least 10% on group health. Actively promotes small business health insurance to clients. May primarily work with competing programs but have potential to produce some PacAdvanatge Business.

4. (Positive Plus)

Broker has a significant amount of existing small group business (20 or more groups). Actively interested in selling more group health to all current and prospective clients. Focus is 30% or more on group health.

5. (Very Positive)

Broker sells a lot of health insurance and/or has access to a significant amount of small group health insurance business. Focus is at least 50% or more on group health. May have involvement with larger groups, or association business. May be selling some or a significant amount of PacAdvanatge, but has potential to produce even more. May be a current top PA producer OR a significant producer for competing plan(s), (i.e., Cal Choice, Blue Cross, Kaiser direct). “Significant” is defined as 10 or more new sales annually.

Cumulative Ratings Stored in Database: Based on the points system @ 1-5 the cumulative values are stored in the database and is used for reporting purposes.

A Backend subroutine runs at 1200 at night everyday to calculate the Present rating of the agent based on quotes made, cases sold, average group size. This data would be calculated and updated against individual agents and shown in Step 2 screen when accessed.

Benefitl Partners Inc Process Specification Create Quotes Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_SM_04 Version: <1.1> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Feb. 06, 2002 Chandrasekaran L 1.0 Baseline Release Aug. 16, 2002 Chandrasekaran L 1.2 1. Changes to reflect    screen modifications 2. Changes to reflect latest    FSD format Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Background 5

2.2. Process Description 5

2.3. Process Flow 5

3. User Interface 7

3.1. User Interface Screens 7

3.1.1. Create Quotes 7

3.2. Interface Flow 28

4. Business Rule Mapping 29

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

The purpose of this document is to describe the process of Create Quotes. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE_SM External Communication BPI_SCOPEP_SM_005 Create Quote Master BPI_SCOPEP_SM_006 Create Lead Master

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1. Background

Quotes are provided for potential business entities as well as existing business entities. Quotes can be requested for small Employer Groups or Alternate Groups (Individual Association Member, Association Group, COBRA etc.) as well as for employees of those groups.

2.2. Process Description

The objective of the Create Quotes process is to:

-   -   1) Provide functionality to create, view and modify quotes

The process should support collecting and storing configurable information for quoting purposes. A quote should be unique for each Group and Lead to allow history of data provided for a quote. The process should also support the versioning of each quote output.

The following are the other requirements that will be supported and constraints on the proposed system:

-   -   1) The system should allow for updates using current enrollment         for existing groups and members     -   2) The system should allow for quoting specific carriers for an         employee or for all employees     -   3) The system should allow for excluding certain carriers from a         quote     -   4) The system should allow for calculating the rate differential         based on the following entry fields: total eligible employees,         total waiving, total declining, total COBRAs     -   5) The system should allow for quoting based on blended and         non-blended fee structure     -   6) The system should allow for configurable agent fees     -   7) The system should allow the user to choose output types         including:         -   (a) Group Rate Summary         -   (b) Group Rate Summary and Worksheet         -   (c) Group Rate Summary, Worksheet and EE Pages         -   (d) Employee Quote         -   (e) COBRA Quote (Cal or Fed)         -   (f) Individual Association Member Quote         -   (g) ROE Quote     -   8) System should allow for configurable effective dates of         quotes based on current date and/or enrollment effective date if         it is an existing group     -   9) The system should have a functionality to list out all         missing information for a quote. It should also have the         functionality to print/fax/email this to the agent/prospective         group who requested for the quote. At this point in time, the         user should be able to save the quote for retrieval at a later         point in time.

2.3. Process Flow

Process for create, view and modify quotes

-   -   1) Enter Tracking Dates     -   2) Choose Lead ID or Group ID; agent information if any gets         auto-populated     -   3) Choose all line if coverage to quote; alternately use default         coverage     -   4) Define contribution for employee/dependent by line of         coverage; alternately use default contribution     -   5) Choose fee type (blended/non-blended). This would default, if         Lead, to blended, if Group, to whichever fee structure the group         is on)     -   6) Re-configure agent fee, if applicable     -   7) Create employee list; for existing groups this gets         auto-populated using current enrollment; for prospective groups         this information can be uploaded from a comma-separated (CSV)         data file.     -   8) Adjust employee totals as needed         -   i. # waiving         -   ii. #declining         -   iii. #COBRAs     -   9) Quote/exclude specific carriers     -   10) Choose quote type         -   i. Group         -   ii. Employee         -   iii. Individual         -   iv. COBRA     -   11) Choose output type         -   i. Group Summary         -   ii. Group Summary and Worksheet         -   iii. Group Summary, Worksheet and employee pages     -   12) Specify effective date for quote     -   13) Choose mode of output         -   i. View         -   ii. Email         -   iii. Fax         -   iv. Print for mailing (in the mailroom)     -   14) For print, email, fax options, choose “Send to whose         attention” in a pop-up window         -   i. Agent's attention         -   ii. Group's Attention         -   iii. Other—For “Other”, enter “attention to”, address and/or             email address and/or fax #

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Create Quotes

3.1.1.1. Screen Snapshot

Screen 1-1 (See Figure M-45)

Screen 1-2 (See Figure M-46)

Screen 2-1 (See Figure M-47)

Screen 2-2 (See Figure M-48)

Screen 3-1 (See Figure M-49)

Screen 3-2 (See Figure M-50)

Screen 4-1 (See Figure M-51)

Screen 4-2 (See Figure M-52)

Screen 5-1 (See Figure M-53)

3.1.1.2. Element Name, Element Type & Purpose

Screen1 Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Quote Information Quote Number Display Text Quote # Unique id for a quote. There will be only one quote associated with each group/lead. Revision Display Text Rev Revision # of the quote Quote Date Display Text Date Quote Date Lead/Group Display Text Type Type of the lead/group to whom quote is Type generated Lead/Group Id Display Text Lead/Group Id Id of the lead/group to whom quote is generated Lead/Group Display Text Lead/Group Name of the lead/group to whom quote is Name Name generated Lead/Group Information Quoting For Radio Boxes Quote For To specify whether quoting for lead or an existing group Lead/Group Id Text Box Lead/Group Id To specify the id of lead/group quoted Populate Link Populate Current To populate the current enrollment details for a Current Enrollment group. Shown only when the quote is for existing Enrollment group. Other Revisions Option Box Other Revisions To populate the other version of the quote. Shown only when the quote has more than one version. General Information Quote Date Text Box Quote Date To specify quote date Mode of Option Box Mode of Request Mode in which request for quote was received; Request possible values are: USPS, Phone, Fax, Email Request Text Box Postmark Date Postmark date of request for quote Postmark Date Request Text Box Receive Date Date on which request for quote was received Receive Date Rate Type Radio Boxes Rate Type To specify the rate type used for quoting. Possible values are: Blended and non-blended Agent Text Box Agent To specify agent commission to be used for Commission Commission quoting. Effective Date Text Box Effective Date To specify an effective date for the quote Group Information Group Name Display Text Group Name Displays name of the lead/group being quoted Contact Name Display Text Contact Name Displays name of contact for the lead/group Address Display Text Address Displays address of lead/group Phone Display Text Phone Displays phone # of the lead/group Effective Date Display Text Effective Date Displays effective in case of quoting for a group ROE Date Display Text ROE Date Displays ROE date in case of quoting for a group Status Display Text Status Displays status in case of quoting for a group Agent Information Agent Id Display Text Agent Id Displays id of agent associated with lead/agent Agent Name Display Text Agent Name Displays name of agent associated with lead/agent Address Display Text Address Displays address of agent associated with lead/agent Phone Display Text Phone Displays phone # of agent associated with lead/agent Fax Display Text Fax Displays fax # of agent associated with lead/agent E-mail Display Text E-mail Displays email address of agent associated with lead/agent Workgroup Display Text Workgroup Displays workgroup associated with lead/agent Coverage & Contribution Information Use default Check Box Use default To specify that quote has to be generated using coverage and coverage and default coverage and contribution contribution contribution Contribution Option Box Contribution To specify contribution type for medical. Type/Medical Type/Medical Specified Plan/ Option Box Specified Plan/ To specify a plan when option is “% specified Medical Medical plan” for medical. Value for EE Text Box Value for EE ($/ To specify contribution % or value for medical. ($/%)/ %)/Medical Medical Value for Dep Text Box Value for Dep To specify contribution % or value for medical. ($/%)/ ($/%)/Medical Medical Contribution Option Box Contribution To specify contribution type for Dental. Type/Dental Type/Dental Specified Plan/ Option Box Specified Plan/ To specify a plan when option is “% specified Dental Dental plan” for Dental. Value for EE Text Box Value for EE ($/ To specify contribution % or value for Dental. ($/%)/Dental %)/Dental Value for Dep Text Box Value for Dep To specify contribution % or value for Dental. ($/%)/Dental ($/%)/Dental Contribution Option Box Contribution To specify contribution type for Vision. Type/Vision Type/Vision Specified Plan/ Option Box Specified Plan/ To specify a plan when option is “% specified Vision Vision plan” for Vision. Value for EE Text Box Value for EE ($/ To specify contribution % or value for Vision. ($/%)/Vision %)/Vision Value for Dep Text Box Value for Dep To specify contribution % or value for Vision. ($/%)/Vision ($/%)/Medical Contribution Option Box Contribution To specify contribution type for CAM. Type/CAM Type/CAM Specified Plan/ Option Box Specified Plan/ To specify a plan when option is “% specified CAM CAM plan” for CAM. Value for EE Text Box Value for EE ($/ To specify contribution % or value for CAM. ($/%)/CAM %)/CAM Value for Dep Text Box Value for Dep To specify contribution % or value for CAM. ($/%)/CAM ($/%)/CAM New Command New To clear the screen for new quote entry Save Command Save To save details of quote to database Search Command Search To search for a specific quote

Screen2 Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Quote Information Quote Number Display Text Quote # Unique id for a quote. There will be only one quote associated with each group/lead. Revision Display Text Rev Revision # of the quote Quote Date Display Text Date Quote Date Lead/Group Display Text Type Type of the lead/group to whom quote is Type generated Lead/Group Id Display Text Lead/Group Id Id of the lead/group to whom quote is generated Lead/Group Display Text Lead/Group Name of the lead/group to whom quote is Name Name generated Employee Information Quote Specific Column Quote Specific To indicate employees when using “quote Check Box specific employees” option Employee Column Text Employee Name Name of employee Name Box Sort by Link Sort A-Z To sort the employee details by employee name Ascending in ascending order. Sort by Link Sort Z-A To sort the employee details by employee name Descending in descending order. Age/DOB Column Age/DOB Age/DOB of employee Check Box Coverage Column Tier Coverage choice selected by employee Choice Option Box #Members Column Text # # of members covered under employee (including Box the employee) Zip Column Text Zip Zip code of residence of employee Box County Column County County of residence of employee Option Box Medical Plan Column Medical Plan Medical plan selected by employee, if any Option Box Dental Plan Column Dental Plan Dental plan selected by employee, if any Option Box Vision Plan Column Vision Plan Vision plan selected by employee, if any Option Box CAM Plan Column CAM Plan CAM plan selected by employee, if any Option Box Size Text Box To alter the size of the employee info entry table. Set Size Command Set Size Adds/deletes row(s) in employee information entry table depending on the size entered. Delete Command Delete Deletes a row from employee information entry table Upload Link Upload To upload a flat file containing employee Employee Info Employee Info information Total Display Text Total Employees Displays count of employees entered in the Employees employee information table. Total Waiving Text Box Total Waiving Total # of waiving employees Total Declining Text Box Total Declining Total # of declining employees Total COBRAs Text Box Total COBRAs Total # of COBRA members with the group Rate Radio Rate Differential To specify whether the RAF is calculated by the Differential Buttons Factor system or entered by the user. Factor Rate Text Box Rate Differential Rate Differential Factor Differential Factor Factor Refresh Command Refresh To calculate the RAF a fresh when the RAF is calculated by the system. New Command New To clear the screen for new quote entry Save Command Save To save details of quote to database Search Command Search To search for a specific quote

Screen 3 Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Quote Information Quote Number Display Text Quote # Unique id for a quote. There will be only one quote associated with each group/lead. Revision Display Text Rev Revision # of the quote Quote Date Display Text Date Quote Date Lead/Group Display Text Type Type of the lead/group to whom quote is Type generated Lead/Group Id Display Text Lead/Group Id Id of the lead/group to whom quote is generated Lead/Group Display Text Lead/Group Name of the lead/group to whom quote is Name Name generated Contribution Information Medical Quote Medical Check Box Quote Medical To include the quote for medical. Contribution Check Box Contribution To include the contribution summary to quote Summary Summary output. Employer Check Box Employer To include the % lowest cost HMO contribution Summary/% Summary/% in Employer summary. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost HMO HMO Employer Check Box Employer To include the % lowest cost Plan contribution in Summary/% Summary/% Employer summary. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost Plan Plan Employer Check Box Employer To include the % Specified Plan contribution in Summary/% Summary/% Employer summary. Specified Plan Specified Plan Employer Check Box Employer To include the Flat $ Amount contribution in Summary/Flat Summary/Flat $ Employer summary. $ Amount Amount Employee Check Box Employee To include the % lowest cost HMO contribution Quotes/% Quotes/% in Employee Quotes. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost HMO HMO Employee Check Box Employee To include the % lowest cost Plan contribution in Quotes/% Quotes/% Employee Quotes. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost Plan Plan Employee Check Box Employee To include the % Specified Plan contribution in Quotes/% Quotes/% Employee Quotes. Specified Plan Specified Plan Employee Check Box Employee To include the Flat $ Amount contribution in Quotes/Flat $ Quotes/Flat $ Employee Quotes. Amount Amount Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Lowest cost HMO Employee/% Employee/% for employee. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost HMO HMO Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Lowest Cost Plan Employee/% Employee/% for employee. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost Plan Plan Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Specified Plan for Employee/% Employee/% employee. Specified Plan Specified Plan Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution value for Flat $ Amount Employee/Flat Employee/Flat for employee. $ Amount $ Amount Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Lowest cost HMO Dependent/% Dependent/% for dependent. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost HMO HMO Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Lowest Cost Plan Dependent/% Dependent/% for dependent. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost Plan Plan Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Specified Plan for Dependent/% Dependent/% dependent. Specified Plan Specified Plan Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution value for Flat $ Amount Dependent/ Dependent/Flat for dependent. Flat $ Amount $ Amount Specified Plan Option Box Specified Plan To specify a plan when option is “% specified plan” Dental Quote Dental Check Box Quote Dental To include the quote for dental. Contribution Check Box Contribution To include the contribution summary to quote Summary Summary output. Employer Check Box Employer To include the % lowest cost Plan contribution in Summary/% Summary/% Employer summary. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost Plan Plan Employer Check Box Employer To include the % Specified Plan contribution in Summary/% Summary/% Employer summary. Specified Plan Specified Plan Employer Check Box Employer To include the Flat $ Amount contribution in Summary/Flat Summary/Flat $ Employer summary. $ Amount Amount Employee Check Box Employee To include the % lowest cost Plan contribution in Quotes/% Quotes/% Employee Quotes. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost Plan Plan Employee Check Box Employee To include the % Specified Plan contribution in Quotes/% Quotes/% Employee Quotes. Specified Plan Specified Plan Employee Check Box Employee To include the Flat $ Amount contribution in Quotes/Flat $ Quotes/Flat $ Employee Quotes. Amount Amount Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Lowest Cost Plan Employee/% Employee/% for employee. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost Plan Plan Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Specified Plan for Employee/% Employee/% employee. Specified Plan Specified Plan Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution value for Flat $ Amount Employee/Flat Employee/Flat for employee. $ Amount $ Amount Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Lowest Cost Plan Dependent/% Dependent/% for dependent. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost Plan Plan Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Specified Plan for Dependent/% Dependent/% dependent. Specified Plan Specified Plan Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution value for Flat $ Amount Dependent/ Dependent/Flat for dependent. Flat $ Amount $ Amount Specified Plan Option Box Specified Plan To specify a plan when option is “% specified plan” Vision Quote Vision Check Box Quote Vision To include the quote for vision. Contribution Check Box Contribution To include the contribution summary to quote Summary Summary output. Employer Check Box Employer To include the % lowest cost Plan contribution in Summary/% Summary/% Employer summary. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost Plan Plan Employer Check Box Employer To include the % Specified Plan contribution in Summary/% Summary/% Employer summary. Specified Plan Specified Plan Employer Check Box Employer To include the Flat $ Amount contribution in Summary/Flat Summary/Flat $ Employer summary. $ Amount Amount Employee Check Box Employee To include the % lowest cost Plan contribution in Quotes/% Quotes/% Employee Quotes. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost Plan Plan Employee Check Box Employee To include the % Specified Plan contribution in Quotes/% Quotes/% Employee Quotes. Specified Plan Specified Plan Employee Check Box Employee To include the Flat $ Amount contribution in Quotes/Flat $ Quotes/Flat $ Employee Quotes. Amount Amount Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Lowest Cost Plan Employee/% Employee/% for employee. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost Plan Plan Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Specified Plan for Employee/% Employee/% employee. Specified Plan Specified Plan Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution value for Flat $ Amount Employee/Flat Employee/Flat for employee. $ Amount $ Amount Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Lowest Cost Plan Dependent/% Dependent/% for dependent. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost Plan Plan Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Specified Plan for Dependent/% Dependent/% dependent. Specified Plan Specified Plan Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution value for Flat $ Amount Dependent/ Dependent/Flat for dependent. Flat $ Amount $ Amount Specified Plan Option Box Specified Plan To specify a plan when option is “% specified plan” CAM Quote CAM Check Box Quote CAM To include the quote for CAM. Contribution Check Box Contribution To include the contribution summary to quote Summary Summary output. Employer Check Box Employer To include the % lowest cost Plan contribution in Summary/% Summary/% Employer summary. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost Plan Plan Employer Check Box Employer To include the % Specified Plan contribution in Summary/% Summary/% Employer summary. Specified Plan Specified Plan Employer Check Box Employer To include the Flat $ Amount contribution in Summary/Flat Summary/Flat $ Employer summary. $ Amount Amount Employee Check Box Employee To include the % lowest cost Plan contribution in Quotes/% Quotes/% Employee Quotes. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost Plan Plan Employee Check Box Employee To include the % Specified Plan contribution in Quotes/% Quotes/% Employee Quotes. Specified Plan Specified Plan Employee Check Box Employee To include the Flat $ Amount contribution in Quotes/Flat $ Quotes/Flat $ Employee Quotes. Amount Amount Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Lowest Cost Plan Employee/% Employee/% for employee. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost Plan Plan Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Specified Plan for Employee/% Employee/% employee. Specified Plan Specified Plan Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution value for Flat $ Amount Employee/Flat Employee/Flat for employee. $ Amount $ Amount Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Lowest Cost Plan Dependent/% Dependent/% for dependent. Lowest Cost Lowest Cost Plan Plan Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution % for Specified Plan for Dependent/% Dependent/% dependent. Specified Plan Specified Plan Value for Text Box Value for To specify contribution value for Flat $ Amount Dependent/ Dependent/Flat for dependent. Flat $ Amount $ Amount Specified Plan Option Box Specified Plan To specify a plan when option is “% specified plan” New Command New To clear the screen for new quote entry Save Command Save To save details of quote to database Search Command Search To search for a specific quote

Screen 4 Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Quote Information Quote Number Display Text Quote # Unique id for a quote. There will be only one quote associated with each group/lead. Revision Display Text Rev Revision # of the quote Quote Date Display Text Date Quote Date Lead/Group Display Text Type Type of the lead/group to whom quote is Type generated Lead/Group Id Display Text Lead/Group Id Id of the lead/group to whom quote is generated Lead/Group Display Text Lead/Group Name of the lead/group to whom quote is Name Name generated Quote Generation Options Generate Radio Generate To specify what type of quote to be generated. Buttons Possible values are: Standard Quote, Interim Quote Quote for Check Box Quote for If this option is set, the quote is generated only specified plans specified plans for plans specified by employee only only Exclude Exclude To exclude certain plans from being quoted Specified Plans Specified Plans Quote For Radio Quote For To specify to whom the quote output is being Buttons generated. Possible values are: Group, Employee(s), Cal-COBRA(s), Fed-COBRA(s) When quoting Radio When quoting To specify what quote sheets to be included in for groups, Buttons for groups, quote output. include include Mode of output Radio Mode of output To specify the mode of quote output. Possible Buttons values are: View, Email, Fax, Print in mailroom. Send to whose Radio Send to whose To specify to whose attention the quote is to be attention Buttons attention sent. Possible values are: Agent's Attn., Group's Attn., Other. Attention to Text Box Attention to To specify the attention to whom when the “Send to whose attention”, is others. Address 1 Text Box Address 1 To specify the address 1 when the “Send to whose attention”, is others. Address 2 Text Box Address 2 To specify the address 2 when the “Send to whose attention”, is others. Email Text Box Email To specify the email when the “Send to whose attention”, is others. Fax Text Box Fax To specify the fax when the “Send to whose attention”, is others. Include Check Box Include program To indicate whether the program brochure is to be program brochure included in the quote output. brochure New Command New To clear the screen for new quote entry Save Command Save To save details of quote to database Search Command Search To search for a specific quote

Screen 5 Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Quote Information Quote Number Display Text Quote # Unique id for a quote. There will be only one quote associated with each group/lead. Revision Display Text Rev Revision # of the quote Quote Date Display Text Date Quote Date Lead/Group Display Text Type Type of the lead/group to whom quote is Type generated Lead/Group Id Display Text Lead/Group Id Id of the lead/group to whom quote is generated Lead/Group Display Text Lead/Group Name of the lead/group to whom quote is Name Name generated Missing Information Missing entity Display Text Missing Entity Name of the missing entity Message Display Text Message Message. New Command New To clear the screen for new quote entry Save Command Save To save details of quote to database Search Command Search To search for a specific quote

3.1.1.3. Screen Validations

Screen1 Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Lead Group Information Quoting For Check to see that a valid option is “Required information is missing” selected for the field Lead/Group Id Check to see that a valid value is “Required information is missing” entered for the field General Information Quote Date “Required information is missing” Mode of Request Check to see that a valid option is “Required information is missing” selected for the field Request Postmark Check to see that a valid value is “Required information is missing” Date entered for the field Request Receive Check to see that a valid value is “Required information is missing” Date entered for the field Rate Type Check to see that a valid option is “Required information is missing” selected for the field Agent Commission Check to see that a valid value is “Required information is missing” entered for the field Effective Date Check to see that a valid value is “Required information is missing” entered for the field

Screen2 Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Employee Information Age/DOB Check to see that a valid value is “Required information is missing” entered for the field Coverage Option Check to see that a valid option is “Required information is missing” selected for the field Number of Check to see that a valid value is “Required information is missing” Members entered for the field

Screen4 Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Quote Generation Options Generate Check to see that a valid option is “Required information is missing” selected for the field Quote For Check to see that a valid option is “Required information is missing” selected for the field When quoting for Check to see that a valid option is “Required information is missing” groups, include selected for the field Mode of output Check to see that a valid option is “Required information is missing” selected for the field Send to whose Check to see that a valid option is “Required information is missing” attention selected for the field

3.2. Interface Flow

N/A

4. Business Rule Mapping Activity Rules Generate Quote 1. A lead or a group will be associated with (a maximum of) one quote number. Changes to the quote will be saved as revisions. 2. For an existing group, fee type (blended or non- blended), coverage & contribution information and employees information gets defaulted from current enrollment. 3. Default coverage and contribution is: Line of coverage - Medical; Contribution for employees - 50% of lowest cost HMO plan; Contribution for dependents - None 4. For each line of coverage, the contribution type for dependents (if any) has to be same as that for the employee. Only the contribution percentage or value can change. 5. Quote for an individual association member should include only one employee. 6. If zip code is not provided for an employee, the zip code of the group is used for rate calculation. 7. Number of employees willing to enroll should satisfy the participation rule i.e., number of declines to (employee count − number of waiving + number of declines − number of COBRA) should be less than 30%. 8. Employer's contribution towards employee premium should be at least 50% of the group's average premium for all enrolled employees based on the lowest cost employee-only plan available. 9. Effective date for quote will default to 1^(st) of next month if current date is lesser than or equal to the 25^(th) of the month and 1^(st) of the next following month after the 25^(th). 10. Premium rates are calculated based on the logic as detailed in “Process Specification for Billing - BPI_CAS_FSD_FI_001”.

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification Supply Request-External Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_UTL_01 Version: <1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Dec. 03, 2001 Mahalingam Ramamoorthi 1.0 Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definition, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Process Description 5

2.2. Process Flow 5

3. User Interface 7

3.1. User Interface Screens 7

3.1.1. Screen ID's 7

3.1.2. User Interface Id: Supply Request-External 7

3.1.3. User Interface Id: External Supply Request Mail Room Confirmation 11

3.1.4. User Interface Id: Supply Request Confirmation 13

4. Business Rule Mapping 14

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

This functional specification document addresses the part of the Core Administration System that would facilitate the sending of Supply Requests or any handbooks to employer groups or the members of a group.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name None None

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1. Process Description

A Supply Request consists of all handbooks, rate books, forms and application, complementary, super directories that are sent to the employer groups and its members through the mailroom.

2.2. Process Flow (See Figure N-1)

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Screen ID's Corresponding HTML File Screen ID (SID) Screen Name Name utl.supplyrequest.external Supply Request External ExternalSupplyRequest.jsp utl.supplyrequestview.external Supply Request External View ExternalSupplyRequestView.jsp utl.supplyrequestresult.external Supply Request External ExternalSupplyRequestResult.jsp utl.supplyconfirm.external Supply Request External ExternalSupplyRequestMailConfirm.jsp Confirmation

3.1.2. User Interface Id: Supply Request—External

3.1.2.1. Screen Name: Supply Request—External (BPI_CAS_UTL_SCR_(—)001_(—)001) (See Figure N-2)

3.1.2.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being “External Supply “External Supply navigated Request” Request” Text items as Text Text items as To provide information as shown in the shown in the shown in the screen along with Qty Text and in Boxes as screen for Pre screen for Pre shown in the screen snapshot selected selected packages, packages, Handbooks, Rate Handbooks, Books, Forms Rate Books, and Applications, Forms and Complementary, Applications, Super Directories Complementary, Super Directories Qty Entry Field Entry Field Qty Entry Field Entry field for Quantity for all items Agent/Employer Text Agent/Employer Text for Agent/Employer Group. Group ID Group ID Must not show up if accessed directly from the menu Agent/Employer Dynamic Agent/Employer Needs to pick up the agent ID or the supply Group ID Text Group ID request ID. Must not show up if accessed directly from the menu Company Name Text Company Name Text for “Company Name” Text Text Company Name Entry Field Company Name Entry Field For Company Name Entry Field Entry Field Address Text Text Address Text Text for “Address” Address Entry Entry Field Address Entry Entry Field For Address Field Field Suite Text Text Suite Text Text for “Suite” Suite Entry Field Entry Field Suite Entry Field Entry Field For Suite City Text Text City Text Text for “City” City Entry Field Entry Field City Entry Field Entry Field For City State Text Text State Text Text for “State” State Entry Field List State Entry List for States - with default CA Field Zip Code Text Text Zip Code Text Text for “Zip Code” Zip Code Entry Entry Field Zip Code Entry Entry Field For Zip Code Field Field Customer Text Customer Text for “Customer Request Date” Request Date Request Date Customer Entry Field Customer Calendar Request Date Request Date Ship Via Text Ship Via Text for “Ship Via” Radio Buttons Radio button Radio Buttons Radio Buttons for Mail Room and Will Call - selection for Ship selection for Default None Via Ship Via Special Text Special Text for “Special Instructions” Instruction Text Instruction Text Special Text Area Special Text Area For Special Instructions Instructions Entry Instructions Field Entry Field Confirm Check Box Confirm Check Box for “Confirm Fulfillment by Email” Fulfillment by Fulfillment by Email Email Save Button Save Save the information to the repository (HTML Submit button) Cancel Button Cancel Reset information as described in the scenarios

3.1.2.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Save Should function with enter key cursor positioned Mandatory Entries: on the “Save” button or on mouse click. 1) Choose anyone item with Qty On saving the data the data gets saved to the Error dialog Box - “item Quantity - permanent repository. And send an email to the Atleast one entry is needed” with Close mailroom along with a confirmation page to the Button user 2) For Company Name Mandatory Entry Error dialog Box “Company Name - 1) Choose any one item with Qty Is required” with Close option and 2) CompanyName on press of Close button leads to 3) Address the Company name field 4) City 3) For Address 5) Zip Code Error Dialog Box “Address - Is 6) Agent/Employer Group ID required.” with Close option and on 7) State press of Close button leads to the 8) Suite Address field 4) For City Error Dialog Box “Please enter the City” with Yes option and on press of Yes button leads to the City field 5) For Zip Code Error Dialog Box “Zip - Is required.” with Close option and on press of Close button leads to the Zip code field 6) For Agent/Employer Group ID Error Dialog Box “Agent/Employer Group ID - Is required.” with Close option and on press of Close button leads to the Agent/employer Group ID field. 7) For State Error Dialog Box “State - Is required.” with Close option and on press of Close button leads to the State field. 8) For Suite Error Dialog Box “Suite - Is required.” with Close option and on press of Close button leads to the Suite field Cancel All the data entered is reset with empty in the data entry fields as the case may be (Text Field, List etc).

3.1.2.4. Screen Flow

The user enters the information on the workgroup name and description.

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen Scenario Description Pre-Population The ID/address fields must be prepopulated with the address details if the user navigates to the supply request screen from Agent Master, Agency Master, Employer Group Master (Sales & Enrollment). Save Pressing the save button leads to saving the data in the repository, sending an email to mailroom and confirmation to the user who has checked the confirmation by email check box Email Content - Subject: Supply Request Dear Mail Room Staff, Please forward the following to the address mention below Items - Qty Comments Address Ship Via Thanks <ID of the person who has made the request> Close the browser The browser window cannot be closed/user can't navigate to another page without without saving/ saving the data. The user is prompted with the option of either saving the data and Navigating to closing/leaving the window or not saving the data and closing/leaving the window. another page without saving Close the browser/ The browser window can be closed/user can leave once all the data is saved in the leave the page permanent repository. after saving Cancel All the data entered is reset with empty in the data entry fields as the case may be (Text Field, List etc).

3.1.3. User Interface Id: External Supply Request Mail Room Confirmation

3.1.3.1. Screen Name: Supply Request Mail Room Confirmation (BPI_CAS_UTL_SCR_(—)001_(—)002) (See Figure N-3)

3.1.3.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being “Supply “Supply navigated Request-Mail Request-Mail Room Room Confirmation” Confirmation” Message Text Message Text For “The following are the pending Supply Requests. On fulfilling the request, check the row and press save to confirm” Check All Link Check All Checks all the check Boxes Clear All Link Clear All Clears All or any Checked Boxes Save HTML Button Save Save Button Cancel HTML Button Cancel Cancel Button

3.1.3.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Save Must choose at least one check Box Error Dialog Box - “Please Check at least one row” with yes option

3.1.3.4. Screen Flow

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen Scenario Description On Entering the Provides a list of all pending requests screen Check All Checks all the check Boxes Clear All Clears all the Check Boxes/Or any checked boxes Save Saves all the updates made and send email to the personnel who made the request where the confirmation on fulfillment by Email check Box is checked. The user Email details are picked up from the security framework Email: Subject: Supply Request Fulfillment” Dear “Name” We have fulfilled your request <Supply Request id> on “date of saving the fulfillment request” Thanks Mailroom Cancel Resets the screen with original values before a save

3.1.4. User Interface Id: Supply Request Confirmation

3.1.4.1. Screen Name: Supply Request Confirmation (BPI_CAS_UTL_SCR_(—)001_(—)003)

3.1.4.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being “Supply Request “Supply navigated Confirmation” Request Confirmation” Message Text Message Text For “The Supply Request has been forwarded to the mail room” Message Text Message Text For “The Reference confirmation number is” Dynamic Text Text Dynamic Text Dynamic Value Text for “<Supply Request ID>” Do you want to Text Do you want Text for “Do you want to create more requests?” create more to create requests? more requests? Yes Link Yes Link for “Yes” No Link No Link for “No”

3.1.4.3. Front End Validations

None.

3.1.4.4. Screen Flow

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen Scenario Description Yes Leads to the Supply Request Screen No Leads to the Supply Request Home Page

4. Business Rule Mapping Activity Rules Create Supply Should have unique Id for a Supply Request - 10 Request ID digits with an increment of 1, Say EX00000001, EX00000002, EX00000003 and so on.

Benefit Partners Process Specification Workgroups Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_UTL_02 Version: <1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Dec. 03, 2001 Mahalingam Ramamoorthi 1.0 Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specificaiton Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Background 5

2.2. Process Description 5

2.3. Process Flow 5

3. User Interface 6

3.1. User Interface Screens 6

3.1.1. Screen ID 6

4. Business Rule Mapping 7

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

This functional specification document addresses the part of the sales and marketing system that would facilitate the creation of workgroups.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name None None

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1. Process Description

Workgroups define the broad categorization of a group of agents, internal working personnel of BPI, external working personnel associated with BPI and Mailing groups.

The process shall include creating

1) Categories

Categories define the segment a workgroup can fall under. For eg—Agents, Employees, HR etc.

2) Define Parent and Assign to a Category

A Parent is the highest in the hierarchy of a work group. Typical examples include Agent Work groups, Internal work groups. A parent is assigned to a category

3) Define Main Work Group and Assign to a Parent

A work group defines the various groups that come under a parent—Examples include—Agents by ranking etc. A work group can also be a child workgroup. A workgroup is assigned to a Parent

4) Define Child Workgroup and Assign to a Main Work Group

Child groups is a set of groups under a workgroup and typically examples include—agents in San Diego Area Etc

5) Define Mail Members—Create, Modify, View, Delete

Mail Members are the components of a child work group for a category Mail and are assigned to the child workgroups

The work groups are designed in such a way that members can be swapped in full or in partial or duplicated from one work group to another.

2.2. Process Flow (See Figure N-4)

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Screen ID's Corresponding HTML File Screen ID (SID) Screen Name Name utl.workgroup.category Category Category.jsp utl.workgroup.maingroup Main Workgroup MainGroup.jsp utl.workgroup.childgroup Child Workgroup ChildGroup.jsp utl.workgroup.mailmember Mail Members MailMember.jsp utl.workgroup.swapmembers Swap Members SwapMembers.jsp

3.1.2. User Interface Id: Category

3.1.2.1. Screen Name: Category (BPI_CAS_UTL_SCR_(—)002_(—)001)

3.1.2.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being “Category” “Category” navigated Name Text Name Text For “Name” Name Entry Entry Field Name Entry Entry field for entering the name Field Field Description Text Description Text for “Description” Description Entry Field Description Entry field for entering the description Entry Field Entry Field Add HTML Button Add Button for adding the name/description in to the HTML table. Changes with label “Modify” when the row in the table is on edit mode. Table HTML table Table For displaying all the information added by pressing the add button, in the form of rows, for every add operation/Rows retrieved from the permanent repository Delete Button (HTML Delete To delete the rows checked Button) Check All Text Link Check All To check all the check boxes in the table Clear All Text Link Clear All To uncheck all the check boxes checked in the table/does not function when all the checkboxes in the table are unchecked Delete Check box Delete To check the items for deletion Edit Button (HTML Edit To edit the rows entered by “Add”/ Button) “Modify”/displayed from permanent repository against the row selected for edition Save Button (HTML Save Save the information to the repository Submit button) Cancel Button Cancel Reset information as described in the scenarios

3.1.2.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Name Mandatory Entry When the Add HTML Button is Entry Field Becomes non editable when on modify mode for pressed with an empty entry on data from permanent repository the name entry field, an Error Dialog Box pops up with the message “Please enter the name before adding to the table” with “yes” option On press of Yes Button, The cursor must be placed on the name entry field Add On Clicking add button or the pressing the enter When the Add HTML Button is key field with the cursor position on the Add pressed with an empty entry on button, The data gets added to the table. the name entry field, an Error Validation checks are done to not allow null value Dialog Box pops up with the on the name entry field. message “Please enter the name Must not allow duplicate entries on the name before adding to the table” with Must not allow the length of the field entry to go “yes” option. beyond as per the database design for the On press of Yes Button, The column cursor must be placed on the name entry field For duplicate entries, Error dialog box - “Duplicate values not allowed. Please enter again” Modify On Clicking the modify button or pressing the None enter key field with the cursor positioned on the modify button, the data gets added to the table. Table Should have column header and each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. i.e. First row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of any text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. The letters must be green in color for the rows retrieved from the permanent repository and red for the rows in temporary storage. All the letters of the row on edit must be in dark gray. Delete Should function with enter key cursor positioned Error Dialog Box: “Please choose on the “Delete” button or on mouse click the row or rows to be deleted.” Delete button should work on multiple deletes with “yes” option based on the check box or boxes selected. If the user clicks on the delete button without checking any of the check box should throw error message. Success: Deletes the row or rows from the table (temporary storage) Check All On clicking the “Check All” link should check all Not Applicable the check boxes in the HTML table. Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link should uncheck all Not Applicable the checked check boxes in the HTML table. Edit Should function with Enter Key Cursor positioned on the “Edit” button or on mouse click. Refer Interface flow on scenarios - “edit data” Save Should function with enter key cursor positioned Not Applicable on the “Save” button or on mouse click. On saving the data the data gets saved to the permanent repository. Cancel All the data entered is reset with empty/initial Not Applicable values in the data entry fields as the case may be (Text Field, List etc). If a row is already modified and added to the table on the screen and the Cancel button is pressed, the row remains with the modified values Browser When a user tries to close the window with out Error Dialog box message: “Do Window saving data into the permanent repository, a you want to save all changes dialog box pops up before closing/leaving the window?” with a “Yes” and “No” option. On press of “Yes” leads to saving of information and “No” leads to the Category screen with the original values

3.1.2.4. Screen Flow

The user enters the information on the Category name and description.

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen Scenario Description Add data entered Adding the data entered (pressing the “Add” Button) leads to adding name and description to a temporary storage. The data gets loaded into the permanent repository only after the user saves the information. Modify data entered When a row is selected for an edit operation, the row is highlighted and data elements populated into respective fields and the add button has a label “modify”. Modifying the data entered (pressing the “Modify” button) leads to adding the non-editable name information and modified “description” to a temporary storage. The data gets loaded into the permanent repository only after the user saves the information. Edit data Editing the Data (pressing the “Edit” Button). The edit operation may be on any of the two scenarios. 1. (Edit for rows from database) When the user comes to the Category screen and the screen is already loaded with data from the permanent repository into a table on the screen. 2. (Edit for rows from the temporary storage) When the user has just added the data into a table on the screen and wants to edit the data entered before saving The data in the table on the screen would be shown as green letters for the data from the database and red letters for the data that is in the temporary storage (not saved yet). The table shall have alternate rows colored with different light colors Under 1, on an edit operation for a row on the table, the row does not get deleted from the table and the data is transferred to the name (becomes non editable) and editable description. Under 2, on an edit operation for a row on the table, the row gets deleted from the table and the data is transferred to the name and description, which are editable. When a row is on edit mode, the letters are in dark gray color in the table. Delete Checked The data in the table on the screen contains the data, which is from the Rows permanent repository, or the data just added and is in temporary storage. When the rows are “checked” for the rows that contain the data from the repository and a “Delete Checked Rows” is performed, inactivation takes place on saving the information provided there are no subtypes else provides the user with the necessary error information in an error page. Message “The following Category has associated parents” - “parent 1 . . . parent n” When the rows are “checked” for the rows that contain the data from the temporary storage and a “Delete Checked Rows” is performed, the rows are deleted from the temporary storage. Check All Enables checking of all the checkboxes by checking “check All” Check Box Check All & Delete Enables deleting all the rows from the table on the screen enabled by “check Checked Rows All” Check Any Number Enables deleting the rows from the table on the screen that are only checked. & Delete Checked Rows Check All & Clear Enables clearing (removing the check) all checked rows done by “Check All” All Check Any Number Enables clearing (removing the check) the rows that are checked. & Clear All Clear All when no The user can only press the button and nothing happens like checking, rows are checked removing a check Save All the data added or modified and added into/deleted from the rows in the table are saved into the permanent repository Once saving is done, return back to the Category screen with all the fresh updates Cancel All the data entered is reset with empty/initial values in the data entry fields as the case may be (Text Field, List etc). If a row (which is retrieved from the database) is already modified and added to the table on the screen and the “Cancel” button is pressed, the row remains with the modified values.

3.1.3. User Interface Id: Main Work Group

3.1.3.1. Screen Name: Main Work Group (BPI_CAS_UTL_SCR_(—)002_(—)002) (See Figure N-5)

3.1.3.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being navigated “Main “Main Workgroup” Workgroup” Name Text Name Text For “Name” Name Entry Entry Field Name Entry Entry field for entering the name Field Field Description Text Description Text for “Description” Description Entry Field Description Entry field for entering the description Entry Field Entry Field Parent Text Parent Text for Parent Parent Search Search Parent Search window for all active parents Search Is it a child work Text Is it a child Text for “Is it a child workgroup?’ Group work Group Is it a child work Checkbox Is it a child Check Box - Default “No” Group work Group Add HTML Button Add Button for adding the name/description into the HTML table. Changes with label “Modify” when the row in the table is on edit mode. Table HTML table Table For displaying all the information added by pressing the add button, in the form of rows, for every add operation/Rows retrieved from the permanent repository Delete Button (HTML Delete To delete the rows checked Button) Check All Text Link Check All To check all the check boxes in the table Clear All Text Link Clear All To un check all the check boxes checked in the table/does not function when all the checkboxes in the table are unchecked Delete Check box Delete To check the items for deletion Edit Button (HTML Edit To edit the rows entered by “Add”/ Button) “Modify”/displayed from permanent repository against the row selected for edition Save Button (HTML Save Save the information to the repository Submit button) Cancel Button Cancel Reset information as described in the scenarios

3.1.3.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Name Mandatory Entry When the Add HTML Button is Entry Field Becomes non editable when on modify mode for pressed with an empty entry on data from permanent repository the name entry field, an Error Dialog Box pops up with the message “Please enter the name before adding to the table” with “yes” option On press of Yes Button, The cursor must be placed on the name entry field Add On Clicking add button or the pressing the enter When the Add HTML Button is key field with the cursor position on the Add pressed with an empty entry on button, The data gets added to the table. the name entry field, an Error Validation checks are done to not allow null value Dialog Box pops up with the on the name entry field. message “Please enter the name Must not allow duplicate entries on the name before adding to the table” with Must not allow the length of the field entry to go “yes” option. beyond as per the database design for the On press of Yes Button, The column cursor must be placed on the Must choose a Parent name entry field For duplicate entries, Error dialog box - “Duplicate values not allowed. Please enter again” For category, Error dialog Box “ Please choose a Parent” with a Yes Option Modify On Clicking modify button or the pressing the None enter key field with the cursor position on the modify button, The data gets added to the table. Table Should have column header and each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. i.e. First row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of any text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. The letters must be green in color for the rows retrieved from the permanent repository and red for the rows in temporary storage. All the letters of the row on edit must be in dark gray. Delete Should function with enter key cursor positioned Error Dialog Box: “Please choose on the “Delete” button or on mouse click the row or rows to be deleted.” Delete button should work on multiple deletes with “yes” option based on the check box or boxes selected. If the user clicks on the delete button without checking any of the check box should throw error message. Success: Deletes the row or rows from the table (temporary storage) Check All On clicking the “Check All” link should check all Not Applicable the check boxes in the HTML table. Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link should uncheck all Not Applicable the checked check boxes in the HTML table. Edit Should function with Enter Key Cursor positioned on the “Edit” button or on mouse click. Refer Interface flow on scenarios - “edit data” Save Should function with enter key cursor positioned Not Applicable on the “Save” button or on mouse click. On saving the data the data gets saved to the permanent repository. Cancel All the data entered is reset with empty/initial Not Applicable values in the data entry fields as the case may be (Text Field, List etc). If a row is already modified and added to the table on the screen and the Cancel button is pressed, the row remains with the modified values Browser When a user tries to close the window with out Error Dialog box message: “Do Window saving data into the permanent repository, a you want to save all changes dialog box pops up before closing/leaving the window?” with a “Yes” and “No” option. On press of “Yes” leads to saving of information and “No” leads to the Parent screen with the original values

3.1.3.4. Screen Flow

The user enters the information on the Main work Group name and description and assigns to a parent.

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen Scenario Description Add data entered Adding the data entered (pressing the “Add” Button) leads to adding name description, parent and child group option to a temporary storage. The data gets loaded into the permanent repository only after the user saves the information. Modify data entered When a row is selected for an edit operation, the row is highlighted and data elements populated into respective fields and the add button has a label “modify”. Modifying the data entered (pressing the “Modify” button) leads to adding the non-editable name information, modified “description”/parent to a temporary storage and child group option. The data gets loaded into the permanent repository only after the user saves the information. Once the main subgroup has been defined as a child work group, the editable data will be shown in the child work group screen Edit data Editing the Data (pressing the “Edit” Button). The edit operation may be on any of the two scenarios. 1 (Edit for rows from database) When the user comes to the Main workgroups screen and the screen is already loaded with data from the permanent repository into a table on the screen. 2. (Edit for rows from the temporary storage) When the user has just added the data into a table on the screen and wants to edit the data entered before saving The data in the table on the screen would be shown as green letters for the data from the database and red letters for the data that is in the temporary storage (not saved yet). The table shall have alternate rows colored with different light colors Under 1, on an edit operation for a row on the table, the row does not get deleted from the table and the data is transferred to the name (becomes non editable) and editable description/Parent Under 2, on an edit operation for a row on the table, the row gets deleted from the table and the data is transferred to the name, description/parent (default), which are editable. When a row is on edit mode, the letters are in dark gray color in the table. Search The search window must generate a list of all active Parents. The user will not be allowed to make entries into the entry field where the search results are going to be put in. Delete Checked The data in the table on the screen contains the data, which is from the Rows permanent repository, or the data just added and is in temporary storage. When the rows are “checked” for the rows that contain the data from the repository and a “Delete Checked Rows” is performed, inactivation takes place on saving the information provided there are no subtypes else provides the user with the necessary error information in an error page. Message “The following Main workgroup has associated child workgroups” - “child workgroup1 . . . child workgroup n” When the rows are “checked” for the rows that contain the data from the temporary storage and a “Delete Checked Rows” is performed, the rows are deleted from the temporary storage. Check All Enables checking of all the checkboxes by checking “check All” Check Box Check All & Delete Enables deleting all the rows from the table on the screen enabled by “check Checked Rows All” Check Any Number Enables deleting the rows from the table on the screen that are only checked. & Delete Checked Rows Check All & Clear Enables clearing (removing the check) all checked rows done by “Check All” All Check Any Number Enables clearing (removing the check) the rows that are checked. & Clear All Clear All when no The user can only press the button and nothing happens like checking, rows are checked removing a check When “Is it a child When the checking is done and the saving of information takes place the workgroup” is Main workgroups also becomes a child workgroup checked Save All the data added or modified and added into/deleted from the rows in the table are saved into the permanent repository. The main groups gets saved as child workgroup if the check box is selected for “is it a child workgroup?” Once saving is done, return back to the main workgroup screen with all the fresh updates Cancel All the data entered is reset with empty/initial values in the data entry fields as the case may be (Text Field, List etc). If a row (which is retrieved from the database) is already modified and added to the table on the screen and the “Cancel” button is pressed, the row remains with the modified values.

3.1.4. User Interface Id: Child Work Group

3.1.4.1. Screen Name: Child Work Group (BPI_CAS_UTL_SCR_(—)002_(—)003) (See Figure N-6)

3.1.4.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being “Child “Child navigated Workgroup” Workgroup” Name Text Name Text For “Name” Name Entry Entry Field Name Entry Entry field for entering the name Field Field Description Text Description Text for “Description” Description Entry Field Description Entry field for entering the description Entry Field Entry Field Main Work Text Main Work Text for Main Work Group Group Group Main Work Search Main Work Search Window with all active Main Work group Group Search Group Search Add HTML Button Add Button for adding the name/description into the HTML table. Changes with label “Modify” when the row in the table is on edit mode. Table HTML table Table For displaying all the information added by pressing the add button, in the form of rows, for every add operation/Rows retrieved from the permanent repository Delete Button (HTML Delete To delete the rows checked Button) Check All Text Link Check All To check all the check boxes in the table Clear All Text Link Clear All To un check all the check boxes checked in the table/does not function when all the checkboxes in the table are unchecked Delete Check box Delete To check the items for deletion Edit Button (HTML Edit To edit the rows entered by “Add”/ Button) “Modify”/displayed from permanent repository against the row selected for editing Save Button (HTML Save Save the information to the repository Submit button) Cancel Button Cancel Reset information as described in the scenarios

3.1.4.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Name Mandatory Entry When the Add HTML Button is Entry Field Becomes non editable when on modify mode for pressed with an empty entry on data from permanent repository the name entry field, an Error Dialog Box pops up with the message “Please enter the name before adding to the table” with “yes” option On press of Yes Button, The cursor must be placed on the name entry field Add On Clicking add button or the pressing the enter When the Add HTML Button is key field with the cursor position on the Add pressed with an empty entry on button, The data gets added to the table. the name entry field, an Error Validation checks are done to not allow null value Dialog Box pops up with the on the name entry field. message “Please enter the name Must not allow duplicate entries on the name before adding to the table” with Must not allow the length of the field entry to go “yes” option. beyond as per the database design for the On press of Yes Button, The column cursor must be placed on the Must choose a Main work group name entry field For duplicate entries, Error dialog box - “Duplicate values not allowed. Please enter again” For category, Error dialog Box “Please choose a Main Work Group” with a Yes Option Modify On Clicking modify button or the pressing the None enter key field with the cursor position on the modify button, The data gets added to the table. Table Should have column header and each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. i.e. First row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of any text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. The letters must be green in color for the rows retrieved from the permanent repository and red for the rows in temporary storage. All the letters of the row on edit must be in dark gray. Delete Should function with enter key cursor positioned Error Dialog Box: “Please choose on the “Delete” button or on mouse click the row or rows to be deleted.” Delete button should work on multiple deletes with “yes” option based on the check box or boxes selected. If the user clicks on the delete button without checking any of the check box should throw error message. Success: Deletes the row or rows from the table (temporary storage) Check All On clicking the “Check All” link should check all Not Applicable the check boxes in the HTML table. Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link should uncheck all Not Applicable the checked check boxes in the HTML table. Edit Should function with Enter Key Cursor positioned on the “Edit” button or on mouse click. Refer Interface flow on scenarios - “edit data” Save Should function with enter key cursor positioned Not Applicable on the “Save” button or on mouse click? On saving the data the data gets saved to the permanent repository. Cancel All the data entered is reset with empty/initial Not Applicable values in the data entry fields as the case may be (Text Field, List etc). If a row is already modified and added to the table on the screen and the Cancel button is pressed, the row remains with the modified values Browser When a user tries to close the window with out Error Dialog box message: “Do Window saving data into the permanent repository, a you want to save all changes dialog box pops up before closing/leaving the window?” with a “Yes” and “No” option. On press of “Yes” leads to saving of information and “No” leads to the Parent screen with the original values

3.1.4.4. Screen Flow

The user enters the information on the Child work Group name and description and assigns to a Main work group.

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen Scenario Description Add data entered Adding the data entered (pressing the “Add” Button) leads to adding name, description and Main Workgroup to a temporary storage. The data gets loaded into the permanent repository only after the user saves the information. Modify data entered When a row is selected for an edit operation, the row is highlighted and data elements populated into respective fields and the add button has a label “modify”. Modifying the data entered (pressing the “Modify” button) leads to adding the non-editable name information, modified “description”, main workgroup to a temporary storage. The data gets loaded into the permanent repository only after the user saves the information. Edit data Editing the Data (pressing the “Edit” Button). The edit operation may be on any of the two scenarios. 1 (Edit for rows from database) When the user comes to the Child workgroups screen and the screen is already loaded with data from the permanent repository into a table on the screen. 2. (Edit for rows from the temporary storage) When the user has just added the data into a table on the screen and wants to edit the data entered before saving The data in the table on the screen would be shown as green letters for the data from the database and red letters for the data that is in the temporary storage (not saved yet). The table shall have alternate rows colored with different light colors Under 1, on an edit operation for a row on the table, the row does not get deleted from the table and the data is transferred to the name (becomes non editable) and editable description/Main Work group Under 2, on an edit operation for a row on the table, the row gets deleted from the table and the data is transferred to the name, description/Main work group(default), which are editable. When a row is on edit mode, the letters are in dark gray color in the table. Search The search window must generate a list of all active Main Work Groups. The user will not be allowed to make entries into the entry field where the search results are going to be put in. Delete Checked The data in the table on the screen contains the data, which is from the Rows permanent repository, or the data just added and is in temporary storage. When the rows are “checked” for the rows that contain the data from the repository and a “Delete Checked Rows” is performed, inactivation takes place on saving the information provided there are no subtypes else provides the user with the necessary error information in an error page. Message “The following Child workgroup has associated members” - “Member1 . . . Member n” members could be employer groups, Agent/Agency, Mail work groups or Associates When the rows are “checked” for the rows that contain the data from the temporary storage and a “Delete Checked Rows” is performed, the rows are deleted from the temporary storage. Check All Enables checking of all the checkboxes by checking “check All” Check Box Check All & Delete Enables deleting all the rows from the table on the screen enabled by “check Checked Rows All” Check Any Number Enables deleting the rows from the table on the screen that are only checked. & Delete Checked Rows Check All & Clear Enables clearing (removing the check) all checked rows done by “Check All” All Check Any Number Enables clearing (removing the check) the rows that are checked. & Clear All Clear All when no The user can only press the button and nothing happens like checking, rows are checked removing a check Save All the data added or modified and added into/deleted from the rows in the table are saved into the permanent repository Once saving is done, return back to the Child workgroup screen with all the fresh updates Cancel All the data entered is reset with empty/initial values in the data entry fields as the case may be (Text Field, List etc). If a row (which is retrieved from the database) is already modified and added to the table on the screen and the “Cancel” button is pressed, the row remains with the modified values.

3.1.5. User Interface Id: Mail Members

3.1.5.1. Screen Name: Mail Members (BPI_CAS_UTL_SCR_(—)002_(—)004) (See Figure N-7)

3.1.5.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being “Mail Members” “Mail navigated Members” Mail ID Text Mail ID Text For “Mail ID” Mail ID Entry Entry Field Mail ID Entry Entry field for entering the Mail ID Field Field Child Text Child Text for “Child Workgroup” Workgroup Workgroup Child Search Child Search window with all active Child Work Workgroup Workgroup Groups under the category Mail Search Search Add HTML Button Add Button for adding the name/description in to the HTML table. Changes with label “Modify” when the row in the table is on edit mode. Table HTML table Table For displaying all the information added by pressing the add button, in the form of rows, for every add operation/Rows retrieved from the permanent repository Delete Button (HTML Delete To delete the rows checked Button) Check All Text Link Check All To check all the check boxes in the table Clear All Text Link Clear All To un check all the check boxes checked in the table/does not function when all the checkboxes in the table are unchecked Delete Check box Delete To check the items for deletion Edit Button (HTML Edit To edit the rows entered by “Add”/ Button) “Modify”/displayed from permanent repository against the row selected for edition Save Button (HTML Save Save the information to the repository Submit button) Cancel Button Cancel Reset information as described in the scenarios

3.1.5.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Mail ID Mandatory Entry When the Add HTML Button is Entry Field Must accept a valid mail id format pressed with an empty entry on the mail id entry field, an Error Dialog Box pops up with the message “Please enter the name before adding to the table” with “yes” option On press of Yes Button, The cursor must be placed on the name entry field When the Add HTML Button is pressed with an invalid entry on the mail id entry field, an Error Dialog Box pops up with the message “Please enter a valid Mail ID” with “yes” option On press of Yes Button, The cursor must be placed on the name entry field Add On Clicking add button or the pressing the enter When the Add HTML Button is key field with the cursor position on the Add pressed with an empty entry on button, The data gets added to the table. the name entry field, an Error Validation checks are done to not allow null value Dialog Box pops up with the on the Mail ID entry field. message “Please enter the Mail Must not allow duplicate entries on the name ID before adding to the table” with Must not allow the length of the field entry to go “yes” option. beyond as per the database design for the On press of Yes Button, The column cursor must be placed on the Must Choose a Child workgroup name entry field For duplicate entries, Error dialog box - “Duplicate values not allowed. Please enter again” For child workgroup, Error Dialog Box “Please choose a Child workgroup” Modify On Clicking modify button or the pressing the None enter key field with the cursor position on the modify button, The data gets added to the table. Table Should have column header and each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. i.e. First row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of any text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. The letters must be green in color for the rows retrieved from the permanent repository and red for the rows in temporary storage. All the letters of the row on edit must be in dark gray. Delete Should function with enter key cursor positioned Error Dialog Box: “Please choose on the “Delete” button or on mouse click the row or rows to be deleted.” Delete button should work on multiple deletes with “yes” option based on the check box or boxes selected. If the user clicks on the delete button without checking any of the check box should throw error message. Success: Deletes the row or rows from the table (temporary storage) Check All On clicking the “Check All” link should check all Not Applicable the check boxes in the HTML table. Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link should uncheck all Not Applicable the checked check boxes in the HTML table. Edit Should function with Enter Key Cursor positioned on the “Edit” button or on mouse click. Refer Interface flow on scenarios - “edit data” Save Should function with enter key cursor positioned Not Applicable on the “Save” button or on mouse click? On saving the data the data gets saved to the permanent repository. Cancel All the data entered is reset with empty/initial Not Applicable values in the data entry fields as the case may be (Text Field, List etc). If a row is already modified and added to the table on the screen and the Cancel button is pressed, the row remains with the modified values Browser When a user tries to close the window with out Error Dialog box message: “Do Window saving data into the permanent repository, a you want to save all changes dialog box pops up before closing/leaving the window?” with a “Yes” and “No” option. On press of “Yes” leads to saving of information and “No” leads to the Category screen with the original values

3.1.5.4. Screen Flow

The user enters the information on the Mail ID and Child Workgroup

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen Scenario Description Add data entered Adding the data entered (pressing the “Add” Button) leads to adding mail id and Child Workgroup to a temporary storage. The data gets loaded into the permanent repository only after the user saves the information. Modify data entered When a row is selected for an edit operation, the row is highlighted and data elements populated into respective fields and the add button has a label “modify”. Modifying the data entered (pressing the “Modify” button) leads to adding modified information to a temporary storage. The data gets loaded into the permanent repository only after the user saves the information. Edit data Editing the Data (pressing the “Edit” Button). The edit operation may be on any of the two scenarios. 1(Edit for rows from database) When the user comes to the Mail Member screen and the screen is already loaded with data from the permanent repository into a table on the screen. 2(Edit for rows from the temporary storage) When the user has just added the data into a table on the screen and wants to edit the data entered before saving The data in the table on the screen would be shown as green letters for the data from the database and red letters for the data that is in the temporary storage (not saved yet). The table shall have alternate rows colored with different light colors Under 1, on an edit operation for a row on the table, the row does not get deleted from the table and the data is transferred to the mail id and Child Workgroup. Under 2, on an edit operation for a row on the table, the row gets deleted from the table and the data is transferred to the mail id and child workgroup, which are editable. When a row is on edit mode, the letters are in dark gray color in the table.

The search window must generate a list of all active Child work groups for category Mail. The user will not be allowed to make entries into the entry field where the search results are going to be put in. Delete Checked Rows The data in the table on the screen contains the data, which is from the permanent repository, or the data just added and is in temporary storage. When the rows are “checked” for the rows that contain the data from the repository and a “Delete Checked Rows” is performed, inactivation takes place on saving the information When the rows are “checked” for the rows that contain the data from the temporary storage and a “Delete Checked Rows” is performed, the rows are deleted from the temporary storage. Check All Enables checking of all the checkboxes by checking “check All” Check Box Check All & Delete Checked Rows Enables deleting all the rows from the table on the screen enabled by “check All” Check Any Number & Delete Checked Rows Enables deleting the rows from the table on the screen that are only checked. Check All & Clear All Enables clearing (removing the check) all checked rows done by “Check All” Check Any Number & Clear All Enables clearing (removing the check) the rows that are checked. Clear All when no rows are checked The user can only press the button and nothing happens like checking, removing a check Save All the data added or modified and added into/deleted from the rows in the table are saved into the permanent repository Once saving is done, return back to the Mail Member screen with all the fresh updates Cancel All the data entered is reset with empty/initial values in the data entry fields as the case may be (Text Field, List etc). If a row (which is retrieved from the database) is already modified and added to the table on the screen and the “Cancel” button is pressed, the row remains with the modified values.

3.1.6. User Interface Id: Swap Members

3.1.6.1. Screen Name: Swap Members (BPI_CAS_UTL_SCR_(—)002_(—)005)

3.1.6.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Header Text To give the heading for the screen being navigated “Swap Members” Choose Source Text Text For “Choose Source Child Workgroup” Child Work Group Choose Source Search Search window showing a list of all child work groups Child Work Group Choose Text Text for “Child Workgroup” Destination Work Group Choose List Search window showing a list of all active child work groups Destination Child Work Group Do you want to Text Text for “Do you want to do a full or partial or duplicate swap?” do a full or partial or duplicate swap? Partial/Full Radio Buttons Default - Partial Table HTML table For displaying all the information of rows retrieved from the permanent repository Swap Button (HTML To swap the rows checked Button) Check All Text Link To check all the check boxes in the table Clear All Text Link To un check all the check boxes checked in the table/does not function when all the checkboxes in the table are unchecked

3.1.6.3. Front End Validations Element Action/ Name Validation Details Error Message Text Submit The source and Error Dialog “Source and Destination destination child work Child Groups cannot be the same” with group must not a Yes Option be the same Error Dialog “Source and Destination The source and Child Groups must belong to the same destination groups Main Workgroup” with yes option must belong to Error Dialog “Child workgroups must the same Main belong to the same category” Workgroup The Child work groups must belong to the same category Swap As mentioned As mentioned in scenario in scenario

3.1.6.4. Screen Flow

The user chooses the source and destination child workgroups and decided whether the swap is for full or partial members of the workgroup.

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen Scenario Description Submit Press the submit button after choosing the valid values from the source and destination child groups and whether the swap is in full or partial. Full swap leads to swapping of all the members of the source to the destination. Partial swap leads to the screen showing the list of all members of the source in alphabetical order and enables the user to check members who are to be swapped to the destination child group Duplicate swap leads to the screen showing the list of all members of the source in alphabetical order and enables the user to check members who are to be swapped to the destination child group and would also remain in the source child group (Duplicate) Inserts information of the swap into the database and navigates to the confirmation screen Yes/No Yes leads to the swap members screen and No leads to the work Group Home Page

4. Business Rule Mapping Activity Rules Create Category Should have unique Id for a category - 10 digits with an increment of 1, Say CT00000001, CT00000002, CT00000003 and so on. Create Main Should have unique Id 10 digit for a main Workgroup workgroup with an increment of 1, Say 1000, 1001, 1002 and so on. Create Child Should have unique Id 4 digit for a child workgroup Workgroup with an increment of 1, Say 1000, 1001, 1002 and so on. Create Mail Should have unique Id 4 digit for a mail member Members with an increment of 1, Say 1000, 1001, 1002 and so on. Create Should have unique Id 4 digit for a parent with an swap increment of 1, Say 1000, 1001, 1002 and so on.

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification Supply Request-Internal Document id: BPI_CAS_FSD_UTL_03 Version: <1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Jan. 13, 2002 Mahalingam Ramamoorthi 1.0 Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Process Description 5

2.2. Process Flow 5

3. User Interface 7

3.1. User Interface Screens 7

3.1.1. Screen ID's 7

3.1.2. User Interface Id: Supply Request-Interal 7

3.1.3. User Interface Id: Internal Supply Request Confirmation 9

3.1.4. User Interface Id: Supply Request Fulfillment Confirmation 10

4. Business Rule Mapping 13

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

This functional specification document addresses the part of the Core Administration System that would facilitate the sending of Supply Requests or any handbooks to employer groups or the members of a group.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name None None

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1. Process Description

A Supply Request—Internal contains a list of all stationeries ordered from individual associates for their daily use, which shall be facilitated and fulfilled by a specific department of a person.

2.2. Process Flow (See Figure N-8)

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Screen ID's Screen Corresponding HTML File Screen ID (SID) Name Name utl.supplyrequest. Supply InternalSupplyRequest.jsp internal Request Internal utl.supplyrequestview. Supply InternalSupplyRequestView.jsp internal Request Internal View utl.supplyrequestresult. Supply InternalSupplyRequestResult.jsp internal Request Internal utl.supplyconfirm. Supply InternalSupplyRequestMailConfirm. internal Request jsp Internal Confir- mation

3.1.2. User Interface Id: Supply Request—Internal

3.1.2.1. Screen Name: Supply Request—Internal (BPI_CAS_UTL_SCR_(—)003_(—)001) (See Figure N-9)

3.1.2.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being “Internal Supply “Internal navigated Request” Supply Request” Text items as Text Text items as To provide information as shown in the screen shown in the shown in the along with Qty Text and in Boxes as shown in screen screen the screen snapshot Qty Entry Field Entry Field Qty Entry Entry field for Quantity for all items Field Special Text Special Text for “Special Instructions” Instructions Text Instructions Text Special Text Area Special Text Area For Special Instructions Instructions Text Instructions Area Text Area Confirm Check Box Confirm Check Box for “Confirm Fulfillment by Email” Fulfillment by Fulfillment by Email Email Save Button (HTML Save Save the information to the repository Submit button) Cancel Button Cancel Reset information as described in the scenarios

3.1.2.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Save Should function with enter key cursor positioned Mandatory Entries: on the “Save” button or on mouse click. 6) Choose anyone item with On saving the data the data gets saved to the Qty permanent repository. And send an email to the Error dialog Box - “Choose Any fulfillment staff along with a confirmation page to one item with Quantity” with Yes the user option Mandatory Entry 1) Choose any one item with Qty Cancel All the data entered is reset with null values in the Not Applicable data entry fields as the case may be (Text Field, List etc).

3.1.2.4. Screen Flow

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen Scenario Description Save Pressing the save button leads to saving the data in the repository, sending an email to fulfillment Specialist and confirmation to the user who has checked the confirmation by email check box Email Content - Subject: Internal Supply Request Dear Staff, Please forward the following to the address mention below Items - Qty Special Instructions Thanks <ID of the person who has made the request> Cancel All the data entered is reset with empty in the data entry fields as the case may be (Text Field, List etc).

3.1.3. User Interface Id: Internal Supply Request Confirmation

3.1.3.1. Screen Name: Internal Supply Request Confirmation (BPI_CAS_UTL_SCR_(—)003_(—)002)

3.1.3.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for “Supply Request - “Supply the screen being navigated Internal Request - Confirmation” Internal Confirmation” Message Text Message Text For “The Supply Request has been forwarded to the fulfillment specialist” Message Text Message Text For “The Reference confirmation number is” Dynamic Text Text Dynamic Text Dynamic Value Text for“ <Supply Request ID>” Do you want to Text Do you want Text for “Do you create more to create want to create more requests? more requests?” requests? Yes Link Yes Link for “Yes” No Link No Link for “No”

3.1.3.3. Front End Validations

None.

3.1.3.4. Screen Flow

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen Scenario Description Yes Leads to the Supply Request - Internal Screen No Leads to the Supply Request - Internal Home Page

3.1.4. User Interface Id: Supply Request Fulfillment Confirmation

3.1.4.1. Screen Name: Supply Request Fulfillment Confirmation (BPI_CAS_UTL_SCR_(—)003_(—)003) (See Figure N-10)

3.1.4.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for “Internal Supply “Internal the screen being navigated Request- Supply Fulfillment Request- Confirmation” Fulfillment Confirmation” Message Text Message Text For “The following are the pending Supply Requests. On fulfilling the request, check the row and press save to confirm” Check All Link Check All Checks all the check Boxes Clear All Link Clear All Clears All or any Checked Boxes Save HTML Save Save Button Button Cancel HTML Cancel Cancel Button Button

3.1.4.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text Save Must choose at least Error Dialog Box - “Please Check one check Box at least one row” with yes option

3.1.4.4. Screen Flow

The following are the scenarios the user may come across when operating on the screen Scenario Description On Entering the Provides a list of all pending requests screen Check All Checks all the check Boxes Clear All Clears all the Check Boxes/Or any checked boxes Save Saves all the updates made and send email to the personnel who made the request where the confirmation on fulfillment by Email check Box is checked. The user Email details are picked up from the security framework Email: Subject: Internal Supply Request Fulfillment” Dear “Name” We have fulfilled your request <Supply Request id> on “date of saving the fulfillment request” Thanks Internal SuppliesFulfillment Staff Cancel Resets the screen with original values before a save

4. Business Rule Mapping Activity Rules Create Internal Should have unique Id for a Supply Request - 10 Supply Request ID digits with an increment of 1, Say IN00000001, IN00000002, IN00000003 and so on.

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specifications Associates Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_UTL_04 Version: <1.1> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference 1/12/01 Ramamoorthi Mahalingam 1.0 Initial Version 15/05/02 Riyaz Mohamed 1.1 Updated Version Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Background 5

2.2. Process Description 5

2.3. Process Flow 5

3. User Interface 6

3.1. User Interface Screens 6

3.1.1. Screen ID 6

4. Business Rule Mapping 7

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

This functional specification document addresses the part of the sales and marketing system that would deal with creation of master records for internal and external associates.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name None None

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1. Process Description & Flow

The Internal associates are the associates who are employed by BPI and work with BPI. External associates are the associates who are associated with the Business and may not be employed by BPI.

The associates masters are created and assigned to a child work groups

The user has the option to create, modify, delete and view within the same screen.

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Screen ID's Corresponding HTML File Screen ID (SID) Screen Name Name sales.associate.create Associates CreateAssociate.jsp

3.1.2. User Interface Id: Associates

3.1.2.1. Screen Name: Associates (BPI_CAS_UTL_SCR_(—)004_(—)001) (See Figure N-11)

3.1.2.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Element Name Type Label Purpose Main Header Text Main Header To give the heading for the screen being “Internal “Internal navigated Associate” Associate” Sub Header Text Sub Header To give the heading for the section being “General “General navigated Information” Information” Association Text Association To show Association type Type Type Internal Radio Internal To show Association type External Radio External To show Association type Salutation Text Salutation Used in sub section General Information Salutation List Salutation List for Salutation - Mr., Mrs., Miss First Name Text First Name Used in sub section General Information First Name Entry Field First Name Entry field for first name. MI Text MI Used in sub section General Information MI Entry Field MI Entry Field for MI. Used in sub section General Information Last Name Text Last Name Used in sub section General Information Last Name Entry Field Last Name Entry Field for Last Name. Used in sub section General Information Suffix Text Suffix Used in sub section General Information Suffix List Suffix List showing Sr, Jr. Used in sub section General Information Address Text Address Used in sub section General Information Address Entry Field Address Entry Field for Address, Used in sub section General Information Apt No Text Apt No Used in sub section General Information Apt No Entry Field Apt No Entry Field for Suite/Apt no. Used in sub section General Information City Text City Used in sub section General Information City Entry Field City Entry Filed for City. Used in sub section General Information Zip Text Zip Used in sub section General Information Zip Entry Field Zip Entry Field for Zip. Used in sub section General Information State Text State Used in sub section General Information State List State List of all states in USA. Used in sub section General Information Sub Header Text Sub Header To give heading for the subsection “Contact Details” “Contact Details” Phone Text Phone Text for Phone Phone Entry Field Phone Entry Field for Phone Fax Text Fax Text for Fax Fax Entry Field Fax Entry Field for Fax Email Text Email Text for EMail Email Entry Entry Field Email Entry Entry Field for EMail Field Field Sub Header Text Sub Header To give heading for the subsection “Associated “Associated Workgroups” Workgroups” Associated Text Associated Text for Associated workgroups Workgroup Workgroup Associated work Search Associated Search for Associated child work groups for groups (non work groups category Internal Associates editable) with (non editable) search with search Sub Header Text Sub Header To give heading for the subsection “Other “Other Information” Information” License Number Text License Text for “License Number” Number License Number Entry Field License Entry Field for: License Number” Number Add HTML Button Add Button for adding the name/description in to the HTML table. Changes with label “Modify” when the row in the table is on edit mode. Table HTML table Table For displaying all the information added by pressing the add button, in the form of rows, for every add operation/Rows retrieved from the permanent repository Delete Button Delete To delete the rows checked (HTML Button) Check All Text Link Check All To check all the check boxes in the table Clear All Text Link Clear All To uncheck all the check boxes checked in the table/does not function when all the checkboxes in the table are unchecked Delete Check box Delete To check the items for deletion Edit Button Edit To edit the rows entered by “Add”/ (HTML “Modify”/displayed from permanent repository Button) against the row selected for edition Save Button Save Save the information to the repository (HTML Submit button) Cancel Button Cancel Reset information as described in the scenarios

3.1.2.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Error Message Text First Name Mandatory Entry When the Add HTML Button is Accepts Alpha numeric characters pressed with an empty entry on the name entry field, an Error Dialog Box pops up with the message “First Name is required” name before adding to the table” License Alpha Numeric When the Add HTML Button is Number pressed with a non numeric entry on the License Number, an Error Dialog Box pops up with the message “License Number - Accepts Alpha numeric values only” Add On Clicking add button or the pressing the enter When the Add HTML Button is key field with the cursor position on the Add pressed without choosing the button, The data gets added to the table. child work group, an Error Dialog Validation checks are done to not allow null value Box pops up with the message on the First name entry field. “Assigned Workgroup is required” Must not allow the length of the field entry to go beyond as per the database design for the column Must choose a workgroup Modify On Clicking modify button or the pressing the Same as Add enter key field with the cursor position on the modify button, The data gets added to the table. Table Should have column header and each subsequent row should be identified by alternate color combinations. i.e. First row should have color ‘x’ and the next row should have color ‘y’. The next row should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The size of any text inside any cell should be wrapped if the text becomes too long. The letters must be green in color for the rows retrieved from the permanent repository and red for the rows in temporary storage. All the letters of the row on edit must be in dark gray. Delete Should function with enter key cursor positioned Error Dialog Box: “Select a on the “Delete” button or on mouse click record(s) to delete.” with “yes” Delete button should work on multiple deletes option based on the check box or boxes selected. If the user clicks on the delete button without checking any of the check box should throw error message. Success: Deletes the row or rows from the table (temporary storage) Check All On clicking the “Check All” link should check all Not Applicable the check boxes in the HTML table. Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link should uncheck all Not Applicable the checked check boxes in the HTML table. Edit Should function with Enter Key Cursor positioned on the “Edit” button or on mouse click. Refer Interface flow on scenarios - “edit data” Save Should function with enter key cursor positioned Not Applicable on the “Save” button or on mouse click On saving the data the data gets saved to the permanent repository Cancel All the data entered is reset with empty/initial Not Applicable values in the data entry fields as the case may be (Text Field, List etc). If a row is already modified and added to the table on the screen and the Cancel button is pressed, the row remains with the modified values

3.1.2.4. Screen Flow Scenario Description Click On click of Internal/External Association type. Available Internal/External Internal/External associated workgroup in the system will be listed in the respective list box. workgroup Radio button Add Selected Assigning the Internal/External workgroup. Internal/External Workgroup Remove Selected Remove the assigned Internal/External workgroup. Internal/External Workgroup Add data entered Adding the data entered (pressing the “Add” Button) leads to adding name (first name + Last Name) and child work group to a temporary storage. The data gets loaded into the permanent repository only after the user saves the information. Modify data entered When a row is selected for an edit operation, the row is highlighted and data elements populated into respective fields and the add button has a label “modify”. Modifying the data entered (pressing the “Modify” button) leads to adding the information to a temporary storage. The data gets loaded into the permanent repository only after the user saves the information. Search The search window must generate a list of all active child groups for Category Internal Associates. The user will not be allowed to make entries into the entry field where the search results are going to be put in. Edit data Editing the Data (pressing the “Edit”Button). The edit operation may be on any of the two scenarios. 1 (Edit for rows from database) When the user comes to the Internal Associates screen and the screen is already loaded with data from the permanent repository into a table on the screen. 2. (Edit for rows from the temporary storage) When the user has just added the data into a table on the screen and wants to edit the data entered before saving The data in the table on the screen would be shown as green letters for the data from the database and red letters for the data that is in the temporary storage (not saved yet). The table shall have alternate rows colored with different light colors Under 1, on an edit operation for a row on the table, the row does not get deleted from the table and the data is transferred to the placeholders. Under 2, on an edit operation for a row on the table, the row gets deleted from the table and the data is transferred to the placeholders, which are editable. When a row is on edit mode, the letters are in dark gray color in the table. Delete Checked The data in the table on the screen contains the data, which is from the Rows permanent repository, or the data just added and is in temporary storage. When the rows are “checked” for the rows that contain the data from the repository and a “Delete Checked Rows” is performed, inactivation takes place on saving the information When the rows are “checked” for the rows that contain the data from the temporary storage and a “Delete Checked Rows” is performed, the rows are deleted from the temporary storage. Check All Enables checking of all the checkboxes by checking “check All” Check Box Check All & Delete Enables deleting all the rows from the table on the screen enabled by “check Checked Rows All” Check Any Number Enables deleting the rows from the table on the screen that are only checked. & Delete Checked Rows Check All & Clear Enables clearing (removing the check) all checked rows done by “ Check All” All Check Any Number Enables clearing (removing the check) the rows that are checked. & Clear All Clear All when no The user can only press the button and nothing happens like checking, rows are checked removing a check Save All the data added or modified and added into/deleted from the rows in the table are saved into the permanent repository Once saving is done, return back to the Internal Associates screen with all the fresh updates Cancel All the data entered is reset with empty/initial values in the data entry fields as the case may be (Text Field, List etc). If a row (which is retrieved from the database) is already modified and added to the table on the screen and the “Cancel” button is pressed, the row remains with the modified values.

4. Business Rule Mapping Activity Rules Create Should have unique Id for an Associates - 10 digits Associate with an increment of 1, Say 0000000001, ID 0000000002, 0000000003 and so on.

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification Call Tracking Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_UTL_05 Version: <1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Mar. 06, 2002 Sudhakar K 1.0 Baseline Release Apr. 18, 2002 Sudhakar K 1.0 REV 1 Revision 1 Apr. 22, 2002 Sudhakar K 1.0 REV 2 Revision 2 Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Background 5

2.2. Process Description 5

2.3. Process Flow 5

3. User Interface 6

3.1. User Interface Screens 6

3.1.1. Screen ID's 6

3.1.2. User Interface Id: Call Tracking 6

3.1.3. User Interface Id: Call Tracking To Do List 8

4. Business Rule Mapping 10

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

The purpose of this document is to describe the process of Call Tracking. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.

1.2 Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name None None

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1. Back ground

Call tracking is used to basically track the calls that are made or received with specific business intentions. The call can be inbound or outbound based on the nature of calls.

2.2. Process Description

The objective of the Call Tracking process is to:

-   -   1) Provide for a user interface for calls categorized as inbound         or outbound.     -   2) The inbound or outbound calls would make up the “To Do List”         based on follow up required to be performed by the work group         associated with the call in question.

2.3. Process Flow

Process for Call Tracking

-   -   1) Call would be identified as inbound or outbound.     -   2) The user requests the Call Tracking screen (somehow—either         menu or something else) and then the Call Tracking appears as a         child window. In this case the user can still view the         information brought up for use in the inquiry while completing         the Call Log. In this case the user would have to specify the         type of referenced entity, either Group or Agent, then enter the         ID of the referenced entity, the caller name, the nature of         call, any remarks, and finally whether follow-up is required.     -   3) All calls received, having specific inquiries or intentions         by the caller, would be documented only at the Group level or         Agent level. For instance, if the group calls in reference to a         specific employee, then when logging the call, the user will         indicate the Group ID, the caller name, the nature of call and         indicate in the remarks section of the call log, the specific         Employee name/ID.     -   4) All calls made would have the nature of calls that specifies         the nature or reasons for the call received or made. If         “referenced entity” is “Group” then nature of call list is         displayed for “Group”—If referenced entity is “Agent” then         nature of call list is displayed for “Agent”.     -   5) Date and time stamp for the calls received or made would be         automatically stamped by the system.     -   6) If any call needs follow up it would be flagged for follow up         and would be visible in the “To Do List” sorted by Date and         Workgroup.     -   7) All completed follow up would have completed status to mark.

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Screen ID's Corresponding HTML File Screen ID (SID) Screen Name Name utl.calltracking.create Call Tracking CallTracking.jsp utl.calltracking.todolist To Do List ToDoList.jsp

3.1.2. User Interface Id: Call Tracking

3.1.2.1. Screen Name: Call Tracking (BPI_CAS_UTL_SCR_(—)005_(—)001) (See Figure N-12)

3.1.2.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Name Element Type Purpose Call Type Drop down list Select the type of call RE: Text To provide text Group Radio Button To select either Group or Agent for what the call was regarding. Caller name Entry Field Enter the caller name This will allow a search capability in order to link the inbound call to the correct agent or group Nature of Call Text To provide text Group Nature of Call Drop down list Select the nature of call based on the caller type Group Nature of Call Text To provide text Agent Nature of Call Drop down list Select the nature of call based on the caller type Agent Other Entry Field Enter if other Should only appear if “other” is selected from drop down menu. Follow Up Check Box To check if follow up required Required Follow Up Date Text To provide text Follow Up Date Entry Field To specify date for follow-up. Default should be next day. Date will have an option of a calendar or entering the date in the format MM/DD/YYYY Date and Time Date Text To specify the date Stamp Comments Text Box Text area to enter comments Save HTML Button To save the data captured Cancel HTML Reset Button To reset to the status as was on loading the page.

3.1.2.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Call type Should list the call types of In bound “Call Type - is required” nad Out bound. The first option should be - Choose One --. Subsequent call types should listed in alphabetical order. Caller name Entry field for entering the caller “Caller Name - Is required.” name “Caller Name - Accepts alphabetic characters only” Nature of Call Nature of call depends on the “Nature of Call - Is required.” “referenced entity”. Each “referenced entity” has a different list for choosing Nature of Call. Hence the list should get populated based on the “referenced entity”. Categories for Nature of Call are included in the drop down menu list. Other If the nature of call is other. Entry “Others - is required.” field to write other. Follow Up Check box to be un checked by None Required default. Checked if required for follow up. Follow Up Date To specify date for follow-up, should “Follow-up Date - Is required” default to next working day “Follow-up Date - Accepts date from 1900 following. to 2200 in the format of MM/DD/YYYY” Comments Text area to write comments “Comments - Accepts all Alphanumeric and special Characters except double quotes.” Save On click should save the data “The Field Name is blank. Please enter a captured above into the repository valid value.” Cancel Reset to the state as was on loading None the page on click.

3.1.2.4. Screen Flow

None.

3.1.3. User Interface Id: Call Tracking To Do List

3.1.3.1. Screen Name: Call Tracking To Do List (BPI_CAS_UTL_SCR_(—)005_(—)002) (See Figure N-13)

3.1.3.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Name Element Type Label Purpose Call type Text Call type To provide text Call Type Radio Call Type To Select a rate type (Whether Inbound or Out bound) Follow-up Text Follow-up Date To provide text Date Follow-up Entry Field/ Follow-up Date To pick the date for the to do list Date Calendar Called Date text Called Date To provide text. Called Date text Called Date To pick the date for the to do list. Search Button Search To show the To do List based on the called date Table HTML Table Table Table to provide the inbound or outbound calls information. Task Check Box Task Completed To check if task completed Completed Save HTML Submit Save To save the data button Cancel HTML reset Cancel To reset button

3.1.3.3. Front End Validations Element Name Action/Validation Details Message Follow-up Date Choose follow-update radio button. “Follow-up Date - Is required.” And Select the date to show the to do “Follow-up Date - Accepts date from 1900 list. to 2200 in the format of MM/DD/YYYY” Called Date Choose Called Date radio button and “Called Date - Is required.” select the date to show the to do list. “Called Date - Accepts date from 1900 to 2200 in the format of MM/DD/YYYY” Search On Click should show the To Do none List based on the date selected Table Table to display the data. The table None should only contain that data or called that need to be followed up. (i.e. Check box Checked for the Follow up required in previous screen BPI_CAS_SCR_UTL_05_001 Task Completed Default unchecked. If Checked and None saved should not allow for Un checking again. Save On click should save the data None captured above into the repository Cancel Reset to the state as was on loading None the page on click.

3.1.3.4. Screen Flow

None.

4. Business Rule Mapping Activity Rules

Benefit Partners Inc

Process Specification

BPI_CAS_FSD_SECURITY_(—)01

Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_SECURITY_(—)01

Version 1.0

This Communication and the documents accompanying this document are confidential property of Mascon (http://www.masconit.com/). You may not forward, disclose or release this document without prior consent from the author. If you are not the intended recipient, you are here by notified that any form of disclosure, copying, distribution or taking any action based on any of available information, is strictly prohibited.

By reading this document you agree to all the above terms. Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Jan. 03, 2002 Amit Pramod Ambardekar 1.0 Initial version Review Date Reviewed By: Position Jan. 03, 2002 L Chandrashekhar Team Leader Jan. 03, 2002 K Sudhakar Technical Architect Jan. 03, 2002 Mahalingam Ramamoorthi Onsite Co Ordinater Approval Date Approval By: Position Jan. 03, 2002 K Sudhakar Onsite Architect Jan. 03, 2002 Mahalingam Ramamoorthi Onsite Co Ordinater

1.1 Introduction

This purpose of this document is to identify the processes associated with the security mechanism for core administrative system

1.2 Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name NONE NONE

1.3 Process Identification

1.3.1 Process Description & Flow

This process describes the security framework requirements. The security framework consists of creating database for security system as well as administrator login into the system. The system also allows the administrator to create users, module, groups, and application, assign user roles and ACL etc. The system also takes care of user login into the core administrative system. The system should generate the ACL for each user when user logs in into the system. The access to any resource in the core administrative system will be decided by this ACL which will be stored in the User Profile object, stored into the session.

The security system for Intranet application built for shall broadly contain following categories.

-   -   1. Definition of Realms     -   2. Definition of Modules     -   3. Definition of Applications     -   4. Definition of Resources     -   5. Definition of groups (groups can ideally be a department         which has a number of users)     -   6. Definition of User     -   7. Definition of User Roles     -   8. Definition ACL/Permissions     -   9. Resources, which can be assigned to the groups.     -   10. User, User Role and Groups mapping     -   11. Overriding the group access rights.

Realms

A realm is a database of users, groups, modules, application resources and access control lists. A user must be defined in a realm in order to access any resources belonging to that realm.

Modules

The modules provide the high level classification for the applications. The module is a group of applications. The following modules have been identified in the initial stage as a part of core administrative system viz. Carrier Maintenance, Enrollment, Sales and Marketing and Finance.

Applications

A module consists of many applications. An application represents the business use case or set of related use cases. A module consists of many applications. For e.g. Carrier Maintenance module consists of following applications viz. Zip Master, Carrier Master, and M Plan etc. Each application can be further classified into the pages.

Resources

An application can be further classified into the Resources. An application can have one or more resources.

Resources are the valuable items accessible from the Web server/Web Application server:

Web applications: Java Servlet or JSP

The resources can be protected by using a single access control (ACL). The ACL specifies which users or groups are allowed to access or modify the resource. For each resource to protect, you'll specify:

An access control list (ACL)—a list defining who can use the resource

Groups

A group is a collection of users. A user can belong to multiple groups. The groups can be created based on the department where all the uses are going to perform the similar kind of operation.

Groups are sets of users. Groups provide an efficient way to manage large numbers of users because an administrator can specify permissions for an entire group at one time. The resources pages can be allocated to group instead of assigning to individual user. The user gets the default access rights as a part of group. The user can override the group access rights.

A person can be defined as both an individual user and as a member of a group. When an individual user also belongs to a group, the individual access permissions override any group access permissions.

For e.g. a set of data entry operators can have be classified into one group. The rights can be assigned to this group as all basically going to do the data entry operation.

User Roles

In any system, there are many roles, which a particular entity plays. For e.g. in any industry role played by the manager differs from the subordinate.

The roles need to be classified into the security system. A user can play multiple roles in the system. A manager can play the role as data entry as well as authorizing body.

A data entry operation may not have provision to enter some critical data, which manager does enter if manager is logging into the system as manager role. The managers can login into the system as data entry operator as well.

If manager is logging in as data entry operation he may not have the privileges as he was having in manager role. In such a case he will be treated as data entry operator.

The security system needs to take above situations.

The user roles can be

-   -   SUPER USER     -   SENIOR MANAGEMENT     -   MANAGER     -   DATA ENTRY PERSONNEL     -   PART TIME EMPLOYEE

The user roles need to be configured into the system. The user roles can be added for the future modifications. The CAS (Core Administration System) system need to be pre configured for the basic pre defined roles which will not be editable.

Users

A user is an identity that can be authenticated by the system. A user can represent a person who is working in any of the departments in Benefit Partners Inc.

A user can belong to multiple groups.

A user can play multiple roles

Access Rights/Permissions

Permissions represent the privileges required for accessing resources. An administrator protects resources by establishing access control lists to grant permissions to users and groups.

Individual user permissions take precedence over group permissions. Individual user permission overrides the more restrictive group permission. (Even if the group permission is less restrictive than the user permission, the user permission overrides the group permission and vice versa).

List of Programs

1. Security Login

Allows the administrator to login into the security system.

2. Module Master

Allows administrator to do following operations

-   -   Create Module     -   Modify Module     -   Delete Modules

3. Application Master

Allows administrator to do following operations

-   -   Create Application     -   Modify Application     -   Delete Application

4. Resources

Allows administrator to do following operations

-   -   Create Resources     -   Modify Resources     -   Delete Resources

5. Group Master

Allows administrator to do following operations

-   -   Create Group     -   Modify Group     -   Delete Group

6. User Master

Allows administrator to do following operations

-   -   Create User     -   Modify User     -   Delete User

7. User Role

Allows administrator to do following operations

-   -   Create Role     -   Modify Role     -   Delete Role

8. User Access Rights

9. User, User Role and Groups Mapping

10. Group Access Rights

Allows administrator to do following operations.

Assign Rights for a User. This program allows the administrator to override the access rights for a user.

11. User Login

When the system user logs in into the core administration system the separate ACL will be generated for each user. The ACL will be stored in the User Profile object, which will be stored in the user session. When user request for a particular page controller will check with the security system whether user is having access to the particular page.

The user password needs to be validated as follows

-   -   The password need to be minimum 6 characters long and max 10         characters     -   The password needs to be combination of alphabets and special         characters and numbers (for e.g. Amit1$3, sriRam9#445 etc).     -   The password is valid for 15 days, which is configurable. The         system should prompt user to change the password three days         (which is configurable) prior to expiry date of the password.     -   If user changes the password then his password is valid for 15         days (which is configurable) from the date of change.     -   In the same way administrator can configure the minimum limit         for password age, which signifies that user cannot change the         password for this period from the date of prior change.     -   The minimum limit for the password age, which is configured         value, cannot be greater than or equal to configured maximum         limit of the password age.     -   First time user must change his password before entering into         the system.     -   Scenario         -   If the user password is “123456” the for first time login             user goes and change the password to “Mali5%9”. The user is             created on date Jan. 4, 2002. User logs in on Jan. 5, 2002             and password expiry date for the user changes to Jan. 19,             2002 (15 calendar days) if the configured time limit is 15             days. The user needs to prompt to change password on Jan.             17, 2002 (3 calendar days prior to the expiry date). If user             changes the password within stipulated time then extend the             password expiry date by 15 calendar days. (New Date=Sys             Date+15). All changes in the date is effective from 0000 AM     -   The above validation is not applicable at the time of user         creation as administrator can keep the password 123456 for all.     -   The new password in the change password is to be validated for         above conditions. The old password need not be validated for         above conditions. As user can have 123456 as first time as his         password.     -   The old password needs to be maintained in the history. The new         password must not be equal to last five passwords. This number         of history of passwords (here its 5) should be configurable. (A         configurable password history where the administrator can enter         value that would represent how many passwords it would remember         until the user can use the same password again)     -   The ability to enable or disable Account lockout with a         configuration value for the number of user log in attempts at         which point a lockout would occur. A way timer for when to reset         the count of attempts before lock would be helpful. Also if it         possible to make a lockout duration value that would be         configurable would also be helpful.

User Name cannot be a part of password. Configurable Items Sr No Item Name Value 1 Length Of Password (Minimum Value) Integer (Ranging From 1-n) Need to be set by the administrator 2 Length Of Password (Maximum Value) Integer (Ranging From 1-n) Need to be set by the administrator Maximum need to be greater than minimum value 3 Expiry of the password from the date of validity Integer (Number of days) (Maximum Range) Ranging from 1-n Need to be set by the administrator 4 Expiry of the password from the date of validity Integer (Number of days) (Minimum Range) Ranging from 1-n Need to be set by the administrator 5 Password Repeat allowed value Integer (Number of days) This indicates that new passwords can not be Ranging from 1-n same as last n passwords Need to be set by the administrator 6 Invalid Passwords allowed before locking the Integer (Number of days) account Ranging from 1-n If user enters the password incorrect for n times Need to be set by the then his account will be locked automatically. administrator 7 Lock Time Time for which account to be locked if it is locked because of successive invalid passwords entry. 8 Password change prompt date This value signifies that user need to be intimated by 3 days prior about password change (Value here set as 3)

1.3. Security Framework

Process Flow Diagram (See Figure P-1)

1.3.1.1. Script for Setup

Run the basic admin script, which will create the basic administrative user for security login and minimal data into the database.

1.3.1.2. Security Login

Security Login

Refer Process Flow Diagram FIG. 2. The flow of the process is as described below.

System allows user to login into the system. The basic user id and password validation will be done for the administrator for the security system.

On successful login administrator can create modules, groups, applications, user etc.

FIG. 2 Process Flow Diagram (See Figure P-2)

1.3.1.3. Module Master

Refer Process Flow Diagram FIG. 3. The flow of the process is as described below.

Create Modules

-   -   a) On selecting create modules option. The user needs to enter         the module name and description.     -   b) The user enters the details and clicks save.     -   c) Upon save the data will be stored in the database.

Modify Modules

-   -   a) When user selects modify modules option. He will be shown all         the modules in the combo box.     -   b) The user selects the module name and clicks select.     -   c) The user will be shown the details about the selected module.         The user can modify the module details and click save. The data         will be updated into database.

Delete Modules

-   -   a) When user selects the Delete option, the user will be shown         all the modules where in user can select one or more access         control list and click delete.     -   b) The selected modules will be deleted from the database.

FIG. 3: Process Flow Diagram (See Figure P-3)

1.3.1.4. Application Master

Refer Process Flow Diagram FIG. 4. The flow of the process is as described below.

Create Application

-   -   a) On selecting create application option. The user needs to         enter the application details like application name, module name         and description.     -   b) The user enters the data and clicks save.     -   c) Upon save the data will be stored in the database.

Modify Application

-   -   a) When user selects modify applications option. He will be         shown all the applications in the selection box. The user         selects one application and clicks select.     -   b) The user will be shown the details about the selected         application. The user can modify the application details and         click save.     -   c) The data will be updated into database.

Delete Application

-   -   a) When user selects the Delete option, the user will be shown         all the applications where in user can select one or more         applications and click delete.     -   b) The selected applications will be deleted from the database.

FIG. 4: Process Flow Diagram (See Figure P-4)

1.3.1.5. Resource Master

Refer Process Flow Diagram. The flow of the process is as described below.

Create Resource

-   -   a) On selecting create resource option. The user needs to enter         the resource details like resource name, application name and         description.     -   b) The user enters the data and clicks save.     -   c) Upon save the data will be stored in the database.

Modify Resource

-   -   a) When user selects modify resource option. He will be shown         all the resources in the selection box. The user selects one         resource and clicks select.     -   b) The user will be shown the details about the selected         resource. The user can modify the resource details and click         save.     -   c) The data will be updated into database.

Delete Resource

-   -   a) When user selects the Delete option, the user will be shown         all the resource where in user can select one or more resources         and click delete.     -   b) The selected resources will be deleted from the database.

FIG. 5: Process Flow Diagram (See Figure P-5)

1.3.1.6. Group Master

Refer Process Flow Diagram FIG. 6. The flow of the process is as described below.

Create Group

-   -   a) On selecting create group option. The user needs to enter the         group details like group name and description.     -   b) The user enters the data and clicks save.     -   c) Upon save the data will be stored in the database.

Modify Group

-   -   a) When user selects modify group's option. He will be shown all         the groups in the selection box. The user selects one group and         clicks select.     -   b) The user will be shown the details about the selected group.         The user can modify the group details and click save     -   c) The data will be updated into database.

Delete Group

-   -   a) When user selects the Delete option, the user will be shown         all the groups where in user can select one or more groups and         click delete     -   b) The selected groups will be deleted from the database.

FIG. 6: Process Flow Diagram (See Figure P-6)

1.3.1.7. User Creation

Refer Process Flow Diagram FIG. 7. The flow of the process is as described below.

Create User

-   -   a) On selecting create user option. The user needs to enter the         details like user name, description, address details etc.     -   b) The user enters the data and clicks save.     -   c) Upon save the data will be stored in the database.

Modify User

-   -   a) When user selects modify user option. He will be shown all         the user details in the selection box. The user selects one-user         and clicks select.     -   b) The user will be shown the details about the selected user.         The user can modify the user details and click save     -   c) The data will be updated into database.

Delete User

-   -   a) When user selects the Delete option, the user will be shown         all the users where in user can select one or more users and         click delete     -   b) The selected users will be deleted from the database.

FIG. 7: Process Flow Diagram (See Figure P-7)

1.3.1.8. User Role Creation

Refer Process Flow Diagram FIG. 7 a. The flow of the process is as described below.

Create User Role

-   -   a) On selecting create user role option. The user needs to enter         the details like user role name, description     -   b) The user enters the data and clicks save.     -   c) Upon save the data will be stored in the database.

Modify User Role

-   -   a) When user selects modify user role option. He will be shown         all the user role details in the selection box. The user selects         one-user role and clicks select.     -   b) The user will be shown the details about the selected user         role. The user can modify the user details and click save     -   c) The data will be updated into database.

Delete User Role

-   -   a) When user selects the Delete option, the user role will be         shown all the users roles where in user can select one or more         users role and click delete     -   b) The selected user roles will be deleted from the database.

FIG. 7 a: Process Flow Diagram (See Figure P-8)

1.3.1.9. User, User Role and Group Mapping

Refer Process Flow Diagram FIG. 8. The flow of the process is as described below.

Assign Rights

-   -   a) On selecting the User, User Role and Group Mapping option.         The user will be shown the all the users and user roles in the         selection box. The user can select the combination of user and         user role.     -   b) On selection user will be shown the all the groups with         already assigned groups as checked.     -   c) The user adds or removes the group assignment and clicks         save.     -   d) Upon save the data will be stored in the database

FIG. 8: Process Flow Diagram (See Figure P-9)

1.3.1.10. Group Access Rights

Refer Process Flow Diagram. The flow of the process is as described below.

Assign Rights

-   -   a) On selecting the group access rights. The user will be shown         the all the groups in the selection box. The user can select any         group and click select.     -   b) When user selects the particular group, the user will be         shown the all the resources and with the access rights selection         box corresponding to each module.     -   c) User can assign one or more resources to the group and click         save.     -   d) Upon save the data will be stored in the database.

FIG. 9: Process Flow Diagram (See Figure P-10)

1.3.1.11. User Access Rights

Refer Process Flow Diagram. The flow of the process is as described below.

As stated earlier, user can override the access specified to the group.

Assign User Rights.

-   -   a) On selecting the user access rights. The user will be shown         the all the users in the selection box. The user can select any         one user and click select.     -   b) When user selects the particular user, the user will be shown         the all the access rights for his group for corresponding         resource.     -   c) The user can add or remove the resources.     -   d) Upon save the data will be stored in the database.

1.3.1.12. Configure Items

Refer Process Flow Diagram. The flow of the process is as described below. This allows administrator to configure various items like password length, expiry etc.

FIG. 10: Process Flow Diagram (See Figure P-11)

FIG. 10A: Process Flow Diagram (See Figure P-12)

1.4 User Interface

1.4.1 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)001 (See Figure P-13)

User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)002 (See Figure P-14)

1.4.1.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: Security Login

1.4.1.2 Field Name, Element Type & Purpose

Table for Screen SECURITY_LOGIN_SCREEN_(—)001 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the screen Security Login being navigated Sub Header Text Text for the Login Name Login Name Login Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the password password Password Entry Field Text for the password Save Button (HTML To Save the data this button need to Button) be clicked Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button) Select the Role Text Text for the Role Role Selection Box Selection box applicable for user login only.

Table for Screen SECURITY_LOGIN_SCREEN_(—)002 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the screen Security Login being navigated Sub Header Login Text Text for the Login Name Name Login Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header old Text Text for the old password password old Password Entry Field Text for the old password Sub Header new Text Text for the new password password new Password Entry Field Text for the new re enter password Sub Header re Text Text for the re enter password enter password re enter Password Entry Field Text for the re enter password Select Button (HTML To select the current selected Button) module to modify. Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

1.4.1.3 Front End Validation

Validation Details

This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text Element # Name Action/Validation Details Message 1. Login Name Accepts all the alphabets Mandatory Max Length: 15 (Entry Field) and numeric characters. “Please Enter Login Name” 2. Password Accepts all the alphabets Mandatory Max Length: 15 and numeric characters. Min Length: 6 “Please Enter the password” 3. User Role Selection Box validation Default: Choose One “Mandatory” “Please choose one of the options specified”

1.4.2 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)003 (See Figure P-15)

User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)004 (See Figure P-16)

User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)005 (See Figure P-17)

1.4.2.1 User. Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: Module Master

1.4.2.2 Field Name, Element Type & Purpose

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)003 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the screen Create Module being navigated Sub Header Text Text for the Module Id Module Id Module Id Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Module Name Module Name Module Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Module Name Module Description Module Entry Field Text for the entry field Description Save Button (HTML To Save the data this button need to Button) be clicked Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)004 Element Name Element Type Purpose Search Gif File Used to search the module

Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the screen Modify Module being navigated Sub Header Text Text for the Module Id Module Id Module Id Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Module Name Module Name Module Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Module Name Module Description Module Entry Field Text for the entry field Description Update Button (HTML To Save the data this button need Button) to be clicked Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)005 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the screen Delete Modules being navigated Sub Heading Text To give the sub heading for the Select the screen being navigated modules Module Names Check Box Check boxes for module names to Sales, finance be deleted. Check Box Check All On clicking the “Check All” link should check all the check boxes in the HTML table. Check Box Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link should uncheck all the checked check boxes in the HTML table. Delete Delete To Delete the data this button need to be clicked

1.4.2.3 Front End Validation

Validation Details

This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text Action/Validation # Element Name Details Message 1 Module Name Accepts all the Max length: 50 (Entry Field) alphabets and Mandatory numeric BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON characters. 2 Module Id (Entry Accepts all the Max length: 10 Field) alphabets and Mandatory numeric BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON characters. 3 Comments(Entry Accepts all the Max length: 250 Field) alphabets and BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON numeric characters.

1.4.3 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)006 (See Figure P-18)

User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)007 (See Figure P-19)

User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)008 (See Figure P-20)

1.4.3.1

User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: Group Master

1.4.3.2 Field Name, Element Type & Purpose

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)006 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the screen Create Group being navigated Sub Header Text Text for the Group Id Group Id Group Id Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Group Name Group Name Group Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Group Name Group Description Group Entry Field Text for the entry field Description Save Button (HTML To Save the data this button need to Button) be clicked Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)007 Element Name Element Type Purpose Search Image To provide search

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)007 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the screen Modify Group being navigated Sub Header Text Text for the Group Id Group Id Group Id Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Group Name Group Name Group Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Group Name Group Description Group Entry Field Text for the entry field Description Update Button (HTML To Save the data this button need to Button) be clicked Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)008 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the screen Delete Group being navigated Sub Heading Text To give the sub heading for the Select the Groups screen being navigated Group Names Check Box Check boxes for group names to Sales, finance be deleted. Check Box Check All On clicking the “Check All” link should check all the check boxes in the HTML table. Check Box Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link should uncheck all the checked check boxes in the HTML table. Delete Delete To Delete the data this button need to be clicked

1.4.3.3 Front End Validation

Validation Details

This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text Element Action/Validation # Name Details Message 1 Group Name Accepts all the Max length: 50 (Entry Field) alphabets and Mandatory numeric characters. BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 2 Group Id Accepts all the Max length: 10 (Entry Field) alphabets and Mandatory numeric characters. BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 3 Comments/ Accepts all the Max length: 255 Description alphabets and numeric BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON characters.

1.4.4 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)009 (See Figure P-21)

User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)010 (See Figure P-22)

User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)011 (See Figure P-23)

1.4.4.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: Application Master

1.4.4.2 Field Name, Element Type & Purpose

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)009 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the screen Create being navigated Application Sub Header Text Text for the Application Id Application Id Application Id Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Application Name Application Name Application Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Application Name Application Description Application Entry Field Text for the entry field Description Sub Header Text Text for the Module Name Module Name Selection Box Selection Box Module Name Save Button (HTML To Save the data this button need to Button) be clicked Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)010 Element Name Element Type Purpose Search Gif To search the application

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)010 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the screen Modify being navigated Application Sub Header Text Text for the Application Id Application Id Application Id Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Application Name Application Name Application Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Application Name Application Description Application Entry Field Text for the entry field Description Update Button (HTML To Save the data this button need to Button) be clicked Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)011 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the screen Delete being navigated Application Sub Heading Text To give the sub heading for the Select the screen being navigated Application Application Check Box Check boxes for applications names Names to be deleted. Sales, Select box for Application Check Box Check All On clicking the “Check All” link should check all the check boxes in the HTML table. Check Box Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link should uncheck all the checked check boxes in the HTML table. Delete Delete To Delete the data this button need to be clicked

1.4.4.3 Front End Validation

Validation Details

This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text Action/Validation # Element Name Details Message 1 Application Accepts all the Max length: 50 Name alphabets and Mandatory (Entry Field) numeric characters. BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 2 Application Id Accepts all the Max length: 10 (Entry Field) alphabets and Mandatory numeric characters. BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 3 Comments/ Accepts all the Max length: 255 Description alphabets and numeric characters. 4 Module Name Selection Box Default: Choose One validation BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON

1.4.5 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)012 (See Figure P-24)

User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)013 (See Figure P-25)

User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)0014 (See Figure P-26)

1.4.5.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: Resource Master

1.4.5.2 Field Name, Element Type & Purpose

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)012 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for Create Resource the screen being navigated Sub Header Text Text for Resource Id Resource ID Resource ID Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for Resource Name Resource Name Resource Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for screen url Screen URL Screen URL Entry Field Text for the entry field Resource Text Text for the Resource Description Description Resource Entry Field Text for the entry field Description Save Button (HTML To Save the data this button Button) need to be clicked Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)012 & Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)013 Element Name Element Type Purpose Search Gif To search the resource and application

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)013 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the Create Resource screen being navigated Sub Header Text Text for Resource Id Resource ID Resource ID Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for Resource Name Resource Name Resource Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for screen url Screen URL Screen URL Entry Field Text for the entry field Resource Text Text for the Resource Description Description Resource Entry Field Text for the entry field Description Save Button (HTML To Save the data this button Button) need to be clicked Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)14 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the Delete Resources screen being navigated Sub Heading Text To give the sub heading for Select the the screen being navigated Resources Resources Check Box Check boxes for Resources to be deleted. Check Box Check All On clicking the “Check All” link should check all the check boxes in the HTML table. Check Box Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link should uncheck all the checked check boxes in the HTML table. Delete Delete To Delete the data this button need to be clicked

1.4.5.3 Front End Validation

Validation Details

This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text Action/Validation # Element Name Details Message 1 Resource Name Accepts all the Max length: 50 (Entry Field) alphabets and Mandatory numeric characters. BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 2 Resource Id Accepts all the Max length: 10 (Entry Field) alphabets and Mandatory numeric characters. BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 3 Screen URL Accepts all the Max length: 255 (Entry Field) alphabets and Mandatory numeric characters. BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 4 Comments/ Accepts all the Max length: 255 Description alphabets and numeric characters. 5 Application Selection Box Default: Choose One Name validation “Mandatory” BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON

1.4.6 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)015 (See Figure P-27)

Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)016 (See Figure P-28)

User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)017 (See Figure P-29)

1.4.6.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: User Master

1.4.6.2 Field Name, Element Type & Purpose

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)015 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for Create User the screen being navigated Sub Header User Text Text for the User Id Id User Id Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Display Name Display Name Display Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Name Name Sub Header First Text Text for the First Name Name First Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header MI Text Text for Middle Initial Middle Initial Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Last Text Text for last name Name Last Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the password password Password Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Phone Phone Phone Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Fax Text Text for the fax Fax Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Extn Text Text for the ext Extn Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header email Text Text for the email Email Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Lock Text Text for the lock Lock Check Box Check box for lock field Save Button (HTML To Save the data this Button) button need to be clicked Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)016 Element Name Element Type Purpose Search Gif To search the user

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)016 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for Modify User the screen being navigated Sub Header User Text Text for the User Name Name Sub Header User Text Text for the User Id Id User Id Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Display Name Display Name Display Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Name Name Sub Header First Text Text for the First Name Name First Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header MI Text Text for MI MI Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Last Text Text for last name Name Last Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the password password Password Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Text Text for the Phone Phone Phone Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Fax Text Text for the fax Fax Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header Ext Text Text for the Ext Ext Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header email Text Text for the email Email Entry Field Text for the entry field Lock Check Box Check box for the lock field Update Button (HTML To Save the data this Button) button need to be clicked Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)017 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for Delete User the screen being navigated Sub Heading Text To give the sub heading for Select the User the screen being navigated User Names Check Box Check boxes for Sales, Select box User names to be deleted. for Application Check Box Check All On clicking the “Check All” link should check all the check boxes in the HTML table. Check Box Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link should uncheck all the checked check boxes in the HTML table. Delete Delete To Delete the data this button need to be clicked

1.4.6.3 Front End Validation

Validation Details

This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text # Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1 Display Name BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Mandatory Max Length: 30 (Entry Field) BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 2 First Name(Entry Field) BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Mandatory Max Length: 25 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 3 MI (Entry Field) BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Mandatory Max Length: 1 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 4 Last Name (Entry Field) BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Mandatory Max Length: 35 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 5 Password (Entry Field) BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Mandatory Max Length: 15 Min Length: 6 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 6 Phone BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Max Length: 10 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 7 Fax BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Max Length: 10 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 8 Extn BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 9 Email BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 10 Lock Status BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON

1.4.7 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)0018 (See Figure P-30)

User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)019 (See Figure P-31)

User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)020 (See Figure P-32)

1.4.7.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: User Role Master

1.4.7.2 Field Name, Element Type & Purpose

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)018 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for Create User Role the screen being navigated Sub Header User Text Text for the User Role Id Role Id User Role Id Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header User Text Text for the User Role Name Role Name User Role Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header User Text Text for the User Role Name Role Description User Role Entry Field Text for the entry field Description Save Button (HTML To Save the data this Button) button need to be clicked Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)019 Element Name Element Type Purpose Search Gif To search the user role

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)019 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the Modify User Role screen being navigated Sub Header User Text Text for the User Role Id Role Id User Role Id Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header User Text Text for the User Role Name Role Name User Role Name Entry Field Text for the entry field Sub Header User Text Text for the User Role Name Role Description User Role Entry Field Text for the entry field Description Update Button (HTML To Save the data this button Button) need to be clicked Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)020 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for Delete User Role the screen being navigated Sub Heading Text To give the sub heading Select the User for the screen being navigated Role User Role Names Check Box Check boxes for User Sales, finance Role names to be deleted. Check Box Check All On clicking the “Check All” link should check all the check boxes in the HTML table. Check Box Clear All On clicking the “Clear All” link should uncheck all the checked check boxes in the HTML table. Delete Delete To Delete the data this button need to be clicked

1.4.7.3 Front End Validation

Validation Details

This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text # Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1 User Role Name BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON (Entry Field) 2 User Role Id BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON (Entry Field) 3 Comments/Description BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Max length: 255

1.4.8 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)021 (See Figure P-33)

1.4.8.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: Group Access Rights

1.4.8.2 Field Name, Element Type & Purpose

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)021 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for Group Access the screen being navigated Rights Sub Header Text Text for the Group Name Select Group Group Name Selection Box Selection box for the Group Name Sub Header Text Text for the Application Name Select Application Application Selection Box Selection box for the Application Name Name Select Button (HTML To select the current selected Group Button) to assign rights and modules. Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)021 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the Group Access screen being navigated Rights Sub Header Text Text for the Resource Name Resource Name Resource Name Check Boxes Check boxes Sub Header Text Text for Access Rights Access Rights Combo Box Combo Box Combo box for selection of access rights. Save Button (HTML To Save the data this Button) button need to be clicked Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

1.4.8.3 Front End Validation

Validation Details

This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text # Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1 Group Name BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 2 Application Name BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 3 Resource Id BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON

1.4.9 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)022 (See Figure P-34)

User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)023 (See Figure P-35)

1.4.9.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: User, Role and Group Mapping

1.4.9.2 Field Name, Element Type & Purpose

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)022 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading User Search for the screen being navigated Sub Header Text Text for the User Id Select User Id User Id Text Box Text Field for the User Id Sub Header Text Text for the User Name Select User Name User Name Text Box Text Field for the User Name Search Button (HTML To search the current Button) selected User id Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)022 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for User Search the screen being navigated Sub Header Text Text for the User Id Select User Id User Id Text Field Text Field for the User Id Sub Header Text Text for the User Name Select User Name User Name Text Field Text Field for the User Name Search Button (HTML To search the current Button) selected User id Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button) Sub Heading Text To give the heading for User Search the search screen Results Sub Header User Label Text for the User Id Id Sub Header User Label Text for the User Name Name Data Row from User Id User id from database. database To be displayed in table Data Row from User Name User name from database. database To be displayed in table Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)023 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for User Role the screen being navigated Mapping Sub Header Text Text for the User Id Select User Id User Id Text Label Text Label for the User Id Sub Header Text Text for the User Name Select User Name User Name Text Label Text Label for the User Name Sub Header Text Text for the User Role Select User Role Selection box Selection Box Selection Box for User Role Select Button (HTML To select the current selected User id Button) Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen FIG. 33: Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)023 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for User Role the screen being navigated Mapping Sub Header Text Text for the User Id Select User Id User Id Text Label Text Label for the User Id Sub Header Text Text for the User Name Select User Name User Name Text Label Text Label for the User Name Sub Header User Text Text for the User Role Role Text Label Text Label Selection Box for User Role Sub Header Text Text for the Groups Select the groups Check Box Check Box Check Box for groups. User can select one or more groups. Select Button (HTML To select the current selected User id Button) Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

1.4.10 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)024 (See Figure P-36)

User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)025 (See Figure P-37)

1.4.10.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: Group Access Rights

1.4.10.2 Field Name, Element Type & Purpose

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)024 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for User Search the screen being navigated Sub Header Text Text for the User Id Select User Id User Id Text Box Text Field for the User Id Sub Header Text Text for the User Name Select User Name User Name Text Box Text Field for the User Name Search Button (HTML To search the current selected User id Button) Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)024 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for User Search the screen being navigated Sub Header Text Text for the User Id Select User Id User Id Text Field Text Field for the User Id Sub Header Text Text for the User Name Select User Name User Name Text Field Text Field for the User Name Search Button (HTML To search the Button) current selected User id Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button) Sub Heading Text To give the heading User Search for the search screen Results Sub Header User Label Text for the User Id Id Sub Header User Label Text for the User Name Name Data Row from User Id User id from database. database To be displayed in table Data Row from User Name User name from database. database To be displayed in table Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)025 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the User Access screen being navigated Rights Sub Header User Text Text for the User Name Name User Name Text Text for the User Name Sub Header User Text Text for the User Id ID User Id Text Text for the User Id Sub Header Text Text for the Module Name Module Name Selection Box Selection Box Selection Box for Module name Sub Header Role Text Text for the Role Name Name Selection Box Selection Box Selection Box for Role name Select Button (HTML To select the current selected Button) User assign rights for all the r application. Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)025 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the screen User Access being navigated Rights Sub Header Text Text for the Resource Name Resource Name Resource name Text Text for the Resource Name Sub Header Text Text for Access Rights Access Rights Combo Box Combo Box Combo box for selection of access rights. Save Button (HTML To Save the data this button need to be Button) clicked Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

1.4.10.3 Front End Validation

Validation Details

This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text # Element Name Action/Validation Details Message 1 User Role BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON “Please choose the User Role” 2 Module Name BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON “Please choose the Module name” 3 Access Rights BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON “Please choose the Resource name”

1.4.11 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)026 (See Figure P-38)

1.4.11.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: Configurable Items

1.4.11.2 Field Name, Element Type & Purpose

Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_(—)026 Element Name Element Type Purpose Main Heading Text To give the heading for the screen Configure Items being navigated Sub Header Text Text for the Password Length Password Length Password Length Text Box Text Field for the Password Length Sub Header Text Text for the Password Length Password Length (Minimum) (Minimum) Password Length Text Box Text Field for the Password (Minimum) Length (Minimum) Sub Header Text Text for the Expiry of password Expiry of password (Max) Expiry of Text Box Text Field for the Expiry of password password Sub Header Text Text for the Expiry of password Expiry of password (Min) Expiry of Text Box Text Field for the Prompt Date Period password Sub Header Text Text for the Prompt Date Period Prompt Date Period Prompt Date Text Box Text Field for the Expiry of password Period Prompt Date Period Sub Header Text Text for the Password Repeat Count Password Repeat Count Password Repeat Text Box Text Field for the Password Repeat Count Count Sub Header Text Text for the Invalid Passwords Count Invalid Passwords Count Invalid Text Box Text Field for the Invalid Passwords Passwords Count Count Sub Header Lock Text Text for the Lock Time Time Lock Time Text Box Text Field for the Lock Time Search Button (HTML To search the current selected User id Button) Cancel Button (HTML To cancel current operation. Button)

1.4.11.3 Front End Validation

Validation Details

This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text Action/Validation # Element Name Details Message 1 Password Length Numeric (Integer) Integer Length max 2 (Maximum & For eg Min Value 6 Minimum) Max Value 10 2 Expiry of password Numeric (Integer) Integer Length max 2 (Min) For eg Min Value 1 Max Value 99 3 Expiry of password Numeric (Integer) Integer Length max 2 (Max) For eg Min Value 0 Max Value 99 Should be greater than Expiry of password (Min) 4 Password Repeat Numeric (Integer) Integer Length max 2 Count For eg Min Value 1 Max Value 10 5 Invalid Passwords Numeric (Integer) Integer Length max 2 Count For eg Min Value 1 Max Value 10 6 Lock Time Numeric (Integer) Integer Length max 2 (Minutes) For eg Min Value 10 Max Value 36000 7 Password Length Numeric (Integer) Integer Length max 2 (Minimum) For eg Min Value 6 Max Value 10 Less than maximum length of password 8 Prompt Date Numeric (Integer) Less than maximum limit Period for for expiration date expiration For eg Min Value 1 Max Value 10

1.4.12 User Login

When the system user logs in into the core administration system the separate ACL will be generated for each user. The ACL will be stored in the User Profile object, which will be stored in the user session. When user request for a particular page controller will check with the security system whether user is having access to the particular page.

When any user requests a particular page in the core administrative system, the controller will ask the security system about the security rights for the application. If user is having rights he will be allowed to perform the current operation.

For e.g. If user request for create carrier master. The carrier master is registered into the system with system with id as 0001. The controller will check the access rights for the carrier master. If the rights for carrier master is write then user will have access to create carrier master as the user rights are higher than requested one. If user is having access rights as read for carrier master then he would not be able to access because it is having lower rights than requested one.

Password Validation

Password validation to be done as per the requirements specified before. The following items need to be configured as per requirements.

1.5 Business Rules Activity Rules Delete Rule For Deleting referential integrity need to be considered. A group can be deleted if no user is referring to the group Same applies to other hierarchy Module Application Resource

1.6 Help Menu

Help to be provided for all the screens. Help should contain following details.

Basic Functionality Description

Description about the screen fields.

1.7 Process-Data Structure

This section describes the likely data structure that would contain the data for/by executing the process

BPI_Modules Data Element Name Data Element Type Constraints MODULE_ID Varchar (10) PK Not Null MODULE_NAME Varchar (50) Not Null DESCRIPTION Varchar (255) CREATED_BY Varchar (25) CREATED_DATE Timestamp MODIFIED_BY Varchar (25) LAST_MODIFIED_DATE Timestamp STATUS NUMBER 1 - Active 0 - Inactive

BPI_Groups Data Element Name Data Element Type Constraints GROUP_ID Varchar (10) PK Not Null DESCRIPTION Varchar (255) Not Null GROUP_NAME Varchar (50) CREATED_BY Varchar (25) CREATED_DATE Timestamp MODIFIED_BY Varchar (25) LAST_MODIFIED_DATE Timestamp STATUS NUMBER 1 - Active 0 - Inactive

BPI_Applications Data Element Name Data Element Type Constraints APPLICATION_ID Varchar (10) PK Not Null APPLICATION_NAME Varchar (50) Not Null DESCRIPTION Varchar (255) MODULE_ID Varchar (10) FK Refers BPI_MODULES CREATED_BY Varchar (25) CREATED_DATE Timestamp MODIFIED_BY Varchar (25) LAST_MODIFIED_DATE Timestamp STATUS NUMBER 1 - Active 0 - Inactive

BPI_Resources Data Data Element Name Element Type Constraints RESOURCE_ID Varchar (10) PK Not Null RESOURCE_NAME Varchar (50) Not Null DESCRIPTION Varchar (255) APPLICATION_ID Varchar (10) FK Refers BPI_APPLICATIONS CREATED_BY Varchar (25) CREATED_DATE Timestamp MODIFIED_BY Varchar(25) LAST_MODIFIED_DATE Timestamp STATUS NUMBER 1 Active 0 - Inactive

BPI_ACL Data Element Name Data Element Type Constraints ACL_ID Varchar (10) PK Not null ACL_NAME Varchar (50) Not null CREATED_BY Varchar (25) CREATED_DATE Timestamp MODIFIED_BY Varchar(25) LAST_MODIFIED_DATE Timestamp STATUS NUMBER 1 Active 0 - Inactive

BPI_Roles Data Element Name Data Element Type Constraints ROLE_ID Varchar (10) PK Not null ROLE_NAME Varchar (50) Not null CREATED_BY Varchar (25) CREATED_DATE Timestamp MODIFIED_BY Varchar(25) LAST_MODIFIED_DATE Timestamp STATUS NUMBER 1 Active 0 - Inactive

BPI_Users Data Element Name Data Element Type Constraints USER_ID Varchar (10) PK Not null PASSWORD Varchar (30) Not null ADDRESS 1 Varchar (30) ADDRESS 2 Varchar (30) CITY Varchar (25) STATE Varchar (25) ZIP Varchar (25) COUNTRY Varchar (25) PHONE 1 Varchar (25) PHONE 2 Varchar (25) PHONE 3 Varchar (25) CREATED_BY Varchar (25) CREATED_DATE Timestamp MODIFIED_BY Varchar (25) LAST_MODIFIED_DATE Timestamp STATUS Number 1 Active 0 Inactive PASSWORD_EXPIRY_DATE Timestamp LOCK_STATUS Number

BPI_Group_Access Data Data Element Name Element Type Constraints GROUP_ID Varchar (10) Not null Refers BPI_GROUPS RESOURCE_ID Varchar (105) Not null Refers BPI_RESOURCES APPLICATION_ID Varchar (10) Not null Refers BPI_APPLICATIONS ACL_ID Varchar (10) Not null Refers BPI_ACL CREATED_BY Varchar (25) CREATED_DATE Timestamp MODIFIED_BY Varchar (25) LAST_MODIFIED_DATE Timestamp STATUS Number 1 Active 0 Inactive

BPI_User_Roles Data Element Name Data Element Type Constraints USER_ID Varchar (10) Not Null Refers BPI_USERS ROLE_ID Varchar (10) Not Null Refers BPI_ROLES GROUP_ID Varchar (10) Not Null Refers BPI_USGROUPS CREATED_BY Varchar(25) CREATED_DATE Timestamp MODIFIED_BY Varchar(25) LAST_MODIFIED_DATE Timestamp Status Number 1 Active 0 Inactive

BPI_User_Access Data Data Element Name Element Type Constraints RESOURCE_ID Varchar (10) Not Null Refers BPI_(—) RESOURCE USER_ID Varchar (25) Not Null Refers BPI_USERS ACL_ID Varchar (10) Not Null Refers BPI_ACL ROLE_ID Varchar (10) CREATED_BY Varchar (25) CREATED_DATE Timestamp MODIFIED_BY Varchar (25) LAST_MODIFIED_DATE Timestamp Status Number 1 Active 0 Inactive

BPI_User_Password_History Data Data Element Name Element Type Constraints USER_ID Varchar (10) Not Null Refers BPI_(—) USERS PASSWORD Varchar (10) Not Null CREATED_BY Varchar (25) CREATED_DATE Timestamp MODIFIED_BY Varchar (25) LAST_MODIFIED_DATE Timestamp Status Number 1 Active 0 Inactive

1.8 Back End Validations

This subsection provides the field element name and corresponding back end validation if applicable.

Back end validations are those validations where the validations have got to be necessarily done using the database.

As a general rule backend validations should be done for all the validation checks that are being carrier on the front end.

1.9 Non-Functional Requirements

This subsection corresponds to the requirements that do not relate to the user function. It provides information on the system requirements—Ideally identifies the present problems in the existing system from a non-functional perspective and avoiding the same in the new system Non Functional Requirement Details Performance Performance criteria should be established based on the data size and the page size. System Exception All system exceptions should be handled grace fully throwing a error page with relevant exception information and action to be taken for resolving the exception

1.10 Access Control List

This section describes the classification of users who can access the process under definition User ID Job Description Functionality Access Level

Benefit Partners Inc Process Specification Common Functional Features Document Id: BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON Version: <1.0> Revision History

Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Feb. 04, 2001 Sudhakar K 1.0 Baseline Release Reviewers Name Position Distribution No Of Copy No. Name Copies Location

Table Of Contents

1. Introduction 4

1.1. Purpose 4

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 4

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations 4

2. Process Identification 5

2.1. Background 5

2.2. Process Description 5

2.3. Process Flow 5

User Interface 6

3.1. User Interface Screens 6

3.1.1. Import Zip Codes: BPI_SCR_EC_EC_(—)001_(—)01 6

Interface Flow 6

3.3. Help Menu 6

4. Business Rule Mapping 8

5. Data Structures 9

5.1. Back End Validations 9

6. Non-Functional Requirements 10

7. Access Control List 11

1. Introduction

1.1. Purpose

The purpose of this document is to describe the common functional features available across all the modules. This document is identified as Common Functional Features. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process for the common functional features.

1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference Business Use Specification ID Business Use Case Name BPI_SCOPE Scope Document BPI_SCOPE_ADD Addendum to scope

1.3. Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations Term Explanation

2. Process Identification

2.1. Background

Common functional feature is to identify the common functionality across all the modules that have the same usage. This would help in standardization and reuse of the components.

2.2. Process Description

The objective of the Common Functional Features process is to:

-   -   1) Identify the Common functional features across all the         modules:

2.3. Process Flow

Not applicable

3. User Interface

3.1. User Interface Screens

3.1.1. Not Applicable

3.1.2. Not Applicable

3.1.3. Element Name, Element Type & Purpose Element Name Element Type Purpose First name Entry Field Enter the First name Last name Entry Field Enter the last name Middle name (MI) Entry Field Enter the middle Name Suffix Drop Down List List the Suffix Salutation Drop Down List List the Salutation Title Entry Field Enter the Job Title Address Entry Field Enter the first detail about the address Suite/Apt. # Entry Field Enter the suite/Apartment or PO BOX number City Entry Field Enter the name of the city State Drop Down List List all the States in UAS ZIP Entry Field Enter the ZIP Code Phone # Entry Field Enter the Phone number Fax # Entry Field Enter the FAX number Phone Extension Entry Field Enter extension number FAX Extension Entry Field Enter extension number Email Address Entry Field Enter the email address Credit Card Number Enter the Credit Card Entry Credit Card number Number Credit Card Type Drop Down List List the type of Credit Card (Date) Current Date Calendar/Entry Field Entry field to type the date or Calendar to pick the (System Date) date (Date) Past Date (1900 Calendar/Entry Field Entry field to type the date or Calendar to pick the to system date) date (Date) Future Date Calendar/Entry Field Entry field to type the date or Calendar to pick the (System date to 100 Yr. date hence) (Date) Default 1^(st) of Calendar/Entry Field Entry field to type the date or Calendar to pick the Following Month (eg. date System date is Dec. 2, 2001 should default to Jan. 1, 2002) (Date) Default 1^(st) of Calendar/Entry Field Entry field to type the date or Calendar to pick the the current Month (e.g. date System date is Dec. 2, 2001 should default to Dec. 1, 2001) (Date) Default End of Calendar/Entry Field Entry field to type the date or Calendar to pick the current Month (eg. date System date is Dec. 2, 2001 should default to Dec. 31, 2001) (Date) Credit Card Drop Down List List all the Months in a year Date (should only accept future date.) Month Date) Credit Card Drop Down List List the year 25 years ahead Date (should only accept future date.) Year Social Security Entry Field Enter the Social Security number Number TAX Identification Entry Field Enter the Tax Identification Number Number Mode of Drop Down List List Various modes of communication Communication Browser Back Button Button Validate the back button Browser Forward Button Validate the forward button Button Refresh Button Button Validate Refresh button Address Bars Tool Bars Hide Address bar Link Bar Tool Bars Hide Link bar Standard Button Tool bars Hide standard bars Window Close Browser Window Validate Close Window Minimize Browser Window Validate minimize

3.1.4. Screen Validations

Note: Validation provided here are the default validations. However if the module functionality has specified different validations for these element described then that would override the default validations provided here. Element Name Action/Validation Details Message First name Entry Field with 40 Character long. Can accept only Alpha characters. Arnold Last name Entry Field with 40 Character long Can accept only Alpha characters. Schwarzenegger Middle name (MI) Entry Field with 1 Character long Can accept only Alpha characters. M, A etc. Suffix List should include Jr., Sr., I., II., III., IV., and V. Salutation List should include Mr., Mrs., Ms. Title Entry Field with 20 Character long Can accept Alpha and numeric character and blank space between character (Example Administrator 1) Address Entry Field with 40 Character long 3013 Douglas Boulevard, Can accept free form entry with any character. Suite/Apt. # Entry Field with 20 Character long Example 200 or 1 D etc. Can accept free form entry with any character. City Entry Field with 20 Character long Alpha only and Blank between words allowed Roseville, San Jose, San Diego State List all the States in USA in abbreviated form as CA, IL, OH, NY etc. ZIP Entry Field with 5 Character long Should allow maximum and minimum of 5 Numbers only. Whole Number Field. Phone # Entry Field with 10 Character long Should allow maximum and minimum of 10 Numbers only. Whole Number Field. 3 for Area code, 7 for the number. Fax # Entry Field with 10 Character long Should allow maximum and minimum of 10 Numbers only. Whole Number Field. 3 for Area code, 7 for the number. Phone Extension Entry Field with 5 Character long Should allow maximum of 5 and minimum of 1. Blanks fields are acceptable. Whole Number Field. FAX Extension Entry Field with 5 Character long Should allow maximum of 5 and minimum of 1. Blanks fields are acceptable. Whole Number Field. Email Address Entry Field with 40 Character long Allow entering more than 40 character. Validate for a Valid Email Address. Credit Card Entry Field with 20 Character long Number Minimum and maximum value should be 16. Allow only Whole Number. Numeric Field For Amex allow 20 as min and max value. Credit Card Type List Credit Card type as Visa, Master, Discovery, Amex etc (Date) Current Entry Field or Calendar with default Date (System Date) system date in the Entry Field and calendar. (Date) Past Date Entry Field or Calendar with default (1900 to system system date − 1 in the Entry Field date) and calendar. Do not allow for Current date and future date (Date) Future Date Entry Field or Calendar with default (System date to system date in the Entry Field and 100 Yr. hence) calendar. Do not allow for past date (Date) Default 1^(st) Entry Field or Calendar with default of Following first of the following month date in Month (eg. System the Entry Field and calendar. date is Dec. 2, 2001 should default to Jan. 1, 2002) (Date) Default 1^(st) Entry Field or Calendar with default of the current first of the current month date in the Month (e.g. System Entry Field and calendar. date is Dec. 2, 2001 should default to Dec. 1, 2001) (Date) Default End Entry Field or Calendar with default of current Month end of the current month date in the (eg. System date is Entry Field and calendar. Dec. 2, 2001 should default to Dec. 31, 2001) (Date) Credit Card List to show all the months in a year Date (should only accept future date.) Month Date) Credit Card List the years from current year to Date (should only 100 years forward hence. accept future date.) Validate The Credit Card month and Year year together. Should not have past month as credit card entry. Social Security Entry Field with 9 Character long Number Should allow maximum of 9 and minimum of 9. Whole Number Field. TAX Identification Entry Field with 9 Character long Number Should allow maximum of 9 and minimum of 9. Whole Number Field. Mode of List various modes of Communication Communication like Fax, Phone, Email, USPS Browser Back Disable the browser back button and Button hide the back button Browser Forward Disable the browser forward button Button and hide the forward button Refresh Button Disable the browser refresh button and hide the refresh button Address Bars Disable the address bar so that user cannot type the URL to navigate to the respective screen Link Bar Disable the link bar Standard Button Disable the browser standard button Window Close Catch windows close event with Java script and show the message. Window Minimize Allow to minimize the window

3.1.5. Interface Flow

N/A

3.1.6. Help Menu Element Name Purpose Valid Values

4. Business Rule Mapping

Not Applicable Activity Rules 1.

5. Data Structures

Not Applicable Data Element Name Data Element Type

5.1. Back End Validations

Not Applicable Field Element Name Back End Validation

6. Non-Functional Requirements

Not Applicable Non Functional Requirement Details

7. Access Control List

Not Applicable User ID Job Description Functionality Access Level 

1. An automated benefits administration system of the type used to administer benefits of members of employed personnel subject to business rules for such benefits, the benefits administration comprising: A. an automated business rules application automatically applying at least all legally-required rules to enrollment, eligibility, and group maintenance data input and making business rule decisions based on said data input; and B. an automatic action application issuing notice to one or more users for all business rule discrepancies based on said data input.
 2. The automated benefits administration system of claim 1 also comprising: (C) a business rules database having business rules accessible to the automated business rules application, whereby the automated business rules application may apply business rules from said business rules database.
 3. The automated benefits administration system of claim 1 also comprising: (C) a business rule over-ride through which users may over-ride a business rule applied by the automated business rules application based on user authority level.
 4. The automated benefits administration system of claim 2 also comprising: (D) a business rule over-ride too through which users may over-ride a plurality of business rules applied by the automated business rules application based on user authority level.
 5. A benefits administration method of operating an automated benefits administration computing system of the type for administering benefits of employed personnel subject to business rules for said benefits, the benefits administration method comprising: A. automatically applying at least all legally-required rules to enrollment, eligibility, and group maintenance data input into the automated benefits administration computing system and making business rule decisions based on said data input; and B. automatically issuing notices to one or more users for all business rule discrepancies based on said data input.
 6. The benefits administration method of claim 5 further comprising, during said automatic application step (A), automatically accessing a business rules database having business rules including said legally-required rules.
 7. The automated benefits administration system of claim 5 further comprising, in step (A), providing a business rule over-ride as selected by a user have a predetermined authority level.
 8. The automated benefits administration system of claim 6 further comprising, in step (A), providing a business rule over-ride as selected by a user have a predetermined authority level.
 9. An automated benefits administration system of the type used to administer benefits of members of employed personnel subject to business rules for such benefits, the benefits administration comprising: A. an automated business rules application automatically applying at least all legally-required rules and desired additional rules to enrollment, eligibility, and group maintenance data input and making business rule decisions based on said data input; B. an automatic action application issuing notice to one or more users for all business rule discrepancies based on said data input, the automatic action application including the ability to issue notice to third parties by disparate communications vehicles.
 10. The automated benefits administration system of claim 9 also comprising: (C) a business rules database having business rules accessible to the automated business rules application and wherein said business rules include a plurality of business rules among said legally-required and additional rules, whereby the automated business rules application may apply business rules from said business rules database.
 11. The automated benefits administration system of claim 9 also comprising: (C) a business rule over-ride through which users may over-ride a plurality of business rules applied by the automated business rules application based on user authority level.
 12. The automated benefits administration system of claim 10 also comprising: (D) a business rule over-ride too through which users may over-ride a business rule applied by the automated business rules application based on user authority level.
 13. A benefits administration method of operating an automated benefits administration computing system of the type for administering benefits of employed personnel subject to business rules for said benefits, the benefits administration method comprising: A. automatically applying at least all legally-required rules and additional business rules to enrollment, eligibility, and group maintenance data input into the automated benefits administration computing system and making business rule decisions based on said data input; B. automatically issuing notices to one or more users for all business rule discrepancies based on said data input, including automatic issuance of one or more attention notice to a remote managing party upon entry of certain unsatisfactory data during local data input; and C. providing at least remote enrollment access over the Internet to said automated benefits administration computing system. 